Unformatted Document Excerpt
Coursehero >>
Florida >>
UCF >>
MAC 2313
Course Hero has millions of student submitted documents similar to the one
below including study guides, practice problems, reference materials, practice exams, textbook help and tutor support.
Course Hero has millions of student submitted documents similar to the one below including study guides, practice problems, reference materials, practice exams, textbook help and tutor support.
Fields
CHAPTER 23
Electric OUTLINE
23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 Properties of Electric Charges Charging Objects by Induction Coulomb's Law The Electric Field Electric Field of a Continuous Charge Distribution Electric Field Lines Motion of Charged Particles in a Uniform Electric Field
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q23.1 A neutral atom is one that has no net charge. This means that it has the same number of electrons orbiting the nucleus as it has protons in the nucleus. A negatively charged atom has one or more excess electrons. When the comb is nearby, molecules in the paper are polarized, similar to the molecules in the wall in Figure 23.5a, and the paper is attracted. During contact, charge from the comb is transferred to the paper by conduction. Then the paper has the same charge as the comb, and is repelled. The clothes dryer rubs dissimilar materials together as it tumbles the clothes. Electrons are transferred from one kind of molecule to another. The charges on pieces of cloth, or on nearby objects charged by induction, can produce strong electric fields that promote the ionization process in the surrounding air that is necessary for a spark to occur. Then you hear or see the sparks.
Q23.2
23.6 23.7
Q23.3
Q23.4
To avoid making a spark. Rubbersoled shoes acquire a charge by friction with the floor and could discharge with a spark, possibly causing an explosion of any flammable material in the oxygenenriched atmosphere. Electrons are less massive and more mobile than protons. Also, they are more easily detached from atoms than protons. The electric field due to the charged rod induces charges on near and far sides of the sphere. The attractive Coulomb force of the rod on the dissimilar charge on the close side of the sphere is larger than the repulsive Coulomb force of the rod on the like charge on the far side of the sphere. The result is a net attraction of the sphere to the rod. When the sphere touches the rod, charge is conducted between the rod and the sphere, leaving both the rod and the sphere likecharged. This results in a repulsive Coulomb force. All of the constituents of air are nonpolar except for water. The polar water molecules in the air quite readily "steal" charge from a charged object, as any physics teacher trying to perform electrostatics demonstrations in the summer well knows. As a resultit is difficult to accumulate large amounts of excess charge on an object in a humid climate. During a North American winter, the cold, dry air allows accumulation of significant excess charge, giving the potential (pun intended) for a shocking (pun also intended) introduction to static electricity sparks. 1
Q23.5 Q23.6
Q23.7
2
Electric Fields
Q23.8
Similarities: A force of gravity is proportional to the product of the intrinsic properties (masses) of two particles, and inversely proportional to the square of the separation distance. An electrical force exhibits the same proportionalities, with charge as the intrinsic property. Differences: The electrical force can either attract or repel, while the gravitational force as described by Newton's law can only attract. The electrical force between elementary particles is vastly stronger than the gravitational force. No. The balloon induces polarization of the molecules in the wall, so that a layer of positive charge exists near the balloon. This is just like the situation in Figure 23.5a, except that the signs of the charges are reversed. The attraction between these charges and the negative charges on the balloon is stronger than the repulsion between the negative charges on the balloon and the negative charges in the polarized molecules (because they are farther from the balloon), so that there is a net attractive force toward the wall. Ionization processes in the air surrounding the balloon provide ions to which excess electrons in the balloon can transfer, reducing the charge on the balloon and eventually causing the attractive force to be insufficient to support the weight of the balloon. The electric field due to the charged rod induces a charge in the aluminum foil. If the rod is brought towards the aluminum from above, the top of the aluminum will have a negative charge induced on it, while the parts draping over the pencil can have a positive charge induced on them. These positive induced charges on the two parts give rise to a repulsive Coulomb force. If the pencil is a good insulator, the net charge on the aluminum can be zero. So the electric field created by the test charge does not distort the electric field you are trying to measure, by moving the charges that create it. With a very high budget, you could send first a proton and then an electron into an evacuated region in which the field exists. If the field is gravitational, both particles will experience a force in the same direction, while they will experience forces in opposite directions if the field is electric. On a more practical scale, stick identical pith balls on each end of a toothpick. Charge one pith ball + and the other , creating a largescale dipole. Carefully suspend this dipole about its center of mass so that it can rotate freely. When suspended in the field in question, the dipole will rotate to align itself with an electric field, while it will not for a gravitational field. If the test device does not rotate, be sure to insert it into the field in more than one orientation in case it was aligned with the electric field when you inserted it on the first trial. The student standing on the insulating platform is held at the same electrical potential as the generator sphere. Charge will only flow when there is a difference in potential. The student who unwisely touches the charged sphere is near zero electrical potential when compared to the charged sphere. When the student comes in contact with the sphere, charge will flow from the sphere to him or her until they are at the same electrical potential. An electric field once established by a positive or negative charge extends in all directions from the charge. Thus, it can exist in empty space if that is what surrounds the charge. There is no material at point A in Figure 23.23(a), so there is no charge, nor is there a force. There would be a force if a charge were present at point A, however. A field does exist at point A. If a charge distribution is small compared to the distance of a field point from it, the charge distribution can be modeled as a single particle with charge equal to the net charge of the distribution. Further, if a charge distribution is spherically symmetric, it will create a field at exterior points just as if all of its charge were a point charge at its center.
Q23.9
Q23.10
Q23.11 Q23.12
Q23.13
Q23.14
Q23.15
Chapter 23
3
Q23.16
The direction of the electric field is the direction in which a positive test charge would feel a force when placed in the field. A charge will not experience two electrical forces at the same time, but the vector sum of the two. If electric field lines crossed, then a test charge placed at the point at which they cross would feel a force in two directions. Furthermore, the path that the test charge would follow if released at the point where the field lines cross would be indeterminate. Both figures are drawn correctly. E1 and E 2 are the electric fields separately created by the point charges q1 and q 2 in Figure 23.14 or q and q in Figure 23.15, respectively. The net electric field is the vector sum of E1 and E 2 , shown as E. Figure 23.21 shows only one electric field line at each point away from the charge. At the point location of an object modeled as a point charge, the direction of the field is undefined, and so is its magnitude. The electric forces on the particles have the same magnitude, but are in opposite directions. The electron will have a much larger acceleration (by a factor of about 2 000) than the proton, due to its much smaller mass. The electric field around a point charge approaches infinity as r approaches zero. Vertically downward. Four times as many electric field lines start at the surface of the larger charge as end at the smaller charge. The extra lines extend away from the pair of charges. They may never end, or they may terminate on more distant negative charges. Figure 23.24 shows the situation for charges +2q and q. At a point exactly midway between the two changes. Linear charge density, , is charge per unit length. It is used when trying to determine the electric field created by a charged rod. Surface charge density, , is charge per unit area. It is used when determining the electric field above a charged sheet or disk. Volume charge density, , is charge per unit volume. It is used when determining the electric field due to a uniformly charged sphere made of insulating material. Yes, the path would still be parabolic. The electrical force on the electron is in the downward direction. This is similar to throwing a ball from the roof of a building horizontally or at some angle with the vertical. In both cases, the acceleration due to gravity is downward, giving a parabolic trajectory. No. Life would be no different if electrons were + charged and protons were charged. Opposite charges would still attract, and like charges would repel. The naming of + and charge is merely a convention. If the antenna were not grounded, electric charges in the atmosphere during a storm could place the antenna at a high positive or negative potential. The antenna would then place the television set inside the house at the high voltage, to make it a shock hazard. The wire to the ground keeps the antenna, the television set, and even the air around the antenna at close to zero potential. People are all attracted to the Earth. If the force were electrostatic, people would all carry charge with the same sign and would repel each other. This repulsion is not observed. When we changed the charge on a person, as in the chapteropener photograph, the person's weight would change greatly in magnitude or direction. We could levitate an airplane simply by draining away its electric charge. The failure of such experiments gives evidence that the attraction to the Earth is not due to electrical forces.
Q23.17
Q23.18
Q23.19 Q23.20 Q23.21
Q23.22 Q23.23
Q23.24
Q23.25
Q23.26
Q23.27
4
Electric Fields
Q23.28
In special orientations the force between two dipoles can be zero or a force of repulsion. In general each dipole will exert a torque on the other, tending to align its axis with the field created by the first dipole. After this alignment, each dipole exerts a force of attraction on the other.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 23.1 *P23.1 (a) Properties of Electric Charges The mass of an average neutral hydrogen atom is 1.007 9u. Losing one electron reduces its mass by a negligible amount, to
1.007 9 1.660 10 27 kg  9.11 10 31 kg = 1.67 10 27 kg .
Its charge, due to loss of one electron, is
e
j
0  1 1.60 10 19 C = +1.60 10 19 C .
(b) By similar logic, charge = +1.60 10 19 C mass = 22.99 1.66 10 27 kg  9.11 10 31 kg = 3.82 10 26 kg (c) charge of Cl  = 1.60 10 19 C mass = 35.453 1.66 10 27 kg + 9.11 10 31 kg = 5.89 10 26 kg (d) charge of Ca ++ = 2 1.60 10 19 C = +3.20 10 19 C mass = 40.078 1.66 10 27 kg  2 9.11 10 31 kg = 6.65 10 26 kg (e) charge of N 3  = 3 1.60 10 19 C = 4.80 10 19 C mass = 14.007 1.66 10 27 (f)
e
j
e
j
e e
j
e
j e
j
j
e e e
e e
j kg j + 3e9.11 10 j e j e j
31
kg = 2.33 10 26 kg
j
charge of N 4 + = 4 1.60 10 19 C = +6.40 10 19 C mass = 14.007 1.66 10 27 kg  4 9.11 10 31 kg = 2.32 10 26 kg
j j
(g)
We think of a nitrogen nucleus as a seventimes ionized nitrogen atom. charge = 7 1.60 10 19 C = 1.12 10 18 C mass = 14.007 1.66 10
27
e
j
kg  7 9.11 10 31 kg = 2.32 10 26 kg
(h)
charge = 1.60 10 19 C mass = 2 1.007 9 + 15.999 1.66 10 27 kg + 9.11 10 31 kg = 2.99 10 26 kg
b
g
Chapter 23
5
P23.2
(a)
N=
F 10.0 grams I FG 6.02 10 GH 107.87 grams mol JK H
23
atoms mol
IJ FG 47 electrons IJ = K H atom K
2.62 10 24
(b)
# electrons added = or
Q 1.00 10 3 C = = 6.25 10 15 e 1.60 10 19 C electron
2.38 electrons for every 10 9 already present .
Section 23.2 Section 23.3 P23.3
Charging Objects by Induction Coulomb's Law
If each person has a mass of 70 kg and is (almost) composed of water, then each person contains N
F 70 000 grams I FG 6.02 10 GH 18 grams mol JK H e
23
molecules mol
IJ FG 10 protons IJ 2.3 10 K H molecule K
28
protons .
With an excess of 1% electrons over protons, each person has a charge q = 0.01 1.6 10 19 C 2.3 10 28 = 3.7 10 7 C . q1 q 2 r2
7 2 9
So
F = ke
je j e3.7 10 j = e9 10 j
0.6 2
N = 4 10 25 N ~ 10 26 N .
This force is almost enough to lift a weight equal to that of the Earth: Mg = 6 10 24 kg 9.8 m s 2 = 6 10 25 N ~ 10 26 N . *P23.4 The force on one proton is F = k e q1 q 2 r2 C m away from the other proton. Its magnitude is = 57.5 N .
e
j
e8.99 10
P23.5 (a)
9
F 1.6 10 N m C jG H 2 10
2
19
15
I JK
2
Fe =
k e q1 q 2 r2
e8.99 10 =
9
N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C
je
j
2
e
3.80 10
10
m
j
2
= 1.59 10 9 N
brepulsiong
(b)
Fg =
Gm1 m 2 r2
e6.67 10 =
m1 m 2 r2
11
N m 2 C 2 1.67 10 27 kg
je
j
2
e3.80 10
10
m
j
2
= 1.29 10 45 N
The electric force is larger by 1.24 10 36 times . (c) If k e q = m q1 q 2 r
2
=G
with q1 = q 2 = q and m1 = m 2 = m , then
6.67 10 11 N m 2 kg 2 G = = 8.61 10 11 C kg . ke 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2
6
Electric Fields
P23.6
We find the equalmagnitude charges on both spheres: F = ke q1 q 2 r2 = ke q2 r2 so q=r F = 1.00 m ke
a
f
1.00 10 4 N = 1.05 10 3 C . 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2
The number of electron transferred is then N xfer = 1.05 10 3 C 1.60 10 19 C e  = 6.59 10 15 electrons .
The whole number of electrons in each sphere is N tot =
F 10.0 g I e6.02 10 GH 107.87 g mol JK F GH I JK
23
atoms mol 47 e  atom = 2.62 10 24 e  .
je
j
The fraction transferred is then f= N xfer 6.59 10 15 = = 2.51 10 9 = 2.51 charges in every billion. 24 N tot 2.62 10 q1 q 2 r
2
P23.7
F1 = k e
e8.99 10 =
=
9
N m 2 C 2 7.00 10 6 C 2.00 10 6 C
2
F2 = k e
q1 q 2 r2
e8.99 10
9
N m2
a0.500 mf C je7.00 10 C je 4.00 10 C j = 1.01 N a0.500 mf
2 6 6 2
je
je
j = 0.503 N
Fx = 0.503 cos 60.0+1.01 cos 60.0 = 0.755 N Fy = 0.503 sin 60.01.01 sin 60.0 = 0.436 N F = 0.755 N i  0.436 N j = 0.872 N at an angle of 330
a
f a
f
FIG. P23.7 q1 q 2 r2
P23.8
F = ke
e8.99 10 =
9
N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C 2 6.37 10 6 m
je
j e6.02 10 j
2
23 2
e
j
2
= 514 kN
P23.9
(a)
The force is one of attraction . The distance r in Coulomb's law is the distance between centers. The magnitude of the force is F= k e q1 q 2 r2 = 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 12.0 10 C je18.0 10 C j = je a0.300 mf
9 9 2
e
2.16 10 5 N .
(b)
The net charge of 6.00 10 9 C will be equally split between the two spheres, or 3.00 10 9 C on each. The force is one of repulsion , and its magnitude is F= k e q1 q 2 r
2
= 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2
e
3.00 10 C je3.00 10 C j = je a0.300 mf
9 9 2
8.99 10 7 N .
Chapter 23
7
P23.10
Let the third bead have charge Q and be located distance will experience a net force given by F= k e 3q Q x
2
x from the left end of the rod. This bead
b g
i+
b g e i j . ad  x f
ke q Q
2
The net force will be zero if
3 1 = 2 x dx
a
f
2
, or d  x =
x 3
.
This gives an equilibrium position of the third bead of x = 0.634d . The equilibrium is stable if the third bead has positive charge . kee2 r2
P23.11
(a)
F=
= 8.99 10 N m
e
9
2
e1.60 10 C j e0.529 10
2
19 10
C
j
2
m
j
2
= 8.22 10 8 N
(b)
We have F =
mv 2 from which r Fr = m 8.22 10 8 N 0.529 10 10 m 9.11 10
31
v=
e
kg k e qQ d 2 + 2 x 2
j=
2.19 10 6 m s .
P23.12
The top charge exerts a force on the negative charge left, at an angle of tan 1
FG d IJ to the xaxis. The two positive charges together exert force H 2x K F 2 k qQ I FG a xfi IJ 2 k qQ d GG JJ G = ma or for x << , a x. 2 md 8 e + x j K GH e + x j JJK H
e d2 4 2 d2 4 2 12 e 3
ch
which is directed upward and to the
(a)
The acceleration is equal to a negative constant times the excursion from equilibrium, as in 16 k e qQ a =  2 x , so we have Simple Harmonic Motion with 2 = . md 3 T= 2 =
2
md 3 , where m is the mass of the object with charge Q . k e qQ k e qQ md 3
(b)
v max = A = 4a
8
Electric Fields
Section 23.4 P23.13
The Electric Field
For equilibrium, or Thus,
Fe = Fg
qE =  mg  j . E= mg j. q
e j
(a)
E=
9.11 10 31 kg 9.80 m s 2 mg j= j =  5.58 10 11 N C j 19 q 1.60 10 C
e
e
je
j
j
e
j
(b)
1.67 10 27 kg 9.80 m s 2 mg E= j= j= q 1.60 10 19 C
e
e
je
j
j
e1.02 10
7
NC j
j
P23.14
Fy = 0 : QEj + mge jj = 0
m =
24.0 10 6 C 610 N C QE = = 1.49 grams g 9.80 m s 2
e
jb
g
P23.15
The point is designated in the sketch. The magnitudes of the electric fields, E1 , (due to the 2.50 10 6 C charge) and E 2 (due to the 6.00 10 6 C charge) are E1 = ke q r
2
e8.99 10 =
=
9
N m 2 C 2 2.50 10 6 C d
2
je
j
j
(1)
FIG. P23.15
E2 =
keq r
2
e8.99 10
9
N m 2 C 2 6.00 10 6 C
2
je ad + 1.00 mf
(2)
Equate the right sides of (1) and (2) to get or which yields or
ad + 1.00 mf
d = 1.82 m
2
= 2.40d 2
d + 1.00 m = 1.55d
d = 0.392 m .
The negative value for d is unsatisfactory because that locates a point between the charges where both fields are in the same direction. Thus,
d = 1.82 m to the left of the  2.50 C charge .
Chapter 23
9
P23.16
If we treat the concentrations as point charges, E+ = ke E = ke q r2 q r2 = 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 = 8.99 10 9 N m 2
e
e
C j b1a40.0 mgf e jj = 3.60 10 000 a40.0 Cf e jj = 3.60 10 C j b1 000 mg
2 2 2
5
N C  j downward N C  j downward
e ja
f f
q x
5
e ja
E = E + + E  = 7.20 10 5 N C downward *P23.17 The first charge creates at the origin field to the right. a2 Suppose the total field at the origin is to the right. Then q must be negative: k eQ a
2
k eQ
+Q x = 0
FIG. P23.17
i+
e ij = 2 k Q i a a3 a f
2 e 2
keq
q = 9Q .
In the alternative, the total field at the origin is to the left: k eQ a P23.18 (a)
2
i+
ke q 9a
2
e ij = 2 k Q e ij a
e 2
q = +27Q .
9 6
E1 = E2
e8.99 10 je7.00 10 j = 2.52 10 r a0.500f k q e8.99 10 je 4.00 10 j = = = 1.44 10 r a0.500f
ke q
2
=
2
5
NC
9
6
e 2
2
5
NC FIG. P23.18
Ex = E2  E1 cos 60 = 1. 44 10 5  2.52 10 5 cos 60.0 = 18.0 10 3 N C Ey =  E1 sin 60.0 = 2.52 10 sin 60.0 = 218 10 N C E = 18.0 i  218 j 10 3 N C = 18.0 i  218 j kN C F = qE = 2.00 10 6 C 18.0 i  218 j 10 3 N C = 36.0 i  436 j 10 3 N = 8.99 10 je3.00 10 j E = e jj = e a0.100f e jj = e2.70 10 r 8.99 10 je6.00 10 j k q E = e ij = e a0.300f e ij = e5.99 10 r E = E + E = e5.99 10 N C ji  e 2.70 10 N C j j
1 5 3
(b)
e
je
j
e
j
e36.0i  436 jj mN
P23.19
(a)
k e q1
2 1
9
9
2
3
NC j NCi FIG. P23.19
j
2
e
2
9
9
2 2
2
2
j
2
1
2
3
(b)
F = qE = 5.00 10 9 C 599 i  2 700 j N C F = 3.00 10 6 i  13.5 10 6 j N =
e
je
e
j
j e3.00i  13.5 jj N
10
Electric Fields
P23.20
(a)
E=
keq r2
=
Ex = 0
e8.99 10 je2.00 10 j = 14 400 N C a1.12f and E = 2b14 400 g sin 26.6 = 1.29 10
9 6 2 y
4
NC FIG. P23.20
so (b)
E = 1.29 10 4 j N C .
F = qE = 3.00 10 6 1. 29 10 4 j = 3.86 10 2 j N k e q1 r12 ke q2 r22 k e q3 r32 ke 2q a2 keq a2
e
je
j
P23.21
(a)
E=
r1 + ke q a
2
r2 +
r3 =
b g i + k b3 qg ei cos 45.0+ j sin 45.0j + k b4qg j
e e
2a2
a2
E = 3.06
i + 5.06 ke q 2 a2
keq a
2
j = 5.91
at 58.8
(b) P23.22
F = qE = 5.91
at 58.8
The electric field at any point x is E= ke q
2
a f ax  af cx  a afh ex  a j
 ke q
2
=
k e q 4ax
2
2 2
. 4a k e q x3 k eQ n
When x is much, much greater than a, we find E
b g
.
P23.23
(a)
One of the charges creates at P a field E = the xaxis as shown.
R2 + x2
at an angle to
When all the charges produce field, for n > 1 , the components perpendicular to the xaxis add to zero. The total field is nk e Q n i R +x
2 2
b g cos =
e
k eQx i R + x2
2
j
3 2
.
FIG. P23.23
(b)
A circle of charge corresponds to letting n grow beyond all bounds, but the result does not depend on n. Smearing the charge around the circle does not change its amount or its distance from the field point, so it does not change the field . keq r2 keq a2
P23.24
E=
r=
e ij + a2kaq e ij + a3kaq e ij + ... =  ka qi FGH1 + 21 + 31 + ...IJK = f f
e 2 e 2 e 2 2 2

2ke q i 6a2
Chapter 23
11
Section 23.5 P23.25
Electric Field of a Continuous Charge Distribution
8.99 10 9 22.0 10 6 ke Q ke k eQ = = = E= 0.290 0.140 + 0.290 d +d d +d d +d
e b g a f a f a f a
k e dq x2
x0
fa
je
f
j
FIG. P23.25
E = 1.59 10 6 N C , directed toward the rod.
P23.26
E=
z
, where dq = 0 dx dx x
2
E = ke 0
z
= ke 0 
FG 1 IJ H xK
2
=
x0 9
ke 0 x0
6
The direction is  i or left for 0 > 0
P23.27
E=
ex
k e xQ
2
+ a2
j
3 2
=
e8.99 10 je75.0 10 jx = 6.74 10 x ex + 0.100 j ex + 0.010 0j
5 2 32 2
32
(a) (b) (c) (d)
At x = 0.010 0 m , At x = 0.050 0 m , At x = 0.300 m , At x = 1.00 m ,
E = 6.64 10 6 i N C = 6.64i MN C E = 2.41 10 7 i N C = 24.1i MN C E = 6.40 10 6 i N C = 6. 40 i MN C E = 6.64 10 5 i N C = 0.664i MN C
P23.28
E = dE =
z
x0
LM k x dxe ij OP z MMN x PPQ = k x i z x
e 0 0 3 e 0 0 x0
3
dx =  k e 0 x 0 i 
F GH
1 2x
2
x0
I= JK
ke 0 i 2 x0
e j
P23.29
E=
ex
k e Qx
2
+ a2
j
3 2
For a maximum,
dE = Qk e dx a
LM MM ex N
.
1
2
+ a2
j
3 2

OP P=0 x +a j P e Q
3x 2
2 2 52
x 2 + a 2  3 x 2 = 0 or x =
2
Substituting into the expression for E gives E=
2
e aj
3 2
k eQa
2 32
=
k eQ 3
3 2
a
2
=
2 k eQ 3 3a
2
=
Q 6 3 0 a 2
.
12
Electric Fields
P23.30
E = 2 k e 1  E = 2 8.99 10
F GH
x x +R
9 2 2
I JK
3
e
je7.90 10
F jGG 1  H
x2
I JJ = 4.46 10 FG 1  H + a0.350f K
x
8 2
x2
I J + 0.123 K
x
(a) (b) (c) (d)
At x = 0.050 0 m , At x = 0.100 m , At x = 0.500 m , At x = 2.00 m ,
E = 3.83 10 8 N C = 383 MN C E = 3.24 10 8 N C = 324 MN C E = 8.07 10 7 N C = 80.7 MN C E = 6.68 10 8 N C = 6.68 MN C
P23.31
(a)
From Example 23.9: E = 2 k e 1 
F GH
x x2 + R2
I JK g jb g
b g
=
E = 1.04 10 8 N C 0.900 = 9.36 10 7 N C = 93.6 MN C appx: E = 2 k e = 104 MN C about 11% high (b) E = 1.04 10 8 N C 1 
e e
Q = 1.84 10 3 C m 2 R 2
ja
f
b
8 N C 0.004 96 = 0.516 MN C 30.0 + 3.00 Q 5.20 10 6 appx: E = k e 2 = 8.99 10 9 = 0.519 MN C about 0.6% high 2 r 0.30 2 2
F jGH
30.0 cm
I = 1.04 10 J e cm K
x
e
j a f
P23.32
The electric field at a distance x is
Ex = 2 k e 1 
This is equivalent to R2 x2
Ex
LM NM L = 2 k M1  MN
e
x2 + R2 1
OP QP
1 + R2 x2
OP PQ
2 2
For large x, so
<< 1 and
1+ Ex
Q Substitute = , R2 But for x >> R , 1 x2 + R2 2 1 x2 , so
Ex
I F 1 JJ = 2 k e1 + R e2 x j  1j = 2 k G 1  GH 1 + R e2 x j K 1 + R e2 x j k Qe1 x j F RI = = k QG x + H 2 JK 1 + R e2x j
e 2 2 e 2 2 e 2 2 2 e 2 2
R2 R2 1+ 2 x2 2x
Ex
k eQ x2
for a disk at large distances
Chapter 23
13
P23.33
Due to symmetry where so that, where Thus, Solving,
Ey = dEy = 0 , and Ex = dE sin = k e dq = ds = rd , Ex = ke k sin d = e  cos r 0 r
z
z
z
dq sin r2
z
a
f
0
=
2k e r FIG. P23.33
q L and r = . L 2 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 7.50 10 6 C 2 k q Ex = e2 = . 2 L 0.140 m
=
e
a
je f
j
Ex = 2.16 10 N C .
7
Since the rod has a negative charge, E = 2.16 10 7 i N C = 21.6 i MN C . P23.34 (a) We define x = 0 at the point where we are to find the field. One ring, with thickness dx, has Qdx and produces, at the chosen point, a field charge h kex Qdx dE = i. 3 2 h x2 + R2
e
j
e
j
The total field is E=
e k Qi ex + R j E= 2h b 1 2g
all charge d 2 e
z z
dE =
d+h
k eQxdx
h x2 + R
2 3 2
j
i=
k eQi d + h 2 x + R2 2h x=d
ze
j
3 2
2 xdx
d+h 2 1 2
k Qi = e h
x=d
LM MM d Ne
2
OP  P +R j ead + hf + R j PQ
1 1
2 12 2 2 12
(b)
Think of the cylinder as a stack of disks, each with thickness dx, charge perarea = Qdx . One disk produces a field R2h
Qdx , and chargeh
dE =
2 k eQdx
R2h
So,
I JJ i E= z dE = z +R j K OP = 2k Qi LMx 2 k Qi L 1 E= M z dx  2 z ex + R j 2xdxP R h M R h M MN N Q 2 k Qi L E= MNd + h  d  ead + hf + R j + ed + R j OPQ R h 2 k Qi L O E= R h M Nh + ed + R j  ead + hf + R j PQ
d+h x =d e
F GG 1  H ex
2
all charge
I Ji . +R j J K F 2 k Qdx G 1 R h G H ex
x
2 12 2 d+h x=d 2
x
2
2 12
e 2
d+h d
2 1 2
e 2
2 2 1 x +R d+h  d 2 12
e
j
1 2 d+h
d
OP PP Q
e 2
2
2
12
2
2 12
e 2
2
2 12
2
2
12
14
Electric Fields
P23.35
(a)
The electric field at point P due to each element of length dx, is k dq dE = 2 e 2 and is directed along the line joining the element to x +y point P. By symmetry, Ex = dEx = 0
z
and since where
2
dq = dx , cos = = y x + y2
2
E = Ey = dEy = dE cos Therefore, E = 2 k e y
z
z
. FIG. P23.35
ze
0
dx x +y
2 2 32
j
2 k e sin 0 . y and Ey = 2k e . y
(b) P23.36 (a)
For a bar of infinite length,
0 = 90
The whole surface area of the cylinder is A = 2 r 2 + 2 rL = 2 r r + L . Q = A = 15.0 10 9 C m 2 2 0.025 0 m 0.025 0 m + 0.060 0 m = 2.00 10 10 C
e e
j b
g
a f
(b)
For the curved lateral surface only, A = 2 rL .
Q = A = 15.0 10 9 C m 2 2 0.025 0 m 0.060 0 m = 1.41 10 10 C (c) P23.37 (a) Q = V = r 2 L = 500 10 9 C m 3 0.025 0 m
j b
ga
f
e
j b je
g b0.060 0 mg =
2
5.89 10 11 C
Every object has the same volume, V = 8 0.030 0 m
For each, Q = V = 400 10 9 C m 3 2.16 10 4 m3 = 8.64 10 11 C (b) We must count the 9.00 cm 2 squares painted with charge: (i)
e
a
f
3
= 2.16 10 4 m3 .
j
6 4 = 24 squares
Q = A = 15.0 10 9 C m 2 24.0 9.00 10 4 m 2 = 3.24 10 10 C
e e e e
j e j e j e
j
(ii)
34 squares exposed
Q = A = 15.0 10 9 C m 2 34.0 9.00 10 4 m 2 = 4.59 10 10 C (iii) 34 squares
j j
Q = A = 15.0 10 9 C m 2 34.0 9.00 10 4 m 2 = 4.59 10 10 C (iv) 32 squares
Q = A = 15.0 10 9 C m 2 32.0 9.00 10 4 m 2 = 4.32 10 10 C (c) (i) total edge length:
j e
j
= 24 0.030 0 m
Q = = 80.0 10 12 (ii) Q=
12
e = e80.0 10
b g C mj24 b0.030 0 mg = C mj44 b0.030 0 mg =
5.76 10 11 C 1.06 10 10 C
continued on next page
Chapter 23
15
(iii) (iv)
Q = = 80.0 10 12 C m 64 0.030 0 m = 1.54 10 10 C Q = = 80.0 10 12 C m 40 0.030 0 m = 0.960 10 10 C
e e
j b
g
j b
g
Section 23.6 P23.38
Electric Field Lines P23.39
FIG. P23.38 q1 6 1 = =  3 q 2 18
FIG. P23.39
P23.40
(a)
(b) P23.41 (a)
q1 is negative, q 2 is positive
The electric field has the general appearance shown. It is zero at the center , where (by symmetry) one can see that the three charges individually produce fields that cancel out. In addition to the center of the triangle, the electric field lines in the second figure to the right indicate three other points near the middle of each leg of the triangle where E = 0 , but they are more difficult to find mathematically.
(b)
You may need to review vector addition in Chapter Three. The electric field at point P can be found by adding the electric field vectors due to each of the two lower point charges: E = E 1 + E 2 . The electric field from a point charge is E = k e As shown in the solution figure at right, E1 = k e E2 = ke q a2 q a2 to the right and upward at 60 to the left and upward at 60 q a
2
q r2
r.
FIG. P23.41
e
E = E1 + E 2 = k e = 1.73 k e q a2 j
ecos 60 i + sin 60 jj + e cos 60 i + sin 60 jj = k
q a2
2 sin 60 j
e
j
16
Electric Fields
Section 23.7 P23.42
Motion of Charged Particles in a Uniform Electric Field a= qE m qEt m
F = qE = ma
v f = vi + at electron:
vf = ve
9.11 10 in a direction opposite to the field
19
e1.602 10 ja520fe48.0 10 j = =
19 9 31
4.39 10 6 m s
proton:
1.67 10 27 in the same direction as the field a=
vp =
e1.602 10 ja520fe48.0 10 j =
9
2.39 10 3 m s
P23.43
(a)
qE 1.602 10 19 640 = = 6.14 10 10 m s 2 m 1.67 10 27 1.20 10 6 = 6.14 10 10 t
a f
(b) (c)
v f = vi + at
x f  xi = K= 1 vi + v f t 2
e
j
t = 1.95 10 5 s
d
i
xf =
1 1.20 10 6 1.95 10 5 = 11.7 m 2
e
je
j
(d)
1 1 mv 2 = 1.67 10 27 kg 1.20 10 6 m s 2 2
e
je
j
2
= 1.20 10 15 J
P23.44
(a)
19 6.00 10 5 qE 1.602 10 a= = = 5.76 10 13 m s so a = 5.76 10 13 i m s 2 m 1.67 10 27
e
e
je
j
j
(b)
v f = vi + 2 a x f  xi
d
i jb g
v i = 2.84 10 6 i m s
0 = vi2 + 2 5.76 10 13 0.070 0 (c) v f = vi + at 0 = 2.84 10 6 + 5.76 10 13 t P23.45
e
e
j
t = 4.93 10 8 s
The required electric field will be in the direction of motion . Work done = K so, which becomes and  Fd =  eEd = K E= K . ed 1 mvi2 (since the final velocity = 0 ) 2
Chapter 23
17
P23.46
The acceleration is given by v 2 = vi2 + 2 a x f  x i or f Solving Now Therefore
d
i
v 2 = 0 + 2a h . f a= v2 f 2h .  mg j + qE =  + mg j . mv 2 j f 2h .
a f
F = ma :
qE = 
F GH
mv 2 f 2h
I JK
(a)
Gravity alone would give the bead downward impact velocity 2 9.80 m s 2 5.00 m = 9.90 m s . To change this to 21.0 m/s down, a downward electric field must exert a downward electric force.
2 1.00 10 3 kg N s 2 m vf g = q= E 2h 1.00 10 4 N C kg m
e
ja
f
(b)
F GH
I JK
F GH
I LM b21.0 m sg JK M 2a5.00 mf N
2
 9.80 m s 2 = 3.43 C
OP PQ
P23.47
(a)
t=
0.050 0 x = = 1.11 10 7 s = 111 ns v x 4.50 10 5
19 9.60 10 3 qE 1.602 10 = = 9.21 10 11 m s 2 27 m 1.67 10
(b)
ay =
e
e
je
j
j
y f  yi = v yi t + (c) *P23.48
1 ayt 2 : 2
yf =
1 9.21 10 11 1.11 10 7 2
e
je
j
2
= 5.68 10 3 m = 5.68 mm
v x = 4.50 10 5 m s
v yf = v yi + a y t = 9.21 10 11 1.11 10 7 = 1.02 10 5 m s
e
je
j
The particle feels a constant force: F = qE = 1 10 6 C 2 000 N C  j = 2 10 3 N  j
3 2 13 2
ge j e j F = e 2 10 kg m s je jj = 1 10 m s  j . a= and moves with acceleration: e je j m 2 10 kg Its xcomponent of velocity is constant at e1.00 10 m sj cos 37 = 7.99 10 m s . Thus it moves in a e
16 5 4 2 2 v yf = v yi + 2 a y y f  yi :
jb
parabola opening downward. The maximum height it attains above the bottom plate is described by
d
i
0 = 6.02 10 4 m s
e
j  e2 10
2
13
m s2 y f  0
jd
i
y f = 1.81 10 4 m .
continued on next page
18
Electric Fields
Since this is less than 10 mm, the particle does not strike the top plate, but moves in a symmetric parabola and strikes the bottom plate after a time given by y f = yi + v yi t + since t > 0 , The particle's range is In sum, The particle strikes the negative plate after moving in a parabola with a height of 0.181 mm and a width of 0.961 mm. P23.49 vi = 9.55 10 3 m s (a) ay = R=
19 720 eE 1.60 10 = = 6.90 10 10 m s 2 27 m 1.67 10
^
1 ayt 2 2
0 = 0 + 6.02 10 4 m s t + t = 1.20 10 8 s .
e
j
1 1 10 13 m s 2 t 2 2
e
j
x f = xi + v x t = 0 + 7.99 10 4 m s 1.20 10 8 s = 9.61 10 4 m .
e
je
j
e
e
ja f j
vi2 sin 2 = 1. 27 10 3 m so that ay
3 2
FIG. P23.49
e9.55 10 j
sin 2
10
6.90 10
= 1.27 10 3
sin 2 = 0.961 (b) t= R R = vix vi cos
= 36.9
90.0 = 53.1 If = 53.1 , t = 221 ns .
If = 36.9 , t = 167 ns .
Additional Problems *P23.50 The two given charges exert equalsize forces of attraction on each other. If a third charge, positive or negative, were placed between them they could not be in equilibrium. If the third charge were at a point x > 15 cm , it would exert a stronger force on the 45 C than on the 12 C , and could not produce equilibrium for both. Thus the third charge must be at x =  d < 0 . Its equilibrium requires k e q 12 C d
2
d q
x=0 12 C FIG. P23.50
15 cm x + 45 C
b
g = k qb45 Cg a15 cm + df
e
2
FG 15 cm + d IJ H d K
d = 16.0 cm .
2
=
45 = 3.75 12
15 cm + d = 1.94d
The third charge is at x = 16.0 cm . The equilibrium of the 12 C requires k e q 12 C
g = k b45 Cg12 C a16.0 cmf a15 cmf
e 2 2
b
q = 51.3 C .
All six individual forces are now equal in magnitude, so we have equilibrium as required, and this is the only solution.
Chapter 23
19
P23.51
The proton moves with acceleration while the e  has acceleration
19 C 640 N C qE 1.60 10 = = 6.13 10 10 m s 2 ap = m 1.673 10 27 kg
e
jb
g
ae =
e1.60 10
19
C 640 N C
31
jb
9.110 10
kg
g = 1.12 10
14
m s 2 = 1 836 a p .
(a)
We want to find the distance traveled by the proton (i.e., d = 1 1 1 a p t 2 + a e t 2 = 1 837 a p t 2 . 2 2 2 1 4.00 cm 2 = 21.8 m . d = apt = 2 1 837 4.00 cm =
FG H
IJ K
1 a p t 2 ), knowing: 2
Thus, (b)
The distance from the positive plate to where the meeting occurs equals the distance the 1 sodium ion travels (i.e., d Na = a Na t 2 ). This is found from: 2 eE eE 1 1 1 1 2 2 t2 + t2 . 4.00 cm = a Na t + aCl t : 4.00 cm = 2 2 2 22.99 u 2 35. 45 u 1 1 1 This may be written as 4.00 cm = a Na t 2 + 0.649 a Na t 2 = 1.65 a Na t 2 2 2 2 1 4.00 cm 2 = 2.43 cm . so d Na = a Na t = 2 1.65
FG H
IJ K b
FG H
IJ K
g
FG H
IJ K
P23.52
(a)
The field, E1 , due to the 4.00 10 9 C charge is in the x direction. 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 4.00 10 9 C keq E1 = 2 r = i 2 r 2.50 m
e
a
je f
j
= 5.75 i N C ke q r
2
FIG. P23.52(a)
Likewise, E 2 and E3 , due to the 5.00 10 9 C charge and the 3.00 10 9 C charge are E2 = E3
e8.99 10 r=
9
e8.99 10 =
ke q
je j i = 11.2 N C i a2.00 mf N m C je3.00 10 C j i = 18.7 N C i a1.20 mf
9
N m 2 C 2 5.00 10 9 C
2 2 9
2
2
E R = E1 + E 2 + E 3 = 24.2 N C in +x direction.
(b) E1 = E2 E3
b ge j = r = b11. 2 N C ge + jj r k q = r = b5.81 N C ge 0.371i +0.928 jj r
r2 ke q
2 e 2
r = 8.46 N C 0.243 i + 0.970 j
Ex = E1 x + E3 x = 4.21i N C
Ey = E1 y + E2 y + E3 y = 8.43 j N C FIG. P23.52(b)
ER = 9.42 N C
= 63.4 above  x axis
20
Electric Fields
*P23.53
(a)
Each ion moves in a quarter circle. The electric force causes the centripetal acceleration.
F = ma
(b) For the xmotion, 0 = v 2 + 2ax R Ex = 
qE =
mv 2 R
E=
mv 2 qR
2 2 v xf = v xi + 2 a x x f  x i
d
i
ax = 
v 2 Fx qE x = = m 2R m
mv 2 . Similarly for the ymotion, 2 qR ay = + v 2 qE y = m 2R Ey = mv 2 2 qR
v 2 = 0 + 2ay R
The magnitude of the field is
2 2 Ex + Ey =
mv 2 2 qR
at 135 counterclockwise from the x axis .
P23.54
From the freebody diagram shown,
Fy = 0 :
So From or P23.55 (a)
T cos 15.0 = 1.96 10 2 N . T = 2.03 10 2 N .
Fx = 0 , we have
q=
qE = T sin 15.0
2.03 10 2 N sin 15.0 T sin 15.0 = = 5.25 10 6 C = 5.25 C . E 1.00 10 3 N C
e
j
FIG. P23.54
Let us sum force components to find
Fx = qEx  T sin = 0 , and Fy = qEy + T cos  mg = 0 .
Combining these two equations, we get q=
e1.00 10 ja9.80f eE cot + E j a3.00 cot 37.0+5.00f 10
mg
3
=
x
y
5
= 1.09 10 8 C
Free Body Diagram FIG. P23.55
= 10.9 nC (b) From the two equations for T=
Fx
and
Fy
we also find
qEx = 5.44 10 3 N = 5.44 mN . sin 37.0
Chapter 23
21
P23.56
This is the general version of the preceding problem. The known quantities are A, B, m, g, and . The unknowns are q and T. The approach to this problem should be the same as for the last problem, but without numbers to substitute for the variables. Likewise, we can use the free body diagram given in the solution to problem 55. Again, Newton's second law: and (a) Substituting T = qA , into Eq. (2), sin
Fx = T sin + qA = 0 Fy = +T cos + qB  mg = 0
qA cos + qB = mg . sin q=
(1) (2)
Isolating q on the left,
a
mg A cot + B mgA
f
.
(b)
Substituting this value into Eq. (1),
T=
a A cos + B sin f
.
If we had solved this general problem first, we would only need to substitute the appropriate values in the equations for q and T to find the numerical results needed for problem 55. If you find this problem more difficult than problem 55, the little list at the first step is useful. It shows what symbols to think of as known data, and what to consider unknown. The list is a guide for deciding what to solve for in the analysis step, and for recognizing when we have an answer. P23.57 F= k e q1 q 2 r
2
:
tan =
15.0 60.0
6 2
= 14.0
e8.99 10 je10.0 10 j F = a0.150f e8.99 10 je10.0 10 j F = a0.600f e8.99 10 je10.0 10 j F = a0.619f
9 1 2 9 3 2 9 2 2
= 40.0 N
6 2
= 2.50 N
FIG. P23.57
6 2
= 2.35 N
Fx =  F3  F2 cos 14.0 = 2.50  2.35 cos 14.0 = 4.78 N Fy =  F1  F2 sin 14.0 = 40.0  2.35 sin 14.0 = 40.6 N Fnet = Fx2 + Fy2 = tan = Fy Fx = 40.6 4.78
a4.78f + a40.6f
2
2
= 40.9 N
= 263
22
Electric Fields
P23.58
From Figure A: or From Figure B:
d cos 30.0 = 15.0 cm, 15.0 cm d= cos 30.0
= sin 1 = sin 1
Fq
FG d IJ H 50.0 cm K F 15.0 cm I = 20.3 GH 50.0 cmacos 30.0f JK
(1)
Figure A
or From Figure C:
= tan mg Fq = mg tan 20.3 Fq = 2 F cos 30.0
e 2
LM k q OP cos 30.0 MN a0.300 mf PQ Combining equations (1) and (2), L k q OP cos 30.0 = mg tan 20.3 2M MN a0.300 mf PQ mg a0.300 mf tan 20.3 q =
Fq = 2
2 e 2 2 2 2
(2) Figure B
q
2
e2.00 10 kg je9.80 m s ja0.300 mf tan 20.3 = 2e8.99 10 N m C j cos 30.0
3 2 2 9 2 2
2 k e cos 30.0
Figure C FIG. P23.58 F= Q= ke Q 2 Q 2
2
q = 4.20 10 14 C 2 = 2.05 10 7 C = 0.205 C P23.59 Charge Q resides on each block, which repel as point charges: 2
Solving for Q, *P23.60
b gb g = kbL  L g . L k bL  L g . 2L
i i
ke
If we place one more charge q at the 29th vertex, the total force on the central charge will add up to k qQ k e qQ toward vertex 29 . F28 charges = zero: F28 charges + e 2 away from vertex 29 = 0 a a2 According to the result of Example 23.7, the lefthand rod creates this field at a distance d from its righthand end: k eQ E= d 2a + d
P23.61
a
f
dF = F= F=
k eQQ dx 2a d d + 2a
k eQ 2a 4a
2
k Q2 dx 1 2a + x = e  ln x x + 2a x 2a 2a x=b 2a
2 e 2 2
+ k eQ
2
IJ z a f FGH K Fk Q I F FG  ln 2a + b + ln b IJ = k Q ln b H b K 4a ab  2 afab + 2af = GH 4a JK lnGH b b  2a
b b b2a 2 e 2 2
a
f
FIG. P23.61
2
b2  4a 2
I JK
Chapter 23
23
P23.62
At equilibrium, the distance between the charges is r = 2 0.100 m sin 10.0 = 3.47 10 2 m Now consider the forces on the sphere with charge +q , and use
b
g
Fy = 0 :
(1) (2)
q
L
r +q
Fy = 0 : Fx = 0 :
T cos 10.0 = mg , or T =
Fnet
mg cos 10.0 = F2  F1 = T sin 10.0
Fnet is the net electrical force on the charged sphere. Eliminate T from (2) by use of (1). mg sin 10.0 Fnet = = mg tan 10.0 = 2.00 10 3 kg 9.80 m s 2 tan 10.0 = 3.46 10 3 N cos 10.0
e
je
j
Fnet is the resultant of two forces, F1 and F2 . F1 is the attractive force on +q exerted by q , and F2 is the force exerted on +q by the external electric field. Fnet = F2  F1 or F2 = Fnet + F1 F1 = 8.99 10 N m
FIG. P23.62
e
9
2
e5.00 10 Cje5.00 10 Cj = 1.87 10 C j e3.47 10 mj
8 8 2 3 2
2
N
Thus, F2 = Fnet + F1 yields F2 = 3.46 10 3 N + 1.87 10 2 N = 2.21 10 2 N and F2 = qE , or E = F2 2. 21 10 2 N = = 4. 43 10 5 N C = 443 kN C . q 5.00 10 8 C
90 .0 90.0
P23.63
Q = d =
Q = 12.0 C = 2 0 0.600 m = 12.0 C
y 2
= 10.0 C m so b ga f F b3.00 Cge cos Rd j I 1 F b3.00 C gbd g I dF = JJ GH R JK cos = 41 GGH 4 R K e3.00 10 Cje10.0 10 C mj cos d F = z e8.99 10 N m C j a0.600 mf 8.99a30.0f F = e10 Nj z FGH 1 + 1 cos 2 IJK d 0.600 2 2 F1 1 I = 0.707 N Downward. F = a0.450 N fG + sin 2 JK H2 4
0 0 2 0 0 2 90.0 6 6 y 9 2 2 2 90 .0 y 3
z
90 .0
90 .0
z
0 cos Rd = 0 R sin
= 0 R 1  1 = 2 0 R
a f
1 0 1 1 0
cos
0 cos2 0
360
2
 2
2
360
y
 2
FIG. P23.63
Since the leftward and rightward forces due to the two halves of the semicircle cancel out, Fx = 0 . P23.64 At an equilibrium position, the net force on the charge Q is zero. The equilibrium position can be located by determining the angle corresponding to equilibrium. In terms of lengths s, attractive force 1 a 3 , and r, shown in Figure P23.64, the charge at the origin exerts an 2 k eQq
1 2
es +
continued on next page
a 3
j
2
24
Electric Fields
The other two charges exert equal repulsive forces of magnitude of the two repulsive forces add, balancing the attractive force, Fnet = k eQq
1 2
k eQq r2
. The horizontal components
LM 2 cos MM r  es + N
2
1
1 2
a
OP P=0 3j P Q
2
From Figure P23.64 The equilibrium condition, in terms of , is Thus the equilibrium value of satisfies
r=
a
sin
s=
2
Fnet =
FG 4 IJ k QqFG 2 cos sin  H a K GH e
2 e
1 a cot 2
I JJ = 0 . 3 + cot j K
1
2
2 cos sin 2
e
3 + cot
j
2
=1.
One method for solving for is to tabulate the left side. To three significant figures a value of corresponding to equilibrium is 81.7. The distance from the vertical side of the triangle to the equilibrium position is 1 s = a cot 81.7 = 0.072 9 a . 2
60 70 80 90 FIG. P23.64 81 81.5 81.7
2 cos sin 2
e
3 + cot
j
2
4 2.654 1.226 0 1.091 1.024 0.997
A second zerofield point is on the negative side of the xaxis, where = 9.16 and s = 3.10 a . P23.65 (a) From the 2Q charge we have Combining these we find From the Q charge we have Combining these we find k e 2QQ r
2
Fe  T2 sin 2 = 0 and mg  T2 cos 2 = 0 . Fe T sin 2 = 2 = tan 2 . mg T2 cos 2 Fe = T1 sin 1 = 0 and mg  T1 cos 1 = 0 . Fe T sin 1 = 1 = tan 1 or 2 = 1 . mg T1 cos 1
FIG. P23.65
(b)
Fe =
=
2 k eQ r2
2
If we assume is small then
tan
r 2
.
Substitute expressions for Fe and tan into either equation found in part (a) and solve for r. Fe 2k Q 2 1 4k eQ 2 r = tan then e 2 and solving for r we find r mg 2 mg mg r
F I GH JK
F GH
I JK
13
.
Chapter 23
25
P23.66
(a)
The distance from each corner to the center of the square is
x Q +q L/2 +q L/2 +q z +q
FG L IJ + FG L IJ H 2K H 2K
2
2
=
L 2
.
The distance from each positive charge to Q is then z2 + L2 . Each positive charge exerts a force directed 2
FIG. P23.66 k eQq z z + L2 2
2
along the line joining q and Q , of magnitude The line of force makes an angle with the zaxis whose cosine is
z 2 + L2 2
.
The four charges together exert forces whose x and y components add to zero, while the 4k e Qqz F=  k zcomponents add to 3 2 2 z + L2 2
e
j
(b)
For z >> L , the magnitude of this force is Fz = 
eL 2 j
2
4k eQqz
32
=
F 4a2f k Qq I z = ma GH L JK
3 2 3 e
z
Therefore, the object's vertical acceleration is of the form a z =  2 z with 2 = 42
af
32
mL
3
k eQq
=
k eQq 128 mL3
.
Since the acceleration of the object is always oppositely directed to its excursion from equilibrium and in magnitude proportional to it, the object will execute simple harmonic motion with a period given by T= 2 =
a128f
2
14
mL3 = k e Qq
a8 f
14
mL3 . k eQq
P23.67
(a)
The total noncontact force on the cork ball is: F = qE + mg = m g +
qE , m which is constant and directed downward. Therefore, it behaves like a simple pendulum in the presence of a modified uniform gravitational field with a period given by: T = 2 L 0.500 m = 2 g + qE m 9.80 m s 2 + 2.00 10 6 C 1.00 10 5 N C 1.00 10 3 kg
FG H
IJ K
e
je
j
= 0.307 s L qE m = 0.314 s (a 2.28% difference).
(b)
Yes . Without gravity in part (a), we get T = 2
T = 2
e2.00 10 Cje1.00 10
6
0.500 m
5
N C 1.00 10 3 kg
j
26
Electric Fields
P23.68
The bowl exerts a normal force on each bead, directed along the radius line or at 60.0 above the horizontal. Consider the freebody diagram of the bead on the left:
Fy = n sin 60.0 mg = 0 ,
or Also, or n= mg . sin 60.0
n Fe mg 60.0
Fx =  Fe + n cos 60.0 = 0 ,
keq 2 R
2
= n cos 60.0 =
mg mg = . tan 60.0 3
Thus,
q=
F mg I RG H k 3 JK
e
12
.
FIG. P23.68
P23.69
(a)
There are 7 terms which contribute: 3 are s away (along sides) 3 are 1 is 2s away (face diagonals) and sin = 3s away (body diagonal) and sin = 1 3 1 2 . FIG. P23.69
= cos
The component in each direction is the same by symmetry. F= ke q2 s2
LM1 + 2 + 1 OPei + j + kj = N 2 2 3 3Q
ke q2 s2
keq 2 s2
a1.90fei + j + kj
(b) P23.70 (a)
F = Fx2 + Fy2 + Fz2 = 3. 29
away from the origin
Zero contribution from the same face due to symmetry, opposite face contributes 4
FG k q sin IJ where Hr K
e 2
r=
FG s IJ + FG s IJ H 2K H 2K
2
2
+ s 2 = 1.5 s = 1.22s
3
sin =
s r
E=4
k e qs r3
=
a1.22f
4
keq s2
= 2.18
keq s2 FIG. P23.70
(b)
The direction is the k direction.
Chapter 23
27
P23.71
The field on the axis of the ring is calculated in Example 23.8,
The force experienced by a charge q placed along the axis of the ring is
and when x << a , this becomes This expression for the force is in the form of Hooke's law, with an effective spring constant of Since = 2 f = k , we have m
ex + a j LM x F =  k Qq MM ex + a j N F k Qq IJ x F = G Ha K
2 e 2 e 3
E = Ex =
k e xQ
2 3 2
2 3 2
OP PP Q
k= f=
k eQq a3 1 2 k eQq ma 3
.
P23.72
dE =
x
2
F G + a0.150 mf G H
k e dq
2
E=
all charge
z
dE = k e
0. 400 m x=0
z
I k e xi + 0.150 mjjdx J= x + a0.150 mf J K x + a0.150 mf e xi + 0.150 mjjdx x + a0.150 mf
 x i + 0.150 m j
2 e 2 2 2 32 2 2 3 2 0. 400 m 0. 400 m 2 2 2 2 0 0
LM OP a0.150 mf jx +i E = k M + PP x + a0.150 mf a0.150 mf x + a0.150 mf MN Q E = e8.99 10 N m C je35.0 10 C mj ia 2.34  6.67f m + ja6.24  0 f m E = e 1.36 i + 1.96 jj 10 N C = e 1.36 i + 1.96 jj kN C
e 2 9 2 2 9 1 3
FIG. P23.72
1
P23.73
The electrostatic forces exerted on the two charges result in a net torque = 2 Fa sin = 2Eqa sin . For small , sin and using p = 2 qa , we have
= Ep .
d 2 dt 2 . FIG. P23.73 Ep . I
The torque produces an angular acceleration given by = I = I Combining these two expressions for torque, we have This equation can be written in the form
Ep d 2 =0. + 2 I dt d 2 dt
2
FG IJ H K
=  2 where 2 =
This is the same form as Equation 15.5 and the frequency of oscillation is found by comparison with Equation 15.11, or f= 1 2 pE 1 = I 2 2 qaE . I
28
Electric Fields
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P23.2 P23.4 P23.6 P23.8 P23.10 (a) 2.62 10 24 ; (b) 2.38 electrons for every 10 9 present P23.36 P23.38 P23.40 P23.42 P23.44 P23.46 P23.48 (a) 200 pC; (b) 141 pC; (c) 58.9 pC see the solution (a)  1 ; (b) q1 is negative and q 2 is positive 3
57.5 N 2.51 10
514 kN x = 0.634d . The equilibrium is stable if the third bead has positive charge.
9
electron: 4.39 Mm s ; proton: 2.39 km s (a) 57.6 i Tm s 2 ; (b) 2.84i Mm s; (c) 49.3 ns (a) down; (b) 3.43 C The particle strikes the negative plate after moving in a parabola 0.181 mm high and 0.961 mm. Possible only with +51.3 C at x = 16.0 cm (a) 24.2 N C at 0; (b) 9. 42 N C at 117
P23.12
(a) period = 2
md 3 where m is the mass k e qQ k e qQ md 3
of the object with charge Q ; (b) 4a P23.14 P23.16 P23.18
1.49 g
720 kN C down (a) 18.0 i  218 j kN C ; (b) 36.0 i  436 j mN
P23.50 P23.52 P23.54 P23.56 P23.58 P23.60 P23.62 P23.64 P23.66
5.25 C
(a) mg mgA ; (b) A cot + B A cos + B sin
e
j
P23.20 P23.22 P23.24 P23.26
(a) 12.9 j kN C ; (b) 38.6 j mN see the solution
0.205 C
k e qQ a2 toward the 29th vertex
2 ke q  i 6a2
ke 0 i x0 ke 0 i 2x0
e j e j
443 i kN C
0.072 9 a
see the solution; the period is
P23.28 P23.30 P23.32 P23.34
81 4
mL3 k eQq
(a) 383 MN C away; (b) 324 MN C away; (c) 80.7 MN C away; (d) 6.68 MN C away see the solution
P23.68
R
F mg I GH k 3 JK
e
12
LMe j  ead + hf + R j N 2 k Qi L (b) R h M Nh + ed + R j  ead + hf + R j
(a) k eQ i d 2 + R2 h
e 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 12 2 2
1 2
12
OP; Q OP Q
P23.70 P23.72
(a) see the solution; (b) k
e1.36i + 1.96 jj kN C
24
Gauss's Law
CHAPTER OUTLINE
24.1 24.2 24.3 Electric Flux Gauss's Law Application of Gauss's Law to Various Charge Distributions Conductors in Electrostatic Equilibrium Formal Derivation of Gauss`s Law
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q24.1 The luminous flux on a given area is less when the sun is low in the sky, because the angle between the rays of the sun and the local area vector, dA, is greater than zero. The cosine of this angle is reduced. The decreased flux results, on the average, in colder weather. If the region is just a point, line, or plane, no. Consider two protons in otherwise empty space. The electric field is zero at the midpoint of the line joining the protons. If the fieldfree region is threedimensional, then it can contain no charges, but it might be surrounded by electric charge. Consider the interior of a metal sphere carrying static charge. The surface must enclose a positive total charge.
24.4 24.5
Q24.2
Q24.3 Q24.4
The net flux through any gaussian surface is zero. We can argue it two ways. Any surface contains zero charge so Gauss's law says the total flux is zero. The field is uniform, so the field lines entering one side of the closed surface come out the other side and the net flux is zero. Gauss's law cannot tell the different values of the electric field at different points on the surface. When E is an unknown number, then we can say E cos dA = E cos dA . When E x , y , z is an unknown function, then there is no such simplification.
Q24.5
z
z
b
g
Q24.6
The electric flux through a sphere around a point charge is independent of the size of the sphere. A sphere of larger radius has a larger area, but a smaller field at its surface, so that the product of field strength and area is independent of radius. If the surface is not spherical, some parts are closer to the charge than others. In this case as well, smaller projected areas go with stronger fields, so that the net flux is unaffected. Faraday's visualization of electric field lines lends insight to this question. Consider a section of a 1 field lines pointing out from it horizontally to vertical sheet carrying charge +1 coulomb. It has 0 the right and left, all uniformly spaced. The lines have the same uniform spacing close to the sheet and far away, showing that the field has the same value at all distances.
Q24.7
29
30
Gauss's Law
Q24.8
Consider any point, zone, or object where electric field lines begin. Surround it with a closefitting gaussian surface. The lines will go outward through the surface to constitute positive net flux. Then Gauss's law asserts that positive net charge must be inside the surface: it is where the lines begin. Similarly, any place where electric field lines end must be just inside a gaussian surface passing net negative flux, and must be a negative charge. Inject some charge at arbitrary places within a conducting object. Every bit of the charge repels every other bit, so each bit runs away as far as it can, stopping only when it reaches the outer surface of the conductor. If the person is uncharged, the electric field inside the sphere is zero. The interior wall of the shell carries no charge. The person is not harmed by touching this wall. If the person carries a (small) charge q, the electric field inside the sphere is no longer zero. Charge q is induced on the inner wall of the sphere. The person will get a (small) shock when touching the sphere, as all the charge on his body jumps to the metal. The electric fields outside are identical. The electric fields inside are very different. We have E = 0 everywhere inside the conducting sphere while E decreases gradually as you go below the surface of the sphere with uniform volume charge density. There is zero force. The huge charged sheet creates a uniform field. The field can polarize the neutral sheet, creating in effect a film of opposite charge on the near face and a film with an equal amount of like charge on the far face of the neutral sheet. Since the field is uniform, the films of charge feel equalmagnitude forces of attraction and repulsion to the charged sheet. The forces add to zero. Gauss's law predicts, as described in section 24.4, that excess charge on a conductor will reside on the surface of the conductor. If a car is left charged by a lightning strike, then that charge will remain on the outside of the car, not harming the occupants. It turns out that during the lightning strike, the current also remains on the outside of the conductor. Note that it is not necessarily safe to be in a fiberglass car or a convertible during a thunderstorm.
Q24.9
Q24.10
Q24.11
Q24.12
Q24.13
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 24.1 P24.1 (a) (b) (c) P24.2 P24.3 Electric Flux E = EA cos = 3.50 10 3 0.350 0.700 cos 0 = 858 N m 2 C
e
ja
f
= 90.0
E = 0
E = 3.50 10 3 0.350 0.700 cos 40.0 = 657 N m 2 C
e
ja
f
E = EA cos = 2.00 10 4 N C 18.0 m 2 cos 10.0 = 355 kN m 2 C E = EA cos A = r 2 = 0.200
e
je
j
a
f
2
= 0.126 m 2
5.20 10 5 = E 0.126 cos 0
a
f
E = 4.14 10 6 N C = 4.14 MN C
Chapter 24
31
P24.4
(a)
A = 10.0 cm 30.0 cm
2
a
fa
f
A = 300 cm = 0.030 0 m 2 E , A = EA cos E , A = 7.80 10 4 0.030 0 cos 180 E , A = 2.34 kN m 2 C (b)
30.0 cm
e
jb
g
10.0 cm
60.0
e ja f F 10.0 cm IJ = 600 cm = 0.060 0 m A = a30.0 cmfa wf = a30.0 cmfG H cos 60.0 K = e7.80 10 jb0.060 0g cos 60.0 = +2.34 kN m C
E , A = EA cos = 7.80 10 4 A cos 60.0
2 E, A 4 2
FIG. P24.4
2
(c)
The bottom and the two triangular sides all lie parallel to E, so E = 0 for each of these. Thus,
E, total = 2.34 kN m 2 C + 2.34 kN m 2 C + 0 + 0 + 0 = 0 .
P24.5 (a) (b) (c) P24.6 E = E A = a i + b j A i = aA E = a i + b j A j = bA E = a i + b j Ak = 0
e
j
e e
j j
Only the charge inside radius R contributes to the total flux. E = q 0
P24.7
E = EA cos through the base
E = 52.0 36.0 cos 180 = 1.87 kN m 2 C .
Note the same number of electric field lines go through the base as go through the pyramid's surface (not counting the base). For the slanting surfaces, E = +1.87 kN m 2 C . P24.8 The flux entering the closed surface equals the flux exiting the surface. The flux entering the left side of the cone is E = E dA = ERh . This is the same as the flux that exits the right side of the cone. Note that for a uniform field only the cross sectional area matters, not shape. FIG. P24.7
a fa f
z
32
Gauss's Law
Section 24.2 P24.9 (a)
Gauss's Law E = +5.00 C  9.00 C + 27.0 C  84.0 C qin = = 6.89 10 6 N m 2 C 2 0 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2
b
g
E = 6.89 MN m 2 C (b) P24.10 (a) Since the net electric flux is negative, more lines enter than leave the surface. E= k eQ r2 : 8.90 10
2
e8.99 10 jQ = a0.750f
9 2
But Q is negative since E points inward. (b) P24.11 E =
Q = 5.56 10 8 C = 55.6 nC
The negative charge has a spherically symmetric charge distribution. qin 0 E = E = E = 2Q + Q Q =  0 0 +Q  Q = 0 0 2Q + Q  Q 2Q =  0 0
Through S1 Through S 2 Through S3 Through S 4 P24.12 (a)
E = 0
Onehalf of the total flux created by the charge q goes through the plane. Thus, q 1 1 q E , plane = E , total = = . 2 2 0 2 0
FG IJ H K
(b)
The square looks like an infinite plane to a charge very close to the surface. Hence, q E , square E , plane = . 2 0 The plane and the square look the same to the charge.
(c) P24.13
The flux through the curved surface is equal to the flux through the flat circle, E0 r 2 . (a) E , shell = qin 12.0 10 6 = = 1.36 10 6 N m 2 C = 1.36 MN m 2 C 0 8.85 10 12 1 1.36 10 6 N m 2 C = 6.78 10 5 N m 2 C = 678 kN m 2 C 2
P24.14
(b) (c)
E, half shell =
e
j
No, the same number of field lines will pass through each surface, no matter how the
radius changes.
Chapter 24
33
P24.15
(a)
With very small, all points on the hemisphere are nearly at a distance R from the charge, so the field everywhere on the kQ curved surface is e 2 radially outward (normal to the R surface). Therefore, the flux is this field strength times the area of half a sphere: curved = E dA = Elocal A hemisphere curved = k e
0
Q
FG H
z
Q R2
IJ FG 1 4 R IJ = 1 Qa2 f = K H 2 K 4
2 0
+Q 2 0
FIG. P24.15
(b)
The closed surface encloses zero charge so Gauss's law gives curved + flat = 0 or flat =  curved = Q . 2 0
*P24.16
Consider as a gaussian surface a box with horizontal area A, lying between 500 and 600 m elevation.
z
E dA =
q : 0
b+120 N CgA + b100 N CgA = Aa100 mf b20 N Cge8.85 10 C N m j = 1.77 10 =
0 12 2 2
12
100 m
C m3
The charge is positive , to produce the net outward flux of electric field. Q6q 0
P24.17
The total charge is Q  6 q . The total outward flux from the cube is through each face:
, of which onesixth goes
b g
E one face
= =
Q6q 6 0 Q6q 6 0 =
b g
P24.18
E one face
a5.00  6.00f 10
6
C N m2 C
2
6 8.85 10
12
= 18.8 kN m 2 C . Q6q 0
The total charge is Q  6 q . The total outward flux from the cube is through each face:
, of which onesixth goes
b g
P24.19
E one face
=
Q6q 6 0
. qin = 0 . 0
If R d , the sphere encloses no charge and E =
If R > d , the length of line falling within the sphere is 2 R 2  d 2 so E = 2 R 2  d 2 0 .
34
Gauss's Law
P24.20
E , hole = E A hole =
FG k Q IJ e r HR K
e 2
2
F e8.99 10 N m C je10.0 10 Cj I JJ e1.00 10 j GG a0.100 mf H K
9 2 2 6
=
2
3
m
j
2
E, hole = 28.2 N m 2 C P24.21 E = qin 170 10 6 C = = 1.92 10 7 N m 2 C 0 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2
(a) (b) (c)
b g
E one face
=
1.92 10 7 N m 2 C 1 E = 6 6
b g
E one face
= 3.20 MN m 2 C
E = 19.2 MN m 2 C The answer to (a) would change because the flux through each face of the cube would not be equal with an asymmetric charge distribution. The sides of the cube nearer the charge would have more flux and the ones further away would have less. The answer to (b) would remain the same, since the overall flux would remain the same.
P24.22
No charge is inside the cube. The net flux through the cube is zero. Positive flux comes out through the three faces meeting at g. These three faces together fill solid angle equal to oneeighth of a sphere as seen from q, and together pass 1 q . Each face containing a intercepts equal flux going into the cube: flux 8 0
FG IJ H K
0 = E , net E , abcd =
q = 3 E , abcd + 8 0 q 24 0
FIG. P24.22
Section 24.3 P24.23
Application of Gauss's Law to Various Charge Distributions
The charge distributed through the nucleus creates a field at the surface equal to that of a point k q charge at its center: E = e2 r
e8.99 10 Nm C je82 1.60 10 E= a208f 1.20 10 m
9 2 2 13 15 2
19
C
j
E = 2.33 10 21 N C
away from the nucleus
Chapter 24
35
P24.24
(a)
E=
k eQr a3
= 0
9 6
(b)
(c)
e8.99 10 je26.0 10 ja0.100f = 365 kN C a a0.400f k Q e8.99 10 je 26.0 10 j = = 1.46 MN C E= r a0.400f
E= k eQr
3
=
3
9
6
e
2
2
(d)
E=
k eQ r2
e8.99 10 je26.0 10 j = = a0.600f
9 6 2
649 kN C
The direction for each electric field is radially outward .
*P24.25
mg = qE = q
FG IJ = qFG Q A IJ H2 K H 2 K
0 0
12 0.01 9.8 Q 2 0 mg 2 8.85 10 = = = 2.48 C m 2 A q 0.7 10 6
e
ja fa f
P24.26
(a)
2 8.99 10 9 Q 2.40 2k e 4 E= 3.60 10 = 0.190 r Q = +9.13 10 7 C = +913 nC
e
jb
g
(b) *P24.27
E= 0
The volume of the spherical shell is 4 0.25 m 3
a
f  a0.20 mf
3
3
= 3.19 10 2 m3 .
Its charge is
V = 1.33 10 6 C m 3 3.19 10 2 m3 = 4.25 10 8 C .
The net charge inside a sphere containing the proton's path as its equator is 60 10 9 C  4. 25 10 8 C = 1.02 10 7 C . The electric field is radially inward with magnitude ke q r
2
e
je
j
=
q 0 4 r
2
=
8.99 10 9 Nm 2 1.02 10 7 C C 0.25 m mv 2 r
2
a
e
f
2
j = 1.47 10
4
N C.
For the proton
F = ma
eE =
12
F eEr IJ v=G HmK
F 1.60 10 =G GH
19
C 1.47 10 4 N C 0.25 m 1.67 10 27 kg
e
j
I JJ K
12
= 5.94 10 5 m s .
36
Gauss's Law
P24.28
= 8.60 10 6 C cm 2
E=
e
jFGH 100mcm IJK
2
= 8.60 10 2 C m 2
8.60 10 2 = = 4.86 10 9 N C away from the wall 2 0 2 8.85 10 12
e
j
The field is essentially uniform as long as the distance from the center of the wall to the field point is much less than the dimensions of the wall. P24.29 If is positive, the field must be radially outward. Choose as the gaussian surface a cylinder of length L and radius r, contained inside the charged rod. Its volume is r 2 L and it encloses charge r 2 L . Because the charge distribution is long, no electric flux passes through the circular end caps; E dA = EdA cos 90.0 = 0 . The curved surface has E dA = EdA cos 0 , and E must be the same strength everywhere over the curved surface. q r 2 L Gauss's law, E dA = , becomes E dA = . 0 0 Curved
FIG. P24.29
z
z
Surface
Now the lateral surface area of the cylinder is 2 rL : E 2 r L = *P24.30
b g
r 2 L . 0
Thus,
E=
r radially away from the cylinder axis . 2 0
Let represent the charge density. For the field inside the sphere at r1 = 5 cm we have E1 4 r12 = q inside 4 r13 = 0 3 0 E1 = r1 3 0
12 C 2 86 10 3 N 3 0 E1 3 8.85 10 = = = 4.57 10 5 C m 3 . r1 0.05 m Nm 2 C Now for the field outside at r3 = 15 cm 3 4 r2 E3 4 r32 = 3 0
e
je
j
k e 4 0.10 m E3 = 2 r3 3
a
f e4.57 10 Cj = 8.99 10
3 5
9
m
3
a0.15 mf C
2
Nm 2 1.91 10 7 C
2
e
j = 7.64 10
4
NC
E 3 = 76. 4 kN C radially inward P24.31 (a)
E= 0
k eQ r2
(b) P24.32
E=
e8.99 10 je32.0 10 j = 7.19 MN C = a0.200f
9 6 2
E = 7.19 MN C radially outward
The distance between centers is 2 5.90 10 15 m . Each produces a field as if it were a point charge at its center, and each feels a force as if all its charge were a point at its center. F= k e q1 q 2 r2 = 8.99 10 N m
e
9
2
a46f e1.60 10 Cj C j e2 5.90 10 mj
2 19 2 15
2
2
= 3.50 10 3 N = 3.50 kN
Chapter 24
37
P24.33
Consider two balloons of diameter 0.2 m, each with mass 1 g, hanging apart with a 0.05 m separation on the ends of strings making angles of 10 with the vertical. (a)
Fy = T cos 10mg = 0 T = cos 10 Fx = T sin 10 Fe = 0 Fe = T sin 10 , so
Fe = Fe 2 10 3 N ~ 10 3 N or 1 mN Fe = keq 2 r2
3
mg
FG mg IJ sin 10 = mg tan 10 = b0.001 kgge9.8 m s j tan 10 H cos 10 K
2
FIG. P24.33
(b)
2 10
e8.99 10 N m N a0.25 mf
9
2
C 2 q2
j
2
q 1. 2 10 7 C ~ 10 7 C or 100 nC keq r
2
(c)
E=
e8.99 10
9
N m 2 C 2 1.2 10 7 C
a0.25 mf
je
2
j 1.7 10
4
N C ~ 10 kN C
(d)
E =
q 1.2 10 7 C = 1. 4 10 4 N m 2 C ~ 10 kN m 2 C 0 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2 4 3 a 3
*P24.34
The charge density is determined by Q = (a)
=
3Q 4 a 3
The flux is that created by the enclosed charge within radius r: E = q in 4 r 3 4 r 3 3Q Qr 3 = = = 0 3 0 3 0 4 a 3 0 a 3 Q . Note that the answers to parts (a) and (b) agree at r = a . 0 E Q 0
(b) (c)
E =
0
0
a FIG. P24.34(c)
r
38
Gauss's Law
P24.35
(a)
9 2 2 2.00 10 6 C 7.00 m 2 k e 2 8.99 10 N m C = E= 0.100 m r
e
je
j
E = 51.4 kN C , radially outward
(b) E = EA cos = E 2 r cos 0
b
g
E = 5.14 10 4 N C 2 0.100 m 0.020 0 m 1.00 = 646 N m 2 C
P24.36 (a)
e
j a g
fb
ga f
=
qin =
(b)
qin
FG 4 r IJ = e2.13 10 H3 K F4 I = G r J = e 2.13 10 H3 K
3 3
Q 5.70 10 6 = = 2.13 10 2 C m 3 3 4 3 4 a 0.040 0 3 3
b
2
2
4 jFGH 3 IJK b0.020 0g 4 jFGH 3 IJK b0.040 0g
3
= 7.13 10 7 C = 713 nC
3
= 5.70 C
P24.37
E=
9.00 10 6 C m 2 = = 508 kN C , upward 2 0 2 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2
e
j
P24.38
Note that the electric field in each case is directed radially inward, toward the filament. (a) E=
6 9 2 2 2 k e 2 8.99 10 N m C 90.0 10 C m = = 16.2 MN C 0.100 m r 6 9 2 2 2 k e 2 8.99 10 N m C 90.0 10 C m = = 8.09 MN C 0.200 m r
e e e
je je je
j j
(b)
E=
(c)
6 9 2 2 2 k e 2 8.99 10 N m C 90.0 10 C m = = 1.62 MN C E= 1.00 m r
j
Section 24.4 P24.39
Conductors in Electrostatic Equilibrium
z
EdA = E 2 rl =
b g
qin 0
E=
q in l = 2 0 r 2 0 r
(a) (b)
r = 3.00 cm r = 10.0 cm
E= 0
E= 30.0 10 9
2 8.85 10 12 0.100 30.0 10 9
e e
ja
f=
5 400 N C , outward
(c)
r = 100 cm
E=
2 8.85 10 12 1.00
= ja f
540 N C , outward
Chapter 24
39
P24.40
From Gauss's Law,
EA =
=
P24.41
Q =0 E = 8.85 10 12 130 = 1.15 10 9 C m 2 = 1.15 nC m 2 A
e
ja
Q 0
f
The fields are equal. The Equation 24.9 E = different from Equation 24.8 E =
insulator for the field around glass. But its charge will spread out to 2 0 Q cover both sides of the aluminum plate, so the density is conductor = . The glass carries charge 2A Q Q only on area A, with insulator = . The two fields are the same in magnitude, and both are A 2 A 0 perpendicular to the plates, vertically upward if Q is positive.
*P24.42 (a) All of the charge sits on the surface of the copper sphere at radius 15 cm. The field inside is zero . The charged sphere creates field at exterior points as if it were a point charge at the center: E= ke q r
2
conductor for the field outside the aluminum looks 0
(b)
away =
9
e8.99 10 je f
2
9
Nm 2 40 10 9 C
2
C 0.17 m
a
je
f
2
j outward =
1.24 10 4 N C outward
(c) (d) P24.43 (a)
e8.99 10 E=
0
Nm 2 40 10 9 C
2
C 0.75 m
a
j outward = j
639 N C outward
All three answers would be the same. E=
= 8.00 10 4 8.85 10 12 = 7.08 10 7 C m 2
e
je
= 708 nC m 2 , positive on one face and negative on the other.
(b)
=
Q 2 Q = A = 7.08 10 7 0.500 C A Q = 1.77 10 7 C = 177 nC , positive on one face and negative on the other.
e
ja
f
P24.44
(a)
E= 0
k eQ r2
(b)
E=
e8.99 10 je8.00 10 j = 7.99 10 = b0.030 0g
9 6 2
7
NC
E = 79.9 MN C radially outward
(c)
E= 0
k eQ r2
(d)
E=
e8.99 10 je4.00 10 j = 7.34 10 = b0.070 0g
9 6 2
6
NC
E = 7.34 MN C radially outward
40
Gauss's Law
P24.45
The charge divides equally between the identical spheres, with charge like point charges at their centers: F= ke Q 2 Q 2
2
Q on each. Then they repel 2
b gb g = k Q aL + R + Rf 4aL + 2Rf
e 2
2
=
8.99 10 9 N m 2 60.0 10 6 C 4 C 2 2.01 m
a
e
f
j
2
2
= 2.00 N .
P24.46
The electric field on the surface of a conductor varies inversely with the radius of curvature of the surface. Thus, the field is most intense where the radius of curvature is smallest and viceversa. The local charge density and the electric field intensity are related by E= (a)
0
or
=0 E .
Where the radius of curvature is the greatest,
=0 Emin = 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2 2.80 10 4 N C = 248 nC m 2 .
(b) Where the radius of curvature is the smallest,
e
je
j
=0 Emax = 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2 5.60 10 4 N C = 496 nC m 2 .
P24.47 (a) Inside surface: consider a cylindrical surface within the metal. Since E inside the conducting shell is zero, the total charge inside the gaussian surface must be zero, so the inside charge/length =  . 0 = + qin Outside surface: qout = 2 + (b) E= 2 k e 3 r k eQ r2
e
e
je
j
so The total charge on the metal cylinder is so the outside charge/length is 3 radially outward 2 0 r
6
qin
= 
2 = qin + qout
3 .
b g = 6k =
r
9
P24.48
(a)
E=
e8.99 10 je6.40 10 j = = a0.150f
2
2.56 MN C , radially inward
(b) P24.49 (a)
E=0
The charge density on each of the surfaces (upper and lower) of the plate is:
=
8 1 q 1 4.00 10 C = = 8.00 10 8 C m 2 = 80.0 nC m 2 . 2 A 2 0.500 m 2
FG IJ H K
0
e
a
f
j
(b)
E=
FG IJ k = F 8.00 10 C m I k = b9.04 kN Cgk H K GH 8.85 10 C N m JK
8 2 12 2 2
(c)
E=
b9.04 kN Cgk
Chapter 24
41
P24.50
(a)
The charge +q at the center induces charge q on the inner surface of the conductor, where its surface density is: q a = . 4 a 2 The outer surface carries charge Q + q with density
(b)
b =
P24.51
Q+q 4 b 2
.
Use Gauss's Law to evaluate the electric field in each region, recalling that the electric field is zero everywhere within conducting materials. The results are: E = 0 inside the sphere and within the material of the shell E = ke E = ke Charge Charge and Q between the sphere and shell, directed radially inward r2 2Q outside the shell, directed radially outward . r2
Q is on the outer surface of the sphere . +Q is on the inner surface of the shell , +2Q is on the outer surface of the shell.
P24.52
An approximate sketch is given at the right. Note that the electric field lines should be perpendicular to the conductor both inside and outside.
FIG. P24.52
Section 24.5 P24.53 (a)
Formal Derivation of Gauss`s Law Uniform E, pointing radially outward, so E = EA . The arc length is ds = Rd , and the circumference is 2 r = 2 R sin A = 2 rds =
z
zb
0
2 R sin Rd = 2 R 2 sin d = 2 R 2  cos
0
g
z
a
f
0
= 2 R 2 1  cos
b
g
1 Q Q E = 2 R 2 1  cos = 1  cos 4 0 R 2 2 0 (b) For = 90.0 (hemisphere): E =
a
f
a
f f
FIG. P24.53
[independent of R!]
Q Q 1  cos 90 = . 2 0 2 0 Q Q 1  cos 180 = 2 0 0
a
(c)
For = 180 (entire sphere): E =
a
f
[Gauss's Law].
42
Gauss's Law
Additional Problems P24.54 In general, In the xy plane, z = 0 and E = E dA =
w
E = ay i + bz j + cxk E = ay i + cxk
z y=0 x=0 x=w x y =h y dA = hdx
z
ze
ay i + cxk kdA
w
j
x2 E = ch xdx = ch 2 x=0
z
x=0
chw 2 = 2
FIG. P24.54
P24.55
(a) (b)
qin = +3Q  Q = +2Q The charge distribution is spherically symmetric and qin > 0 . Thus, the field is directed radially outward .
(c) (d)
E=
k e qin r
2
=
2 k eQ r2
for r c .
Since all points within this region are located inside conducting material, E = 0 for b < r < c.
(e) (f) (g)
E = E dA = 0 qin =0 E = 0 qin = +3Q E= k e qin r
2
z
=
3 k eQ r2
(radially outward) for a r < b .
3
(h)
qin = V = k e qin r
2
(i) (j)
E=
F +3Q I FG 4 r IJ = +3Q r GH a JK H 3 K a I k F = GH +3Q ra JK = 3 k Q ar (radially outward) for 0 r a . r
4 3 3 3 3 e 2 3 3 e 3
From part (d), E = 0 for b < r < c . Thus, for a spherical gaussian surface with b < r < c , qin = +3Q + qinner = 0 where qinner is the charge on the inner surface of the conducting shell. This yields qinner = 3Q . Since the total charge on the conducting shell is q net = qouter + qinner = Q , we have qouter = Q  qinner = Q  3Q = +2Q .
E
(k)
a
b
c
r
b g
FIG. P24.55(l)
(l)
This is shown in the figure to the right.
Chapter 24
43
P24.56
The sphere with large charge creates a strong field to polarize the other sphere. That means it pushes the excess charge over to the far side, leaving charge of the opposite sign on the near side. This patch of opposite charge is smaller in amount but located in a stronger external field, so it can feel a force of attraction that is larger than the repelling force felt by the larger charge in the weaker field on the other side. (a)
P24.57
z
E dA = E 4 r 2 =
e
j
qin 0 qin = E=
For r < a , so For a < r < b and c < r , So For b r c , (b)
FG 4 r IJ H3 K
3
r . 3 0
FIG. P24.57
qin = Q . Q E= . 4 r 2 0
E = 0 , since E = 0 inside a conductor.
Let q1 = induced charge on the inner surface of the hollow sphere. Since E = 0 inside the conductor, the total charge enclosed by a spherical surface of radius b r c must be zero. Therefore, q1 + Q = 0 and
1 =
q1 4 b
2
=
Q . 4 b 2
Let q 2 = induced charge on the outside surface of the hollow sphere. Since the hollow sphere is uncharged, we require q Q 2 = 1 2 = . q1 + q 2 = 0 and 4 c 4 c 2 P24.58
z
E dA = E 4 r 2 =
e
j
qin 0 N C 4 0.100 m
(a)
e3.60 10
3
j a
f
2
=
Q 8.85 10
12
C 2 N m2
aa < r < bf
Q = 4.00 10 9 C = 4.00 nC
(b) We take Q to be the net charge on the hollow sphere. Outside c, Q + Q 2 +2.00 10 2 N C 4 0.500 m = r>c 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2
e
j a
f
a f
Q + Q = +5.56 10 9 C , so Q = +9.56 10 9 C = +9.56 nC
(c) For b < r < c : E = 0 and qin = Q + Q1 = 0 where Q1 is the total charge on the inner surface of the hollow sphere. Thus, Q1 = Q = +4.00 nC . Then, if Q 2 is the total charge on the outer surface of the hollow sphere,
Q 2 = Q  Q1 = 9.56 nC  4.0 nC = +5.56 nC .
44
Gauss's Law
*P24.59
The vertical velocity component of the moving charge increases according to m dv y dt = Fy dv y dx = qE y . m dx dt q
y v 0 d Q FIG. P24.59
vx
vy x
Now dv y =
dx = v x has the nearly constant value v. So dt q Ey dx mv
vy
v y = dv y =
0
z
q Ey dx . mv 
z
The radially outward compnent of the electric field varies along the x axis, but is described by

z
Ey dA =

z
Ey 2 d dx =
b g
Q . 0
So

z
Ey dx = vy v =
qQ Q and v y = . The angle of deflection is described by 2 d 0 mv 2 d 0 qQ 2 0 dmv
2
tan = P24.60
= tan 1
qQ 2 0 dmv 2
.
First, consider the field at distance r < R from the center of a uniform sphere of positive charge Q = + e with radius R.
b
g
e
4 r 2 E =
j
qin V = = 0 0
F GH
+e 4 3 3 R
I JK
4 3
r3
0
so E =
F e I r directed outward GH 4 R JK
0 3
(a)
The force exerted on a point charge q =  e located at distance r from the center is then F = qE =  e
F e I r = F e I r = GH 4 R JK GH 4 R JK
2 0 3 0 3
 Kr .
(b)
K=
k e2 e2 = e3 3 4 0 R R
(c)
Fr = m e a r = 
F k e I r , so a GH R JK
e 2 3
r
=
F k e I r =  r GH m R JK
e 2 e 3 2
Thus, the motion is simple harmonic with frequency
f=
1 = 2 2
me R3
kee2
.
(d)
f = 2.47 10
15
1 Hz = 2
e8.99 10
9
N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C
31
e9.11 10
je
kg R 3
j
j
2
which yields R 3 = 1.05 10 30 m3 , or R = 1.02 10 10 m = 102 pm .
Chapter 24
45
P24.61
The field direction is radially outward perpendicular to the axis. The field strength depends on r but not on the other cylindrical coordinates or z. Choose a Gaussian cylinder of radius r and length L. If r < a , E = qin 0 and E 2 rL =
b
g
L 0
r
E=
2 r 0
or
E=
2 r 0
ar < a f
.
If a < r < b ,
E 2 rL =
b
g
L + r 2  a 2 L
0
e
j
E=
+ r 2  a 2
2 r 0
e
jr
aa < r < bf .
If r > b ,
E 2 rL =
b
g
L + b 2  a 2 L
0
e
j
E= P24.62
+ b 2  a 2
2 r 0
e
jr
ar > b f
.
Consider the field due to a single sheet and let E+ and E represent the fields due to the positive and negative sheets. The field at any distance from each sheet has a magnitude given by Equation 24.8: E+ = E = (a)
. 2 0
To the left of the positive sheet, E+ is directed toward the left and E toward the right and the net field over this region is E = 0 .
(b)
In the region between the sheets, E+ and E are both directed toward the right and the net field is E=
0
to the right .
FIG. P24.62
(c)
To the right of the negative sheet, E+ and E are again oppositely directed and E = 0 .
46
Gauss's Law
P24.63
The magnitude of the field due to the each sheet given by Equation 24.8 is E= (a)
directed perpendicular to the sheet. 2 0
In the region to the left of the pair of sheets, both fields are directed toward the left and the net field is E=
FIG. P24.63
0
to the left .
(b)
In the region between the sheets, the fields due to the individual sheets are oppositely directed and the net field is E= 0 . In the region to the right of the pair of sheets, both are fields are directed toward the right and the net field is E=
(c)
to the right . 0
P24.64
The resultant field within the cavity is the superposition of two fields, one E + due to a uniform sphere of positive charge of radius 2a, and the other E  due to a sphere of negative charge of radius a centered within the cavity. 4 r 3 = 4 r 2 E+ 3 0  4 r13 = 4 r12 E 3 0
F GH
I JK
so
E+ =
r r r= 3 0 3 0 r1   r1 = r1 . 3 0 3 0
F GH
I JK
so
E =
b g
Since r = a + r1 ,
 r  a E = 3 0 E = E+ + E =
a f
r r a a a  + = = 0i + j. 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0
FIG. P24.64
Thus, and *P24.65
Ex = 0
Ey =
a 3 0
at all points within the cavity.
Consider the charge distribution to be an unbroken charged spherical shell with uniform charge density and a circular disk with charge per area  . The total field is that due to the whole sphere, 4 R 2 Q = = outward plus the field of the disk  = radially inward. The total 2 2 0 2 0 2 0 4 0 R 4 0 R field is
outward .  = 0 2 0 2 0
Chapter 24
47
P24.66
The electric field throughout the region is directed along x; therefore, E will be perpendicular to dA over the four faces of the surface which are perpendicular to the yz plane, and E will be parallel to dA over the two faces which are parallel to the yz plane. Therefore, E =  Ex
e
x=a
j A + eE
x x=a+c
jA = e3 + 2 a jab + e3 + 2aa + cf jab = 2abca2 a + cf .
2 2
Substituting the given values for a, b, and c, we find E = 0.269 N m 2 C . Q =0 E = 2.38 10 12 C = 2.38 pC P24.67
FIG. P24.66
z
E dA = E 4 r 2 =
e
j
qin 0 qin = Ar 2 4 r 2 dr = 4
0 R
(a)
For r > R , and
z
r
e
j
AR 5 5
E=
AR 5 . 5 0 r 2
(b)
For r < R , and
qin = Ar 2 4 r 2 dr =
0
z
e
j
4 Ar 5 5
E=
Ar 3 . 5 0 Q . The flux through the 0
P24.68
The total flux through a surface enclosing the charge Q is disk is
disk = E dA where the integration covers the area of the disk. We must evaluate this integral 1Q to find how b and R are related. In the figure, take dA to be and set it equal to 4 0 the area of an annular ring of radius s and width ds. The flux through dA is
z
FIG. P24.68
E dA = EdA cos = E 2 sds cos .
The magnitude of the electric field has the same value at all points within the annular ring, E= 1 Q 1 Q = 4 0 r 2 4 0 s 2 + b 2 and cos = b b = 2 r s + b2
b
g
e
j
12
.
Integrate from s = 0 to s = R to get the flux through the entire disk. E , disk = Qb 2 0
R 0
ze
sds s2 + b 2
j
= 32
Qb  s2 + b 2 2 0
LM e N
j OPQ
12
R
=
0
Q b 1 2 0 R2 + b2
The flux through the disk equals This is satisfied if R = 3 b .
Q b provided that 4 0 R2 + b2
LM MM e N
e
j
12
=
1 . 2
OP j PQP
12
48
Gauss's Law
P24.69
z
E dA =
qin 1 = 0 0
z
r 0
4 a r 4 a r 2 E 4 r 2 = rdr = 0 0 0 2 E= a = constant magnitude 2 0 1 dV . We 0 , and is coaxial with the charge E dA =
z
a 4 r 2 dr r
(The direction is radially outward from center for positive a; radially inward for negative a.) P24.70 In this case the charge density is not uniform, and Gauss's law is written as use a gaussian surface which is a cylinder of radius r, length distribution. (a) When r < R , this becomes E 2 r = shell of radius r, length E 2 r = (b)
z
z
b
g
0 0
z FGH
r 0
a
r dV . The element of volume is a cylindrical b
IJ K
b b
g FGH 2 r
2 0
0
I FG a  r IJ so inside the cylinder, E = JK H 2 3b K
, and thickness dr so that dV = 2 r dr .
0r 2r a 2 0 3b
FG H
IJ K
.
When r > R , Gauss's law becomes E 2 r =
g
0 0
R 0
z FGH a  br IJK b2 r drg or outside the cylinder, E = z
E dA = qin 0
0R2 2R a 2 0 r 3b
FG H
IJ K
.
y
P24.71
(a)
Consider a cylindrical shaped gaussian surface perpendicular to the yz plane with one end in the yz plane and the other end containing the point x: Use Gauss's law:
By symmetry, the electric field is zero in the yz plane and is perpendicular to dA over the wall of the gaussian cylinder. Therefore, the only contribution to the integral is over the end cap containing the point x :
gaussian surface
x z x
z
(b)
Ax q E dA = in or EA = 0 0
a f
so that at distance x from the midline of the slab, E = e E e F = = x me me m e 0
x . 0
FIG. P24.71 a =  2 x with =
a=
a f
FG H
IJ K
The acceleration of the electron is of the form
e . m e 0
Thus, the motion is simple harmonic with frequency
f=
1 = 2 2
e . m e 0
Chapter 24
49
P24.72
Consider the gaussian surface described in the solution to problem 71. (a) For x > d , 2 1 E dA = dq 0
dq = dV = Adx = CAx 2 dx
z
z
EA = E=
CA 0
3
d 2 0
z
x 2 dx = or
1 CA 3 0
FG IJ F d I H K GH 8 JK
3
Cd 24 0
E=
Cd 3 d i for x > ; 24 0 2
E=
Cd 3 d i for x <  24 0 2
(b)
For  E=
d d <x< 2 2
z
E dA = E=
1 CA x 2 CAx 3 dq = x dx = 3 0 0 0 0 Cx 3 i for x < 0 3 0 g= Gm r2 r at a distance r. Gm
z
z
Cx 3 i for x > 0 ; 3 0
P24.73
(a)
A point mass m creates a gravitational acceleration The flux of this field through a sphere is
4 r 2 = 4 Gm . r2 Since the r has divided out, we can visualize the field as unbroken field lines. The same flux would go through any other closed surface around the mass. If there are several or no masses inside a closed surface, each creates field to make its own contribution to the net flux according to g dA = 
z
e
j
z
g dA = 4 Gm in .
(b)
Take a spherical gaussian surface of radius r. The field is inward so g dA = g 4 r 2 cos 180 =  g 4 r 2
z
and Then, Or, since
4 4 Gm in = 4 G r 3 . 3 4 4 3 2  g 4 r = 4 G r and g = rG . 3 3 M EGr ME M EGr , g= or g = inward . = 4 3 3 3 RE RE 3 RE
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P24.2 P24.4 355 kN m 2 C (a) 2.34 kN m 2 C ; (b) +2.34 kN m 2 C ; (c) 0 q 0 ERh P24.14 P24.10 (a) 55.6 nC ; (b) The negative charge has a spherically symmetric distribution. (a) q q ; (b) ; (c) Plane and square 2 0 2 0 both subtend a solid angle of a hemisphere at the charge.
P24.12
P24.6 P24.8
(a) 1.36 MN m 2 C ; (b) 678 kN m 2 C ; (c) No; see the solution.
50
Gauss's Law
P24.16 P24.18 P24.20 P24.22 P24.24
1.77 pC m3 positive Q6q 6 0 28. 2 N m 2 C q 24 0 (a) 0; (b) 365 kN C ; (c) 1.46 MN C; (d) 649 kN C (a) 913 nC ; (b) 0 4.86 GN C away from the wall. It is constant close to the wall 76.4 kN C radially inward 3.50 kN (a) Qr Q ; (c) see the solution ; (b) 0 0 a 3
3
P24.46 P24.48 P24.50 P24.52 P24.54 P24.56 P24.58
(a) 248 nC m 2 ; (b) 496 nC m 2 (a) 2.56 MN C radially inward; (b) 0 (a) q 4 a
2
; (b)
Q+q 4 b 2
see the solution chw 2 2 see the solution (a) 4.00 nC; (b) +9.56 nC ; (c) +4.00 nC and +5.56 nC (a, b) see the solution; (c) (d) 102 pm 1 2 ke e2 ;
P24.26 P24.28
P24.30 P24.32 P24.34 P24.36 P24.38
P24.60
me R3
P24.62 P24.64 P24.66 P24.68 P24.70
(a) 0; (b)
to the right; (c) 0 0
see the solution 0.269 N m 2 C ; 2.38 pC see the solution (a)
713 nC ; (b) 5.70 C (a) 16.2 MN C toward the filament; (b) 8.09 MN C toward the filament; (c) 1.62 MN C toward the filament 1.15 nC m
2
P24.40 P24.42
0r R2 2r 2R ; (b) 0 a a 2 0 3b 2 0 r 3b
FG H
IJ K
FG H
IJ K
(a) 0; (b) 12.4 kN C radially outward; (c) 639 N C radially outward; (d) Nothing would change. (a) 0; (b) 79.9 MN C radially outward; (c) 0; (d) 7.34 MN C radially outward
P24.72
(a) E =
P24.44
Cd 3 d i for x > ; 24 0 2 3 Cd d E= i for x <  ; 24 0 2 3 Cx Cx 3 i for x > 0 ; E =  i for x < 0 (b) E = 3 0 3 0
25
Electric Potential
CHAPTER OUTLINE
25.1 25.2 25.3 Potential Difference and Electric Potential Potential Difference in a Uniform Electric Field Electric Potential and Potential Energy Due to Point Charges Obtaining the Value of the Electric Field from the Electric Potential Electric Potential Due to Continuous Charge Distributions Electric Potential Due to a Charged Conductor The Milliken Oil Drop Experiment Application of Electrostatistics
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q25.1 When one object B with electric charge is immersed in the electric field of another charge or charges A, the system possesses electric potential energy. The energy can be measured by seeing how much work the field does on the charge B as it moves to a reference location. We choose not to visualize A's effect on B as an actionatadistance, but as the result of a twostep process: Charge A creates electric potential throughout the surrounding space. Then the potential acts on B to inject the system with energy. The potential energy increases. When an outside agent makes it move in the direction of the field, the charge moves to a region of lower electric potential. Then the product of its negative charge with a lower number of volts gives a higher number of joules. Keep in mind that a negative charge feels an electric force in the opposite direction to the field, while the potential is the work done on the charge to move it in a field per unit charge.
25.4
25.5
25.6 25.7 25.8
Q25.2
Q25.3
To move like charges together from an infinite separation, at which the potential energy of the system of two charges is zero, requires work to be done on the system by an outside agent. Hence energy is stored, and potential energy is positive. As charges with opposite signs move together from an infinite separation, energy is released, and the potential energy of the set of charges becomes negative. The charge can be moved along any path parallel to the yz plane, namely perpendicular to the field. The electric field always points in the direction of the greatest change in electric potential. This is V V V , Ey =  and Ez =  . implied by the relationships Ex =  x y z (a) (b) The equipotential surfaces are nesting coaxial cylinders around an infinite line of charge. The equipotential surfaces are nesting concentric spheres around a uniformly charged sphere.
Q25.4 Q25.5
Q25.6
Q25.7
If there were a potential difference between two points on the conductor, the free electrons in the conductor would move until the potential difference disappears.
51
52
Electric Potential
Q25.8
No. The uniformly charged sphere, whether hollow or solid metal, is an equipotential volume. Since there is no electric field, this means that there is no change in electrical potential. The potential at every point inside is the same as the value of the potential at the surface. Infinitely far away from a line of charge, the line will not look like a point. In fact, without any distinguishing features, it is not possible to tell the distance from an infinitely long line of charge. Another way of stating the answer: The potential would diverge to infinity at any finite distance, if it were zero infinitely far away. The smaller sphere will. In the solution to the example referred to, equation 1 states that each will q have the same ratio of charge to radius, . In this case, the charge density is a surface charge r q , so the smallerradius sphere will have the greater charge density. density, 4 r 2 The main factor is the radius of the dome. One often overlooked aspect is also the humidity of the airdrier air has a larger dielectric breakdown strength, resulting in a higher attainable electric potential. If other grounded objects are nearby, the maximum potential might be reduced. The intenseoften oscillatingelectric fields around high voltage lines is large enough to ionize the air surrounding the cables. When the molecules recapture their electrons, they release that energy in the form of light. A sharp point in a charged conductor would imply a large electric field in that region. An electric discharge could most easily take place at that sharp point. Use a conductive box to shield the equipment. Any stray electric field will cause charges on the outer surface of the conductor to rearrange and cancel the stray field inside the volume it encloses. No charge stays on the inner sphere in equilibrium. If there were any, it would create an electric field in the wire to push more charge to the outer sphere. All of the charge is on the outer sphere. Therefore, zero charge is on the inner sphere and 10.0 C is on the outer sphere. The grounding wire can be touched equally well to any point on the sphere. Electrons will drain away into the ground and the sphere will be left positively charged. The ground, wire, and sphere are all conducting. They together form an equipotential volume at zero volts during the contact. However close the grounding wire is to the negative charge, electrons have no difficulty in moving within the metal through the grounding wire to ground. The ground can act as an infinite source or sink of electrons. In this case, it is an electron sink.
Q25.9
Q25.10
Q25.11
Q25.12
Q25.13 Q25.14 Q25.15
Q25.16
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 25.1 P25.1 Potential Difference and Electric Potential and so Q =  N A e =  6.02 10 23 1.60 10 19 = 9.63 10 4 C W = QV = 9.63 10 4 C 14.0 J C = 1.35 MJ
V = 14.0 V V = W , Q
e
je
j
e
jb
g
Chapter 25
53
P25.2
K = q V q = 6. 41 10 19 C
7.37 10 17 = q 115
a f
P25.3
(a)
Energy of the protonfield system is conserved as the proton moves from high to low potential, which can be defined for this problem as moving from 120 V down to 0 V.
K i + Ui + Emech = K f + U f
0 + qV + 0 =
1 2 mv p + 0 2 C 120 V
e1.60 10
(b)
19
ja
1 fFGH 1 V J C IJK = 1 e1.67 10 2
27
2 kg v p
j
v p = 1.52 10 5 m s The electron will gain speed in moving the other way, from Vi = 0 to V f = 120 V :
K i + Ui + Emech = K f + U f
0+0+0= 0= 1 2 mv e + qV 2
1 2 9.11 10 31 kg v e + 1.60 10 19 C 120 J C 2
e
j e
jb
g
v e = 6.49 10 6 m s P25.4
W = K =  qV
0 1 9.11 10 31 kg 4.20 10 5 m s 2
e
je
j
2
=  1.60 10 19 C V
e
j
From which, V = 0.502 V .
Section 25.2 P25.5 (a)
Potential Difference in a Uniform Electric Field We follow the path from (0, 0) to (20.0 cm, 0) to (20.0 cm, 50.0 cm). U =  (work done) U =  (work from origin to (20.0 cm, 0)) (work from (20.0 cm, 0) to (20.0 cm, 50.0 cm)) Note that the last term is equal to 0 because the force is perpendicular to the displacement.
U =  qEx x =  12.0 10 6 C 250 V m 0.200 m = 6.00 10 4 J
(b) V = U 6.00 10 4 J = = 50.0 J C = 50.0 V q 12.0 10 6 C
b g
e
jb
ga
f
P25.6
E=
V 25.0 10 3 J C = = 1.67 10 6 N C = 1.67 MN C d 1.50 10 2 m
54 P25.7
Electric Potential
U = 
1 1 m v 2  vi2 =  9.11 10 31 kg f 2 2
e
j
e
U = qV :
+6.23 10 18
jLNMe1.40 10 m sj  e3.70 10 = e1.60 10 jV
5 2 19
6
ms
j OQP = 6.23 10
2
18
J
V = 38.9 V. The origin is at highest potential.
P25.8 (a) (b) V = Ed = 5.90 10 3 V m 0.010 0 m = 59.0 V 1 mv 2 = qV : f 2 v f = 4.55 10 6 m s
B
e
jb
g
1 9.11 10 31 v 2 = 1.60 10 19 59.0 f 2
e
j
e
ja f
P25.9
VB  VA =  E ds =  E ds  E ds VB  VA =  E cos 180 VB  VA
a f z dy  aE cos 90.0f = a325fa0.800 f = +260 V
0 .500 0.300
A
z
C
A
z
B
C
z
0. 400
0 . 200
z
dx
FIG. P25.9 *P25.10 Assume the opposite. Then at some point A on some equipotential surface the electric field has a nonzero component Ep in the plane of the surface. Let a test charge start from point A and move some distance on the surface in the direction of the field component. Then V =  E ds is nonzero. The electric potential charges across the surface and it is not an equipotential surface. The contradiction shows that our assumption is false, that Ep = 0 , and that the field is perpendicular to the equipotential surface. P25.11 (a) Arbitrarily choose V = 0 at 0. Then at other points
A B
z
V =  Ex
and
U e = QV = QEx .
Between the endpoints of the motion,
bK + U
s
+ Ue
g = bK + U
i
s
+ Ue
g
f
1 2 2QE 0 + 0 + 0 = 0 + kx max  QEx max so x max = . 2 k (b) At equilibrium,
FIG. P25.11
Fx =  Fs + Fe = 0 or
kx = QE . QE . k
So the equilibrium position is at x = continued on next page
Chapter 25
55
(c)
The block's equation of motion is Let x = x 
QE QE , , or x = x + k k so the equation of motion becomes: d 2 x + QE k QE d 2 x k = k x + + QE = m x . , or 2 k m dt dt 2
Fx =  kx + QE = m dt 2
d2x
.
FG H
IJ K
b
g
FG IJ H K
This is the equation for simple harmonic motion a x =  2 x with The period of the motion is then (d)
=
T=
k . m 2
= 2
m . k
bK + U
s
+ U e i + Emech = K + U s + U e
g
b
g
f
0 + 0 + 0  k mgx max = 0 + x max = P25.12 2 QE  k mg k
b
g
1 2 kx max  QEx max 2
For the entire motion,
y f  yi = v yi t + 0  0 = vi t +
Fy = ma y :
1 ayt 2 2 2mvi  mg  qE =  t m 2 vi g E= q t
1 ayt 2 2 so ay = 
2 vi t
FG H
For the upward flight:
2 2 v yf = v yi + 2 a y y f  yi
0 = vi2 + 2  V = 
ymax 0 y
FG IJ FG IJ FG 1 v tIJ z H K H KH 4 K I 2.00 kg F 2b 20.1 m sg V = GH 4.10 s  9.80 m s JK LMN 1 b20.1 m sga4.10 sfOPQ = 4 5.00 10 C
E dy = +
max m 2 vi m 2 vi g y = g q t q t 0
FG H
d
IJ K
and
E=
2 vi t
IJ by K
2
i
0
m 2 vi  g j. q t 1 vi t 4
FG H
IJ K
max
g
i
and
y max =
6
40.2 kV
P25.13
Arbitrarily take V = 0 at the initial point. Then at distance d downfield, where L is the rod length, V =  Ed and U e =  LEd . (a)
aK + U f = a K + U f
i
f
0+0= v= (b)
1 Lv 2  LEd 2
2 Ed
=
2 40.0 10 6 C m 100 N C 2.00 m
e
b0.100 kg mg
jb
ga
f=
0.400 m s
The same.
56
Electric Potential
P25.14
Arbitrarily take V = 0 at point P. Then (from Equation 25.8) the potential at the original position of the charge is  E s =  EL cos . At the final point a, V =  EL . Suppose the table is frictionless: K +U i = K +U f
a
f a
f
0  qEL cos = v=
1 mv 2  qEL 2
2 qEL 1  cos = m
a
f
2 2.00 10 6 C 300 N C 1.50 m 1  cos 60.0 0.010 0 kg
e
jb
ga
fa
f=
0.300 m s
Section 25.3 P25.15 (a)
Electric Potential and Potential Energy Due to Point Charges The potential at 1.00 cm is V1 = k e 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C q = = 1.44 10 7 V . r 1.00 10 2 m
e
je
j
(b)
8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C q The potential at 2.00 cm is V2 = k e = = 0.719 10 7 V . r 2.00 10 2 m Thus, the difference in potential between the two points is V = V2  V1 = 7.19 10 8 V .
e
je
j
(c)
The approach is the same as above except the charge is 1.60 10 19 C . This changes the sign of each answer, with its magnitude remaining the same. That is, the potential at 1.00 cm is 1.44 10 7 V . The potential at 2.00 cm is 0.719 10 7 V , so V = V2  V1 = 7.19 10 8 V .
P25.16
(a) (b)
Since the charges are equal and placed symmetrically, F = 0 . Since F = qE = 0 , E = 0 . q V = 2 k e = 2 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 r
(c)
e
jFGH 2.00 10m C IJK 0.800
6
FIG. P25.16
V = 4.50 10 4 V = 45.0 kV
P25.17 (a) E= V= r= Q 4 0 r 2 Q 4 0 r V 3 000 V = = 6.00 m E 500 V m Q 4 0 6.00 m
(b)
V = 3 000 V = Q=
a
f
2.00 C
e8.99 10
3 000 V
9
V m C
j
a6.00 mf =
Chapter 25
57
P25.18
(a)
Ex =
k e q1 x2
+
ax  2.00f
ke q2
2
=0
becomes 2 qx 2 = q x  2.00 when
Ex = k e
F + q + 2 q I = 0 . GH x ax  2.00f JK
2 2
Dividing by k e , Therefore E = 0
a
f
2
x 2 + 4.00 x  4.00 = 0 .
x= 4.00 16.0 + 16.0 = 4.83 m . 2
(Note that the positive root does not correspond to a physically valid situation.) (b) V= k e q1 k q + e 2 =0 x 2.00  x or V = ke
Again solving for x, For 0 x 2.00 V = 0 and qi ri 2 q q = . x 2x when For x < 0
FG + q  2 q IJ = 0 . H x 2.00  x K 2 qx = qa 2.00  xf .
x = 0.667 m x = 2.00 m .
P25.19
V = k
i
V = 8.99 10 9 7.00 10 6
e
je
1 1 1 jLMN 0.010 0  0.010 0 + 0.038 7 OPQ
V = 1.10 10 7 V = 11.0 MV FIG. P25.19 P25.20 (a) 5.00 10 9 C 3.00 10 9 C 8.99 10 9 V m C qQ U= = = 3.86 10 7 J 4 0 r 0.350 m
e
je
a
je f
j
The minus sign means it takes 3.86 10 7 J to pull the two charges apart from 35 cm to a much larger separation. (b) V= Q1 Q2 + 4 0 r1 4 0 r2
9
e5.00 10 Cje8.99 10 =
0.175 m V = 103 V
9
V m C
j + e3.00 10 Cje8.99 10
9
9
V m C
j
0.175 m
58
Electric Potential
P25.21
U e = q 4V1 + q 4V2 + q 4V3 = q 4
FG 1 IJ FG q H 4 K H r
0
1
+
1
q 2 q3 + r2 r3
U e = 10.0 10 6 C U e = 8.95 J P25.22 (a) V=
e
je
2
8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2
F 1 1 jGG 0.600 m + 0.150 m + 0.600 m 1+ 0.150 m a f a f H
2
IJ K
2
I JJ K
k e q1 k e q 2 k q + =2 e r1 r2 r
9
V=2
F e8.99 10 N m C je2.00 10 Cj I GG JJ a1.00 mf + a0.500 mf H K
2 2 6 2 2
FG IJ H K
V = 3.22 10 4 V = 32.2 kV (b) P25.23
FIG. P25.22
U = qV = 3.00 10 6 C 3.22 10 4 J C = 9.65 10 2 J
e
je
j
U = U1 + U 2 + U 3 + U 4
U = 0 + U12 + U 13 + U 23 + U 14 + U 24 + U 34 U =0+ U= k eQ 2 k e Q 2 + s s
2
b
k eQ s
FG 4 + 2 IJ = H 2K
FG 1 + 1IJ + k Q FG 1 + H 2 K s H
e 2
g b
g
1 2
+1
IJ K
FIG. P25.23
5.41
k eQ s
2
An alternate way to get the term 4 + diagonal pairs. P25.24
FG H
2
IJ is to recognize that there are 4 side pairs and 2 face 2K
Each charge creates equal potential at the center. The total potential is: V =5
LM k b qg OP = NM R QP
e

5keq . R
P25.25
(a)
Each charge separately creates positive potential everywhere. The total potential produced by the three charges together is then the sum of three positive terms. There is no point located at a finite distance from the charges, at which this total potential is zero.
(b)
V=
2k e q ke q keq + = a a a
Chapter 25
59
P25.26
Consider the two spheres as a system. (a) Conservation of momentum: By conservation of energy, and v1 = 2 m 2 k e q1 q 2 m1 m1 + m 2 0 = m1 v1 i + m 2 v 2  i or v 2 = 0= k e  q1 q 2 d
e j
b g
m1 v1 m2
=
k e  q1 q 2 1 1 2 2 m1 v1 + m 2 v 2 + r1 + r2 2 2
b g
v1 =
FG 1  1 IJ b g H r + r dK 2b0.700 kg ge8.99 10 N m C je 2 10 C je3 10 C j F GH 8 101 b0.100 kg gb0.800 kg g
1 2 9 2 2 6 6
2 2 k e q1 q 2 k e q1 q 2 1 1 m 1 v1 2  = m1 v1 + 2 2 m2 r1 + r2 d
3
m

1 1.00 m
IJ K
= 10.8 m s v2 = (b) m1 v1 0.100 kg 10.8 m s = = 1.55 m s 0.700 kg m2
b
g
If the spheres are metal, electrons will move around on them with negligible energy loss to place the centers of excess charge on the insides of the spheres. Then just before they touch, the effective distance between charges will be less than r1 + r2 and the spheres will really be moving faster than calculated in (a) .
P25.27
Consider the two spheres as a system. (a) Conservation of momentum: or By conservation of energy, and 0 = m 1 v1 i + m 2 v 2  i v2 = 0= m1 v1 . m2
e j b g
k e  q1 q 2 d
b g
=
k e  q1 q 2 1 1 2 2 m1 v1 + m 2 v 2 + r1 + r2 2 2
2 2 k e q1 q 2 k e q1 q 2 1 1 m 1 v1 2  = m1 v1 + . 2 2 m2 r1 + r2 d
v1 =
2 m 2 k e q1 q 2 m 1 m1 + m 2
b
v2 = (b)
FG m IJ v Hm K
1 2
1
=
IJ K 2m k q q F 1 G m bm + m g H r + r

1 2
FG 1 gHr +r
2 1
1 d
1 e 1 2

2
1
2
1 d
IJ K
If the spheres are metal, electrons will move around on them with negligible energy loss to place the centers of excess charge on the insides of the spheres. Then just before they touch, the effective distance between charges will be less than r1 + r2 and the spheres will really be moving faster than calculated in (a) .
60
Electric Potential
*P25.28
(a)
In an empty universe, the 20nC charge can be placed at its location with no energy investment. At a distance of 4 cm, it creates a potential V1 = 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 20 10 9 C k e q1 = = 4.50 kV . 0.04 m r
e
je
j
To place the 10nC charge there we must put in energy U12 = q 2 V1 = 10 10 9 C 4.5 10 3 V = 4.50 10 5 J . Next, to bring up the 20nC charge requires energy U 23 + U 13 = q3 V2 + q3 V1 = q 3 V2 + V1
e
je
j
b
g
= 20 10 9 C 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 = 4.50 10 5 J  4.50 10 5 J The total energy of the three charges is
e
10 10 jFGH 100.04 m C + 200.08 m C IJK
9 9
U12 + U 23 + U13 = 4.50 10 5 J .
(b) The three fixed charges create this potential at the location where the fourth is released: V = V1 + V2 + V3 = 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 V = 3.00 10 3 V Energy of the system of four charged objects is conserved as the fourth charge flies away:
e
F jGH
20 10 9 0.04 2 + 0.03 2
+
10 10 9 20 10 9  0.03 0.05
I Cm JK
FG 1 mv + qV IJ = FG 1 mv + qV IJ H2 K H2 K 1 0 + e 40 10 C je3.00 10 V j = e 2.00 10 2 2e1.20 10 Jj = 3.46 10 m s v=
2 2 i f 9 3 4
13
kg v 2 + 0
j
2 10 13 kg
4
*P25.29
The original electrical potential energy is U e = qV = q ke q . d
In the final configuration we have mechanical equilibrium. The spring and electrostatic forces on k q2 k q each charge are  k 2d + q e 2 = 0 . Then k = e 3 . In the final configuration the total potential 18d 3d energy is keq 4 keq2 = . The missing energy must have become internal 3 3d 9 d k q 2 4k q 2 energy, as the system is isolated: e = e + Eint d 9d 1 2 kx 2
e 2
a f a f 1 k q + qV = a 2d f 2 18d
2
+q
Eint =
5 keq2 . 9 d
Chapter 25
P25.30
(a)
V x =
af
k +Q k e Q1 k e Q 2 + = e + r1 r2 x2 + a2 kQ = e 2 2 a x +a
2
b g
k e +Q x2
V x = V x
e
af
2 k eQ
af 2 b k Q ag = b x ag
(b) V y = V y =
F 2 GG H b x ag
2
I JJ +1K
b g + a  af
61
2
+1 FIG. P25.30(a)
bg
b g k aQ FGH y a1 1  y a1+ 1 IJK F 1  1 I V b yg = G bk Q ag H y a  1 y a + 1 JK
e e
k e Q 1 k e Q 2 k e +Q k e Q + = + r1 r2 ya y+a
b g
b g
FIG. P25.30(b) P25.31 V= 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 8.00 10 9 C kQ k eQ 72.0 V m = so r = e = . V V V r
e
je
j
For V = 100 V , 50.0 V, and 25.0 V, r = 0.720 m, 1.44 m, and 2.88 m . The radii are inversely proportional to the potential. P25.32 Using conservation of energy for the alpha particlenucleus system, we have But and Thus, Also so or 2 k e q qgold
2 m v
K f + U f = K i + Ui .
Ui = k e q qgold ri
ri . Ui = 0 .
K f = 0 ( v f = 0 at turning point), U f = Ki
k e q qgold rmin = = 1 2 m v 2
rmin =
2 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 2 79 1.60 10 19 C
e
e6.64 10
27
ja fa fe kg je 2.00 10
j
2
7
ms
j
2
= 2.74 10 14 m = 27.4 fm .
62
Electric Potential
P25.33
Using conservation of energy k e eQ k e qQ 1 = + mv 2 we have: 2 r1 r2 which gives: v= 2 k e eQ 1 1  m r1 r2
FG H
IJ K
or Thus, P25.34 U= k e qi q j rij
v=
a2fe8.99 10
9
N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C 10 9 C 9.11 10
31
je
je
kg
jF 1  1 I . GH 0.030 0 m 0.020 0 m JK
v = 7.26 10 6 m s . , summed over all pairs of i , j where i j .
b g L qb2 qg + b2 qgb3qg + b2 qgb3qg + qb2 qg + qb3qg + 2 qb2 qg OP U=k M a b a P a +b a +b Q NM b L 2  6 + 6 + 2 + 3  4 OP U=k q M N 0.400 0.200 0.400 0.200 0.447 0.447 Q L 4  4  1 OP = 3.96 J U = e8.99 10 je6.00 10 j M N 0.400 0.200 0.447 Q
e 2 2 2 2 e 2 9 6 2
FIG. P25.34
P25.35
Each charge moves off on its diagonal line. All charges have equal speeds. K +U i = K +U f
a
f
a
0+
FG 2 + 1 IJ k q = 2mv H 2K L F 1 IJ k q v = G1 + H 8 K mL
e 2 e 2
4k e q 2k q + e L 2L
2
2
f F 1 I 4k q = 4G mv J + H 2 K 2L
2 e 2
2
+
2k e q 2 2 2L
P25.36
A cube has 12 edges and 6 faces. Consequently, there are 12 edge pairs separated by s, 2 6 = 12 face diagonal pairs separated by 2s and 4 interior diagonal pairs separated 3s . U= keq2 k q2 12 4 + = 22.8 e 12 + s s 2 3 Obtaining the Value of the Electric Field from the Electric Potential
LM N
OP Q
Section 25.4 P25.37
V = a + bx = 10.0 V + 7.00 V m x
(a) At x = 0 , At x = 3.00 m , At x = 6.00 m , (b) E=
b
g
V = 10.0 V V = 11.0 V V = 32.0 V
dV =  b =  7.00 V m = 7.00 N C in the + x direction dx
b
g
Chapter 25
63
P25.38
(a)
For r < R
V=
k eQ R dV = 0 Er =  dr k eQ r kQ kQ dV =   e2 = e2 Er =  dr r r
(b)
For r R
V=
FG H
IJ K
P25.39
V = 5 x  3 x 2 y + 2 yz 2
Evaluate E at 1, 0 ,  2 Ex = 
b
g
V = 5 + 6 xy = 5 + 6 1 0 = 5 x V 2 2 = +3 x 2  2 z 2 = 3 1  2 2 = 5 Ey =  y Ez =  V = z
2 2 E = Ex + Ey
a fa f af a f 4yz = 4a0fa 2f = 0 + E = a 5 f + a 5 f + 0 =
2 z 2 2 2
7.07 N C
P25.40
(a)
E A > EB since E =
V s
(b) (c)
EB = 
62 V V = = 200 N C down 2 cm s
a f
The figure is shown to the right, with sample field lines sketched in. FIG. P25.40 V k eQ = ln y y
P25.41
Ey = 
Ey =
k eQ 1 y
LM MN
LM MNM
F GG H
+
2
+ y2
y
y2
2
+ y2 +
2
+ y2
OP PQ =
I OP JJ P K QP
k eQ y
2
+ y2
Section 25.5 P25.42
Electric Potential Due to Continuous Charge Distributions k eQ
V = V2 R  V0 =
R2 + 2R
a f
2

k eQ k eQ = R R
FG 1  1IJ = H 5 K
0.553
k eQ R
64
Electric Potential
P25.43
(a)
=
LM OP = C FG 1 IJ = N x Q m H mK
C m2
(b)
V = ke
z
z
L dq dx xdx L = ke = k e = k e L  d ln 1 + r r d+x d 0
z
z
LM N
FG H
IJ OP KQ
FIG. P25.43
P25.44
V=
z
k e dq = ke r L x. 2
xdx
b2 + L 2  x
b
g
2
Let z =
Then x = V = k e
zb
L  z , and dx =  dz 2 L 2  z  dz b +z
2 2 e
ga f =  k L
2
z
2 2
dz b +z
2 2 2 L
+ k e
z
zdz b +z
2 2 2
=
k eL ln z + z 2 + b 2 + k e z 2 + b 2 2
FH
IK
k L V =  e ln 2
e
LMF L I F L I OP GH 2  xJK + GH 2  xJK + b P + k FGH L  xIJK + b 2 MN Q L O L FL I k L M L 2  L + b L 2 g + b P F LI V= ln M PP + k MMN GH 2  LJK + b  GH 2 JK 2 MN L 2 + bL 2g + b Q L O k L M b + eL 4j  L 2 P V=  ln M 2 MN b + eL 4j + L 2 PPQ
L e 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 e 2 2 2 2 2 e
2
+ b2
OP PQ
P25.45
V = dV =
z
1 4 0
z
dq r .50 jFGH 70.140 10 C IJK = m
6
All bits of charge are at the same distance from O. So V = 1 Q = 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 4 0 R k e dq r 2 + x2 where dq = dA = 2 rdr rdr r + x2
2
FG IJ e H K
1.51 MV .
P25.46
dV =
V = 2k e
z
b a
= 2 k e
LM N
x2 + b2  x2 + a2
OP Q
FIG. P25.46
Chapter 25
65
P25.47
V = ke
3R R dq dx ds dx = ke + ke + ke x r R x R all charge semicircle 3 R
z
z
z
z
V =  k e ln  x V = k e ln
a f
R 3 R
+
3R + k e + k e ln 3 = k e + 2 ln 3 R
ke 3R R + k e ln x R R
a
f
Section 25.6 P25.48
Electric Potential Due to a Charged Conductor ke q r
Substituting given values into V =
7.50 10 3 V = Substituting q = 2.50 10 7 C , N=
e8.99 10
9
N m2 C 2 q
j
0.300 m
.
2.50 10 7 C = 1.56 10 12 electrons . 1.60 10 19 C e 
P25.49
(a)
E= 0 ;
8.99 10 9 26.0 10 6 ke q = = 1.67 MV V= 0.140 R
e
je
j
(b)
e8.99 10 je26.0 10 j = 5.84 MN C r a0.200f k q e8.99 10 je 26.0 10 j = = 1.17 MV V=
E= keq
2 9 6
=
2
away
9
6
e
R
0.200
(c)
E= V=
keq R2
e8.99 10 je26.0 10 j = = a0.140f
9 6 2
11.9 MN C away
ke q = 1.67 MV R
66
Electric Potential
*P25.50
(a)
Both spheres must be at the same potential according to where also Then
k e q1 k e q 2 = r1 r2
q1 + q 2 = 1.20 10 6 C .
q1 = q 2 r1 r2
q 2 r1 + q 2 = 1.20 10 6 C r2 q2 = 1.20 10 6 C = 0.300 10 6 C on the smaller sphere 1 + 6 cm 2 cm 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 0.900 10 6 C k e q1 = = 1.35 10 5 V r1 6 10 2 m
q1 = 1.20 10 6 C  0.300 10 6 C = 0.900 10 6 C V= (b)
e
je
j
Outside the larger sphere, E1 = k e q1 r12 r= V1 1.35 10 5 V r= r = 2. 25 10 6 V m away . 0.06 m r1
Outside the smaller sphere, E2 = 1.35 10 5 V r = 6.74 10 6 V m away . 0.02 m
The smaller sphere carries less charge but creates a much stronger electric field than the larger sphere.
Section 25.7 Section 25.8 P25.51 (a)
The Milliken Oil Drop Experiment Application of Electrostatistics Emax = 3.00 10 6 V m =
6
k eQ
Vmax = Emax r = 3.00 10 0.150 = 450 kV
(b) k eQmax r2 = Emax
a
e
r
2
=
f
k eQ 1 1 = Vmax r r r
FG IJ HK U V W
FG IJ HK
6 Emax r 2 3.00 10 0.150 = ke 8.99 10 9
Ror k Q S r T
max
= Vmax
Q max =
a
f
2
= 7.51 C
P25.52
V=
ke q k q V and E = e2 . Since E = , r r r r= 6.00 10 5 V V = = 0.200 m and E 3.00 10 6 V m Vr = 13.3 C ke
(b)
(a)
q=
Chapter 25
67
Additional Problems q q U = qV = k e 1 2 = 8.99 10 9 r12
P25.53 P25.54
e
a38fa54f 1.60 10 j a5.50 +e6.20f 10 j
15
19 2
= 4.04 10 11 J = 253 MeV
(a)
To make a spark 5 mm long in dry air between flat metal plates requires potential difference V = Ed = 3 10 6 V m 5 10 3 m = 1.5 10 4 V ~ 10 4 V .
e
je
j
(b)
The area of your skin is perhaps 1.5 m 2 , so model your body as a sphere with this surface area. Its radius is given by 1.5 m 2 = 4 r 2 , r = 0.35 m . We require that you are at the potential found in part (a): V= ke q r q= 1.5 10 4 V 0.35 m Vr J = k e 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 V C
a
f FG H
IJ FG N m IJ KH J K
q = 5.8 10 7 C ~ 10 6 C .
19 9 k e q1 q 2  8.99 10 1.60 10 = U= r 0.052 9 10 9
P25.55
(a)
e e
je je
j j
2
= 4.35 10 18 J = 27.2 eV
2
(b)
19 9 k e q1 q 2  8.99 10 1.60 10 U= = r 2 2 0.052 9 10 9
e
j
= 6.80 eV
(c) P25.56
U=
k e q1 q 2  k e e 2 = = 0 r
From Example 25.5, the potential created by the ring at the electron's starting point is Vi = k eQ x i2 +a
2
=
k e 2a xi2 +a
b
g
2
while at the center, it is V f = 2 k e . From conservation of energy, 0 +  eVi = v2 f
v2 f
i I ek F 2e = dV  V i = 4m GG1  x a+ a JJ m H K 4 e1.60 10 je8.99 10 je1.00 10 j F 0.200 GG1  = 9.11 10 H a0.100f + a0.200f
e f i e e 2 i 2 19 9 7 31 2
b g
1 m e v 2 +  eV f f 2
d
2
I JJ K
v f = 1.45 10 7 m s
68
Electric Potential
*P25.57
The plates create uniform electric field to the right in the picture, with magnitude
0 . d d Assume the ball swings a small distance x to the right. It moves to a place where the voltage created 2V by the plates is lower by  Ex =  0 x . Its ground connection maintains it at V = 0 by allowing d 2V x k q 2V xR . Then the ball charge q to flow from ground onto the ball, where  0 + e = 0 q= 0 d R ked
V0  V0
b g = 2V
feels electric force F = qE =
4V02 xR ked 2
to the right. For equilibrium this must be balanced by the T sin = 4V02 xR ked 2
horizontal component of string tension according to T cos = mg tan = 4V02 xR k e d mg
2
=
k d 2 mg x for small x. Then V0 = e L 4RL
F GH
I JK
12
.
If V0 is less than this value, the only equilibrium position of the ball is hanging straight down. If V0 exceeds this value the ball will swing over to one plate or the other. P25.58 (a) Take the origin at the point where we will find the potential. One ring, of width dx, has Qdx charge and, according to Example 25.5, creates potential h k eQdx dV = . h x2 + R2 The whole stack of rings creates potential V=
all charge
z
dV =
d+h d
z
k eQdx h x2 + R2
=
k eQ ln x + x 2 + R 2 h
FH
IK
d+h d
=
d + h + d + h + R2 k eQ ln h d + d2 + R2
F GG H
a f
2
I JJ K
.
(b)
A disk of thickness dx has charge Example 25.6, it creates potential Qdx R2h Integrating, dV = 2 k e V=
d+h d
Qdx Qdx and chargeperarea . According to h R2h
FH
x2 + R2  x .
IK
V=
z R h FH x + R dx  xdxIK = 2Rk Q LMN 12 x x + R h L kQM ad + hf ad + hf + R  d d + R  2dh  h R hM NM
2 k eQ
2 2 2 e 2 2 e 2 2 2 2 2
2
+
R2 x2 ln x + x 2 + R 2  2 2
2 2
2
+R
FH IK OP Q F d + h + ad + hf + R I OP lnG GH d + d + R JJK PQP
d+h d 2 2 2
P25.59
W = Vdq
0
Q
z
where V =
ke q . R k eQ 2 . 2R
Therefore, W =
Chapter 25
69
P25.60
The positive plate by itself creates a field E =
36.0 10 9 C m 2 = 2.03 kN C away = 2 0 2 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2
e
j
from the + plate. The negative plate by itself creates the same size field and between the plates it is in the same direction. Together the plates create a uniform field 4.07 kN C in the space between. (a) Take V = 0 at the negative plate. The potential at the positive plate is then V 0=
12.0 cm 0
zb
4.07 kN C dx .
g
The potential difference between the plates is V = 4.07 10 3 N C 0.120 m = 488 V . (b)
e
ja
f
FG 1 mv + qV IJ = FG 1 mv + qV IJ H2 K H2 K 1 qV = e1.60 10 C ja 488 V f = mv 2
2 2 i f 19
2 f
= 7.81 10 17 J
(c) (d)
v f = 306 km s v 2 = vi2 + 2 a x f  xi f
d
i
e3.06 10
(e) (f)
5
ms
j
2
= 0 + 2 a 0.120 m
a
f j
a = 3.90 10 11 m s 2
F = ma = e1.67 10 27
E=
kg 3.90 10 11 m s 2 = 6.51 10 16 N
je
F 6.51 10 16 N = = 4.07 kN C q 1.60 10 19 C
B
P25.61
(a)
VB  VA =  E ds and the field at distance r from a uniformly
A
z
charged rod (where r > radius of charged rod) is E=
2 0 r
=
2ke . r
In this case, the field between the central wire and the coaxial cylinder is directed perpendicular to the line of charge so that VB  VA = 
rb ra
z
r 2ke dr = 2 k e ln a , r rb
FG IJ H K
FIG. P25.61
or
V = 2 k e ln
FG r IJ Hr K
a b
.
continued on next page
70
Electric Potential
(b)
From part (a), when the outer cylinder is considered to be at zero potential, the potential at a distance r from the axis is V = 2 k e ln
FG r IJ . HrK
a
The field at r is given by E=
r V = 2 k e ra r
FG H
IJ FG  r IJ = 2k . KH r K r
a 2 e
But, from part (a), 2k e = Therefore,
b V F 1 I E= GJ lnbr r g H r K
a b
V . ln ra rb
g
.
P25.62
(a)
From Problem 61, E= V 1 . ln ra rb r
b
g
We require just outside the central wire 5.50 10 6 V m =
1
50.0 10 3 V ln 0.850 m rb
b
FG 1 IJ gHr K
b
or
e110 m jr lnFGH 0.850 m IJK = 1 . r
b b 1
We solve by homing in on the required value
e110 m
a f jr lnFGH 0.850 m IJK r
rb m
b b
0.0100 4.89
0.00100 0.740
0.00150 1.05
0.00145 1.017
0.00143 1.005
0.00142 0.999
Thus, to three significant figures,
rb = 1.42 mm .
(b) At ra , E=
r2 r1
50.0 kV ln 0.850 m 0.001 42 m
b
FG 1 IJ = g H 0.850 m K
9.20 kV m .
P25.63
V2  V1 =  E dr = 
z
r2 r1
z
2 0 r
dr
V2  V1 =
r  ln 2 r1 2 0
FG IJ H K
Chapter 25
71 2 +
*P25.64
Take the illustration presented with the problem as an initial picture. No external horizontal forces act on the set of four balls, so its center of mass stays fixed at the location of the center of the square. As the charged balls 1 and 2 swing out and away from each other, balls 3 and 4 move up with equal ycomponents of velocity. The maximumkineticenergy point is illustrated. System energy is conserved: keq2 keq 2 1 1 1 1 = + mv 2 + mv 2 + mv 2 + mv 2 3a 2 2 2 2 a 2k e q 2 = 2mv 2 3a v= keq2 3 am V x , y, z = r1 =
v 1 + v 3 CM
v
4
v
FIG. P25.64
P25.65
For the given charge distribution, where The surface on which is given by This gives: which may be written in the form:
b
g k rbqg + k br2 qg
e e 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
ax + Rf + y + z and r = x + y + z . V b x , y , zg = 0 F1 2I k qG  J = 0 , or 2r = r . Hr r K 4a x + R f + 4y + 4z = x + y + z F8 I F4 I x + y + z + G RJ x + a0fy + a0fz + G R J = 0 . H3 K H3 K
e 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
[1]
The general equation for a sphere of radius a centered at x 0 , y 0 , z0 is:
b
g
or
bx  x g + by  y g + bz  z g  a = 0 x + y + z + b 2 x gx + b 2 y gy + b 2 z gz + e x
0 2 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0
2 0
2 2 + y 0 + z0  a 2 = 0 .
j
[2]
Comparing equations [1] and [2], it is seen that the equipotential surface for which V = 0 is indeed a sphere and that: 2 x 0 = Thus, x 0 =  4 8 2 2 2 R ; 2 y 0 = 0 ; 2 z 0 = 0 ; x 0 + y 0 + z 0  a 2 = R 2 . 3 3
4 16 4 2 4 2 R , y 0 = z 0 = 0 , and a 2 =  R = R . 3 9 3 9
FG H
IJ K
The equipotential surface is therefore a sphere centered at
FG  4 R, 0 , 0IJ H 3 K
, having a radius
2 R . 3
72
Electric Potential
P25.66
(a)
From Gauss's law, qA
2 8
E A = 0 (no charge within)
EB = k e EC = k e
1.00 10 e j e r j = FGH 89.9 IJK V m r r bq + q g = e8.99 10 j e5.00 10 j = FG  45.0 IJ V m H r K r r = 8.99 10 9
B 2 2 9 A 9 2 2
(b)
VC = k e
bq
A
+ qB r
g = e8.99 10 j e5.00 10 j = FG  45.0 IJ V H r K r
9 9
At r2 , V = 
45.0 = 150 V 0.300 89.9 1 1 = dr = 150 + 89.9  2 r 0.300 r2 r
Inside r2 , VB = 150 V +
z
r
FG H
IJ FG 450 + 89.9 IJ V K H r K
At r1 , V = 450 + P25.67
89.9 = +150 V so VA = +150 V . 0.150
From Example 25.5, the potential at the center of the ring is kQ Vi = e and the potential at an infinite distance from the ring is R V f = 0 . Thus, the initial and final potential energies of the point chargering system are: U i = QVi = and k eQ 2 R FIG. P25.67
U f = QV f = 0 .
From conservation of energy,
K f + U f = K i + Ui
or k Q2 1 Mv 2 + 0 = 0 + e f R 2 vf = 2 k eQ 2 MR .
giving
P25.68
V = ke
a+L a
z
dx
x2 + b2
= k ln L x + e x MN
e
2
+b
2
j OPQ
a +L
=
a
L a + L + aa + Lf k ln M MMN a + a + b
e 2
2 2
+ b2
OP PPQ
Chapter 25
73
*P25.69
(a)
V=
keq ke q keq  = r2  r1 r1 r2 r1 r2
b
g
r2  r1 2 a cos . V ke q k p cos 2 a cos e 2 . r1 r2 r
From the figure, for r >> a , Then 2 k e p cos V = r r3
(b)
Er = 
1 In spherical coordinates, the component of the gradient is . r Therefore, For r >> a and E =  k p sin 1 V . = e 3 r r
e 3
FG IJ H K
FIG. P25.69
FG IJ H K
and
a f 2rk p E a90f = 0 , E a0f = 0 k p E a90f = . r
E r 0 =
r
e 3
These results are reasonable for r >> a . Their directions are as shown in Figure 25.13 (c). However, for r 0 , E 0 . This is unreasonable, since r is not much greater than a if it is 0. (c) V= k e py
2
af
ex
+ y2
j
3 2
and
Ex = 
3 k e pxy V = 52 2 x x + y2
e
j
2 2 V k e p 2 y  x = Ey =  5 2 y x2 + y2
e
j
e
j
74
Electric Potential
P25.70
Inside the sphere, Ex = Ey = Ez = 0 . Outside,
j IK L F 3I So E =  M0 + 0 + E a z G  J e x + y + z j a2xfOPQ = 3E a xzex H 2K N V I =  F V  E z + E a ze x + y + z j E = K y y H F 3I E =  E a zG  J e x + y + z j 2 y = 3E a yze x + y + z j H 2K V F 3I E = = E  E a zG  J e x + y + z j a 2 zf  E a e x + y + z j H 2K z E = E + E a e 2 z  x  y je x + y + z j
Ex =  V = V0  E0 z + E0 a 3 z x 2 + y 2 + z 2 x x
F H
e
3 2
x
0
3
2
2
2 5 2
0
3
2
+ y2 + z2
j
5 2
y
0
0
0
3
2
2
2 3 2
y
0
3
2
2
2 5 2
0
3
2
2
2 5 2
z
0
0
3
2
2
2 5 2
0
3
2
2
2 3 2
z
0
0
3
2
2
2
2
2
2 5 2
P25.71
For an element of area which is a ring of radius r and width dr, dV = dq = dA = Cr 2 rdr and V = C 2 k e
k e dq r 2 + x2
.
b
g
b
gz
0
R
r 2 dr r 2 + x2
= C k e R R 2 + x 2 + x 2 ln
L b gMM N
F GH R +
x R2 + x2
I OP JK P Q
.
P25.72
dU = Vdq where the potential V =
ke q . r
The element of charge in a shell is dq = (volume element) or dq = 4 r 2 dr and the charge q in a sphere of radius r is q = 4 r 2 dr =
0
e
j
z
r
F 4 r I . GH 3 JK
3 3 e 2 2 e 2 4
Substituting this into the expression for dU, we have
FG k q IJ dq = k FG 4 r IJ FG 1 IJ e4 r dr j = k FG 16 IJ r dr HrK H 3 K H 3 KH r K F 16 I r dr = k F 16 I R U = z dU = k G GH 15 JK H 3 JK z
dU =
e 2 e 2 R 0 4 2 e 2 5
3 k eQ 2 4 But the total charge, Q = R 3 . Therefore, U = . 5 R 3
Chapter 25
75
*P25.73
(a)
The whole charge on the cube is 3 q = 100 10 6 C m3 0.1 m = 10 7 C . Divide up the cube into
e
ja
f
64 or more elements. The little cube labeled a creates at P ke q . The others in the potential 2 64 6.25 + 1.25 2 + 1.25 2 10 2 m horizontal row behind it contribute 64 10 2
e
keq
F G mj H
1 8.75 2 + 3.125
+
1 11.25 2 + 3.125
+
1 13.75 2
I. J + 3.125 K
1 2
d c
b a P
The little cubes in the rows containing b and c add 64 10
e
2k e q
2
Le6.25 + 1.25 + 3.75 j + e8.75 + 15.625j N mj M OP + e11.25 + 15.625j + e13.75 + 15.625 j Q
2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
1.25 cm FIG. P25.73
and the bits in row d make potential at P 64 10 2
e
keq
LMe6.25 mj N
+ 28.125
j
1 2
+ ... + 13.75 2 + 28.125
e
j OQP .
1 2
The whole potential at P is
8.987 6 10 9 Nm 2 10 7 C C 2 64 10 2 m
e
j
b1.580 190g4 =
8 876 V . If we use
more subdivisions of the large cube, we get the same answer to four digits. (b) A sphere centered at the same point would create potential k e q 8.987 6 10 9 Nm 2 10 7 C = = 8 988 V , larger by 112 V . r C2 10 1 m
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P25.2 P25.4 P25.6 P25.8 P25.10 P25.12 P25.14 P25.16 P25.18 P25.20
6.41 10 19 C 0.502 V
1.67 MN C (a) 59.0 V ; (b) 4.55 Mm s see the solution 40.2 kV 0.300 m s (a) 0; (b) 0; (c) 45.0 kV (a) 4.83 m ; (b) 0.667 m and 2.00 m (a) 386 nJ ; (b) 103 V
P25.22 P25.24 P25.26 P25.28 P25.30 P25.32 P25.34 P25.36
(a) 32.2 kV ; (b) 96.5 mJ  5k e q R
(a) 10.8 m s and 1.55 m s ; (b) greater (a) 45.0 J ; (b) 34.6 km s see the solution 27.4 fm 3.96 J 22.8 keq 2 s
76
Electric Potential
P25.38 P25.40
(a) 0; (b)
k eQ r
2
radially outward
P25.60
(a) 488 V ; (b) 7.81 10 17 J ; (c) 306 km s ; (d) 390 Gm s 2 toward the negative plate; (e) 6.51 10 16 N toward the negative plate; (f) 4.07 kN C toward the negative plate
(a) larger at A; (b) 200 N C down; (c) see the solution 0.553 k eQ R b
2
P25.42
P25.62 + e L 4j  L 2 O PP + e L 4j + L 2 P Q
2 2
(a) 1.42 mm ; (b) 9. 20 kV m
P25.44
L k L M  ln M 2 MN
e
P25.64
Fk q I GH 3am JK
e 2
12
b2
P25.46 P25.48 P25.50
2 k e
LM N
x2 + b 2  x2 + a2
OP Q
P25.66
1.56 10 12 electrons
(a) 135 kV ; (b) 2.25 MV m away from the large sphere and 6.74 MV m away from the small sphere
P25.52 P25.54 P25.56
(a) 13.3 C ; (b) 0.200 m (a) ~ 10 V ; (b) ~ 10 14.5 Mm s d + h + d + h + R2 k eQ ln h d + d 2 + R2
2 2 2 2
P25.68
4
6
C
P25.70
FG 89.9 IJ V m radially Hr K F 45.0 IJ V m radially outward; E = G  H r K outward; 89.9 I F (b) V = 150 V ; V = G 450 + J V; H r K F 45.0 IJ V V = G H r K L a + L + aa + Lf + b OP k ln M MNM a + a + b PQP
(a) E A = 0 ; E B =
C 2 2 A B C 2 2 e 2 2
P25.58
F a f IJ ; GG JK H LMad + hf ad + hf + R  d d + R kQ M F d + h + a d + hf + R (b) R h M2dh  h + R lnG MM GH d + d + R N
(a)
2 e 2 2 2 2 2 2
2
OP I PP JJ P K PQ
e j ; E = 3E a yze x + y + z j ; E a e2z  x  y j E =E + outside and ex + y + z j
Ex = 3E0 a 3 xz x 2 + y 2 + z 2
y 0 3 2 2 5 2 2 5 2 2 0 3 2 2 z 0 2 2 2 5 2
E = 0 inside P25.72 3 k eQ 2 5 R
26
Capacitance and Dielectrics
CHAPTER OUTLINE
26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7 Definition of Capacitance Calculating Capacitance Combinations of Capacitors Energy Stored in a Charged Capacitor Capacitors with Dielectrics Electric Dipole in an Electric Field An Atomic Description of Dielectrics
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q26.1 Nothing happens to the charge if the wires are disconnected. If the wires are connected to each other, charges in the single conductor which now exists move between the wires and the plates until the entire conductor is at a single potential and the capacitor is discharged. 336 km. The plate area would need to be 1 m2 . 0
Q26.2 Q26.3
The parallelconnected capacitors store more energy, since they have higher equivalent capacitance.
Q26.4
Seventeen combinations: Individual Parallel SeriesParallel C1 , C 2 , C 3 C 1 + C 2 + C 3 , C 1 + C 2 , C1 + C 3 , C 2 + C 3
Series Q26.5
FG 1 + 1 IJ + C , FG 1 + 1 IJ + C , FG 1 + 1 IJ + C HC C K HC C K HC C K FG 1 + 1 IJ , FG 1 + 1 IJ , FG 1 + 1 IJ HC +C C K HC +C C K HC +C C K FG 1 + 1 + 1 IJ , FG 1 + 1 IJ , FG 1 + 1 IJ , FG 1 + 1 IJ HC C C K HC C K HC C K HC C K
1 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 3
1
This arrangement would decrease the potential difference between the plates of any individual capacitor by a factor of 2, thus decreasing the possibility of dielectric breakdown. Depending on the application, this could be the difference between the life or death of some other (most likely more expensive) electrical component connected to the capacitors. Nonot just using rules about capacitors in series or in parallel. See Problem 72 for an example. If connections can be made to a combination of capacitors at more than two points, the combination may be irreducible. 77
Q26.6
78
Capacitance and Dielectrics
Q26.7
A capacitor stores energy in the electric field between the plates. This is most easily seen when using a "dissectable" capacitor. If the capacitor is charged, carefully pull it apart into its component pieces. One will find that very little residual charge remains on each plate. When reassembled, the capacitor is suddenly "recharged"by inductiondue to the electric field set up and "stored" in the dielectric. This proves to be an instructive classroom demonstration, especially when you ask a student to reconstruct the capacitor without supplying him/her with any rubber gloves or other insulating material. (Of course, this is after they sign a liability waiver). The work you do to pull the plates apart becomes additional electric potential energy stored in the capacitor. The charge is constant and the capacitance decreases but the potential difference increases 1 to drive up the potential energy QV . The electric field between the plates is constant in strength 2 but fills more volume as you pull the plates apart. A capacitor stores energy in the electric field inside the dielectric. Once the external voltage source is removedprovided that there is no external resistance through which the capacitor can dischargethe capacitor can hold onto this energy for a very long time. To make the capacitor safe to handle, you can discharge the capacitor through a conductor, such as a screwdriver, provided that you only touch the insulating handle. If the capacitor is a large one, it is best to use an external resistor to discharge the capacitor more slowly to prevent damage to the dielectric, or welding of the screwdriver to the terminals of the capacitor. The work done, W = QV , is the work done by an external agent, like a battery, to move a charge through a potential difference, V . To determine the energy in a charged capacitor, we must add the work done to move bits of charge from one plate to the other. Initially, there is no potential difference between the plates of an uncharged capacitor. As more charge is transferred from one plate to the other, the potential difference increases as shown in Figure 26.12, meaning that more work is needed to transfer each additional bit of charge. The total work is the area under the curve of 1 Figure 26.12, and thus W = QV . 2 Energy is proportional to voltage squared. It gets four times larger. Let C = the capacitance of an individual capacitor, and C s represent the equivalent capacitance of the group in series. While being charged in parallel, each capacitor receives charge Q = CVcharge = 500 10 4 F 800 V = 0.400 C . While being discharged in series, (or 10 times the original voltage). Vdischarge = Q Q 0. 400 C = = = 8.00 kV C s C 10 5.00 10 5 F
Q26.8
Q26.9
Q26.10
Q26.11 Q26.12
e
ja
f
Q26.13
Put a material with higher dielectric strength between the plates, or evacuate the space between the plates. At very high voltages, you may want to cool off the plates or choose to make them of a different chemically stable material, because atoms in the plates themselves can ionize, showing thermionic emission under high electric fields. The potential difference must decrease. Since there is no external power supply, the charge on the capacitor, Q, will remain constantthat is assuming that the resistance of the meter is sufficiently large. Adding a dielectric increases the capacitance, which must therefore decrease the potential difference between the plates. Each polar molecule acts like an electric "compass" needle, aligning itself with the external electric field set up by the charged plates. The contribution of these electric dipoles pointing in the same direction reduces the net electric field. As each dipole falls into a configuration of lower potential energy it can contribute to increasing the internal energy of the material.
Q26.14
Q26.15
Chapter 26
79
Q26.16 Q26.17
The material of the dielectric may be able to support a larger electric field than air, without breaking down to pass a spark between the capacitor plates. The dielectric strength is a measure of the potential difference per unit length that a dielectric can withstand without having individual molecules ionized, leaving in its wake a conducting path from plate to plate. For example, dry air has a dielectric strength of about 3 MV/m. The dielectric constant in effect describes the contribution of the electric dipoles of the polar molecules in the dielectric to the electric field once aligned. In water, the oxygen atom and one hydrogen atom considered alone have an electric dipole moment that points from the hydrogen to the oxygen. The other OH pair has its own dipole moment that points again toward the oxygen. Due to the geometry of the molecule, these dipole moments add to have a nonzero component along the axis of symmetry and pointing toward the oxygen. A nonpolarized molecule could either have no intrinsic dipole moments, or have dipole moments that add to zero. An example of the latter case is CO 2 . The molecule is structured so that each CO pair has a dipole moment, but since both dipole moments have the same magnitude and opposite directiondue to the linear geometry of the moleculethe entire molecule has no dipole moment. Heating a dielectric will decrease its dielectric constant, decreasing the capacitance of a capacitor. When you heat a material, the average kinetic energy per molecule increases. If you refer back to the answer to Question 26.15, each polar molecule will no longer be nicely aligned with the applied electric field, but will begin to "dither"rock back and fortheffectively decreasing its contribution to the overall field. The primary choice would be the dielectric. You would want to chose a dielectric that has a large dielectric constant and dielectric strength, such as strontium titanate, where 233 (Table 26.1). A convenient choice could be thick plastic or mylar. Secondly, geometry would be a factor. To maximize capacitance, one would want the individual plates as close as possible, since the capacitance is proportional to the inverse of the plate separationhence the need for a dielectric with a high dielectric strength. Also, one would want to build, instead of a single parallel plate capacitor, several capacitors in parallel. This could be achieved through "stacking" the plates of the capacitor. For example, you can alternately lay down sheets of a conducting material, such as aluminum foil, sandwiched between your sheets of insulating dielectric. Making sure that none of the conducting sheets are in contact with their next neighbors, connect every other plate together. Figure Q26.20 illustrates this idea.
Q26.18
Q26.19
Q26.20
Dielectric
Conductor
FIG. Q26.20 This technique is often used when "homebrewing" signal capacitors for radio applications, as they can withstand huge potential differences without flashover (without either discharge between plates around the dielectric or dielectric breakdown). One variation on this technique is to sandwich together flexible materials such as aluminum roof flashing and thick plastic, so the whole product can be rolled up into a "capacitor burrito" and placed in an insulating tube, such as a PVC pipe, and then filled with motor oil (again to prevent flashover).
80
Capacitance and Dielectrics
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 26.1 P26.1 (a) (b) Definition of Capacitance Q = CV = 4.00 10 6 F 12.0 V = 4.80 10 5 C = 48.0 C Q = CV = 4.00 10 6 F 1.50 V = 6.00 10 6 C = 6.00 C C= Q 10.0 10 6 C = = 1.00 10 6 F = 1.00 F V 10.0 V Q 100 10 6 C = = 100 V C 1.00 10 6 F
e e
ja ja
f
f
P26.2
(a)
(b)
V =
Section 26.2 P26.3 E=
Calculating Capacitance keq r2 : q=
e4.90 10 N Cja0.210 mf e8.99 10 N m C j
4 9 2 2
2
= 0.240 C
(a)
=
q 0.240 10 6 = = 1.33 C m 2 A 4 0.120 2
a
f
(b) P26.4 (a)
C = 4 0 r = 4 8.85 10 12 0.120 = 13.3 pF C = 4 0 R C R= = k eC = 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.00 10 12 F = 8.99 mm 4 0
e
ja
f
e
je
j
(b)
C = 4 0 R =
4 8.85 10 12 C 2 2.00 10 3 m N m
2
e
je
j=
0. 222 pF
(c) P26.5 (a)
Q = CV = 2.22 10 13 F 100 V = 2.22 10 11 C Q1 R1 = Q 2 R2
e
ja
f
Q1 + Q 2 = 1 +
FG H
R1 Q 2 = 3.50Q 2 = 7.00 C R2
IJ K
Q 2 = 2.00 C
(b) V1 = V2 =
Q1 = 5.00 C
Q1 Q 2 5.00 C = = = 8.99 10 4 V = 89.9 kV 1 9 C1 C 2 8.99 10 m F 0.500 m
e
j a
f
Chapter 26
81
P26.6
12 3 2 0 A 1.00 8.85 10 C 1.00 10 m C= = d N m 2 800 m
a fe
a
je
f
j
2
= 11.1 nF
The potential between ground and cloud is V = Ed = 3.00 10 6 N C 800 m = 2.40 10 9 V Q = C V = 11.1 10 9 C V 2.40 10 9 V = 26.6 C P26.7 (a) V = Ed E= 20.0 V 1.80 10 3 m = 11.1 kV m
a f e
e
ja
f
je
j
(b)
E=
0
= 1.11 10 4 N C 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2 = 98.3 nC m 2
8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2 7.60 cm 2 1.00 m 100 cm 0 A = C= d 1.80 10 3 m V = Q C Q = 20.0 V 3.74 10 12 F = 74.7 pC P26.8 C=
e
je
j
(c)
e
je
jb
g
2
= 3.74 pF
(d)
a
fe
j
0 A = 60.0 10 15 F d
12 21.0 10 12 0 A 1 8.85 10 = C 60.0 10 15 d = 3.10 10 9 m = 3.10 nm
d=
a fe
je
j
P26.9
Q=
0 A V d 0 V
a f
V Q = = 0 A d
a f
d=
a f=
e30.0 10
e8.85 10
9
12
C 2 N m 2 150 V
C cm 2 1.00 10 4 cm 2 m 2
je
ja
f
j
= 4.42 m
82
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.10
With = , the plates are out of mesh and the overlap area is zero. With
R2 . By proportion, the 2  R2 effective area of a single sheet of charge is 2 When there are two plates in each comb, the number of adjoining sheets of positive and negative charge is 3, as shown in the sketch. When there are N plates on each comb, the number of parallel capacitors is 2 N  1 and the total capacitance is = 0 , the overlap area is that of a semicircle,
a
f
FIG. P26.10
C = 2N  1
a
A f distance = a2 N  1f d a2  f R
0 effective 0
2
2
=
a2 N  1f a  fR
0
2
d
.
P26.11
(a)
(b)
c h 2e8.99 10 j lnc h = F bI V = 2 k lnG J Method 1: H aK
2 k e ln
b a 9 7. 27 2.58 e
C=
=
50.0
2.68 nF
=
8.10 10 6 C = 1.62 10 7 C m 50.0 m 7.27 = 3.02 kV V = 2 8.99 10 9 1.62 10 7 ln 2.58 q =
e
je
j FGH
IJ K
Method 2: P26.12
V =
Q 8.10 10 6 = = 3.02 kV C 2.68 10 9 k eQ ; a
Let the radii be b and a with b = 2 a . Put charge Q on the inner conductor and Q on the outer. Electric field exists only in the volume between them. The potential of the inner sphere is Va = that of the outer is Vb = Va  Vb = Here C = k eQ . Then b
k e Q k eQ Q ba  = a b 4 0 ab 4 0 2 a 2 = 8 0 a a
FG H
IJ and C = Q K V V
a
=
b
4 0 ab . ba
a=
C . 8 0
The intervening volume is
Volume =
C3 4 3 4 3 4 4 7C 3 b  a = 7 a3 = 7 3 3 3 = 3 3 3 3 8 0 384 2 3 0 7 20.0 10 6 384
2
Volume = The outer sphere is 360 km in diameter. P26.13 (a) C=
e
e8.85 10
12
IJ FG IJ K H K C N mj = 2.13 10 C N m j
2 3 2 2 3
FG H
16
m3 .
0.070 0 0.140 ab = = 15.6 pF ke b  a 8.99 10 9 0.140  0.070 0
a f e
b
jb
ga
f
g
(b)
C=
Q V
V =
Q 4.00 10 6 C = = 256 kV C 15.6 10 12 F
Chapter 26
83
P26.14
Fy = 0 : Fx = 0 :
Dividing, so and
T cos  mg = 0 T sin  Eq = 0
tan = E= Eq mg
mg tan q mgd tan . q
V = Ed =
P26.15
C = 4 0 R = 4 8.85 10 12 C N m 2 6.37 10 6 m = 7.08 10 4 F
e
je
j
Section 26.3 P26.16 (a)
Combinations of Capacitors Capacitors in parallel add. Thus, the equivalent capacitor has a value of
C eq = C1 + C 2 = 5.00 F + 12.0 F = 17.0 F .
(b) The potential difference across each branch is the same and equal to the voltage of the battery.
V = 9.00 V
(c)
Q5 = CV = 5.00 F 9.00 V = 45.0 C
and Q12 = CV = 12.0 F 9.00 V = 108 C
b
ga
f
b
ga
f
P26.17
(a)
In series capacitors add as 1 1 1 1 1 = + = + C eq C 1 C 2 5.00 F 12.0 F and
C eq = 3.53 F .
Q eq = C eq V = 3.53 F 9.00 V = 31.8 C .
(c)
The charge on the equivalent capacitor is
b
ga
f
Each of the series capacitors has this same charge on it. So (b) The potential difference across each is and
Q1 = Q 2 = 31.8 C .
V1 = V2 = Q1 31.8 C = = 6.35 V C1 5.00 F Q 2 31.8 C = = 2.65 V . C 2 12.0 F
84
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.18
The circuit reduces first according to the rule for capacitors in series, as shown in the figure, then according to the rule for capacitors in parallel, shown below. C eq = C 1 +
FIG. P26.18
FG H
1 1 11 + = C = 1.83C 2 3 6 1 1 1 = + C s C1 C 2 C p  C1 + C1 1 1 1 = + = . C s C1 C p  C1 C1 C p  C1
IJ K
P26.19
C p = C1 + C 2
Substitute C 2 = C p  C1 Simplifying, C1 =
2 C p C p  4C p C s
e
j
2 C 1  C 1C p + C p C s = 0 .
2
=
1 1 2 Cp C p  C pCs 2 4
We choose arbitrarily the + sign. (This choice can be arbitrary, since with the case of the minus sign, we would get the same two answers with their names interchanged.) C1 = 1 1 2 1 1 Cp + C p  C p C s = 9.00 pF + 9.00 pF 2 4 2 4
b
g
b
g  b9.00 pFgb2.00 pFg =
2
6.00 pF
C 2 = C p  C1 = P26.20
1 1 2 1 Cp  C p  C p C s = 9.00 pF  1.50 pF = 3.00 pF 2 4 2
b
g
C p = C1 + C 2
and Substitute Simplifying, and 1 1 1 = + . C s C1 C 2
C 2 = C p  C1 :
C p  C1 + C1 1 1 1 = + = . C s C1 C p  C1 C1 C p  C1
e
j
2 C 1  C 1C p + C p C s = 0 2 C p C p  4C pC s
C1 =
2
=
1 1 2 Cp + C p  C pCs 2 4
where the positive sign was arbitrarily chosen (choosing the negative sign gives the same values for the capacitances, with the names reversed). Then, from
C 2 = C p  C1
C2 = 1 1 2 Cp  C p  C pC s . 2 4
Chapter 26
85
P26.21
(a)
1 1 1 = + C s 15.0 3.00 C s = 2.50 F C p = 2.50 + 6.00 = 8.50 F C eq =
FG 1 + 1 IJ H 8.50 F 20.0 F K b b ga ga
1
= 5.96 F
(b)
Q = CV = 5.96 F 15.0 V = 89.5 C on 20.0 F
Q 89.5 C = = 4.47 V C 20.0 F 15.0  4.47 = 10.53 V V =
f
Q = CV = 6.00 F 10.53 V = 63.2 C on 6.00 F
f
89.5  63.2 = 26.3 C on 15.0 F and 3.00 F
*P26.22 (a)
FIG. P26.21
Capacitors 2 and 3 are in parallel and present equivalent capacitance 6C. This is in series 1 1 1 = 2C . with capacitor 1, so the battery sees capacitance + 3C 6C
LM N
OP Q
(b)
If they were initially unchanged, C 1 stores the same charge as C 2 and C 3 together. With greater capacitance, C 3 stores more charge than C 2 . Then Q1 > Q3 > Q 2 .
(c)
The C 2 C 3 equivalent capacitor stores the same charge as C 1 . Since it has greater  Q implies that it has smaller potential difference across it than C 1 . In capacitance, V = C parallel with each other, C 2 and C 3 have equal voltages: V1 > V2 = V3 . If C 3 is increased, the overall equivalent capacitance increases. More charge moves through the battery and Q increases. As V1 increases, V2 must decrease so Q 2 decreases. Then Q 3 must increase even more: Q3 and Q1 increase; Q 2 decreases .
b
g
(d)
P26.23
Q so V Q = 120 C and C= Q1 = 120 C  Q 2 Q V = : C 120  Q 2 Q = 2 6.00 3.00
2
6.00 10 6 =
Q 20.0
and or
120  Q 2 Q 2 = C1 C2
FIG. P26.23
a3.00fb120  Q g = a6.00fQ
2
360 = 40.0 C Q2 = 9.00
Q1 = 120 C  40.0 C = 80.0 C
86
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.24
(a)
In series , to reduce the effective capacitance: 1 1 1 = + F 34.8 F C s 32.0 1 = 398 F Cs = 2.51 10 3 F
(b)
In parallel , to increase the total capacitance: 29.8 F + C p = 32.0 F C p = 2.20 F
P26.25
nC =
1 C
100 1 + +C+
1 C n capacitors
=
100 nC
nC =
100C so n 2 = 100 and n = 10 n 30.8 C . C1
*P26.26
For C 1 connected by itself, C 1 V = 30.8 C where V is the battery voltage: V = For C 1 and C 2 in series:
F GH 1 C F GH 1 C
1 V = 23.1 C 1 + 1 C2 30.8 C 23.1 C 23.1 C = + C1 C1 C2 C 1 = 0.333C 2 .
I JK
substituting,
For C 1 and C 3 in series: 1 V = 25.2 C + 1 C3 1 C 1 = 0.222C 3 .
I JK
30.8 C 25. 2 C 25.2 C = + C1 C1 C3 For all three: Q=
F GH 1 C
C 1 V 1 30.8 C V = = = 19.8 C . 1 + C 1 C 2 + C1 C 3 1 + 0.333 + 0.222 + 1 C 2 + 1 C3 1
I JK
This is the charge on each one of the three. P26.27 Cs = C p1 C p2 C eq
FG 1 + 1 IJ = 3.33 F H 5.00 10.0 K = 2a3.33f + 2.00 = 8.66 F = 2a10.0f = 20.0 F F 1 + 1 IJ = 6.04 F =G H 8.66 20.0 K
1 1
FIG. P26.27
Chapter 26
87
P26.28
Q eq = C eq V = 6.04 10 6 F 60.0 V = 3.62 10 4 C
a f e
ja
f
Q p1 = Q eq , so Vp1 =
Q eq C p1
=
3.62 10 4 C = 41.8 V 8.66 10 6 F
Q 3 = C 3 Vp1 = 2.00 10 6 F 41.8 V = 83.6 C
e
j e
ja
f
P26.29
Cs =
FG 1 + 1 IJ H 5.00 7.00 K
1
= 2.92 F
C p = 2.92 + 4.00 + 6.00 = 12.9 F
FIG. P26.29 *P26.30 According to the suggestion, the combination of capacitors shown is equivalent to
Then
1 1 1 1 C + C0 + C0 + C + C0 = + + = C C0 C + C0 C0 C0 C + C0
b
g
C 0C
2
2 + C0
= 2C + 3C 0 C FIG. P26.30
2
2 2C + 2C 0 C  C 0 = 0
C=
2 2 2C 0 4C 0 + 4 2C 0
e j
4 C0 2
Only the positive root is physical C=
e
3 1
j
Section 26.4 P26.31 (a)
Energy Stored in a Charged Capacitor U= 1 C V 2 1 C V 2
a f a f a
2
=
1 3.00 F 12.0 V 2 1 3.00 F 6.00 V 2
b b
ga ga
f f
2
= 216 J
(b)
U= 1 CV 2 2
2
=
2
= 54.0 J
P26.32
U=
V =
2U = C
2 300 J
30 10 6 C V
f
= 4. 47 10 3 V
88
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.33
U=
1 C V 2
a f
2
The circuit diagram is shown at the right. (a)
C p = C1 + C 2 = 25.0 F + 5.00 F = 30.0 F
U= 1 30.0 10 6 100 2
e
ja f
2
= 0.150 J
1
(b)
F 1 + 1 IJ = FG 1 + 1 IJ C =G H C C K H 25.0 F 5.00 F K 1 U = C a V f 2 2a0.150f 2U = = 268 V V =
1 s 1 2 2
= 4.17 F
FIG. P26.33
C
4.17 10 6
P26.34
Use U =
A 1 Q2 and C = 0 . 2 C d 1 C 1 . Therefore, the stored energy doubles . 2
If d 2 = 2d1 , C 2 = *P26.35 (a) (b)
Q = CV = 150 10 12 F 10 10 3 V = 1.50 10 6 C U= 1 C V 2
e
je
j
a f
2
V = U 1 = 0 E 2 V 2
2U = C
2 250 10 6 J 150 10
12
e
F
j=
1.83 10 3 V
P26.36
u=
1.00 10 7 1 = 8.85 10 12 3 000 V 2
e
jb
g
2
V = 2.51 10 3 m 3 = 2.51 10 3 m 3 P26.37 W = U = Fdx so F =
e
jFGH 1 000 L IJK = m
3
2.51 L
z
dU d Q 2 d Q2x Q2 = = = 2 0 A dx dx 2C dx 2 0 A
F I GH JK
F GH
I JK
Chapter 26
89
P26.38
With switch closed, distance d = 0.500d and capacitance C = (a) (b)
0 A 2 0 A = = 2C . d d
Q = C V = 2C V = 2 2.00 10 6 F 100 V = 400 C The force stretching out one spring is 4C 2 V Q2 F= = 2 0 A 2 0 A
a f
a f e a f
2
ja
f
a f = 2CaV f = d A d gd b
2C 2 V
0 2
2
.
One spring stretches by distance x = k= F 2C V = x d
d , so 4
a f FG 4 IJ = 8CaV f H dK d
2 2
2
=
8 2.00 10 6 F 100 V
e
ja
f
2
e
8.00 10 3 m
j
2
= 2.50 kN m .
P26.39
The energy transferred is
H ET =
1 1 QV = 50.0 C 1.00 10 8 V = 2.50 10 9 J 2 2
a
fe
j
and 1% of this (or Eint = 2.50 10 7 J ) is absorbed by the tree. If m is the amount of water boiled away, then giving *P26.40 (a) (b) U= Eint = m 4 186 J kg C 100 C  30.0 C + m 2.26 10 6 J kg = 2.50 10 7 J m = 9.79 kg . 1 C V 2
b
ga
f e
j
a f
2
+
1 C V 2
a f
2
= C V
a f
2
The altered capacitor has capacitance C = C V + C V = C V +
C . The total charge is the same as before: 2 4 V . 3
a f a f a f C a V f 2 FG H IJ K
2
V =
(c) (d)
1 4 V U = C 2 3
11 4V + C 22 3
FG H
IJ K
2
=
a V f 4C
3
2
The extra energy comes from work put into the system by the agent pulling the capacitor plates apart. 1 C V 2 1 R 2 ke
P26.41
U=
a f
2
where C = 4 0 R =
e 2
kQ kQ R and V = e  0 = e R R ke
U=
FG H
IJ FG k Q IJ KH R K
=
k eQ 2 2R
90
Capacitance and Dielectrics
*P26.42
(a)
2 2 2 q1 1 q1 1 q 2 1 1 Q  q1 The total energy is U = U 1 + U 2 = + = + . 2 C 1 2 C 2 2 4 0 R1 2 4 0 R 2
b
g
2
For a minimum we set
1 2 q1 1 2 Q  q1 + 1 = 0 2 4 0 R1 2 4 0 R 2 R 2 q1 = R1Q  R1 q1 Then q 2 = Q  q1 = q1 = R1Q R1 + R 2
b
ga f
dU = 0: dq1
R 2Q = q2 . R1 + R 2
(b)
V1 = V2 =
k e q1 k e R1Q k eQ = = R1 R1 R1 + R 2 R1 + R 2
b
g
ke q2 k e R2 Q k eQ = = R2 R 2 R1 + R 2 R1 + R 2
b
g
and V1  V2 = 0 .
Section 26.5
Capacitors with Dielectrics
12 F m 1.75 10 4 m 2 0 A 2.10 8.85 10 C= = = 8.13 10 11 F = 81.3 pF d 4.00 10 5 m
P26.43
(a) (b)
e
je
j
Vmax = Emax d = 60.0 10 6 V m 4.00 10 5 m = 2.40 kV
e
je
j
P26.44
Q max = CVmax , but Also, Thus, (a) Vmax = Emax d . C=
0 A . d 0 A Emax d = 0 AEmax . d
Q max =
b
g
With air between the plates, = 1.00 and
Emax = 3.00 10 6 V m .
Q max = 0 AEmax = 8.85 10 12 F m 5.00 10 4 m 2 3.00 10 6 V m = 13.3 nC .
Therefore,
e
je
je
j
(b)
With polystyrene between the plates, = 2.56 and Emax = 24.0 10 6 V m . Q max = 0 AEmax = 2.56 8.85 10 12 F m 5.00 10 4 m 2 24.0 10 6 V m = 272 nC
e
je
je
j
Chapter 26
91
P26.45
C= or
0 A d
95.0 10
9
=
3.70 8.85 10 12 0.070 0 0.025 0 10 3
e
jb
g
= 1.04 m
P26.46 Consider two sheets of aluminum foil, each 40 cm by 100 cm, with one sheet of plastic between 2.54 cm . Then, them. Suppose the plastic has 3 , Emax ~ 10 7 V m and thickness 1 mil = 1 000
12 C 2 N m 2 0. 4 m 2 0 A 3 8.85 10 ~ 10 6 F ~ C= 5 d 2.54 10 m
e
je
j
Vmax = Emax d ~ 10 7 V m 2.54 10 5 m ~ 10 2 V P26.47 Originally, C= 0 A Q = V d
e
je
j
a f
12
.
i
(a)
The charge is the same before and after immersion, with value Q = Q=
0 A V d
a f
i
.
e8.85 10 e
C 2 N m 2 25.0 10 4 m 2 250 V
e1.50 10
je
2
m
j
ja
f=
369 pC
(b)
Finally, Cf =
0 A Q = d V
a f
Cf =
f
80.0 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2 25.0 10 4 m 2
2
a V f
(c) Originally, Finally, So, Ui = Uf =
f
=
Qd 0 A
je e1.50 10 mj Aa V f d a V f = =
0
j=
118 pF
0 Ad
i
i
=
250 V = 3.12 V . 80.0
1 C V 2
a f
2 i
=
2 f
0 A V 2d =
a f
2 i
.
2 i
1 C f V 2
a f
0 A V
2d 2 2 d
2 2 i
a f
=
0 A V 2 d
a f
2 i
.
U = U f  U i =
12
 0 A V
a f a  1f
2
e8.85 10 U = 
C
2
je25.0 10 m ja250 V f a79.0f = 2e1.50 10 mja80.0f
Nm
2 4 2
45.5 nJ .
92
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.48
(a) (b)
C = C 0 =
12 1.00 10 4 m 2 0 A 173 8.85 10 = = 1.53 nF d 0.100 10 3 m
a fe
je
j
The battery delivers the free charge Q = C V = 1.53 10 9 F 12.0 V = 18.4 nC .
a f e
ja
f
(c)
The surface density of free charge is Q 18.4 10 9 C = = = 1.84 10 4 C m 2 . A 1.00 10 4 m 2 The surface density of polarization charge is
p = 1
(d)
FG H
1 1 = 1 = 1.83 10 4 C m 2 . 173 E0
IJ FG K H
IJ K
We have E = E=
and E0 =
V ; hence, d
V 12.0 V = = 694 V m . d 173 1.00 10 4 m
a fe
j
P26.49
The given combination of capacitors is equivalent to the circuit diagram shown to the right. Put charge Q on point A. Then,
Q = 40.0 F VAB = 10.0 F VBC = 40.0 F VCD .
b
g
b
g
b
g
FIG. P26.49
So, VBC = 4VAB = 4VCD , and the center capacitor will break down first, at VBC = 15.0 V . When this occurs, VAB = VCD = 1 VBC = 3.75 V 4
b
g
and VAD = VAB + VBC + VCD = 3.75 V + 15.0 V + 3.75 V = 22.5 V .
Section 26.6 P26.50 (a)
Electric Dipole in an Electric Field The displacement from negative to positive charge is 2 a = 1.20 i + 1.10 j mm  1.40 i  1.30 j mm = 2.60 i + 2.40 j 10 3 m. The electric dipole moment is p = 2aq = 3.50 10 9 C 2.60 i + 2.40 j 10 3 m =
e
j
e
j
e
j
e
je
j
e9.10 i + 8.40 jj 10 j
12
Cm .
(b)
= p E = 9.10 i + 8.40 j 10 12 C m 7.80 i  4.90 j 10 3 N C = +44.6k  65.5k 10 9 N m = 2.09 10 8 N mk
e
j
e
e
j
continued on next page
Chapter 26
93
(c)
U =  p E =  9.10 i + 8.40 j 10 12 C m 7.80 i  4.90 j 10 3 N C U = 71.0 + 41.2 10 9 J = 112 nJ
e
j
e
j
a
f
(d)
p= E=
a9.10f + a8.40f a7.80f + a4.90f
2 2
2 2
10 12 C m = 12.4 10 12 C m 10 3 N C = 9.21 10 3 N C U min = 114 nJ
U max = p E = 114 nJ, U max  U min = 228 nJ P26.51 (a)
Let x represent the coordinate of the negative charge. Then x + 2 a cos is the coordinate of the positive charge. The force on the negative charge is F = qE x i . The force on the positive charge is F+
p FE
F+
af dE = + qEa x + 2 a cos fi qEa xfi + q a2 a cos fi . dx
FIG. P26.51(a) dE dE 2 a cos i = p cos i . dx dx
The force on the dipole is altogether
F = F + F+ = q ke q x2
a
f
(b)
The balloon creates field along the xaxis of Thus, 2 k e q dE = . dx x3
i.
a f
At x = 16.0 cm ,
2 8.99 10 9 2.00 10 6 dE = = 8.78 MN C m 3 dx 0.160
a fe
je a f
j
F = 6.30 10 9 C m 8.78 10 6 N C m cos 0 i = 55.3 i mN
e
je
j
Section 26.7 P26.52
An Atomic Description of Dielectrics qin 0
2 r E = so
E=
2 r 0
r2 r1
V =  E d r =
z
r2 r1
z
r dr = ln 1 r2 2 r 0 2 0
FG IJ H K
FIG. P26.52
2 0
max
= Emax rinner
V = 1. 20 10 6 V m 0.100 10 3 m ln Vmax = 579 V
e
je
j FGH 025.0 IJK . 200
94
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.53
(a)
Consider a gaussian surface in the form of a cylindrical pillbox with ends of area A << A parallel to the sheet. The side wall of the cylinder passes no flux of electric field since this surface is everywhere parallel to the field. Gauss's law becomes EA + EA = Q Q A , so E = 2 A A directed away from the positive sheet.
(b)
In the space between the sheets, each creates field
Q away from the positive and 2 A toward the negative sheet. Together, they create a field of E= Q . A
(c)
Assume that the field is in the positive xdirection. Then, the potential of the positive plate relative to the negative plate is
+ plate
V = 
 plate
z
+ plate
E ds = 
Q Qd i  idx = + . A A  plate
z
e
j
(d)
Capacitance is defined by: C =
Q Q A 0 A = = = . d d V Qd A
Additional Problems P26.54 (a) (c) C=
Q ac
LM 1 + 1 OP + LM 1 + 1 OP = 3.33 F N 3.00 6.00 Q N 2.00 4.00 Q = C b V g = b 2.00 Fga90.0 V f = 180 C
1 1 ac ac
Therefore, Q3 = Q6 = 180 C Q df = C df Vdf = 1.33 F 90.0 V = 120 C (b) Q3 C3 Q V6 = 6 C6 Q V2 = 2 C2 Q V4 = 4 C4 V3 = UT = = 180 C = 3.00 F 180 C = = 6.00 F 120 C = = 2.00 F 120 C = = 4.00 F 60.0 V 30.0 V 60.0 V 30.0 V
d
i b
ga
f
FIG. P26.54
(d)
1 C eq V 2
a f
2
=
1 3.33 10 6 90.0 V 2
e
ja
f
2
= 13.4 mJ
Chapter 26
95
*P26.55
(a)
Each face of P2 carries charge, so the threeplate system is equivalent to P1 P2 P2 P3
Each capacitor by itself has capacitance C=
12 4 2 2 0 A 1 8.85 10 C 7.5 10 m = = 5.58 pF . d N m 2 1.19 10 3 m
e
j
Then equivalent capacitance = 5.58 + 5.58 = 11.2 pF . (b) (c) Q = CV + CV = 11.2 10 12 F 12 V = 134 pC Now P3 has charge on two surfaces and in effect three capacitors are in parallel: C = 3 5.58 pF = 16.7 pF . (d) Only one face of P4 carries charge: Q = CV = 5.58 10 12 F 12 V = 66.9 pC . *P26.56 From the example about a cylindrical capacitor, Vb  Va = 2 k e ln b a
a
f
b
g
a f
Vb  345 kV = 2 8.99 10 9 Nm 2 C 2 1.40 10 6 C m ln
3
e = 2a8.99fe1.4 10
= 1.564 3 10 V
5
je
j
J C ln 500
j
12 m 0.024 m
Vb = 3. 45 10 5 V  1.56 10 5 V = 1.89 10 5 V *P26.57 Imagine the center plate is split along its midplane and pulled apart. We have two capacitors in parallel, supporting the same V and A and the carrying total charge Q. The upper has capacitance C 1 = 0 d A lower C 2 = 0 . Charge flows from ground onto each of the outside 2d V1 = V2 = V . plates so that Q1 + Q 2 = Q Then Q 1 Q 2 Q1 d Q 2 2 d = = = C 1 C 2 0 A 0 A Q2 = Q1 = Q1 = 2Q 2 2Q 2 + Q 2 = Q . d 2d
FIG. P26.57
(a)
Q Q . On the lower plate the charge is  . 3 3 2Q 2Q . On the upper plate the charge is  . 3 3 Q1 2Qd = C1 3 0 A
(b)
V =
96
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.58
(a)
We use Equation 26.11 to find the potential energy of the capacitor. As we will see, the potential difference V changes as the dielectric is withdrawn. The initial and final energies are U i = 1 Q2 2 Ci
F I GH JK
and
Uf =
1 Q2 . 2 Cf
F I GH JK
1 Q2 But the initial capacitance (with the dielectric) is Ci = C f . Therefore, U f = . 2 Ci Since the work done by the external force in removing the dielectric equals the change in 1 Q2 1 Q2 1 Q2  = 1 . potential energy, we have W = U f  U i = 2 2 Ci 2 Ci Ci
F I GH JK
F I F I F Ia f GH JK GH JK GH JK ja fa f
To express this relation in terms of potential difference Vi , we substitute Q = Ci Vi , and 1 1 2 2 C i Vi  1 = 2.00 10 9 F 100 V 5.00  1.00 = 4.00 10 5 J . 2 2 The positive result confirms that the final energy of the capacitor is greater than the initial energy. The extra energy comes from the work done on the system by the external force that pulled out the dielectric. evaluate: W = (b) The final potential difference across the capacitor is V f = Substituting C f = Ci Q . Cf
b g
b ga f e
and Q = Ci Vi gives V f = Vi = 5.00 100 V = 500 V . Even though the capacitor is isolated and its charge remains constant, the potential difference across the plates does increase in this case. Vmax d
b g
a
f
P26.59
= 3.00 , Emax = 2.00 10 8 V m =
For C=
0 A = 0.250 10 6 F d
0. 250 10 6 4 000 CVmax Cd A= = 0.188 m 2 = = 0 0 Emax 3.00 8.85 10 12 2.00 10 8
e e
jb je j
g
j
*P26.60
The original kinetic energy of the particle is K= 1 1 mv 2 = 2 10 16 kg 2 10 6 m s 2 2
e
je
2
= 4.00 10 4 J .
Q 1 000 C = = 100 V . 10 F C For the particle to reach the negative plate, the particlecapacitor system would need energy The potential difference across the capacitor is V = U = qV = 3 10 6 C 100 V = 3.00 10 4 J . Since its original kinetic energy is greater than this, the particle will reach the negative plate . As the particle moves, the system keeps constant total energy
e
ja
f
aK + U f
at + plate
= K +U
a
f
at  plate
:
4.00 10 4 J + 3 10 6 C +100 V = vf = 2 1.00 10 4 J 2 10
16
e
ja
f 1 e2 10 jv 2
16
2 f
+0
e
kg
j=
1.00 10 6 m s .
Chapter 26
97
P26.61
(a)
C1 =
FG 1 HC
1 0 A 2 A2 A2 ; C2 = 2 0 ; C3 = 3 0 d d 2 d 2
+ 1 C3
2
C = C1 +
FG 1 HC
IJ K
1
= +
A 2 3 C 2C 3 = 0 C 2 + C3 d 2 + 3 1 C3
2
IJ K
1
=
FG IJ H K A F GH 2 + + IJK d
0 1 2 3 2 3
FIG. P26.61
(b) *P26.62
Using the given values we find:
C total = 1.76 10 12 F = 1.76 pF .
The initial charge on the larger capacitor is
Q = CV = 10 F 15 V = 150 C . An additional charge q is pushed through the 50V battery, giving the smaller capacitor charge q and the larger charge 150 C + q . Then 150 C + q 5 F 10 F 500 C = 2 q + 150 C + q 50 V = q + q = 117 C So across the 5 F capacitor Across the 10 F capacitor P26.63 (a) V = V = q 117 C = = 23.3 V . 5 F C 150 C + 117 C = 26.7 V . 10 F
a f
Put charge Q on the sphere of radius a and Q on the other sphere. Relative to V = 0 at infinity, the potential at the surface of a is and the potential of b is The difference in potential is and Va = Vb = k eQ k eQ  a d  k e Q k eQ + . b d k e Q k eQ k eQ k eQ +   a b d d
Va  Vb = C=
Q = Va  Vb
F 4 I GH b1 ag + b1 bg  b2 dg JK
0
.
(b)
As d , C=
1 1 becomes negligible compared to . Then, d a
4 0 1 1 1 + and = 4 0 a 4 0 b 1 a+1 b C
as for two spheres in series.
98
Capacitance and Dielectrics
P26.64
(a)
C=
0 d
a  xf + x = a f
2
0 d
2
2
+ x 1
a f a f
(out of the capacitor)
(b)
U=
1 C V 2
=
1 0 V 2 d
2
F a fI GH JK
2
+ x 1
(c)
F=
FG dU IJ i = H dx K
2
0 V 2d
a f a  1f to the left
12 3
(d)
F=
b2 000g e8.85 10 jb0.050 0ga4.50  1f = 2e 2.00 10 j
0 x d
Q2 0. 2C 0
1.55 10 3 N
P26.65
The portion of the capacitor nearly filled by metal has capacitance and stored energy The unfilled portion has capacitance The charge on this portion is (a) The stored energy is
2  x Q0 Q0  x d Q2 = U= = . x d 2C 2 0 2 0 3 2 2 Q0 d dU d Q0  x d = =+ dx dx 2 0 3 2 0 3 2 Q0 d
a f
a  xf . a  xfQ a f
d
0
Q=
.
a f a f
2
(b)
F=
F a fI GH JK
F=
2 0
3
to the right (into the capacitor)
(c)
Stress =
2 Q0 F = d 2 0
4
(d)
1 1 u = 0 E 2 = 0 0 2 2
FG IJ H K
2
Q0 1 = 0 2 0 2
F GH
I JK
2
=
2 Q0
2 0
4
P26.66
Gasoline: Battery:
1 gal .00 b126 000 Btu galgb1 054 J BtugFGH 3.786.0010 m IJK FGH 1670 m IJK = 5.24 10 kg b12.0 J Cgb100 C sgb3 600 sg = 2.70 10 J kg
3 3 3 5
Chapter 26
7
99
J kg
16.0 kg
Capacitor:
1 2
a0.100 Ffa12.0 Vf
0.100 kg
2
= 72.0 J kg
Gasoline has 194 times the specific energy content of the battery and 727 000 times that of the capacitor. P26.67 Call the unknown capacitance C u Q = C u Vi = Cu + C V f Cu
f
b g b gd i C d V i b10.0 Fga30.0 Vf = = = bV g  dV i a100 V  30.0 V f
i f
4.29 F
*P26.68
She can clip together a series combination of parallel combinations of two 100 F capacitors. The equivalent capacitance is 1 = 100 F . When 90 V is connected across the 1 1 200 F + 200 F
b
g b
C0 =
g
combination, only 45 V appears across each individual capacitor. P26.69 (a) 0 A Q0 = V0 d Q ; V0
2
FIG. P26.68
When the dielectric is inserted at constant voltage, C = C 0 = U0 = U= and
C 0 V0
b g
2
2
C V0
b g
2 U = . U0
=
C 0 V02
2
e j
The extra energy comes from (part of the) electrical work done by the battery in separating the extra charge. (b) Q 0 = C 0 V0 and so Q = CV0 = C 0 V0 Q = . Q0
100 P26.70
Capacitance and Dielectrics
The vertical orientation sets up two capacitors in parallel, with equivalent capacitance Cp = 0 A 2
b g + b A 2g = FG + 1 IJ A H 2 K d d d
0 0
where A is the area of either plate and d is the separation of the plates. The horizontal orientation produces two capacitors in series. If f is the fraction of the horizontal capacitor filled with dielectric, the equivalent capacitance is 1 f d f + 1  f fd 1 = + = 0 A C s 0 A Requiring that C p = C s
b g LM NM
b g OP d , or C = LM OP A . MN f + b1  f g QP d QP A +1 = gives , or a + 1f f + b1  f g = 2 . 2 f + b1  f g
0 s 0
For = 2.00 , this yields 3.00 2.00  1.00 f = 4.00 , with the solution f = P26.71 Initially (capacitors charged in parallel), q1 = C1 V = 6.00 F 250 V = 1 500 C q2
2
a f
2 . 3
a f b ga f = C a V f = b 2.00 F ga 250 V f = 500 C .
After reconnection (positive plate to negative plate), qtotal = q1  q 2 = 1 000 C and V = Therefore, qtotal 1 000 C = = 125 V . 8.00 F C total
a f b ga f q = C a V f = b 2.00 F ga125 V f =
2 2
q1 = C1 V = 6.00 F 125 V = 750 C 250 C .
P26.72
Assume a potential difference across a and b, and notice that the potential difference across the 8.00 F capacitor must be zero by symmetry. Then the equivalent capacitance can be determined from the following circuit:
FIG. P26.72
C ab = 3.00 F .
Chapter 26
101
P26.73
Emax occurs at the inner conductor's surface. Emax = 2ke from Equation 24.7. a
V = 2 k e ln Emax =
FG b IJ from Example 26.2 H aK FG b IJ = e18.0 10 V mje0.800 10 H aK F bI V = 2 lnG J H aK F bI a lnG J H aK LMlnFG b IJ + aF 1 I FG  b IJ OP = 0 NM H a K GH b a JK H a K QP
6 2 1 3
V a ln b a
b g
Vmax = Emax a ln 2 ; a
m ln
.00 j FGH 03.800 IJK =
19.0 kV .
P26.74
E=
Vmax = Emax dVmax = Emax da ln P26.75
FG b IJ = 1 or b = e H aK a
FG 1 + 1 IJ H 2C 4C K
so a =
b e
By symmetry, the potential difference across 3C is zero, so the circuit reduces to C eq =
1
=
8 4 C= C . 6 3
FIG. P26.75
102 P26.76
Capacitance and Dielectrics
The electric field due to the charge on the positive wire is perpendicular to the wire, radial, and of magnitude E+ =
. 2 0 r
+ wire  wire
The potential difference between wires due to the presence of this charge is V1 = 
z
E dr = 
2 0
dr Dd ln . = r d 2 0 Dd
z
d
FG H
IJ K
The presence of the linear charge density  on the negative wire makes an identical contribution to the potential difference between the wires. Therefore, the total potential difference is V = 2 V1 =
b g
Dd ln 0 d
FG H
IJ K
and the capacitance of this system of two wires, each of length C=
, is
0 Q = = = . V V 0 ln D  d d ln D  d d
b
g a
f
a
f
The capacitance per unit length is:
C
=
0 ln D  d d
a
f
.
*P26.77
The condition that we are testing is that the capacitance increases by less than 10%, or, C < 1.10 . C Substituting the expressions for C and C from Example 26.2, we have,
b 2 k e ln 1.10 a C = C 2 k e ln b a
c h = lnc h < 1.10 . lnc h ch
b a b 1.10 a
This becomes, ln
FG b IJ < 1.10 lnFG b IJ = 1.10 lnFG b IJ + 1.10 lnFG 1 IJ = 1.10 lnFG b IJ  1.10 lna1.10f . H aK H 1.10a K H aK H 1.10 K H aK
We can rewrite this as,
FG b IJ < 1.10 lna1.10f H aK F bI lnG J > 11.0 lna1.10f = lna1.10f H aK
0.10 ln b > 1.10 a
11.0
where we have reversed the direction of the inequality because we multiplied the whole expression by 1 to remove the negative signs. Comparing the arguments of the logarithms on both sides of the inequality, we see that,
a f
11.0
= 2.85 . .
Thus, if b > 2.85 a , the increase in capacitance is less than 10% and it is more effective to increase
Chapter 26
103
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P26.2 P26.4 P26.6 P26.8 P26.10 P26.12 P26.14 P26.16 (a) 1.00 F ; (b) 100 V (a) 8.99 mm ; (b) 0.222 pF ; (c) 22.2 pC P26.40 (a) C V
11.1 nF ; 26.6 C 3.10 nm
P26.42
2
(d) Positive work is done on the system by the agent pulling the plates apart. (a) q1 = R1Q R 2Q and q 2 = ; R1 + R 2 R1 + R 2 (b) see the solution
a f ; (b) 4V ; (c) 4C aV f 3 3
2
2
;
a2 N  1f a  fR
0
d
P26.44 P26.46
(a) 13.3 nC ; (b) 272 nC
2.13 10 16 m3
mgd tan q (a) 17.0 F ; (b) 9.00 V ; (c) 45.0 C and 108 C
~ 10 6 F and ~ 10 2 V for two 40 cm by 100 cm sheets of aluminum foil sandwiching a thin sheet of plastic.
(a) 1.53 nF ; (b) 18.4 nC ; (c) 184 C m 2 free; 183 C m 2 induced; (d) 694 V m
P26.48
P26.50
(a) 9.10 i + 8. 40 j pC m ; (b) 20.9 nN mk ; (c) 112 nJ ; (d) 228 nJ
e
j
P26.18
1.83C
Cp 2 +
2 Cp
P26.20 P26.22
4
 C p C s and
Cp 2

2 Cp
4
 C pC s
P26.52 P26.54
579 V
(a) 3.33 F ; (b) V3 = 60.0 V ; V6 = 30.0 V ; V2 = 60.0 V ; V4 = 30.0 V ; (c) Q 3 = Q6 = 180 C ; Q 2 = Q 4 = 120 C ; (d) 13.4 mJ
(a) 2C ; (b) Q1 > Q3 > Q 2 ; (c) V1 > V2 = V3 ; (d) Q 3 and Q1 increase and Q 2 decreases
P26.24 P26.26 P26.28 P26.30 P26.32 P26.34 P26.36 P26.38
(a) 398 F in series; (b) 2.20 F in parallel
P26.56 P26.58 P26.60
189 kV (a) 40.0 J ; (b) 500 V yes; 1.00 Mm s
19.8 C 83.6 C
e
3 1
j C2
0
P26.62 P26.64
23.3 V ; 26.7 V
(a) (b) (c) 0
2
+ x 1 d
2 2
a f
2d
4.47 kV energy doubles
;
0 V 0 V
a f
+ x 1
a f;
2.51 10 3 m3 = 2.51 L
(a) 400 C ; (b) 2.50 kN m
2d (d) 1.55 mN left
a f a  1f to the left ;
2
104 P26.66
Capacitance and Dielectrics
Gasoline has 194 times the specific energy content of the battery, and 727 000 times that of the capacitor. see the solution; 45 V 2 3
P26.72 P26.74 P26.76
3.00 F
see the solution see the solution
P26.68 P26.70
27
Current and Resistance
CHAPTER OUTLINE
27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 Electric Current Resistance A Model for Electrical Conduction Resistance and Temperature Superconductors Electric Power
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q27.1 Individual vehiclescars, trucks and motorcycleswould correspond to charge. The number of vehicles that pass a certain point in a given time would correspond to the current. Voltage is a measure of potential difference, not of current. "Surge" implies a flowand only charge, in coulombs, can flow through a system. It would also be correct to say that the victim carried a certain current, in amperes. Geometry and resistivity. In turn, the resistivity of the material depends on the temperature. Resistance is a physical property of the conductor based on the material of which it is made and its size and shape, including the locations where current is put in and taken out. Resistivity is a physical property only of the material of which the resistor is made.
Q27.2
Q27.3 Q27.4
Q27.5 Q27.6
The radius of wire B is 3 times the radius of wire A, to make its crosssectional area 3 times larger. Not all conductors obey Ohm's law at all times. For example, consider an experiment in which a variable potential difference is applied across an incandescent light bulb, and the current is measured. At very low voltages, the filament follows Ohm's law nicely. But then long before the V becomes nonlinear, because the resistivity is temperaturefilament begins to glow, the plot of I dependent. A conductor is not in electrostatic equilibrium when it is carrying a current, duh! If charges are placed on an isolated conductor, the electric fields established in the conductor by the charges will cause the charges to move until they are in positions such that there is zero electric field throughout the conductor. A conductor carrying a steady current is not an isolated conductorits ends must be connected to a source of emf, such as a battery. The battery maintains a potential difference across the conductor and, therefore, an electric field in the conductor. The steady current is due to the response of the electrons in the conductor due to this constant electric field.
Q27.7
105
106 Q27.8
Current and Resistance
The bottom of the rods on the Jacob's Ladder are close enough so that the supplied voltage is sufficient to produce dielectric breakdown of the air. The initial spark at the bottom includes a tube of ionized air molecules. Since this tube containing ions is warmer than the air around it, it is buoyed up by the surrounding air and begins to rise. The ions themselves significantly decrease the resistivity of the air. They significantly lower the dielectric strength of the air, marking longer sparks possible. Internal resistance in the power supply will typically make its terminal voltage drop, so that it cannot produce a spark across the bottom ends of the rods. A single "continuous" spark, therefore will rise up, becoming longer and longer, until the potential difference is not large enough to sustain dielectric breakdown of the air. Once the initial spark stops, another one will form at the bottom, where again, the supplied potential difference is sufficient to break down the air. The conductor does not follow Ohm's law, and must have a resistivity that is currentdependent, or more likely temperaturedependent. A power supply would correspond to a water pump; a resistor corresponds to a pipe of a certain diameter, and thus resistance to flow; charge corresponds to the water itself; potential difference corresponds to difference in height between the ends of a pipe or the ports of a water pump. The amplitude of atomic vibrations increases with temperature. Atoms can then scatter electrons more efficiently. In a metal, the conduction electrons are not strongly bound to individual ion cores. They can move in response to an applied electric field to constitute an electric current. Each metal ion in the lattice of a microcrystal exerts Coulomb forces on its neighbors. When one ion is vibrating rapidly, it can set its neighbors into vibration. This process represents energy moving though the material by heat. The resistance of copper increases with temperature, while the resistance of silicon decreases with increasing temperature. The conduction electrons are scattered more by vibrating atoms when copper heats up. Silicon's charge carrier density increases as temperature increases and more atomic electrons are promoted to become conduction electrons. A current will continue to exist in a superconductor without voltage because there is no resistance loss. Superconductors have no resistance when they are below a certain critical temperature. For most superconducting materials, this critical temperature is close to absolute zero. It requires expensive refrigeration, often using liquid helium. Liquid nitrogen at 77 K is much less expensive. Recent discoveries of materials that have higher critical temperatures suggest the possibility of developing superconductors that do not require expensive cooling systems. In a normal metal, suppose that we could proceed to a limit of zero resistance by lengthening the average time between collisions. The classical model of conduction then suggests that a constant applied voltage would cause constant acceleration of the free electrons, and a current steadily increasing in time. On the other hand, we can actually switch to zero resistance by substituting a superconducting wire for the normal metal. In this case, the drift velocity of electrons is established by vibrations of atoms in the crystal lattice; the maximum current is limited; and it becomes impossible to establish a potential difference across the superconductor. Because there are so many electrons in a conductor (approximately 10 28 electrons m 3 ) the average velocity of charges is very slow. When you connect a wire to a potential difference, you establish an electric field everywhere in the wire nearly instantaneously, to make electrons start drifting everywhere all at once.
Q27.9 Q27.10
Q27.11 Q27.12
Q27.13
Q27.14 Q27.15
Q27.16
Q27.17
Chapter 27
107
Q27.18
Current moving through a wire is analogous to a longitudinal wave moving through the electrons of the atoms. The wave speed depends on the speed at which the disturbance in the electric field can be communicated between neighboring atoms, not on the drift velocities of the electrons themselves. If you leave a directcurrent light bulb on for a reasonably short time, it is likely that no single electron will enter one end of the filament and leave at the other end. More power is delivered to the resistor with the smaller resistance, since P = The 25 W bulb has a higher resistance. The 100 W bulb carries more current. One amperehour is 3 600 coulombs. The amperehour rating is the quantity of charge that the battery can lift though its nominal potential difference. Choose the voltage of the power supply you will use to drive the heater. Next calculate the required V 2 resistance R as . Knowing the resistivity of the material, choose a combination of wire length V 2 . R
Q27.19 Q27.20 Q27.21 Q27.22
P
and crosssectional area to make
FG IJ = FG R IJ . You will have to pay for less material if you make both H AK H K
and A smaller, but if you go too far the wire will have too little surface area to radiate away the energy; then the resistor will melt.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 27.1 P27.1 I= Electric Current Q t Q = It = 30.0 10 6 A 40.0 s = 1.20 10 3 C
e
ja
f
N= P27.2
1.20 10 3 C Q = = 7.50 10 15 electrons e 1.60 10 19 C electron
The molar mass of silver = 107.9 g mole and the volume V is V = area thickness = 700 10 4 m 2 0.133 10 3 m = 9.31 10 6 m 3 . The mass of silver deposited is m Ag = V = 10.5 10 3 kg m3 9.31 10 6 m 3 = 9.78 10 2 kg . And the number of silver atoms deposited is N = 9.78 10 2 kg I= 10 atoms jFGH 6.02 107.9 g IJK FGH 1 1000 g IJK = 5.45 10 kg
23
a fa
f e
je
j
e
je
j
e
23
atoms
V 12.0 V = = 6.67 A = 6.67 C s 1.80 R
t =
5.45 10 23 1.60 10 19 C Q Ne = = = 1.31 10 4 s = 3.64 h I I 6.67 C s
e
je
j
108 P27.3
Current and Resistance
Q t = Idt = I 0 1  e  t
0
af
z
t
e
j j a0.632fI
0
(a) (b) (c)
Q = I 0 1  e 1 =
af
e
Q 10 = I 0 1  e 10 =
a f af
e
j b0.999 95gI
0
Q = I 0 1  e  = I 0 kee2 r2 mv 2 , we get: v = r kee2 = 2.19 10 6 m s . mr
e
j
P27.4
(a) (b)
Using
=
The time for the electron to revolve around the proton once is:
11 m 2 r 2 5.29 10 t= = = 1.52 10 16 s . v 2.19 10 6 m s
e
e
j
j
The total charge flow in this time is 1.60 10 19 C , so the current is I= 1.60 10 19 C 1.52 10 16 s = 1.05 10 3 A = 1.05 mA . 2
P27.5
The period of revolution for the sphere is T = revolving charge is I = q q = . 2 T
, and the average current represented by this
P27.6
q = 4t 3 + 5t + 6
A = 2.00 cm 2
e
1.00 m jFGH 100 cmIJK
2
= 2.00 10 4 m 2
(a)
I 1.00 s =
a
f
dq dt
= 12t 2 + 5
t = 1.00 s
e
j
t =1.00 s
= 17.0 A
(b) dq dt
J=
I 17.0 A = = 85.0 kA m 2 A 2.00 10 4 m 2
P27.7
I=
q = dq = Idt =
a100 Af sinFGH 120s t IJK dt 100 100 C L F I q= MNcosGH 2 JK  cos 0OPQ = +120C = 0.265 C 120
z z
1 240 s 0
z
Chapter 27
109
P27.8
(a)
J=
5.00 A I = A 4.00 10 3 m
e
j
2
= 99.5 kA m 2
(b)
J2 = A1 =
1 I 1 I = J1 ; 4 A 2 4 A1 1 A 2 so 4.00 10 3 4
e
j
2
=
1 r22 4
r2 = 2 4.00 10 3 = 8.00 10 3 m = 8.00 mm P27.9 (a) J= 8.00 10 6 A I = A 1.00 10 3 m = 2.55 A m 2
e
j
e
j
2
(b)
From J = nev d , we have
n=
2.55 A m 2 J = = 5.31 10 10 m 3 . ev d 1.60 10 19 C 3.00 10 8 m s
e
je
j
(c)
Q , we have From I = t (This is about 382 years!)
6.02 10 23 1.60 10 19 C Q N A e = = = 1. 20 10 10 s . t = I I 8.00 10 6 A
e
je
j
P27.10
(a)
The speed of each deuteron is given by
K=
27
1 mv 2 2
e2.00 10 je1.60 10 Jj = 1 e2 1.67 10 2
6 19
kg v 2 and
j
v = 1.38 10 7 m s .
I= q t
The time between deuterons passing a stationary point is t in
10.0 10 6 C s = 1.60 10 19 C t or
t = 1.60 10 14 s .
So the distance between them is vt = 1.38 10 7 m s 1.60 10 14 s = 2.21 10 7 m . (b) One nucleus will put its nearest neighbor at potential 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C keq = = 6.49 10 3 V . V= r 2.21 10 7 m This is very small compared to the 2 MV accelerating potential, so repulsion within the beam is a small effect.
e
je
j
e
je
j
110 P27.11
Current and Resistance
We use I = nqAv d n is the number of charge carriers per unit volume, and is identical to the number of atoms per unit volume. We assume a contribution of 1 free electron per atom in the relationship above. For aluminum, which has a molar mass of 27, we know that Avogadro's number of atoms, N A , has a mass of 27.0 g. Thus, the mass per atom is 27.0 g 27.0 g = = 4.49 10 23 g atom . NA 6.02 10 23 Thus, n= density of aluminum 2.70 g cm 3 = mass per atom 4.49 10 23 g atom
n = 6.02 10 22 atoms cm3 = 6.02 10 28 atoms m3 .
Therefore, or, vd = 5.00 A I = = 1.30 10 4 m s 28 3 nqA 6.02 10 m 1.60 10 19 C 4.00 10 6 m 2
e
je
je
j
v d = 0.130 mm s .
Section 27.2 *P27.12
Resistance E = 0.740 V m 2.44 10 8 m
J = E =
FG 1 A IJ = H 1V K
3.03 10 7 A m 2
P27.13 P27.14
I= (a)
V 120 V = = 0.500 A = 500 mA R 240 Applying its definition, we find the resistance of the rod, R= V 15.0 V = = 3 750 = 3.75 k . I 4.00 10 3 A
(b)
The length of the rod is determined from the definition of resistivity: R =
. Solving for A and substituting numerical values for R, A, and the value of given for carbon in Table 27.1, we obtain
= RA
e3.75 10 je5.00 10 = e3.50 10 mj
3 5
6
m2
j=
536 m .
P27.15
V = IR
and
R= : A
I V = : A
F 1.00 m I = 6.00 10 A = a0.600 mmf G H 1 000 mm JK VA a0.900 V fe6.00 10 m j I= = e5.60 10 mja1.50 mf
2 2 7 2 8
7
m2
I = 6.43 A
Chapter 27
111
P27.16
J=
I
r
2
= E =
0.012 0 m =
b
3.00 A
g
2
= 120 N C
b
g
= 55.3 m
P27.17 (a)
a
f
1
1
= 0.018 1 m where Taking r resistivity,
Given we obtain:
M = dV = d A A= M
d mass density,
R=
d
.
r r = = r d A M d M
2
.
Thus,
=
MR
r d
=
e1.00 10 ja0.500f e1.70 10 je8.92 10 j
3 8 3
= 1.82 m .
(b)
V=
M , d r= M
or 1.00 10 3
3
r2 =
M . d
Thus,
d
=
8.92 10
e
ja1.82f
r = 1.40 10 4 m .
diameter = 280 m .
The diameter is twice this distance: *P27.18 The volume of the gram of gold is given by = V= m = 10 3 kg 19.3 10 3 kg m3 m V
= 5.18 10 8 m3 = A 2.40 10 3 m
e
j
A = 2.16 10 11 m 2 R= P27.19 (a) 2. 44 10 8 m 2.4 10 3 m = = 2.71 10 6 A 2.16 10 11 m 2 Suppose the rubber is 10 cm long and 1 mm in diameter. 4 10 13 m 10 1 m 4 R= ~ = = ~ 10 18 2 2 3 A d 10 m
e
j
e
je
j
e
j
(b)
4 1.7 10 8 m 10 3 m 4 R= ~ ~ 10 7 2 2 d2 2 10 m
e
je
j
e
j
(c)
I= I~
V 10 2 V ~ 18 ~ 10 16 A R 10 10 2 V 10 7 ~ 10 9 A
112 P27.20
Current and Resistance
The distance between opposite faces of the cube is
F 90.0 g I =G H 10.5 g cm JK
3
13
= 2.05 cm .
(a)
R=
1.59 10 8 m = 2 = = = 7.77 10 7 = 777 n 2 A 2.05 10 m
(b)
V 1.00 10 5 V = = 12.9 A R 7.77 10 7 10.5 g cm 3 6.02 10 23 electrons mol n= 107.87 g mol I=
e
j
3 28
n = 5.86 10 22 electrons cm 3
e
10 jFGH 1.00100 m cm IJK = 5.86 10 .
6 3
m3
I = nqvA and v =
12.9 C s I = nqA 5.86 10 28 m3 1.60 10 19 C 0.020 5 m
e
je
jb
g
2
= 3.28 m s
P27.21 P27.22
Originally, R =
. A
2
Finally, R f =
b 3g =
3A
9A
=
R . 9
Al
rAl
b g
2
=
Cu
rCu
b g
rAl = rCu P27.23 J = E
Al 2.82 10 8 = = 1.29 Cu 1.70 10 8
so
=
13 A m2 J 6.00 10 = = 6.00 10 15 m E 100 V m
a
f
1
P27.24
R=
e4.00 10 R=
Section 27.3 P27.25
1 1 2 2 1 1 + 2 + = A1 A2 d2
3
2
m 0.250 m + 6.00 10 3 m 0.400 m
ja
f e
ja
e3.00 10
3
m
j
2
f=
378
A Model for Electrical Conduction m nq 2 9.11 10 31 m = = = 2.47 10 14 s nq 2 1.70 10 8 8. 49 10 28 1.60 10 19
=
so
e
e je
j je
j
vd = so Therefore,
qE m
7.84 10 4 =
e1.60 10 jEe2.47 10 j
19 14
9.11 10 31
E = 0.181 V m .
Chapter 27
113
P27.26
(a) (b)
n is unaffected J = I I A
so it doubles . (c) J = nev d so v d (d)
doubles .
=
m is unchanged as long as does not change due to a temperature change in the nq 2
conductor. P27.27 From Equation 27.17,
=
e8.49 10 je1.60 10 j e1.70 10 j = v = e8.60 10 m sje 2.47 10 sj = 2.12 10
nq
2 28 19 2 14 8 5
me
=
9.11 10 31
= 2. 47 10 14 s
8
m = 21.2 nm
Section 27.4 P27.28
Resistance and Temperature RC = Rh = V = R0 1 + TC  T0 IC
At the low temperature TC we write At the high temperature Th ,
b
g
where T0 = 20.0 C .
V V = = R0 1 + Th  T0 . Ih 1A
b
Then
and
aV f a1.00 Af = 1 + e3.90 10 aV f I 1 + e3.90 10 F 1.15 IJ = 1.98 A I = a1.00 A fG H 0.579 K
C C
3
3
g ja38.0f ja108f
.
P27.29
R = R 0 1 + T Solving,
a f
gives
140 = 19.0 1 + 4.50 10 3 C T .
a
f e
j
T = 1.42 10 3 C = T  20.0 C .
T = 1.44 10 3 C .
And, the final temperature is
114 P27.30
Current and Resistance
R = R c + Rn = R c 1 + c T  T0 + Rn 1 + n T  T0
b
g
b
g
0 = Rc c T  T0 + Rn n T  T0 so R c =  Rn
R =  Rn Rn
b
g
b
g
Rn
F IJ F IJ = RG 1  R = RG 1  H K H K L e0.400 10 Cj OP = 10.0 k M1  MN e0.500 10 Cj PQ
1 n c c c n 3 1 3
n + Rn c
n c
1
Rn = 5.56 k
P27.31 (a)
and
R c = 4.44 k
= 0 1 + T  T0 = 2.82 10 8 m 1 + 3.90 10 3 30.0 = 3.15 10 8 m
J= E = 0.200 V m 3.15 10 8 m
2
b
g e
j
a
f
(b)
= 6.35 10 6 A m 2
(c)
F d I = 6.35 10 I = JA = J G H 4 JK e
n=
6
LM e1.00 10 A m j MM 4 N
2 3
4
m
j OP = PP Q
2
49.9 mA
(d)
6.02 10 23 electrons 26.98 g 2.70 10 g m
e
6
j
= 6.02 10 28 electrons m 3
6.35 10 6 A m 2 J = = 659 m s vd = ne 6.02 10 28 electrons m3 1.60 10 19 C
e
e
je
j
j
(e) P27.32
V = E = 0.200 V m 2.00 m = 0.400 V
b
ga
f
For aluminum,
E = 3.90 10 3 C 1
= 24.0 10 6 C 1
R=
(Table 27.1) (Table 19.1)
0 1 + E T 1 + T 1 + E T 1.39 = = R0 = 1.71 = 1.234 2 A 1 + T 1.002 4 A 1 + T
b
a
ga
f
f
b a
g a f
fFGH
I JK
Chapter 27
115
P27.33
R = R 0 1 + T R  R0 = R0T R  R0 = T = 5.00 10 3 25.0 = 0.125 R0
e
j
P27.34
Assuming linear change of resistance with temperature, R = R0 1 + T R77 K = 1.00 1 + 3.92 10 3 216 C = 0.153 .
a
f
a
f e
f
ja
f
P27.35
= 0 1 + T or
a
TW =
1
W
FG H
W
1
0W
IJ K
8 8
Require that W = 4 0 Cu so that Therefore,
TW =
F 1 GH 4.50 10
3
I FG 4e1.70 10 j  1IJ = 47.6 C . JK C J G 5.60 10 KH
TW = 47.6 C + T0 = 67.6 C .
Section 27.5
Superconductors
Problem 48 in Chapter 43 can be assigned with this section. Section 27.6 P27.36 I= Electric Power
P
V
=
600 W = 5.00 A 120 V
and R = *P27.37 P27.38
V 120 V = = 24.0 . I 5.00 A
P = IV = 500 10 6 A 15 10 3 V = 7.50 W P = 0.800 1 500 hp 746 W hp = 8.95 10 5 W
e
j
b
gb
g
P = IV
P27.39
8.95 10 5 = I 2 000
b
g f
I = 448 A
The heat that must be added to the water is Q = mcT = 1.50 kg 4 186 J kg C 40.0 C = 2.51 10 5 J . Thus, the power supplied by the heater is W Q 2.51 10 5 J = = = 419 W t t 600 s
b
gb
ga
P=
and the resistance is R =
aV f = a110 V f
2
2
P
419 W
= 28.9 .
116 *P27.40
Current and Resistance
The battery takes in energy by electric transmission
Pt = V I t = 2.3 J C 13.5 10 3 C s 4.2 h
It puts out energy by electric transmission
a fa f
e
j
FG 3 600 s IJ = 469 J . H 1h K
aV fIatf = 1.6 J C e18 10
(a) (b) efficiency =
3
C s 2. 4 h
j
FG 3 600 s IJ = 249 J. H 1h K
useful output 249 J = = 0.530 total input 469 J
The only place for the missing energy to go is into internal energy: 469 J = 249 J + Eint Eint = 221 J
(c)
We imagine toasting the battery over a fire with 221 J of heat input: Q = mcT T =
2
221 J Q = mc 0.015 kg
2
kg C = 15.1 C 975 J
2
P27.41
a f R = FG V IJ = FG 140 IJ = 1.361 b g R H V K H 120 K F P  P IJ a100%f = FG P  1IJ a100%f = a1.361  1f100% = % = G H P K HP K
V P = P0 V0
2 0 0 0 0
36.1%
P27.42
P = I V =
a f aV f = 500 W R a110 V f = 24.2 R= a500 Wf
2 2
(a)
R= A
so
=
RA
a24.2 f e2.50 10 = jb g
4
m
j
2
1.50 10 6 m
= 3.17 m
(b)
R = R0 1 + T = 24.2 1 + 0.400 10 3 1 180 = 35.6
e
P=
aV f = a110f
2
2
R
35.6
= 340 W
Chapter 27
117
P27.43
R=
1.50 10 6 m 25.0 m = = 298 2 A 0.200 10 3 m
e
j
e
j
V = IR = 0.500 A 298 = 149 V (a) (b) (c) E= V = 149 V = 5.97 V m 25.0 m
a
fa
f
P = V I = 149 V 0.500 A = 74.6 W
R = R0 1 + T  T0 = 298 1 + 0.400 10 3 C 320 C = 337 I= 149 V V = = 0.443 A R 337
a f a a a
fa g
f
b
e
j
P = V I = 149 V 0.443 A = 66.1 W
P27.44 (a) U = q V = It V = 55.0 A h 12.0 V
a f a
f f
fa
f
a f a f a
fa
1 fFGH 11AC s IJK FGH 1 V J C IJK FGH 1 WJ s IJK = 660 W h = 1
0.660 kWh
(b) P27.45
Cost = 0.660 kWh
FG $0.060 0 IJ = H 1 kWh K
3.96
a f V = IR aV f = a10.0f = 0.833 W P=
P = I V
R
2 2
120
*P27.46
(a)
The resistance of 1 m of 12gauge copper wire is
= R= A d 2
b g
2
=
4
d
2
=
4 1.7 10 8 m 1 m
e
j
0.205 3 10
e
2
m
j
2
= 5.14 10 3 .
The rate of internal energy production is P = IV = I 2 R = 20 A 5.14 10 3 = 2.05 W . (b)
a
f
2
PAl = I 2 R = PAl Al = PCu Cu
I 2 4 Al
d2
PAl =
2.82 10 8 m 2.05 W = 3.41 W 1.7 10 8 m
Aluminum of the same diameter will get hotter than copper.
118 *P27.47
Current and Resistance
The energy taken in by electric transmission for the fluorescent lamp is
Pt = 11 J s 100 h
cost = 3.96 10 6
a
fFGH 3 600 s IJK = 3.96 10 J 1h F $0.08 IJ FG k IJ FG W s IJ FG h IJ = $0.088 JG H kWh K H 1 000 K H J K H 3 600 s K
6 7
For the incandescent bulb,
Pt = 40 W 100 h
cost = 1.44 10 7
a
fFGH 3 600 s IJK = 1.44 10 1h F $0.08 IJ = $0.32 JG H 3.6 10 J K
6
J
saving = $0.32  $0.088 = $0.232 P27.48 The total clock power is
e270 10
From e =
6
clocks 2.50
jFGH
Js clock
IJ FG 3 600 s IJ = 2.43 10 KH 1 h K
12
J h.
Wout , the power input to the generating plants must be: Qin Q in Wout t 2.43 10 12 J h = = = 9.72 10 12 J h t e 0.250
and the rate of coal consumption is Rate = 9.72 10 12 J h P27.49
e
.00 coal jFGH 133.0 kg10 J IJK = 2.95 10
6
5
kg coal h = 295 metric ton h .
P = I V = 1.70 A 110 V = 187 W
Energy used in a 24hour day = 0.187 kW 24.0 h = 4.49 kWh cost = 4.49 kWh
a f a
fa
f
a
fa
f
P27.50
FG $0.060 0 IJ = $0.269 = 26.9 H kWh K P = IV = a 2.00 A fa120 V f = 240 W E = b0.500 kg gb 4 186 J kg C ga77.0 C f = 161 kJ
int
t =
Eint
P
=
1.61 10 5 J = 672 s 240 W
Chapter 27
119
P27.51
At operating temperature, (a) (b)
P = IV = 1.53 A 120 V = 184 W
Use the change in resistance to find the final operating temperature of the toaster.
a
fa
f
R = R0 1 + T
T = 441 C *P27.52
a
f
120 120 1 + 0.400 10 3 T = 1.53 1.80
e
j
T = 20.0 C + 441 C = 461 C
You pay the electric company for energy transferred in the amount E = P t (a) 7d 1 fFGH 1 week IJK FGH 861400 s IJK FGH 1 WJ s IJK = 48.4 MJ d F 7 d IJ FG 24 h IJ FG k IJ = 13.4 kWh P t = 40 Wa 2 weeksfG H 1 week K H 1 d K H 1 000 K F 7 d IJ FG 24 h IJ FG k IJ FG 0.12 $ IJ = $1.61 P t = 40 Wa 2 weeksfG H 1 week K H 1 d K H 1 000 K H kWh K
P t = 40 W 2 weeks
a
(b)
(c) P27.53
h k .12 fFGH 601min IJK FGH 1 000 IJK FGH 0kWh$ IJK = $0.005 82 F 1 h IJ FG k IJ FG 0.12 $ IJ = $0.416 P t = 5 200 Wa 40 minfG H 60 min K H 1 000 K H kWh K
P t = 970 W 3 min
a
= 0.582
Consider a 400W blow dryer used for ten minutes daily for a year. The energy transferred to the dryer is
P t = 400 J s 600 s d 365 d 9 10 7 J
b
gb
ga
f
FG 1 kWh IJ 20 kWh . H 3.6 10 J K
6
We suppose that electrically transmitted energy costs on the order of ten cents per kilowatthour. Then the cost of using the dryer for a year is on the order of Cost 20 kWh $0.10 kWh = $2 ~ $1 .
a
fb
g
120
Current and Resistance
Additional Problems P27.54 (a) I= R= (b) I= V R V so
2 2
P = IV = P
a f = a120 V f
P
25.0 W
= 576
and
a V f R aV f = a120 V f R=
2 2
2
100 W
= 144
P 25.0 W Q 1.00 C = = 0.208 A = = V 120 V t t 1.00 C t = = 4.80 s 0.208 A The bulb takes in charge at high potential and puts out the same amount of charge at low potential.
U 1.00 J 1.00 J = t = = 0.040 0 s t t 25.0 W The bulb takes in energy by electrical transmission and puts out the same amount of energy by heat and light.
(c)
P = 25.0 W =
(d)
U = Pt = 25.0 J s 86 400 s d 30.0 d = 64.8 10 8 J The electric company sells energy . Cost = 64.8 10 6 J
b
gb
ga
f
FG $0.070 0 IJ FG k IJ FG W s IJ FG h IJ = $1.26 H kWh K H 1 000 K H J K H 3 600 s K $0.070 0 F kWh Cost per joule = GH 3.60 10 J IJK = $1.94 10 J kWh
6 8
*P27.55
The original stored energy is Ui = (a)
1 1 Q2 . QVi = 2 2 C
When the switch is closed, charge Q distributes itself over the plates of C and 3C in parallel, Q presenting equivalent capacitance 4C. Then the final potential difference is V f = for 4C both. The smaller capacitor then carries charge CV f = charge 3C Q 3Q . = 4C 4 1 C V f 2 3Q 2 . 32C Q Q C= . The larger capacitor carries 4C 4
(b)
(c)
The smaller capacitor stores final energy capacitor possesses energy 1 Q 3C 2 4C
d i
2
=
FG IJ H K
1 Q C 2 4C
FG IJ H K
2
=
Q2 . The larger 32C
2
=
(d)
The total final energy is
Q 2 3Q 2 Q 2 + = . The loss of potential energy is the energy 32C 32C 8C 3Q 2 Q2 Q2 appearing as internal energy in the resistor: = + Eint Eint = . 8C 2C 8C
Chapter 27
121
P27.56
We find the drift velocity from vd = v= I nq r
2
I = nqv d A = nqv d r 2
1 000 A
19
=
8.49 10
28
m
3
e1.60 10
C 10
je
2
m
j
2
= 2.34 10 4 m s
x t
t=
200 10 3 m x = = 8.54 10 8 s = 27.0 yr v 2.34 10 4 m s
P27.57
We begin with the differential equation
=
1 d . dT = dT
T0 T
(a)
Separating variables, ln
FG IJ = bT  T g and H K
0 0
0
z z
d
= 0 e bT T0 g .
(b)
From the series expansion e x 1 + x , x << 1 ,
0 1 + T  T0
P27.58
b
g
a
f
.
The resistance of one wire is
FG 0.500 IJ a100 mif = 50.0 . H mi K
The whole wire is at nominal 700 kV away from ground potential, but the potential difference between its two ends is
IR = 1 000 A 50.0 = 50.0 kV .
Then it radiates as heat power P = V I = 50.0 10 3 V 1 000 A = 50.0 MW .
b
ga
f
a f e
jb
g
P27.59
=
RA
=
a V f A
I
(m) 0.540 1.028 1.543
R ( ) 10.4 21.1 31.8
( m) 1.41 10 6
1.50 10 6 1.50 10 6
= 1.47 10 6 m (in agreement with tabulated value of 1.50 10 6 m in Table 27.1)
P27.60 2 wires = 100 m R= (a) (b) (c) 0.108 100 m = 0.036 0 300 m
a
f
aV f
home
= V
a f a
line
 IR = 120  110 0.036 0 = 116 V
a fb
g
P = I V = 110 A 116 V = 12.8 kW
Pwires = I 2 R = 110 A
a f a
fa
f
f b0.036 0 g =
2
436 W
122 P27.61
Current and Resistance
(a)
E=
0  4.00 V dV i= = 8.00 i V m 0.500  0 m dx
a a
f f
(b)
4.00 10 8 m 0.500 m = = 0.637 R= 2 A 1.00 10 4 m
e
ja
f
e
j
(c)
I=
4.00 V V = = 6.28 A R 0.637 I 6. 28 A i= A 1.00 10 4 m
(d)
J=
e
j
2
= 2.00 10 8 i A m 2 = 200 i MA m 2
(e)
J = 4.00 10 8 m 2.00 10 8 i A m 2 = 8.00 i V m = E
dV x V i= i dx L
e
je
j
P27.62
(a)
E=
af
(b)
R=
4 L = A d2 V d 2 V = R 4 L I V i= i L A V i= E L
(c)
I=
(d)
J=
(e)
J=
P27.63
R = R0 1 + T  T0 In this case, I =
b
g
so so
I0 , 10
LM OP LM OP N Q N Q 1 9 T = T + a9f = 20+ = 2 020 C 0.004 50 C
T = T0 + 1 R 1 I0 1 .  1 = T0 + R0 I
0
.
P27.64
R=
6.00 V 12.0 = = thus 12.0 I  36.0 = 6.00 I and I = 6.00 A . I I I  3.00
a
f
Therefore, R =
12.0 V = 2.00 . 6.00 A
Chapter 27
123
P27.65
(a)
P = IV
so I =
P 8.00 10 3 W = = 667 A . V 12.0 V
= 2.00 10 7 J 8.00 10 W
3
(b)
t =
U
P
= 2.50 10 3 s
and x = vt = 20.0 m s 2.50 10 3 s = 50.0 km .
b
ge
j
P27.66
(a)
We begin with
R=
0 1 + T  T0 0 1 + T  T0 = , A A0 1 + 2 T  T0
R0
0 0
which reduces to
R=
b b g 1 + bT  T g 1 + bT  T g 1 + 2 bT  T g
0
b
g
g
.
(b)
For copper:
0 = 1.70 10 8 m , = 3.90 10 3 C 1 , and = 17.0 10 6 C 1
R0 = 1.70 10 8 2.00 0 0 = = 1.08 . 2 A0 0.100 10 3
e
e
ja f j f
The simple formula for R gives: R = 1.08 1 + 3.90 10 3 C 1 100 C  20.0 C = 1.420 while the more complicated formula gives: R=
a
f e
ja
a1.08 f 1 + e3.90 10 a f
3
C 1 80.0 C 1 + 17.0 10 6 C 1 80.0 C
ja
1 + 2 17.0 10 6
e
f e C ja80.0 C f
1
ja
f
= 1.418 .
P27.67
Let be the temperature coefficient at 20.0C, and be the temperature coefficient at 0 C. Then
= 0 1 + T  20.0 C , and = 1 + T  0 C temperature T. That is, we must have:
a
f
must both give the correct resistivity at any
0 1 + T  20.0 C = 1 + T  0 C .
Setting T = 0 in equation (1) yields: and setting T = 20.0 C in equation (1) gives:
a
f
a
f
(1)
= 0 1  20.0 C , 0
a f = 1 + a 20.0 C f . a f a f
Put from the first of these results into the second to obtain:
0 = 0 1  20.0 C 1 + 20.0 C .
continued on next page
124
Current and Resistance
Therefore
1 + 20.0 C =
a
f
1 1  20.0 C
a
f
which simplifies to
=
. 1  20.0 C
a
f
From this, the temperature coefficient, based on a reference temperature of 0C, may be computed for any material. For example, using this, Table 27.1 becomes at 0 C : Material Silver Copper Gold Aluminum Tungsten Iron Platinum Lead Nichrome Carbon Germanium Silicon P27.68 (a) Temp Coefficients at 0C 4.1 10 3 C
4.2 10 3 C 3.6 10 3 C 4.2 10 3 C 4.9 10 3 C 5.6 10 3 C 4.25 10 3 C 4.2 10 3 C 0.4 10 3 C 0.5 10 3 C 24 10 3 C 30 10 3 C
A thin cylindrical shell of radius r, thickness dr, and length L contributes resistance dR =
d dr dr = = . A 2 L r 2 r L
F b g GH
I JK
The resistance of the whole annulus is the series summation of the contributions of the thin shells: r b dr = R= ln b ra 2 L r r 2 L
a
r
z
FG IJ H K
.
(b)
In this equation
r V = ln b I ra 2 L
FG IJ H K
we solve for
=
2 LV I ln rb ra
b
g
.
Chapter 27
125
P27.69
Each speaker receives 60.0 W of power. Using P = I 2 R , we then have I=
P 60.0 W = = 3.87 A . 4.00 R
The system is not adequately protected since the fuse should be set to melt at 3.87 A, or less . P27.70 V =  E or dV =  E dx
V =  IR =  E I= dq E A A dV dV = = = A E = E = A dt R dx dx
Current flows in the direction of decreasing voltage. Energy flows as heat in the direction of decreasing temperature. P27.71 R=
z
y  y1 dx dx = where y = y1 + 2 x A wy L
z
y  y1 L L dx = R= ln y1 + 2 x w 0 y1 + y 2  y 1 L x w y 2  y 1 L
z
b
R=
y L ln 2 y1 w y 2  y1
b
F I g GH JK
g
b
LM g N
OP Q
L 0
FIG. P27.71
P27.72
From the geometry of the longitudinal section of the resistor shown in the figure, we see that br ba = . y h
a f a f
From this, the radius at a distance y from the base is For a diskshaped element of volume dR =
r = ab R=
a fy +b . h
FIG. P27.72
dy : r2
za
h 0
ab y h +b
fb g
dy
2
.
Using the integral formula
za
du au + b
f
2
=
1 , a au + b
a
f
R=
h . ab
*P27.73
(a)
The resistance of the dielectric block is R =
d = . A A 0 A . The capacitance of the capacitor is C = d d 0 A 0 = Then RC = is a characteristic of the material only. A d
R=
(b)
0 0 75 10 16 m 3.78 8.85 10 12 C 2 = = = 1.79 10 15 C C 14 10 9 F N m2
a f
126 P27.74
Current and Resistance
I = I 0 exp
LM F eV I  1OP and R = V I NM GH k T JK QP
B
with I 0 = 1.00 10 9 A , e = 1.60 10 19 C , and k B = 1.38 10 23 J K . The following includes a partial table of calculated values and a graph for each of the specified temperatures. (i) For T = 280 K : V V 0. 400 0. 440 0. 480 0.520 0.560 0.600
af
I A
af
R 5.38 1.12 0.232
a f
0.015 6 25.6 0.081 8 0.429 2.25 11.8 61.6
0.047 6 0.009 7
FIG. P27.74(i) (ii) For T = 300 K : V V 0. 400 0. 440 0. 480 0.520 0.560 0.600
af
I A
af
R 77.3 18.1 4.22 0.973 0.223 0.051
af
0.005 0.024 0.114 0.534 2.51 11.8
FIG. P27.74(ii) (iii) For T = 320 K : V V 0. 400 0. 440 0. 480 0.520 0.560 0.600
a f IaAf
0.002 0 203 0.008 4 0.035 7 0.152 0.648 2.76
R 52.5 13.4 3.42 0.864 0.217
af
FIG. P27.74(iii)
Chapter 27
127
*P27.75
(a)
Think of the device as two capacitors in parallel. The one on the left has 1 = 1 , A1 =
FG + xIJ H2 K
. The equivalent capacitance is
1 0 A1 2 0 A 2 0 + = d d d
(b)
FG + xIJ + FG  xIJ = H2 K d H2 K
0
0 2d
a
+ 2 x +  2x .
f
The charge on the capacitor is Q = CV V Q= 0 + 2 x +  2x . 2d The current is Vv dQ dQ dx 0 V = = 1 . I= 0 + 2 + 0  2 v =  0 dt dx dt d 2d The negative value indicates that the current drains charge from the capacitor. Positive Vv current is clockwise 0 1 . d
a
f
a
f
a f
a f
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P27.2 P27.4 P27.6 P27.8 P27.10 P27.12 P27.14 P27.16 P27.18 P27.20 P27.22 P27.24 P27.26 P27.28 P27.30 3.64 h (a) see the solution; (b) 1.05 mA (a) 17.0 A ; (b) 85.0 kA m 2 (a) 99.5 kA m 2 ; (b) 8.00 mm (a) 221 nm ; (b) no; see the solution 30.3 MA m 2 (a) 3.75 k ; (b) 536 m P27.32 P27.34 P27.36 P27.38 P27.40 P27.42 P27.44 P27.46 P27.48 P27.50 P27.52 P27.54
1.71 0.153 5.00 A , 24.0 448 A
(a) 0.530; (b) 221 J; (c) 15.1C (a) 3.17 m ; (b) 340 W (a) 0.660 kWh ; (b) 3.96 (a) 2.05 W; (b) 3.41 W; no 295 metric ton h 672 s (a) $1.61; (b) $0.005 82; (c) $0.416 (a) 576 and 144 ; (b) 4.80 s; The charge is the same. The chargefield system is in a lowerenergy configuration. (c) 0.040 0 s; The energy enters by electric transmission and exits by heat and electromagnetic radiation; (d) $1.26; energy; 1.94 10 8 $ J
0.018 1 m
2.71 M (a) 777 n ; (b) 3. 28 m s rAl = 1.29 rCu
378
(a) nothing; (b) doubles; (c) doubles; (d) nothing
1.98 A
carbon, 4.44 k ; nichrome, 5.56 k
128 P27.56 P27.58 P27.60 P27.62
Current and Resistance
27.0 yr
P27.66
(a) see the solution; (b) 1.418 nearly agrees with 1.420 (a) R = 2 LV r ln b ; (b) = I ln rb ra 2 L ra
50.0 MW
(a) 116 V ; (b) 12.8 kW ; (c) 436 W (a) E = (d) J = V d Vi 4 L ; ; (c) I = ; (b) R = 2 L 4 L d Vi ; (e) see the solution L
2
P27.68 P27.70 P27.72 P27.74
b
g
see the solution see the solution see the solution
P27.64
2.00
28
Direct Current Circuits
CHAPTER OUTLINE
28.1 28.2 28.3 28.4 28.5 28.6 Electromotive Force Resistors in Series and Parallel Kirchhoff's Rules RC Circuits Electrical Meters Household Wiring and Electrical Safety
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q28.1 The load resistance in a circuit is the effective resistance of all of the circuit elements excluding the emf source. In energy terms, it can be used to determine the energy delivered to the load by electrical transmission and there appearing as internal energy to raise the temperature of the resistor. The internal resistance of a battery represents the limitation on the efficiency of the chemical reaction that takes place in the battery to supply current to the load. The emf of the battery represents its conversion of chemical energy into energy which it puts out by electric transmission; the battery also creates internal energy within itself, in an amount that can be computed from its internal resistance. We model the internal resistance as constant for a given battery, but it may increase greatly as the battery ages. It may increase somewhat with increasing current demand by the load. For a load described by Ohm's law, the load resistance is a precisely fixed value.
Q28.2
The potential difference between the terminals of a battery will equal the emf of the battery when there is no current in the battery. At this time, the current though, and hence the potential drop across the internal resistance is zero. This only happens when there is no load placed on the batterythat includes measuring the potential difference with a voltmeter! The terminal voltage will exceed the emf of the battery when current is driven backward through the battery, in at its positive terminal and out at its negative terminal. No. If there is one battery in a circuit, the current inside it will be from its negative terminal to its positive terminal. Whenever a battery is delivering energy to a circuit, it will carry current in this direction. On the other hand, when another source of emf is charging the battery in question, it will have a current pushed through it from its positive terminal to its negative terminal. Connect the resistors in series. Resistors of 5.0 k, 7.5 k and 2.2 k connected in series present equivalent resistance 14.7 k. Connect the resistors in parallel. Resistors of 5.0 k, 7.5 k and 2.2 k connected in parallel present equivalent resistance 1.3 k.
Q28.3
Q28.4
Q28.5
129
130 Q28.6
Direct Current Circuits
Q28.7 Q28.8 Q28.9
In series, the current is the same through each resistor. Without knowing individual resistances, nothing can be determined about potential differences or power. In parallel, the potential difference is the same across each resistor. Without knowing individual resistances, nothing can be determined about current or power. In this configuration, the power delivered to one individual resistor is significantly less than if only one equivalent resistor were used. This decreases the possibility of component failure, and possible electrical disaster to some more expensive circuit component than a resistor. Each of the two conductors in the extension cord itself has a small resistance. The longer the extension cord, the larger the resistance. Taken into account in the circuit, the extension cord will reduce the current from the power supply, and also will absorb energy itself in the form of internal energy, leaving less power available to the light bulb. The whole wire is very nearly at one uniform potential. There is essentially zero difference in potential between the bird's feet. Then negligible current goes through the bird. The resistance through the bird's body between its feet is much larger than the resistance through the wire between the same two points. The potential difference across a resistor is positive when it is measured against the direction of the current in the resistor. The bulb will light up for a while immediately after the switch is closed. As the capacitor charges, the bulb gets progressively dimmer. When the capacitor is fully charged the current in the circuit is zero and the bulb does not glow at all. If the value of RC is small, this whole process might occupy a very short time interval. An ideal ammeter has zero resistance. An ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance. Real meters cannot attain these values, but do approach these values to the degree that they do not alter the current or potential difference that is being measured within the accuracy of the meter. Hooray for experimental uncertainty! A short circuit can develop when the last bit of insulation frays away between the two conductors in a lamp cord. Then the two conductors touch each other, opening a lowresistance branch in parallel with the lamp. The lamp will immediately go out, carrying no current and presenting no danger. A very large current exists in the power supply, the house wiring, and the rest of the lamp cord up to the contact point. Before it blows the fuse or pops the circuit breaker, the large current can quickly raise the temperature in the shortcircuit path.
Q28.10
Q28.11
Q28.12 Q28.13
Q28.14
Q28.15
Chapter 28
131
Q28.16
A wire or cable in a transmission line is thick and made of material with very low resistivity. Only when its length is very large does its resistance become significant. To transmit power over a long distance it is most efficient to use low current at high voltage, minimizing the I 2 R power loss in the transmission line. Alternating current, as opposed to the direct current we study first, can be stepped up in voltage and then down again, with highefficiency transformers at both ends of the power line. Car headlights are in parallel. If they were in series, both would go out when the filament of one failed. An important safety factor would be lost. Kirchhoff's junction rule expresses conservation of electric charge. If the total current into a point were different from the total current out, then charge would be continuously created or annihilated at that point. Kirchhoff's loop rule expresses conservation of energy. For a singleloop circle with two resistors, the loop rule reads +  IR1  IR 2 = 0 . This is algebraically equivalent to q = qIR1 + qIR 2 , where q = It is the charge passing a point in the loop in the time interval t . The equivalent equation states that the power supply injects energy into the circuit equal in amount to that which the resistors degrade into internal energy.
Q28.17 Q28.18
Q28.19
V 2 , the bulbs present resistances R 2 2 2 120 V 120 V 120 V V 2 = 190 , and = 72 . The nominal 60 W lamp R= = = 240 , and P 60 W 75 W 200 W has greatest resistance. When they are connected in series, they all carry the same small current. Here the highestresistance bulb glows most brightly and the one with lowest resistance is faintest. This is just the reverse of their order of intensity if they were connected in parallel, as they are designed to be. At their normal operating temperatures, from P =
a
f
a
f
a
f
Q28.20
Answer their question with a challenge. If the student is just looking at a diagram, provide the materials to build the circuit. If you are looking at a circuit where the second bulb really is fainter, get the student to unscrew them both and interchange them. But check that the student's understanding of potential has not been impaired: if you patch past the first bulb to short it out, the second gets brighter. Series, because the circuit breaker trips and opens the circuit when the current in that circuit loop exceeds a certain preset value. The circuit breaker must be in series to sense the appropriate current (see Fig. 28.30). The hospital maintenance worker is right. A hospital room is full of electrical grounds, including the bed frame. If your grandmother touched the faulty knob and the bed frame at the same time, she could receive quite a jolt, as there would be a potential difference of 120 V across her. If the 120 V is DC, the shock could send her into ventricular fibrillation, and the hospital staff could use the defibrillator you read about in Section 26.4. If the 120 V is AC, which is most likely, the current could produce external and internal burns along the path of conduction. Likely no one got a shock from the radio back at home because her bedroom contained no electrical groundsno conductors connected to zero volts. Just like the bird in Question 28.11, granny could touch the "hot" knob without getting a shock so long as there was no path to ground to supply a potential difference across her. A new appliance in the bedroom or a flood could make the radio lethal. Repair it or discard it. Enjoy the news from Lake Wobegon on the new plastic radio.
Q28.21
Q28.22
132 Q28.23
Direct Current Circuits
So long as you only grab one wire, and you do not touch anything that is grounded, you are safe (see Question 28.11). If the wire breaks, let go! If you continue to hold on to the wire, there will be a largeand rather lethalpotential difference between the wire and your feet when you hit the ground. Since your body can have a resistance of about 10 k, the current in you would be sufficient to ruin your day. Both 120V and 240V lines can deliver injurious or lethal shocks, but there is a somewhat better safety factor with the lower voltage. To say it a different way, the insulation on a 120V line can be thinner. On the other hand, a 240V device carries less current to operate a device with the same power, so the conductor itself can be thinner. Finally, as we will see in Chapter 33, the last stepdown transformer can also be somewhat smaller if it has to go down only to 240 volts from the high voltage of the main power line. As Luigi Galvani showed with his experiment with frogs' legs, muscles contract when electric current exists in them. If an electrician contacts a "live" wire, the muscles in his hands and fingers will contract, making his hand clench. If he touches the wire with the front of his hand, his hand will clench around the wire, and he may not be able to let go. Also, the back of his hand may be drier than his palm, so an actual shock may be much weaker. Grab an insulator, like a stick or baseball bat, and bat for a home run. Hit the wire away from the person or hit them away from the wire. If you grab the person, you will learn very quickly about electrical circuits by becoming part of one. A high voltage can lead to a high current when placed in a circuit. A device cannot supply a high currentor any currentunless connected to a load. A more accurate sign saying potentially high current would just confuse the poor physics student who already has problems distinguishing between electrical potential and current. The two greatest factors are the potential difference between the wire and your feet, and the conductivity of the kite string. This is why Ben Franklin's experiment with lightning and flying a kite was so dangerous. Several scientists died trying to reproduce Franklin's results. Suppose = 12 V and each lamp has R = 2 . Before the switch is closed the current is 12 V = 2 A. 6 The potential difference across each lamp is 2 A 2 = 4 V . The power of each lamp is 2 A 4 V = 8 W , totaling 24 W for the circuit. Closing the switch makes the switch and the wires connected to it a zeroresistance branch. All of the current through A and B will go through the switch and (b) lamp C goes out, with zero voltage across it. With less total resistance, the (c) current 12 V in the battery = 3 A becomes larger than before and (a) lamps A and B get brighter. (d) The 4 voltage across each of A and B is 3 A 2 = 6 V , larger than before. Each converts power 3 A 6 V = 18 W , totaling 36 W, which is (e) an increase.
Q28.24
Q28.25
Q28.26
Q28.27
Q28.28
Q28.29
a fa f
a fa f
a fa f
a fa f
Q28.30
The starter motor draws a significant amount of current from the battery while it is starting the car. This, coupled with the internal resistance of the battery, decreases the output voltage of the battery below its the nominal 12 V emf. Then the current in the headlights decreases.
Chapter 28
133
Q28.31
Two runs in series: two runs: .
. Three runs in parallel:
. Junction of one lift and
Gustav Robert Kirchhoff, Professor of Physics at Heidelberg and Berlin, was master of the obvious. A junction rule: The number of skiers coming into any junction must be equal to the number of skiers leaving. A loop rule: the total change in altitude must be zero for any skier completing a closed path.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 28.1 P28.1 (a) Electromotive Force
P=
aV f
R
2
becomes so (b) V = IR so and so
20.0 W =
a11.6 V f
R
2
R = 6.73 . FIG. P28.1
11.6 V = I 6.73
I = 1.72 A = IR + Ir r = 1.97 .
a
f a f
15.0 V = 11.6 V + 1.72 A r
P28.2
(a)
Vterm = IR becomes so
10.0 V = I 5.60
I = 1.79 A .
a
f fa f
(b)
Vterm =  Ir becomes so
10.0 V =  1.79 A 0.200
a
= 10.4 V .
3.00 V = 5.00 . 0.600 A
P28.3
The total resistance is R = (a)
Rlamp = R  rbatteries = 5.00  0.408 = 4.59 0.408 I 2 Pbatteries = = 0.081 6 = 8.16% Ptotal 5.00 I 2
(b)
a a
f f
FIG. P28.3
134 P28.4
Direct Current Circuits
(a)
Here = I R + r , so I =
b5.00 + 0.080 0 g = 2.48 A . Then, V = IR = a 2.48 A fa5.00 f = 12.4 V .
R+r FIG. P28.4
a
f
=
12.6 V
(b)
Let I 1 and I 2 be the currents flowing through the battery and the headlights, respectively. Then, I 1 = I 2 + 35.0 A , and  I 1 r  I 2 r = 0 so giving Thus,
= I 2 + 35.0 A 0.080 0 + I 2 5.00 = 12.6 V
I 2 = 1.93 A . V2 = 1.93 A 5.00 = 9.65 V .
b
gb
g a
f
a
fa
f
Section 28.2 P28.5
Resistors in Series and Parallel
g a fb g Therefore, a 2.00 A fR = a1.60 A fb R + 3.00 g or R = 12.0 .
V = I 1 R1 = 2.00 A R1 and V = I 2 R1 + R 2 = 1.60 A R1 + 3.00
1 1 1
a
f
b
P28.6
(a)
Rp =
b1 7.00 g + b1 10.0 g = 4.12
1
Rs = R1 + R 2 + R3 = 4.00 + 4.12 + 9.00 = 17.1 (b) V = IR 34.0 V = I 17.1
a
f
FIG. P28.6
I = 1.99 A for 4.00 , 9.00 resistors. Applying V = IR , so so P28.7
a1.99 Afa4.12 f = 8.18 V 8.18 V = I a7.00 f
I = 1.17 A for 7.00 resistor
8.18 V = I 10.0
a
f
I = 0.818 A for 10.0 resistor.
For the bulb in use as intended,
and
P 75.0 W = = 0.625 A V 120 V V 120 V = = 192 . R= 0.625 A I
I= FIG. P28.7 I= 120 V = 0.620 A . 193.6
Now, presuming the bulb resistance is unchanged,
Across the bulb is so its power is
f P = IV = 0.620 Aa119 V f =
V = IR = 192 0.620 A = 119 V
73.8 W .
a
Chapter 28
135
P28.8
120 V = IReq = I V2 = I = A2 A2
FG HA
1 A1
+
1
e
a120 V f
1 A2
+ + , or I = A 2 A3 A 4
+
1 A3
IJ K
e
a120 Vf
1 A1
+
1 A2
+
1 A3
+
1 A4
j
+
+
1 A4
j
= 29.5 V
P28.9
If we turn the given diagram on its side, we find that it is the same as figure (a). The 20.0 and 5.00 resistors are in series, so the first reduction is shown in (b). In addition, since the 10.0 , 5.00 , and 25.0 resistors are then in parallel, we can solve for their equivalent resistance as: 1 Req = = 2.94 . 1 1 1 10.0 + 5.00 + 25 .0
c
h
This is shown in figure (c), which in turn reduces to the circuit shown in figure (d). V Next, we work backwards through the diagrams applying I = and R V = IR alternately to every resistor, real and equivalent. The 12.94 resistor is connected across 25.0 V, so the current through the battery in every diagram is V 25.0 V = = 1.93 A . I= 12.94 R In figure (c), this 1.93 A goes through the 2.94 equivalent resistor to give a potential difference of: V = IR = 1.93 A 2.94 = 5.68 V .
a
fa
f
From figure (b), we see that this potential difference is the same across Vab , the 10 resistor, and the 5.00 resistor. (b) (a) Therefore, Vab = 5.68 V . Since the current through the 20.0 resistor is also the current through the 25.0 line ab, Vab 5.68 V = = 0.227 A = 227 mA . I= 25.0 R ab
FIG. P28.9
*P28.10
We assume that the metal wand makes lowresistance contact with the person's hand and that the resistance through the person's body is negligible compared to the resistance Rshoes of the shoe soles. The equivalent resistance seen by the power supply is 1.00 M + Rshoes . The current through both 50.0 V resistors is . The voltmeter displays 1.00 M + Rshoes 50.0 V 1.00 M V = I 1.00 M = = V . 1.00 M + Rshoes
a
f
a
f
(a)
We solve to obtain
50.0 V 1.00 M = V 1.00 M + V Rshoes 1.00 M 50.0  V Rshoes = . V
a
f
a
a
f
f
b
g
(b)
With Rshoes 0 , the current through the person's body is 50.0 V = 50.0 A The current will never exceed 50 A . 1.00 M
136 P28.11
Direct Current Circuits
(a)
Since all the current in the circuit must pass through the series 100 resistor, P = I 2 R 2 Pmax = RI max so I max =
R eq = 100 +
FG 1 + 1 IJ H 100 100 K fa
P 25.0 W = = 0.500 A 100 R
1
FIG. P28.11
= 150
Vmax = R eq I max = 75.0 V (b)
P = IV = 0.500 A 75.0 V = 37.5 W total power P1 = 25.0 W P2 = P3 = RI 2 100 0.250 A
a
f
a
fa
f
2
= 6.25 W
P28.12
Using 2.00, 3.00, 4.00 resistors, there are 7 series, 4 parallel, and 6 mixed combinations: Series 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 9.00 Parallel 0.923 1.20 1.33 1.71 Mixed 1.56 2.00 2.22 3.71 4.33 5.20 The resistors may be arranged in patterns:
P28.13
The potential difference is the same across either combination. V = IR = 3 I 1+ R =3 500
c
1
1 R
+
1 500
h
so and
R
FG 1 + 1 IJ = 3 H R 500 K
R = 1 000 = 1.00 k . FIG. P28.13
*P28.14
When S is open, R1 , R 2 , R3 are in series with the battery. Thus: 6V (1) R1 + R 2 + R3 = 3 = 6 k . 10 A When S is closed in position 1, the parallel combination of the two R 2 's is in series with R1 , R3 , and the battery. Thus: 1 6V = 5 k. (2) R1 + R 2 + R3 = 2 1.2 10 3 A When S is closed in position 2, R1 and R 2 are in series with the battery. R3 is shorted. Thus: 6V = 3 k. (3) R1 + R 2 = 2 10 3 A From (1) and (3): R3 = 3 k. Subtract (2) from (1): R 2 = 2 k . From (3): R1 = 1 k. Answers: R1 = 1.00 k , R 2 = 2.00 k , R3 = 3.00 k .
Chapter 28
137
P28.15
Rp = Rs
FG 1 + 1 IJ = 0.750 H 3.00 1.00 K = a 2.00 + 0.750 + 4.00f = 6.75
1
I battery =
V 18.0 V = = 2.67 A Rs 6.75
P = I 2R:
P2 = 2.67 A
a
f a2.00 f
2
P2 = 14.2 W in 2.00 P4 = 2.67 A
V2 V4
a
f a4.00 Af = 28.4 W = a 2.67 A fa 2.00 f = 5.33 V, = a 2.67 A fa 4.00 f = 10.67 V
2
in 4.00
Vp = 18.0 V  V2  V4 = 2.00 V = V3 = V1
P3 = P1 =
P28.16
bV g = a2.00 V f
3 2
b
g
FIG. P28.15
2
bV g = a2.00 Vf
1
R3
3.00
2
= 1.33 W in 3.00 = 4.00 W in 1.00
R1
1.00
Denoting the two resistors as x and y, x + y = 690, and 1 1 1 = + 150 x y
690  x + x 1 1 1 = + = 150 x 690  x x 690  x
a
a
f
f
x  690 x + 103 500 = 0 x= 690
2
a690f
2
2
 414 000 y = 220
x = 470 *P28.17
A certain quantity of energy Eint = P time is required to raise the temperature of the water to
2
aV f where aV f is a constant. R aV f t = aV f 2 t . Then R = 2 R . Thus comparing coils 1 and 2, we have for the energy
100C . For the power delivered to the heaters we have P = IV =
2 2
a f
R1
R2
2
1
(a)
When connected in parallel, the coils present equivalent resistance Rp =
2 V t p V t 2 R1 1 1 = = = . Now 1 R1 + 1 R 2 1 R1 + 1 2 R1 3 2 R1 3 R1 2
a f
a f
2
t p =
2
2 t . 3
(b)
For the series connection, Rs = R1 + R 2 = R1 + 2 R1 = 3 R1 and t s = 3 t .
a V f t = a V f t
R1 3 R1
s
138 P28.18
Direct Current Circuits
(a)
V = IR :
33.0 V = I1 11.0 33.0 V = I 2 22.0 I 3 = 3.00 A I 2 = 1.50 A
a
f
a
f
f
FIG. P28.18(a)
P = I 2R:
P1 = 3.00 A P1 = 99.0 W
a
f a11.0 f
2
P2 = 1.50 A 22.0 P2 = 49.5 W
a
fa
2
The 11.0 resistor uses more power. (b) (c)
P1 + P2 = 148 W
P = I V = 4.50 33.0 = 148 W
a f a fa f f
a
Rs = R1 + R 2 = 11.0 + 22.0 = 33.0 V = IR :
33.0 V = I 33.0 , so I = 1.00 A
a
P = I 2R:
P1 = 1.00 A P1 = 11.0 W
a
f a11.0 f
2 2
P2 = 1.00 A P2 = 22.0 W
f a22.0 f
2
FIG. P28.18(c)
The 22.0 resistor uses more power. (d)
g a f a33.0 f = P = I a V f = a1.00 A fa33.0 V f = 33.0 W
P1 + P2 = I 2 R1 + R2 = 1.00 A
b
33.0 W
(e) *P28.19 (a)
The parallel configuration uses more power. The resistors 2, 3, and 4 can be combined to a single 2R resistor. This is in series with resistor 1, with resistance R, so the equivalent resistance of the whole circuit is 3R. In series, 1 potential difference is shared in proportion to the resistance, so resistor 1 gets of the 3 2 battery voltage and the 234 parallel combination get of the battery voltage. This is the 3 1 potential difference across resistor 4, but resistors 2 and 3 must share this voltage. goes to 3 2 2 and to 3. The ranking by potential difference is V4 > V3 > V1 > V2 . 3 Based on the reasoning above the potential differences are 2 4 2 . V1 = , V2 = , V3 = , V4 = 3 9 9 3 All the current goes through resistor 1, so it gets the most. The current then splits at the parallel combination. Resistor 4 gets more than half, because the resistance in that branch is less than in the other branch. Resistors 2 and 3 have equal currents because they are in series. The ranking by current is I 1 > I 4 > I 2 = I 3 . Resistor 1 has a current of I. Because the resistance of 2 and 3 in series is twice that of resistor 4, twice as much current goes through 4 as through 2 and 3. The current through I 2I the resistors are I 1 = I , I 2 = I 3 = , I 4 = . 3 3
(b)
(c)
(d)
continued on next page
Chapter 28
139
(e)
Increasing resistor 3 increases the equivalent resistance of the entire circuit. The current in the circuit, which is the current through resistor 1, decreases. This decreases the potential difference across resistor 1, increasing the potential difference across the parallel combination. With a larger potential difference the current through resistor 4 is increased. With more current through 4, and less in the circuit to start with, the current through resistors 2 and 3 must decrease. To summarize, I 4 increases and I 1 , I 2 , and I 3 decrease . If resistor 3 has an infinite resistance it blocks any current from passing through that branch, and the circuit effectively is just resistor 1 and resistor 4 in series with the battery. The circuit 3 now has an equivalent resistance of 4R. The current in the circuit drops to of the original 4 4 current because the resistance has increased by . All this current passes through resistors 1 3 3I 3I , I2 = I3 = 0, I4 = . and 4, and none passes through 2 or 3. Therefore I 1 = 4 4
(f)
Section 28.3 P28.20
Kirchhoff's Rules
+15.0  7.00 I1  2.00 5.00 = 0
5.00 = 7.00 I 1 I 3 = I 1 + I 2 = 2.00 A 0.714 + I 2 = 2.00 so I 2 = 1.29 A so I 1 = 0.714 A
a f a fa f
+  2.00 1.29  5.00 2.00 = 0
P28.21
a f
a f
= 12.6 V
FIG. P28.20
We name currents I 1 , I 2 , and I 3 as shown. From Kirchhoff's current rule, I 3 = I 1 + I 2 . Applying Kirchhoff's voltage rule to the loop containing I 2 and I 3 , 12.0 V  4.00 I 3  6.00 I 2  4.00 V = 0
3 2
a f a f 8.00 = a 4.00fI + a6.00fI
Applying Kirchhoff's voltage rule to the loop containing I 1 and I 2 ,
 6.00 I 2  4.00 V + 8.00 I1 = 0
a f
1
a f
a8.00fI
2
1
= 4.00 + 6.00 I 2 .
a f
FIG. P28.21
Solving the above linear system, we proceed to the pair of simultaneous equations:
R8 = 4I + 4I S8I = 4 + 6 I T
1
2 2
+ 6I2
or
R8 = 4I + 10I SI = 1.33I  0.667 T
1 2 1
and to the single equation 8 = 4I 1 + 13.3 I 1  6.67 I1 = and 14.7 V = 0.846 A . 17.3 Then give
I 2 = 1.33 0.846 A  0.667
I 1 = 846 mA, I 2 = 462 mA, I 3 = 1.31 A .
a
f
I 3 = I1 + I 2
All currents are in the directions indicated by the arrows in the circuit diagram.
140 P28.22
Direct Current Circuits
The solution figure is shown to the right.
FIG. P28.22 P28.23 We use the results of Problem 28.21. (a) By the 4.00V battery: By the 12.0V battery: (b) By the 8.00 resistor: By the 5.00 resistor: By the 1.00 resistor: By the 3.00 resistor: By the 1.00 resistor: (c)
a f a fa f a12.0 Vfa1.31 Af120 s = 1.88 kJ .
I 2 Rt = 0.846 A
2 2 2
U = V It = 4.00 V 0.462 A 120 s = 222 J .
a f a8.00 f120 s = 687 J a0.462 Af a5.00 f120 s = 128 J . a0.462 Af a1.00 f120 s = 25.6 J . a1.31 Af a3.00 f120 s = 616 J . a1.31 Af a1.00 f120 s = 205 J .
2 2
.
222 J + 1.88 kJ = 1.66 kJ from chemical to electrical. 687 J + 128 J + 25.6 J + 616 J + 205 J = 1.66 kJ from electrical to internal.
P28.24
We name the currents I 1 , I 2 , and I 3 as shown. [1] [2] [3] (a)
f a f 80.0  I a 4.00 kf  60.0  I a3.00 kf = 0
70.0  60.0  I 2 3.00 k  I 1 2.00 k = 0
3 2
a
I 2 = I1 + I 3 Substituting for I 2 and solving the resulting simultaneous equations yields
(b)
bthrough R g I = 2.69 mA bthrough R g I = 3.08 mA bthrough R g V = 60.0 V  a3.08 mA fa3.00 kf =
I 1 = 0.385 mA
3 1 3 2 2 cf
FIG. P28.24
69.2 V
Point c is at higher potential.
Chapter 28
141
P28.25
Label the currents in the branches as shown in the first figure. Reduce the circuit by combining the two parallel resistors as shown in the second figure. Apply Kirchhoff's loop rule to both loops in Figure (b) to obtain:
and
a2.71RfI + a1.71RfI a1.71RfI + a3.71RfI
1 1
2 2
= 250 = 500 .
(a)
With R = 1 000 , simultaneous solution of these equations yields: I 1 = 10.0 mA and From Figure (b), Thus, from Figure (a), I 2 = 130.0 mA .
Vc  Va = I 1 + I 2 1.71R = 240 V . I4 = Vc  Va 240 V = = 60.0 mA . 4R 4 000 (b) FIG. P28.25
b
ga
f
Finally, applying Kirchhoff's point rule at point a in Figure (a) gives: I = I 4  I 1 = 60.0 mA  10.0 mA = +50.0 mA , or P28.26 I = 50.0 mA from point a to point e .
Name the currents as shown in the figure to the right. Then w + x + z = y . Loop equations are 200 w  40.0 + 80.0 x = 0 80.0 x + 40.0 + 360  20.0 y = 0 +360  20.0 y  70.0 z + 80.0 = 0 Eliminate y by substitution. FIG. P28.26
Eliminate x. Eliminate z = 17.5  13.5 w to obtain
Rx = 2.50w + 0.500 400  100 x  20.0 w  20.0 z = 0 S 440  20.0 w  20.0 x  90.0 z = 0 T R350  270 w  20.0 z = 0 S430  70.0w  90.0z = 0 T
430  70.0 w  1 575 + 1 215 w = 0 w= 70.0 = 1.00 A upward in 200 . 70.0
Now
z = 4.00 A upward in 70.0 x = 3.00 A upward in 80.0 y = 8.00 A downward in 20.0
and for the 200 ,
V = IR = 1.00 A 200 = 200 V .
a
fa
f
142 P28.27
Direct Current Circuits
Using Kirchhoff's rules,
b g b g 10.0 + a1.00fI  a0.060 0fI = 0
2 3
12.0  0.010 0 I 1  0.060 0 I 3 = 0 and I1 = I 2 + I 3
a f a f 10.0 + a1.00fI  b0.060 0 gI = 0
2 3
12.0  0.010 0 I 2  0.070 0 I 3 = 0 FIG. P28.27 Solving simultaneously, I 2 = 0.283 A downward in the dead battery and I 3 = 171 A downward in the starter.
The currents are forward in the live battery and in the starter, relative to normal starting operation. The current is backward in the dead battery, tending to charge it up. P28.28 Vab = 1.00 I 1 + 1.00 I 1  I 2 Vab Vab
1 2
a f a fb g = a1.00fI + a1.00fI + a5.00fb I  I + I g = a3.00fb I  I g + a5.00fb I  I + I g
1 2 1 1 2
Let I = 1.00 A , I 1 = x , and I 2 = y . Then, the three equations become: Vab = 2.00 x  y , or y = 2.00 x  Vab Vab = 4.00 x + 6.00 y + 5.00 and Vab = 8.00  8.00 x + 5.00 y . Substituting the first into the last two gives: 7.00 Vab = 8.00 x + 5.00 and 6.00 Vab = 2.00 x + 8.00 . Solving these simultaneously yields Vab = Then, R ab = P28.29
27 V Vab = 17 1.00 A I
FIG. P28.28
27 V. 17 27 . 17
or
R ab =
We name the currents I 1 , I 2 , and I 3 as shown. (a) I1 = I 2 + I 3 Counterclockwise around the top loop,
12.0 V  2.00 I 3  4.00 I 1 = 0 .
Traversing the bottom loop,
a
f a
f
8.00 V  6.00 I 2 + 2.00 I 3 = 0 4 1 1 I 1 = 3.00  I 3 , I 2 = + I 3 , and I 3 = 909 mA . 3 3 2
(b)
a
f a
f
FIG. P28.29
Va  0.909 A 2.00 = Vb
Vb  Va = 1.82 V
a
fa
f
Chapter 28
143
P28.30
We apply Kirchhoff's rules to the second diagram. 50.0  2.00 I 1  2.00 I 2 = 0 20.0  2.00 I 3 + 2.00 I 2 = 0 I1 = I 2 + I 3 I 1 = 20.0 A ; I 2 = 5.00 A ; I 3 = 15.0 A . Then apply P = I 2 R to each resistor: (1) (2) (3)
Substitute (3) into (1), and solve for I 1 , I 2 , and I 3
a2.00 f : a4.00 f :
1 3
f a f a2.00 f = F 5.00 AIJ a4.00 f = 25.0 W P =G H 2 K
2 P = I 1 2.00 = 20.0 A 2 2 2 P = I 3 2.00 = 15.0 A
a
800 W
a2.00 f :
Section 28.4 P28.31 (a) (b)
(Half of I 2 goes through each)
FIG. P28.30 450 W .
a
f a
f a2.00 f =
2
RC Circuits RC = 1.00 10 6 5.00 10 6 F = 5.00 s Q = C = 5.00 10 6 C 30.0 V = 150 C
e
je
j
e
ja
f
(c)
It =
af af
 t RC 10.0 30.0 = exp e 6 R 1.00 10 1.00 10 6 5.00 10 6
FG H
IJ K
LM MN e
je
OP = j PQ
4.06 A
FIG. P28.31
P28.32
(a)
I t =  I 0 e  t RC 5.10 10 6 C Q = = 1.96 A I0 = RC 1 300 2.00 10 9 F
(b)
ge j L 9.00 10 s OP I at f = a1.96 A f exp M MN b1 300 ge2.00 10 Fj PQ = 61.6 mA L 8.00 10 s OP = b5.10 C g exp M qat f = Qe MN a1 300 fe2.00 10 Fj PQ = 0.235 C
6 9  t RC 6 9
b
(c) P28.33 U=
The magnitude of the maximum current is I 0 = 1.96 A . 1 C V 2
a f
2
and V =
Q . C
Q2 and when the charge decreases to half its original value, the stored energy is one2C 1 quarter its original value: U f = U 0 . 4 Therefore, U =
144 P28.34
Direct Current Circuits
q t = Q 1  e  t RC 0.600 = 1  e 0 .900 RC 0.900 = ln 0.400 RC
af
so or thus
qt = 1  e  t RC Q e 0.900 RC = 1  0.600 = 0.400 RC = 0.900 = 0.982 s . ln 0.400
af
a
f
a
f
*P28.35
We are to calculate
0
z
e 2 t RC dt = 
RC 2 t RC 2dt RC 2 t RC  = e e RC 2 0 2
z
FG H
IJ K
0
=
RC  RC RC e  e0 =  01 = + . 2 2 2
P28.36
(a) (b) (c)
= RC = 1.50 10 5 10.0 10 6 F = 1.50 s = 1.00 10 5 10.0 10 6 F = 1.00 s
The battery carries current The 100 k carries current of magnitude So the switch carries downward current 10.0 V = 200 A . 50.0 10 3 I = I 0 e  t RC =
e
je
j
e
je
j
FG 10.0 V IJ e H 100 10 K 200 A + b100 A ge .
3  t 1.00 s
 t 1.00 s
.
P28.37
(a)
Call the potential at the left junction VL and at the right VR . After a "long" time, the capacitor is fully charged. VL = 8.00 V because of voltage divider: 10.0 V = 2.00 A 5.00 VL = 10.0 V  2.00 A 1.00 = 8.00 V IL =
Likewise, or
VR
fa f F 2.00 IJ a10.0 V f = 2.00 V =G H 2.00 + 8.00 K
10.0 V = 1.00 A 10.0
a
FIG. P28.37(a)
IR =
VR = 10.0 V  8.00 1.00 A = 2.00 V .
Therefore, (b) Redraw the circuit V = VL  VR = 8.00  2.00 = 6.00 V . R=
a
f a
fa
f
b
1 = 3.60 1 9.00 + 1 6.00
g b
g
and so
RC = 3.60 10 6 s 1 e  t RC = 10 t = RC ln 10 = 8. 29 s . FIG. P28.37(b)
Chapter 28
145
*P28.38
(a)
We model the person's body and street shoes as shown. For the discharge to reach 100 V, q t = Qe  t RC = CV t = CV0 e  t RC V = e  t RC V0 t = RC ln V0 = e + t RC V
0 6
3 000 V 150 pF 80 pF 5 000 M
af
af
V0 t = ln RC V
12
FG H
IJ K
FIG. P28.38(a) 3.91 s
FG V IJ = 5 000 10 e230 10 H V K e j e je j
F ln
000 j FGH 3100 IJK =
(b) P28.39 (a) (b)
t = 1 10 6 V A 230 10 12 C V ln 30 = 782 s
= RC = 4.00 10 6 3.00 10 6 F = 12.0 s
I=
 t RC 12.0 = e e  t 12.0 s 6 R 4.00 10
q = C 1  e  t RC = 3.00 10 6 12.0 1  e  t 12.0 q = 36.0 C 1  e  t 12 .0 P28.40 V0 = Q C V ( t )
0
a f
I = 3.00 Ae  t 12 .0
FIG. P28.39
Then, if q(t ) = Q e  t RC and When V ( t ) = 1 V0 , then 2
V ( t ) = V0 e  t RC
b g
1 2
bV g = e
 t RC .
b g
e  t RC = 
t 1 = ln =  ln 2 . RC 2 t C ln 2
FG IJ H K
Thus,
R=
a f
.
Section 28.5 P28.41
Electrical Meters
V = I g rg = I  I g R p , or R p =
e
j
eI  I
I g rg
g
a f j eI  I j
= I g 60.0
g
Therefore, to have I = 0.100 A = 100 mA when I g = 0.500 mA : Rp =
a0.500 mAfa60.0 f =
99.5 mA
0.302 . FIG. P28.41
146 P28.42
Direct Current Circuits
Applying Kirchhoff's loop rule,  I g 75.0 + I  I g R p = 0 . Therefore, if I = 1.00 A when I g = 1.50 mA , Rp = I g 75.0
g
a
f e
j
a f = e1.50 10 Aja75.0 f = eI  I j 1.00 A  1.50 10 A
3 3
0.113 . FIG. P28.42
P28.43
Series Resistor Voltmeter V = IR : Solving,
25.0 = 1.50 10 3 Rs + 75.0 Rs = 16.6 k .
b
g
FIG. P28.43
P28.44
(a)
In Figure (a), the emf sees an equivalent resistance of 200.00 . I= 6.000 0 V 200.00 = 0.030 000 A
20.000 6.0000 V
V
20.000
20.000
A
V
A
180.00 (a)
180.00 (b)
180.00 (c)
FIG. P28.44 The terminal potential difference is (b) In Figure (b),
V = IR = 0.030 000 A 180.00 = 5.400 0 V . R eq =
b
ga
f
F 1 + 1 I GH 180.00 20 000 JK
=
1
= 178.39 .
The equivalent resistance across the emf is 178.39 + 0.500 00 + 20.000 = 198.89 . The ammeter reads and the voltmeter reads (c) In Figure (c), Therefore, the emf sends current through The current through the battery is I=
R
ga F 1 + 1 I GH 180.50 20 000 JK
I=
6.000 0 V = 0.030 167 A 198.89
V = IR = 0.030 167 A 178.39 = 5.381 6 V .
1
b
f
= 178.89 .
Rtot = 178.89 + 20.000 = 198.89 . 6.000 0 V = 0.030 168 A 198.89
but not all of this goes through the ammeter. The voltmeter reads The ammeter measures current
V = IR = 0.030 168 A 178.89 = 5.396 6 V . I= V 5.396 6 V = = 0.029 898 A . R 180.50
b
ga
f
The connection shown in Figure (c) is better than that shown in Figure (b) for accurate readings.
Chapter 28
147
P28.45
Consider the circuit diagram shown, realizing that I g = 1.00 mA . For the 25.0 mA scale:
a24.0 mAfbR
or
1
+ R 2 + R3 = 1.00 mA 25.0
g a
fa
f IJ K
FIG. P28.45 (1)
3
For the 50.0 mA scale: or For the 100 mA scale: or
a49.0 mAfbR + R g = a1.00 mAfb25.0 + R g 49.0b R + R g = 25.0 + R . a99.0 mAfR = a1.00 mAfb25.0 + R + R g
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
25.0 R1 + R 2 + R3 = . 24.0
FG H
(2)
99.0 R1 = 25.0 + R 2 + R3 . R1 = 0.260 , R 2 = 0.261 , R3 = 0.521 .
(3)
Solving (1), (2), and (3) simultaneously yields
P28.46
V = IR (a) 20.0 V = 1.00 10 3 A R1 + 60.0 R1 = 1.994 10 4 = 19.94 k (b) (c) 50.0 V = 1.00 10 3 A R 2 + R1 + 60.0 100 V = 1.00 10 3 A R3 + R1 + 60.0 I g r = 0.500 A  I g 0.220 I g r + 0.220 = 0.110 V 2.00 V = I g r + 2 500
e
jb
g
FIG. P28.46
e
jb
g
R 2 = 30.0 k R3 = 50.0 k
e
jb
g
P28.47
Ammeter: or Voltmeter:
a
e
f
ja
f
(1) (2)
b
g
Solve (1) and (2) simultaneously to find: I g = 0.756 mA and r = 145 . FIG. P28.47
Section 28.6 P28.48 (a)
Household Wiring and Electrical Safety
P =I R=I
2
2
FG IJ = a1.00 Af e1.70 10 mja16.0 ftfb0.304 8 m ftg = H AK e0.512 10 mj
2 8 3 2
0.101 W
(b)
P = I 2 R = 100 0.101 = 10.1 W
a
f
148 P28.49
Direct Current Circuits
(a)
P = IV :
So for the Heater, For the Toaster, And for the Grill,
1 500 W P = = 12.5 A . V 120 V 750 W I= = 6.25 A . 120 V I= I= 1 000 W = 8.33 A . 120 V
(b)
12.5 + 6.25 + 8.33 = 27.1 A The current draw is greater than 25.0 amps, so this circuit breaker would not be sufficient.
P28.50 P28.51
2 2 I Al R Al = I Cu RCu
so
I Al =
RCu I Cu = R Al
Cu 1.70 20.0 = 0.776 20.0 = 15.5 A I Cu = 2.82 Al
a f
a f
(a)
Suppose that the insulation between either of your fingers and the conductor adjacent is a chunk of rubber with contact area 4 mm 2 and thickness 1 mm. Its resistance is R= 10 13 m 10 3 m 2 10 15 . A 4 10 6 m 2
e
je
j
The current will be driven by 120 V through total resistance (series) 2 10 15 + 10 4 + 2 10 15 5 10 15 . It is: I = V 120 V ~ ~ 10 14 A . 15 R 5 10
(b)
The resistors form a voltage divider, with the center of your hand at potential
Vh , where Vh 2 is the potential of the "hot" wire. The potential difference between your finger and thumb is V = IR ~ 10 14 A 10 4 ~ 10 10 V . So the points where the rubber meets your fingers are
e
je
j
at potentials of ~ Vh + 10 10 V 2 and ~ Vh  10 10 V . 2
Additional Problems P28.52 The set of four batteries boosts the electric potential of each bit of charge that goes through them by 4 1.50 V = 6.00 V . The chemical energy they store is U = qV = 240 C 6.00 J C = 1 440 J . The radio draws current So, its power is I= V 6.00 V = = 0.030 0 A . 200 R
a
fb
g
P = V I = 6.00 V 0.030 0 A = 0.180 W = 0.180 J s.
E : t t = t = E
a f a
Q : t
fb
g
Then for the time the energy lasts, we have P = We could also compute this from I =
P
=
1 440 J = 8.00 10 3 s . 0.180 J s
240 C Q = = 8.00 10 3 s = 2. 22 h . I 0.030 0 A
P28.53
2R , so P = I 2 R = or 2 R+r R+r 2 2 , then R + r = xR or Let x P With r = 1. 20 , this becomes
I=
a
a f
f
which has solutions of (a) With
aR + r f = FGH P IJK R . R + a 2 r  x fR  r = 0 . R + a 2.40  xfR  1.44 = 0 , a 2.40  x f a 2.40  x f R=
2 2 2 2 2
Chapter 28
149
2
 5.76
2
.
= 9.20 V and
R= +4.21
P = 12.8 W , x = 6.61 :
2
a4.21f
2
 5.76
= 3.84 or
0.375 .
(b)
For
= 9.20 V and
R= +1.59
P = 21.2 W , x
2
1.59 3.22 = . 2 2 The equation for the load resistance yields a complex number, so there is no resistance that will extract 21.2 W from this battery. The maximum power output occurs when R = r = 1.20 , and that maximum is: Pmax = P28.54
a1.59f
2 = 3.99 P
 5.76
2 = 17.6 W . 4r
Using Kirchhoff's loop rule for the closed loop, +12.0  2.00 I  4.00 I = 0 , so I = 2.00 A
Vb  Va = +4.00 V  2.00 A 4.00  0 10.0 = 4.00 V .
Thus, Vab = 4.00 V and point a is at the higher potential . P28.55 (a) Req = 3 R 1 R = 3 1R + 1R + 1R I=
a
fa
f a fa
f
3R
3 R
Pseries = I =
2 3R
3 2 R
(b) (c) *P28.56 (a)
Req =
b g b g b g
I=
Pparallel = I =
Nine times more power is converted in the parallel connection. We model the generator as a constantvoltage power supply. Connect two light bulbs across it in series. Each bulb is designed to P 100 W = = 0.833 A . Each has resistance carry current I = V 120 V V 120 V = = 144 . In the 240V circuit the equivalent R= 0.833 A I resistance is 144 + 144 = 288 . The current is V 240 V = = 0.833 A and the generator delivers power I= 288 R P = IV = 0.833 A 240 V = 200 W .
FIG. P28.56(a)
a
f
continued on next page
150
Direct Current Circuits
(b)
The hot pot is designed to carry current I=
28.8 240 V 144
P
V
=
500 W = 4.17 A . 120 V
It has resistance R= V 120 V = = 28.8 . 4.17 A I
FIG. P28.56(b)
4.17 A = 5 , we can place five light bulbs in parallel and the hot 0.833 A pot in series with their combination. The current in the generator is then 4.17 A and it In terms of current, since delivers power P = IV = 4.17 A 240 V = 1 000 W . P28.57 The current in the simple loop circuit will be I = (a) (b) Vter =  Ir = I=
a
f
R+r
.
R R+r
and and
Vter as R . I
R+r
as R 0 . r
(c)
P = I2R = 2
aR + r f
R
2
2  2 2 R dP = + 3 dR R+r R+r
a
f a
f
2
=0
FIG. P28.57
Then 2R = R + r P28.58
and
R=r . V t = Vmax 1  e  t RC . 4.00 V = 10.0 V 1  e 0.400 = 1.00  e e
 3.00 10 5 R
The potential difference across the capacitor Using 1 Farad = 1 s , Therefore, Or Taking the natural logarithm of both sides, and
af
e
j
a
fLMN
 3.00 s
a
f Re10.0 10
6
s
j O.
PQ
 3 .00 10 5 R
e
j
.
e
j
= 0.600 .

3.00 10 5 = ln 0.600 R
a
f
R=
3.00 10 5 = +5.87 10 5 = 587 k . ln 0.600
a
f
Chapter 28
151
P28.59
Let the two resistances be x and y. Then, and so Rs = x + y = Rp =
x
y x y
Ps 225 W = = 9.00 2 2 I 5.00 A
a
f
y = 9.00  x
Pp xy 50.0 W = 2 = = 2.00 2 x+y I 5.00 A
x 9.00  x = 2.00 x + 9.00  x
a
a
f
a
f
f
x 2  9.00 x + 18.0 = 0 .
Factoring the second equation, so Then, y = 9.00  x gives
ax  6.00fax  3.00f = 0
x = 6.00 or x = 3.00 . y = 3.00 or y = 6.00 .
FIG. P28.59
The two resistances are found to be 6.00 and 3.00 . P28.60 Let the two resistances be x and y. Then, Rs = x + y =
x x y y
Pp xy Ps = 2. and R p = x+y I I2 Ps  x , and the second I2
or x 2 
From the first equation, y = becomes x Ps I 2  x
e
x + Ps I  x
e
j
2
j
=
Pp
I
2
FG P IJ x + P P HI K I
s 2
s p 4
= 0.
FIG. P28.60
Using the quadratic formula, x =
Ps Ps 2  4Ps Pp
2I 2
.
Then, y =
Ps Ps 2  4Ps Pp Ps .  x gives y = 2I 2 I2 Ps + Ps 2  4Ps Pp
2I 2
2
The two resistances are P28.61 (a)
and
Ps  Ps 2  4Ps Pp
2I 2
.
I
c R h  b + g = 0 40.0 V  a 4.00 A f a 2.00 + 0.300 + 0.300 + Rf  a6.00 + 6.00 f V = 0 ;
1
so
R = 4.40
(b)
Inside the supply, Inside both batteries together, For the limiting resistor,
a f a2.00 f = 32.0 W . P = I R = a 4.00 A f a0.600 f = 9.60 W . P = a 4.00 A f a 4.40 f = 70.4 W .
P = I 2 R = 4.00 A
2 2 2 2
(c)
P = I 1 + 2 = 4.00 A 6.00 + 6.00 V = 48.0 W
b
g a
fa
f
152 *P28.62
Direct Current Circuits
(a)
V1 = V2
I 1 R1 = I 2 R 2 I
I R R + R1 I = I 1 + I 2 = I1 + 1 1 = I1 2 R2 R2 I1 = I2 = (b) IR 2 R1 + R 2
R1 R2
I1 I2
I 1 R1 IR1 = = I2 R2 R1 + R 2
FIG. P28.62(a)
2 2 2 The power delivered to the pair is P = I1 R1 + I 2 R2 = I 1 R1 + I  I1 dP we want to find I 1 such that = 0. dI 1
b
g R . For minimum power
2 2
dP = 2 I 1 R1 + 2 I  I 1 1 R 2 = 0 dI 1 I1 = IR 2 R1 + R 2
b
ga f
I 1 R1  IR 2 + I 1 R 2 = 0
This is the same condition as that found in part (a). P28.63 Let Rm = measured value, R = actual value, I R = current through the resistor R I = current measured by the ammeter. (a) When using circuit (a), I R R = V = 20 000 I  I R or R = 20 000 But since I = V V and I R = , we have Rm R I R = I R Rm R = 20 000
m
(a)
b
g
LM I  1OP . NI Q
R
(b)
FIG. P28.63
and When R > Rm , we require Therefore, Rm R 1  0.050 0 and from (1) we find (b) When using circuit (b), But since I R = V , Rm
bR  R g .
m
Rm
(1)
bR  R g 0.050 0 .
R
b
g
R 1 050 .
I R R = V  I R 0.5 . Rm = 0.500 + R .
a
f
a
f
(2)
When Rm > R , we require From (2) we find
bR
m
R
R
g 0.050 0 .
R 10.0 .
Chapter 28
P28.64
The battery supplies energy at a changing rate Then the total energy put out by the battery is
dE 1 RC e . = P = I = dt R
FG H
IJ K
153
z z
dE =
0
2 t exp  dt R RC t=0
FG H
IJ K
z
dE =
2 t  RC exp  R RC 0
a
fz
FG H
IJ FG  dt IJ =  C expFG  t IJ K H RC K H RC K
2
=  2 C 0  1 = 2C .
The power delivered to the resistor is So the total internal energy appearing in the resistor is
2 dE 2t . = P = VR I = I 2 R = R 2 exp  dt RC R
FG H
IJ K
z z
dE =
2 2t exp  dt R RC 0
FG H
IJ K
IJ z expFG  2t IJ FG  2dt IJ =  C expFG  2t IJ z K H RC K H RC K 2 H RC K 1 The energy finally stored in the capacitor is U = C a V f 2
dE =
2 RC  R 2
FG H
0
2
=
0 2
2C 2C 01 = . 2 2
=
conserved 2 C = battery. P28.65 (a)
1 2 1 C + 2C and resistor and capacitor share equally in the energy from the 2 2
1 2 C . Thus, energy of the circuit is 2
q = CV 1  e  t RC q = 1.00 10 6
e
e
j L F ja10.0 V fM1  e N
5.00
10.0
e 2.00 10 je1.00 10 j O =
6 6
PQ
9.93 C
(b)
I= I=
dq V  t RC = e dt R
6 8
FG IJ H K
(c)
(d)
FG 10.0 V IJ e = 3.37 10 A = 33.7 nA H 2.00 10 K dU d F 1 q I F q I dq F q I = dt dt G 2 C J H C K dt H C K H K = G J = G JI dU F 9.93 10 C I = dt G 1.00 10 C V J H K e3.37 10 Aj = 3.34 10 W = 334 nW P = I = e3.37 10 A ja10.0 V f = 3.37 10 W = 337 nW
2 6 6 8 7 battery 8 7
154 P28.66
Direct Current Circuits
Start at the point when the voltage has just reached and the switch has just closed. The voltage is
2 a f LMN 3 V OPQe . 1 We want to know when V atf will reach V . 3 1 L2 O Therefore, V = M V P e 3 N3 Q VC t =
 t R 2C
2 V and is 3 decaying towards 0 V with a time constant R 2 C
2 V 3
R1 Voltage controlled switch R2 C V Vc
+ V
C
 t R2C
or or
e  t R 2C =
1 2
FIG. P28.66 1 After the switch opens, the voltage is V , increasing toward V with time constant R1 + R 2 C : 3
t1 = R 2 C ln 2 .
b
g
VC t = V  When VC t =
af af
LM 2 V OPe N3 Q
 t R1 + R 2 C
b
g
.
2 V 3 2 2 V = V  Ve  t b R1 + R2 gC 3 3
or and
e  t b R1 + R2 gC = T = t1 + t 2 =
So
t 2 = R1 + R 2 C ln 2
b
g
bR
1 . 2
1
+ 2 R 2 C ln 2 .
g
P28.67
(a)
First determine the resistance of each light bulb: P = R=
aV f
R
2
aV f = a120 Vf
2
2
P
60.0 W
= 240 .
We obtain the equivalent resistance Req of the network of light bulbs by identifying series and parallel equivalent resistances: Req = R1 + FIG. P28.67 1 = 240 + 120 = 360 . + 1 R3
b1 R g b g
2
The total power dissipated in the 360 is
P=
aV f = a120 Vf
2
2
Req
360
= 40.0 W .
(b)
The current through the network is given by P = I 2 Req : I = The potential difference across R1 is
P 40.0 W 1 = = A. 360 3 Req
V1 = IR1 =
FG 1 AIJ a240 f = H3 K
80.0 V .
The potential difference V23 across the parallel combination of R 2 and R3 is V23 = IR 23 =
I= 1 FG 1 AIJ FG H 3 K H b1 240 g + b1 240 g JK
40.0 V .
Chapter 28
155
*P28.68
(a)
With the switch closed, current exists in a simple series circuit as shown. The capacitors carry no current. For R 2 we have P 2.40 V A = = 18.5 mA . P = I 2 R2 I= R2 7 000 V A The potential difference across R1 and C 1 is V = IR1 = 1.85 10 2 A 4 000 V A = 74.1 V . The charge on C 1 Q = C1 V = 3.00 10 6 C V 74.1 V = 222 C . The potential difference across R 2 and C 2 is V = IR 2 = 1.85 10 2 A 7 000 = 130 V . The charge on C 2 The battery emf is Q = C 2 V = 6.00 10 6 C V 130 V = 778 C .
e
jb
g
FIG. P28.68(a)
e
ja
f
e
jb
g
e
ja
f
IR eq = I R1 + R 2 = 1.85 10 2 A 4 000 + 7 000 V A = 204 V .
(b) In equilibrium after the switch has been opened, no current exists. The potential difference across each resistor is zero. The full 204 V appears across both capacitors. The new charge C 2 Q = C 2 V = 6.00 10 6 C V 204 V = 1 222 C for a change of 1 222 C  778 C = 444 C . *P28.69 The battery current is FIG. P28.68(b)
b
g
b
g
e
ja
f
a150 + 45 + 14 + 4f mA = 213 mA .
FIG. P28.69 0.991 .
(a)
The resistor with highest resistance is that carrying 4 mA. Doubling its resistance will reduce the current it carries to 2 mA. Then the total current is
211 a150 + 45 + 14 + 2f mA = 211 mA , nearly the same as before. The ratio is 213 =
(b)
The resistor with least resistance carries 150 mA. Doubling its resistance changes this current to 75 mA and changes the total to 138 75 + 45 + 14 + 4 mA = 138 mA . The ratio is = 0.648 , representing a much larger 213 reduction (35.2% instead of 0.9%).
a
f
(c)
This problem is precisely analogous. As a battery maintained a potential difference in parts (a) and (b), a furnace maintains a temperature difference here. Energy flow by heat is analogous to current and takes place through thermal resistances in parallel. Each resistance can have its "Rvalue" increased by adding insulation. Doubling the thermal resistance of the attic door will produce only a negligible (0.9%) saving in fuel. Doubling the thermal resistance of the ceiling will produce a much larger saving. The ceiling originally has the smallest thermal resistance.
156
Direct Current Circuits
*P28.70
From the hint, the equivalent resistance of
.
That is,
RT + RT +
1 = R eq 1 RL + 1 R eq RL R eq RL + R eq = R eq
2 RT RL + RT R eq + RL R eq = RL R eq + R eq 2 R eq  RT R eq  RT RL = 0
R eq =
2 RT RT  4 1  RT RL
a fb 2a1f
g
Only the + sign is physical: R eq = For example, if And P28.71 (a) 1 2
FH
2 4RT RL + RT + RT .
IK
RT = 1 . RL = 20 , R eq = 5 .
After steadystate conditions have been reached, there is no DC current through the capacitor. Thus, for R3 : I R3 = 0 steadystate .
b
g
For the other two resistors, the steadystate current is simply determined by the 9.00V emf across the 12k and 15k resistors in series: For R1 and R 2 : (b) IbR
1 + R2
g = R1 + R 2
=
a12.0 k + 15.0 kf =
9.00 V
333 A steadystate .
b
g
After the transient currents have ceased, the potential difference across C is the same as the potential difference across R 2 = IR 2 because there is no voltage drop across R3 . Therefore, the charge Q on C is
b
g
Q = C V
a f
R2
= C IR 2 = 10.0 F 333 A 15.0 k
b g b
gb
ga
f
FIG. P28.71(b)
= 50.0 C .
continued on next page
Chapter 28
157
(c)
When the switch is opened, the branch containing R1 is no longer part of the circuit. The capacitor discharges through R 2 + R3 with a time constant of R 2 + R3 C = 15.0 k + 3.00 k 10.0 F = 0.180 s . The initial current I i in this discharge circuit is determined by the initial potential difference across the capacitor applied to R 2 + R3 in series: Ii =
b
b g g a b
C
fb
g
bR
a f
V
2
g
+ R3
g b
=
333 A 15.0 k IR 2 = = 278 A . R 2 + R3 15.0 k + 3.00 k
b a g
ga
f f
FIG. P28.71(c)
Thus, when the switch is opened, the current through R 2 changes instantaneously from 333 A (downward) to 278 A (downward) as shown in the graph. Thereafter, it decays according to
I R 2 = I i e  t b R2 + R3 gC =
(d)
b278 Age
 t 0 .180 s
a
f afor t > 0f
.
The charge q on the capacitor decays from Qi to q = Qi e 
t R 2 + R3 C
b
g
Qi according to 5
Qi  t 0.180 s g = Qi e b 5 5 = e t 0.180 s t 180 ms t = 0.180 s ln 5 = 290 ms ln 5 =
a
fa f
*P28.72
(a)
First let us flatten the circuit on a 2D plane as shown; then reorganize it to a format easier to read. Notice that the five resistors on the top are in the same connection as those in Example 28.5; the same argument tells us that the middle resistor can be removed without affecting the circuit. The remaining resistors over the three parallel branches have equivalent resistance R eq =
FG 1 + 1 + 1 IJ H 20 20 10 K
1
= 5.00 .
(b)
So the current through the battery is V 12.0 V = = 2.40 A . R eq 5.00
FIG. P28.72(a)
158 P28.73
Direct Current Circuits
so
FG IJ = FG 1 IJ t . H V K H RC K F IJ versus t should A plot of lnG H V K
ln be a straight line with slope equal 1 to . RC
V = e  t RC
Using the given data values: FIG. P28.73 (a) A leastsquare fit to this data yields the graph above. ts 0 N=8
af
xi = 282 , xi yi = 244,
Slope = N
i i 2 i
= 1.86 10 yi = 4.03 ,
x i2
i i 2 i
4
,
V V 6.19 5.55 4.93 4.34 3.72 3.09 2.47 1.83 .
af
ln V 0 0.109 0.228 0.355 0.509 0.695 0.919 1.219
b
g
4.87 11.1
19.4 c x y h  c x hc y h = 0.011 8 30.8 N e x j  c x h 46.6 67.3 e x jc y h  c x hc x y h = 0.088 2 Intercept = 102.2 N e x j  c x h F IJ = b0.011 8gt + 0.088 2 The equation of the best fit line is: lnG H V K
2 i i i i i 2 i 2 i
(b)
Thus, the time constant is and the capacitance is
= RC =
1 1 = = 84.7 s slope 0.011 8 84.7 s = 8.47 F . C= = R 10.0 10 6
a Ry R1 c Rx Figure 1 a Ry R2 c Rx b Ry
P28.74
(a)
For the first measurement, the equivalent circuit is as shown in Figure 1. R ab = R1 = R y + R y = 2 R y so Ry = 1 R1 . 2 (1)
For the second measurement, the equivalent circuit is shown in Figure 2. 1 (2) R ac = R 2 = R y + R x . Thus, 2 Substitute (1) into (2) to obtain: R2 = (b) 1 1 1 R1 + R x , or R x = R 2  R1 . 2 2 4
Ry
FG H
IJ K
Figure 2
If R1 = 13.0 and R 2 = 6.00 , then R x = 2.75 .
FIG. P28.74
The antenna is inadequately grounded since this exceeds the limit of 2.00 .
Chapter 28
159
P28.75
The total resistance between points b and c is: 2.00 k 3.00 k R= = 1. 20 k . 2.00 k + 3.00 k The total capacitance between points d and e is: C = 2.00 F + 3.00 F = 5.00 F .
a
fa
f
2.00 k b c 3.00 k
S
C1 = 2.00 F d e
C2 = 3.00 F 120 V
The potential difference between point d and e in this series RC circuit at any time is: V = 1  e  t RC = 120.0 V 1  e 1 000 t
+
a
f
a

f
6
. FIG. P28.75
6
Therefore, the charge on each capacitor between points d and e is: q1 = C1 V = 2.00 F 120.0 V 1  e 1 000 t and q 2 *P28.76 (a)
2
f b ga = C a V f = b3.00 Fga120.0 V f 1  e
=
1 000 t 6
b240 Cg 1  e = b360 C g 1  e
1 000 t 6 1 000 t 6
.
Let i represent the current in the battery and i c the current charging the capacitor. Then i  i c is q the current in the voltmeter. The loop rule applied to the inner loop is +  iR  = 0 . The loop C dq dq rule for the outer perimeter is  iR  i  i c r = 0 . With i c = , this becomes  iR  ir + r = 0 . dt dt q by substitution to obtain Between the two loop equations we eliminate i =  R RC
b g
 R+r 
a
q fFGH R  RC IJK + dq r = 0 dt
dq R+r R+r + q+ r =0 R RC dt q r Rr dq  + + =0 R+r C R + r dt
This is the differential equation required. (b) To solve we follow the same steps as on page 875.
rC dq R + r R+r =  q= q dt R RrC RrC R+r
FG H
z
q 0
F q  rc aR + r f I =  R + r t q  rc =  rc e lnG R+r R+r H  rc aR + r f JK RrC r q= C e1  e j where R = RRr r + r+R
 t Req C eq
t dq R+r = dt q  rC R + r RrC 0
a
f
z
F rc IJ lnG q  H R+rK
IJ K
q
=
0
R+r t RrC 0
 R + r RrC t
t
a f
The voltage across the capacitor is VC = (c)
q r t R C = 1  e eq . C r+R
e
j
As t the capacitor voltage approaches
r r 10 = . If the switch is then opened, r+R r+R the capacitor discharges through the voltmeter. Its voltage decays exponentially according r  t rC . to e r+R
a f
160
Direct Current Circuits
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P28.2 P28.4 P28.6 P28.8 P28.10 P28.12 P28.14 P28.16 P28.18 P28.20 P28.22 P28.24 (a) 1.79 A ; (b) 10.4 V (a) 12.4 V ; (b) 9.65 V (a) 17.1 ; (b) 1.99 A in 4 and 9 ; 1.17 A in 7 ; 0.818 A in 10 29.5 V (a) see the solution; (b) no see the solution R1 = 1.00 k; R 2 = 2.00 k ; R3 = 3.00 k 470 and 220 (a) 11.0 ; (b) and (d) see the solution; (c) 220 ; (e) Parallel I 1 = 714 mA ; I 2 = 1.29 A ; = 12.6 V see the solution (a) 0.385 mA in R1 ; 2.69 mA in R3 ; 3.08 mA in R 2 ; (b) c higher by 69.2 V 1.00 A up in 200 ; 4.00 A up in 70 ; 3.00 A up in 80 ; 8.00 A down in 20 ; 200 V see the solution 800 W to the lefthand resistor; 25.0 W to each 4 ; 450 W to the righthand resistor (a) 61.6 mA ; (b) 0.235 C ; (c) 1.96 A 0.982 s (a) 1.50 s; (b) 1.00 s; (c) 200 A + 100 A e  t 1.00 s P28.46 P28.48 P28.50 P28.52 P28.54 P28.56 P28.58 P28.42 P28.44 0.113 (a) 30.000 mA , 5.400 0 V ; (b) 30.167 mA , 5.381 6 V ; (c) 29.898 mA ; 5.396 6 V see the solution (a) 0.101 W; (b) 10.1 W 15.5 A 2.22 h a is 4.00 V higher (a) see the solution; 833 mA; 200 W; (b) see the solution; 4.17 A; 1.00 kW 587 k
P28.60
Ps + Ps 2  4Ps Pp
2I 2 (a) I 1 =
and
Ps  Ps 2  4Ps Pp
2I 2
P28.62
P28.26
IR 2 IR1 ; ; I2 = + R2 R1 + R 2 1 (b) see the solution
bR
g
P28.64 P28.66 P28.68 P28.70 P28.72 P28.74 P28.76
see the solution
P28.28 P28.30 P28.32 P28.34 P28.36
bR
1
+ 2 R 2 C ln 2
g
(a) 222 C ; (b) increase by 444 C see the solution (a) 5.00 ; (b) 2.40 A (a) R x = R 2  R1 ; (b) no; R x = 2.75 4 r  t rC e r+R
b
g
P28.38 P28.40
(a) 3.91 s; (b) 0.782 ms t C ln 2
(a) and (b) see the solution; (c)
29
Magnetic Fields
CHAPTER OUTLINE
29.1 29.2 29.3 29.4 29.5 Magnetic Fields and Forces Magnetic Force Acting on a CurrentCarrying Conductor Torque on a Current Loop in a Uniform Magnetic Field Motion of a Charged Particle in a Uniform Magnetic Field Applications Involving Charged Particles Moving in a Magnetic Field The Hall Effect
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q29.1 The force is in the +y direction. No, the proton will not continue with constant velocity, but will move in a circular path in the xy plane. The magnetic force will always be perpendicular to the magnetic field and also to the velocity of the proton. As the velocity changes direction, the magnetic force on the proton does too. If they are projected in the same direction into the same magnetic field, the charges are of opposite sign. Not necessarily. If the magnetic field is parallel or antiparallel to the velocity of the charged particle, then the particle will experience no magnetic force. One particle veers in a circular path clockwise in the page, while the other veers in a counterclockwise circular path. If the magnetic field is into the page, the electron goes clockwise and the proton counterclockwise.
29.6
Q29.2 Q29.3
Q29.4
Q29.5
Send the particle through the uniform field and look at its path. If the path of the particle is parabolic, then the field must be electric, as the electric field exerts a constant force on a charged particle. If you shoot a proton through an electric field, it will feel a constant force in the same direction as the electric fieldit's similar to throwing a ball through a gravitational field. If the path of the particle is helical or circular, then the field is magneticsee Question 29.1. If the path of the particle is straight, then observe the speed of the particle. If the particle accelerates, then the field is electric, as a constant force on a proton with or against its motion will make its speed change. If the speed remains constant, then the field is magneticsee Question 29.3. Similarities: Both can alter the velocity of a charged particle moving through the field. Both exert forces directly proportional to the charge of the particle feeling the force. Positive and negative charges feel forces in opposite directions. Differences: The direction of the electric force is parallel or antiparallel to the direction of the electric field, but the direction of the magnetic force is perpendicular to the magnetic field and to the velocity of the charged particle. Electric forces can accelerate a charged particle from rest or stop a moving particle, but magnetic forces cannot.
Q29.6
161
162 Q29.7
Magnetic Fields
Since FB = q v B , then the acceleration produced by a magnetic field on a particle of mass m is q aB = v B . For the acceleration to change the speed, a component of the acceleration must be in m the direction of the velocity. The cross product tells us that the acceleration must be perpendicular to the velocity, and thus can only change the direction of the velocity.
a
a
f
f
Q29.8
The magnetic field in a cyclotron essentially keeps the charged particle in the electric field for a longer period of time, and thus experiencing a larger change in speed from the electric field, by forcing it in a spiral path. Without the magnetic field, the particle would have to move in a straight line through an electric field over a distance that is very large compared to the size of the cyclotron. (a) The qv B force on each electron is down. Since electrons are negative, v B must be up. With v to the right, B must be into the page, away from you. Reversing the current in the coils would reverse the direction of B, making it toward you. Then v B is in the direction right toward you = down, and qv B will make the electron beam curve up.
Q29.9
(b)
Q29.10 Q29.11 Q29.12
If the current is in a direction parallel or antiparallel to the magnetic field, then there is no force. Yes. If the magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of the loop, then it exerts no torque on the loop. If you can hook a spring balance to the particle and measure the force on it in a known electric field, F then q = will tell you its charge. You cannot hook a spring balance to an electron. Measuring the E acceleration of small particles by observing their deflection in known electric and magnetic fields can tell you the chargetomass ratio, but not separately the charge or mass. Both an acceleration produced by an electric field and an acceleration caused by a magnetic field depend on the q properties of the particle only by being proportional to the ratio . m If the current loop feels a torque, it must be caused by a magnetic field. If the current loop feels no torque, try a different orientationthe torque is zero if the field is along the axis of the loop. The Earth's magnetic field exerts force on a charged incoming cosmic ray, tending to make it spiral around a magnetic field line. If the particle energy is low enough, the spiral will be tight enough that the particle will first hit some matter as it follows a field line down into the atmosphere or to the surface at a high geographic latitude.
Q29.13 Q29.14
FIG. Q29.14 Q29.15 Q29.16 The net force is zero, but not the net torque. Only a nonuniform field can exert a nonzero force on a magnetic dipole. If the dipole is aligned with the field, the direction of the resultant force is in the direction of increasing field strength.
Chapter 29
163
Q29.17
The proton will veer upward when it enters the field and move in a counterclockwise semicircular arc. An electron would turn downward and move in a clockwise semicircular arc of smaller radius than that of the proton, due to its smaller mass. Particles of higher speeds will travel in semicircular paths of proportionately larger radius. They will take just the same time to travel farther with their higher speeds. As shown in Equation 29.15, the time it takes to follow the path is independent of particle's speed. The spiral tracks are left by charged particles gradually losing kinetic energy. A straight path might be left by an uncharged particle that managed to leave a trail of bubbles, or it might be the imperceptibly curving track of a very fast charged particle. No. Changing the velocity of a particle requires an accelerating force. The magnetic force is proportional to the speed of the particle. If the particle is not moving, there can be no magnetic force on it. Increase the current in the probe. If the material is a semiconductor, raising its temperature may increase the density of mobile charge carriers in it.
Q29.18
Q29.19
Q29.20 Q29.21
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 29.1 P29.1 (a) (b) (c) (d) Magnetic Fields and Forces up out of the page, since the charge is negative. no deflection into the page
FIG. P29.1 P29.2 At the equator, the Earth's magnetic field is horizontally north. Because an electron has negative charge, F = qv B is opposite in direction to v B . Figures are drawn looking down. (a) Down North = East, so the force is directed West . North North = sin 0 = 0 : Zero deflection . West North = Down, so the force is directed Up . Southeast North = Up, so the force is Down .
(a)
(c) FIG. P29.2
(d)
(b) (c) (d)
164 P29.3
Magnetic Fields
e j Therefore, B = B e k j which indicates the
FB = qv B ; FB  j =  e v i B (a)
negative z direction . FIG. P29.3
P29.4
FB = qvB sin = 1.60 10 19 C 3.00 10 6 m s 3.00 10 1 T sin 37.0
e
je
je
j
FB = 8.67 10 14 N
(b) a= F 8.67 10 14 N = = 5.19 10 13 m s 2 m 1.67 10 27 kg
P29.5
F = ma = 1.67 10 27 kg 2.00 10 13 m s 2 = 3.34 10 14 N = qvB sin 90 B= F 3.34 10 14 N = = 2.09 10 2 T 19 7 qv 1.60 10 C 1.00 10 m s
e
je
j
e
je
j
The righthand rule shows that B must be in the y direction to yield a force in the +x direction when v is in the z direction. P29.6 First find the speed of the electron. K = 1 mv 2 = eV = U : 2 v= 2 e V = m
FIG. P29.5
2 1.60 10 19 C 2 400 J C
e
e9.11 10 ja f
jb
31
kg
j
g = 2.90 10
7
ms
(a) (b) P29.7
FB, max = qvB = 1.60 10 19 C 2.90 10 7 m s 1.70 T = 7.90 10 12 N
FB, min = 0 occurs when v is either parallel to or antiparallel to B. so and 8.20 10 13 N = 1.60 10 19 C 4.00 10 6 m s 1.70 T sin
e
je
FB = qvB sin sin = 0.754
e
je
ja
f
= sin 1 0.754 = 48.9 or 131 .
a
f
P29.8
Gravitational force: Electric force: Magnetic force:
je j F = qE = e 1.60 10 C jb100 N C downg = 1.60 10 N up . F = qv B = e 1.60 10 C je6.00 10 m s Ej e50.0 10 N s C m N j .
Fg = mg = 9.11 10 31 kg 9.80 m s 2 = 8.93 10 30 N down .
e 19 17 B 19 6 6
e
FB = 4.80 10 17 N up = 4.80 10 17 N down .
Chapter 29
165
P29.9
FB = qv B i j k
v B = +2 4 +1 = 12  2 i + 1 + 6 j + 4 + 4 k = 10 i + 7 j + 8k +1 +2 3 v B = 10 2 + 7 2 + 8 2 = 14.6 T m s FB = q v B = 1.60 10 19 C 14.6 T m s = 2.34 10 18 N P29.10 qE = 1.60 10 19 C 20.0 N C k = 3.20 10 18 N k
a
f a f a f jb g
e
e
jb
g e
j
e3.20 10 e3.20 10 e1.92 10
F = qE + qv B = ma
18 18
15
j e j e N jk  e1.92 10 C m sji B = e1.82 10 N jk C m sji B = e5.02 10 N jk
15 18 18
N k  1.60 10 19 C 1.20 10 4 m s i B = 9.11 10 31 2.00 10 12 m s 2 k
je
j
The magnetic field may have any x component . Bz = 0 and By = 2.62 mT .
Section 29.2 P29.11
Magnetic Force Acting on a CurrentCarrying Conductor with FB = Fg = mg m g = IB sin L 100 cm m m = 0.500 g cm = 5.00 10 2 kg m . L 1 000 g kg
FB = ILB sin
mg = ILB sin so I = 2.00 A Thus and
b
e5.00 10
2
I gFGH JK ja9.80f = a2.00fB sin 90.0
FIG. P29.11
B = 0.245 Tesla with the direction given by righthand rule: eastward . P29.12 P29.13 FB = I B = 2.40 A 0.750 m i 1.60 T k = (a) (b) (c)
a
fa
f a fa
f
e2.88 jj N f
FB = ILB sin = 5.00 A 2.80 m 0.390 T sin 60.0 = 4.73 N FB = 5.00 A 2.80 m 0.390 T sin 90.0 = 5.46 N FB = 5.00 A 2.80 m 0.390 T sin 120 = 4.73 N
a
fa
a a
fa fa
fa fa
f f
166 P29.14
Magnetic Fields
FB
=
mg
=
I B
F
I=
0.040 0 kg m 9.80 m s 2 mg = = 0.109 A B 3.60 T Bin FIG. P29.14
b
ge
j
The direction of I in the bar is to the right .
P29.15
The rod feels force FB = I d B = Id k B  j = IdB i .
trasn rot i trans
f e j e j ej + K g + E = b K The workenergy theorem is bK
0 + 0 + Fs cos = IdBL cos 0 = v= 1 1 mv 2 + I 2 2 2 1 1 1 mv 2 + mR 2 2 2 2
a
B + K rot
g
d
f
I
4IdBL = 3m
IJ FG v IJ and IdBL = 3 mv KH RK 4 4a 48.0 A fa0.120 mfa0.240 Tfa0.450 mf = 3b0.720 kg g
2
FG H
L
2
y x 1.07 m s . z FIG. P29.15
P29.16
The rod feels force FB = I d B = Id k B  j = IdB i .
trans rot i trans
f e j e j ej + K g + E = bK The workenergy theorem is bK
0 + 0 + Fs cos = IdBL cos 0 = 1 1 mv 2 + I 2 2 2 1 1 1 mv 2 + mR 2 2 2 2
a
+ K rot
g
f
FG H
IJ FG v IJ KH RK
2
and v =
4IdBL . 3m
P29.17
The magnetic force on each bit of ring is Ids B = IdsB radially inward and upward, at angle above the radial line. The radially inward components tend to squeeze the ring but all cancel out as forces. The upward components IdsB sin all add to I 2 rB sin up .
FIG. P29.17
Chapter 29
167
P29.18
For each segment, I = 5.00 A and B = 0.020 0 N A m j . Segment ab bc cd da 0.400 m j 0.400 m k 0.400 m i + 0.400 m j 0.400 m i  0.400 m k FB = I
a Bf
0
a40.0 mNfe ij a40.0 mNfekj a40.0 mNfek + ij g e j
FIG. P29.18
P29.19
Take the xaxis east, the yaxis up, and the zaxis south. The field is B = 52.0 T cos 60.0  k + 52.0 T sin 60.0  j . The current then has equivalent length: L = 1.40 m  k + 0.850 m j FB = IL B = 0.035 0 A 0.850 j  1.40k m 45.0 j  26.0 k 10 6 T FB = 3.50 10 8 N 22.1i  63.0 i = 2.98 10 6 N  i = 2.98 N west
b
g
e j b ge
e j
ej
FIG. P29.19 .
b
j e
j
e
j
e j
Section 29.3 P29.20 (a)
Torque on a Current Loop in a Uniform Magnetic Field 2 r = 2.00 m so r = 0.318 m
= IA = 17.0 10 3 A 0.318
(b)
e
j a
f
2
m 2 = 5.41 mA m 2
= B
so
= 5.41 10 3 A m 2 0.800 T = 4.33 mN m
e
ja
f
P29.21
= B sin so 4.60 10 3 N m = 0.250 sin 90.0
a
f
= 1.84 10 2 A m 2 = 18.4 mA m 2
168 P29.22
Magnetic Fields
(a)
Let represent the unknown angle; L, the total length of the wire; and d, the length of one side of the square coil. Then, using the definition of magnetic moment and the righthand rule in Figure 29.15, we find
= NAI :
At equilibrium,
and
FG L IJ d I at angle with the horizontal. H 4d K = b Bg  br mgg = 0 FG ILBd IJ sina90.0 f  FG mgd IJ sin = 0 H 4 K H 2K FG mgd IJ sin = FG ILBd IJ cos H 4 K H 2K F ILB I = tan FG a3.40 Afa4.00 mfb0.010 0 Tg IJ = = tan G GH 2b0.100 kg ge9.80 m s j JK H 2mg JK
=
2 1 1 2
3.97 .
(b) P29.23
m =
FG ILBd IJ cos = 1 a3.40 Afa4.00 mfb0.010 0 Tga0.100 mf cos 3.97 = H 4 K 4 fe ja f
3.39 mN m
= NBAI sin
= 100 0.800 T 0.400 0.300 m 2 1.20 A sin 60 = 9.98 N m
Note that is the angle between the magnetic moment and the B field. The loop will rotate so as to align the magnetic moment with the B field. Looking down along the yaxis, the loop will rotate in a clockwise direction. P29.24 From = B = IA B , the magnitude of the torque is IAB sin 90.0. (a) Each side of the triangle is 40.0 cm . 3
a
FIG. P29.23
Its altitude is 13.3 2  6.67 2 cm = 11.5 cm and its area is 1 A = 11.5 cm 13.3 cm = 7.70 10 3 m 2 . 2 Then = 20.0 A 7.70 10 3 m 2 0.520 N s C m = 80.1 mN m .
a
fa
f
a
fe
jb
g
(b)
Each side of the square is 10.0 cm and its area is 100 cm 2 = 10 2 m 2 .
= 20.0 A 10 2 m 2 0.520 T = 0.104 N m
(c) r= 0.400 m = 0.063 7 m 2 A = r 2 = 1.27 10 2 m 2
a
fe fe
ja
f
= 20.0 A 1.27 10 2 m 2 0.520 = 0.132 N m
(d) The circular loop experiences the largest torque.
a
ja
f
Chapter 29
169
P29.25
Choose U = 0 when the dipole moment is at = 90.0 to the field. The field exerts torque of magnitude B sin on the dipole, tending to turn the dipole moment in the direction of decreasing . According to Equations 8.16 and 10.22, the potential energy of the dipolefield system is given by U 0 =
90 .0
z
B sin d = B  cos
a
f
90 .0
=  B cos + 0
or
U =  B .
P29.26
(a)
The field exerts torque on the needle tending to align it with the field, so the minimum energy orientation of the needle is: pointing north at 48.0 below the horizontal where its energy is U min =  B cos 0 =  9.70 10 3 A m 2 55.0 10 6 T = 5.34 10 7 J . It has maximum energy when pointing in the opposite direction, south at 48.0 above the horizontal where its energy is U max =  B cos 180 = + 9.70 10 3 A m 2 55.0 10 6 T = +5.34 10 7 J .
e
je
j
e
je
j
(b) P29.27 (a)
U min + W = U max : W = U max  U min = +5.34 10 7 J  5.34 10 7 J = 1.07 J
e
j
= B,
so
= B = B sin = NIAB sin
max = NIAB sin 90.0 = 1 5.00 A 0.050 0 m
(b) U =  B, so  B U + B Since B = NIA B = 1 5.00 A 0.050 0 m
a
f b
g e3.00 10 Tj =
2 3 3
118 N m
a f
a
f b
g e3.00 10 Tj = 118 J ,
2
the range of the potential energy is: 118 J U +118 J . *P29.28 (a) = B = NIAB sin
max = 80 10 2 A 0.025 m 0.04 m 0.8 N A m sin 90 = 6.40 10 4 N m
(b) (c)
e
ja
Pmax = max = 6.40 10 4
g F 2 rad IJ FG 1 min IJ = N mb3 600 rev mingG H 1 rev K H 60 s K
3
fb
0.241 W
In one half revolution the work is
4
b g = 2 NIAB = 2e6.40 10 N mj = 1.28 10 J In one full revolution, W = 2e1.28 10 Jj = 2.56 10
W = U max  U min =  B cos 180  B cos 0 = 2 B
3
3
J .
(d)
Pavg =
W 2.56 10 3 J = = 0.154 W t 1 60 s
b g
The peak power in (b) is greater by the factor
. 2
170
Magnetic Fields
Section 29.4 P29.29 (a)
Motion of a Charged Particle in a Uniform Magnetic Field B = 50.0 10 6 T; v = 6.20 10 6 m s Direction is given by the righthandrule: southward FB = qvB sin FB = 1.60 10 19 C 6.20 10 6 m s 50.0 10 6 T sin 90.0 = 4.96 10 17 N 1.67 10 27 kg 6.20 10 6 m s mv 2 mv 2 = F= so r = r F 4.96 10 17 N
e
je
je
j
FIG. P29.29
(b)
e
je
j
2
= 1.29 km
P29.30
1 mv 2 = q V 2
a f
e e
1 3.20 10 26 kg v 2 = 1.60 10 19 C 833 V 2
e
j
e
ja
f
v = 91.3 km s
The magnetic force provides the centripetal force: qvB sin = r=
mv 2 r
3.20 10 26 kg 9.13 10 4 m s mv = = 1.98 cm . qB sin 90.0 1.60 10 19 C 0.920 N s C m mv 2 eBr . and v = r m
je jb
j g
P29.31
For each electron, q vB sin 90.0 =
The electrons have no internal structure to absorb energy, so the collision must be perfectly elastic: K= K= K= 1 1 1 2 2 2 mv1i + 0 = mv1 f + mv 2 f 2 2 2
2 2 e 2 B 2 R2 e 2 B 2 R1 e2B2 2 1 1 2 R1 + R 2 + m = m 2 2 2m m2 m2
F GH
I JK
e 1.60 10 19 C 0.044 0 N s C m 2 9.11 10
e
e
jb
F GH
I JK
e
j
2 2
31
kg
j
g b0.010 0 mg + b0.024 0 mg
2
= 115 keV
P29.32
We begin with qvB =
qRB mv 2 , so v = . R m 2 R 2 R 2 m = = . v qRB m qB
The time to complete one revolution is T = Solving for B, B = 2 m = 6.56 10 2 T . qT
Chapter 29
171
P29.33
q V =
a f
1 mv 2 2 mv 2 r
or so
v= r=
2 q V . m mv m = qB qB 2 m p V eB 2 2 m d V
d 2 p p 2 p
a f
Also, qvB =
2 q V = m
a f
2 m V qB 2
a f.
Therefore,
rp2 = rd2 =
a f
2 2
and The conclusion is:
2 r
a f = 2e2m jaV f = 2FG 2m aV f IJ = 2r q B eB H eB K F 2 m a V f I = 2 r . 2m a V f 2e 4m ja V f = = = 2G q B a2efB H eB JK
p p
2
2
2
2 p
r = rd = 2 rp . qvB = mv 2 R
P29.34
(a)
We begin with or But Therefore,
qRB = mv . L = mvR = qR 2 B . R= L = qB
e1.60 10
4.00 10 25 J s
19
C 1.00 10 3 T
je
j
= 0.050 0 m = 5.00 cm .
(b)
Thus,
v=
L 4.00 10 25 J s = = 8.78 10 6 m s . 31 mR 9.11 10 kg 0.050 0 m
e
jb
g
P29.35
19 C 5.20 T qB 1.60 10 = = = 4.98 10 8 rad s m 1.67 10 27 kg
e
ja
f
P29.36
1 mv 2 = q V 2 r= mv qB m 2 V q B2 qB 2 r 2 2 V
a f
so
v= r=
2 q V m
a f a f
qB
so
m 2 q V m m 2 V q B2
2
r2 =
a f
and
ar f
2
=
a f
2
m=
a f
and
a am f = bq2gBVrff a
so
m q r 2e = 2 = m q r e
a f FG IJ FG 2R IJ H KH R K
2
2
= 8
172 P29.37
Magnetic Fields
E= and
1 mv 2 = eV 2 evB sin 90 = B= mv m = eR eR mv 2 R 2 e V 1 = m R 2mV e
1 B= 5.80 10 10 m *P29.38 (a)
2 1.67 10 27 kg 10.0 10 6 V 1.60 10
19
e
je
C
j=
7.88 10 12 T
v +
At the moment shown in Figure 29.21, the particle must be moving upward in order for the magnetic force on it to be into the page, toward the center of this turn of its spiral path. Throughout its motion it circulates clockwise.
B
FIG. P29.38(a)
v F B
(b)
After the particle has passed the middle of the bottle and moves into the region of increasing magnetic field, the magnetic force on it has a component to the left (as well as a radially inward component) as shown. This force in the x direction slows and reverses the particle's motion along the axis.
FIG. P29.38(b) (c) The magnetic force is perpendicular to the velocity and does no work on the particle. The particle keeps constant kinetic energy. As its axial velocity component decreases, its tangential velocity component increases. The orbiting particle constitutes a loop of current in the yz q plane and therefore a magnetic dipole moment I A = A T in the x direction. It is like a little bar magnet with its N pole on the left. Problem 17 showed that a nonuniform magnetic field exerts a net force on a magnetic dipole. When the dipole is aligned opposite to the external field, the force pushes it out of the region of stronger field. Here it is to the left, a force of repulsion of one magnetic south pole on another south pole. +
(d)
N
S
FIG. P29.38(d)
B
N S
(e)
S
FIG. P29.38(e)
Chapter 29
173
P29.39
mv so r= qB
7.94 10 3 m 1.60 10 19 C 1.80 T rqB = m= v 4.60 10 5 m s m = 4.97 10 27 kg
e
je
ja
f
F 1u GH 1.66 10
27
I= J kg K
2.99 u , or a helium ion,
+ 3 2 He
The particle is singly ionized: either a tritium ion,
+ 3 1H
.
Section 29.5 P29.40
Applications Involving Charged Particles Moving in a Magnetic Field
FB = Fe so where qvB = qE v= 2K and K is kinetic energy of the electron. m 2K B= m so r= 2 750 1.60 10 19 9.11 10 v= mv m = qB q
31
E = vB = 1 mv 2 = q V 2
a fe
j b0.015 0g =
244 kV m
P29.41
K=
a f
mv 2 r
2 q V m
a f
2m V q
FB = qv B =
2 q V m 1 = B B
a f
a f
m = 8.28 cm
(a) (b)
r238 =
2 238 1.66 10 27 2 000 1.60 10
19
e
j
FG 1 IJ = 8.28 10 H 1.20 K
2
r235 = 8. 23 cm r238 = r235 m 238 = m 235 238.05 = 1.006 4 235.04
The ratios of the orbit radius for different ions are independent of V and B. P29.42 In the velocity selector: v= E 2 500 V m = = 7.14 10 4 m s . B 0.035 0 T
In the deflection chamber:
2.18 10 26 kg 7.14 10 4 m s mv r= = = 0.278 m . qB 1.60 10 19 C 0.035 0 T
e
e
je
jb
g
j
174 P29.43
Magnetic Fields
(a)
FB = qvB =
mv 2 R
19 C 0.450 T v qBR qB 1.60 10 = = = = = 4.31 10 7 rad s 27 R mR m kg 1.67 10 19 C 0.450 T 1.20 m qBR 1.60 10 = = 5.17 10 7 m s m 1.67 10 27 kg
e
ja
f
(b)
v= 1 mv 2 : 2
e
ja
fa
f
P29.44
K=
e34.0 10
7
v = 8.07 10 m s
j 1 e1.67 10 kg jv 2 kg je8.07 10 m sj mv e1.67 10 r= = = 0.162 m qB e1.60 10 Cja5.20 Tf
6
eV 1.60 10 19 J eV =
27
je
27
2
7
19
*P29.45
Note that the "cyclotron frequency" is an angular speed. The motion of the proton is described by
F = ma :
q vB sin 90 = qB=m qB
19
v = m r
mv 2 r
(a)
(b)
(c) (d)
e1.60 10 Cjb0.8 N s C mg FG kg m IJ = 7.66 10 rad s = = H N s K m e1.67 10 kgj F 1 IJ = 2.68 10 m s v = r = e7.66 10 rad sja0.350 mfG H 1 rad K F 1 eV IJ = 3.76 10 1 1 K = mv = e1.67 10 kg je 2.68 10 m sj G 2 2 H 1.6 10 J K
27 2 7 7 7 2 27 7 2 19
6
eV
The proton gains 600 eV twice during each revolution, so the number of revolutions is 3.76 10 6 eV = 3.13 10 3 revolutions . 2 600 eV
a
f
(e)
=t
mv 2 r
t=
3.13 10 3 rev 2 rad = 2.57 10 4 s = 7.66 10 7 rad s 1 rev
FG H
IJ K
P29.46
FB = qvB = B=
4.80 10 16 kg m s mv = = 3.00 T qr 1.60 10 19 C 1 000 m
e
jb
g
Chapter 29
P29.47
= tan 1
FG 25.0 IJ = 68.2 H 10.0 K
175
and
R=
1.00 cm = 1.08 cm . sin 68.2
Ignoring relativistic correction, the kinetic energy of the electrons is 1 mv 2 = qV 2 so v= 2 q V = 1.33 10 8 m s . m
From Newton's second law
mv 2 = qvB , we find the magnetic field R
9.11 10 31 kg 1.33 10 8 m s mv B= = = 70.1 mT . qR 1.60 10 19 C 1.08 10 2 m
e
e
je je
j
j
FIG. P29.47
Section 29.6 P29.48 (a)
The Hall Effect RH 1 nq IB nqt so n= 1 1 = = 7.44 10 28 m 3 19 qRH C 0.840 10 10 m3 C 1.60 10
e
je
j
(b)
VH = B=
nqt VH I
b
g = e7.44 10
28
m 3 1.60 10 19 C 0.200 10 3 m 15.0 10 6 V 20.0 A
je
je
je
j=
1.79 T
P29.49
Since VH =
IB , and given that I = 50.0 A , B = 1.30 T , and t = 0.330 mm, the number of charge nqt carriers per unit volume is n= IB = 1.28 10 29 m 3 e VH t
b
g
The number density of atoms we compute from the density: n0 = 8.92 g 1 mole cm 3 63.5 g
F GH
I F 6.02 10 atoms I F 10 cm I = 8.46 10 JK GH mole JK GH 1 m JK
23 6 3 3
28
atom m3
So the number of conduction electrons per atom is n 1.28 10 29 = = 1.52 n 0 8.46 10 28
176 P29.50
Magnetic Fields
(a)
VH =
IB nqt
so
nqt 0.080 0 T B = = = 1.14 10 5 T V . VH 0.700 10 6 V I B=
Then, the unknown field is
FG nqt IJ bV g HIK
H
B = 1.14 10 5 T V 0.330 10 6 V = 0.037 7 T = 37.7 mT . (b) nqt = 1.14 10 5 T V I n = 1.14 10 5 T V so n = 1.14 10 5 T V
e
je
j
e
I j qt
e
j e1.60 10
0.120 A
19
C 2.00 10
je
3
m
j
= 4.29 10 25 m 3 .
P29.51
B=
nqt VH I
b
g = e8.49 10
28
m 3 1.60 10 19 C 5.00 10 3 m 5.10 10 12 V 8.00 A
je
je
je
j
B = 4.33 10 5 T = 43.3 T
Additional Problems P29.52 (a) The boundary between a region of strong magnetic field and a region of zero field cannot be perfectly sharp, but we ignore the thickness of the transition zone. In the field the electron moves on an arc of a circle:
F = ma :
q vB sin 90 = mv 2 r
19 C 10 3 N s C m q B 1.60 10 v = = = = 1.76 10 8 rad s r m 9.11 10 31 kg
e
e
je
j
j
FIG. P29.52(a)
The time for one half revolution is, from = t t = (b)
=
rad = 1.79 10 8 s . 1.76 10 8 rad s
The maximum depth of penetration is the radius of the path. Then and K= 1 1 mv 2 = 9.11 10 31 kg 3.51 10 6 m s 2 2 v = r = 1.76 10 8 s 1 0.02 m = 3.51 10 6 m s
e
ja
f
e
je
j
2
= 5.62 10 18 J =
5.62 10 18 J e 1.60 10 19 C
= 35.1 eV .
Chapter 29
177
P29.53
(a)
Define vector h to have the downward direction of the current, and vector L to be along the pipe into the page as shown. The electric current experiences a magnetic force .
I h B in the direction of L.
(b) The sodium, consisting of ions and electrons, flows along the pipe transporting no net charge. But inside the section of length L, electrons drift upward to constitute downward electric current J area = J Lw .
a
f
a f
FIG. P29.53
The current then feels a magnetic force I h B = JLwhB sin 90 . This force along the pipe axis will make the fluid move, exerting pressure F JLwhB = = JLB . area hw P29.54
Fy = 0 :
+n  mg = 0  k n + IB sin 90.0 = 0 B=
2 k mg 0.100 0.200 kg 9.80 m s = = 39.2 mT 10.0 A 0.500 m Id
Fx = 0 :
b a
fa
ge
f
j
P29.55
The magnetic force on each proton, FB = qv B = qvB sin 90 downward perpendicular to velocity, causes centripetal acceleration, guiding it into a circular path of radius r, with mv 2 r mv . r= qB qvB = 1 mv 2 2 2K = m 2 5.00 10 6 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV 1.67 10
27
and
We compute this radius by first finding the proton's speed: K= v= FIG. P29.55
e
je
kg
j = 3.10 10
7
m s.
Now,
1.67 10 27 kg 3.10 10 7 m s mv = = 6.46 m . r= qB 1.60 10 19 C 0.050 0 N s C m
e
e
jb
je
j
g
(b)
From the figure, observe that sin = 1.00 m 1m = r 6.46 m = 8.90
(a)
The magnitude of the proton momentum stays constant, and its final y component is
 1.67 10 27 kg 3.10 10 7 m s sin 8.90 = 8.00 10 21 kg m s .
e
je
j
178 P29.56
Magnetic Fields
(a)
If B = Bx i + By j + Bz k , FB = qv B = e vi i Bx i + By j + Bz k = 0 + evi B y k  evi Bz j . Since the force actually experienced is FB = Fi j , observe that B x could have any value , B y = 0 , and B z =  Fi . evi
i
e j e
j
(b)
If v = vi i , then
FB = qv B = e  vi i Bx i + 0 j 
(c)
If q =  e and v = vi i , then
FB
F I kJ = e j FGH ev K F F I = qv B =  ee v i j G B i + 0 j  kJ = ev K H
i i x i i
 Fi j .
 Fi j .
Reversing either the velocity or the sign of the charge reverses the force. P29.57 (a) The net force is the Lorentz force given by F = qE + qv B = q E + v B F = 3.20 10 19
e
a f j e4i  1 j  2kj + e2 i + 3 j  1kj e2 i + 4 j + 1kj N
18
Carrying out the indicated operations, we find: F=
(b)
= cos
1
e3.52i  1.60 jj 10 N . 3.52 FG F IJ = cos FG H FK GH a3.52f + a1.60f
x 1 2
2
I JJ = K
24.4
P29.58
A key to solving this problem is that reducing the normal force will reduce F the friction force: FB = BIL or B = B . IL When the wire is just able to move, so and Also, so FB sin = f : We minimize B by minimizing FB : Thus, = tan 1
B 1
Fy = n + FB cos  mg = 0
n = mg  FB cos f = mg  FB cos .
b
g
Fx = FB sin  f = 0
FIG. P29.58
FB sin = mg  FB cos and FB =
b
g
mg . sin + cos
dFB cos  sin = mg = 0 sin = cos . 2 d sin + cos
FG 1 IJ = tan a5.00f = 78.7 for the smallest field, and H K F F g I bm Lg =G J B= IL H I K sin + cos L a0.200fe9.80 m s j OP 0.100 kg m =M B MN 1.50 A PQ sin 78.7+a0.200f cos 78.7 = 0.128 T
2 min
b gb
g
Bmin = 0.128 T pointing north at an angle of 78.7 below the horizontal
Chapter 29
179
*P29.59
The electrons are all fired from the electron gun with the same speed v in Ui = K f qV = 1 mv 2 2
a efaV f = 1 m v 2
e 12
2
v=
2 eV me
For small, cos is nearly equal to 1. The time T of passage of each electron in the chamber is given by d = vT T=d
FG m IJ H 2 e V K
e
Each electron moves in a different helix, around a different axis. If each completes just one revolution within the chamber, it will be in the right place to pass through the exit port. Its transverse velocity component v = v sin swings around according to F = ma qv B sin 90 = Then *P29.60 2 m e B e
2 mv r 12
eB = d
me v 2 = m e = m e r T B= 2 2m e V d e
T=
m e 2 me =d 2 e V eB
FG H
IJ K
12
FG IJ H K
=
a2 V f
12
FG H
IJ K
12
.
Let vi represent the original speed of the alpha particle. Let v and v p represent the particles' speeds after the collision. We have conservation of momentum 4m p vi = 4m p v + m p v p and the relative velocity equation vi  0 = v p  v . Eliminating vi , 4 v p  4 v = 4 v + v p 3 v p = 8 v v = 3 vp . 8
For the proton's motion in the magnetic field,
F = ma
For the alpha particle, 2 ev B sin 90 = P29.61
2 4 m p v
ev p B sin 90 =
2 mp vp
R
eBR = vp . mp
r
r =
2 m p v eB
r =
2m p 3 2m p 3 eBR 3 vp = R . = eB 8 4 eB 8 m p
Let x 1 be the elongation due to the weight of the wire and let x 2 be the additional elongation of the springs when the magnetic field is turned on. Then Fmagnetic = 2 kx 2 where k is the force constant of the spring and can be determined from k = mg . (The factor 2 is 2 x 1 included in the two previous equations since there are 2 springs in parallel.) Combining these two equations, we find Fmagnetic = 2
FG mg IJ x H 2 x K
1
2
=
mgx 2 ; but FB = I L B = ILB . x 1
FIG. P29.61
0.100 9.80 3.00 10 3 mgx 2 24.0 V Therefore, where I = = 2.00 A , B = = = 0.588 T . ILx1 12.0 2.00 0.050 0 5.00 10 3
fa fe a fb ge
a
j
j
180 P29.62
Magnetic Fields
Suppose the input power is
120 W = 120 V I :
Suppose and the output power is Suppose the area is about Suppose that the field is
a
f
I ~ 1 A = 10 0 A .
= 2 000 rev min
FG 1 min IJ FG 2 rad IJ ~ 200 rad s H 60 s K H 1 rev K 20 W = = b 200 rad sg ~ 10 N m . A ~ 10 m . a3 cmf a4 cmf, or
1 3 2
B ~ 10 1 T .
Then, the number of turns in the coil may be found from NIAB : 0.1 N m ~ N 1 C s 10 3 m 2 10 1 N s C m giving *P29.63
b
ge
je
j
B fs I
N ~ 10
3
.
The sphere is in translational equilibrium, thus fs  Mg sin = 0 . (1) The sphere is in rotational equilibrium. If torques are taken about the center of the sphere, the magnetic field produces a clockwise torque of magnitude B sin , and the frictional force a counterclockwise torque of magnitude fs R , where R is the radius of the sphere. Thus: fs R  B sin = 0 . (2) From (1): fs = Mg sin . Substituting this in (2) and canceling out sin , one obtains
Mg FIG. P29.63
B = MgR .
Now = NI R 2 . Thus (3) gives I =
0.08 kg 9.80 m s 2 Mg = = 0.713 A . The current must be NBR 5 0.350 T 0.2 m counterclockwise as seen from above.
b
a fa
ge
fa
j f
(3)
P29.64
Call the length of the rod L and the tension in each wire alone
Fx = T sin  ILB sin 90.0 = 0 Fy = T cos  mg = 0 ,
tan = ILB IB = mg mL g
or or or
T sin = ILB T cos = mg B= I
T . Then, at equilibrium: 2
b g
bm Lgg tan =
g tan I
P29.65
F = ma or qvB sin 90.0 =
mv 2 r
the angular frequency for each ion is f = f12  f14 =
1.60 10 19 C 2.40 T qB 1 1 =  2 m12 m14 2 1.66 10 27 kg u
FG H
IJ e K e
qB v = = = 2 f and r m
ja
fF 1  1 I G J j H 12.0 u 14.0 u K
f = f12  f14 = 4.38 10 5 s 1 = 438 kHz
Chapter 29
181
P29.66
Let v x and v be the components of the velocity of the positron parallel to and perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic field. (a) The pitch of trajectory is the distance moved along x by the positron during each period, T (see Equation 29.15) p = v x T = v cos 85.0
6
fFGH 2 m IJK Bq e5.00 10 jacos 85.0fa2 fe9.11 10 j = p= 0.150e1.60 10 j a
31 19
FIG. P29.66 1.04 10 4 m
(b)
From Equation 29.13,
r=
mv mv sin 85.0 = Bq Bq
r=
e9.11 10 je5.00 10 jasin 85.0f = a0.150fe1.60 10 j
31 6 19
1.89 10 4 m q q = t T 2 R . v ke . mR mR 3 q2 ke
P29.67
= IAB where the effective current due to the orbiting electrons is
and the period of the motion is The electron's speed in its orbit is found by requiring keq2 R
2
I= T=
=
mv 2 or R
v=q T = 2
Substituting this expression for v into the equation for T, we find
e9.11 10 je5.29 10 j = 1.52 10 s . T = 2 e1.60 10 j e8.99 10 j F q I 1.60 10 e5.29 10 j a0.400f = Therefore, = G J AB = H T K 1.52 10
31 11 3 9 19 2 16 19 16 11 2
3.70 10 24 N m .
P29.68
Use the equation for cyclotron frequency =
qB qB qB = or m = 2 f m
m=
e1.60 10 Cje5.00 10 Tj = a2 fe5.00 rev 1.50 10 sj
19 2 3
3.82 10 25 kg .
182 P29.69
Magnetic Fields
(a)
K=
1 mv 2 = 6.00 MeV = 6.00 10 6 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV 2
e
je
j
x
K = 9.60 10 13 J v= 2 9.60 10 1.67 10
e
13
J
27
kg
j = 3.39 10
je
7
ms
v
' x x x x x B in = 1.00 T x x x x x 45 x x x x x 45 x x x x x R x x x x x x x x x x 45.0 x x x x x
FB = qvB = R= mv = qB
e
mv so R 1.67 10 27 kg 3.39 10 7 m s
2
e1.60 10
19
C 1.00 T
ja
f
j = 0.354 m
FIG. P29.69
Then, from the diagram, x = 2 R sin 45.0 = 2 0.354 m sin 45.0 = 0.501 m (b) P29.70 (a) From the diagram, observe that = 45.0 . See graph to the right. The Hall voltage is directly proportional to the magnetic field. A leastsquare fit to the data gives the equation of the best fitting line as: VH = 1.00 10 (b)
a
f
120 100 80
V H (V)
60 40 20
e
4
V TB .
j
0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
B (T)
Comparing the equation of the line which fits the data best to VH =
FIG. P29.70
F 1 IB GH nqt JK
I I = 1.00 10 4 V T, or t = . nqt nq 1.00 10 4 V T
observe that:
e
j
Then, if I = 0.200 A , q = 1.60 10 19 C , and n = 1.00 10 26 m 3 , the thickness of the sample is t=
e1.00 10
26
m
3
je1.60 10
0.200 A
19
C 1.00 10 4 V T
je
j
= 1.25 10 4 m = 0.125 mm .
Chapter 29
183
P29.71
(a)
The magnetic force acting on ions in the blood stream will deflect positive charges toward point A and negative charges toward point B. This separation of charges produces an electric field directed from A toward B. At equilibrium, the electric force caused by this field must balance the magnetic force, so
or
FG V IJ HdK e160 10 Vj V = v= Bd b0.040 0 Tge3.00 10
qvB = qE = q
6
FIG. P29.71
3
m
j
= 1.33 m s .
(b)
No . Negative ions moving in the direction of v would be deflected toward point B, giving A a higher potential than B. Positive ions moving in the direction of v would be deflected toward A, again giving A a higher potential than B. Therefore, the sign of the potential difference does not depend on whether the ions in the blood are positively or negatively charged.
P29.72
When in the field, the particles follow a circular path mv 2 mv , so the radius of the path is: r = according to qvB = r qB (a) When r = h = qBh mv , that is, when v = , the qB m particle will cross the band of field. It will move in a full semicircle of radius h, leaving the field at
v i = vj
b2h, 0, 0g with velocity b
v f =  vj .
FIG. P29.72
(b)
When v <
qBh mv , the particle will move in a smaller semicircle of radius r = < h . It will m qB
leave the field at 2r, 0 , 0 with velocity v f =  vj . (c) When v > qBh mv , the particle moves in a circular arc of radius r = > h , centered at qB m h r, 0 , 0 . The arc subtends an angle given by = sin 1 . It will leave the field at the point r
g
b
g
with coordinates r 1  cos , h, 0 with velocity v f = v sin i + v cos j .
a
f
FG IJ HK
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P29.2 (a) west; (b) no deflection; (c) up; (d) down (a) 86.7 fN ; (b) 51.9 Tm s 2 (a) 7.90 pN ; (b) 0 P29.8 Gravitational force: 8.93 10 30 N down; Electric force: 16.0 aN up ; Magnetic force: 48.0 aN down By = 2.62 mT ; Bz = 0; Bx may have any value
P29.4 P29.6
P29.10
184 P29.12 P29.14 P29.16 P29.18
Magnetic Fields
e2.88 jj N
109 mA to the right
P29.50 P29.52 P29.54 P29.56
(a) 37.7 mT ; (b) 4.29 10 25 m3 (a) 17.9 ns; (b) 35.1 eV 39.2 mT (a) Bx is indeterminate. By = 0 ; Bz = (b) Fi j ; (c) Fi j  Fi ; evi
FG 4IdBL IJ H 3m K
Fcd
12
Fab = 0; Fbc = 40.0 mN  i ;
da
e j = 40.0 mN e  k j ; F = a 40.0 mN fe i + k j
P29.58
P29.20 P29.22 P29.24
(a) 5.41 mA m 2 ; (b) 4.33 mN m (a)3.97 ; (b) 3.39 mN m (a) 80.1 mN m ; (b) 104 mN m ; (c) 132 mN m ; (d) The torque on the circle. (a) minimum: pointing north at 48.0 below the horizontal; maximum: pointing south at 48.0 above the horizontal; (b) 1.07 J (a) 640 N m ; (b) 241 mW; (c) 2.56 mJ; (d) 154 mW 1.98 cm 65.6 mT (a) 5.00 cm ; (b) 8.78 Mm s m =8 m see the solution 244 kV m 278 mm 162 mm 3.00 T (a) 7.44 10 28 m3 ; (b) 1.79 T P29.72 P29.60 P29.62
128 mT north at an angle of 78.7 below the horizontal 3R 4 B ~ 10 1 T; ~ 10 1 N m; I ~ 1 A ; A ~ 10 3 m 2 ; N ~ 10 3
P29.26
P29.64 P29.66 P29.68 P29.70
g tan I
(a) 0.104 mm; (b) 0.189 mm 3.82 10 25 kg (a) see the solution; empirically, VH = 100 V T B ; (b) 0.125 mm
P29.28
P29.30 P29.32 P29.34 P29.36 P29.38 P29.40 P29.42 P29.44 P29.46 P29.48
b
g
qBh ; The particle moves in a m semicircle of radius h and leaves the field with velocity v j; (b) The particle moves in a smaller mv semicircle of radius , attaining final qB (a) v = velocity v j; (c) The particle moves in a circular arc of mv , leaving the field with radius r = qB velocity v sin i + v cos j where h = sin 1 r
FG IJ HK
30
Sources of the Magnetic Field
CHAPTER OUTLINE
30.1 30.2 The BiotSavart Law The Magnetic Force Between Two Parallel Conductors Ampre's Law The Magnetic Field of a Solenoid Magnetic Flux Gauss's Law in Magnetism Displacement Current and the General Form of Ampre's Law Magnetism in Matter The Magnetic Field of the Earth
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q30.1 It is not. The magnetic field created by a single loop of current resembles that of a bar magnetstrongest inside the loop, and decreasing in strength as you move away from the loop. Neither is it in a uniform directionthe magnetic field lines loop though the loop! No magnetic field is created by a stationary charge, as the rate of flow is zero. A moving charge creates a magnetic field. The magnetic field created by wire 1 at the position of wire 2 is into the paper. Hence, the magnetic force on wire 2 is in direction down into the paper = to the right, away from wire 1. Now wire 2 creates a magnetic field into the page at the location of wire 1, so wire 1 feels force up into the paper = left, away from wire 2.
30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7
Q30.2 Q30.3
30.8 30.9
FIG. Q30.3
185
186 Q30.4
Sources of the Magnetic Field
No total force, but a torque. Let wire one carry current in the y direction, toward the top of the page. Let wire two be a millimeter above the plane of the paper and carry current to the right, in the x direction. On the lefthand side of wire one, wire one creates magnetic field in the z direction, which exerts force in the i k =  j direction on wire two. On the righthand side, wire one produces magnetic field in the  k direction and makes a i  k = + j force of equal magnitude act on wire two. If wire two is free to move, its center section will twist counterclockwise and then be attracted to wire one.
2
e j
1
FIG. Q30.4 Q30.5 Ampre's law is valid for all closed paths surrounding a conductor, but not always convenient. There are many paths along which the integral is cumbersome to calculate, although not impossible. Consider a circular path around but not coaxial with a long, straight currentcarrying wire. The BiotSavart law considers the contribution of each element of current in a conductor to determine the magnetic field, while for Ampre's law, one need only know the current passing through a given surface. Given situations of high degrees of symmetry, Ampre's law is more convenient to use, even though both laws are equally valid in all situations. If the radius of the toroid is very large compared to its crosssectional area, then the field is nearly uniform. If not, as in many transformers, it is not. Both laws use the concept of fluxthe "flow" of field lines through a surface to determine the field strength. They also both relate the integral of the field over a closed geometrical figure to a fundamental constant multiplied by the source of the appropriate field. The geometrical figure is a surface for Gauss's law and a line for Ampre's. Apply Ampre's law to the circular path labeled 1 in the picture. Since there is no current inside this path, the magnetic field inside the tube must be zero. On the other hand, the current through path 2 is the current carried by the conductor. Therefore the magnetic field outside the tube is nonzero.
Q30.6
Q30.7 Q30.8
Q30.9
FIG. Q30.9 Q30.10 The magnetic field inside a long solenoid is given by B = (a) (b) Q30.11 If the length is doubled, the field is cut in half.
0 NI
.
If N is doubled, the magnetic field is doubled.
The magnetic flux is B = BA cos . Therefore the flux is maximum when B is perpendicular to the loop of wire. The flux is zero when there is no component of magnetic field perpendicular to the loopthat is, when the plane of the loop contains the x axis.
Chapter 30
187
Q30.12 Q30.13
Maxwell included a term in Ampre's law to account for the contributions to the magnetic field by changing electric fields, by treating those changing electric fields as "displacement currents." M measures the intrinsic magnetic field in the nail. Unless the nail was previously magnetized, then M starts out from zero. H is due to the current in the coil of wire around the nail. B is related to the sum of M and H. If the nail is aluminum or copper, H makes the dominant contribution to B, but M can add a little in the same or in the opposite direction. If the nail is iron, as it becomes magnetized M can become the dominant contributor to B. Magnetic domain alignment creates a stronger external magnetic field. The field of one piece of iron in turn can align domains in another iron sample. A nonuniform magnetic field exerts a net force of attraction on magnetic dipoles aligned with the field. The shock misaligns the domains. Heating will also decrease magnetism. Magnetic levitation is illustrated in Figure Q30.31. The Earth's magnetic field is so weak that the floor of his tomb should be magnetized as well as his coffin. Alternatively, the floor of his tomb could be made of superconducting material, which exerts a force of repulsion on any magnet. There is no magnetic material in a vacuum, so M must be zero. Therefore B = 0 H in a vacuum. Atoms that do not have a permanent magnetic dipole moment have electrons with spin and orbital magnetic moments that add to zero as vectors. Atoms with a permanent dipole moment have electrons with orbital and spin magnetic moments that show some net alignment. The magnetic dipole moment of an atom is the sum of the dipole moments due to the electrons' orbital motions and the dipole moments due to the spin of the electrons. M and H are in opposite directions. Section 30.8 argues that all atoms should be thought of as weakly diamagnetic due to the effect of an external magnetic field on the motions of atomic electrons. Paramagnetic and ferromagnetic effects dominate whenever they exist. The effects of diamagnetism are significantly smaller than those of paramagnetism. When the substance is above the Curie temperature, random thermal motion of the molecules prevents the formation of domains. It cannot be ferromagnetic, but only paramagnetic. A ferromagnetic substance is one in which the magnetic moments of the atoms are aligned within domains, and can be aligned macroscopically. A paramagnetic substance is one in which the magnetic moments are not naturally aligned, but when placed in an external magnetic field, the molecules line their magnetic moments up with the external field. A diamagnetic material is one in which the magnetic moments are also not naturally aligned, but when placed in an external magnetic field, the molecules line up to oppose the external magnetic field. (a) (b) (c) B increases slightly B decreases slightly B increases significantly
Q30.14
Q30.15 Q30.16
Q30.17 Q30.18
Q30.19 Q30.20
Q30.21 Q30.22 Q30.23
Q30.24
Equations 30.33 and 30.34 indicate that, when each metal is in the solenoid, the total field is B = 0 1 + H . Table 30.2 indicates that B is slightly greater than 0 H for aluminum and slightly less for copper. For iron, the field can be made thousands of times stronger, as seen in Example 30.10.
b
g
188 Q30.25
Sources of the Magnetic Field
A "hard" ferromagnetic material requires much more energy per molecule than a "soft" ferromagnetic material to change the orientation of the magnetic dipole moments. This way, a hard ferromagnetic material is more likely to retain its magnetization than a soft ferromagnetic material. The medium for any magnetic recording should be a hard ferromagnetic substance, so that thermal vibrations and stray magnetic fields will not rapidly erase the information. If a soft ferromagnetic substance were used, then the magnet would not be "permanent." Any significant shock, a heating/cooling cycle, or just rotating the magnet in the Earth's magnetic field would decrease the overall magnetization by randomly aligning some of the magnetic dipole moments. You can expect a magnetic tape to be weakly attracted to a magnet. Before you erase the information on the tape, the net magnetization of a macroscopic section of the tape would be nearly zero, as the different domains on the tape would have opposite magnetization, and be more or less equal in number and size. Once your external magnet aligns the magnetic moments on the tape, there would be a weak attraction, but not like that of picking up a paper clip with a magnet. A majority of the mass of the tape is nonmagnetic, and so the gravitational force acting on the tape will likely be larger than the magnetic attraction. To magnetize the screwdriver, stroke one pole of the magnet along the blade of the screwdriver several or many times. To demagnetize the screwdriver, drop it on a hard surface a few times, or heat it to some high temperature. The north magnetic pole is near the south geographic pole. Straight up. (a) (b) (c) The magnets repel each other with a force equal to the weight of one of them. The pencil prevents motion to the side and prevents the magnets from rotating under their mutual torques. Its constraint changes unstable equilibrium into stable. Most likely, the disks are magnetized perpendicular to their flat faces, making one face a north pole and the other a south pole. One disk has its north pole on the top side and the other has its north pole on the bottom side. Then if either were inverted they would attract each other and stick firmly together.
Q30.26 Q30.27
Q30.28
Q30.29
Q30.30 Q30.31
(d)
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 30.1 P30.1 B= The BiotSavart Law
0 I 0 q v 2 R = = 12.5 T 2R 2R
b
g
P30.2
4 10 7 T m A 1.00 10 4 A 0I = = 2.00 10 5 T = 20.0 T B= 2 R 2 100 m
e
a
je
f
j
Chapter 30
189
P30.3
(a)
B=
4 0 I 3 cos  cos 4 a 4 4
FG H
IJ where a = K 2
is the distance from any side to the center. B= (b) 4.00 10 6 0.200
F GH
2 2 = 2 2 10 5 T = 28.3 T into the paper + 2 2 FIG. P30.3
I JK
For a single circular turn with 4 = 2 R , 4 2 10 7 10.0 0 I 0 I = = = 24.7 T into the paper B= 2R 4 4 0. 400
e
ja f a f
P30.4 P30.5
B=
4 10 7 1.00 A 0I = = 2.00 10 7 T 2 r 2 1.00 m
e
a
ja
f
f
For leg 1, ds r = 0 , so there is no contribution to the field from this segment. For leg 2, the wire is only semiinfinite; thus, B=
0I 1 0I = into the paper . 2 2 x 4 x
F GH
I JK
FIG. P30.5 P30.6 We can think of the total magnetic field as the superposition of the field due to the long straight wire I (having magnitude 0 and directed into the page) and the field due to the circular loop (having 2 R 0I magnitude and directed into the page). The resultant magnetic field is: 2R 1 0I B= 1+ directed into the page . 2R
FG H
IJ K
b
g
P30.7
For the straight sections ds r = 0 . The quarter circle makes onefourth the field of a full loop: B= 1 0I 0I = into the paper 4 2R 8R B=
e4 10
ja 8b0.030 0 mg
7
T m A 5.00 A
f=
26.2 T into the paper
190 P30.8
Sources of the Magnetic Field
Along the axis of a circular loop of radius R, B=
or where
e B L 1 =M B MN bx Rg
0
0 IR 2
2 x2 + R2
j
32 3 2
2
OP + 1P Q
B0
0I . 2R
x R 0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
FIG. P30.8 B B0 1.00 0.354 0.0894 0.0316 0.0143 0.00754
*P30.9
Wire 1 creates at the origin magnetic field B1 =
0I I right hand rule = 0 1 2 r 2 a
If the total field at the origin is according to B 2 =
=
0 I1 j 2 a
(a)
I 2 0 I1 j = 0 1 j + B 2 then the second wire must create field 2 a 2 a
.
0 I1 I j= 0 2 2 a 2 2 a
a f
Then I 2 = 2 I 1 out of the paper = 2 I 1 k . (b) The other possibility is B1 + B 2 = B2 = *P30.10
I 2 0 I1  j = 0 1 j + B 2 . Then 2 a 2 a
e j
I 3 0 I1 j = 0 2 2 a 2 2 a
e j
a f
I 2 = 6 I 1 into the paper = 6 I 1  k
e j
Every element of current creates magnetic field in the same direction, into the page, at the center of the arc. The upper straight portion creates onehalf of the field that an infinitely long straight wire would create. The curved portion creates one quarter of the field that a circular loop produces at its 1 0I center. The lower straight segment also creates field . 2 2 r The total field is B=
F 1 I + 1 I + 1 I I into the page = GH 2 2 r 4 2r 2 2 r JK F 0.284 15 I IJ into the page. =G H r K
0 0 0 0
0I 1 1 + into the plane of the paper 2r 4
FG H
IJ K
Chapter 30
191
*P30.11
(a)
Above the pair of wires, the field out of the page of the 50 A current will be stronger than the  k field of the 30 A current, so they cannot add to zero. Between the wires, both produce fields into the page. They can only add to zero below the wires, at coordinate y =  y . Here the total field is B=
e j
0I 2 r
0=
+
0I 2 r
:
FIG. P30.11
O LM 50 A 30 A k j + k jP e P y MN d y + 0.28 mi e Q 50 y = 30d y + 0.28 mi 50b y g = 30b0.28 m  y g 20 y = 30a0. 28 mf at y = 0.420 m
0 2 0I 2 r
+
(b)
At y = 0.1 m the total field is B = 4 10 7 T m A 2
0I 2 r
:
B=
F 50 A ekj + 30 A ekjI = 1.16 10 Tekj . JK GH a0.28  0.10f m 0.10 m
4
The force on the particle is F = qv B = 2 10 6 C 150 10 6 m s i 1.16 10 4 N s C m  k = 3.47 10 2 N  j . (c) We require So dB = B= B= Fe = 3.47 10 2 N + j = qE = 2 10 6 C E .
e
je
je j e e
je j
e j
e j
j
E = 1.73 10 4 j N C .
P30.12
0I d r 4 r 2
0I 4
F GH
1 6
2 a a
2

1 6
2 b b
2
0I 1 1 directed out of the paper  12 a b
FG H
IJ K
I JK
192 *P30.13
Sources of the Magnetic Field
(a)
We use equation 30.4. For the distance a from the wire to a , a = 0. 288 7L . One the field point we have tan 30 = L 2 wire contributes to the field at P B=
2
b g b I a1.732 f 1.50 I = = . L b0.288 7Lg 4
0 0
0I 0I cos 1  cos 2 = cos 30 cos 150 4 a 0.288 7L 4
ga
f
L 2 1
a P I
Each side contributes the same amount of field in the same direction, which is perpendicularly into the paper in the 1.50 0 I 4.50 0 I = . picture. So the total field is 3 L L
FIG. P30.13(a)
F GH
I JK
(b)
As we showed in part (a), one whole side of the triangle I 1.732 creates field at the center 0 . Now onehalf of one 4 a nearby side of the triangle will be half as far away from point Pb and have a geometrically similar situation. Then it I 1.732 2 0 I 1.732 = . The two halfcreates at Pb field 0 4 a 4 a 2 sides shown crosshatched in the picture create at Pb field 2 0 I 1.732 4 0 I 1.732 6 0 I = = . The rest of the 2 4 a L 4 0.288 7L triangle will contribute somewhat more field in the same direction, so we already have a proof that the field at Pb is
a
f
a
Pb
F GH
a
f IJ K
a f b g a f b g
a
f
FIG. P30.13(b)
stronger . P30.14 Apply Equation 30.4 three times: B=
B=
F I toward you + I F GH JK G 4 d H I I F d + GH d + a  cos 180JK toward you 4 a IF a + d  d a + d I H K
0I d cos 0  2 4 a d + a2
0 2 2 0 0 2 2 2 2
a d2 + a2
+
a d 2 + a2
I away from you JK
2 ad a 2 + d 2
away from you
Chapter 30
193
P30.15
Take the xdirection to the right and the ydirection up in the plane of the paper. Current 1 creates at P a field 2.00 10 T m 3.00 A I B1 = 0 = 2 a A 0.050 0 m
I1
5.00 cm P B1 B2
e
7
b
ja
g
f
13.0 cm 12.0 cm
B1 = 12.0 T downward and leftward, at angle 67.4 below the x axis. Current 2 contributes
7
B2 =
e2.00 10 T mja3.00 Af clockwise perpendicular to 12.0 cm Aa0.120 mf b ge j b B = b11.1 Tg j  b1.92 Tg j = b 13.0 Tg j ge
I2
FIG. P30.15
B 2 = 5.00 T to the right and down, at angle 22.6 Then, B = B1 + B 2 = 12.0 T  i cos 67.4 j sin 67.4 + 5.00 T i cos 22.6 j sin 22.6
j
Section 30.2 P30.16
The Magnetic Force Between Two Parallel Conductors
y I2 = 8.00 A y = 10.0 cm
Let both wires carry current in the x direction, the first at y = 0 and the second at y = 10.0 cm . 4 10 7 T m A 5.00 A 0I B= k= k 2 r 2 0.100 m
(a)
e
a
ja f
f
I1 = 5.00 A z
x
B = 1.00 10 5 T out of the page
(b) FB = I 2 B = 8.00 A 1.00 m i 1.00 10 5 T k = 8.00 10 5 N  j
FIG. P30.16(a)
a
fa
f e
j e
je j
FB = 8.00 10 5 N toward the first wire
4 10 7 T m A 8.00 A 0I k =  k = 1.60 10 5 T  k 2 r 2 0.100 m
(c)
B=
e j e a
a
ja f
f
e j e
je j je j
B = 1.60 10 5 T into the page
(d) FB = I 1 B = 5.00 A 1.00 m i 1.60 10 5 T  k = 8.00 10 5 N + j
fa
f e
je j e
FB = 8.00 10 5 N towards the second wire
194 P30.17
Sources of the Magnetic Field
By symmetry, we note that the magnetic forces on the top and bottom segments of the rectangle cancel. The net force on the vertical segments of the rectangle is (using Equation 30.11)
FG 1  1 IJ i = I I FG  a IJ i H c + a c K 2 H cac + af K e4 10 N A ja5.00 Afa10.0 Afa0.450 mf F 0.150 m I i F= GH a0.100 mfa0.250 mf JK 2 F = e 2.70 10 i j N
F = F1 + F2 =
0 I1 I 2 2
0 1 2
7
2
5
or *P30.18
F = 2.70 10 5 N toward the left .
FIG. P30.17
To attract, both currents must be to the right. The attraction is described by F = I 2 B sin 90 = I 2 So I2 =
0I 2 r
F 2 r = 320 10 6 N m 0 I1
e
F I a m GG 4 10 2N0.s5 C fm a20 Af JJ = 40.0 A je j K H
7
FIG. P30.18
Let y represent the distance of the zerofield point below the upper wire. Then B=
0I 2 r
+
0I 2 r
0=
0 20 A 40 A away + toward y 2 0.5 m  y
F GH
b
g b
ga
fIJK
20 0.5 m  y = 40 y y = 0.167 m below the upper wire *P30.19
b
g
20 0.5 m = 60 y
a
f
Carrying oppositely directed currents, wires 1 and 2 repel each other. If wire 3 were between them, it would have to repel either 1 or 2, so the force on that wire could not be zero. If wire 3 were to the right of wire 2, it would feel a larger force exerted by 2 than that exerted by 1, so the total force on 3 could not be zero. Therefore wire 3 must be to the left of both other wires as shown. It must carry downward current so that it can attract wire 2. (a) For the equilibrium of wire 3 we have F1 on 3 = F2 on 3
Wire 3
Wire 1 1.50 A d 20 cm FIG. P30.19
Wire 2
I3
4.00 A
1.5 20 cm + d = 4d
(b) For the equilibrium of wire 1,
a
f
0 1.50 A I 3 0 4 A I3 = 2 d 2 20 cm + d 30 cm d= = 12.0 cm to the left of wire 1 2.5
a
f
a
a f
f
0 I 3 1.5 A 4 A 1.5 A = 0 2 12 cm 2 20 cm
a
a
f f
a fa f a f
I3 =
12 4 A = 2.40 A down 20
We know that wire 2 must be in equilibrium because the forces on it are equal in magnitude to the forces that it exerts on wires 1 and 3, which are equal because they both balance the equalmagnitude forces that 1 exerts on 3 and that 3 exerts on 1.
Chapter 30
195
P30.20
The separation between the wires is
a = 2 6.00 cm sin 8.00 = 1.67 cm.
(a) Because the wires repel, the currents are in opposite directions . (b) Because the magnetic force acts horizontally,
a
f
I2 FB = 0 = tan 8.00 Fg 2 amg
I2 = mg 2 a
FIG. P30.20
0
tan 8.00 so I = 67.8 A .
Section 30.3 P30.21
Ampre's Law
Each wire is distant from P by
a0.200 mf cos 45.0 = 0.141 m.
Each wire produces a field at P of equal magnitude: 2.00 10 7 T m A 5.00 A 0I = = 7.07 T . BA = 2 a 0.141 m
e
a
f
ja
f
Carrying currents into the page, A produces at P a field of 7.07 T to the left and down at 135, while B creates a field to the right and down at 45. Carrying currents toward you, C produces a field downward and to the right at 45, while D's contribution is downward and to the left. The total field is then 4 7.07 T sin 45.0 = 20.0 T toward the bottom of the page P30.22 Let the current I be to the right. It creates a field B =
FIG. P30.21
b
g
0I at the proton's location. And we have a 2 d balance between the weight of the proton and the magnetic force
mg  j + qv  i
e j e j
e
0I k = 0 at a distance d from the wire 2 d
ej
1.60 10 19 C 2.30 10 4 m s 4 10 7 T m A 1.20 10 6 A qv 0 I d= = = 5.40 cm 2 mg 2 1.67 10 27 kg 9.80 m s 2
je
e
je
je
j
je
j
196 P30.23
Sources of the Magnetic Field
0Ia , where I a is the net current 2 ra through the area of the circle of radius ra . In this case, I a = 1.00 A out of the page (the current in the inner conductor), so 4 10 7 T m A 1.00 A = 200 T toward top of page . Ba = 2 1.00 10 3 m I Similarly at point b : Bb = 0 b , where I b is the net current through the area of the circle having 2 rb radius rb .
From Ampere's law, the magnetic field at point a is given by Ba =
e
e
ja
j
f
Taking out of the page as positive, I b = 1.00 A  3.00 A = 2.00 A , or I b = 2.00 A into the page. Therefore, 4 10 7 T m A 2.00 A = 133 T toward bottom of page . Bb = 2 3.00 10 3 m
e
e
ja
j
f
P30.24
(a)
In B =
0I , the field will be onetenth as large at a tentimes larger distance: 400 cm 2 r
(b) (c)
B=
4 10 7 T m 2.00 A 0I I k + 0  k so B = 2 r1 2 r2 2 A
e j IJ K
a
f FG 1  1 IJ = H 0.398 5 m 0.401 5 m K
7.50 nT
Call r the distance from cord center to field point and 2d = 3.00 mm the distance between conductors. I 1 I 2d 1 B= 0  = 0 2 2 r  d r + d 2 r  d 2 3.00 10 3 m 10 7 so r = 1.26 m 7.50 10 T = 2.00 10 T m A 2.00 A 2 r  2.25 10 6 m 2 The field of the twoconductor cord is weak to start with and falls off rapidly with distance.
FG H
e
ja
f e
j
(d)
The cable creates zero field at exterior points, since a loop in Ampre's law encloses zero total current. Shall we sell coaxialcable power cords to people who worry about biological damage from weak magnetic fields?
P30.25
(a)
One wire feels force due to the field of the other ninetynine. B=
7 2 0 I 0 r 4 10 T m A 99 2.00 A 0.200 10 m = = 3.17 10 3 T 2 2 2 R 2 2 0.500 10 m
e
ja fb
e
ge j
j
This field points tangent to a circle of radius 0.200 cm and exerts force F = I B toward the center of the bundle, on the single hundredth wire: F FB (b) = IB sin = 2.00 A 3.17 10 3 T sin 90 = 6.34 mN m = 6.34 10 3 N m inward FIG. P30.25
a
fe
j
B r , so B is greatest at the outside of the bundle. Since each wire carries the same current, F is greatest at the outer surface .
Chapter 30
197
P30.26
(a)
Binner
4 10 7 T m A 900 14.0 10 3 A 0 NI = = = 3.60 T 2 r 2 0.700 m 2 10 7 0 NI = = 2 r
e
(b) *P30.27
Bouter
e
ja fe j a f T m A ja900fe14.0 10 A j =
3
1.30 m
1.94 T
We assume the current is vertically upward. (a) Consider a circle of radius r slightly less than R. It encloses no current so from we conclude that the magnetic field is zero . (b) Now let the r be barely larger than R. Ampere's law becomes B 2 R = 0 I , so B=
z
B ds = 0 I inside
B 2 r = 0
b g
b
g
0I . 2 R
FIG. P30.27(a) tangent to the wall of the cylinder in a counterclockwise sense .
The field's direction is (c)
Consider a strip of the wall of width dx and length . Its width is so small compared to 2 R that the field at its location would be essentially unchanged if the current in the strip were turned off. Idx The current it carries is I s = up. 2 R The force on it is 0I I 2 dx Idx F = Is B = up into page = 0 2 2 radially inward . 2 R 2 R 4 R
F GH
I JK
FIG. P30.27(c)
The pressure on the strip and everywhere on the cylinder is P=
I 2 dx F = 0 2 = A 4 2 R dx
b2 Rg
I=
0I 2
2
inward .
The pinch effect makes an effective demonstration when an aluminum can crushes itself as it carries a large current along its length. P30.28 P30.29 From B d = 0 I ,
z
2 rB
0
=
2 1.00 10 3 0.100 4 10
7
e
ja
f=
500 A .
Use Ampre's law, B ds = 0 I . For current density J, this becomes
z
B ds = 0 J dA .
z
z
(a)
For r1 < R , this gives
B 2 r1 = 0
r1 0
za
0
br 2 rdr and FIG. P30.29
fb
g
0 br12 B= for r1 < R or inside the cylinder . 3
b
g
(b)
When r2 > R , Ampre's law yields or B =
b2 r gB = z abr fb2 rdr g = 23bR
R 0 2 0
3
,
0 bR 3 for r2 > R or outside the cylinder . 3r2
b
g
198 P30.30
Sources of the Magnetic Field
(a) (b)
See Figure (a) to the right. At a point on the z axis, the contribution from each wire has 0I magnitude B = and is perpendicular to the line 2 a 2 + z 2 from this point to the wire as shown in Figure (b). Combining (Currents are into the paper) fields, the vertical components cancel while the horizontal Figure (a) components add, yielding By = 2
F GH 2
0I
a +z
2 2
sin =
I JK
2
0I a +z
2 2
F GH
z a +z
2 2
I = Iz JK ea + z j
0 2 2 2
The condition for a maximum is: dBy dz =
a f + I = 0 , or I ea ea ea + z j ea + z j
 0 Iz 2 z
2 2 2 0 0 2
2 2
j =0 +z j
 z2
Figure (b) FIG. P30.30
Thus, along the z axis, the field is a maximum at d = a .
Section 30.4 P30.31 *P30.32
The Magnetic Field of a Solenoid N I so I = 1.00 10 4 T 0.400 m B = = 31.8 mA 0 n 4 10 7 T m A 1 000
B = 0
e
e
j
j
Let the axis of the solenoid lie along the yaxis from y = 0 to y = . We will determine the field at y = a . This point will be inside the solenoid if 0 < a < and outside if a < 0 or a > . We think of solenoid as formed of rings, each of thickness dy. Now I is the symbol for the current in each turn of N N wire and the number of turns per length is dy and . So the number of turns in the ring is the current in the ring is I ring = I by one ring: Bring =
FG N IJ dy . Now we use the result of Example 30.3 for the field created H K
FG IJ H K
FG IJ H K
0 I ring R 2
2 x2 + R2
e
j
32
where x is the name of the distance from the center of the ring, at location y, to the field point x = a  y . Each ring creates field in the same direction, along our yaxis, so the whole field of the solenoid is 0 I ring R 2 0 I N dyR 2 dy INR 2 = = 0 B = Bring = . 3 2 3 2 2 2 32 2 2 2 all rings 0 2 ay 0 2 ay 2 x +R + R2 + R2
e
j
z eb
b g g j
z eb
g
j
To perform the integral we change variables to u = a  y . B=
0 INR 2 2
a a
ze
 du
u2 + R2
j
32
and then use the table of integrals in the appendix: continued on next page
Chapter 30
199
(a)
INR 2 u B= 0 2 2 R u2 + R2
If
a
=
a
0 IN 2
LM MMN
a a2 + R2

aa  f
a
2
+ R2
OP PPQ
(b)
is much larger than R and a = 0,
we have B
0 IN IN  = 0 . 0 2 2 2
LM NM
OP QP
This is just half the magnitude of the field deep within the solenoid. We would get the same result by substituting a = to describe the other end. P30.33 The field produced by the solenoid in its interior is given by B = 0 nI  i = 4 10 7 T m A B =  5.65 10 2 T i The force exerted on side AB of the square current loop is
e j e
jFGH 1030.0m IJK a15.0 Afe ij
2 2
e
j
bF g
bF g
B AB
= IL B = 0. 200 A = 2.26 10 4 N k
a
f e2.00 10
m j 5.65 10 2 T  i
j e
je j
B AB
e
j
Similarly, each side of the square loop experiences a force, lying in the plane of the loop, of 226 N directed away from the center . From the above result, it is seen that the net torque exerted on the square loop by the field of the solenoid should be zero. More formally, the magnetic dipole moment of the square loop is given by
j e ij = 80.0 A m i The torque exerted on the loop is then = B = e 80.0 A m i j e 5.65 10
= IA = 0.200 A 2.00 10 2 m
2 2 2
a
fe
FIG. P30.33
2
Ti = 0
j
Section 30.5 P30.34 (a) (b)
Magnetic Flux
b g b g
B flat
= B A = B R 2 cos 180  =  B R 2 cos
a
f
The net flux out of the closed surface is zero: B
B curved
b g
flat
+ B
b g
curved
= 0.
= B R 2 cos
P30.35
(a)
B = B dA = B A = 5 i + 4 j + 3k T 2.50 10 2 m i B = 3.12 10 3 T m 2 = 3.12 10 3 Wb = 3.12 mWb
z
e
j e
j
2
(b)
b g
B total
= B dA = 0 for any closed surface (Gauss's law for magnetism)
z
200 P30.36
Sources of the Magnetic Field
(a)
B = B A = BA where A is the crosssectional area of the solenoid. B =
(b)
B B
FG NI IJ e r j = 7.40 Wb H K F NI IJ er  r j = B A = BA = G H K L e4 10 T m Aja300fa12.0 Af OP =M PQ a8.00f  a4.00f e10 MN a0.300 mf
0 2 0 2 2 2 1 7 2 2
3
m
j
2
= 2.27 Wb
Section 30.6
Gauss's Law in Magnetism
No problems in this section
Section 30.7 P30.37 (a)
Displacement Current and the General Form of Ampre's Law 0.100 A d E dQ dt I = = = = 11.3 10 9 V m s 0 0 8.85 10 12 C 2 N m 2 dt I d =0 d E = I = 0.100 A dt
a
f
(b)
P30.38
dQ dt d E d I = = EA = 0 0 dt dt
a f
(a)
dE I = = 7.19 10 11 V m s dt 0 A
(b)
z
B ds =0 0
B=
2 0 Ir 0 0.200 5.00 10 = = 2.00 10 7 T 2 2A 2 0.100
a
d E d Q r 2 so 2 rB =0 0 dt dt 0 A
fe a f
j
LM N
OP Q
Section 30.8 P30.39 (a)
Magnetism in Matter I= ev 2 r
= IA =
F ev I r GH 2 r JK
2
= 9.27 10 24 A m 2
The Bohr model predicts the correct magnetic moment. However, the "planetary model" is seriously deficient in other regards. (b) Because the electron is (), its [conventional] current is clockwise, as seen from above, and points downward . FIG. P30.39
Chapter 30
P30.40 P30.41
B = nI =
F N I I so I = b2 r gB = 2 a0.100 mfa1.30 Tf = GH 2 r JK N 5 000e 4 10 Wb A mja 470f
7
201
277 mA
Assuming a uniform B inside the toroid is equivalent to assuming NI r << R ; then B0 0 as for a tightly wound solenoid. 2 R 630 3.00 B0 = 0 = 0.001 89 T 2 0.200
a fa f a f a
With the steel, B = m B0 = 1 + B0 = 101 0.001 89 T C= 4.00 K 10.0% 8.00 10 27 TM = 5.00 T B
b
g
P30.42
fa
fe
g B = 0.191 T atoms m ja5.00fe9.27 10 J T j =
3 24 2
a fb
FIG. P30.41 2.97 10 4 KJ T m3
2
P30.43 P30.44
B = 0 H + M so H =
a
f
B
0
 M = 2.62 10 6 A m
In B = 0 H + M we have 2.00 T = 0 M . But also M = xn B . Then B = 0 B xn where n is the number of atoms per volume and x is the number of electrons per atom contributing. 2.00 T B = = 2.02 . x= Then 0 Bn 8.50 10 28 m 3 9.27 10 24 N m T 4 10 7 T m A
a
f
e
je
je
j
P30.45
(a)
Comparing Equations 30.29 and 30.30, we see that the applied field is described by B C B0 = 0 H . Then Eq. 30.35 becomes M = C 0 = 0 H , and the definition of susceptibility T T M C (Eq. 30.32) is = = 0 . H T C= 2.70 10 4 300 K T K A = = 6. 45 10 4 7 0 Tm 4 10 T m A
(b)
e
ja
f
Section 30.9 P30.46 (a) (b)
The Magnetic Field of the Earth Bh = Bcoil = 4 10 7 5.00 0.600 0 NI = = 12.6 T 2R 0.300 Bh 12.6 T = = 56.0 T sin sin 13.0
e
ja fa
f
Bh = B sin B =
P30.47
(a)
Number of unpaired electrons =
FIG. P30.46 8.00 10 22 A m 2 = 8.63 10 45 . 9.27 10 24 A m 2 Each iron atom has two unpaired electrons, so the number of iron atoms required is 1 8.63 10 45 . 2
e
j
(b)
Mass =
e4.31 10 atomsje7 900 kg m j = e8.50 10 atoms m j
45 3 28 3
4.01 10 20 kg
202
Sources of the Magnetic Field
Additional Problems P30.48 B= so P30.49
2 R2 + R
e
0 IR 2
2 3 2
j
I = 50 2 2R
I=
2 5 2 BR
0
=
2 5 2 7.00 10 5 T 6.37 10 6 m
e
e4 10
je
7
Tm A
j
j
I = 2.01 10 9 A toward the west
Consider a longitudinal filament of the strip of width dr as shown in the sketch. The contribution to the field at point P due to the current dI in the element dr is dB = where B = dB =
0 dI 2 r
dI = I
b+w b
FG dr IJ H wK FG H IJ K
FIG. P30.49
z z
e
0 Idr 0I w k= k . ln 1 + b 2 wr 2 w
P30.50
200 W = 17 A 12 V current going through the switch 60 cm from the compass. Suppose the dashboard contains little iron, so 0 . Model the current as straight. Then, Suppose you have two 100W headlights running from a 12V battery, with the whole B= 4 10 7 17 0I = ~ 10 5 T . 2 r 2 0.6
j a f
If the local geomagnetic field is 5 10 5 T , this is ~ 10 1 times as large, enough to affect the compass noticeably. P30.51 We find the total number of turns: N= B = B=
0 NI
3
b0.030 0 Tga0.100 mf A = 2.39 10 I e 4 10 T mja1.00 A f F 10.0 cm I = 200 closely wound turns Each layer contains G H 0.050 0 cm JK F 2.39 10 I = 12 layers . so she needs GH 200 JK
0 7 3
The inner diameter of the innermost layer is 10.0 mm. The outer diameter of the outermost layer is 10.0 mm + 2 12 0.500 mm = 22.0 mm . The average diameter is 16.0 mm, so the total length of wire is
e2.39 10 j e16.0 10
3
3
m = 120 m .
j
Chapter 30
203 I1
*P30.52
At a point at distance x from the left end of the bar, current 0I2 to the left and I 2 creates magnetic field B = 2 h 2 + x 2 x above the horizontal at angle where tan = . This field h exerts force on an element of the rod of length dx dF = I 1 B = I 1 = dF =
x h
B
I2
FIG. P30.52
0 I 2 dx
2 h 2 + x 2 0 I 1 I 2 dx x h2 + x 2 k je j
right hand rule
sin
2 h 2 + x 2
into the page
0 I 1 I 2 xdx
2 h 2 + x 2
e
The whole force is the sum of the forces on all of the elements of the bar: F=
I I ek j I I ek j ekj = 4 z h2 xdx = 4 lneh + x j z 2 eh + x j +x I I e k j 10 N a100 A fa 200 A fe  k j L a0.5 cmf + a10 cmf = lne h + j  ln h = ln M 4 A MN a0.5 cmf = 2 10 Ne  k j ln 401 = 1.20 10 Ne  k j 0 I 1 I 2 xdx
2 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 x =0 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 1 2 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
2
OP PQ
P30.53
On the axis of a current loop, the magnetic field is given by where in this case I = of B= q
B=
2 x2 + R2
e
0 IR 2
j
32
b2 g . The magnetic field is directed away from the center, with a magnitude a fa f e10.0 10 j = 4 b0.050 0g + a0.100f
2 6 2 2 32
4 x + R
e
0 R 2 q
2
2 32
j
=
0 20.0 0.100
1.43 10 10 T .
P30.54
On the axis of a current loop, the magnetic field is given by q
B=
2 x2 + R2
e
0 IR 2
j
32
where in this case I = R . 2
b 2 g
.
Therefore,
B=
4 x 2 + R 2
e
0 R 2 q
j
3 2
when x =
then
B=
0 R 2 q
4
eRj
5 4
2 32
=
0 q . 2.5 5R
204 P30.55
Sources of the Magnetic Field
(a)
Use equation 30.7 twice:
Bx =
2 x2 + R2
e
0 IR 2
j
3 2
If each coil has N turns, the field is just N times larger. B = Bx1 + Bx 2 N 0 IR 2 = 2
B=
N 0 IR 2
2
LM MM ex N
2
OP 1 1 + +R j e2R + x  2xRj PPQ
2 3 2 2 2 32
LM MM x Ne
1
2
+ R2
j
32
+
a R  xf
1
2
+ R2
32
OP PP Q
FIG. P30.55
(b)
5 2 5 2 dB N 0 IR 2 3 3 =  2x x 2 + R 2  2 R 2 + x 2  2 xR 2x  2R dx 2 2 2 R dB Substituting x = and canceling terms, =0 . dx 2 5 2 7 2 d 2 B 3 N 0 IR 2 =  5x 2 x 2 + R2 + 2 R 2 + x 2  2 xR x2 + R2 2 2 dx
LM a fe N LMe N
j
e
j a
fOPQ
5 2
j
e
j
e
j
5 x  R
a
f e2 R
2
2
+ x 2  2 xR
Again substituting x = P30.56
d 2B R =0 . and canceling terms, 2 dx 2
j OPQ
7 2
"Helmholtz pair" separation distance = radius B=
2 R2
b g
2 0 IR 2
2
+ R2
32
=
0 IR 2
1 4
+1
3 2
R
3
=
0I for 1 turn. 1.40 R
For N turns in each coil, B = *P30.57
4 10 7 100 10.0 0 NI = = 1.80 10 3 T . 1.40 R 1.40 0.500
e
j a f a f
Consider first a solid cylindrical rod of radius R carrying current toward you, uniformly distributed over its crosssectional area. To find the field at distance r from its center we consider a circular loop of radius r:
k P r2 B2 r1 a k FIG. P30.57
0 Jr J B= 0 kr 2 2 Now the total field at P inside the saddle coils is the field due to a solid rod carrying current toward you, centered at the head of vector a, plus the field of a solid rod centered at the tail of vector a carrying current away from you. J J B1 + B 2 = 0 k r1 + 0  k r2 2 2 Now note a + r1 = r2
B 2 r = 0 r 2 J B=
z
B ds = 0 I inside
B1
e j
b
B1 + B 2 =
0 J J J 0 Ja k r1  0 k a + r1 = 0 a k = down in the diagram . 2 2 2 2
g
Chapter 30
205
*
P30.58
From example 30.6, the upper sheet creates field J J B = 0 s k above it and 0 s  k below it. Consider a 2 2 patch of the sheet of width w parallel to the z axis and length d parallel to the x axis. The charge on it wd passes z q wdv d a point in time , so the current it constitutes is = v t d wv = v . Then the and the linear current density is J s = w magnitude of the magnetic field created by the upper sheet 1 is 0 v . Similarly, the lower sheet in its motion toward 2 the right constitutes current toward the left. It creates 1 1 magnetic field 0 v  k above it and 0 vk below it. 2 2
e j
y x
w
+ d
+
+
+
FIG. P30.58
e j
(b) (a) (c)
Above both sheets and below both, their equalmagnitude fields add to zero . Between the plates, their fields add to 0 v  k = 0 v away from you horizontally. The upper plate exerts no force on itself. The field of the lower plate, a force on the current in the w by dsection, given by I B = wvd i 1 1 0 v  k = 0 2 v 2 wd j . 2 2 1 0 v k will exert 2
e j
e j
e j
The force per area is
1 0 2 v 2 wd 1 0 2 v 2 up . j= 2 2 wd
(d)
The electrical force on our section of the upper plate is qE lower = w
j = 2 0 w 2 2 1 down = down. To have 0 2 v 2 = The electrical force per area is 2 2 0 w 2 0 require
e j
2 we 2 0
w 2 j . 2 0
e j
v=
1
0 0
= 4 10
1
7
bTm AgbN TAmg8.85 10 eC
12
2
Nm
2
jbAs Cg
2
= 3.00 10 8 m s .
This is the speed of light, not a possible speed for a metal plate.
206 P30.59
Sources of the Magnetic Field
Model the two wires as straight parallel wires (!) (a) FB =
0I 2 (Equation 30.12) 2 a
FB =
e4 10 ja140f a2 fa0.100f 2 e1.00 10 j
7 2 3
= 2.46 N upward (b) a loop = 2.46 N  m loop g m loop = 107 m s 2 upward
FIG. P30.59 P30.60 (a) In dB =
0 Ids r , the moving charge constitutes a bit of current as in I = nqvA . For a 4 r 2 0 nqA ds v r . Next, positive charge the direction of ds is the direction of v, so dB = 4 r 2 A ds is the volume occupied by the moving charge, and nA ds = 1 for just one charge. Then,
a f
a f
a f
B=
4 r 2
0
qv r .
7
(b)
B=
e4 10
T m A 1.60 10 19 C 2.00 10 7 m s 4 1.00 10
je
je
e
3 2
j
j sin 90.0 =
j
3.20 10 13 T
(c)
FB = q v B = 1.60 10 19 C 2.00 10 7 m s 3.20 10 13 T sin 90.0
e
je
je
FB = 1.02 10 24 N directed away from the first proton
k e q1 q 2 r2
(d)
Fe = qE =
e8.99 10 =
9
N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C
je
j
2
e1.00 10 j
3 2
Fe = 2.30 10 22 N directed away from the first proton
Both forces act together. The electrical force is stronger by two orders of magnitude. It is productive to think about how it would look to an observer in a reference frame moving along with one proton or the other.
Chapter 30
207
P30.61
(a)
4 10 7 T m A 24.0 A 0I = = 2.74 10 4 T B= 2 r 2 0.017 5 m
e
b
ja g
f
(b)
At point C, conductor AB produces a field produces a field of 1 2.74 10 4 T  j , 2
e
je j
1 2.74 10 4 T  j , 2
e
je j
conductor DE
BD produces no field, and AE produces
negligible field. The total field at C is 2.74 10 4 T  j . (c) FB = I B = 24.0 A 0.035 0 mk 5 2.74 10 4 T  j =
e j
a
fe
j e
je j e1.15 10
3
N i
j
(d) (e)
a=
F = e1.15 10
m 3.0 10
3
3
j = e0.384 m s ji kg
N i
2
The bar is already so far from AE that it moves through nearly constant magnetic field. The force acting on the bar is constant, and therefore the bar's acceleration is constant . v 2 = vi2 + 2 ax = 0 + 2 0.384 m s 2 1.30 m , so v f = f
(f) *P30.62
e
ja
f
b0.999 m sgi
B I
Each turn creates field at the center
0I 1 1 1 4 10 7 TmI 1 1 1 1 + +...+ = + +...+ 2 R1 R 2 R50 2A 5.05 5.15 9.95 10 2 m
= 0 I 50 m 6.93 = 347 0 I m P30.63 At equilibrium, FB = 2 a m g 0 I A I B mg = or I B = 0IA 2 a
FG H
IJ K
0I . Together they create field 2R
b
g
FG H
IJ K
FIG. P30.62
b g
IB = P30.64 (a)
2 0.025 0 m 0.010 0 kg m 9.80 m s 2
b
e4 10
gb
7
T m A 150 A
ja
ge
f
j=
81.7 A
The magnetic field due to an infinite sheet of current (or the magnetic field at points near a large sheet of current) is given by J I B = 0 s . The current density J s = and in this case the 2 equivalent current of the moving charged belt is I= dq d dx x = v; v = . = dt dt dt
b g
v Therefore, J s = v and B = 0 . 2
(b)
FIG. P30.64
If the sheet is positively charged and moving in the direction shown, the magnetic field is out of the page, parallel to the roller axes .
208 P30.65
Sources of the Magnetic Field
The central wire creates field B =
0 I1 counterclockwise. The curved portions of the loop feels no 2 R force since B = 0 there. The straight portions both feel I B forces to the right, amounting to
FB = I 2 2L 2 rB
0 I1 0 I1 I 2 L = to the right . R 2 R
= 2 9.00 10 3 1.50 10 8
7
P30.66
675 A 0 4 10 Flow of positive current is downward or negative charge flows upward . By symmetry of the arrangement, the magnitude of the net magnetic field at point P is B = 8B0 x where B0 is the contribution to the field due to L current in an edge length equal to . In order to calculate B0 , we use the 2 BiotSavart law and consider the plane of the square to be the yzplane with point P on the xaxis. The contribution to the magnetic field at point P due to a current element of length dz and located a distance z along the axis is given by Equation 30.3. I d r B0 = 0 . 4 r2 From the figure we see that
I=
e
je
j=
P30.67
z
FIG. P30.67
r = x 2 + L2 4 + z 2 and d r = dz sin = dz
e j
e L 4j + x e L 4j + x + z
2 2 2 2
2
.
By symmetry all components of the field B at P cancel except the components along x (perpendicular to the plane of the square); and L2 B0 x = B0 cos where cos = . L2 4 + x 2
e j
Therefore, B0 x =
0I 4
L2 0
z
sin cos dz and B = 8B0 x . r2
Using the expressions given above for sin cos , and r, we find B= 2 x 2 + L2 4
e e jj
0 IL2
x 2 + L2 2
e j
.
P30.68
(a)
From Equation 30.9, the magnetic field produced by one loop at the center of the second 2 IR 2 0 I R = 0 3 where the magnetic moment of either loop loop is given by B = 0 3 = 3 2x 2 x 2 x
e
j
is = I R 2 . Therefore,
e
j
dB = 0 Fx = dx 2
FG H
IJ FG 3 IJ = 3 e R Ij K H x K 2 x
0 2 4 4
2
=
3 0 I 2 R 4 . 2 x4
(b)
7 3 3 0 I 2 R 4 3 4 10 T m A 10.0 A 5.00 10 m = Fx = 4 2 2 x4 5.00 10 2 m
e
ja
e
fe j
2
j
4
= 5.92 10 8 N
Chapter 30
209
P30.69
There is no contribution from the straight portion of the wire since ds r = 0 . For the field of the spiral, dB = B= B=
a f
0 I ds r 4 r2
b
g
0 I 2 ds sin r 0 I 2 = 4 = 0 4 = 0 r2 0 I 2 2 I r dr =  0 r 1 4 = 0 4
z z
ze
2
2 dr sin
jLMN FGH 34 IJK OPQ r1
2
e j
=0
I Substitute r = e : B =  0 e  4
P30.70 (a) B = B0 + 0 M M= B  B0
2 0
I 0I 1  e 2 =  0 e 2  e 0 = 4 4
FIG. P30.69
e
j
out of the page.
0
and M =
B  B0
0
Assuming that B and B0 are parallel, this B  B0 becomes M = .
0
The magnetization curve gives a plot of M versus B0 . (b) The second graph is a plot of the relative B permeability as a function of the applied B0 field B0 .
Relative Permeability
8 000
FG IJ H K
B/B0
4 000 0
0.0
1.0
B0 (mT)
2.0
3.0
FIG. P30.70
210 P30.71
Sources of the Magnetic Field
Consider the sphere as being built up of little rings of radius r, centered on the rotation axis. The contribution to the field from each ring is dB = 2 x +r
dr
r
e
0 r 2 dI
2
2 32
dQ = dV = 2 rdr dx dB =
b
j
where dI =
dQ dQ = t 2
dx x R
ga f b4 3g R j
Q
3
0 r 3 drdx
2 x2 + r
+R
e
2 3 2
j
where =
B=
x = R
z z
R2
R2  x2 r =0
0 r 3 drdx 32 2 x2 + r 2
e
FIG. P30.71
Let v = r 2 + x 2 , dv = 2rdr , and r 2 = v  x 2 B=
+R
OP PQ 1 B= z LMN2v + e2x jv OPQdx = 4 z LMMN2cR  x h + 2x FGH R  1x IJK OPPQdx 4 L x B= z MN2 R  4 x + 2ROPQdx = 2 4 z LMN2 xR  4x + 2ROPQdx 4 I 2 F 2 R B= GH 3 R  4R + 2 R JK = R 4 2 3
x = R v = x 2 0
z z
0
2 0 v  x dv dx = 0 3 2 2 4 2v
2 12 R
e
j
R
x = R v = x 2 0
z
0
LM MN z
R2
v
1 2
dv  x
2
R2
v= x2
z
v 3 2 dv dx
2
R
2
2 1 2 R
R
x = R R
x2
x2
x = R
2
0
R
2
R
0
3
2
2
0
2
P30.72
Consider the sphere as being built up of little rings of radius r, centered on the rotation axis. The current associated with each rotating ring of charge is dQ 2 rdr dx . dI = = t 2
dr
r
b
ga f
dx x R
The magnetic moment contributed by this ring is d = A dI = r 2
a f
2
2 rdr dx = r 3 drdx
b
ga f
= = =
+R
x = R
+ R 4 4 2R 3 2R5 + R  2 R 2 x 2 + x 4 dx = R 2R  2R 2 4 x = R 4 3 5
z z ze
FG H
LM MN
R2  x 2 3 r =0
r dr dx =
OP PQ
+R x = R
z
FH
R x 4
2
2
IK
4
FIG. P30.72 dx =
+R x = R
z
eR
2
x 4
2 2
j
dx
j
5 R 5 16 4 2 4R 5 = = R 2 + 4 3 5 4 15 15
IJ K
FG IJ H K
LM a f NM
F GH
I JK
OP QP
up
Chapter 30
211
P30.73
Note that the current I exists in the conductor with a I current density J = , where A a2 a2 a2  = . A = a2  4 4 2 2I . Therefore, J = a2 To find the field at either point P1 or P2 , find Bs which would exist if the conductor were solid, using Ampre's law. Next, find B1 and B2 that would be due to the a conductors of radius that could occupy the void where 2 the holes exist. Then use the superposition principle and subtract the field that would be due to the part of the conductor where the holes exist from the field of the solid conductor. (a)
P1 Bs
B1 B2
LM N
OP Q
r Bs a/2 a/2 r + (a 2)
2 2
r
P2  B1
 B2
FIG. P30.73
b g . = At point P , B = 2 r 2 dr + b a 2gi J a L 1 MM r  4 r 1a 2  4 r 1a 2 OPP B=B B B = 2 N d  b gi d + b gi Q L O I L 2r  a O a 2 I f M 4r  a  2 r P = B= M P directed to the left r N 4r  a Q 2 M 4r er  e a 4jj P NM QP
0 J a2
2 1 s 1
e j, B
b g , and B = 2 dr  b a 2gi
0 J a 2
2 2 2
2
0 J a 2
2
s
1
2
0
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
2
(b)
At point P2 , Bs =
0 J a2
2 r
e j and B = B =
1 2
0 J a 2
2 r
2
b g + b a 2g
2 2 2
2
.
The horizontal components of B1 and B2 cancel while their vertical components add. B = Bs  B1 cos  B2 cos =
2
e j  2FG J a 4 IJ GG 2 r + ea 4j JJ 2 r H K OP a2I f L 2r O J e a j L MM1  r B= P = 2 r MN1  4r + a PQ 2 r 2er + e a 4jj P MN Q I L 2r + a O = M P directed toward the top of the page r N 4r + a Q
0 J a2
0 2 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 0 2 2 2 2
r r + a2 4
2
e j
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P30.2 P30.4 P30.6 20.0 T 200 nT P30.8 P30.10 see the solution
FG 1 + 1 IJ I into the page H K 2R
0
FG 1 + 1 IJ I into the page H 4 K 2r
0
212 P30.12
Sources of the Magnetic Field
P30.14 P30.16
FG IJ H K IF a + d  d H
0 2 2 2
0I 1 1 out of the page  12 a b
a2 + d2
2
P30.44 P30.46 P30.48 P30.50
2.02 (a) 12.6 T ; (b) 56.0 T 2.01 GA west ~ 10 5 T , enough to affect the compass noticeably 12.0 mN k
IK
2 ad a + d
into the page
(a) 10.0 T ; (b) 80.0 N toward wire 1; (c) 16.0 T ; (d) 80.0 N toward wire 2 Parallel to the wires and 0.167 m below the upper wire (a) opposite; (b) 67.8 A 5.40 cm (a) 400 cm ; (b) 7.50 nT ; (c) 1.26 m; (d) zero (a) 3.60 T ; (b) 1.94 T 500 A (a) see the solution; (b) d = a
P30.52 P30.54 P30.56 P30.58
P30.18
e j
0 q
2.5 5R 1.80 mT (a) 0 v horizontally away from you; 1 (b) 0; (c) 0 2 v 2 up; (d) 3.00 10 8 m s 2 (a) see the solution; (b) 3.20 10 13 T; (c) 1.02 10 24 N away from the first proton; (d) 2.30 10 22 N away from the first proton 347 0 I m perpendicular to the coil (a) 1 0 v ; (b) out of the page, 2 parallel to the roller axes
P30.20 P30.22 P30.24 P30.26 P30.28 P30.30
P30.60
P30.32
(a)
0 IN 2
(b) see the solution P30.34 P30.36 P30.38 P30.40 P30.42 (a) B R 2 cos ; (b) B R 2 cos (a) 7.40 Wb ; (b) 2.27 Wb (a) 7.19 10 11 V m s ; (b) 200 nT 277 mA 2.97 10 4 KJ T m3
2
LM MMN
a a2 + R2

aa  f
a
2
+ R2
OP PPQ ;
P30.62 P30.64
P30.66 P30.68 P30.70 P30.72
675 A downward (a) see the solution; (b) 59.2 nN see the solution 4 R 5 upward 15
31
Faraday's Law
CHAPTER OUTLINE
31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4 31.5 31.6 31.7 Faraday's Law of Induction Motional emf Lenz's Law Induced emf and Electric Fields Generators and Motors Eddy Currents Maxwell's Equations
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q31.1 Magnetic flux measures the "flow" of the magnetic field through a given area of a loopeven though the field does not actually flow. By changing the size of the loop, or the orientation of the loop and the field, one can change the magnetic flux through the loop, but the magnetic field will not change. The magnetic flux is B = BA cos . Therefore the flux is maximum when B is perpendicular to the loop of wire and zero when there is no component of magnetic field perpendicular to the loop. The flux is zero when the loop is turned so that the field lies in the plane of its area. The force on positive charges in the bar is F = q v B . If the bar is moving to the left, positive charge will move downward and accumulate at the bottom end of the bar, so that an electric field will be established upward.
Q31.2
Q31.3
a
f
Q31.4 Q31.5
No. The magnetic force acts within the bar, but has no influence on the forward motion of the bar. By the magnetic force law F = q v B : the positive charges in the moving bar will flow downward and therefore clockwise in the circuit. If the bar is moving to the left, the positive charge in the bar will flow upward and therefore counterclockwise in the circuit. We ignore mechanical friction between the bar and the rails. Moving the conducting bar through the magnetic field will force charges to move around the circuit to constitute clockwise current. The downward current in the bar feels a magnetic force to the left. Then a counterbalancing applied force to the right is required to maintain the motion. A current could be set up in the bracelet by moving the bracelet through the magnetic field, or if the field rapidly changed. Moving a magnet inside the hole of the doughnutshaped toroid will not change the magnetic flux through any turn of wire in the toroid, and thus not induce any current.
a
f
Q31.6
Q31.7 Q31.8
213
214 Q31.9
Faraday's Law
As water falls, it gains speed and kinetic energy. It then pushes against turbine blades, transferring its energy to the rotor coils of a large AC generator. The rotor of the generator turns within a strong magnetic field. Because the rotor is spinning, the magnetic flux through its turns changes in time as Nd B . This induced emf is the B = BA cos t . Generated in the rotor is an induced emf of = dt voltage driving the current in our electric power lines. Yes. Eddy currents will be induced around the circumference of the copper tube so as to fight the changing magnetic flux by the falling magnet. If a bar magnet is dropped with its north pole downwards, a ring of counterclockwise current will surround its approaching bottom end and a ring of clockwise current will surround the receding south pole at its top end. The magnetic fields created by these loops of current will exert forces on the magnet to slow the fall of the magnet quite significantly. Some of the original gravitational energy of the magnet will appear as internal energy in the walls of the tube. Yes. The induced eddy currents on the surface of the aluminum will slow the descent of the aluminum. It may fall very slowly. The maximum induced emf will increase, increasing the terminal voltage of the generator. The increasing counterclockwise current in the solenoid coil produces an upward magnetic field that increases rapidly. The increasing upward flux of this field through the ring induces an emf to produce clockwise current in the ring. The magnetic field of the solenoid has a radially outward component at each point on the ring. This field component exerts upward force on the current in the ring there. The whole ring feels a total upward force larger than its weight.
Q31.10
Q31.11 Q31.12 Q31.13
FIG. Q31.13 Q31.14 Oscillating current in the solenoid produces an alwayschanging magnetic field. Vertical flux through the ring, alternately increasing and decreasing, produces current in it with a direction that is alternately clockwise and counterclockwise. The current through the ring's resistance produces internal energy at the rate I 2 R . (a) The south pole of the magnet produces an upward magnetic field that increases as the magnet approaches. The loop opposes change by making its own downward magnetic field; it carries current clockwise, which goes to the left through the resistor. The north pole of the magnet produces an upward magnetic field. The loop sees decreasing upward flux as the magnet falls away, and tries to make an upward magnetic field of its own by carrying current counterclockwise, to the right in the resistor.
Q31.15
(b)
Chapter 31
215
Q31.16
(a)
The battery makes counterclockwise current I 1 in the primary coil, so its magnetic field B1 is to the right and increasing just after the switch is closed. The secondary coil will oppose the change with a leftward field B 2 , which comes from an induced clockwise current I 2 that goes to the right in the resistor. At steady state the primary magnetic field is unchanging, so no emf is induced in the secondary. The primary's field is to the right and decreasing as the switch is opened. The secondary coil opposes this decrease by making its own field to the right, carrying counterclockwise current to the left in the resistor.
(b)
(c)
FIG. Q31.16
Q31.17
The motional emf between the wingtips cannot be used to run a light bulb. To connect the light, an extra insulated wire would have to be run out along each wing, making contact with the wing tip. The wings with the extra wires and the bulb constitute a singleloop circuit. As the plane flies through a uniform magnetic field, the magnetic flux through this loop is constant and zero emf is generated. On the other hand, if the magnetic field is not uniform, a large loop towed through it will generate pulses of positive and negative emf. This phenomenon has been demonstrated with a cable unreeled from the Space Shuttle. No, they do not. Specifically, Gauss's law in magnetism prohibits magnetic monopoles. If magnetic monopoles existed, then the magnetic field lines would not have to be closed loops, but could begin or terminate on a magnetic monopole, as they can in Gauss's law in electrostatics. (a) (b) A current is induced by the changing magnetic flux through the a ring of the tube, produced by the high frequency alternating current in the coil. The higher frequency implies a greater rate of change in the magnetic field, for a larger induced voltage. The resistance of one cubic centimeter in the bulk sheet metal is low, so the I 2 R rate of production of internal energy is low. At the seam, the current starts out crowded into a small area with high resistance, so the temperature rises rapidly, and the edges melt together. The edges must be in contact to allow the induced emf to create an electric current around the circumference of the tube. Additionally, (duh) the two edges must be in contact to be welded at all, just as you can't glue two pieces of paper together without putting them in contact with each other.
Q31.18
Q31.19
(c)
(d)
216
Faraday's Law
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 31.1 Section 31.3 P31.1 Faraday's Law of Induction Lenz's Law B NBA = = 500 mV t t
=
a
f
P31.2
2.50 T  0.500 T 8.00 10 4 m 2 B B A = = = 1.00 s t t
a f a
fe
j FG 1 N s IJ FG 1 V C IJ H 1 T C mK H 1 N mK
= 1.60 mV and I loop =
1.60 mV = = 0.800 mA R 2.00
P31.3
= N
cos f  cos i BA cos =  NB r 2 = 25.0 50.0 10 6 T 0.500 m t t
FG H
IJ K
e
j a
f FGH cos 180 cos 0 IJK 0.200 s
2
= +9.82 mV
P31.4 (a)
=
d B ABmax  t dB e = A = dt dt
2 4.00 2.00
(b) (c) P31.5
e0.160 m ja0.350 Tf e =
2.00 s At t = 0 = 28.0 mV
= 3.79 mV
Noting unit conversions from F = qv B and U = qV , the induced voltage is +200 1.60 T 0.200 m 2 cos 0 1 N s d BA 0  Bi A cos = N = N = dt t 1 T C m 20.0 10 3 s 3 200 V = 160 A I= = R 20.0
a f
FG H
IJ K
a
fe
j
FG H
IJ FG 1 V C IJ = 3 200 V KH N m K
P31.6
= N
N BA  0 d B = dt t = NB r 2
a
f
2 2
t =
NBA
e j = 500a0.200f e5.00 10 j
10.0 10 3
= 7.85 10 5 s
Chapter 31
217
P31.7
=
d BA dI = 0.500 0 nA = 0.480 10 3 V dt dt I ring =
a f
(a)
4.80 10 4 = = 1.60 A R 3.00 10 4 0I = 20.1 T 2rring
(b) (c)
Bring =
Coil's field points downward, and is increasing, so Bring points upward . FIG. P31.7
P31.8
=
d BA dI I = 0.500 0 nA = 0.500 0 n r22 dt dt t I ring =
a f
(a)
0n r22 I = R 2 R t
(b) (c)
B=
2 0 n r22 I 0I = 2r1 4r1 R t
The coil's field points downward, and is increasing, so Bring points upward . FIG. P31.8
P31.9
(a)
d B = B dA =
h+ w 0I 0 IL dx 0 IL h+ w Ldx : B = = ln 2 x h 2 x 2 h
z
FG H
IJ K
(b)
= =
d B d 0 IL h+w = ln dt dt 2 h
e4 10
7
IJ OP =  LM L lnFG h + w IJ OP dI K Q N 2 H h K Q dt T m A ja1.00 mf F 1.00 + 10.0 I lnG H 1.00 JK b10.0 A sg = 2 FG H
0
LM N
4.80 V
The long wire produces magnetic flux into the page through the rectangle, shown by the first hand in the figure to the right. As the magnetic flux increases, the rectangle produces its own magnetic field out of the page, which it does by carrying counterclockwise current (second hand in the figure). FIG. P31.9
218 P31.10
Faraday's Law
B = 0 nI Asolenoid
b
g
= N
d B dI 2 =  N 0 n rsolenoid dt dt
e
j
= 15.0 4 10 7 T m A 1.00 10 3 m 1 0.020 0 m = 14.2 cos 120 t mV
P31.11
e
a f
je
jb
g b600 A sg cosa120tf
2
For a counterclockwise trip around the lefthand loop, with B = At d At 2 a 2 cos 0  I 1 5 R  I PQ R = 0 dt
e j
a f
and for the righthand loop, d Ata 2 + I PQ R  I 2 3 R = 0 dt where I PQ = I 1  I 2 is the upward current in QP. Thus, and 2 Aa 2  5 R I PQ + I 2  I PQ R = 0
2 PQ 2
a f d
i Aa + I R = I a3 Rf 5 2 Aa  6 RI  e Aa 3
2 PQ
FIG. P31.11
2
+ I PQ R = 0
j
I PQ = I PQ
Aa 2 upward, and since R = 0.100 m 0.650 m = 0.065 0 23 R
b
ga
f
e1.00 10 = FG IJ H K
3
23 0.065 0
b
T s 0.650 m
ja
g
f
2
= 283 A upward .
P31.12
=
B dB A = N 0.010 0 + 0.080 0t A =N dt t
b
g
At t = 5.00 s , = 30.0 0.410 T s 0.040 0 m P31.13 B = 0 nI = 0 n 30.0 A 1  e 1.60 t
b
g b
j
g
2
= 61.8 mV
a
fe
a fe jz dA = na30.0 A fe1  e j R d = N =  N na30.0 A f R a1.60fe dt
B = BdA = 0 n 30.0 A 1  e 1.60 t
B 0 1.60 t 2 B 0 2
z
1.60 t
=  250 4 10
=
a fe a68.2 mVfe
7
N A
2
je400 m ja30.0 Af b0.060 0 mg
1
FIG. P31.13
2
1.60 s e
1 1.60 t
1.60 t
counterclockwise
Chapter 31
219
*P31.14
(a)
Each coil has a pulse of voltage tending to produce counterclockwise current as the projectile approaches, and then a pulse of clockwise voltage as the projectile recedes. v= d 1.50 m = = 625 m s t 2.40 10 3 s
V 0 V1 V2 FIG. P31.14 t
(b)
P31.15
=
d NB dt
e
2
cos =
j
N 2 B cos t
3
e80.0 10 Vja0.400 sf a50fe600 10 T  200 10 Tj cosa30.0f = 1.36 m Length = 4 N = 4a1.36 mfa50f = 272 m
t = = NB cos
6 6
*P31.16
(a)
Suppose, first, that the central wire is long and straight. The enclosed current of unknown amplitude creates a circular magnetic field around it, with the magnitude of the field given by Ampere's Law.
z
B ds = 0 I : B =
0 I max sin t 2 R
at the location of the Rogowski coil, which we assume is centered on the wire. This field passes perpendicularly through each turn of the toroid, producing flux BA =
0 I max A sin t . 2 R
The toroid has 2 Rn turns. As the magnetic field varies, the emf induced in it is
= N
I A d d sin t =  0 I max nA cos t . B A = 2 Rn 0 max dt 2 R dt
This is an alternating voltage with amplitude max = 0 nA I max . Measuring the amplitude determines the size I max of the central current. Our assumptions that the central wire is long and straight and passes perpendicularly through the center of the Rogowski coil are all unnecessary. (b) If the wire is not centered, the coil will respond to stronger magnetic fields on one side, but to correspondingly weaker fields on the opposite side. The emf induced in the coil is proportional to the line integral of the magnetic field around the circular axis of the toroid. Ampere's Law says that this line integral depends only on the amount of current the coil encloses. It does not depend on the shape or location of the current within the coil, or on any currents outside the coil.
220 P31.17
Faraday's Law
In a toroid, all the flux is confined to the inside of the toroid. B=
0 NI 500 0 I = 2 r 2 r
B = BdA = B =
z
500 0 I max adr sin t r 2
500 0 I max b+R a sin t ln R 2
= N =
= *P31.18
d B 500 0 I max b+R = 20 cos t a ln R dt 2
FG H
FG H
z
IJ K
IJ K
FG H
IJ K
FIG. P31.17
3.00 + 4.00 cm 10 4 4 10 7 N A 2 50.0 A 377 rad s 0.020 0 m ln cos t 2 4.00 cm
e
ja
fb
gb
a0.422 Vf cos t
g FGH a
f IJ K
The upper loop has area 0.05 m
a
f
2
= 7.85 10 3 m 2 . The induced emf in it is
= N
d dB BA cos = 1 A cos 0 = 7.85 10 3 m 2 2 T s = 1.57 10 2 V . dt dt
b
g
The minus sign indicates that it tends to produce counterclockwise current, to make its own magnetic field out of the page. Similarly, the induced emf in the lower loop is
=  NA cos
dB 2 =  0.09 m 2 T s = 5.09 10 2 V = +5.09 10 2 V to produce dt
a
f
counterclockwise current in the lower loop, which becomes clockwise current in the upper loop . The net emf for current in this sense around the figure 8 is 5.09 10 2 V  1.57 10 2 V = 3.52 10 2 V . It pushes current in this sense through series resistance 2 0.05 m + 2 0.09 m 3 m = 2.64 .
3.52 10 2 V = 13.3 mA . The current is I = = R 2.64
a
f
a
f
Section 31.2 Section 31.3 P31.19 (a)
Motional emf Lenz's Law For maximum induced emf, with positive charge at the top of the antenna, F+ = q + v B , so the auto must move east .
a
f
(b)
= B v = 5.00 10 5 T 1.20 m
e
ja
0 fFGH 65.3 10 s m IJK cos 65.0 = 600
3
4.58 10 4 V
Chapter 31
221
P31.20
I=
R
=
B v R
v = 1.00 m s
FIG. P31.20 P31.21 (a)
FB = I B = I B
When and we get
R =B v
I= FB = B v R
a Bf = B R v = a2.50f a1..20f a2.00f = 3.00 N . 6 00
2 2 2 2
The applied force is 3.00 N to the right . (b) P31.22
FIG. P31.21
P = I2R =
B2
2 2
v
R
= 6.00 W or P = Fv = 6.00 W
FB = I B and = B v IR B v I= = so B = R R v (a) (b) (c) FB = I2 R and I = v FB v = 0.500 A R
I 2 R = 2.00 W
For constant force, P = F v = 1.00 N 2.00 m s = 2.00 W .
a
fb
g
*P31.23
Model the magnetic flux inside the metallic tube as constant as it shrinks form radius R to radius r: 2.50 T R 2 = B f r 2
2
Bf
e j F RI = 2.50 TG J HrK
= 2.50 T 12
a f
2
= 360 T
222 *P31.24
Faraday's Law
Observe that the homopolar generator has no commutator and produces a voltage constant in time: DC with no ripple. In time dt, the disk turns by angle d = dt . The outer brush slides over distance rd . The radial line to the outer brush sweeps over area 1 1 dA = rrd = r 2dt . 2 2 d = N B A The emf generated is dt dA 1 =  1 B cos 0 =  B r 2 dt 2 (We could think of this as following from the result of Example 31.4.) The magnitude of the emf is
af
FG H
IJ K
FIG. P31.24
=B
FG 1 r IJ = b0.9 N s C mgLM 1 a0.4 mf b3 200 rev mingOPFG 2 rad rev IJ H2 K N2 QH 60 s min K
2 2
= 24.1 V
A free positive charge q shown, turning with the disk, feels a magnetic force qv B outward. Thus the outer contact is positive . *P31.25 The speed of waves on the wire is v= T radially
=
267 N m 3 10 3 kg
= 298 m s .
In the simplest standingwave vibration state, d NN = 0.64 m = and f = (a) v =
2
= 1.28 m
298 m s = 233 Hz . 1.28 m
The changing flux of magnetic field through the circuit containing the wire will drive current to the left in the wire as it moves up and to the right as it moves down. The emf will have this same frequency of 233 Hz . The vertical coordinate of the center of the wire is described by
(b)
f b g dx = a1.5 cmfb 2 233 sg sinb 2 233 t sg . Its velocity is v = dt Its maximum speed is 1.5 cma 2 f 233 s = 22.0 m s .
x = A cos t = 1.5 cm cos 2 233 t s . The induced emf is = B v , with amplitude
a
max = B v max = 4.50 10 3 T 0.02 m 22 m s = 1.98 10 3 V .
a
f
Chapter 31
223
P31.26
= N
d A BA cos =  NB cos dt t
FG IJ H K
2
= 1 0.100 T cos 0
I= 1.21 V = 0.121 A 10.0
a
f
a3.00 m 3.00 m sin 60.0f  a3.00 mf
0.100 s
= 1. 21 V FIG. P31.26
The flux is into the page and decreasing. The loop makes its own magnetic field into the page by carrying clockwise current. P31.27
= 2.00 rev s 2 rad rev = 4.00 rad s
=
1 B 2
2
b
gb
g
= 2.83 mV
P31.28
(a)
B ext = B ext i and Bext decreases; therefore, the induced field is B0 = B0 i (to the right) and the current in the resistor is directed to the right .
(b)
B ext = B ext  i increases; therefore, the induced field B0
0
e j = B e+ i j is to the right, and the current in e j
the resistor is directed to the right . (c) B ext = B ext  k into the paper and Bext decreases; therefore, the induced field is B0 = B0  k into the paper, and the current in the resistor is directed to the right . (d) FIG. P31.28
e j
f
By the magnetic force law, FB = q v B . Therefore, a positive charge will move to the top of the bar if B is into the paper .
a
224 P31.29
Faraday's Law
(a)
The force on the side of the coil entering the field (consisting of N wires) is F = N ILB = N IwB . The induced emf in the coil is
a f a f
=N
so the current is I =
d Bwx d B =N = NBwv . dt dt
a f
NBwv = counterclockwise. R R
The force on the leading side of the coil is then: F=N (b)
FG NBwv IJ wB = H R K
N 2B2w 2 v to the left . R
Once the coil is entirely inside the field, B = NBA = constant , so
=0, I =0,
and
F= 0 .
FIG. P31.29
(c)
As the coil starts to leave the field, the flux decreases at the rate Bwv, so the magnitude of the current is the same as in part (a), but now the current is clockwise. Thus, the force exerted on the trailing side of the coil is: F= N 2B2 w 2 v to the left again . R
P31.30
Look in the direction of ba. The bar magnet creates a field into the page, and the field increases. The loop will create a field out of the page by carrying a counterclockwise current. Therefore, current must flow from b to a through the resistor. Hence, Va  Vb will be negative . Name the currents as shown in the diagram: Left loop: Right loop: At the junction: Then, I3 = So, I 1 = Bd I1
2 3 3
P31.31
+ Bdv 2  I 2 R 2  I 1 R1 = 0 + Bdv 3  I 3 R3 + I 1 R1 = 0 I 2 = I1 + I 3 Bdv 2  I 1 R 2  I 3 R 2  I 1 R1 = 0 FIG. P31.31 Bdv 2  I 1 R1 + R 2 
2
Bdv 3 I 1 R1 + . R3 R3
b
g
FG v R  v R IJ upward HR R +R R +R R K L b4.00 m sga15.0 f  b2.00 m sga10.0 f OP = = b0.010 0 Tga0.100 mfM MN a5.00 fa10.0 f + a5.00 fa15.0 f + a10.0 fa15.0 f PQ
1 2 1 3 2 3
Bdv 3 R 2 I 1 R1 R 2  =0 R3 R3
145 A upward.
Chapter 31
225
Section 31.4 P31.32 (a)
Induced emf and Electric Fields dB = 6.00t 2  8.00t dt At t = 2.00 s ,
=
E=
d B dt
R 2 dB dt
2 r2
b
g = 8.00 b0.025 0g 2 b0.050 0g
2
F = qE = 8.00 10 21 N FIG. P31.32 (b) P31.33 When 6.00t  8.00t = 0 ,
2
t = 1.33 s
d B dB = r12 = 2 r1 E dt dt
dB = 0.060 0t dt At t = 3.00 s , E=
2 1
=
F r I dB = 0.020 0 m e0.060 0 T s jb3.00 sgFG 1 N s IJ GH 2 r JK dt H 1 T C mK 2
2 1
E = 1.80 10 3 N C perpendicular to r1 and counterclockwise P31.34 (a)
FIG. P31.33
z
Ed =
d B dt so E=
2 rE = r 2 (b)
e j dB dt
b9.87 mV mg cosb100 tg
The E field is always opposite to increasing B. clockwise .
Section 31.5 P31.35 (a) (b)
Generators and Motors
max = NAB = 1 000 0.100 0.200 120 = 7.54 kV
t = NBA sin t = NBA sin is maximal when sin = 1
or =
b
ga
fa
fa
f
af
2
FIG. P31.35
so the plane of coil is parallel to B .
226 P31.36
Faraday's Law
For the alternator, = 3 000 rev min
b
= N
(a) (b) P31.37
d B d = 250 2.50 10 4 dt dt
e
rad min gFGH 21rev IJK FGH 160 s IJK = 314 rad s T m j cosb314t sg = +250e 2.50 10
2
4
T m 2 314 s sin 314t
jb
g a f
= 19.6 V sin 314t max = 19.6 V
a
f a f je ja f
B = 0 nI = 4 10 7 T m A 200 m 1 15.0 A = 3.77 10 3 T For the small coil, B = NB A = NBA cos t = NB r 2 cos t . Thus,
e
e j
2
=
d B = NB r 2 sin t dt
= 30.0 3.77 10 3 T 0.080 0 m
P31.38 As the magnet rotates, the flux through the coil varies sinusoidally in time with B = 0 at t = 0 . Choosing the flux as positive when the field passes from left to right through the area of the coil, the flux at any time may be written as B =  max sin t so the induced emf is given by
a fe
jb
g e4.00 s j sinb4.00 tg = a28.6 mVf sinb4.00 tg
1
.
1
0.5
I/I max
0 0 0.5 0.5 1 1.5 2
1
t/T = ( t/2 )
=
d B = max cos t . dt
FIG. P31.38
The current in the coil is then I = 850 mA *P31.39 120 V M
max = cos t = I max cos t . R R
850 mA
To analyze the actual circuit, we model it as 120 V
11.8
back
.
(a) (b)
The loop rule gives +120 V  0.85 A 11.8  back = 0
a
f
back = 110 V .
The resistor is the device changing electrical work input into internal energy: 2 P = I 2 R = 0.85 A 11.8 = 8.53 W .
a
fa
2
f
(c)
With no motion, the motor does not function as a generator, and back = 0 . Then 120 V  I c 11.8 = 0
c 2 c
I = 10.2 A a f P = I R = a10.2 A f a11.8 f = 1.22 kW
c
Chapter 31
227
P31.40
(a)
max = BA = B max
FG 1 R IJ H2 K = a1.30 Tf a0. 250 mf b 4.00 rad sg 2
2 2
t
max = 1.60 V
(b) (c) (d) (e) P31.41 (a)
Figure 1
2 0
=
2 0
z
BA d = 2 2
z
sin d = 0
t
The maximum and average would remain unchanged. See Figure 1 at the right. See Figure 2 at the right. B = BA cos = BA cos t = 0.800 T 0.010 0 m 2 cos 2 60.0 t =
Figure 2
FIG. P31.40
a
fe
j
a f e8.00 mT m j cosa377tf
2
(b)
=
I=
d B = dt
a3.02 Vf sina377tf
(c) (d) (e)
= R
a3.02 Af sina377tf
a9.10 Wf sin a377tf
2
P = I2R =
P = Fv = so =
P =
a24.1 mN mf sin a377tf
2
Section 31.6 P31.42
Eddy Currents upward magnetic field, so the N and S poles on the
The current in the magnet creates an
solenoid core are shown correctly. On the rail in front of the brake, the upward flux of B increases as the coil approaches, so a current is induced here to create a downward magnetic field. This is clockwise current, so the S pole on the rail is shown correctly. On the rail behind the brake, the upward magnetic flux is decreasing. The induced current in the rail will produce upward magnetic field by being counterclockwise as the picture correctly shows.
228 P31.43
Faraday's Law
(a)
At terminal speed, Mg = FB = IwB = or
FG IJ wB = FG Bwv IJ wB = B w v H RK H R K R
T 2 2
T
vT =
MgR B 2 2
.
(b)
The emf is directly proportional to vT , but the current is inversely proportional to R. A large R means a small current at a given speed, so the loop must travel faster to get FB = mg .
FIG. P31.43
(c)
At a given speed, the current is directly proportional to the magnetic field. But the force is proportional to the product of the current and the field. For a small B, the speed must increase to compensate for both the small B and also the current, so vT B 2 .
Section 31.7
Maxwell's Equations i j k e E + v B where v B = 10.0 0 0 = 4.00 j m 0 0 0.400
11
P31.44
F = ma = qE + qv B so a =
19
e1.60 10 j 2.50 i + 5.00 j  4.00 j = e1.76 10 j 2.50 i + 1.00 j 9.11 10 a = e 4.39 10 i  1.76 10 jj m s
a=
31 11 11 2
P31.45
F = ma = qE + qv B
a= i j k e E + v B where v B = 200 0 0 = 200 0.400 j + 200 0.300 k m 0.200 0.300 0.400
a
f
a
f
a=
1.60 10 19 50.0 j  80.0 j + 60.0k = 9.58 10 7 30.0 j + 60.0k 1.67 10 27
a = 2.87 10 9  j + 2k m s 2 =
e2.87 10 IJ K
9
j +5.75 10 9 k m s 2
j
Additional Problems P31.46
a f e j FGH a fLMN e j OPQa f = a30.0fL e 2.70 10 mj Oe3.20 10 MN PQ = e7.22 10 V j cos 2 e523t s j
= N
3 2 3 1
d dB BA cos =  N r 2 cos 0 dt dt 2 d =  30.0 2.70 10 3 m 1 50.0 mT + 3.20 mT sin 2 523 t s 1 dt
a
3
T 2 523 s 1
j e
f e j j cose2 523t s j
1
Chapter 31
229
P31.47
(a)
Doubling the number of turns.
Amplitude doubles: period unchanged
(b) Doubling the angular velocity.
doubles the amplitude: cuts the period in half
(c) Doubling the angular velocity while reducing the number of turns to one half the original value.
FIG. P31.47
Amplitude unchanged: cuts the period in half
P31.48
= N
B 1.50 T  5.00 T BA cos =  N r 2 cos 0 = 1 0.005 00 m 2 1 = 0.875 V t t 20.0 10 3 s
a
f
e j
e
ja fFGH
IJ K
(a)
I=
R
=
0.875 V = 43.8 A 0.020 0
(b) P31.49
P = I = 0.875 V 43.8 A = 38.3 W
a
fa
f
In the loop on the left, the induced emf is
=
d B dB =A = 0.100 m dt dt
a
f b100 T sg = V
2
and it attempts to produce a counterclockwise current in this loop. In the loop on the right, the induced emf is
=
d B = 0.150 m dt
a
f b100 T sg = 2.25 V
2
FIG. P31.49
and it attempts to produce a clockwise current. Assume that I 1 flows down through the 6.00 resistor, I 2 flows down through the 5.00 resistor, and that I 3 flows up through the 3.00 resistor. From Kirchhoff's junction rule: Using the loop rule on the left loop: Using the loop rule on the right loop: Solving these three equations simultaneously, I3 = I1 + I 2 6.00 I 1 + 3.00 I 3 = 5.00 I 2 + 3.00 I 3 = 2.25 (1) (2) (3)
I1 = 0.062 3 A , I 2 = 0.860 A , and I 3 = 0.923 A .
230 P31.50
Faraday's Law
The emf induced between the ends of the moving bar is
= B v = 2.50 T 0.350 m 8.00 m s = 7.00 V .
The lefthand loop contains decreasing flux away from you, so the induced current in it will be clockwise, to produce its own field directed away from you. Let I 1 represent the current flowing upward through the 2.00 resistor. The righthand loop will carry counterclockwise current. Let I 3 be the upward current in the 5.00 resistor. (a) Kirchhoff's loop rule then gives: and (b)
a
fa
fb
g
a f +7.00 V  I a5.00 f = 0
+7.00 V  I 1 2.00 = 0
3
I1 = 3.50 A I 3 = 1.40 A .
The total power dissipated in the resistors of the circuit is
P = I1 + I 3 = I 1 + I 3 = 7.00 V 3.50 A + 1.40 A = 34.3 W .
(c) Method 1: The current in the sliding conductor is downward with value I 2 = 3.50 A + 1.40 A = 4.90 A . The magnetic field exerts a force of Fm = I B = 4.90 A 0.350 m 2.50 T = 4.29 N directed moving. Method 2: The agent moving the bar must supply the power according to P = F v = Fv cos 0 . The force required is then: F= P31.51
b
g a
fa
f
a
fa
fa
f
toward the right on this to the left to keep the bar
conductor. An outside agent must then exert a force of 4.29 N
P 34.3 W = = 4.29 N . v 8.00 m s
Suppose we wrap twenty turns of wire into a flat compact circular coil of diameter 3 cm. Suppose we use a bar magnet to produce field 10 3 T through the coil in one direction along its axis. Suppose we then flip the magnet to reverse the flux in 10 1 s . The average induced emf is then BA cos B cos 180 cos 0 = N =  NB r 2 t t t 2 2 =  20 10 3 T 0.015 0 m ~ 10 4 V 10 1 s
= N
a fe
jb
g FGH
e jFGH IJ K
IJ K
Chapter 31
231
P31.52
I=
+ induced R
and
induced = 
F=m
d BA dt
a f b g
FIG. P31.52
To solve the differential equation, let
dv = IBd dt dv IBd Bd = = + induced dt m mR dv Bd =  Bvd dt mR u =  Bvd du dv =  Bd dt dt 1 du Bd  = u Bd dt mR
a
f
so Integrating from t = 0 to t = t , or Since v = 0 when t = 0 , and
u0
z
u
t Bd du dt . = u mR 0
za f
a f
2
Bd u t = ln u0 mR 2 2 u = e  B d t mR . u0 u0 = u =  Bvd
2
 Bvd = e  B
Therefore, *P31.53 The enclosed flux is The particle moves according to v=
2 2
d t mR
2 2
.
Bd
e1  e
 B d t mR
j
.
B = BA = B r 2 .
F = ma :
qvB sin 90 = r= mv . qB
mv 2 r
Then
B =
B m 2 v 2 q2B2
2
.
(a)
v=
Bq 2B
m2
=
e15 10
6
T m 2 30 10 9 C
je
2 10
e
16
kg
j
2
j a0.6 Tf =
2.54 10 5 m s
(b)
Energy for the particleelectric field system is conserved in the firing process:
Ui = K f :
qV =
1 mv 2 2
2 10 16 kg 2.54 10 5 m s mv 2 V = = 2q 2 30 10 9 C
e
e
je
j
j
2
= 215 V .
232 *P31.54
Faraday's Law
(a)
Consider an annulus of radius r, width dr, height b, and resistivity . Around its circumference, a voltage is induced according to
= N
d d B A = 1 Bmax cos t r 2 = + Bmax r 2 sin t . dt dt
b
g
The resistance around the loop is The eddy current in the ring is dI = The instantaneous power is
2 r = . Ax bdr
b g
Bmax r 2 sin t bdr Bmax rbdr sin t . = = 2 resistance 2 r
b g
b
g
dPi = dI =
2 Bmax r 3 b 2 dr sin 2 t . 2
The time average of the function
sin 2 t =
1 1 1 1  cos 2 t is  0 = 2 2 2 2
so the timeaveraged power delivered to the annulus is dP =
2 Bmax r 3 b 2 dr . 4
The power delivered to the disk is
P = dP =
z z
R
P=
(b) (c) (d) I=
2 2 Bmax b 2 R 4 Bmax R 4 b 2 0 = . 4 4 16 2 Bmax and P get 4 times larger.
F GH
I JK
2 Bmaxb 2 3 r dr 4 0
When Bmax gets two times larger,
When f and = 2 f double, 2 and P get 4 times larger. When R doubles, R 4 and P become 2 4 = 16 times larger.
P31.55
B A = R R t
so q = It =
b15.0 Tga0.200 mf
0.500
2
= 1.20 C
P31.56
(a)
I=
dq d B = where = N so dt dt R
z
dq =
N R
2 1
z
d B N 2  1 . R
and the charge through the circuit will be Q =
b
g
(b)
IJ OP = BAN KQ R RQ a 200 fe5.00 10 C j = = so B = NA a100fe 40.0 10 m j
Q= N BA cos 0  BA cos R 2
LM N
FG H
4
4
2
0.250 T .
Chapter 31
233
P31.57
(a) (b) (c)
= B v = 0.360 V
FB = I B = 0.108 N
I=
= 0.900 A R
Since the magnetic flux B A is in effect decreasing, the induced current flow through R is from b to a. Point b is at higher potential.
FIG. P31.57
(d)
No . Magnetic flux will increase through a loop to the left of ab. Here counterclockwise
current will flow to produce upward magnetic field. The current in R is still from b to a.
P31.58
= B v at a distance r from wire =
F II v GH 2 r JK
0
v
FIG. P31.58 P31.59 (a) At time t, the flux through the loop is B = BA cos = a + bt r 2 cos 0 = a + bt r 2 . At t = 0 , B = ar 2 . (b)
a
fe j
a
f
=
d a + bt d B =  r 2 =  br 2 dt dt
a
f
(c)
I=
br 2 =  R R
(d)
P =I= 
F GH
br 2 R
I e br j = JK
2
2b 2r 4 R
P31.60
=
d dB NBA = 1 a2 = a2K dt dt Q = C = C a 2 K B into the paper is decreasing; therefore, current will attempt to counteract this. Positive charge will go to upper plate . The changing magnetic field through the enclosed area induces an electric field , surrounding the Bfield, and this pushes on charges in the wire.
a
f
FG IJ H K
(a) (b)
(c)
234 P31.61
Faraday's Law
The flux through the coil is B = B A = BA cos = BA cos t . The induced emf is
= N
(a) (b) (c)
d cos t d B =  NBA = NBA sin t . dt dt
b
g
max = NBA = 60.0 1.00 T 0.100 0.200 m 2 30.0 rad s = 36.0 V
d B d B = , thus dt N dt =
max
a
fe
jb
g
max 36.0 V = = 0.600 V = 0.600 Wb s N 60.0
At t = 0.050 0 s , t = 1.50 rad and = max sin 1.50 rad = 36.0 V sin 1.50 rad = 35.9 V .
a
f a a
f a
f
(d)
The torque on the coil at any time is
= B = NIA B = NAB I sin t =
When = max
FG IJ FG IJ sin t . H KH RK a36.0 V f = = , sin t = 1.00 and = R b30.0 rad sga10.0 f f
max 2 max 2
4.32 N m .
P31.62
(a)
We use = N
B , with N = 1 . t Taking a = 5.00 10 3 m to be the radius of the washer, and h = 0.500 m , B = B2 A  B1 A = A B2  B1 = a 2
b
g
F I  I I = a I FG 1  1 IJ =  ahI . GH 2 ah + af 2 a JK 2 H h + a a K 2ah + af
0 0 2 0 0
The time for the washer to drop a distance h (from rest) is: Therefore, =
t =
2h . g
and (b)
a f 2 h = 2a h + a f 2 e4 10 T m Aje5.00 10 mja10.0 Af e9.80 m s ja0.500 mf = = 2 2b0.500 m + 0.005 00 mg a f
7 3 2
0 ahI ahI = 0 2 h + a t 2 h + a
g
0 aI
gh
97.4 nV .
Since the magnetic flux going through the washer (into the plane of the paper) is decreasing in time, a current will form in the washer so as to oppose that decrease. Therefore, the current will flow in a clockwise direction .
P31.63
Find an expression for the flux through a rectangular area "swept out" I by the bar in time t. The magnetic field at a distance x from wire is B=
0I and B = BdA . Therefore, 2 x 0 Ivt r + dx where vt is the distance the bar has moved in time t. 2 r x
d B 0 Iv = ln 1 + dt r 2
z
r
v
vt
B =
z
FIG. P31.63
Then, =
FG H
IJ K
.
Chapter 31
235
P31.64
The magnetic field at a distance x from a long wire is B = through the loop. d B =
0I . Find an expression for the flux 2 x
0I dx so 2 x
a f
B =
0I 2
r+w r
z
w dx 0 I = ln 1 + r x 2
FG H
IJ K a f
.
Therefore,
d B 0 I v w 0I v w = = and I = = dt 2 r r + w R 2 Rr r + w
a
f
P31.65
We are given and Maximum E occurs when which gives Therefore, the maximum current (at t = 1.00 s ) is
B = 6.00t 3  18.0t 2 T m 2
e
j
=
d B = 18.0t 2 + 36.0t . dt
d = 36.0t + 36.0 = 0 dt t = 1.00 s . I=
18.0 + 36.0 V = = 6.00 A . R 3.00
a
f
P31.66
For the suspended mass, M: For the sliding bar, m: Mg 
F = Mg  T = Ma .
B = ma , where
F =T I
B2 2 v = m + M a or R
a
f
B v = R R Mg dv B2 2v a= =  dt m + M R M + m
I=
a
f f
2
zb
v 0
t dv = dt where  v 0
g
z
=
v=
Mg B2 2 . and = R M+m M+m
a
Therefore, the velocity varies with time as
2 MgR 1  e t = 1  eB 2 2 B
e
j
t R M +m
a
f
.
P31.67
(a)
= N
d B dB d =  NA =  NA 0nI where A = area of coil dt dt dt
b
g
N = number of turns in coil and Therefore, n = number of turns per unit length in solenoid. d 4 sin 120 t = N 0 An 480 cos 120 t dt 2 = 40 4 10 7 0.050 0 m 2.00 10 3 480 cos 120 t
= N 0 An
=
V R
a f b g b g g e e j b ja f b a1.19 Vf cosb120 tg
P = VI =
cos 2 =
2
g
(b)
I=
and
a1.19 V f
f
2
2
cos 2 120 t
b
g
8.00
From 1 the average value of cos is , so 2
1 1.19 V P = = 88.5 mW . 2 8.00
a a
1 1 + cos 2 2 2
f
236 *P31.68
Faraday's Law
(a)
= N
d a2 Ba 2 d 1 1 d 2 BA cos = 1 B cos 0 =  =  Ba 2 =  0.5 T 0.5 m 2 rad s dt dt 2 2 dt 2 2 = 0.125 V = 0.125 V clockwise
a
fa
f
The sign indicates that the induced emf produces clockwise current, to make its own magnetic field into the page. (b) At this instant = t = 2 rad s 0.25 s = 0.5 rad . The arc PQ has length r == 0.5 rad 0.5 m = 0.25 m . The length of the circuit is 0.5 m + 0.5 m + 0.25 m = 1.25 m its 0.125 V resistance is 1.25 m 5 m = 6.25 . The current is = 0.020 0 A clockwise . 6.25
a
fa
b
f
a
f
g
*P31.69
Suppose the field is vertically down. When an electron is moving away from you the force on it is in the direction given by qv B c as  away down = 
b
g
=  left = right .
Therefore, the electrons circulate clockwise. FIG. P31.69 (a) As the downward field increases, an emf is induced to produce some current that in turn produces an upward field. This current is directed counterclockwise, carried by
negative electrons moving clockwise. Therefore the original electron motion speeds up. (b) At the circumference, we have
Fc = ma c :
q vBc sin 90 =
mv 2 r
mv = q rBc .
The increasing magnetic field Bav in the area enclosed by the orbit produces a tangential electric field according to dB d r dBav E 2 r = r 2 av E= E ds =  B av A . dt dt 2 dt dv qE=m . An electron feels a tangential force according to Ft = mat : dt r dBav r dv q q B av = mv = q rBc =m Then dt 2 dt 2 Bav = 2Bc . and
z
b g
P31.70
The induced emf is = B v where B = y f = yi 
0I , v f = vi + gt = 9.80 m s 2 t , and 2 y
e
j
f a0.300 mf 9.80 m s t = e1.18 10 jt e j 0.800  4.90t 2 0.800 m  e 4.90 m s jt e1.18 10 ja0.300f V = 98.3 V . At t = 0.300 s , = 0.800  4.90a0.300 f
=
e4 10
1 2 gt = 0.800 m  4.90 m s 2 t 2 . 2
e
j
7
T m A 200 A
2
ja
4
2
2
2
V
4
2
Chapter 31
237
P31.71
The magnetic field produced by the current in the straight wire is perpendicular to the plane of the coil at all points within the coil. The I magnitude of the field is B = 0 . Thus, the flux linkage is 2 r N B =
0 NIL h+ w dr 0 NI max L h+ w = ln sin t + . h r 2 2 h
z
FG H
IJ b K
g
Finally, the induced emf is
FIG. P31.71
FG IJ b g H K e4 10 ja100fa50.0fa0.200 mfe200 s j lnFG 1 + 5.00 cm IJ cosb t + g = H 5.00 cm K 2 = a87.1 mV f cosb 200 t + g The term sinb t + g in the expression for the current in the straight wire does not change
= 0 NI max L w ln 1 + cos t + h 2
7 1
appreciably when t changes by 0.10 rad or less. Thus, the current does not change appreciably during a time interval t <
e200 s j
1
0.10
= 1.6 10 4 s .
We define a critical length, ct = 3.00 10 8 m s 1.6 10 4 s = 4.8 10 4 m equal to the distance to which field changes could be propagated during an interval of 1.6 10 4 s . This length is so much larger than any dimension of the coil or its distance from the wire that, although we consider the straight wire to be infinitely long, we can also safely ignore the field propagation effects in the vicinity of the coil. Moreover, the phase angle can be considered to be constant along the wire in the vicinity of the coil. If the frequency w were much larger, say, 200 10 5 s 1 , the corresponding critical length would be only 48 cm. In this situation propagation effects would be important and the above expression for would require modification. As a "rule of thumb" we can consider field propagation effects for circuits of laboratory size to be negligible for frequencies, f = d B = BA sin ; dt
e
je
j
2
, that are less than about 10 6 Hz.
P31.72
B = BA cos I  sin
IB sin  sin 2
FIG. P31.72
238
Faraday's Law
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P31.2 P31.4 P31.6 P31.8 0.800 mA (a) see the solution; (b) 3.79 mV ; (c) 28.0 mV 78.5 s P31.40 P31.42 P31.44 I counterclockwise; t I ; (c) upward t P31.46 P31.48 P31.50 P31.52 P31.54 (a) 1.60 V ; (b) 0; (c) no change; (d) and (e) see the solution both are correct; see the solution
0 n r22 2R 2 0 n r22 (b) 4r1 R
(a)
e4.39i  1.76 jj10 m s a7.22 mV f cosb 2 523 t sg
11 2
(a) 43.8 A ; (b) 38.3 W (a) 3.50 A up in 2 and 1.40 A up in 5 ; (b) 34.3 W ; (c) 4.29 N see the solution (a)
2 Bmax R 4 b 2 ; (b) 4 times larger; 16 (c) 4 times larger; (d) 16 times larger
P31.10 P31.12 P31.14 P31.16 P31.18 P31.20 P31.22 P31.24 P31.26 P31.28 P31.30 P31.32
14.2 mV cos 120 t
61.8 mV
a f
(a) see the solution; (b) 625 m/s see the solution 13.3 mA counterclockwise in the lower loop and clockwise in the upper loop. 1.00 m s (a) 500 mA; (b) 2.00 W ; (c) 2.00 W 24.1 V with the outer contact positive 121 mA clockwise (a) to the right; (b) to the right; (c) to the right; (d) into the paper negative; see the solution (a) 8.00 10 21 N downward perpendicular to r1 ; (b) 1.33 s (a) 9.87 mV m cos 100 t ; (b) clockwise
P31.56 P31.58 P31.60
(a) see the solution; (b) 0.250 T see the solution (a) C a 2 K ; (b) the upper plate; (c) see the solution (a) 97.4 nV ; (b) clockwise
P31.62 P31.64
0I v w 2 Rr r + w
a
f
2 2
P31.66 P31.68
MgR B
2 2
1  eB
t R M +m
a
f
(a) 0.125 V to produce clockwise current; (b) 20.0 mA clockwise 1.18 10 4 ; 98.3 V 0.800  4.90t 2 see the solution
P31.34 P31.36 P31.38
b g b g (a) a19.6 V f sina314tf ; (b) 19.6 V
see the solution
P31.70 P31.72
32
Inductance
CHAPTER OUTLINE
32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 32.5 32.6 SelfInductance RL Circuits Energy in a Magnetic Field Mutual Inductance Oscillations in an LC Circuit The RLC Circuit
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q32.1 The emf induced in an inductor is opposite to the direction of the changing current. For example, in a simple RL circuit with current flowing clockwise, if the current in the circuit increases, the inductor will generate an emf to oppose the increasing current. The coil has an inductance regardless of the nature of the current in the circuit. Inductance depends only on the coil geometry and its construction. Since the current is constant, the selfinduced emf in the coil is zero, and the coil does not affect the steadystate current. (We assume the resistance of the coil is negligible.) The inductance of a coil is determined by (a) the geometry of the coil and (b) the "contents" of the coil. This is similar to the parameters that determine the capacitance of a capacitor and the resistance of a resistor. With an inductor, the most important factor in the geometry is the number of turns of wire, or turns per unit length. By the "contents" we refer to the material in which the inductor establishes a magnetic field, notably the magnetic properties of the core around which the wire is wrapped.
Q32.2
Q32.3
Q32.4
If the first set of turns is wrapped clockwise around a spool, wrap the second set counterclockwise, so that the coil produces negligible magnetic field. Then the inductance of each set of turns effectively negates the inductive effects of the other set. After the switch is closed, the back emf will not exceed that of the battery. If this were the case, then the current in the circuit would change direction to counterclockwise. Just after the switch is opened, the back emf can be much larger than the battery emf, to temporarily maintain the clockwise current in a spark. The current decreases not instantaneously but over some span of time. The faster the decrease in the current, the larger will be the emf generated in the inductor. A spark can appear at the switch as it is opened because the selfinduced voltage is a maximum at this instant. The voltage can therefore briefly cause dielectric breakdown of the air between the contacts. When it is being opened. When the switch is initially standing open, there is no current in the circuit. Just after the switch is then closed, the inductor tends to maintain the zerocurrent condition, and there is very little chance of sparking. When the switch is standing closed, there is current in the circuit. When the switch is then opened, the current rapidly decreases. The induced emf is created in the inductor, and this emf tends to maintain the original current. Sparking occurs as the current bridges the air gap between the contacts of the switch. 239
Q32.5
Q32.6
Q32.7
240 Q32.8
Inductance
A physicist's list of constituents of the universe in 1829 might include matter, light, heat, the stuff of stars, charge, momentum, and several other entries. Our list today might include the quarks, electrons, muons, tauons, and neutrinos of matter; gravitons of gravitational fields; photons of electric and magnetic fields; W and Z particles; gluons; energy; momentum; angular momentum; charge; baryon number; three different lepton numbers; upness; downness; strangeness; charm; topness; and bottomness. Alternatively, the relativistic interconvertability of mass and energy, and of electric and magnetic fields, can be used to make the list look shorter. Some might think of the conserved quantities energy, momentum, ... bottomness as properties of matter, rather than as things with their own existence. The idea of a field is not due to Henry, but rather to Faraday, to whom Henry personally demonstrated selfinduction. Still the thesis stated in the question has an important germ of truth. Henry precipitated a basic change if he did not cause it. The biggest difference between the two lists is that the 1829 list does not include fields and today's list does. The energy stored in the magnetic field of an inductor is proportional to the square of the current. 1 Doubling I makes U = LI 2 get four times larger. 2 The energy stored in a capacitor is proportional to the square of the electric field, and the energy stored in an induction coil is proportional to the square of the magnetic field. The capacitor's energy is proportional to its capacitance, which depends on its geometry and the dielectric material inside. The coil's energy is proportional to its inductance, which depends on its geometry and the core material. On the other hand, we can think of Henry's discovery of selfinductance as fundamentally new. Before a certain school vacation at the Albany Academy about 1830, one could visualize the universe as consisting of only one thing, matter. All the forms of energy then known (kinetic, gravitational, elastic, internal, electrical) belonged to chunks of matter. But the energy that temporarily maintains a current in a coil after the battery is removed is not energy that belongs to any bit of matter. This energy is vastly larger than the kinetic energy of the drifting electrons in the wires. This energy belongs to the magnetic field around the coil. Beginning in 1830, Nature has forced us to admit that the universe consists of matter and also of fields, massless and invisible, known only by their effects. The inductance of the series combination of inductor L1 and inductor L 2 is L1 + L 2 + M 12 , where M 12 is the mutual inductance of the two coils. It can be defined as the emf induced in coil two when the current in coil one changes at one ampere per second, due to the magnetic field of coil one producing flux through coil two. The coils can be arranged to have large mutual inductance, as by winding them onto the same core. The coils can be arranged to have negligible mutual inductance, as separate toroids do.
Q32.9
Q32.10
Q32.11
Q32.12
The mutual inductance of two loops in free spacethat is, ignoring the use of coresis a maximum if the loops are coaxial. In this way, the maximum flux of the primary loop will pass through the secondary loop, generating the largest possible emf given the changing magnetic field due to the first. The mutual inductance is a minimum if the magnetic field of the first coil lies in the plane of the second coil, producing no flux through the area the second coil encloses. The answer depends on the orientation of the solenoids. If they are coaxial, such as two solenoids endtoend, then there certainty will be mutual induction. If, however, they are oriented in such a way that the magnetic field of one coil does not go through turns of the second coil, then there will be no mutual induction. Consider the case of two solenoids physically arranged in a "T" formation, but still connected electrically in series. The magnetic field lines of the first coil will not produce any net flux in the second coil, and thus no mutual induction will be present.
Q32.13
Chapter 32
241
Q32.14
When the capacitor is fully discharged, the current in the circuit is a maximum. The inductance of the coil is making the current continue to flow. At this time the magnetic field of the coil contains all the energy that was originally stored in the charged capacitor. The current has just finished discharging the capacitor and is proceeding to charge it up again with the opposite polarity. The oscillations would eventually decrease, but perhaps with very small damping. The original potential energy would be converted to internal energy within the wires. Such a situation constitutes an RLC circuit. Remember that a real battery generally contains an internal resistance. If R > 4L 4L , then the oscillator is overdampedit will not oscillate. If R < , then the oscillator is C C underdamped and can go through several cycles of oscillation before the radiated signal falls below background noise. The condition for critical damping must be investigated to design a circuit for a particular purpose. For example, in building a radio receiver, one would want to construct the receiving circuit so that it is underdamped. Then it can oscillate in resonance and detect the desired signal. Conversely, when designing a probe to measure a changing signal, such free oscillations are undesirable. An electrical vibration in the probe would constitute "ringing" of the system, where the probe would measure an additional signalthat of the probe itself! In this case, one would want to design a probe that is critically damped or overdamped, so that the only signal measured is the one under study. Critical damping represents the threshold between underdamping and overdamping. One must know the condition for it to meet the design criteria for a project. An object cannot exert a net force on itself. An object cannot create momentum out of nothing. A coil can induce an emf in itself. When it does so, the actual forces acting on charges in different parts of the loop add as vectors to zero. The term electromotive force does not refer to a force, but to a voltage.
Q32.15
Q32.16
Q32.17
Q32.18
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 32.1 P32.1 P32.2 SelfInductance I 1.50 A  0.200 A = 3.00 10 3 H = 1.95 10 2 V = 19.5 mV t 0.200 s
=L
e
jFGH
IJ K
Treating the telephone cord as a solenoid, we have: L=
0N 2A
e4 10 = a
7
T m A 70.0 6.50 10 3 m 0.600 m
ja f e
2
j
2
= 1.36 H .
P32.3
= L
0  0.500 A I = 2.00 H t 0.010 0 s
fFGH
I FG 1 V s IJ = JK H 1 H A K g
100 V
P32.4 P32.5
L=
N B LI B = = 240 nT m 2 I N
through each turn
back =  = L
back = 6.00 cos 120 t = 18.8 V cos 377 t
a
f b
dI d =L I max sin t = LI max cos t = 10.0 10 3 120 5.00 cos t dt dt
b
e
ja
fa f
g a
f a f
242 P32.6
Inductance
From = L From L =
FG I IJ , we have H t K
0 420
2
L= B
4
N B , we have I =
g LI e 2. 40 10 = =
N
b
24.0 10 3 V = = 2.40 10 3 H . 10.0 A s I t
3
H 4.00 A
ja
500
f=
19.2 T m 2 .
P32.7
4 H 0.160 dI dI  175 10 6 V = L = = = 0.421 A s dt dt L 4.16 10 4 H
L=
0N 2 A
a f e3.00 10 j = 4.16 10 j e j
P32.8
=L
(a) (b) (c)
dI d 2 = 90.0 10 3 t  6t V dt dt
e
At t = 1.00 s , At t = 4.00 s ,
= 360 mV = 180 mV
= 90.0 10 3 2t  6 = 0
when
e
ja
f
t = 3.00 s .
P32.9
(a) (b) (c) (d)
B = 0 nI = 0
FG 450 IJ b0.040 0 Ag = H 0.120 K
188 T
B = BA = 3.33 10 8 T m 2 L= N B = 0.375 mH I
B and B are proportional to current; L is independent of current
P32.10
(a)
L=
0N 2 A
=
0 120 5.00 10 3
0.090 0
a f e
2
j
2
= 15.8 H
(b) *P32.11
= B
m N2A B L = m = 800 1.58 10 5 H = 12.6 mH 0
e
j
We can directly find the self inductance of the solenoid:
= L
dI dt
+0.08 V =  L
0  1.8 A 0.12 s
L = 5.33 10 3 Vs A =
0N2A
.
Here A = r 2 , 200 m = N 2 r , and 5.33 10 =
3 3
Vs A = WbmA
0 N 2 r 2
e j N F 200 m I = GH 2 N JK =
0 2 2
= N 10 3 m . Eliminating extra unknowns step by step, we have
0 40 000
m2
4
=
10 7 40 000 m 2 Tm A
e
j
4 10
5.33 10 3 AVs
= 0.750 m
Chapter 32
243
P32.12
L=
N B NBA NA 0 NI 0N 2 A = = I I I 2 R 2 R
FIG. P32.12 P32.13
= 0 e  kt =  L
dI = 
0  kt e dt L
dI dt
If we require I 0 as t , the solution is Q = Idt =
I=
z z
0  kt e dt =  20 kL k L 0
0  kt dq e = kL dt Q = 20 . k L
Section 32.2 P32.14 I=
RL Circuits
R
e1  e j :
 Rt L
0.900
R
=
R
1  e  R a3.00 s f
2.50 H
exp  R=
FG Ra3.00 sf IJ = 0.100 H 2.50 H K
2.50 H ln 10.0 = 1.92 3.00 s It =
P32.15
(a)
At time t, where After a long time, At I t = 0.500 I max so
a f e1 Re j
t
I (A) 1 0.5 0
I max
L = = 0.200 s . R I max =
1  e 
R
e
j= .
R
 t 0. 200 s
t (s) 0 0.2 0.4 0.6
af
a0.500f R = e1  e R
j
FIG. P32.15
0.500 = 1  e  t 0. 200 s .
Isolating the constants on the right, ln e  t 0. 200 s = ln 0.500 and solving for t, or (b) Similarly, to reach 90% of I max , and Thus,  t = 0.693 0.200 s
e
j a
f
t = 0.139 s . 0.900 = 1  e  t
t =  ln 1  0.900 .
t =  0.200 s ln 0.100 = 0.461 s .
a
a
f a
f
f
244 P32.16
Inductance
Taking = IR + L
L , R
I = I 0 e t :
dI 1 = I0 et  dt I 0 Re  t
0
dI = 0 will be true if dt
FG IJ H K F 1I + Le I e jG  J = 0 . H K
t
Because = P32.17 (a) (b) (c) (d) P32.18 I=
L , we have agreement with 0 = 0 . R L = 2.00 10 3 s = 2.00 ms R
=
I = I max 1  e  t = I max =
e
V j FGH 6.00 IJK e1  e 4.00
0. 250 2.00
j= f
0.176 A
6.00 V = = 1.50 A R 4.00
 t 2.00 ms
0.800 = 1  e
t =  2.00 ms ln 0.200 = 3.22 ms
a
f a
FIG. P32.17
120 1  e t = 1  e 1.80 7.00 = 3.02 A R 9.00
VR
e j = IR = a3.02fa9.00f = 27.2 V
e
j
VL =  VR = 120  27.2 = 92.8 V P32.19 Note: It may not be correct to call the voltage or emf across a coil a "potential difference." Electric potential can only be defined for a conservative electric field, and not for the electric field around an inductor. (a) VR = IR = 8.00 2.00 A = 16.0 V
a
fa
f
and Therefore, (b)
VL =  VR = 36.0 V  16.0 V = 20.0 V . VR 16.0 V = = 0.800 . VL 20.0 V FIG. P32.19
VR = IR = 4.50 A 8.00 = 36.0 V
a
fa a
f
VL =  VR = 0
P32.20 After a long time, 12.0 V = 0. 200 A R . Thus, R = 60.0 . Now, = L = R = 5.00 10 4 s 60.0 V A = 30.0 mH . P32.21 I = I max 1  e  t :
f
e
jb
g
L gives R
e
j
dI =  I max e  t dt
e jFGH  1 IJK
=
(a) (b)
L 15.0 H = = 0.500 s : R 30.0
dI R = I max e  t and I max = dt L R
t=0:
dI R 100 V = I max e 0 = = = 6.67 A s dt L L 15.0 H dI  t = e = 6.67 A s e 1.50 a0.500 f = 6.67 A s e 3.00 = 0.332 A s dt L
t = 1.50 s :
b
g
b
g
Chapter 32
245
P32.22
I = I max 1  e  t :
e
j
0.980 = 1  e 3.00 10 0.020 0 = e 3.00 10
3
3
= =
P32.23 L , so R
3.00 10 3 = 7.67 10 4 s ln 0.020 0
b
g
L = R = 7.67 10 4 10.0 = 7.67 mH
e
ja f
FIG. P32.22
Name the currents as shown. By Kirchhoff's laws: I1 = I 2 + I 3 +10.0 V  4.00 I 1  4.00 I 2 = 0 +10.0 V  4.00 I 1  8.00 I 3  1.00 From (1) and (2), and Then (3) becomes (1) (2)
3
a f dI = 0 dt
(3) FIG. P32.23
+10.0  4.00 I 1  4.00 I 1 + 4.00 I 3 = 0 I 1 = 0.500 I 3 + 1.25 A . 10.0 V  4.00 0.500 I 3 + 1.25 A  8.00 I 3  1.00
3 3
a f dI = 0 b g dt a1.00 HfFGH dI IJK + a10.0 fI = 5.00 V . dt
3
We solve the differential equation using Equations 32.6 and 32.7: I3 t = V a f FGH 5.00 IJK 1  e a 10.0
 10.0 t 1.00 H
I 1 = 1.25 + 0.500 I 3 = P32.24 (a) (b) P32.25 Using = RC =
a0.500 Af 1  e 1.50 A  a0.250 A fe
f
=
10 t s
10 t s
L L = , we get R = R C
3.00 H = 1.00 10 3 = 1.00 k . 3.00 10 6 F
= RC = 1.00 10 3 3.00 10 6 F = 3.00 10 3 s = 3.00 ms
e
je
j
For t 0 , the current in the inductor is zero . At t = 0 , it starts to grow from zero toward 10.0 A with time constant 10.0 mH L = = 1.00 10 4 s . R 100
=
a
a
f
f
For 0 t 200 s , I = I max 1  e  t =
2.00
e j a10.0 Afe1  e At t = 200 s , I = a10.00 A fe1  e j = 8.65 A .
 t
10 000 t s
j
. FIG. P32.25
Thereafter, it decays exponentially as I = I 0 e I = 8.65 A e 10 000b t  200 sg s = 8.65 A e 10 000 t
, so for t 200 s , = 8.65 e 2.00 A e 10 000 t s =
a
f
a
f
s + 2.00
e
j
a63.9 Afe
10 000 t s
.
246 P32.26
Inductance
(a) (b)
I=
R
=
12.0 V = 1.00 A 12.0
Initial current is 1.00 A: V12 = 1.00 A 12.00 = 12.0 V
a
fa
f
V1 200 = 1.00 A 1 200 = 1.20 kV VL = 1.21 kV .
(c) FIG. P32.26
a
fb
g
I = I max e  Rt L :
and Solving so Thus,
dI R =  I max e  Rt L dt L dI  L = VL = I max R e  Rt L . dt 12.0 V = 1 212 V e 1 212 t
b
g
2.00
9.90 10 3 = e 606 t . t = 7.62 ms .
P32.27
=
L 0.140 = = 28.6 ms R 4.90 6.00 V = 1.22 A I max = = R 4.90 I = I max 1  e  t
(a)
e e
j
so
0. 220 = 1.22 1  e  t
e
(b) (c)
t
= 0.820 :
t =  ln 0.820 = 5.66 ms
a
e
f
j
FIG. P32.27
I = I max 1  e 10.0 0.028 6 = 1.22 A 1  e 350 = 1.22 A
j a
so
fe
j
I = I max e  t
and
0.160 = 1.22 e  t t =  ln 0.131 = 58.1 ms .
dI is the dt
a
f
P32.28
(a)
For a series connection, both inductors carry equal currents at every instant, so same for both. The voltage across the pair is dI dI dI = L1 + L 2 Leq so dt dt dt
Leq = L1 + L 2 . I = I 1 + I 2 and dI dI 1 dI 2 = + . dt dt dt
(b)
dI dI dI = L1 1 = L 2 2 = VL dt dt dt VL VL VL = + Thus, Leq L1 L2 Leq Leq
where and
1 1 1 = + . Leq L1 L 2
(c)
dI dI dI + Req I = L1 + IR1 + L 2 + IR 2 dt dt dt dI are separate quantities under our control, so functional equality requires Now I and dt both Leq = L1 + L 2 and Req = R1 + R 2 .
continued on next page
Chapter 32
247
(d)
V = Leq
dI dI dI dI dI 1 dI 2 = + + Req I = L1 1 + R1 I 1 = L 2 2 + R 2 I 2 where I = I 1 + I 2 and . dt dt dt dt dt dt 1 1 1 = + . Req R1 R 2 1 1 1 = + . Leq L1 L 2
We may choose to keep the currents constant in time. Then, We may choose to make the current swing through 0. Then,
This equivalent coil with resistance will be equivalent to the pair of real inductors for all other currents as well.
Section 32.3 P32.29 P32.30 L= (a)
Energy in a Magnetic Field
4 N B 200 3.70 10 1 1 = = 42.3 mH so U = LI 2 = 0.423 H 1.75 A I 1.75 2 2
e
j
a
fa
f
2
= 0.064 8 J .
The magnetic energy density is given by
=
4.50 T B2 = = 8.06 10 6 J m3 . 2 0 2 1.26 10 6 T m A
e
a
f
2
j
(b)
The magnetic energy stored in the field equals u times the volume of the solenoid (the volume in which B is nonzero). U = uV = 8.06 10 6 J m3
2
e
j a0.260 mf b0.031 0 mg
2 2
2
= 6.32 kJ
P32.31
L = 0 U=
N2A
= 0
a68.0f LMN e0.600 10
0.080 0
j OPQ
= 8.21 H
1 2 1 LI = 8. 21 10 6 H 0.770 A 2 2
e
ja
f
2
= 2.44 J
P32.32
(a)
U=
1 2 1 LI = L 2 2 2R
 RL t
FG IJ H K
g
2
=
L 2 8R2 so so
=
(b)
I=
FG IJ 1  e b H RK
a0.800fa500f = 27.8 J 8a30.0f FI = G J 1 e b g 2R H R K
2 2
 RL t
e
 RL t
b g
=
1 2
R t = ln 2 L P32.33 u =0
t=
L 0.800 ln 2 = ln 2 = 18.5 ms 30.0 R
E2 = 44.2 nJ m3 2
u=
B2 = 995 J m3 2 0
0
*P32.34
z
0
e 2 Rt L dt = 
L 2 Rt L 2 Rdt L 2 Rt L e e = L 2R 0 2R
z
FG H
IJ K
=
L  L L e  e0 = 01 = 2R 2R 2R
e
j
a f
248 P32.35
Inductance
(a) (b)
U=
1 2 1 LI = 4.00 H 0.500 A 2 2
a
fa
f
2
U = 0.500 J
When the current is 1.00 A, Kirchhoff's loop rule reads
+22.0 V  1.00 A 5.00  VL = 0 .
a
fa
f
Then VL = 17.0 V . The power being stored in the inductor is IVL = 1.00 A 17.0 V = 17.0 W .
a
fa
f
FIG. P32.35
(c) P32.36
P = IV = 0.500 A 22.0 V
a
fa
f
P = 11.0 W
I= I=
From Equation 32.7, (a) The maximum current, after a long time t , is
R
e1  e j .
 Rt L
= 2.00 A . R At that time, the inductor is fully energized and P = I V = 2.00 A 10.0 V = 20.0 W .
a f a
fa
f
(b) (c) (d)
Plost = I 2 R = 2.00 A
a
f a5.00 f =
2 2
20.0 W
Pinductor = I Vdrop = 0
U= LI 2 2
e j a10.0 Hfa2.00 Af =
2 E2 2 E2 B2 = 2 2 0
= 20.0 J u= B2 . 2 0
P32.37
We have Therefore B = E 0 0 =
u =0 0
and so
B 2 =0 0 E 2
6.80 10 5 V m 3.00 10 8 m s
= 2.27 10 3 T . B2 . 2 0
2 0 0
P32.38
The total magnetic energy is the volume integral of the energy density, u = Because B changes with position, u is not constant. For B = B0
FG R IJ HrK
2
,
u=
FB GH 2
I FG R IJ JK H r K
4
.
Next, we set up an expression for the magnetic energy in a spherical shell of radius r and thickness dr. Such a shell has a volume 4 r 2 dr , so the energy stored in it is dU = u 4 r 2 dr =
e
B j FGH 2 R IJK rdr .
2 0 0 4 2
We integrate this expression for r = R to r = to obtain the total magnetic energy outside the sphere. This gives U=
2 2 B0 R 3
0
=
2 5.00 10 5 T
e
j e6.00 10 mj e1.26 10 T m Aj
2 6 6
3
= 2.70 10 18 J .
Chapter 32
249
Section 32.4 P32.39
Mutual Inductance
I1 t = I max e t sin t with I max = 5.00 A , = 0.025 0 s 1 , and = 377 rad s
dI 1 = I max e  t  sin t + cos t . dt
af
b
g
At t = 0.800 s ,
dI 1 = 5.00 A s e 0.020 0  0.025 0 sin 0.800 377 + 377 cos 0.800 377 dt
b
g
b
g c
a fh
c
a fh
dI 1 = 1.85 10 3 A s . dt Thus, 2 = M dI 1 : dt M=  2 +3.20 V = = 1.73 mH . dI 1 dt 1.85 10 3 A s
P32.40
2 = M
dI 1 =  1.00 10 4 H 1.00 10 4 A s cos 1 000t dt
e
je
j b
g
b g
P32.41 P32.42
2 max
= 1.00 V
96.0 mV = 80.0 mH 1.20 A s
M=
2
dI 1 dt
=
Assume the long wire carries current I. Then the magnitude of the magnetic field it generates at I distance x from the wire is B = 0 , and this field passes perpendicularly through the plane of the 2 x loop. The flux through the loop is B = B dA = BdA = B dx =
z
z
za
FG H
f
0I 2
dx 0 I 1.70 = ln . x 2 0.400 0. 400 mm
1.70 mm
z
FG H
IJ K
The mutual inductance between the wire and the loop is then M= N 2 12 N 2 0 I N 1.70 = = 2 0 ln I1 2 I 0. 400 2
10
IJ K
a1.45f = 1e4 10
7
T m A 2.70 10 3 m 2
je
j a1.45f
M = 7.81 10
H = 781 pH
P32.43
(a)
6 N B BA 700 90.0 10 = = 18.0 mH M= 3.50 IA 6 A 400 300 10 = = 34.3 mH LA = IA 3.50
e
j
(b)
e
j
(c)
B = M
dI A =  18.0 mH 0.500 A s = 9.00 mV dt
a
fb
g
250 *P32.44
Inductance
The large coil produces this field at the center of the small coil:
2 2 x 2 + R1
e
2 N 1 0 I 1 R1
j
32
. The field is normal to
the area of the small coil and nearly uniform over this area, so it produces flux 12 =
2 N 1 0 I 1 R1 2 2 R 2 through the face area of the small coil. When current I 1 varies, this is the
2x +
e
2 3 2 R1
j
emf induced in the small coil:
2 = N2
2 2 N N R 2 R 2 dI dI N N R 2 R 2 d N 1 0 R1 R 2 I 1 =  1 2 0 13 2 2 1 =  M 1 so M = 1 2 0 13 2 2 . 2 2 dt 2 x 2 + R 2 3 2 dt dt 2 x 2 + R1 2 x 2 + R1 1
e
j
e
j
e
j
P32.45
With I = I 1 + I 2 , the voltage across the pair is: V =  L1 So, and dI 1 dI dI dI dI  M 2 =  L 2 2  M 1 =  Leq . dt dt dt dt dt  dI 1 V M dI 2 = + dt L1 L1 dt dI 2 M V M dI 2 + + = V dt L1 L1 dt + M2
L 2
a f
(a)
2
(b)
FIG. P32.45 [1]
e L L
By substitution, leads to Adding [1] to [2], So, 
1 2
j dI dt
2
= V L1  M .
b
g
dI 2 V M dI 1 = + dt L 2 L 2 dt
1 2
e L L e L L
+ M2 + M2
j dI = V bL dt
1
2
M .
g
[2]
1 2
j dI = V bL dt
1
+ L2  2 M .
g
Leq = 
L1 L 2  M 2 V = . dI dt L1 + L 2  2 M
Section 32.5 P32.46
Oscillations in an LC Circuit
At different times, U C C V L
b g
=
max
= UL
b g
max
so
LM 1 CaV f OP N2 Q
2
=
max
FG 1 LI IJ H2 K
2
max
I max =
a f
max
1.00 10 6 F 40.0 V = 0.400 A . 10.0 10 3 H
a
f
Chapter 32
251
P32.47 P32.48
LM 1 CaV f OP N2 Q
2
=
max
FG 1 LI IJ H2 K
2
max
so VC
b g
max
=
L 20.0 10 3 H I max = 0.100 A = 20.0 V C 0.500 10 6 F
a
f
When the switch has been closed for a long time, battery, resistor, and coil carry constant current I max = . When the switch is opened, R current in battery and resistor drops to zero, but the coil carries this same current for a moment as oscillations begin in the LC loop. FIG. P32.50
a f e0.500 10 Fja150 Vf a250 f C a V f C a V f R = = Then, L = I a50.0 Vf
2 2 2 6 2 2 max 2 2
We interpret the problem to mean that the voltage amplitude of these 1 1 2 2 oscillations is V , in C V = LI max . 2 2
2
= 0.281 H .
P32.49
This radio is a radiotelephone on a ship, according to frequency assignments made by international treaties, laws, and decisions of the National Telecommunications and Information Administration. 1 The resonance frequency is f0 = . 2 LC 1 1 Thus, C= = = 608 pF . 2 2 6 6 2 f 0 L 2 6.30 10 Hz 1.05 10 H
b
g
e
j e
j
P32.50
f=
1 2 LC f=
:
L=
b 2 f g C
2
1
=
2 120
a f e8.00 10 j
2 6 6
1
= 0.220 H
P32.51
(a)
1
2 LC
(b) (c) P32.52 (a)
Q = Qmax
I= f=
b0.082 0 Hge17.0 10 Fj cos t = b180 Cg cosb847 0.001 00g =
2
=
1
= 135 Hz
119 C
dQ =  Qmax sin t =  847 180 sin 0.847 = 114 mA dt 1 2 LC = 1 = 503 Hz
a fa f a
6
f
(b) (c)
a0.100 Hfe1.00 10 Fj Q = C = e1.00 10 Fja12.0 V f = 12.0 C
2
6
1 2 1 2 C = LI max 2 2 I max = C 1.00 10 6 F = 12 V = 37.9 mA L 0.100 H U= 1 2 1 C = 1.00 10 6 F 12.0 V 2 2
FIG. P32.52
(d)
At all times
e
ja
f
2
= 72.0 J .
252 P32.53
Inductance
=
1 LC
=
a3.30 Hfe840 10
Q 2C
2
1
12
F
j
= 1.899 10 4 rad s
Q = Q max cos t , I =
dQ =  Qmax sin t dt
6
(a)
UC =
e 105 10 =
cos 1.899 10 4 rad s 2.00 10 3 s 2 840 10 12
e
e
j je
je
jj
2
= 6.03 J
(b)
UL = UL
e105 10 Cj =
6
2 Qmax sin 2 t 1 2 1 2 LI = L 2 Qmax sin 2 t = 2 2 2C
b g
b g j=
0.529 J
2
sin 2 1.899 10 4 rad s 2.00 10 3 s
12
e 2e840 10
F
j
(c)
U total = UC + U L = 6.56 J
Section 32.6
The RLC Circuit 1 R  2L LC
P32.54
(a)
d =
FG IJ H K
2
=
e
2.20 10 3 1.80 10 6
je
1
F 7.60 G j GH 2e2.20 10
3
I J j JK
2
= 1.58 10 4 rad s
Therefore,
fd =
d = 2.51 kHz . 2
(b) P32.55 (a)
Rc =
4L = 69.9 C 1 LC =
0 =
a0.500fe0.100 10 j
6
1
= 4.47 krad s
(b)
d =
1 R  2L LC
FG IJ H K
2
= 4.36 krad s
(c) P32.56
0
= 2.53% lower
Choose to call positive current clockwise in Figure 32.21. It drains charge from the capacitor dQ . A clockwise trip around the circuit then gives according to I =  dt dI Q +  IR  L = 0 C dt Q dQ d dQ R+L + + = 0 , identical with Equation 32.28. C dt dt dt
Chapter 32
253
*P32.57
The period of damped oscillation is T = capacitor is Q = Qmax e  RT 1 0.99
2L
= Qmax e 2 R
2 . After one oscillation the charge returning to the d
2 L d
. The energy is proportional to the charge squared, so
after one oscillation it is U = U 0 e e 2 R
L d
 2 R L d
= 0.99U 0 . Then
=
2 2 = ln 1.010 1 = 0.001 005 L d
b
g
L d =
R2 2 2 1 = 1 250 = L  2 LC 4L 0.001 005 2 L  C 4
1.563 10 6 2 =
a f
F GH
I JK
12
2
L = 1.563 10 6 2 C We are also given
= 2 10 3 s =
LC = 1
1 LC
2
e2 10 sj
3
= 2.533 10 8 s 2
Solving simultaneously, C = 2.533 10 8 s 2 L L2 = 1.563 10 6 2 L = 0.199 H 2.533 10 8 s 2 2.533 10 8 s 2 C= = 127 nF = C 0.199 H P32.58 (a)
Q = Qmax e  Rt 2 L cos d t 0.500 = e  Rt 2 L
t= 2L 2L ln 0.500 = 0.693 R R
so and
I max e  Rt 2 L
Rt =  ln 0.500 2L
a
f
a a
f f
FG IJ H K
so (half as long)
(b)
2 U 0 Qmax and U = 0.500U 0
Q = 0.500Qmax = 0.707Qmax
t=
2L 2L ln 0.707 = 0.347 R R
FG IJ H K
254
Inductance
Additional Problems *P32.59 (a) Let Q represent the magnitude of the opposite charges on the plates of a parallel plate capacitor, the two plates having area A and separation d. The negative plate creates electric Q Q2 toward itself. It exerts on the positive plate force F = field E = toward the 2 0 A 2 0 A Q . The energy density is negative plate. The total field between the plates is 0 A uE = Q2 Q2 1 1 0 E 2 = 0 2 2 = . Modeling this as a negative or inward pressure, we 2 2 0 A 2 0 A 2 Q2 , in agreement with our first analysis. 2 0 A 2
have for the force on one plate F = PA = (b)
The lower of the two current sheets shown creates J above it magnetic field B = 0 s  k . Let and w 2 represent the length and width of each sheet. The upper sheet carries current J s w and feels force
e j
Js Js y x z FIG. P32.59(b)
J w J s2 F = I B = J s w 0 s i k = 0 j. 2 2
e j
The force per area is P = (c)
0 J s2 F = . w 2
Between the two sheets the total magnetic field is magnitude B = 0 J s
0 Js J  k + 0 s  k = 0 J s k , with 2 2 . Outside the space they enclose, the fields of the separate sheets are
e j
e j
in opposite directions and add to zero . (d) (e) P32.60 uB = 1 2 0 B2 =
2 0 J s2 0 J s2 = 2 0 2
This energy density agrees with the magnetic pressure found in part (b). 1 LC .
With Q = Qmax at t = 0 , the charge on the capacitor at any time is Q = Q max cos t where = The energy stored in the capacitor at time t is then
2 Q 2 Qmax cos 2 t = U 0 cos 2 t . = 2C 2C 1 1 cos t = and When U = U 0 , 4 2
U=
1 t = rad . 3 t2 2 = . LC 9 L= 9t 2 . 2C
Therefore, The inductance is then:
t LC
=
3
or
Chapter 32
255
P32.61
(a)
L = L
t
d 20.0t dI =  1.00 mH = 20.0 mV dt dt
a
fa
f
(b)
Q = Idt =
0
z za
t 0
20.0t dt = 10.0t 2
f
VC =
Q 10.0t 2 = =  10.0 MV s 2 t 2 C 1.00 10 6 F
e
j
(c)
10.0t 2 Q2 1 2 1 2 LI , or When 1.00 10 3 20.0t , 6 2C 2 2 2 1.00 10
then 100 t 4 400 10 9 P32.62 (a)
e
e e jt
j
2
j e
ja
f
2
. The earliest time this is true is at t = 4.00 10 9 s = 63.2 s .
L = L
I= dQ , dt
dI d = L Kt =  LK dt dt so Q = Idt = Ktdt =
0 0
a f
(b)
z z
t t
1 2 Kt 2
and 1 C VC 2
VC =
Q Kt 2 =  C 2C
(c)
When Thus
b g
2
=
1 2 LI , 2
1 K 2t 4 1 = L K 2t2 C 2 2 2 4C
F GH
I JK
e
j
t = 2 LC
2
P32.63
1 Q2 1 Q = 2 C 2C 2
FG IJ H K
+
1 2 LI 2
so
I= B =
3Q 2 . 4CL LI Q = N 2N 3L C
The flux through each turn of the coil is where N is the number of turns. P32.64 B=
0 NI 2 r
B = BdA = L=
(a)
z
z
b a
0 NI NIh b dr 0 NIh b = hdr = 0 ln a 2 r 2 a r 2
z
N B 0N2h b ln = I a 2
FG IJ HK
FG IJ HK
FIG. P32.64
(b)
L=
0 500
(c)
Lappx
a f b0.010 0g lnFG 12.0 IJ = 91.2 H H 10.0 K 2 N F A I a500 f F 2.00 10 = G J = 2 GH 0.110 2 H R K
2 0 2 0 2
4
m2
I= JK
90.9 H , only 0.3% different.
256 P32.65
Inductance
(a)
At the center,
B=
2 R +0
e
N 0 IR 2
2
2 3 2
j
=
N 0 I . 2R
So the coil creates flux through itself When the current it carries changes, so (b) 2 r = 3 0.3 m
B = BA cos =
N 0 I R 2 cos 0 = N 0 IR . 2R 2
L = N
L
d B dI dI N N 0 R =  L 2 dt dt dt
FG IJ H K
2 N 0R . 2
a
f
so
r 0.14 m L 1 2 4 10 7 T m A 0.14 m = 2.8 10 7 H 2 L ~ 100 nH
e je
ja
f
(c) P32.66 (a)
7 L 2.8 10 V s A = = 1.0 10 9 s R 270 V A
L ~ 1 ns R
If unrolled, the wire forms the diagonal of a 0.100 m (10.0 cm) rectangle as shown. The length of this rectangle is L =
9.80 m L FIG. P32.66(a)
0.100 m
a9.80 mf  a0.100 mf
2
2
.
The mean circumference of each turn is C = 2 r , where r = radius of each turn. The number of turns is then: N= 9.80 m  0.100 m L = = 127 . C 2 24.0 + 0.644 2 10 3 m 1.70 10 8 m 10.0 m = = 0.522 2 A 0.322 10 3 m
24.0 + 0.644 mm is the mean 2
a a
f a f
2
f
2
(b)
R=
e
ja
f
e
j
(c)
L=
N 2 A 800 0 L = C
800 4 10 7 0.100 m
L=
e
FG IJ ar f H K j FG a9.80 mf  a0.100 mf IJ GH a24.0 + 0.644f 10 m JK
2 2 2 2 3
2
LMFG 24.0 + 0.644 IJ 10 NH 2 K
3
m
OP Q
2
L = 7.68 10 2 H = 76.8 mH
Chapter 32
257
P32.67
From Ampere's law, the magnetic field at distance r R is found as: B 2 r = 0 J r 2 = 0
b g
=
R 0
e j
g
F I GH R
2
I e r j , or B = Ir JK 2 R
2 0
2
.
The magnetic energy per unit length within the wire is then U
z
I2 R I 2 R4 0I2 B2 = . 2 rdr = 0 4 r 3 dr = 0 4 2 0 4 16 4 R 0 4 R
b
z
F I GH JK
This is independent of the radius of the wire. P32.68 The primary circuit (containing the battery and solenoid) is an RL circuit with R = 14.0 , and L= (a)
0N 2 A
e4 10 jb12 500g e1.00 10 j = 0.280 H . =
7 2 4
0.070 0
The time for the current to reach 63.2% of the maximum value is the time constant of the circuit:
=
L 0.280 H = = 0.020 0 s = 20.0 ms . R 14.0 FIG. P32.68 FG I IJ = LFG I  0 IJ H t K H t K F V IJ = 0.632FG 60.0 V IJ = 2.71 A . = 0.632G I = 0.632 I HRK H 14.0 K F 2.71 A I = 37.9 V . = a0.280 H fG H 0.020 0 s JK
(b)
The solenoid's average back emf is where Thus,
L = L
f
f
max
L
(c)
The average rate of change of flux through each turn of the overwrapped concentric coil is the same as that through a turn on the solenoid: 4 10 7 T m A 12 500 0.070 0 m 2.71 A 1.00 10 4 m 2 B 0 n I A = = 0.020 0 s t t = 3.04 mV
a f e
jb
ga
fe
j
(d)
The magnitude of the average induced emf in the coil is L = N the average induced current is I=
FG IJ and magnitude of H t K
B
L N B 820 = = 3.04 10 3 V = 0.104 A = 104 mA . R R t 24.0
FG H
IJ K
e
j
258 P32.69
Inductance
Lefthand loop: Outside loop: Eliminating I 2 gives
b g  b I + I gR
2
 I + I 2 R1  I 2 R2 = 0 .
1
L
dI =0. dt
dI =0. dt This is of the same form as Equation 32.6, so its solution is of the same form as Equation 32.7: It = 1  e  R t L . R
 IR  L
FIG. P32.69
af af
e
j
But R = Thus P32.70
R1 R 2 R2 and = , so R1 + R 2 R1 + R 2
R 2 R1 + R 2 = . = R R1 R 2 R1 + R 2 R1
It =
b b
1  e  R t L R1
e
g g j.
When switch is closed, steady current I 0 = 1.20 A . When the switch is opened after being closed a long time, the current in the right loop is
I = I 0 e  R2 t
so e Rt L = I0 I
L
and
Therefore, P32.71 (a)
1.00 0.150 s R2 t = = 0.095 6 H = 95.6 mH . L= ln I 0 I ln 1.20 A 0.250 A
b g
a
I Rt = ln 0 . L I
b
fa
FG IJ H K
f
FIG. P32.70
g
While steadystate conditions exist, a 9.00 mA flows clockwise around the right loop of the circuit. Immediately after the switch is opened, a 9.00 mA current will flow around the outer loop of the circuit. Applying Kirchhoff's loop rule to this loop gives: + 0  2.00 + 6.00 10 3 9.00 10 3 A = 0 + 0 = 72.0 V with end b at the higher potential
a
f
e
j
(b)
FIG. P32.71(b) (c) After the switch is opened, the current around the outer loop decays as
I = I max e  Rt L with I max = 9.00 mA , R = 8.00 k , and L = 0.400 H .
Thus, when the current has reached a value I = 2.00 mA , the elapsed time is: t=
FG L IJ lnFG I IJ = FG 0.400 H IJ lnFG 9.00 IJ = 7.52 10 H R K H I K H 8.00 10 K H 2.00 K
max 3
5
s = 75.2 s .
Chapter 32
259
P32.72
(a)
The instant after the switch is closed, the situation is as shown in the circuit diagram of Figure (a). The requested quantities are: I L = 0 , IC =
IL = 0 V = 0 + L Q=0 VC= 0 I C = 0 /R I R = 0 /R VR = 0 +
0
0 , IR = 0 R R
VL = 0 , VC = 0 , VR = 0 (b) After the switch has been closed a long time, the steadystate conditions shown in Figure (b) will exist. The currents and voltages are: I L = 0 , IC = 0 , I R = 0 VL = 0 , VC = 0 , VR = 0
Figure (a) IL = 0 V = 0 + L
Q = C 0 VC= 0
IR = 0 VR = 0 +
0
Figure (b) FIG. P32.72 P32.73 When the switch is closed, as shown in figure (a), the current in the inductor is I: 12.0  7.50 I  10.0 = 0 I = 0.267 A . When the switch is opened, the initial current in the inductor remains at 0.267 A.
IR = V :
a0.267 AfR 80.0 V
R 300
(a) FIG. P32.73
(b)
P32.74
(a)
L1 =
2 0 N1 A 1
e4 10 =
7
T m A 1 000
jb
g e1.00 10
2 1
4
m2
0.500 m
j = 2.51 10
1
4
H = 251 H
(b)
M= M=
N 2 2 N 2 1 N 2 BA N 2 0 N 1 = = = I1 I1 I1 I1
b
gI
1
A
=
0 N1 N 2 A
e4 10
7
T m A 1 000 100 1.00 10 4 m 2 0.500 m
jb
ga fe
j = 2.51 10
5
H = 25.1 H
(c)
1 = M
dI 2 dI dQ1 M dI 2 , or I 1 R1 =  M 2 and I 1 = = dt dt dt R1 dt
tf
M Q1 =  R1 Q1 =
z
0
dI 2 = 
5
MI 2 i M M I 2 f  I 2i =  0  I 2i = R1 R1 R1
d
i
b
g
e2.51 10
H 1.00 A
ja
1 000
f = 2.51 10
8
C = 25.1 nC
260 P32.75
Inductance
(a) (b) (c)
It has a magnetic field, and it stores energy, so L =
2U I2
is nonzero.
Every field line goes through the rectangle between the conductors.
= LI so
L=
1 = I I 1 I
wa a
w a
y=a wa
z
BdA
Thus P32.76 For an RL circuit, I t = I max e R t = 10 9 L
F I + I I = 2 Ix dy = 2 x ln y GH 2 y 2 bw  yg JK I z 2 y 2 x F w  aI L= lnG H a JK .
L=
z
xdy
0
0
0
0
.
a
0
af
 RL t
b g
:
It R  RL t = 1  10 9 = e b g 1  t I max L so Rmax
af
e3.14 10 je10 j = = b2.50 yrge3.16 10 s yrj
8 9 7
3.97 10 25 .
(If the ring were of purest copper, of diameter 1 cm, and crosssectional area 1 mm 2 , its resistance would be at least 10 6 ). P32.77 (a) (b) UB = 1 2 1 LI = 50.0 H 50.0 10 3 A 2 2
a
fe
j
2
= 6.25 10 10 J
Two adjacent turns are parallel wires carrying current in the same direction. Since the loops have such large radius, a onemeter section can be regarded as straight. Then one wire creates a field of B=
0I . 2 r
This causes a force on the next wire of F = I B sin giving F=I
0I I2 sin 90 = 0 . 2 r 2 r
N A
2
Evaluating the force,
F = 4 10
e
7
a1.00 mf 50.0 10 A j 2 ea0.250 mf j
3
2
= 2 000 N .
Chapter 32
261
P32.78
P = IV
From Ampere's law, (a)
I=
P 1.00 10 9 W = = 5.00 10 3 A V 200 10 3 V 0 I enclosed . 2 r
B 2 r = 0 I enclosed or B =
b g
At r = a = 0.020 0 m ,
I enclosed = 5.00 10 3 A
FIG. P32.73
and
B=
e4 10
7
T m A 5.00 10 3 A
2 0.020 0 m
b b
je je
g
j = 0.050 0 T = j = 0.020 0 T =
50.0 mT .
(b)
At r = b = 0.050 0 m , and
2
I enclosed = I = 5.00 10 3 A
e4 10 B=
7
T m A 5.00 10 3 A
2 0.050 0 m
2
g
20.0 mT .
(c)
U = udV =
z
z
b a 7
Br
a f b2 r dr g = I
2 0
0
4
2
z
b
b dr 0 I 2 = ln a r 4 a
3
FG IJ HK
6
e4 10 U=
(d)
T m A 5.00 10 3 A 4
je
j e1 000 10 mj lnFG 5.00 cmIJ = 2.29 10 H 2.00 cm K
J = 2.29 MJ
The magnetic field created by the inner conductor exerts a force of repulsion on the current in the outer sheath. The strength of this field, from part (b), is 20.0 mT. Consider a small rectangular section of the outer cylinder of length and width w. It carries a current of and experiences an outward force
3
F w I e5.00 10 AjGH 2 b0.050 0 mg JK
3 3
e5.00 10 Ajw e20.0 10 Tj sin 90.0 . 2 b0.050 0 mg F F e5.00 10 A je 20.0 10 Tj = = The pressure on it is P = = A w 2 b0.050 0 mg
F = I B sin =
3 3
318 Pa .
262 P32.79
Inductance
(a)
B=
0 NI
=
e4 10 e e
7
T m A 1 400 2.00 A 1.20 m
jb
ga
f=
2.93 10 3 T upward
b
g
(b)
2.93 10 3 T B2 u= = = 3.42 J m3 2 0 2 4 10 7 T m A
j
2
j e
jFGH 1 N J m IJK = 3.42 N m 1
2
= 3.42 Pa
(c)
To produce a downward magnetic field, the surface of the superconductor must carry a clockwise current. The vertical component of the field of the solenoid exerts an inward force on the superconductor. The total horizontal force is zero. Over the top end of the solenoid, its field diverges and has a radially outward horizontal component. This component exerts upward force on the clockwise superconductor current. The total force on the core is upward . You can think of it as a force of repulsion between the solenoid with its north end pointing up, and the core, with its north end pointing down.
(d)
(e)
F = PA = 3.42 Pa 1.10 10 2 m
a
fLMN e
j OPQ =
2
1.30 10 3 N
Note that we have not proven that energy density is pressure. In fact, it is not in some cases; Equation 21.2 shows that the pressure is twothirds of the translational energy density in an ideal gas.
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P32.2 P32.4 P32.6 P32.8 P32.10 P32.12 P32.14 P32.16 P32.18 P32.20 P32.22 P32.24 1.36 H 240 nWb 19.2 Wb (a) 360 mV ; (b) 180 mV ; (c) t = 3.00 s (a) 15.8 H ; (b) 12.6 mH see the solution 1.92 see the solution 92.8 V 30.0 mH 7.67 mH (a) 1.00 k; (b) 3.00 ms P32.40 P32.42 P32.44 P32.28 P32.30 P32.32 P32.34 P32.36 P32.38 P32.26 (a) 1.00 A ; (b) V12 = 12.0 V , V1 200 = 1.20 kV , VL = 1.21 kV ; (c) 7.62 ms (a), (b), and (c) see the solution; (d) yes; see the solution (a) 8.06 MJ m3 ; (b) 6.32 kJ (a) 27.8 J ; (b) 18.5 ms see the solution (a) 20.0 W ; (b) 20.0 W ; (c) 0;(d) 20.0 J
2 2 B0 R 3
0
= 2.70 10 18 J
1.00 V 781 pH M=
2 2 N1 N 2 0 R1 R 2 2 2 x 2 + R1
e
j
32
Chapter 32
263
P32.46 P32.48 P32.50 P32.52
400 mA 281 mH 220 mH (a) 503 Hz ; (b) 12.0 C ; (c) 37.9 mA ; (d) 72.0 J (a) 2.51 kHz; (b) 69.9 see the solution (a) 0.693 9t 2
P32.64
(a) see the solution; (b) 91.2 H ; (c) 90.9 H , 0.3% smaller (a) 127; (b) 0.522 ; (c) 76.8 mH (a) 20.0 ms; (b) 37.9 V; (c) 3.04 mV; (d) 104 mA 95.6 mH (a) I L = 0 , I C =
P32.66 P32.68 P32.70 P32.72
P32.54 P32.56 P32.58
FG 2L IJ ; (b) 0.347FG 2L IJ H RK H RK
P32.74 P32.76  Kt 2 ; 2C P32.78
0 , IR = 0 , R R VL = 0 , VC = 0 , VR = 0 ; (b) I L = 0 , I C = 0 , I R = 0 , VL = 0 , VC = 0 , VR = 0
P32.60
(a) 251 H ; (b) 25.1 H ; (c) 25.1 nC 3.97 10 25 (a) 50.0 mT; (b) 20.0 mT; (c) 2.29 MJ; (d) 318 Pa
C
(a) L =  LK ; (b) Vc = (c) t = 2 LC
2
P32.62
33
Alternating Current Circuits
CHAPTER OUTLINE
33.1 33.2 33.3 33.4 33.5 33.6 33.7 33.8 33.9 AC Sources Resistors in an AC Circuit Inductors in an AC Circuit Capacitors in an AC Circuit The RLC Series Circuit Power in an AC Circuit Resonance in a Series RLC Circuit The Transformer and Power Transmission Rectifiers and Filters
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q33.1 If the current is positive half the time and negative half the time, the average current can be zero. The rms current is not zero. By squaring all of the values of the current, they all become positive. The average (mean) of these positive values is also positive, as is the square root of the average. Vavg = Vmax Vmax , Vrms = 2 2
Q33.2 Q33.3
AC ammeters and voltmeters read rms values. With an oscilloscope you can read a maximum voltage, or test whether the average is zero. Suppose the voltage across an inductor varies sinusoidally. Then the current in the inductor will have its instantaneous 1 peak positive value cycle after the voltage peaks. The voltage 4 1 is zero and going positive cycle (90) before the current is 4 zero and going positive.
Q33.4
Q33.5
If it is run directly from the electric line, a fluorescent light tube can dim considerably twice in every cycle of the AC current that drives it. Looking at one sinusoidal cycle, the voltage passes through zero twice. We don't notice the flickering due to a phenomenon called retinal imaging. We do not notice that the lights turn on and off since our retinas continue to send information to our brains after the light has turned off. For example, most TV screens refresh at between 60 to 75 times per second, yet we do not see the evening news flickering. Home video cameras record information at frequencies as low as 30 frames per second, yet we still see them as continuous action. A vivid display of retinal imaging is that persistent purple spot you see after someone has taken a picture of you with a flash camera. The capacitive reactance is proportional to the inverse of the frequency. At higher and higher frequencies, the capacitive reactance approaches zero, making a capacitor behave like a wire. As the frequency goes to zero, the capacitive reactance approaches infinitythe resistance of an open circuit. The second letter in each word stands for the circuit element. For an inductor L, the emf leads the current Ithus ELI. For a capacitor C, the current leads the voltage across the device. In a circuit in which the capacitive reactance is larger than the inductive reactance, the current leads the source emfthus ICE. 265
Q33.6
Q33.7
266 Q33.8
Alternating Current Circuits
The voltages are not added in a scalar form, but in a vector form, as shown in the phasor diagrams throughout the chapter. Kirchhoff's loop rule is true at any instant, but the voltages across different circuit elements are not simultaneously at their maximum values. Do not forget that an inductor can induce an emf in itself and that the voltage across it is 90 ahead of the current in the circuit in phase. In an RLC series circuit, the phase angle depends on the source frequency. At very low frequency the capacitor dominates the impedance and the phase angle is near 90. The phase angle is zero at the resonance frequency, where the inductive and capacitive reactances are equal. At very high frequencies approaches +90 . 90 90 . The extremes are reached when there is no significant resistance in the circuit. The resistance remains unchanged, the inductive resistance doubles, and the capacitive reactance is reduced by one half. The power factor, as seen in equation 33.29, is the cosine of the phase angle between the current and applied voltage. Maximum power will be delivered if V and I are in phase. If V and I are 90 out of phase, the source voltage drives a net current of zero in each cycle and the average power is zero. The person is doing work at a rate of P = Fv cos . One can consider the emf as the "force" that moves the charges through the circuit, and the current as the "speed" of the moving charges. The cos factor measures the effectiveness of the cause in producing the effect. Theta is an angle in real space for the vacuum cleaner and phi is the analogous angle of phase difference between the emf and the current in the circuit. As mentioned in Question 33.5, lights that are powered by alternating current flicker or get slightly brighter and dimmer at twice the frequency of the AC power source. Even if you tried using two banks of lights, one driven by AC 180 of phase from the other, you would not have a stable light source, but one that exhibits a "ripple" in intensity. In 1881, an assassin shot President James Garfield. The bullet was lost in his body. Alexander Graham Bell invented the metal detector in an effort to save the President's life. The coil is preserved in the Smithsonian Institution. The detector was thrown off by metal springs in Garfield's mattress, a new invention itself. Surgeons went hunting for the bullet in the wrong place and Garfield died. As seen in Example 33.8, it is far more economical to transmit at high voltage than at low voltage, as the I 2 R loss on the transmission line is significantly lower. Transmitting power at high voltage permits the use of stepdown transformers to make "low" voltages and high currents available to the end user. Insulation and safety limit the voltage of a transmission line. For an underground cable, the thickness and dielectric strength of the insulation between the conductors determines the maximum voltage that can be applied, just as with a capacitor. For an overhead line on towers, the designer must consider electrical breakdown of the surrounding air, possible accidents, sparking across the insulating supports, ozone production, and inducing voltages in cars, fences, and the roof gutters of nearby houses. Nuisance effects include noise, electrical noise, and a prankster lighting a handheld fluorescent tube under the line. No. A voltage is only induced in the secondary coil if the flux through the core changes in time.
Q33.9
Q33.10 Q33.11 Q33.12
Q33.13
Q33.14
Q33.15
Q33.16
Q33.17
Q33.18
Chapter 33
267
Q33.19
This person needs to consider the difference between the power delivered by a power plant and I 2 R losses in transmission lines. At lower voltages, transmission lines must carry higher currents to transmit the same power, as seen in Example 33.8. The high transmitted current at low voltage actually results in more internal energy production than a lower current at high voltage. In his 2 V , the V does not represent the line voltage but the potential difference between the formula R ends of one conductor. This is very small when the current is small.
a f
Q33.20
The Q factor determines the selectivity of the radio receiver. For example, a receiver with a very low Q factor will respond to a wide range of frequencies and might pick up several adjacent radio stations at the same time. To discriminate between 102.5 MHz and 102.7 MHz requires a highQ circuit. Typically, lowering the resistance in the circuit is the way to get a higher quality resonance. Both coils are wrapped around the same core so that nearly all of the magnetic flux created by the primary passes through the secondary coil, and thus induces current in the secondary when the current in the primary changes. The frequency of a DC signal is zero, making the capacitive reactance at DC infinite. The capacitor then acts as an open switch. An AC signal has a nonzero frequency, and thus the capacitive reactance is finite, allowing a signal to pass from Circuit A to Circuit B.
Q33.21
Q33.22
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 33.1 Section 33.2 P33.1 P33.2 AC Sources Resistors in an AC Circuit
v t = Vmax sin t = 2 Vrms sin t = 200 2 sin 2 100 t = Vrms = 170 V 2 = 120 V
2
af
b g
b g
a f a283 V f sina628tf
(a)
P=
bV g
rms
R
R=
a120 Vf
2
75.0 W
= 193
(b) P33.3
R=
a120 Vf
100 W
2
= 144
Each meter reads the rms value. Vrms = I rms = 100 V 2 = 70.7 V
Vrms 70.7 V = = 2.95 A R 24.0 FIG. P33.3
268 P33.4
Alternating Current Circuits
(a)
v R = Vmax sin t
v R = 0.250 Vmax , so sin t = 0. 250 , or t = sin 1 0.250 . The smallest angle for which this is true is t = 0.253 rad Thus, if t = 0.010 0 s , 0.253 rad = 25.3 rad s . 0.010 0 s
b
g
a
f
=
(b)
The second time when v R = 0.250 Vmax , t = sin 1 0.250 again. For this occurrence, t =  0.253 rad = 2.89 rad (to understand why this is true, recall the identity sin  = sin from trigonometry). Thus,
b
g
a
f
a
f
t= P33.5
2.89 rad = 0.114 s . 25.3 rad s becomes 0.600 = sin 0.007 00 .
i R = I max sin t Thus, and = 91.9 rad s = 2 f
b0.007 00g = sin a0.600f = 0.644
1
b
g
so
f = 14.6 Hz .
P33.6
P = I rms Vrms and Vrms = 120 V for each bulb (parallel circuit), so:
I1 = I 2 = I3 =
b
g
P1 Vrms 120 V 150 W = = 1.25 A , and R1 = = = 96.0 = R 2 Vrms 120 V 1.25 A I1
P3 Vrms 100 W 120 V = = 0.833 A , and R3 = = = 144 . Vrms 120 V 0.833 A I3
P33.7
Vmax = 15.0 V and Rtotal = 8. 20 + 10.4 = 18.6 I max = Vmax 15.0 V = = 0.806 A = 2 I rms Rtotal 18.6
2
2 Pspeaker = I rms Rspeaker =
FG 0.806 A IJ a10.4 f = H 2 K
3.38 W
Section 33.3 P33.8
Inductors in an AC Circuit 80.0 mA 2 = 56.6 mA
For I max = 80.0 mA , I rms =
bX g
L min
=
Vrms 50.0 V = = 884 I rms 0.056 6 A XL 884 7.03 H 2 f 2 20.0
X L = 2 fL L =
a f
Chapter 33
269
P33.9
(a)
XL = L=
Vmax 100 = = 13.3 I max 7.50 = 13.3 = 0.042 4 H = 42.4 mH 2 50.0
XL
a f
(b)
XL =
Vmax 100 = = 40.0 2.50 I max
=
XL 40.0 = = 942 rad s L 42.4 10 3
P33.10
At 50.0 Hz, X L = 2 50.0 Hz L = 2 50.0 Hz Vmax = XL 2 Vrms XL
a
f
a
X fFGH 2 a60.0 Hzf IJK = 50..0 a54.0 f = 45.0 60 0
L 60.0 Hz
I max =
b
g = 2 a100 V f =
45.0
3.14 A .
P33.11
IJ a f a fb K b ge i atf = a5.60 A f sina1.59 radf = 5.60 A
iL t =
af
80.0 V sin 65.0 0.015 5  2 Vmax = sin t  L 2 65.0 rad s 70.0 10 3 H
FG H
g
j
L
P33.12
= 2 f = 2 60.0 s = 377 rad s
X L = L = 377 s 0.020 0 V s A = 7.54 I rms = Vrms 120 V = = 15.9 A XL 7.54
b
b
gb
g
g
I max = 2 I rms = 2 15.9 A = 22.5 A i t = I max U= 1 2 Li 2
af
a f F 2 a60.0f 1 s IJ = a22.5 Af sin 120 = 19.5 A sin t = a 22.5 A f sinG H s 180 K 1 = b0.020 0 V s A ga19.5 A f = 3.80 J 2
2
P33.13
L=
N B X VL , max where B is the flux through each turn. N B , max = LI max = L I XL 2 VL , rms 2 f
d
i
N B , max =
d
i=
120 V s
FG T C m IJ FG N m IJ FG J IJ = 2 a60.0f H N s K H J K H V C K
0.450 T m 2 .
270
Alternating Current Circuits
Section 33.4 P33.14 (a)
Capacitors in an AC Circuit XC = 1 1 : < 175 2 f C 2 f 22.0 10 6
e
j
2 22.0 10 6 175 (b) XC
e
1
<f ja f
f > 41.3 Hz
1 1 , so X 44 = X 22 : X C < 87.5 C 2 2 Vrms XC
a f
a f
P33.15
I max = 2 I rms = (a) (b)
b
g = 2 bV g2 f C
rms 6
I max = 2 120 V 2 60.0 s 2.20 10 6 C V = 141 mA I max =
a f b ge j 2 a 240 V f2 b50.0 sge 2.20 10 F j = 235 mA
2 Vrms =
P33.16 P33.17 P33.18
Q max = C Vmax = C
b
g
b
g
2C Vrms
b
g j
I max = Vmax C = 48.0 V 2 90.0 s 1 3.70 10 6 F = 100 mA XC = 1 1 = = 2.65 C 2 60.0 s 1.00 10 3 C V
b
g
a
fa fe
je
vC t = Vmax sin t , to be zero at t = 0 2 120 V Vmax 60 s 1 + 90.0 = 64.0 A sin 120+90.0 = 32.0 A iC = sin t + = sin 2 XC 2.65 180 s 1
af
b
ge
b
g
a
j f LM N
OP a Q
f a
f
Section 33.5 P33.19 (a)
The RLC Series Circuit
(b)
a fe j 1 1 X = = = 719 C 2 a50.0 fe 4.43 10 j Z = R + b X  X g = 500 + a126  719 f = 776 V = I Z = e 250 10 ja776f = 194 V F X  X IJ = tan FG 126  719 IJ = 49.9 . Thus, the = tan G H 500 K H R K
X L = L = 2 50.0 400 10 3 = 126
C 6 2 L C 2 2 2 max max 3 1 L C 1
FIG. P33.19 Current leads the voltage.
P33.20
L=
f=
1 1 = = C LC = 2.79 kHz
1
e57.0 10 je57.0 10 j
6 6
= 1.75 10 4 rad s
2
Chapter 33
271
P33.21
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
X L = L = 2 50.0 s 1 250 10 3 H = 78.5 XC = 1 = 2 50.0 s 1 2.00 10 6 F C
e
je
j
e
je
j
1
= 1.59 k
Z = R 2 + XL  XC I max =
b
g
2
= 1.52 k
Vmax 210 V = = 138 mA Z 1.52 10 3
= tan 1
LM X N
b
L
 XC = tan 1 10.1 = 84.3 R
OP Q
a
f
P33.22
(a)
Z = R 2 + X L  XC
X L = L = 100 0.160 = 16.0 XC = 1 1 = = 101 C 100 99.0 10 6
a fa
g
2
f
= 68.0 2 + 16.0  101
a
f
2
= 109
a fe
j
(b) (c)
I max = tan =
Vmax 40.0 V = = 0.367 A 109 Z
X L  X C 16.0  101 = = 1.25 : 68.0 R = 0.896 rad = 51.3
I max = 0.367 A
P33.23
= 100 rad s
= 0.896 rad = 51.3
X L = 2 f L = 2 60.0 0.460 = 173 1 1 = = 126 XC = 2 f C 2 60.0 21.0 10 6
a fa
f
a fe
j
(a)
X L  X C 173  126 = = 0.314 150 R = 0.304 rad = 17.4 tan = Since X L > X C , is positive; so voltage leads the current .
(b) *P33.24
For the sourcecapacitor circuit, the rms source voltage is Vs = 25.1 mA X C . For the circuit with resistor, Vs = 15.7 mA
a
inductor, Vs = 68.2 mA X L  X C Vs = I R 2 + X L  X C
a
f
f
R +
2
2 XC
= 25.1 mA X C . This gives R = 1.247 X C . For the circuit with ideal
C.
a f = a 25.1 mA f X
C 2
a
f
So X L  X C = 0.368 0 X C . Now for the full circuit
b
g
2 2
a25.1 mAfX
C
=I
b1.247 X g + b0.368 X g
C
I = 19.3 mA
272 P33.25
Alternating Current Circuits
XC = Z=
1 1 = = 1.33 10 8 2 f C 2 60.0 Hz 20.0 10 12 F
a
fe
j
e50.0 10 j + e1.33 10 j
3 2 8 rms body
2
1.33 10 8
I rms =
b V g
P33.26 XC =
L
5 000 V Vrms = = 3.77 10 5 A 8 Z 1.33 10
= I rms R body = 3.77 10 5 A 50.0 10 3 = 1.88 V
e
je
j
a fe j X = L = 2 a50.0fe185 10 j = 58.1 Z = R + b X  X g = a 40.0f + a58.1  49.0f
3 2 L C 2 2
1 1 = = 49.0 C 2 50.0 65.0 10 6
2
= 41.0 FIG. P33.26
I max = (a) (b) (c) (d) P33.27
Vmax 150 = = 3.66 A 41.0 Z
VR = I max R = 3.66 40 = 146 V VL = I max X L = 3.66 58.1 = 212.5 = 212 V VC = I max X C = 3.66 49.0 = 179.1 V = 179 V VL  VC = 212.5  179.1 = 33.4 V
a fa f
a fa f
a fa f
FG 500 s IJ a0.200 Hf = 200 H K L F 500 s IJ e11.0 10 FjOP 1 = M 2 G X = K C N H Q Z = R + b X  X g = 319 and F X  X IJ = 20.0 = tan G H R K
X L = L = 2
C 1 1 6 2 L C 2 1 L C
R = 300
XL = 200
1
= 90.9
XL  XC = 109
{
Z
R = 300
XC = 90.9
FIG. P33.27
*P33.28
Let X c represent the initial capacitive reactance. Moving the plates to half their original separation 1 doubles the capacitance and cuts X C = in half. For the current to double, the total impedance C must be cut in half: Zi = 2Z f , R 2 + R  XC R 2 + X L  XC XC 2
b
g
2
= 2 R2 + XL 
b
g
2
= 4 R2 + R 
F GH
FG H
IJ IJ KK
2
FG H
XC 2
IJ K
2
,
2 2 2 R 2  2 RX C + X C = 8 R 2  4RX C + X C
XC = 3 R
Chapter 33
273
P33.29
(a)
bX
(b)
X L = 2 100 Hz 20.5 H = 1.29 10 4 Vrms 200 V = = 50.0 Z= I rms 4.00 A
L
a
fa
f
 XC
g
2
= Z 2  R 2 = 50.0
b
g  b35.0 g
2 4
2
X L  X C = 1.29 10 4  VL , rms = I rms X L
b g = a 4.00 A fe1.29 10 j =
1 = 35.7 2 100 Hz C
C = 123 nF or 124 nF
FIG. P33.29
51.5 kV
Notice that this is a very large voltage!
Section 33.6 P33.30
Power in an AC Circuit
gb g 1 = b1 000 sge50.0 10 F j X = C Z = R + bX  X g Z = a 40.0f + a50.0  20.0f = 50.0 bV g = 100 V I = (a)
C 6 2 L C 2 2 2
X L = L = 1 000 s 0.050 0 H = 50.0
1
b
= 20.0
FIG. P33.30
Z I rms = 2.00 A
rms
rms
50.0
= arctan
 XC R 30.0 = arctan = 36.9 40.0
L
FG X H g
IJ K
(b) (c) P33.31
P = Vrms I rms cos = 100 V 2.00 A cos 36.9 = 160 W
2 PR = I rms R = 2.00 A 40.0 = 160 W
b
a
f
a
f
2
= 1 000 rad s ,
Vmax = 100 V , Z= R I max =
2
R = 400 ,
C = 5.00 10 6 F ,
L = 500 ,
2
F 1 I = 200 GH C JK
L = 0.500 H
F 1 I + G L  H C JK
= 400 2 + 300 2 = 500
Vmax 100 = = 0.200 A Z 500
2 The average power dissipated in the circuit is P = I rms R =
P=
a0.200 Af a400 f = 2
2
F I IR. GH 2 JK
2 max
8.00 W
274 P33.32
Alternating Current Circuits
Z = R 2 + X L  XC
b
g
2 2
or X L  X C = Z 2  R 2
2
b
g
bX
L
 XC =
= tan 1
I rms =
g a75.0 f  a45.0 f = 60.0 FG X  X IJ = tan FG 60.0 IJ = 53.1 H 45.0 K H R K
L C 1
Vrms 210 V = = 2.80 A Z 75.0 P = Vrms I rms cos = 210 V 2.80 A cos 53.1 = 353 W
b
g
a
fa
f a
f
P33.33
(a)
P = I rms Vrms cos = 9.00 180 cos 37.0 = 1.29 10 3 W P=
2 I rms R
b
g
a f
a
f
so becomes
1.29 10 = 9.00 R tan 37.0 =
3
a f
2
and so
R = 16.0 . X L  X C = 12.0 .
(b) P33.34
tan =
X L  XC R
a
f
X L  XC : 16
X L = L = 2 60.0 s 0.025 0 H = 9.42
Z = R 2 + X L  XC (a) (b) I rms =
b
b
gb g g = a20.0f + a9.42f
2 2
2
= 22.1
Vrms 120 V = = 5.43 A 22.1 Z
= tan 1
FG 9.42 IJ = 25.2 H 20.0 K
so
power factor = cos = 0.905 . 1
(c)
We require = 0 . Thus, X L = X C : and
9. 42 =
2 60.0 s 1 C
e
j
C = 281 F .
(d)
Pb = Pd or Vrms
b
b V g
P33.35 I rms =
rms d
=
g bI g cos Rb V g b I g cos
b rms b b rms b rms b
b V g =
R
b
2 rms d
=
a20.0 fa120 Vfa5.43 Afa0.905f =
Vrms
rms 2
109 V R1
Consider a twowire transmission line:
P
Vrms
2 and power loss = I rms Rline = 2
P
100
.
RL R1
Thus,
R1
FG P IJ b2R g = P 100 H V K d b V g = =
rms 1 rms 2
or
R1 =
bV g
200P
A
200P
or
A=
2r 4
a f
2
=
b V g
rms 2
200 P d
2
FIG. P33.35
and the diameter is
2r =
800 P d
V
a f
.
Chapter 33
275
P33.36
Onehalf the time, the left side of the generator is positive, the top diode conducts, and the bottom diode switches off. The power supply sees resistance
R
R
2R R
LM 1 + 1 OP N 2R 2R Q
1
= R and the power is
bV g
rms
2
R
.
The other half of the time the right side of the generator is positive, the upper diode is an open circuit, and the lower diode has zero resistance. The equivalent resistance is then Req = R +
V FIG. P33.36
~
LM 1 + 1 OP N 3R R Q
1
=
7R 4
and
P=
b V g
rms
2
Req
rms 2
=
4 Vrms 7R
b
g
2
.
2
The overall time average power is:
b V g
R + 4 Vrms 2
b
g
7R
=
11 Vrms 14R
b
g
2
.
Section 33.7 P33.37
Resonance in a Series RLC Circuit
0 = 2 99.7 10 6 = 6.26 10 8 rad s =
C= 1
2 0L
e
j
1 LC
=
1
e6.26 10 j e1.40 10 j
8 2 6
= 1.82 pF
P33.38
At resonance,
1 1 = 2 f L and 2 f C 2 f
b gL
2
=C .
The range of values for C is 46.5 pF to 419 pF . *P33.39 (a) f= C= 1 2 LC
2
1 1 A C = 6.33 10 13 F = 2 2 12 2 10 As 4 f L 4 10 s 400 10 Vs
e
j
FG IJ H K
(b)
C= =
0 A 0 = d d
12
2
FG Cd IJ H K
0
=
F 6.33 10 F 10 GH 1 8.85 10
13
3
mm
12
F
I JK
12
= 8.46 10 3 m
(c)
X L = 2 f L = 2 10 10 s 400 10 12 Vs A = 25.1
276 P33.40
Alternating Current Circuits
L = 20.0 mH , C = 1.00 10 7 , R = 20.0 , Vmax = 100 V
(a) The resonant frequency for a series RLC circuit is f = Vmax = 5.00 A . R 1 2 1 = 3.56 kHz . LC
(b)
At resonance,
I max = Q=
(c) (d) P33.41
From Equation 33.38,
0L = 22.4 . R
VL , max = X L I max = 0 LI max = 2.24 kV
1 LC . Thus, if = 2 0 , and XC = 1 LC 1 L = = 2C 2 C C Vrms = Z Vrms
2
The resonance frequency is 0 = XL = L =
FG H
IJ L = 2 LC K
2
L C
Z = R 2 + X L  XC
b
g
2
= R 2 + 2.25
FG L IJ H CK
so
I rms =
R + 2.25 L C
b g
and the energy delivered in one period is E = P t :
bV g R FG 2 IJ = bV g RC e E= R + 2.25bL C g H K R C + 2.25L
rms 2 rms 2 2 2
LC =
j
4 Vrms
2
b
g RC
2
LC
4R C + 9.00L
.
With the values specified for this circuit, this gives: E= 4 50.0 V
a
f a10.0 fe100 10 Fj e10.0 10 Hj 4a10.0 f e100 10 F j + 9.00e10.0 10 H j
2 6 32 3 2 6 3
12
= 242 mJ .
P33.42
The resonance frequency is 0 = XL = L =
1 LC
.
Thus, if and
= 2 0 ,
XC = LC 1 L 1 = = . 2C 2 C C Vrms = Z Vrms
2
FG H
IJ L = 2 LC K
2
L C
Then Z = R 2 + X L  X C
b
g
2
= R 2 + 2.25
FG L IJ H CK
so
I rms =
R + 2.25 L C
b g
and the energy delivered in one period is
bV g R FG 2 IJ = bV g RC e E = Pt = R + 2.25bL C g H K R C + 2.25L
rms 2 rms 2 2 2
LC =
j
4 Vrms
2
b
g RC
2
LC
4R C + 9.00L
.
Chapter 33
277
P33.43
For the circuit of Problem 22, 0 =
1 LC
e160 10 Hje99.0 10 Fj L b 251 rad sge160 10 H j = = 0.591 Q=
3 6 3 0
=
1
= 251 rad s
R
68.0
.
For the circuit of Problem 23, Q =
0L 1 L 1 460 10 3 H L = = = = 0.987 . R R LC R C 150 21.0 10 6 F
The circuit of Problem 23 has a sharper resonance.
Section 33.8 P33.44 (a) (b)
The Transformer and Power Transmission V2 , rms = 1 120 V = 9.23 V 13
a
f
V1 , rms I 1 , rms = V2 , rms I 2 , rms
a120 Vfa0.350 Af = a9.23 V fI
I 2 , rms = (c)
2 , rms
42.0 W = 4.55 A for a transformer with no energy loss. 9.23 V
P = 42.0 W from part (b).
= = N2 Vin N1 2
P33.45
b V g
bV g
out max
b
g
max
=
out rms
a971 Vf =
2 , rms 2 1
FG 2 000 IJ a170 Vf = 971 V H 350 K b2 200ga80f =
110 110
687 V
P33.46
(a)
d V
i = N d V i N
1 , rms
N2 =
1 600 windings
(b)
I 1 , rms V1 , rms = I 2 , rms V2, rms
d
i
d
i i
I 1, rms =
a1.50fb2 200g = a1.20fb2 200g = 110a0.950f
30.0 A
(c)
0.950 I 1 , rms V1, rms = I 2 , rms V2, rms
d
i
d
I 1 , rms =
25.3 A
278 P33.47
Alternating Current Circuits
The rms voltage across the transformer primary is N1 V2, rms N2
d
i
N1 V2 , rms . N2
so the source voltage is Vs , rms = I 1 , rms Rs +
d
i
dV The secondary current is
N 2 V2 , rms = I 1 , rms . N1 RL Then Vs , rms =
2, rms
d
i
RL
i , so the primary current is d i
FIG. P33.47
N 2 V2 , rms Rs N 1 RL
d
i
+
N 1 V2 , rms N2 N 1 V2 , rms N2
and Rs =
N 2 V2 , rms
d
N 1 RL
F V i GGH d
s , rms

d
i IJ = 5a50.0 f FG 80.0 V  5a25.0 V f IJ = JK 2a25.0 Vf H 2 K
87.5 .
P33.48
(a)
V2 , rms =
N2 V1 , rms N1
i
N 2 V2 , rms 10.0 10 3 V = = = 83.3 120 V N 1 V1 , rms
(b)
I 2 , rms V2 , rms = 0.900 I 1, rms V1, rms I 2, rms
3
d i d i 120 e10.0 10 Vj = 0.900FGH 24.0 V IJK a120 Vf
I 2 , rms = 10.0 10 3 V = 185 k 0.054 A
I 2, rms = 54.0 mA
(c)
Z2 =
V2 , rms
P33.49
(a)
R = 4.50 10 4 M 6.44 10 5 m = 290 and I rms =
2 Ploss = I rms 2
e
je j R = a10.0 A f a 290 f = 29.0 kW
P 5.00 10 6 W = = 10.0 A Vrms 5.00 10 5 V
(b) (c)
Ploss 2.90 10 4 = = 5.80 10 3 P 5.00 10 6
It is impossible to transmit so much power at such low voltage. Maximum power transfer occurs when load resistance equals the line resistance of 290 , and is
e4.50 10 Vj 2 2a 290 f
3
2
= 17.5 kW far below the required 5 000 kW.
Chapter 33
279
Section 33.9 *P33.50 (a)
Rectifiers and Filters Input power = 8 W
Useful output power = IV = 0.3 A 9 V = 2.7 W useful output 2.7 W = = 0.34 = 34% efficiency = total input 8W (b) Total input power = Total output power 8 W = 2.7 W + wasted power wasted power = 5.3 W (c) E = P t = 8 W 6 31 d J $0.135 a fa fFGH 861400 s IJK FGH 11Ws IJK = 1.29 10 JFGH 3.6 10 J IJK = d
8 6 2 2 XC 2
a f
$4.8
*P33.51
(a)
The input voltage is Vin = IZ = I R + Vout = IR . The gain ratio is
=I R
Vout IR = Vin I R2 + 1 C
F1I +G H C JK g
2
2
. The output voltage is R
b
=
R2 + 1 C
b
g
2
.
(b)
As 0 , As ,
Vout 1 and 0 C Vin Vout 1 R 0 and = 1 C Vin R R
(c)
1 = 2 R2 +
R2 + 1 C
b
g
2
1 = 4R 2 2C 2
2C 2 =
1 3R2
= 2 f =
1 3 RC
f=
1 2 3 RC
P33.52
(a)
2 The input voltage is Vin = IZ = I R 2 + X C = I R 2 + 1 C
Vout = IX C =
I C Vout I = . The gain ratio is Vin C I R2 + 1 C
b
g
2
. The output voltage is = 1 C R2 + 1 C
b
g
2
b
g
2
.
(b)
As 0 ,
1 C Vout 1 and R becomes negligible in comparison. Then = 1 . As C Vin 1 C Vout 1 0 and , 0 . C Vin 1 = 2 f= 1 C R + 1 C 3 2 RC
2
(c)
b
g
2
R2 +
F1I GH C JK
2
=
4 C2
2
R 2 2 C 2 = 3
= 2 f =
3 RC
280 P33.53
Alternating Current Circuits
For this RC highpass filter,
Vout = Vin
R
2 R + XC 2
.
(a)
When then
Vout = 0.500 , Vin
a0.500 f
0.500
2 2 + XC
= 0.500 or X C = 0.866 .
If this occurs at f = 300 Hz, the capacitance is C= (b) 1 1 = = 6.13 10 4 F = 613 F . 2 f X C 2 300 Hz 0.866
a
fa
f
With this capacitance and a frequency of 600 Hz, XC = 2 600 Hz 6.13 10 4 F R R +
2 2 XC
a
fe
1
j
= 0.433
Vout = Vin
=
a0.500 f + a0.433 f
2
0.500
2
= 0.756 . FIG. P33.53
P33.54
For the filter circuit,
Vout = Vin
XC
2 R + XC 2
.
(a)
At f = 600 Hz,
XC =
1 1 = = 3.32 10 4 2 f C 2 600 Hz 8.00 10 9 F
a
fe
j
and
Vout = Vin
3.32 10 4
a90.0 f + e3.32 10 j
2 4
2
1.00 .
(b)
At f = 600 kHz ,
XC =
1 1 = = 33.2 3 2 f C 2 600 10 Hz 8.00 10 9 F
e
je
j
and
Vout = Vin
a90.0 f + a33.2 f
2
33.2
2
= 0.346 .
Chapter 33
281
P33.55
Vout = Vin
R + XL  XC At 200 Hz: At 4 000 Hz:
2
b
R
g
2
(a)
f + 400 L  1 400 C 1 a8.00 f + LM8 000 L  8 000 C OP = 4a8.00 f . N Q
2 2 2 2 2
1 = 4 8.00
a
a8.00 f
2
.
FIG. P33.55(a)
At the low frequency, X L  X C < 0 . This reduces to For the high frequency halfvoltage point, Solving Equations (1) and (2) simultaneously gives (b) When X L = X C , X L = X C requires Vout Vout = Vin Vin f0 = 1 2 LC =
1 = 13.9 . 400 C 1 = +13.9 . 8 000 L  8 000 C 400 L 
[1] [2]
C = 54.6 F and L = 580 H .
FG H
IJ K
= 1.00 .
max
(c)
1 2
e
5.80 10
4
H 5.46 10 5 F R
je
j
= 894 Hz .
(d)
At 200 Hz,
Vout R 1 = = and X C > X L , Vin Z 2
so the phasor diagram is as shown:
XL  XC
Z
Z
or
Vin
Vin
Vout
=  cos 1
FG R IJ =  cos FG 1 IJ so H ZK H 2K
1
XL  XC
Vout leads Vin by 60.0 . At f0 , X L = X C so Vout and Vin have a phase difference of 0 . At 4 000 Hz, Vout R 1 = = and X L  X C > 0 . Vin Z 2
R
or
Vout
FIG. P33.55(d)
Thus, = cos 1 or (e)
FG 1 IJ = 60.0 H 2K
Vout lags Vin by 60.0 .
At 200 Hz and at 4 kHz,
d V P=
0
out, rms
d V At f , P =
(f)
R
i = db1 2gV
2 2 out, rms
in, rms
R
i = d V
R
i = b1 2g b1 2gV
2
in, max 2
in, rms
R
i = b1 2g V
2
R
in, max
R
4 0 L 2 f0 L 2 894 Hz 5.80 10 = = We take: Q = 8.00 R R
a
fe
a10.0 Vf = 1.56 W 8a8.00 f a10.0 V f = 6.25 W . = 2a8.00 f Hj = 0.408 .
2 2
=
.
2
282
Alternating Current Circuits
Additional Problems P33.56 The equation for v t during the first period (using y = mx + b ) is: v t =
af
a f 2bVT gt  V
max T 0 2 ave
max max 2 T 0 2
a v f a v f
1 = T
2 ave
Vrms = 1 LC
z vatf dt = bVT g z LMNT2 t  1OPQ dt bV g FG T IJ 2t T  1 = bV g a+1f  a1f = bV g = H 2K 3 6 3 T avf = bV g = V
2 max 2 3 t =T max 2 3 3 max t=0 2 max 2 max ave
FIG. P33.56
2
3
3
P33.57
0 =
=
b0.050 0 Hge5.00 10 Fj
6
1
= 2 000 s 1
so the operating angular frequency of the circuit is
=
0 = 1 000 s 1 . 2
Using Equation 33.37, P =
2
bV g R R + L e  j a400f a8.00fb1 000g P= a8.00f b1 000g + b0.050 0g a1.00  4.00f 10
rms 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 0
bQ 12.5g
FIG. P33.57 = 56.7 W .
6 2
*P33.58
The angular frequency is = 2 60 s = 377 s . When S is open, R, L, and C are in series with the source: R 2 + X L  XC
b
20 g = FGH V IJK = FGH 0.183VA IJK I
2 s 2
2
= 1.194 10 4 2 .
(1) R , in series 2 (2)
When S is in position 1, a parallel combination of two R's presents equivalent resistance with L and C:
FG R IJ + b X H 2K
2 2 R 2 + XC =
L
 XC
20 g = FGH 0.298VA IJK
2 2
2
= 4.504 10 3 2 .
When S is in position 2, the current by passes the inductor. R and C are in series with the source:
FG 20 V IJ H 0.137 A K
= 2.131 10 4 2 .
(3)
Take equation (1) minus equation (2): 3 2 R = 7. 440 10 3 2 4 continued on next page R = 99.6
Chapter 33
283
(only the positive root is physical.) Now equation (3) gives X C = 2.131 10 4  99.6 C = X C
a f g
2 12
= 106.7 =
1
1 (only the positive root is physical.) C
b
g
1
= 377 s 106.7
b
= 2.49 10 5 F = C .
Now equation (1) gives X L  X C = 1.194 10 4  99.6 XL
a f
2 12
= 44.99
X L = 106.7 + 44.99 = 61.74 or 151.7 = L L=
= 0.164 H or 0.402 H = L V 12.0 V = = 19.0 . I 0.630 A Vrms 24.0 V = = 42.1 . 0.570 A I rms
P33.59
The resistance of the circuit is R =
The impedance of the circuit is Z = Z 2 = R 2 + 2 L2 L= *P33.60 1
Z2  R2 =
1 377
a42.1f  a19.0f
2
2
= 99.6 mH
The lowestfrequency standingwave state is NAN. The distance between the clamps we represent T as L = d NN = . The speed of transverse waves on the string is v = f = = f 2L . The magnetic 2 force on the wire oscillates at 60 Hz, so the wire will oscillate in resonance at 60 Hz. T 2 = 60 s 4L2 0.019 kg m
b g
T = 274 kg ms 2 L2
e
j
Any values of T and L related according to this expression will work, including if L = 0.200 m T = 10.9 N . We did not need to use the value of the current and magnetic field. If we assume the subsection of wire in the field is 2 cm wide, we can find the rms value of the magnetic force: FB = I B sin = 9 A 0.02 m 0.015 3T sin 90 = 2.75 mN . So a small force can produce an oscillation of noticeable amplitude if internal friction is small. P33.61 (a) When L is very large, the bottom branch carries negligible current. Also, negligible compared to 200 and top branch. (b) Now 1 will be C
a fa
fb
g
45.0 V = 225 mA flows in the power supply and the 200
1 and L 0 so the generator and bottom branch carry 450 mA . C
284 P33.62
Alternating Current Circuits
(a)
With both switches closed, the current goes only through generator and resistor. it =
af
Vmax cos t R
(b)
P=
1 Vmax 2 R
b
g
2
(c)
it =
af
Vmax R + L
2 2 2
cos t + arctan
LM N
FG L IJ OP H R KQ F L  b1 Cg I . GH R JK
0 0
FIG. P33.62
(d)
For We require 0 L = 1 , so 0C
0 = = arctan C= 1 . 2 0L
(e) (f)
At this resonance frequency, U= 1 C VC 2
Z= R .
b g
2
=
1 2 2 CI X C 2
U max =
1 2 1 Vmax 2 CI max X C = C 2 2 R2
b
g
2
1 = 2 0C 2
b V g L
2R
max 2 2
(g)
U max
1 2 1 Vmax = LI max = L 2 2 R2 2 LC .
b
g
2
(h)
Now = 2 0 = So = arctan
F L  b1 Cg I = arctanF 2 GH GH R JK
=
1 2LC =
LC 12 R
b g
LC
I= JK
arctan
F 3 LI GH 2 R C JK
.
(i)
Now L =
1 1 2 C
0 . 2
IR V
P33.63
(a) (b)
I R, rms =
Vrms 100 V = = 1.25 A 80.0 R I
The total current will lag the applied voltage as seen in the phasor IL diagram at the right. Vrms 100 V I L , rms = = = 1.33 A XL 2 60.0 s 1 0.200 H
e
ja
Thus, the phase angle is: = tan 1
FI GH I
f
FIG. P33.63
1
L , rms R , rms
I = tan FG 1.33 A IJ = JK H 1.25 A K
46.7 .
Chapter 33
285
P33.64
Suppose each of the 20 000 people uses an average power of 500 W. (This means 12 kWh per day, or $36 per 30 days at 10 per kWh). Suppose the transmission line is at 20 kV. Then 20 000 500 W P I rms = ~ 10 3 A . = 20 000 V Vrms
b
ga
f
If the transmission line had been at 200 kV, the current would be only ~ 10 2 A . P33.65
R = 200 , L = 663 mH , C = 26.5 F , = 377 s 1 , Vmax = 50.0 V
L = 250 ,
(a)
F 1 I = 100 , Z = GH C JK FG H IJ K
R 2 + X L  XC
b
g
2
= 250
Vmax 50.0 V = = 0. 200 A 250 Z X  XC = tan 1 L = 36.8 ( V leads I) R I max =
(b) (c) (d) P33.66
VR, max = I max R = 40.0 V at = 0
VC , max = I max = 20.0 V C at = 90.0 (I leads V )
VL , max = I max L = 50.0 V at = +90.0 ( V leads I)
L = 2.00 H , C = 10.0 10 6 F , R = 10.0 , v t = 100 sin t
(a)
af b
g
The resonant frequency 0 produces the maximum current and thus the maximum power delivery to the resistor. 1 1 0 = = = 224 rad s LC 2.00 10.0 10 6
a fe
j
(b)
bV g = a100f = P= 2R 2a10.0f
max 2 2
500 W
(c)
I rms =
Vrms = Z 1 2 I rms 2
Vrms R2 + L  1 C R
2 2
d
b
gi
2
and
bI g
Z
rms max 2
=
Vrms R 1 Vrms 2 R2
2
2 I rms R =
e j
2
F 1 I This occurs where Z = 2 R : R + G L  H C JK = 2R L C  2 L C  R C + 1 = 0 or L C  e 2LC + R C j + 1 = 0 LMa2.00f e10.0 10 j OP  LM2a2.00fe10.0 10 j + a10.0f e10.0 10 j OP + 1 = 0 . N Q N Q
2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 6 2 4 6 2 6 2 2
max
or
b V g
rms 2
R=
b
g
2
R.
Solving this quadratic equation, we find that
2 = 51 130 , or 48 894 2 = 51 130 = 226 rad s .
1 = 48 894 = 221 rad s
and
286 P33.67
Alternating Current Circuits
(a)
From Equation 33.41, Let input impedance so that
N 1 V1 = . N 2 V2 Z1 = V1 I1 and the output impedance But from Eq. 33.42, N1 = N2 Z1 Z2 Z2 = V2 I2
N 1 Z1 I 1 = . N 2 Z2 I 2
I 1 V2 N 2 = = . I 2 V1 N 1 .
So, combining with the previous result we have
(b)
N1 Z1 = = N2 Z2
8 000 = 31.6 8.00
P33.68
2 P = I rms R =
FG V IJ H Z K
rms 2
2
R , so 250 W =
2
a120 V f a40.0 f : Z = Z
2 2 6 2
R2 + L 
F GH
1 C
I JK
2
250 =
a120f a40.0f a40.0f + 2 f a0.185f  1 2 f e65.0 10 j
2 304 f 2
and
250 =
576 000 f 2 1 600 f 2 + 1.162 4 f 2  2 448.5
e
j
2
1=
1 600 f 2 + 1.351 1 f 4  5 692.3 f 2 + 5 995 300 6 396.3
2
so
1.351 1 f 4  6 396.3 f 2 + 5 995 300 = 0
f =
2
b6 396.3g  4b1.351 1gb5 995 300g = 3 446.5 or 1 287.4 2b1.351 1g
IL = Vrms ; L IC = Vrms
f = 58.7 Hz or 35.9 Hz
P33.69 IR = Vrms ; R
b Cg
1
(a)
I rms =
2 IR
+ IC  IL
b
g
2
= Vrms
FG 1 IJ + FG C  1 IJ H R K H LK
2
2
(b)
tan =
IC  IL 1 1 = Vrms  IR XC X L 1  XL
LM N
OPF 1 I QGH V R JK
rms
L1 tan = R M NX
C
OP Q
FIG. P33.69
Chapter 33
287
P33.70
(a)
I rms = Vrms
1 1 + C 2 L R
F GH
I JK
2
Vrms Vrms f= 1 2 LC =
b
g
max
when C = 1
1 L
2 200 10
3
H 0.150 10 6 F
e
j
= 919 Hz
(b)
Vrms 120 V = = 1.50 A 80.0 R Vrms 120 V = = 1.60 A IL = 1 L 374 s 0.200 H IR =
(c) (d)
fe je j I = I + b I  I g = a1.50f + b0.006 73  1.60g = L I  I OP = tan L 0.006 73  1.60 O = 46.7 = tan M MN 1.50 PQ N I Q
rms 2 R C L 2 2 2 1 C L 1 R
I C = Vrms C = 120 V 374 s 1 0.150 10 6 F = 6.73 mA 2.19 A
b g a
e
ja
f
FIG. P33.70
The current is lagging the voltage . P33.71 (a) X L = X C = 1 884 when f = 2 000 Hz 1 884 XL = = 0.150 H and 2 f 4 000 rad s 1 1 = = 42.2 nF C= 2 f X C 4 000 rad s 1 884 L= XL Z= f (Hz) X L ( ) 283 300 600 800 1 000 1 500 2 000 3 000 4 000 6 000 10 000 (b) Impedence, 565 754 942 1 410 1 880 2 830 3 770 5 650 9 420 X C ( ) Z ( ) 12 600 1 2300 6 280 4 710 3 770 2 510 1 880 1 260 942 628 377 5 720 3 960 2 830 1 100 40 1 570 2 830 5 020 9 040
b g b = 2 f a0.150 H f
2
gb
g
XC =  XC
b2 f ge4.22 10 Fj
8
1
a40.0 f + b X
L
g
2
FIG. P33.71(b)
288 P33.72
Alternating Current Circuits
0 =
1 LC
= 1.00 10 6 rad s
For each angular frequency, we find Z = R2 + L  1 C then I = and 1.00 V Z
2
b
g
2
P = I 1.00 .
1.000 5  0.999 5 0 f = = 2 2 3 1 1.00 10 s f = = 159 Hz 2
a
f
The full width at half maximum is:
b
g
while R 2 L = 2 1.00 10 3 H
e
1.00
L 0 999.0 0.9990 999.1 0.9991 999.3 0.9993 999.5 0.9995 999.7 0.9997 999.9 0.9999 1.0000 1000 1.0001 1000.1 1.0003 1000.3 1.0005 1000.5 1.0007 1000.7 1.0009 1000.9 1.0010 1001
a f
1 C 1001.0 1000.9 1000.7 1000.5 1000.3 1000.1 1000.0 999.9 999.7 999.5 999.3 999.1 999.0
a f Z af
2.24 2.06 1.72 1.41 1.17 1.02 1.00 1.02 1.17 1.41 1.72 2.06 2.24
P = I 2R W 0.19984 0.23569 0.33768 0.49987 0.73524 0.96153 1.00000 0.96154 0.73535 0.50012 0.33799 0.23601 0.20016
a f
j
= 159 Hz . 1.0 0.8 I 2R (W) 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 0.996 0.998 1 / 0 1.002 1.004
FIG. P33.72 P33.73 Vout = Vin R R + 1 C
2
b
g
2
=
R R + 1 2 f C
2
b
g
C
2
(a)
Vout 1 1 = when =R 3 . 2 Vin C Hence, f =
Vin
R
Vout
1 = = 1.84 kHz . 2 2 RC 3
FIG. P33.73
continued on next page
Chapter 33
289
(b)
0 1 Log V out/ V in 2 3 4 0
Log Gain versus Log Frequency
1
2
3 Log f
4
5
6
FIG. P33.73(b)
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P33.2 P33.4 P33.6 P33.8 P33.10 P33.12 P33.14 (a) 193 ; (b) 144 (a) 25.3 rad/s; (b) 0.114 s 1.25 A and 96.0 for bulbs 1 and 2; 0.833 A and 144 for bulb 3 7.03 H or more 3.14 A 3.80 J (a) greater than 41.3 Hz ; (b) less than 87.5 2C Vrms 32.0 A P33.48 P33.20 P33.22 2.79 kHz (a) 109 ; (b) 0.367 A ; (c) I max = 0.367 A , = 100 rad s, = 0.896 rad 19.3 mA (a) 146 V ; (b) 212 V ; (c) 179 V ; (d) 33.4 V XC = 3 R (a) 2.00 A ; (b) 160 W ; (c) see the solution P33.50 P33.52 P33.54 P33.56 P33.58 (a) 83.3 ; (b) 54.0 mA ; (c) 185 k (a) 0.34; (b) 5.3 W; (c) $4.8 (a) see the solution; (b) 1; 0; (c) (a) 1.00; (b) 0.346 see the solution R = 99.6 , C = 24.9 F , L = 164 mH or 402 mH 3 2 RC P33.42 P33.44 P33.46 P33.18 P33.32 P33.34 P33.36 P33.38 P33.40 353 W (a) 5.43 A ; (b) 0.905 ; (c) 281 F ; (d) 109 V 11 Vrms 14R 46.5 pF to 419 pF (a) 3.56 kHz; (b) 5.00 A ; (c) 22.4 ; (d) 2.24 kV 4 Vrms
2
b
g
2
b
g RC
2
LC
4R C + 9L (a) 9.23 V ; (b) 4.55 A ; (c) 42.0 W (a) 1 600 turns ; (b) 30.0 A ; (c) 25.3 A
P33.16
b
g
P33.24 P33.26 P33.28 P33.30
290 P33.60
Alternating Current Circuits
L = 0.200 m and T = 10.9 N , or any values related by T = 274 kg ms 2 L2
e
j
P33.64 P33.66
~ 10 3 A (a) 224 rad s ; (b) 500 W ; (c) 221 rad s and 226 rad s either 58.7 Hz or 35.9 Hz (a) 919 Hz ; (b) I R = 1.50 A , I L = 1.60 A , I C = 6.73 mA ; (c) 2.19 A ; (d) 46.7 ; current lagging see the solution
P33.62
a f VR cos t ; (b) P = bV2R g ; L V F L IJ OP ; cos M t + tan G (c) iat f = H R KQ N R + L bV g L ; 1 (d) C = ; (e) Z = R ; (f)
(a) i t =
max max 2 max 1 2 2 2
P33.68 P33.70
(g) (i)
b
2 0L 2 Vmax L 2
g
2R
; (h) tan 1
1 2LC
F 3 LI; GH 2R C JK
2R
max 2
2
P33.72
34
Electromagnetic Waves
CHAPTER OUTLINE
34.1 34.2 34.3 34.4 34.5 Maxwell's Equations and Hertz's Discoveries Plane Electromagnetic Waves Energy Carried by Electromagnetic Waves Momentum and Radiation Pressure Production of Electromagnetic Waves by an Antenna The Spectrum of Electromagnetic Waves
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q34.1 Radio waves move at the speed of light. They can travel around the curved surface of the Earth, bouncing between the ground and the ionosphere, which has an altitude that is small when compared to the radius of the Earth. The distance across the lower fortyeight states is approximately 5 000 km, requiring a 5 10 6 m ~ 10 2 s . To go halfway around the transit time of 3 10 8 m s Earth takes only 0.07 s. In other words, a speech can be heard on the other side of the world before it is heard at the back of a large room. The Sun's angular speed in our sky is our rate of rotation, 360 = 15 h . In 8.3 minutes it moves west by 24 h 1h = t = 15 h 8.3 min = 2.1 . This is about four 60 min times the angular diameter of the Sun.
34.6
Q34.2
b
gFGH
IJ a K
f
Q34.3
Energy moves. No matter moves. You could say that electric and magnetic fields move, but it is nicer to say that the fields at one point stay at that point and oscillate. The fields vary in time, like sports fans in the grandstand when the crowd does the wave. The fields constitute the medium for the wave, and energy moves. No. If a single wire carries DC current, it does not emit electromagnetic waves. In this case, there is a constant magnetic field around the wire. Alternately, if the cable is a coaxial cable, it ideally does not emit electromagnetic waves even while carrying AC current. Acceleration of electric charge. The changing magnetic field of the solenoid induces eddy currents in the conducting core. This is accompanied by I 2 R conversion of electricallytransmitted energy into internal energy in the conductor. A wire connected to the terminals of a battery does not radiate electromagnetic waves. The battery establishes an electric field, which produces current in the wire. The current in the wire creates a magnetic field. Both fields are constant in time, so no electromagnetic induction or "magnetoelectric induction" happens. Neither field creates a new cycle of the other field. No wave propagation occurs. 291
Q34.4
Q34.5 Q34.6
Q34.7
292 Q34.8 Q34.9
Electromagnetic Waves
No. Static electricity is just that: static. Without acceleration of the charge, there can be no electromagnetic wave. Sound The world of sound extends to the top of the atmosphere and stops there; sound requires a material medium. Sound propagates by a chain reaction of density and pressure disturbances recreating each other. Sound in air moves at hundreds of meters per second. Audible sound has frequencies over a range of three decades (ten octaves) from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Audible sound has wavelengths of ordinary size (1.7 cm to 17 m). Sound waves are longitudinal. Light The universe of light fills the whole universe. Light moves through materials, but faster in a vacuum. Light propagates by a chain reaction of electric and magnetic fields recreating each other. Light in air moves at hundreds of millions of meters per second. Visible light has frequencies over a range of less than one octave, from 430 to 750 Terahertz. Visible light has wavelengths of very small size (400 nm to 700 nm). Light waves are transverse.
Sound and light can both be reflected, refracted, or absorbed to produce internal energy. Both have amplitude and frequency set by the source, speed set by the medium, and wavelength set by both source and medium. Sound and light both exhibit the Doppler effect, standing waves, beats, interference, diffraction, and resonance. Both can be focused to make images. Both are described by wave functions satisfying wave equations. Both carry energy. If the source is small, their intensities both follow an inversesquare law. Both are waves. Q34.10 The Poynting vector S describes the energy flow associated with an electromagnetic wave. The direction of S is along the direction of propagation and the magnitude of S is the rate at which electromagnetic energy crosses a unit surface area perpendicular to the direction of S. Photons carry momentum. Recalling what we learned in Chapter 9, the impulse imparted to a particle that bounces elastically is twice that imparted to an object that sticks to a massive wall. Similarly, the impulse, and hence the pressure exerted by a photon reflecting from a surface must be twice that exerted by a photon that is absorbed. Different stations have transmitting antennas at different locations. For best reception align your rabbit ears perpendicular to the straightline path from your TV to the transmitting antenna. The transmitted signals are also polarized. The polarization direction of the wave can be changed by reflection from surfacesincluding the atmosphereand through Kerr rotationa change in polarization axis when passing through an organic substance. In your home, the plane of polarization is determined by your surroundings, so antennas need to be adjusted to align with the polarization of the wave. You become part of the receiving antenna! You are a big sack of salt water. Your contribution usually increases the gain of the antenna by a few tenths of a dB, enough to noticeably improve reception. On the TV set, each side of the dipole antenna is a 1/4 of the wavelength of the VHF radio wave. The electric field of the wave moves free charges in the antenna in electrical resonance, giving maximum current in the center of the antenna, where the cable connects it to the receiver. The loop antenna is essentially a solenoid. As the UHF radio wave varies the magnetic field inside the loop, an AC emf is induced in the loop as described by Faraday's and Lenz's laws. This signal is then carried down a cable to the UHF receiving circuit in the TV. An excellent reference for antennas and all things radio is the ARRL Handbook.
Q34.11
Q34.12
Q34.13 Q34.14
Q34.15
Chapter 34
293
Q34.16
The voltage induced in the loop antenna is proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic field in the wave. A wave of higher frequency induces a larger emf in direct proportion. The instantaneous voltage between the ends of a dipole antenna is the distance between the ends multiplied by the electric field of the wave. It does not depend on the frequency of the wave. The radiation resistance of a broadcast antenna is the equivalent resistance that would take the same power that the antenna radiates, and convert it into internal energy. Consider a typical metal rod antenna for a car radio. The rod detects the electric field portion of the carrier wave. Variations in the amplitude of the incoming radio wave cause the electrons in the rod to vibrate with amplitudes emulating those of the carrier wave. Likewise, for frequency modulation, the variations of the frequency of the carrier wave cause constantamplitude vibrations of the electrons in the rod but at frequencies that imitate those of the carrier. The frequency of EM waves in a microwave oven, typically 2.45 GHz, is chosen to be in a band of frequencies absorbed by water molecules. The plastic and the glass contain no water molecules. Plastic and glass have very different absorption frequencies from water, so they may not absorb any significant microwave energy and remain cool to the touch. People of all the world's races have skin the same color in the infrared. When you blush or exercise or get excited, you stand out like a beacon in an infrared group picture. The brightest portions of your face show where you radiate the most. Your nostrils and the openings of your ear canals are bright; brighter still are just the pupils of your eyes. Light bulbs and the toaster shine brightly in the infrared. Somewhat fainter are the back of the refrigerator and the back of the television set, while the TV screen is dark. The pipes under the sink show the same weak sheen as the walls until you turn on the faucets. Then the pipe on the right turns very black while that on the left develops a rich glow that quickly runs up along its length. The food on your plate shines; so does human skin, the same color for all races. Clothing is dark as a rule, but your bottom glows like a monkey's rump when you get up from a chair, and you leave behind a patch of the same blush on the chair seat. Your face shows you are lit from within, like a jackolantern: your nostrils and the openings of your ear canals are bright; brighter still are just the pupils of your eyes. Welding produces ultraviolet light, along with high intensity visible and infrared. 12.2 cm waves have a frequency of 2.46 GHz. If the Q value of the phone is low (namely if it is cheap), and your microwave oven is not well shielded (namely, if it is also cheap), the phone can likely pick up interference from the oven. If the phone is well constructed and has a high Q value, then there should be no interference at all.
Q34.17 Q34.18
Q34.19
Q34.20
Q34.21
Q34.22 Q34.23
294
Electromagnetic Waves
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 34.1 *P34.1 (a) Maxwell's Equations and Hertz's Discoveries The rod creates the same electric field that it would if stationary. We apply Gauss's law to a cylinder of radius r = 20 cm and length : q E dA = inside 0 l E 2 rl cos 0 = 0
z
b g
E=
35 10 C m N m j = 3.15 10 3 j N C . radially outward = 2 0 r 2 8.85 10 12 C 2 0.2 m
e
9
e
j
FIG. P34.1
2
ja
f
(b)
The charge in motion constitutes a current of 35 10 9 C m 15 10 6 m s = 0.525 A . This current creates a magnetic field. B=
e
je
j
0I 2 r
=
e4 10
7
ja 2 a0. 2 mf
T m A 0.525 A
fk= je
5.25 10 7 k T
(c)
The Lorentz force on the electron is F = qE + qv B
F = 1.6 10 19 C 3.15 10 3 j N C + 1.6 10 19 C 240 10 6 i m s 5.25 10 7 k F = 5.04 10 16
17
e
je j e e jj N + 2.02 10 e+ jj N =
j FGH
Ns C m
IJ K
4.83 10 16  j N
e j
Section 34.2 P34.2 (a)
Plane Electromagnetic Waves Since the light from this star travels at 3.00 10 8 m s the last bit of light will hit the Earth in 6.44 10 18 m 3.00 10 m s
8
= 2.15 10 10 s = 680 years .
Therefore, it will disappear from the sky in the year 2 004 + 680 = 2.68 10 3 C.E. . The star is 680 lightyears away. (b) t = x 1. 496 10 11 m = = 499 s = 8.31 min v 3 10 8 m s
(c)
8 x 2 3.84 10 m = = 2.56 s t = v 3 10 8 m s 6 x 2 6.37 10 m t = = = 0.133 s v 3 10 8 m s
e
j
(d)
e
j
(e)
t =
x 10 10 3 m = = 3.33 10 5 s v 3 10 8 m s
Chapter 34
295
P34.3
v= E =c B or
1
0 0
=
1 1.78
c = 0.750 c = 2.25 10 8 m s
P34.4
220 = 3.00 10 8 B
so B = 7.33 10 7 T = 733 nT . P34.5 (a) f = c or so (b) E =c B or so (c) k= 2 22.0 = 3.00 10 8 Bmax f 50.0 m = 3.00 10 8 m s
a
f
f = 6.00 10 6 Hz = 6.00 MHz .
Bmax = 73.3k nT .
= 2 = 0.126 m 1 50.0
and
= 2 f = 2 6.00 10 6 s 1 = 3.77 10 7 rad s
B = Bmax cos kx  t = 73.3 cos 0.126 x  3.77 10 7 t k nT .
e
j
b
g
e
j
P34.6
= 2 f = 6.00 10 9 s 1 = 1.88 10 10 s 1
k= 2
=
6.00 10 9 s 1 = = 20.0 = 62.8 m 1 c 3.00 10 8 m s
Bmax =
300 V m E = = 1.00 T c 3.00 10 8 m s
E = 300 V m cos 62.8 x  1.88 10 10 t
b
g e
j
B = 1.00 T cos 62.8 x  1.88 10 10 t
b
g e
j
P34.7
(a)
B=
100 V m E = = 3.33 10 7 T = 0.333 T c 3.00 10 8 m s 2 2 = = 0.628 m k 1.00 10 7 m 1 c = 3.00 10 8 m s 6. 28 10
7
(b)
=
(c)
f=
m
= 4.77 10 14 Hz
296 P34.8
Electromagnetic Waves
E = Emax cos kx  t
b
g
E =  Emax sin kx  t k x E =  Emax sin kx  t  t 2E =  Emax cos kx  t k 2 x 2 2E =  Emax cos kx  t  t 2
b b
b b
ga f ga f ge j ga f
2
We must show: That is, But this is true, because
E x 2
= 0 0
2E t 2
.
 k 2 Emax cos kx  t =  0 0  Emax cos kx  t . k2
e j
2
b
g
a f
2
b
g
F1I =G J H f K
2
=
1 c2
= 0 0 .
The proof for the wave of magnetic field follows precisely the same steps. P34.9 In the fundamental mode, there is a single loop in the standing wave between the plates. Therefore, the distance between the plates is equal to half a wavelength.
= 2L = 2 2.00 m = 4.00 m
Thus, f= c
a
f
=
3.00 10 8 m s = 7.50 10 7 Hz = 75.0 MHz . 4.00 m
P34.10
d A to A = 6 cm 5% =
= 12 cm 5%
2
v = f = 0.12 m 5% 2.45 10 9 s 1 = 2.9 10 8 m s 5%
a
fe
j
Section 34.3 P34.11
Energy Carried by Electromagnetic Waves U Uc = = uc At V 1 000 W m 2 Energy I =u= = = 3.33 J m3 c 3.00 10 8 m s Unit Volume = 7.68 W m 2
S=I=
P34.12
Sav =
P 4.00 10 3 W = 2 4 r 4 4.00 1 609 m
b
g
2
Emax = 2 0 cSav = 0.076 1 V m Vmax = Emax L = 76.1 mV m 0.650 m = 49.5 mV amplitude
b
ga
f
b
g
or 35.0 mV (rms)
Chapter 34
297
P34.13
r = 5.00 mi 1 609 m mi = 8.04 10 3 m S=
a
fb
g
P 250 10 W = 2 4 r 4 8.04 10 3 W
3
e
j
2
= 307 W m 2
P34.14
I= u=
4 1.00 m
a
100 W
f
2
= 7.96 W m 2
I = 2.65 10 8 J m3 = 26.5 nJ m 3 c uE = uB = 1 u = 13.3 nJ m3 2 1 u = 13.3 nJ m3 2
(a)
(b) (c) P34.15
I = 7.96 W m 2
Power output = (power input)(efficiency). Thus, and Power input = A= Power out 1.00 10 6 W = = 3.33 10 6 W eff 0.300
P 3.33 10 6 W = = 3.33 10 3 m 2 . I 1.00 10 3 W m 2
P34.16
I=
2 Bmax c P = 2 0 4 r 2
Bmax =
F P GH 4 r
2
I FG 2 IJ = e10.0 10 ja2fe4 10 j = JK H c K 4 5.00 10 3.00 10 e je j
3 7 0 3 2 8
5.16 10 10 T
Since the magnetic field of the Earth is approximately 5 10 5 T , the Earth's field is some 100 000 times stronger. P34.17 (a)
P = I 2 R = 150 W
A = 2 rL = 2 0.900 10 3 m 0.080 0 m = 4.52 10 4 m 2 S=
e
jb
g
P = 332 kW m 2 A
(points radially inward)
(b)
B=
0 1.00 0I = = 222 T 2 r 2 0.900 10 3
e
a f
j
E=
V IR 150 V = = = 1.88 kV m x 0.080 0 m L S= EB
Note:
0
= 332 kW m 2
298 *P34.18
Electromagnetic Waves
(a)
2 3 10 6 V m Emax I= = 2 0 c 2 4 10 7 T m A 3 10 8 m s
e
e
je
j
2
FG J IJ FG C IJ FG T C m IJ FG N m IJ j H V CK H A sKH N s KH J K
2
I = 1.19 10 10 W m 2
(b)
P = IA = 1.19 10
e
10
F 5 10 W m j G H 2
2 2 2
3
m
I JK
2
= 2.34 10 5 W
P34.19
(a)
e jb g e E B = a16.0 + 2.56  18.56f N s C m =
S= 1
E B = 80.0 i + 32.0 j  64.0k N C 0.200 i + 0.080 0 j + 0.290 k T
j
0
(b)
0
EB=
e80.0 i + 32.0 j  64.0kj N C e0.200 i + 0.080 0 j + 0.290kj T
4 10 7 T m A
6
e6.40k  23.2 j  6.40k + 9.28i  12.8 j + 5.12 ij 10 S=
4 10 7 S= *P34.20
W m2
e11.5i  28.6 jj W m
2
= 30.9 W m 2 at 68.2 from the +x axis.
The energy put into the water in each container by electromagnetic radiation can be written as eP t = eIAt where e is the percentage absorption efficiency. This energy has the same effect as heat in raising the temperature of the water: eIAt = mcT = VcT T = eI 2 t eIt = c 3c
where is the edge dimension of the container and c the specific heat of water. For the small container, 0.7 25 10 3 W m 2 480 s T = = 33.4 C . 10 3 kg m3 0.06 m 4 186 J kg C
e
e
ja
f
j
For the larger, T =
0.91 25 J s m 2 480 s
e0.12 m j4 186 J C
2
e
j
= 21.7 C .
P34.21
We call the current I rms and the intensity I. The power radiated at this frequency is
P = 0.010 0 Vrms I rms =
b
gb
g
0.010 0 Vrms R
b
g
2
= 1.31 W .
If it is isotropic, the intensity one meter away is I=
P 1.31 W = A 4 1.00 m
a
f
2
= 0.104 W m 2 = Sav =
c 2 Bmax 2 0
Bmax =
2 0 I = c
2 4 10 7 T m A 0.104 W m 2 3.00 10 m s
8
e
je
j=
29.5 nT
Chapter 34
299
P34.22
(a)
efficiency =
useful power output 700 W 100% = 100% = 50.0% total power input 1 400 W
FG H
IJ K
(b)
Sav =
P 700 W = = 2.69 10 5 W m 2 A 0.068 3 m 0.038 1 m
b
gb
g
Sav = 269 kW m 2 toward the oven chamber
2 Emax 2 0 c
(c)
Sav =
Emax = 2 4 10 7 T m A 3.00 10 8 m s 2.69 10 5 W m 2 = 1.42 10 4 V m = 14.2 kV m Emax : c 7.00 10 5 N C 3.00 10 8 m s
5 2
e
je
je
j
P34.23
(a)
Bmax =
Bmax =
= 2.33 mT
(b)
E2 I = max : 2 0 c I=
(c)
P : A
3
e7.00 10 j I= = 650 MW m 2e 4 10 je3.00 10 j L O P = IA = e6.50 10 W m jM e1.00 10 mj P = N4 Q
2 7 8 8 2 3 2 3 2
510 W
P34.24
(a)
e10.0 10 j W I= e0.800 10 mj
uav =
= 4.97 kW m 2
(b)
I 4.97 10 3 J m 2 s = = 16.6 J m3 c 3.00 10 8 m s
P34.25
(a)
E = cB = 3.00 10 8 m s 1.80 10 6 T = 540 V m
e
je
j
(b)
uav =
B2
0
e1.80 10 j =
4 10
7
6 2
= 2.58 J m3
(c) (d)
Sav = cuav = 3.00 10 8 2.58 10 6 = 773 W m 2 This is 77.3% of the intensity in Example 34.5 . It may be cloudy, or the Sun may be setting.
e
je
j
300
Electromagnetic Waves
Section 34.4 P34.26
Momentum and Radiation Pressure P= 2Sav c
The pressure P upon the mirror is where A is the crosssectional area of the beam and The force on the mirror is then
Sav =
P . A
F = PA =
2 P 2P A= . c A c
FG IJ H K
8
Therefore,
F=
2 100 10 3
e
e
3 10
j
j=
6.67 10 10 N .
P34.27
For complete absorption, P =
25.0 S = = 83.3 nPa . c 3.00 10 8 2 1 340 W m 2 3.00 10 m s
8
P34.28
(a)
The radiation pressure is
e
2
j = 8.93 10
6
N m2 .
Multiplying by the total area, A = 6.00 10 5 m 2 gives: F = 5.36 N . (b) The acceleration is: a= 5.36 N F = = 8.93 10 4 m s 2 . m 6 000 kg 1 2 at 2 2d = a 2 3.84 10 8 m
(c)
It will arrive at time t where
d=
or
t=
e
e
j
8.93 10
4
m s2
j
= 9.27 10 5 s = 10.7 days .
P34.29
I=
E2 P = max r 2 2 0 c
(a)
Emax =
P 2 0 c r
2
b
g=
1.90 kN C
(b)
15 10 3 J s 3.00 10 8 m s p=
a1.00 mf =
50.0 pJ
(c)
U 5 10 11 = = 1.67 10 19 kg m s c 3.00 10 8
Chapter 34
301
P34.30
(a)
If PS is the total power radiated by the Sun, and rE and rM are the radii of the orbits of the planets Earth and Mars, then the intensities of the solar radiation at these planets are: IE = and IM =
PS 2 4 rE
2 4 rM E
PS
.
2 11
Thus, (b)
IM = IE
FG r IJ = e1 340 W m jF 1.496 10 GH 2.28 10 Hr K
2 M
11
I J mK
m
2
2
= 577 W m 2 .
Mars intercepts the power falling on its circular face:
2 PM = I M R M = 577 W m 2 3.37 10 6 m
e
j e
jLNM e
j OQP =
2.06 10 16 W .
(c)
If Mars behaves as a perfect absorber, it feels pressure P = and force F = PA =
SM I M = c c
P IM 2.06 10 16 W 2 RM = M = = 6.87 10 7 N . 8 c c 3.00 10 m s
e
j
(d)
The attractive gravitational force exerted on Mars by the Sun is Fg = GM S M M
2 rM
e6.67 10 =
11
N m 2 kg 2 1.991 10 30 kg 6.42 10 23 kg
je
je
e2.28 10 mj
11
2
j = 1.64 10
21
N
which is ~ 10 13 times stronger than the repulsive force of part (c). P34.31 (a) The total energy absorbed by the surface is U= (b)
2
FG 1 IIJ At = LM 1 e750 W m jOPe0.500 1.00 m ja60.0 sf = H 2 K N2 Q
2
11.3 kJ .
The total energy incident on the surface in this time is 2U = 22.5 kJ , with U = 11.3 kJ being absorbed and U = 11.3 kJ being reflected. The total momentum transferred to the surface is
b g a F U I F 2U IJ = 3U = 3e11.3 10 Jj = p=G J +G H c K H c K c 3.00 10 m s
3 8
p = momentum from absorption + momentum from reflection 1.13 10 4 kg m s
f
302 * P34.32
Electromagnetic Waves
The radiation pressure on the disk is P = Then F =
S I F F = = = . c c A r2
Hx
Hy
r 2I . c
Take torques about the hinge: H x 0 + H y 0  mgr sin +
= 0
PA mg
af
af
= sin
1
r 2I = sin 1 mgc 0.024 kg m 2 9.8 m 3 10 8 m
b
r 2 Ir =0 c 2 0.4 m 10 7 W s 2 s
a
f g a
fe
F 1 kg m I j GH 1 W s JK
2 3
r
= sin 1 0.071 2 = 4.09
FIG. P34.32
Section 34.5 P34.33
Production of Electromagnetic Waves by an Antenna c = 536 m f c = 188 m f so so h= h=
= =
= 134 m 4 = 46.9 m 4
P34.34
P=
aV f af
R
2
or P V
a f
2
V =  Ey y = E y cos V cos so P cos 2 (a) (b) (c)
y
receiving antenna
= 15.0 : P = Pmax cos 2 15.0 = 0.933 Pmax = 93.3% = 45.0 : P = Pmax cos 2 45.0 = 0.500Pmax = 50.0% = 90.0 : P = Pmax cos 2 90.0 = 0
a a a
f
FIG. P34.34
f
f
Chapter 34
303
P34.35
(a)
Constructive interference occurs when d cos = n for some integer n. cos = n
=n = 2n d 2 n = 0 , 1, 2 , ...
F I GH JK
strong signal @ = cos 1 0 = 90 , 270 (b) Destructive interference occurs when d cos =
FG 2n + 1 IJ : H 2 K
cos = 2n + 1
weak signal @ = cos 1 1 = 0 , 180
a f
FIG. P34.35 P34.36 For the proton,
F = ma
yields
The period of the proton's circular motion is therefore: The frequency of the proton's motion is The charge will radiate electromagnetic waves at this frequency, with
mv 2 . R 2R 2 m = T= . v qB qvB sin 90.0 = f= 1 . T 2 mc c = cT = . f qB
=
*P34.37
(a)
The magnetic field B =
1 0 J max cos kx  t k applies for x > 0 , since it describes a wave 2 1 moving in the i direction. The electric field direction must satisfy S = E B as i = j k so
b
g
0
the direction of the electric field is j when the cosine is positive. For its magnitude we have 1 E = cB , so altogether we have E = 0 cJ max cos kx  t j . 2
b
g
(b)
S=
1
0 1 2 S = 0 cJ max cos 2 kx  t i 4
EB=
1 1 2 2 0 cJ max cos 2 kx  t i 0 4
b
g
b
g
(c)
The intensity is the magnitude of the Poynting vector averaged over one or more cycles. The 1 1 2 average of the cosinesquared function is , so I = 0 cJ max . 2 8 J max = 8I = 0c 8 570 W m 2 4 10
7
(d)
e
bTm Ag3 10
j
8
ms
= 3.48 A m
304
Electromagnetic Waves
Section 34.6 P34.38
The Spectrum of Electromagnetic Waves
From the electromagnetic spectrum chart and accompanying text discussion, the following identifications are made: Frequency, f Wavelength, = 150 Mm 150 km 150 m 15 cm 150 m 150 nm 150 pm 150 fm 150 am Frequency, f = c c f Classification Radio Radio Radio Microwave Infrared Ultraviolet Xray Gamma ray Gamma ray Classification Radio Radio Microwave Infrared Ultraviolet/Xray Xray/Gamma ray Gamma ray Gamma ray
2 Hz = 2 10 0 Hz 2 kHz = 2 10 3 Hz 2 MHz = 2 10 6 Hz 2 GHz = 2 10 9 Hz 2 THz = 2 10 12 Hz 2 PHz = 2 10 15 Hz 2 EHz = 2 10 18 Hz 2 ZHz = 2 10 21 Hz 2 YHz = 2 10 24 Hz
Wavelength,
2 km = 2 10 3 m 2 m = 2 10 0 m 2 mm = 2 10 3 m 2 m = 2 10 6 m 2 nm = 2 10 9 m 2 pm = 2 10 12 m 2 fm = 2 10 15 m 2 am = 2 10 18 m
P34.39 f= c = 3.00 10 8 m s 5.50 10 7 m f= c =
1.5 10 5 Hz 1.5 10 8 Hz 1.5 10 11 Hz 1.5 10 14 Hz 1.5 10 17 Hz 1.5 10 20 Hz 1.5 10 23 Hz 1.5 10 26 Hz
= 5.45 10 14 Hz
P34.40
(a) (b)
3 10 8 m s ~ 10 8 Hz 1.7 m
radio wave
1 000 pages, 500 sheets, is about 3 cm thick so one sheet is about 6 10 5 m thick. f= 3.00 10 8 m s 6 10 5 m gives gives ~ 10 13 Hz infrared
19
P34.41
(a) (b)
f = c f = c
e5.00 10 e4.00 10
Hz = 3.00 10 8 m s : Hz = 3.00 10 8 m s :
j
= 6.00 10 12 m = 6.00 pm
9
j
= 0.075 m = 7.50 cm
Chapter 34
305
P34.42
(a)
=
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 261 m f 1 150 10 3 s 1
8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 3.06 m f 98.1 10 6 s 1
so
180 m = 0.690 wavelengths 261 m 180 m = 58.9 wavelengths 3.06 m
(b)
=
so
P34.43
Time to reach object =
1 1 total time of flight = 4.00 10 4 s = 2.00 10 4 s . 2 2
b
g e
j
Thus, d = vt = 3.00 10 8 m s 2.00 10 4 s = 6.00 10 4 m = 60.0 km . 100 10 3 m 3.00 10 m s
8
e
je
j
P34.44
The time for the radio signal to travel 100 km is: The sound wave travels 3.00 m across the room in:
t r = t s =
= 3.33 10 4 s .
3.00 m = 8.75 10 3 s . 343 m s
Therefore, listeners 100 km away will receive the news before the people in the news room by a total time difference of
t = 8.75 10 3 s  3.33 10 4 s = 8.41 10 3 s .
P34.45 The wavelength of an ELF wave of frequency 75.0 Hz is The length of a quarterwavelength antenna would be or
=
8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 4.00 10 6 m . f 75.0 Hz
L = 1.00 10 6 m = 1.00 10 3 km L = 1 000 km
b
.621 mi gFGH 01.00 km IJK =
621 mi .
Thus, while the project may be theoretically possible, it is not very practical. P34.46 (a) For the AM band,
max = min =
c f min c fmax c f min c fmax
= =
3.00 10 8 m s 540 10 3 Hz 3.00 10 8 m s 1 600 10 3 Hz 3.00 10 8 m s 88.0 10 6 Hz 3.00 10 8 m s 108 10 6 Hz
= 556 m = 187 m .
(b)
For the FM band,
max = min =
= =
= 3.41 m = 2.78 m .
306
Electromagnetic Waves
Additional Problems P34.47 (a)
P = SA :
P = 1 340 W m 2 4 1.496 10 11 m
e
jLMN e e
j OPQ =
2
3.77 10 26 W
(b)
cB 2 S = max 2 0 S=
2 Emax 2 0 c
so so
Bmax =
2 0S = c
2 4 10 7 N A 2 1 340 W m 2 3.00 10 m s
8
je
j=
3.35 T
Emax = 2 0 cS = 2 4 10 7 3.00 10 8 1 340 = 1.01 kV m
e
je
jb
g
P34.48
Suppose you cover a 1.7 mby0.3 m section of beach blanket. Suppose the elevation angle of the Sun is 60. Then the target area you fill in the Sun's field of view is
Now I =
P U = A At =
a1.7 mfa0.3 mf cos 30 = 0.4 m . U = IAt = e1 340 W m j a0.6 fa0.5fe0.4 m j b3 600 sg ~ 10
2 2 2
6
J .
P34.49
(a)
t = 2 fBmax A sin 2 f t cos
Thus,
af
d B d = BA cos dt dt
a
f
= A
t = 2 2 r 2 fBmax cos sin 2 f t
max = 2 2 r 2 f Bmax cos
af
d Bmax cos t cos = ABmax sin t cos dt
b
g
b
g
where is the angle between the magnetic field and the normal to the loop. (b) If E is vertical, B is horizontal, so the plane of the loop should be vertical and the plane should contain the line of sight of the transmitter . GM S m
2
P34.50
(a)
R where M S = mass of Sun, r = radius of particle and R = distance from Sun to particle. Since Frad = S r 2 , c
Fgrav =
=
FG GM HR
2
S
IJ LMFG 4 r IJ OP KN H 3 KQ
3 2
Frad 1 = Fgrav r (b)
FG H
IJ FG 3SR IJ 1 . K H 4cGM K r
S
From the result found in part (a), when Fgrav = Frad , we have r = 3SR 2 4cGM S 3 214 W m 2 3.75 10 11 m
r=
4 6.67 10 11 N m 2 kg 2 1.991 10 30 kg 1 500 kg m3 3.00 10 8 m s
e
e
je
je
je
j
2
je
j
= 3.78 10 7 m
Chapter 34
307
P34.51
(a)
Bmax =
Emax = 6.67 10 16 T c
(b)
Sav =
2 Emax = 5.31 10 17 W m 2 2 0 c
(c)
P = Sav A = 1.67 10 14 W
F = PA =
(d)
FG S IJ A = HcK
av
5.56 10 23 N ( the weight of FIG. P34.51
3 000 H atoms!) P34.52 (a) The power incident on the mirror is: PI = IA = 1 340 W m 2 100 m
e
j a
f
2
= 4.21 10 7 W .
The power reflected through the atmosphere is PR = 0.746 4.21 10 7 W = 3.14 10 7 W . (b) S=
e
j
PR 3.14 10 7 W = A 4.00 10 3 m
e
j
2
= 0.625 W m 2
(c)
Noon sunshine in Saint Petersburg produces this powerperarea on a horizontal surface:
PN = 0.746 1 340 W m 2 sin 7.00 = 122 W m 2 . A
e
j
The radiation intensity received from the mirror is
F 0.625 W m I 100% = GH 122 W m JK
2 2
0.513% of that from the noon Sun in January.
P34.53 P34.54
u=
1 2 0 Emax 2
Emax =
2u = 95.1 mV m 0
The area over which we model the antenna as radiating is the lateral surface of a cylinder, A = 2 r = 2 4.00 10 2 m 0.100 m = 2.51 10 2 m 2 . (a) (b) The intensity is then: S = The standard is: 0.570 mW cm 2 = 0.570 mW cm 2 0.600 W P = = 23.9 W m 2 . A 2.51 10 2 m 2 10 jFGH 1.00 10 W IJK FGH 1.00100 m cm IJK = 5.70 W m 1.00 mW .
3 4 2 2
e
ja
f
e
2
.
While it is on, the telephone is over the standard by
23.9 W m 2 5.70 W m 2
= 4.19 times .
308 P34.55
Electromagnetic Waves
(a)
Bmax = k= 2
175 V m Emax = = 5.83 10 7 T 8 c 3.00 10 m s = 2 = 419 rad m 0.015 0 m
= kc = 1.26 10 11 rad s
Since S is along x, and E is along y, B must be in the z direction . (That is S E B .) (b) S av = Emax Bmax = 40.6 W m 2 2 0 S av =
e40.6 W m ji
2
(c)
Pr =
2S = 2.71 10 7 N m 2 c
7
(d) P34.56
F = PA = e2.71 10 a=
m m
N m 2 0.750 m 2
je
0.500 kg
j = 4.06 10
a
7
m s2
a=
e406 nm s ji
2
Of the intensity the 38.0% that is reflected exerts a pressure The absorbed light exerts pressure
S = 1 340 W m 2
P1 = P2 = 2Sr 2 0.380 S = . c c S a 0.620S = . c c
f
Altogether the pressure at the subsolar point on Earth is (a) Ptotal
2 1.38S 1.38 1 340 W m = P1 + P2 = = = 6.16 10 6 Pa c 3.00 10 8 m s
e
j
(b)
1.01 10 5 N m 2 Pa = = 1.64 10 10 times smaller than atmospheric pressure Ptotal 6.16 10 6 N m 2 P= F I = A c F= x= 100 J s IA P = = = 3.33 10 7 N = 110 kg a c c 3.00 10 8 m s
P34.57
(a)
b
g
a = 3.03 10 9 m s 2 and
t= (b) 2x = 8.12 10 4 s = 22.6 h a
1 2 at 2
0 = 107 kg v  3.00 kg 12.0 m s  v = 107 kg v  36.0 kg m s + 3.00 kg v
v= 36.0 = 0.327 m s 110
b
g b
gb
g b
g
b
g
t = 30.6 s
Chapter 34
309
P34.58
The mirror intercepts power In the image, (a) I2 =
P = I 1 A1 = 1.00 10 3 W m 2 0.500 m
e
j a
f
2
= 785 W .
P : A2
2 Emax so 2 0 c
I2 =
0.020 0 m
b
785 W
g
2
= 625 kW m 2
(b)
I2 =
Emax = 2 0 cI 2 = 2 4 10 7 3.00 10 8 6.25 10 5 = 21.7 kN C Bmax = Emax = 72.4 T c
e
je
je
j
(c)
0.400Pt = mcT
0. 400 785 W t = 1.00 kg 4 186 J kg C 100 C  20.0 C t = P34.59 3.35 10 J = 1.07 10 3 s = 17.8 min 314 W
5
a
f b
gb
ga
f
Think of light going up and being absorbed by the bead which presents a face area rb2 . The light pressure is P = S I = . c c and I= 4 gc 3m 3 4
(a)
F =
I rb2 4 = mg = rb3 g 3 c
F GH
I JK
13
= 8.32 10 7 W m 2
(b) P34.60
P = IA = 8.32 10 7 W m 2 2.00 10 3 m
e
je
j
2
= 1.05 kW
Think of light going up and being absorbed by the bead, which presents face area rb2 . S I F . If we take the bead to be perfectly absorbing, the light pressure is P = av = = c c A (a)
F = Fg
so From the definition of density, I= F c Fg c mgc = = . A A rb2 m m = V 4 3 rb3
13
=
so
Substituting for rb ,
b g 1 F b 4 3g I =G r H m JK mgc F 4 I I= G J H 3m K
b
.
23
F 4 I F m I = gc G J G J H 3 K HK
23 13
13
4gc 3m = 3 4
F GH
I JK
13
.
(b)
P = IA
4 r 2 gc 3m P= 3 4
FG IJ H K
310 P34.61
Electromagnetic Waves
(a)
=
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 1.50 cm f 20.0 10 9 s 1
(b)
U = P t = 25.0 10 3 J s 1.00 10 9 s = 25.0 10 6 J = 25.0 J U U = V r2 U 25.0 10 6 J
8
a f e
je
j
FIG. P34.61
(c)
uav =
e j e r jcatf b0.060 0 mg e3.00 10
2 2
=
=
m s 1.00 10 9 s
je
j
uav = 7.37 10 3 J m3 = 7.37 mJ m 3 2uav = 0 2 7.37 10 3 J m3 8.85 10
12 2
(d)
Emax = Bmax =
e
j
C N m2
= 4.08 10 4 V m = 40.8 kV m
Emax 4.08 10 4 V m = = 1.36 10 4 T = 136 T c 3.00 10 8 m s
(e)
F = PA =
FG S IJ A = u H cK
av A
= 7.37 10 3 J m3 0.060 0 m
e
jb
g
2
= 8.33 10 5 N = 83.3 N
P34.62
(a)
On the right side of the equation,
C2 m s2
eC
e
2
N m
2
jbm sg
j
2 3
=
N m2 C 2 m2 s3 C s m
2 4 3
=
N m J = = W. s s
(b)
F = ma = qE or
19 C 100 N C qE 1.60 10 = = 1.76 10 13 m s 2 . a= 31 m 9.11 10 kg
e
jb
g
The radiated power is then:
P=
q2 a2 6 0 c 3 qBr . m
e1.60 10 j e1.76 10 j = 6 e8.85 10 je3.00 10 j
19 2 12
13 2 8 3
= 1.75 10 27 W .
(c)
F = ma c = m
F v I = qvB so GH r JK
2
v=
1.60 10 19 0.350 0.500 v2 q 2B2r = = = 5.62 10 14 m s 2 . The proton accelerates at a = 2 27 2 r m 1.67 10
e
ja
2
e
fa j
2
f
The proton then radiates P =
q2 a2 6 0 c 3
e1.60 10 j e5.62 10 j = 6 e8.85 10 je3.00 10 j
19 2 12
14 2 8 3
= 1.80 10 24 W .
P34.63
P=
P S Power 60.0 W = = = = 6.37 10 7 Pa c Ac 2 r c 2 0.050 0 m 1.00 m 3.00 10 8 m s
b
ga
fe
j
Chapter 34
311
P34.64
FG IJ H K e3.00 10 jb0.060 0g = P Therefore, = = 2 c 2e3.00 10 je1.00 10 j
F = PA =
3 8 11
P AA P P SA = = , =F = , and = . c c c 2 2c
3.00 10 2 deg .
b g
P34.65
The light intensity is The light pressure is
I = Sav = P=
E2 . 2 0 c
1 S E2 = = 0 E 2 . c 2 0 c 2 2 and a= 0 E 2 A . 2m
For the asteroid, P34.66
PA = ma
f = 90.0 MHz , Emax = 2.00 10 3 V m = 200 mV m (a)
=
T=
c = 3.33 m f
1 = 1.11 10 8 s = 11.1 ns f E Bmax = max = 6.67 10 12 T = 6.67 pT c E = 2.00 mV m cos 2
(b)
b
g
FG x  t IJ j H 3.33 m 11.1 ns K j
2
B = 6.67 pT k cos 2
b
g
FG x  t IJ H 3.33 m 11.1 ns K
(c)
2.00 10 3 E2 = 5.31 10 9 W m 2 I = max = 2 0 c 2 4 10 7 3.00 10 8
e
e
je j
j
(d)
I = cuav
so
uav = 1.77 10 17 J m 3
(e)
2 5.31 10 9 2I P= = = 3.54 10 17 Pa c 3.00 10 8
a fe
312 *P34.67
Electromagnetic Waves
(a)
m = V =
14 3 r 23
F 6m IJ r =G H 4 K
(b) (c) (d) (e) A=
13
1 4 r 2 2
F 6b8.7 kg g I =G GH e990 kg m j4 JJK = = 2 a0.161 mf = 0.163 m
13 3 2
0.161 m
2
I = e T 4 = 0.970 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 304 K
e
ja
f
4
= 470 W m 2
P = IA = 470 W m 2 0.163 m 2 = 76.8 W
I=
2 Emax 2 0 c
e
j
Emax = 2 0 cI (f) Emax = cBmax Bmax = (g)
b
g
12
= 8 10 7 Tm A 3 10 8 m s 470 W m 2
e
je
je
j
12
= 595 N C
595 N C 3 10 8 m s
= 1.98 T
The sleeping cats are uncharged and nonmagnetic. They carry no macroscopic current. They are a source of infrared radiation. They glow not by visiblelight emission but by infrared emission. Each kitten has radius rk 2 0.072 8 m
(h)
F 6a0.8f IJ =G H 990 4 K
j
13
= 0.072 8 m and radiating area
b
g
2
= 0.033 3 m 2 . Eliza has area 2
area is 0.120 m 2 + 4 0.033 3 m 2 = 0.254 m 2 and has power output
P = IA = 470 W m 0.254 m = 119 W .
P34.68 (a) At steady state, Pin = Pout and the power radiated out is Pout = eAT 4 . . Thus, or (b) 0.900 1 000 W m 2 A = 0.700 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 AT 4
e
e
FG 6a5.5f IJ H 990 4 K
23
= 0.120 m 2 . The total glowing
2
j
2
e
j
e
j
L 900 W m T=M MN 0.700e5.67 10 W m
2 8
2
K4
OP j PQ
14
= 388 K = 115 C .
The box of horizontal area A, presents projected area A sin 50.0 perpendicular to the sunlight. Then by the same reasoning, 0.900 1 000 W m 2 A sin 50.0 = 0.700 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 AT 4 or
e
j
e
j
L e900 W m j sin 50.0 OP T=M MN 0.700e5.67 10 W m K j PQ
2 8 2 4
14
= 363 K = 90.0 C .
Chapter 34
313
P34.69
We take R to be the planet's distance from its star. The planet, of radius r, presents a
projected area r 2 perpendicular to the starlight. It radiates over area 4 r 2 .
At steadystate, Pin = Pout : e eI in r 2 = e 4 r 2 T 4
2 4
e j
e
j
F 6.00 10 GH 4 R
23 2
W
I r = e 4 r T JK e j e j
2
so that 6.00 10 23 W = 16R 2 T 4
R=
6.00 10 23 W 6.00 10 23 W = 4 16 T 16 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 310 K
e
ja
f
4
= 4.77 10 9 m = 4.77 Gm .
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P34.2 (a) 2.68 10 3 AD ; (b) 8.31 min ; (c) 2.56 s; (d) 0.133 s; (e) 33.3 s 733 nT E = 300 V m cos 62.8 x  1.88 10 10 t ;
10
P34.30
P34.4 P34.6
(a) 577 W m 2 ; (b) 2.06 10 16 W ; (c) 68.7 MN ; (d) The gravitational force is ~ 10 13 times stronger and in the opposite direction. 4.09 (a) 93.3% ; (b) 50.0% ; (c) 0 2 m p c eB see the solution (a) ~ 10 8 Hz radio wave; (b) ~ 10 13 Hz infrared light (a) 0.690 wavelengths ; (b) 58.9 wavelengths The radio audience gets the news 8.41 ms sooner. (a) 187 m to 556 m; (b) 2.78 m to 3.41 m
b g e j B = b1.00 Tg cose62.8 x  1.88 10 t j
2.9 10 8 m s 5% 49.5 mV
P34.32 P34.34 P34.36 P34.38
P34.8 P34.10 P34.12 P34.14
see the solution
(a) 13.3 nJ m ; (b) 13.3 nJ m ; (c) 7.96 W m 2
3
3
P34.40
P34.42 P34.16 516 pT, ~ 10 5 times stronger than the Earth's field (a) 11.9 GW m 2 ; (b) 234 kW 33.4C for the smaller container and 21.7C for the larger (a) 50.0% ; (b) 269 kW m 2 toward the oven chamber ; (c) 14. 2 kV m (a) 4.97 kW m 2 ; (b) 16.6 J m 3 667 pN (a) 5.36 N ; (b) 893 m s 2 ; (c) 10.7 days P34.46 P34.48 P34.50 P34.52 P34.54 P34.56
P34.44
P34.18 P34.20 P34.22
~ 10 6 J
(a) see the solution; (b) 378 nm (a) 31.4 MW; (b) 0.625 W m 2 ; (c) 0.513% (a) 23.9 W m 2 ; (b) 4.19 times the standard (a) 6.16 Pa ; (b) 1.64 10 10 times less than atmospheric pressure
P34.24 P34.26 P34.28
314 P34.58
Electromagnetic Waves
(a) 625 kW m 2 ; (b) 21.7 kN C and 72.4 T ; (c) 17.8 min
P34.66
(a) 3.33 m, 11.1 ns , 6.67 pT ; (b) E = 2.00 mV m cos 2
P34.60 P34.62
F 16m I (a) G H 9 JK
2
13
F 16 m I gc ; (b) G H 9 JK
2 2
13
r 2 gc
(c) 5.31 nW m 2 ; (d) 1.77 10 17 J m3 ; (e) 3.54 10 17 Pa P34.68 (a) 388 K; (b) 363 K
x b g FGH 3.33 m  11.1t ns IJK j ; F x  t IJ ; B = b6.67 pTgk cos 2 G H 3.33 m 11.1 ns K
(a) see the solution; (b) 17.6 Tm s 2 , 1.75 10 27 W ; (c) 1.80 10 24 W
P34.64
3.00 10 2 deg
35
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
CHAPTER OUTLINE
35.1 35.2 35.3 35.4 35.5 35.6 35.7 35.8 35.9 The Nature of Light Measurements of the Speed of Light The Ray Approximation in Geometric Optics Reflection Refraction Huygen's Principle Dispersion and Prisms Total Internal Reflection Fermat`s Principle
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q35.1 The ray approximation, predicting sharp shadows, is valid for << d . For ~ d diffraction effects become important, and the light waves will spread out noticeably beyond the slit. Light travels through a vacuum at a speed of 300 000 km per second. Thus, an image we see from a distant star or galaxy must have been generated some time ago. For example, the star Altair is 16 lightyears away; if we look at an image of Altair today, we know only what was happening 16 years ago. This may not initially seem significant, but astronomers who look at other galaxies can gain an idea of what galaxies looked like when they were significantly younger. Thus, it actually makes sense to speak of "looking backward in time."
Q35.2
Q35.3
Sun
Moon
partial eclipse no eclipse Earth's surface no eclipse
total eclipse (full shadow) Note: Figure not at all to scale
FIG. Q35.3 315
316 Q35.4
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
With a vertical shop window, streetlights and his own reflection can impede the window shopper's clear view of the display. The tilted shop window can put these reflections out of the way. Windows of airport control towers are also tilted like this, as are automobile windshields.
FIG. Q35.4 Q35.5 We assume that you and the child are always standing close together. For a flat wall to make an echo of a sound that you make, you must be standing along a normal to the wall. You must be on the order of 100 m away, to make the transit time sufficiently long that you can hear the echo separately from the original sound. Your sound must be loud enough so that you can hear it even at this considerable range. In the picture, the dashed rectangle represents an area in which you can be standing. The arrows represent rays of sound. Now suppose two vertical perpendicular walls form an inside corner that you can see. Some of the sound you radiate horizontally will be headed generally toward the corner. It will reflect from both walls with high efficiency to reverse in direction and come back to you. You can stand anywhere reasonably far away to hear a retroreflected echo of sound you produce. If the two walls are not perpendicular, the inside corner will not produce retroreflection. You will generally hear no echo of your shout or clap. If two perpendicular walls have a reasonably narrow gap between them at the corner, you can still hear a clear echo. It is not the corner line itself that retroreflects the sound, but the perpendicular walls on both sides of the corner. Diagram (b) applies also in this case.
(a)
(b) FIG. Q35.4
Chapter 35
317
Q35.6
The stealth fighter is designed so that adjacent panels are not joined at right angles, to prevent any retroreflection of radar signals. This means that radar signals directed at the fighter will not be channeled back toward the detector by reflection. Just as with sound, radar signals can be treated as diverging rays, so that any ray that is by chance reflected back to the detector will be too weak in intensity to distinguish from background noise. This author is still waiting for the automotive industry to utilize this technology. An echo is an example of the reflection of sound. Hearing the noise of a distant highway on a cold morning, when you cannot hear it after the ground warms up, is an example of acoustical refraction. You can use a rubber inner tube inflated with helium as an acoustical lens to concentrate sound in the way a lens can focus light. At your next party, see if you can experimentally find the approximate focal point! No. If the incidence angle is zero, then the ray does not change direction. Also, if the ray travels from a medium of relatively high index of refraction to one of lower index of refraction, it will bend away from the normal. Suppose the light moves into a medium of higher refractive index. Then its wavelength decreases. The frequency remains constant. The speed diminishes by a factor equal to the index of refraction. If a laser beam enters a sugar solution with a concentration gradient (density and index of refraction increasing with depth) then the laser beam will be progressively bent downward (toward the normal) as it passes into regions of greater index of refraction. As measured from the diagram, the incidence angle is 60, and the refraction angle is 35. Using sin 2 v 2 sin 35 v 2 = = and the speed of light in Lucite is 2.0 10 8 m s . , then equation 35.3, sin 60 sin 1 v1 c The frequency of the light does not change upon refraction. Knowing the wavelength in a vacuum, we can use the speed of light in a vacuum to determine the frequency: c = f , thus 3.00 10 8 = f 632.8 10 9 , so the frequency is 474.1 THz. To find the wavelength of light in Lucite, we use the same wave speed relation, v = f , so 2.0 10 8 = 4.741 10 14 , so Lucite = 420 nm .
Q35.7
Q35.8
Q35.9 Q35.10
Q35.11
e
j
e
j
Q35.12 Q35.13
Blue light would be refracted at a smaller angle from the normal, since the index of refraction for blue lighta smaller wavelength than red lightis larger. The index of refraction of water is 1.33, quite different from 1.00 for air. Babies learn that the refraction of light going through the water indicates the water is there. On the other hand, the index of refraction of liquid helium is close to that of air, so it gives little visible evidence of its presence. The outgoing beam would be a rainbow, with the different colors of light traveling parallel to each other. The white light would undergo dispersion upon refraction into the slab, with blue light bending towards the normal more than the red light. Upon refraction out of the block, all rays of light would exit the slab at the same angle at which they entered the slab, but offset from each other. Diamond has higher index of refraction than glass and consequently a smaller critical angle for total internal reflection. A brilliantcut diamond is shaped to admit light from above, reflect it totally at the converging facets on the underside of the jewel, and let the light escape only at the top. Glass will have less light internally reflected.
Q35.14
Q35.15
318 Q35.16 Q35.17
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
Light coming up from underwater is bent away from the normal. Therefore the part of the oar that is submerged appears bent upward. Highly silvered mirrors reflect about 98% of the incident light. With a 2mirror periscope, that results in approximately a 4% decrease in intensity of light as the light passes through the periscope. This may not seem like much, but in lowlight conditions, that lost light may mean the difference between being able to distinguish an enemy armada or an iceberg from the sky beyond. Using prisms results in total internal reflection, meaning that 100% of the incident light is reflected through the periscope. That is the "total" in total internal reflection. Sound travels faster in the warmer air, and thus the sound traveling through the warm air aloft will refract much like the light refracting through the nonuniform sugarwater solution in Question 35.10. Sound that would normally travel up over the treetops can be refracted back towards the ground. The light with the greater change in speed will have the larger deviation. If the glass has a higher index than the surrounding medium, X travels slower in the glass. Immediately around the dark shadow of my head, I see a halo brighter than the rest of the dewy grass. It is called the heiligenschein. Cellini believed that it was a miraculous sign of divine favor pertaining to him alone. Apparently none of the people to whom he showed it told him that they could see halos around their own shadows but not around Cellini's. Thoreau knew that each person had his own halo. He did not draw any ray diagrams but assumed that it was entirely natural. Between Cellini's time and Thoreau's, the Enlightenment and Newton's explanation of the rainbow had happened. Today the effect is easy to see, whenever your shadow falls on a retroreflecting traffic sign, license plate, or road stripe. When a bicyclist's shadow falls on a paint stripe marking the edge of the road, her halo races along with her. It is a shame that few people are sufficiently curious observers of the natural world to have noticed the phenomenon. Suppose the Sun is low in the sky and an observer faces away from the Sun toward a large uniform rain shower. A ray of light passing overhead strikes a drop of water. The light is refracted first at the front surface of the drop, with the violet light deviating the most and the red light the least. At the back of the drop the light is reflected and it returns to the front surface where it again undergoes refraction with additional dispersion as it moves from water into air. The rays leave the drop so that the angle between the incident white light and the most intense returning violet light is 40, and the angle between the white light and the most intense returning red light is 42. The observer can see a ring of raindrops shining violet, a ring with angular radius 40 around her shadow. From the locus of directions at 42 away from the antisolar direction, the observer receives red light. The other spectral colors make up the rainbow in between. An observer of a rainbow sees violet light at 40 angular separation from the direction opposite the Sun, then the other spectral colors, and then red light on the outside the rainbow, with angular radius 42. At the altitude of the plane the surface of the Earth need not block off the lower half of the rainbow. Thus, the full circle can be seen. You can see such a rainbow by climbing on a stepladder above a garden sprinkler in the middle of a sunny day. Set the sprinkler for fine mist. Do not let the slippery children fall from the ladder. Total internal reflection occurs only when light moving originally in a medium of high index of refraction falls on an interface with a medium of lower index of refraction. Thus, light moving from air (n = 1) to water (n = 1.33 ) cannot undergo total internal reflection.
Q35.18
Q35.19 Q35.20
Q35.21
Q35.22
Q35.23
Chapter 35
319
Q35.24
A mirage occurs when light changes direction as it moves between batches of air having different indices of refraction because they have different densities at different temperatures. When the sun makes a blacktop road hot, an apparent wet spot is bright due to refraction of light from the bright sky. The light, originally headed a little below the horizontal, always bends up as it first enters and then leaves sequentially hotter, lowerdensity, lowerindex layers of air closer to the road surface.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 35.1 Section 35.2 P35.1 The Nature of Light Measurements of the Speed of Light
The Moon's radius is 1.74 10 6 m and the Earth's radius is 6.37 10 6 m . The total distance traveled by the light is: d = 2 3.84 10 8 m  1.74 10 6 m  6.37 10 6 m = 7.52 10 8 m . This takes 2.51 s, so v = 7.52 10 8 m = 2.995 10 8 m s = 299.5 Mm s . 2.51 s
e
j
P35.2 P35.3
x = ct ;
8 x 2 1.50 10 km 1 000 m km c= = = 2. 27 10 8 m s = 227 Mm s t 22.0 min 60.0 s min
e
a
fb
jb
g
g
The experiment is most convincing if the wheel turns fast enough to pass outgoing light through 2 one notch and returning light through the next: t = c
F2 I = t = G J HcK
P35.4 (a)
so
2.998 10 8 2 720 c = = = 114 rad s . 2 2 11. 45 10 3
e
e
j a f j
The returning light would be blocked by a tooth at onehalf the angular speed, giving another data point. For the light beam to make it through both slots, the time for the light to travel the distance d must equal the time for the disk to rotate through the angle , if c is the speed of light, d d = , so c = . c (b) We are given that d = 2.50 m , = d
2 rad 1.00 rad = 2.91 10 4 rad , = 5 555 rev s = 3.49 10 4 rad s 60.0 180 1.00 rev
4
FG H
IJ K
FG H
IJ K
c=
a2.50 mfe3.49 10 =
2.91 10
4
rad s
rad
j = 3.00 10
8
m s = 300 Mm s
320
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
Section 35.3 Section 35.4 Section 35.5 *P35.5 (a)
The Ray Approximation in Geometric Optics Reflection Refraction Let AB be the originally horizontal ceiling, BC its originally vertical normal, AD the new ceiling and DE its normal. Then angle BAD = . By definition DE is perpendicular to AD and BC is perpendicular to AB. Then the angle between DE extended and BC is because angles are equal when their sides are perpendicular, right side to right side and left side to left side. Now CBE = is the angle of incidence of the vertical light beam. Its angle of reflection is also . The angle between the vertical incident beam and the reflected beam is 2 . A A D E B
C
FIG. P35.5(a) D
(b)
E 1.40 cm = 0.001 94 tan 2 = 720 cm From geometry, so (b) FIG. P35.5(b)
(c) P35.6 (a)
= 0.055 7
Mirror 2 Mirror 2 Light beam 40.0 40 50 1.25 m 50 i2= 50 d 40 i1= 40 50 Mirror 1
1.25 m = d sin 40.0
d = 1.94 m .
50.0 above the horizontal
or parallel to the incident ray.
P 1.25 m Mirror 1
FIG. P35.6 *P35.7 (a) Method One: The incident ray makes angle = 90 1 with the first mirror. In the picture, the law of reflection implies that 1 =1 . FIG. P35.7 Then = 90 1 = 90  1 = . In the triangle made by the mirrors and the ray passing between them,
Further, and
+ 90+ = 180 = 90 = 90 = = = = .
Thus the final ray makes the same angle with the first mirror as did the incident ray. Its direction is opposite to the incident ray. continued on next page
Chapter 35
321
Method Two: The vector velocity of the incident light has a component v y perpendicular to the first mirror and a component v x perpendicular to the second. The v y component is reversed upon the first reflection, which leaves v x unchanged. The second reflection reverses v x and leaves v y unchanged. The doubly reflected ray then has velocity opposite to the incident ray. (b) The incident ray has velocity v x i + v y j + v z k . Each reflection reverses one component and leaves the other two unchanged. After all the reflections, the light has velocity
 v x i  v y j  v z k , opposite to the incident ray.
P35.8 The incident light reaches the lefthand mirror at distance
Mirror Mirror
a1.00 mf tan 5.00 = 0.087 5 m
2 0.087 5 m = 0.175 m .
above its bottom edge. The reflected light first reaches the righthand mirror at height
b
g
1.00 m
reflected beam
It bounces between the mirrors with this distance between points of contact with either. Since the light reflects *P35.9 1.00 m = 5.72 0.175 m
5.00 1.00 m
FIG. P35.8
five times from the righthand mirror and six times from the left .
Let d represent the perpendicular distance from the person to the mirror. The distance between lamp and peson measured parallel to the mirror can be written in d tan two ways: 2d tan + d tan = d tan . The condition on the 2d 2d d distance traveled by the light is = + . We cos cos cos have the two equations 3 tan = tan and 2 cos = 3 cos . To eliminate we write 9 sin 2 sin 2 = cos 2 cos 2 4 cos 2 = 9 cos 2
2d d
2d tan
d tan
d
FIG. P35.9
9 cos 2 sin 2 = cos 2 1  cos 2
2 2 2
e j F 4 I 4 cos sin = cos G 1  cos J H 9 K 4 4 sin = 1  e1  sin j 36 sin = 9  4 + 4 sin 9
2 2 2 2 2
sin 2 =
5 32
= 23.3
322 P35.10
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
Using Snell's law,
sin 2 =
n1 sin 1 n2
2 = 25.5
2 =
*P35.11
1 = 442 nm . n1
FIG. P35.10
The law of refraction n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 can be put into the more general form c c sin 1 = sin 2 v1 v2 sin 1 sin 2 = v1 v2 In this form it applies to all kinds of waves that move through space. sin 2 sin 3.5 = 343 m s 1 493 m s sin 2 = 0.266
2 = 15.4
The wave keeps constant frequency in f= v1 v 2 = 1 2
2 =
v 2 1 1 493 m s 0.589 m = = 2.56 m 343 m s v1 f= c = 3.00 10 8 m s 6.328 10
7
a
f
P35.12
(a) (b)
m
= 4.74 10 14 Hz
glass =
v glass =
air 632.8 nm = = 422 nm 1.50 n
c air 3.00 10 8 m s = = 2.00 10 8 m s = 200 Mm s 1.50 n
(c) P35.13
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 sin 1 = 1.333 sin 45 sin 1 = 1.33 0.707 = 0.943
a fa
f
1 = 70.5 19.5 above the horizon
FIG. P35.13 *P35.14 We find the angle of incidence: n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 1.333 sin 1 = 1.52 sin 19.6 1 = 22.5 The angle of reflection of the beam in water is then also 22.5 .
Chapter 35
323
P35.15
(a)
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 1.00 sin 30.0 = n sin 19.24 n = 1.52 c 3.00 10 8 m s 6.328 10 7 m
(c)
f=
=
= 4.74 10 14 Hz in air and in syrup.
(d)
v=
8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 1.98 10 8 m s = 198 Mm s 1.52 n
(b)
=
v 1.98 10 8 m s = = 417 nm f 4.74 10 14 s v=
8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 1.81 10 8 m s = 181 Mm s 1.66 n 8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 2.25 10 8 m s = 225 Mm s 1.333 n 8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 1.36 10 8 m s = 136 Mm s 2.20 n
P35.16
(a)
Flint Glass:
(b)
Water:
v=
(c) P35.17
Cubic Zirconia:
v=
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 : n 2 = 1.90 = c : v
1.333 sin 37.0 = n 2 sin 25.0 v= c = 1.58 10 8 m s = 158 Mm s 1.90
P35.18
sin 1 = n w sin 2 1 1 sin 1 = sin 90.028.0 = 0.662 1.333 1.333 2 = sin 1 0.662 = 41.5 sin 2 =
1 = 62
a
f
28
air n = 1.00 water n = 1.333
a
f
3.00 m d = = 3.39 m h= tan 2 tan41.5
2
h
3.0 m FIG. P35.18
324 P35.19
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 :
2 = sin 1 2 = sin 1
FG n sin IJ H n K R1.00 sin 30 U = S 1.50 V T W
1 1 2
19.5
2 and 3 are alternate interior angles formed by the ray cutting parallel normals.
So,
3 = 2 = 19.5
1.50 sin 3 = 1.00 sin 4
FIG. P35.19
4 = 30.0
*P35.20 For with we have Also, and Then,
+ = 90 1 + + + 2 = 180 1 + 2 = 90 . 1 =1
1 sin 1 = n sin 2 .
sin 1 = n sin 90  1 = n cos 1
sin 1 = n = tan 1 cos 1
b
g
FIG. P35.20
1 = tan 1 n .
P35.21
At entry, or
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 1.00 sin 30.0 = 1.50 sin 2
2 = 19.5 .
The distance h the light travels in the medium is given by cos 2 = or h= 2.00 cm h FIG. P35.21
2.00 cm = 2.12 cm . cos19.5 d : h
The angle of deviation upon entry is The offset distance comes from sin =
= 1  2 = 30.019.5 = 10.5 .
d = 2.21 cm sin 10.5 = 0.388 cm .
2.00 cm = 2.12 cm cos19.5 ..
a
f
P35.22
The distance, h, traveled by the light is h = The speed of light in the material is Therefore, v=
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 2.00 10 8 m s 1.50 h .. h 2.12 10 2 m = 1.06 10 10 s = 106 ps . t= = v 2.00 10 8 m s
Chapter 35
325
P35.23
Applying Snell's law at the airoil interface, n air sin = n oil sin 20.0 yields
= 30.4 .
Applying Snell's law at the oilwater interface n w sin = n oil sin 20.0 yields
= 22.3 .
FIG. P35.23 *P35.24 For sheets 1 and 2 as described, n1 sin 26.5 = n 2 sin 31.7 0.849n1 = n 2 For the trial with sheets 3 and 2, n 3 sin 26.5 = n 2 sin 36.7 0.747n 3 = n 2 Now 0.747n 3 = 0.849n1 n 3 = 1.14n1 For the third trial, n1 sin 26.5 = n 3 sin 3 = 1.14n1 sin 3
3 = 23.1
P35.25 Consider glass with an index of refraction of 1.5, which is 3 mm thick. The speed of light in the glass is 3 10 8 m s = 2 10 8 m s . 1.5 The extra travel time is 3 10 3 m 2 10 8 m s  3 10 3 m 3 10 8 m s ~ 10 11 s .
For light of wavelength 600 nm in vacuum and wavelength the extra optical path, in wavelengths, is 3 10 3 m 4 10 7 m 
600 nm = 400 nm in glass, 1.5 ~ 10 3 wavelengths .
3 10 3 m 6 10 7 m
326 P35.26
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
Refraction proceeds according to (a) For the normal component of velocity to be constant, or We multiply Equations (1) and (2), obtaining: or
a1.00f sin = a1.66f sin
1
2
.
(1)
v1 cos 1 = v 2 cos 2
acf cos = FGH 1.c66 IJK cos
1
2.
(2)
sin 1 cos 1 = sin 2 cos 2 sin 2 1 = sin 2 2 .
The solution 1 = 2 = 0 does not satisfy Equation (2) and must be rejected. The physical solution is 2 1 = 1802 2 or 2 = 90.0 1 . Then Equation (1) becomes: sin 1 = 1.66 cos 1 , or tan 1 = 1.66 which yields (b)
1 = 58.9 .
Light entering the glass slows down and makes a smaller angle with the normal. Both effects reduce the velocity component parallel to the surface of the glass, so that component cannot remain constant, or will remain constant only in the trivial case 1 = 2 = 0 .
P35.27
See the sketch showing the path of the light ray. and are angles of incidence at mirrors 1 and 2. For triangle abca, 2 + 2 + = 180 or
= 1802 + .
b
g
(1)
Now for triangle bcdb,
a90.0 f + b90.0 g + = 180
or
FIG. P35.27 (2)
= + .
Substituting Equation (2) into Equation (1) gives = 1802 . Note: From Equation (2), =  . Thus, the ray will follow a path like that shown only if < 0 . For > 0 , is negative and multiple reflections from each mirror will occur before the incident and reflected rays intersect.
Chapter 35
327
Section 35.6 *P35.28 (a)
Huygen's Principle For the diagrams of contour lines and wave fronts and rays, see Figures (a) and (b) below. As the waves move to shallower water, the wave fronts bend to become more nearly parallel to the contour lines. For the diagrams of contour lines and wave fronts and rays, see Figures (c) and (d) below. We suppose that the headlands are steep underwater, as they are above water. The rays are everywhere perpendicular to the wave fronts of the incoming refracting waves. As shown, the rays bend toward the headlands and deliver more energy per length at the headlands.
(b)
(a) Contour lines
(b) Wave fronts and rays
(c) Contour lines FIG. P35.28
(d) Wave fronts and rays
Section 35.7 P35.29
Dispersion and Prisms n v = 1.470 at 400 nm 1.00 sin = 1. 470 sin v and and n r = 1.458 at 700 nm. 1.00 sin 1. = 458 sin r
1
From Fig 35.21 Then
r  v = r  v = sin 1
= sin 1 P35.30 n 700 nm = 1.458 (a) (b)
FG sin IJ  sin FG sin IJ H 1.458 K H 1.470 K FG sin 30.0 IJ  sin FG sin 30.0 IJ = 0.171 H 1.458 K H 1.470 K
1 2
a
f
a1.00f sin 75.0 = 1.458 sin
Let So
; 2 = 41.5
1
60.0
2 3
4
3 + = 90.0 , 2 + = 90.0 then + + 60.0 = 180 .
60.0 2  3 = 0 60.041.5 = 3 = 18.5 .
FIG. P35.30
(c) (d)
1.458 sin 18.5 = 1.00 sin 4
4 = 27.6
= 1  2 +  90.0 4
g = 75.041.5+a90.018.5f  a90.027.6f =
b
g
b
42.6
328 P35.31
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
Taking to be the apex angle and min to be the angle of minimum deviation, from Equation 35.9, the index of refraction of the prism material is n= Solving for min , sin + min 2 sin 2
1
min
b g F I = 2 sin G n sin J  = 2 sin a 2.20f sina 25.0f  50.0 = H 2K
1
b
g
86.8 .
P35.32
Note for use in every part: so At the first surface the deviation is At exit, the deviation is The total deviation is therefore (a) At entry: Thus, At exit:
+ 90.0 2 + 90.0 3 = 180
b
g b
g
3 =  2 . = 1  2 . = 4 3 . = + = 1 + 4  2 3 = 1 + 4  .
or FIG. P35.32
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2
2 = sin 1
FG sin 48.6 IJ = 30.0 . H 1.50 K a f
3 = 60.030.0 = 30.0 .
1.50 sin 30.0 = 1.00 sin 4 or
4 = sin 1 1.50 sin 30.0 = 48.6
so the path through the prism is symmetric when 1 = 48.6 . (b) (c)
= 48.6+48.660.0 = 37.2
At entry: At exit: sin 2 = sin 45.6 2 = 28. 4 1.50 sin 4 = 1.50 sin 31.6 4 = 51.7
3 = 60.028.4 = 31.6 .
a a
f
= 45.6+51.760.0 = 37.3 .
3 = 60.031.5 = 28.5 .
(d)
At entry: At exit:
sin 2 =
sin 51.6 2 = 31.5 1.50 sin 4 = 1.50 sin 28.5 4 = 45.7
f
= 51.6+45.760.0 = 37.3 .
P35.33
At the first refraction,
1.00 sin 1 = n sin 2 .
The critical angle at the second surface is given by n sin 3 = 1.00 : or But,
3 = sin 1
FG 1.00 IJ = 41.8 . H 1.50 K
FIG. P35.33 Thus, to avoid total internal reflection at the second surface (i.e., have 3 < 41.8 ) it is necessary that Since sin 1 = n sin 2 , this becomes or
2 = 60.0 3 . 2 > 18.2 .
sin 1 > 1.50 sin 18.2 = 0.468
1 > 27.9 .
Chapter 35
329
P35.34
At the first refraction, 1.00 sin 1 = n sin 2 . The critical angle at the second surface is given by n sin 3 = 1.00 , or But which gives
3 = sin 1
b90.0
2
FG IJ H K g + b90.0 g + = 180
1.00 . n
3
1
2
3
Thus, to have 3 < sin 1
FG 1.00 IJ and avoid total internal reflection at the second surface, HnK F 1.00 IJ . >  sin G it is necessary that HnK L F 1.00 IJ OP Since sin = n sin , this requirement becomes sin > n sin M  sin G H n KQ N F L F 1.00 IJ OPIJ . > sin G n sin M  sin G or H n K QK H N > sin F n  1 sin  cos I . Through the application of trigonometric identities, H K
2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
2 = 3 .
FIG. P35.34
P35.35
For the incoming ray, Using the figure to the right,
sin 2 =
sin 1 . n
b g b g
2 violet
= sin 1
2 red
= sin 1
FG sin 50.0 IJ = 27.48 H 1.66 K FG sin 50.0 IJ = 28.22 . H 1.62 K
For the outgoing ray, and sin 4 = n sin 3 :
3 = 60.0 2
FIG. P35.35
b g b g
4 violet 4 red
= sin 1 1.66 sin 32.52 = 63.17
= sin 1 1.62 sin 31.78 = 58.56 .
violet
The angular dispersion is the difference 4 = 4
b g
 4
b g
red
= 63.1758.56 = 4.61 .
Section 35.8 P35.36
Total Internal Reflection
n sin = 1 . From Table 35.1, (a)
= sin 1 = sin 1 = sin 1
(b)
(c)
FG 1 IJ = 24.4 H 2.419 K FG 1 IJ = 37.0 H 1.66 K FG 1 IJ = 49.8 H 1.309 K
330 P35.37
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
sin c =
n2 : n1 Diamond:
c = sin 1 c = sin 1 c = sin 1
(a)
(b) (c) P35.38 sin c =
Flint glass: Ice:
FG n IJ Hn K FG 1.333 IJ = H 2.419 K FG 1.333 IJ = H 1.66 K
2 1
33.4
53.4
Since n 2 > n1 , there is no critical angle .
n air 1.00 = = 0.735 n pipe 1.36
c = 47.3
Geometry shows that the angle of refraction at the end is = 90.0 c = 90.047.3 = 42.7 . Then, Snell's law at the end, gives 1.00 sin = 1.36 sin 42.7
= 67.2 .
FIG. P35.38
The 2m diameter is unnecessary information. P35.39 sin c = n2 n1
n 2 = n1 sin 88.8 = 1.000 3 0.999 8 = 1.000 08
*P35.40 (a) A ray along the inner edge will escape if any ray escapes. Its angle of Rd and by n sin > 1 sin 90 . Then incidence is described by sin = R n Rd nd . >1 nR  nd > R nR  R > nd R> n1 R
b
gb
g
FIG. P35.39
a
f
(b)
As d 0 , Rmin 0 . As n increases, Rmin decreases. As n decreases toward 1, Rmin increases.
This is reasonable. This is reasonable. This is reasonable. FIG. P35.40
(c) P35.41
Rmin =
1.40 100 10 6 m 0.40
e
j=
350 10 6 m
From Snell's law, n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 . At the extreme angle of viewing, 2 = 90.0
a1.59fbsin g = a1.00f sin 90.0 .
1
So
1 = 39.0 .
rp rd <d< tan 1 tan 1
Therefore, the depth of the air bubble is
or
1.08 cm < d < 1.17 cm .
FIG. P35.41
Chapter 35
331
P35.42
(a)
sin 2 v 2 = sin 1 v1 and
2 = 90.0 at the critical angle sin 90.0 1 850 m s = sin c 343 m s
so (b) (c)
c = sin 1 0.185 = 10.7 .
a
f
Sound can be totally reflected if it is traveling in the medium where it travels slower: air .
Sound in air falling on the wall from most directions is 100% reflected , so the wall is a
good mirror.
P35.43
For plastic with index of refraction n 1.42 reflection is given by
surrounded by air, the critical angle for total internal
c = sin 1
FG 1 IJ sin FG 1 IJ = 44.8 . H nK H 1.42 K
1
In the gasoline gauge, skylight from above travels down the plastic. The rays close to the vertical are totally reflected from the sides of the slab and from both facets at the lower end of the plastic, where it is not immersed in gasoline. This light returns up inside the plastic and makes it look bright. Where the plastic is immersed in gasoline, with index of refraction about 1.50, total internal reflection should not happen. The light passes out of the lower end of the plastic with little reflected, making this part of the gauge look dark. To frustrate total internal reflection in the gasoline, the index of refraction of the plastic should be n < 2.12 . since
c = sin 1
FG 1.50 IJ = 45.0 . H 2.12 K
Section 35.9 P35.44
Fermat`s Principle
Assume the lifeguard's initial path makes angle 1 with the northsouth normal to the shoreline, and angle 2 with this normal in the water. By Fermat's principle, his path should follow the law of refraction: sin 1 sin 1 v1 7.00 m s . = = = 5.00 or 2 = sin 1 sin 2 v 2 1.40 m s 5
We home in on the solution as follows:
a f L F sin or 26.0 m = a16.0 mf tan + a 20.0 mf tan Msin G N H 5
1 1
FIG. P35.44 The lifeguard on land travels eastward a distance x = 16.0 m tan 1 . Then in the water, he travels
FG H
IJ K
a
26.0 m  x = 20.0 m tan 2 further east. Thus, 26.0 m = 16.0 m tan 1 + 20.0 m tan 2
1
IJ OP . KQ
a
f
f
a
f
1 (deg) righthand side
50.0 22.2 m
60.0 31.2 m
54.0 25.3 m
54.8 25.99 m
54.81 26.003 m
The lifeguard should start running at 54.8 east of north .
332
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
Additional Problems *P35.45 Scattered light leaves the center of the photograph (a) in all horizontal directions between 1 = 0 and 90 from the normal. When it immediately enters the water (b), it is gathered into a fan between 0 and 2 max given by n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 1.00 sin 90 = 1.333 sin 2 max 2 max = 48.6 The light leaves the cylinder without deviation, so the viewer only receives light from the center of the photograph when he has turned by an angle less than 48.6. When the paperweight is turned farther, light at the back surface undergoes total internal reflection (c). The viewer sees things outside the globe on the far side.
(a)
1 max
2 max
(b)
(c) FIG. P35.45
P35.46
Let n x be the index of refraction at distance x below the top of the atmosphere and n x = h = n be its value at the planet surface. n  1.000 Then, n x = 1.000 + x. h
af
a
f
af
FG H
IJ K
(a)
The total time interval required to traverse the atmosphere is t =
z z
h
dx h n x = dx : v 0 c 0
af
t =
1h n  1.000 1.000 + x dx c0 h h n  1.000 + c ch
z LMN
FG H
t =
a
f F h I = h FG n + 1.000 IJ GH 2 JK c H 2 K
2
IJ OP KQ
.
(b)
The travel time in the absence of an atmosphere would be Thus, the time in the presence of an atmosphere is
FG H
h . c n + 1.000 times larger . 2
IJ K
P35.47
Let the air and glass be medium 1 and 2, respectively. By Snell's law, or But the conditions of the problem are such that 1 = 2 2 . We now use the doubleangle trig identity suggested. or Thus, 2 = 38.7 and 1 = 2 2 = 77.5 .
n 2 sin 2 = n1 sin 1 1.56 sin 2 = sin 1 . 1.56 sin 2 = sin 2 2 . 1.56 sin 2 = 2 sin 2 cos 2 cos 2 = 1.56 = 0.780 . 2
Chapter 35
333
P35.48
(a)
1 = 1 = 30.0
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 1.00 sin 30.0 = 1.55 sin 2
2 = 18.8
(b)
1 = 1 = 30.0
2 = sin 1
= sin 1
FG n sin IJ H n K FG 1.55 sin 30.0 IJ = H 1 K
1 1 2
FIG. P35.48 50.8
(c), (d) The other entries are computed similarly, and are shown in the table below. (c) air into glass, angles in degrees incidence 0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 reflection 0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 refraction 0 6.43 12.7 18.8 24.5 29.6 34.0 37.3 39.4 40.2 (d) glass into air, angles in degrees incidence 0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 reflection 0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 refraction 0 15.6 32.0 50.8 85.1 none* none* none* none* none*
*total internal reflection P35.49 For water, Thus and sin c = 1 3 = . 43 4
c = sin 1 0.750 = 48.6
d = 2 1.00 m tan c
a
f
a
f
d = 2.00 m tan 48.6 = 2.27 m .
P35.50 Call 1 the angle of incidence and of reflection on the left face and 2 those angles on the right face. Let represent the complement of 1 and be the complement of 2 . Now = and = because they are pairs of alternate interior angles. We have A = + = + and
a
f
FIG. P35.49
B = + A + = + + A = 2A .
FIG. P35.50
334 P35.51
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
(a)
We see the Sun moving from east to west across the sky. Its angular speed is
=
2 rad = = 7.27 10 5 rad s . t 86 400 s
The direction of sunlight crossing the cell from the window changes at this rate, moving on the opposite wall at speed v = r = 2.37 m 7.27 10 5 rad s = 1.72 10 4 m s = 0.172 mm s . (b) The mirror folds into the cell the motion that would occur in a room twice as wide:
a
fe
j
v = r = 2 0.174 mm s = 0.345 mm s .
(c), (d) As the Sun moves southward and upward at 50.0, we may regard the corner of the window as fixed, and both patches of light move northward and downward at 50.0 . * P35.52 (a) (b)
b
g
45.0 Yes
as shown in the first figure to the right.
If grazing angle is halved, the number of reflections from the side faces is doubled. P35.53 Horizontal light rays from the setting Sun pass above the hiker. The light rays are twice refracted and once reflected, as in Figure (b). The most intense light reaching the hiker, that which represents the visible rainbow, is located between angles of 40 and 42 from the hiker's shadow. The hiker sees a greater percentage of the violet inner edge, so we consider the red outer edge. The radius R of the circle of droplets is R = 8.00 km sin 42.0 = 5.35 km . Then the angle , between the vertical and the radius where the bow touches the ground, is given by cos = or 2.00 km 2.00 km = = 0.374 5.35 km R
FIG. P35.52
Figure (a)
a
f
= 68.1 .
The angle filled by the visible bow is 360 2 68.1 = 224
a
f
Figure (b) FIG. P35.53
224 = 62.2% of a circle . so the visible bow is 360
Chapter 35
335
P35.54
Light passing the top of the pole makes an angle of incidence 1 = 90.0 . It falls on the water surface at distance from the pole Ld s1 = tan 2 from 1.00 sin 1 = n sin 2 . and has an angle of refraction Then and the whole shadow length is s1 + s 2 = s1 + s 2 s 2 = d tan 2
FG FG IJ IJ H H KK Ld F F cos IJ IJ = + d tanG sin G H H n KK tan 2.00 m F F cos 40.0 IJ IJ = = + a 2.00 mf tanG sin G H H 1.33 K K tan 40.0
sin 1 Ld + d tan sin 1 tan n
1 1
3.79 m
FIG. P35.54
P35.55
As the beam enters the slab, 1.00 sin 50.0 = 1. 48 sin 2 giving
2 = 31.2 .
FIG. P35.55 1.55 mm The beam then strikes the top of the slab at x1 = from the left end. Thereafter, the beam tan 31.2 strikes a face each time it has traveled a distance of 2 x 1 along the length of the slab. Since the slab is 420 mm long, the beam has an additional 420 mm  x1 to travel after the first reflection. The number of additional reflections is 420 mm  x 1 420 mm  1.55 mm tan 31.2 = = 81.5 2 x1 3.10 mm tan 31.2 or 81 reflections
since the answer must be an integer. The total number of reflections made in the slab is then 82 . S1 n  n1 = 2 S1 n 2 + n1
P35.56
(a)
LM N
OP = L 1.52  1.00 O Q MN 1.52 + 1.00 PQ
2
2
= 0.042 6 S1 n  n1 = 2 S1 n 2 + n1
(b)
If medium 1 is glass and medium 2 is air, There is no difference .
LM N
OP = L 1.00  1.52 O Q MN 1.00 + 1.52 PQ
2
2
= 0.042 6 .
P35.57
(a)
With and the reflected fractional intensity is
n1 = 1 n2 = n
S1 n 1 = S1 n +1 The remaining intensity must be transmitted: S2 n 1 =1 S1 n +1 continued on next page
FG H
IJ K
2
.
FG H
IJ = an + 1f  an  1f K an + 1f
2 2 2
2
=
n 2 + 2n + 1  n 2 + 2n  1
a f
n +1
2
=
a f
n+1
4n
2
.
336
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
(b)
At entry, At exit, Overall, or
S2 n 1 =1 S1 n +1 S3 = 0.828 . S2 S3 S = 3 S1 S2
FG H
IJ = 4a2.419f K a2.419 + 1f
2 2
2
= 0.828 .
FG IJ FG S IJ = a0.828f H KH S K
2 1
= 0.685
68.5% .
P35.58
Define T =
an + 1f f
2
4n
2
as the transmission coefficient for one
encounter with an interface. For diamond and air, it is 0.828, as in Problem 57. As shown in the figure, the total amount transmitted is T2 +T2 1T
a
+...+ T 2 1  T
a
f
+T2 1T +...
a
f
4
+T2 1T
a
f
6
2n
We have 1  T = 1  0.828 = 0.172 so the total transmission is
f + a0.172f + a0.172f +... . To sum this series, define F = 1 + a0.172 f + a0.172 f + a0.172 f + ... . Note that a0.172f F = a0.172 f + a0.172 f + a0.172 f +... , and 1 + a0.172 f F = 1 + a0.172f + a0.172 f + a0.172 f + ... = F . 1 . Then, 1 = F  a0.172f F or F = 1  a0.172 f a0.828f = 0.706 or 70.6% . The overall transmission is then 1  a0.172 f
2
a0.828f
1 + 0.172
a
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
2
4
6
FIG. P35.58
2
2
4
6
2
2
2
2
P35.59
Define n1 to be the index of refraction of the surrounding medium and n 2 to be that for the prism material. We can use the critical angle of 42.0 to find the n ratio 2 : n1 So, n 2 sin 42.0 = n1 sin 90.0 . n2 1 = = 1.49 . n1 sin 42.0 FIG. P35.59
Call the angle of refraction 2 at the surface 1. The ray inside the prism forms a triangle with surfaces 1 and 2, so the sum of the interior angles of this triangle must be 180. 90.0 2 + 60.0+ 90.042.0 = 180 . Thus,
b
g
a
f
Therefore, Applying Snell's law at surface 1, sin 1 =
2 = 18.0 . n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 18.0
FG n IJ sin Hn K
2 1
2
= 1.49 sin 18.0
1 = 27.5 .
Chapter 35
337
*P35.60
(a)
As the mirror turns through angle , the angle of incidence increases by and so does the angle of reflection. The incident ray is stationary, so the reflected ray turns through angle 2 . The angular speed of the reflected ray is 2 m . The speed of the dot of light on the circular wall is 2 m R .
(b)
The two angles marked in the figure to the right are equal because their sides are perpendicular, right side to right side and left side to left side. We have and So cos = d x +d
2 2
=
ds dx
FIG. P35.60
ds = 2 m x 2 + d 2 . dt dx ds = dt dt x2 + d2 x2 + d2 = 2 m . d d
P35.61
(a)
For polystyrene surrounded by air, internal reflection requires
3 = sin 1
Then from geometry, From Snell's law, This has no solution. Therefore, total internal reflection
FG 1.00 IJ = 42.2 . H 1.49 K
2 = 90.0 3 = 47.8 .
sin 1 = 1.49 sin 47.8 = 1.10 .
always happens .
FIG. P35.61
(b)
For polystyrene surrounded by water, and From Snell's law,
3 = sin 1
FG 1.33 IJ = 63.2 H 1.49 K
2 = 26.8 .
1 = 30.3 .
(c)
No internal refraction is possible
since the beam is initially traveling in a medium of lower index of refraction.
338 *P35.62
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
The picture illustrates optical sunrise. At the center of the earth, cos = 6.37 10 m 6.37 10 6 m + 8 614
6
1
1 2
= 2.98 2 = 90  2.98 = 87.0
At the top of the atmosphere n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 1 sin 1 = 1.000 293 sin 87.0
2
FIG. P35.62
1 = 87.4
Deviation upon entry is
= 1  2 = 87.36487.022 = 0.342
Sunrise of the optical day is before geometric sunrise by 0.342 occurs later too, so the optical day is longer by 164 s . P35.63 tan 1 = and 4.00 cm h tan 2 = 2.00 cm h
FG 86 400 s IJ = 82.2 s. Optical sunset H 360 K
tan 2 1 = 2.00 tan 2 1  sin 2 1 Snell's law in this case is: sin 2 1 = 4.00
b
g
2
= 4.00 tan 2 2
2 2 2
F sin I . GH 1  sin JK
2
(1)
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 sin 1 = 1.333 sin 2 .
Squaring both sides, Substituting (2) into (1), Defining x = sin 2 , Solving for x,
sin 2 1 = 1.777 sin 2 2 .
1  1.777 sin 2 2 1.777 sin 2 2 = 4.00
(2)
2 2 2
F sin I . GH 1  sin JK
2
FIG. P35.63
0.444 1 = . 1  1.777 x 1  x
0.444  0.444x = 1  1.777 x
and
x = 0.417 .
From x we can solve for 2 : 2 = sin 1 0.417 = 40.2 . Thus, the height is h= 2.00 cm 2.00 cm = = 2.36 cm . tan 2 tan 40.2
Chapter 35
339
P35.64
= 1  2 = 10.0
and with
n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 n1 = 1 , n 2 = 4 . 3
Thus,
1 = sin 1 n 2 sin 2 = sin 1 n 2 sin 1  10.0 .
b
g
b
g
(You can use a calculator to home in on an approximate solution to this equation, testing different values of 1 until you find that 1 = 36.5 . Alternatively, you can solve for 1 exactly, as shown below.) We are given that This is the sine of a difference, so Rearranging, sin 10.0 = tan 1 and cos 10.00.750 P35.65 sin 1 = 4 sin 1  10.0 . 3
b
g
3 sin 1 = sin 1 cos 10.0 cos 1 sin 10.0 . 4 sin 10.0 cos 1 = cos 10.0
1 = tan 1
FG H a0.740f =
3 sin 1 4
IJ K
36.5 .
To derive the law of reflection, locate point O so that the time of travel from point A to point B will be minimum. The total light path is L = a sec 1 + b sec 2 . The time of travel is t =
FG 1 IJ ba sec H vK
1
1
+ b sec 2 .
g
FIG. P35.65
If point O is displaced by dx, then dt =
FG 1 IJ ba sec H vK
tan 1 d 1 + b sec 2 tan 2 d 2 = 0
g
(1)
(since for minimum time dt = 0 ). Also, so, c + d = a tan 1 + b tan 2 = constant
a sec 2 1 d 1 + b sec 2 2 d 2 = 0 .
(2)
Divide equations (1) and (2) to find 1 = 2 .
340 P35.66
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
Observe in the sketch that the angle of incidence at point P is , and using triangle OPQ: sin = Also, L . R R 2  L2 . R
cos = 1  sin 2 =
Applying Snell's law at point P, 1.00 sin = n sin . Thus, and sin = sin L = n nR n 2 R 2  L2 . nR FIG. P35.66
cos = 1  sin 2 =
From triangle OPS, + + 90.0 + 90.0 = 180 or the angle of incidence at point S is =  . Then, applying Snell's law at point S gives or
a
f b b
g
1.00 sin = n sin = n sin 
g
2 2 2
and P35.67
LMF L I n R  L MNGH R JK nR L F sin = n R L  R L I K R H LL O = sin M F n R  L  R  L I P . KQ NR H
sin = n sin cos  cos sin = n
2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

R 2  L2 L R nR
FG H
IJ OP K PQ
As shown in the sketch, the angle of incidence at point A is:
= sin 1
FG d 2 IJ = sin FG 1.00 m IJ = 30.0 . H 2.00 m K HRK
1
If the emerging ray is to be parallel to the incident ray, the path must be symmetric about the centerline CB of the cylinder. In the isosceles triangle ABC,
=
Therefore, becomes or
and
= 180 .
FIG. P35.67
+ + = 180
2 + 180 = 180
=
= 15.0 . 2
Then, applying Snell's law at point A, n sin = 1.00 sin or n= sin sin 30.0 = = 1.93 . sin sin 15.0
Chapter 35
341
*P35.68
(a)
The apparent radius of the glowing sphere is R3 as shown. For it R sin 1 = 1 R2 R sin 2 = 3 R2 n sin 1 = 1 sin 2 n R1 R3 = R 2 R2 R3 = nR1
2 1
R1 R2 FIG. P35.68(a) R3
(b)
If nR1 > R 2 , then sin 2 cannot be equal to nR1 . The ray considered in part (a) R2 undergoes total internal reflection. In this case a ray escaping the atmosphere as shown here is responsible for the apparent radius of the glowing sphere and R3 = R 2 .
R3
FIG. P35.68(b) B air n P d . FIG. P35.69
2
P35.69
(a)
At the boundary of the air and glass, the critical angle is given by sin c = 1 . n tan c = sin 2 c d 4 sin c d = . or cos c 4t t sin 2 c
2
c
B' d /4
t
Consider the critical ray PBB : Squaring the last equation gives: 1 , this becomes n
d = = 2 2 4t cos c 1  sin c 1 d = 4t n2  1 d= 4t n2  1
FG IJ H K
2
Since sin c =
FG IJ H K
.
or n = 1 +
FG 4t IJ HdK
.
(b)
Solving for d,
Thus, if n = 1.52 and t = 0.600 cm , d =
4 0.600 cm
2
a f= a1.52f  1
2.10 cm .
(c)
Since violet light has a larger index of refraction, it will lead to a smaller critical angle and the inner edge of the white halo will be tinged with violet light.
342 P35.70
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
From the sketch, observe that the angle of incidence at point A is the same as the prism angle at point O. Given that = 60.0 , application of Snell's law at point A gives 1.50 sin = 1.00 sin 60.0 or = 35.3 . From triangle AOB, we calculate the angle of incidence (and reflection) at point B.
= 90.0 + 90.0 = 180 so
Now, using triangle BCQ: Thus the angle of incidence at point C is Finally, Snell's law applied at point C gives or P35.71 (a) Given that 1 = 45.0 and 2 = 76.0 . Snell's law at the first surface gives n sin = 1.00 sin 45.0
b
g b
g
FIG. P35.70
=  = 60.035.3 = 24.7 .
b90.0 g + b90.0 g + a90.0 f = 180 . = a90.0 f  = 30.024.7 = 5.30 .
1.00 sin = 1.50 sin 5.30
= sin 1 1.50 sin 5.30 = 7.96 .
a
f
(1)
Observe that the angle of incidence at the second surface is
= 90.0 .
Thus, Snell's law at the second surface yields n sin = n sin 90.0 = 1.00 sin 76.0 or n cos = sin 76.0 . (2) tan = sin 45.0 = 0.729 sin 76.0
a
f
FIG. P35.71
Dividing Equation (1) by Equation (2), or Then, from Equation (1),
= 36.1 .
n= sin 45.0 sin 45.0 = = 1.20 . sin sin 36.1 L . Also, sin
(b)
From the sketch, observe that the distance the light travels in the plastic is d = the speed of light in the plastic is v = t =
1.20 0.500 m d nL = = = 3.40 10 9 s = 3.40 ns . v c sin 3.00 10 8 m s sin 36.1
e
a
j
f
c , so the time required to travel through the plastic is n
Chapter 35
343
P35.72
sin 1 0.174 0.342 0.500 0.643 0.766 0.866 0.940 0.985
sin 2 0.131 0.261 0.379 0.480 0.576 0.647 0.711 0.740
sin 1 sin 2 1.330 4 1.312 9 1.317 7 1.338 5 1.328 9 1.339 0 1.322 0 1.331 5 FIG. P35.72
The straightness of the graph line demonstrates Snell's proportionality. The slope of the line is and
n = 1.327 6 0.01 n = 1.328 0.8% .
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P35.2 P35.4 P35.6 P35.8 P35.10 P35.12 P35.14 P35.16 227 Mm s (a) see the solution; (b) 300 Mm s (a) 1.94 m; (b) 50.0 above the horizontal : antiparallel to the incident ray five times by the righthand mirror and six times by the lefthand mirror 25.5; 442 nm (a) 474 THz ; (b) 422 nm; (c) 200 Mm s 22.5 (a) 181 Mm s ; (b) 225 Mm s ; (c) 136 Mm s 3.39 m P35.30 P35.32 (a) 41.5 ; (b) 18.5; (c) 27.6; (d) 42.6 (a) see the solution; (b) 37.2; (c) 37.3 ; (d) 37.3 sin 1
P35.34 P35.36 P35.38 P35.40 P35.42
FH
n 2  1 sin  cos
IK
(a) 24.4 ; (b) 37.0 ; (c) 49.8 67.2 (a) nd ; (b) yes; (c) 350 m n 1
(a) 10.7; (b) air; (c) Sound falling on the wall from most directions is 100% reflected. 54.8 east of north (a) h n +1 n +1 ; (b) larger by times 2 2 c
P35.44 P35.46 P35.48 P35.50 P35.52 P35.54
P35.18 P35.20 P35.22 P35.24 P35.26 P35.28
1 = tan n
106 ps 23.1 (a) 58.9 ; (b) Only if 1 = 2 = 0 see the solution
1
FG H
IJ K
see the solution see the solution (a) 45.0; (b) yes; see the solution 3.79 m
344 P35.56 P35.58 P35.60 P35.62 P35.64
The Nature of Light and the Laws of Geometric Optics
(a) 0.042 6 ; (b) no difference 0.706 (a) 2 m R ; (b) 2 m 164 s 36.5 x2 + d2 d
P35.66 P35.68 P35.70 P35.72
= sin 1
LM L F NR H
2
n 2 R 2  L2  R 2  L2
IK OP Q
(a) nR1 ; (b) R 2 7.96 see the solution; n = 1.328 0.8%
36
Image Formation
CHAPTER OUTLINE
36.1 Images Formed by Flat Mirrors 36.2 Images Formed by Spherical Mirrors 36.3 Images Formed by Refraction 36.4 Thin Lenses 36.5 Lens Aberrations 36.6 The Camera 36.7 The Eye 36.8 The Simple Magnifier 36.9 The Compound Microscope 36.10 The Telescope
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q36.1 The mirror shown in the textbook picture produces an inverted image. It actually reverses top and bottom. It is not true in the same sense that "Most mirrors reverse left and right." Mirrors don't actually flip images side to sidewe just assign the labels "left" and "right" to images as if they were real people mimicking us. If you stand face to face with a real person and raise your left hand, then he or she would have to raise his or her right hand to "mirror" your movement. Try this while facing a mirror. For sake of argument, let's assume you are facing north and wear a watch on your left hand, which is on the western side. If you raise your left hand, you might say that your image raises its right hand, based on the labels we assign to other people. But your image raises its westernside hand, which is the hand with the watch.
Q36.2
With a concave spherical mirror, for objects beyond the focal length the image will be real and inverted. For objects inside the focal length, the image will be virtual, upright, and magnified. Try a shaving or makeup mirror as an example. With a convex spherical mirror, all images of real objects are upright, virtual and smaller than the object. As seen in Question 36.2, you only get a change of orientation when you pass the focal pointbut the focal point of a convex mirror is on the nonreflecting side! The mirror equation and the magnification equation apply to plane mirrors. A curved mirror is made flat by increasing its radius of curvature without bound, so that its focal length goes to infinity. 1 1 1 1 1 From + = = 0 we have =  ; therefore, p =  q . The virtual image is as far behind the mirror p q f p q q p as the object is in front. The magnification is M =  = = 1 . The image is right side up and actual p p size. Stones at the bottom of a clear stream always appears closer to the surface because light is refracted away from the normal at the surface. Example 36.8 in the textbook shows that its apparent depth is three quarters of its actual depth.
Q36.3
Q36.4
Q36.5
345
346 Q36.6
Image Formation
For definiteness, we consider real objects (p > 0 ). (a) For M =  q 1 1 1 to be negative, q must be positive. This will happen in =  if p > f , if the q f p p object is farther than the focal point. q to be positive, q must be negative. p 1 1 1 From =  we need p < f . q f p
(b)
For M = 
(c) (d) (e)
For a real image, q must be positive. As in part (a), it is sufficient for p to be larger than f. For q < 0 we need p < f . For M > 1 , we consider separately q If M =  < 1, we need p M < 1 and M > 1 . q >1 or p or From 1 1 1 + = , p q f or Now if  q >1 p or 1 1 1 + > p p f p <f 2 or or or with or
q>p
1 1 < q p 2 1 > p f p<2f .
q > p
1 1 1 =  p f q
q < p
1 >0 f
we may require q < 0 , since then gives 1 1 >  as required p q
p > q.
For q < 0 in
1 1 1 =  we need p< f. q f p Thus the overall condition for an enlarged image is simply p < 2 f .
(f) Q36.7
For M < 1 , we have the reverse of part (e), requiring p > 2 f .
Using the same analysis as in Question 36.6 except f < 0 . (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Never. Always. Never, for light rays passing through the lens will always diverge. Always. Never. Always.
Chapter 36
347
Q36.8
We assume the lens has a refractive index higher than its surroundings. For the biconvex lens in 1 1  are positive and f > 0 . For the Figure 36.27(a), R1 > 0 and R 2 < 0 . Then all terms in n  1 R1 R 2 other two lenses in part (a) of the figure, R1 and R 2 are both positive but R1 is less than R 2 . Then 1 1 > and the focal length is again positive. R1 R 2
a fFGH
IJ K
For the biconcave lens and the planoconcave lens in Figure 36.27(b), R1 < 0 and R 2 > 0 . Then 1 1  and the focal length is negative. For the middle lens in part (b) both terms are negative in R1 R 2 1 1 of the figure, R1 and R 2 are both positive but R1 is greater than R 2 . Then < and the focal R1 R 2 length is again negative. Q36.9 Q36.10 Both words are inverted. However OXIDE has updown symmetry whereas LEAD does not. An infinite number. In general, an infinite number of rays leave each point of any object and travel in all directions. Note that the three principal rays that we use for imaging are just a subset of the infinite number of rays. All three principal rays can be drawn in a ray diagram, provided that we extend the plane of the lens as shown in Figure Q36.10.
O
F
F
I
FIG. Q36.10 Q36.11 Q36.12 In this case, the index of refraction of the lens material is less than that of the surrounding medium. Under these conditions, a biconvex lens will be diverging. Chromatic aberration arises because a material medium's refractive index can be frequency dependent. A mirror changes the direction of light by reflection, not refraction. Light of all wavelengths follows the same path according to the law of reflection, so no chromatic aberration happens. This is a convex mirror. The mirror gives the driver a wide field of view and an upright image with the possible disadvantage of having objects appear diminished. Your brain can then interpret them as farther away than the objects really are. As pointed out in Question 36.11, if the converging lens is immersed in a liquid with an index of refraction significantly greater than that of the lens itself, it will make light from a distant source diverge. This is not the case with a converging (concave) mirror, as the law of reflection has nothing to do with the indices of refraction.
Q36.13
Q36.14
348 Q36.15
Image Formation
As in the diagram, let the center of curvature C of the fishbowl and the bottom of the fish define the optical axis, intersecting the fishbowl at vertex V. A ray from the top of the fish that reaches the bowl surface along a radial line through C has angle of incidence zero and angle of refraction zero. This ray exits from the bowl unchanged in direction. A ray from the top of the fish to V is refracted to bend away from the normal. Its extension back inside the fishbowl determines the location of the image and the characteristics of the image. The image is upright, virtual, and enlarged.
C
O I
V
FIG. Q36.15 Q36.16 Because when you look at the in your rear view mirror, the apparent leftright inversion clearly displays the name of the AMBULANCE behind you. Do not jam on your brakes when a MIAMI city bus is right behind you. The entire image is visible, but only at half the intensity. Each point on the object is a source of rays that travel in all directions. Thus, light from all parts of the object goes through all unblocked parts of the lens and forms an image. If you block part of the lens, you are blocking some of the rays, but the remaining ones still come from all parts of the object. With the meniscus design, when you direct your gaze near the outer circumference of the lens you receive a ray that has passed through glass with more nearly parallel surfaces of entry and exit. Thus, the lens minimally distorts the direction to the object you are looking at. If you wear glasses, turn them around and look through them the wrong way to maximize this distortion. The eyeglasses on the left are diverging lenses that correct for nearsightedness. If you look carefully at the edge of the person's face through the lens, you will see that everything viewed through these glasses is reduced in size. The eyeglasses on the right are converging lenses, which correct for farsightedness. These lenses make everything that is viewed through them look larger. The eyeglass wearer's eye is at an object distance from the lens that is quite smallthe eye is on the order of 10 2 meter from the lens. The focal length of an eyeglass lens is several decimeters, positive or negative. Therefore the image distance will be similar in magnitude to the object distance. The onlooker sees a sharp image of the eye behind the lens. Look closely at the left side of Figure Q36.19 and notice that the wearer's eyes seem not only to be smaller, but also positioned a bit behind the plane of his facenamely where they would be if he was not wearing glasses. Similarly, in the right half of Figure Q36.19, his eyes seem to be in front of the plane of his face and magnified. We as observers take this light information coming from the object through the lens and perceive or photograph the image as if it were an object. In the diagram, only two of the three principal rays have been used to locate images to reduce the amount of visual clutter. The upright shaded arrows are the objects, and the correspondingly numbered inverted arrows are the images. As you can see, object 2 is closer to the focal point than object 1, and image 2 is farther to the left than image 1.
Q36.17
Q36.18
Q36.19
Q36.20
Q36.21
O1
O2 C I2 I1 F V
FIG. Q36.21
Chapter 36
349
Q36.22 Q36.23
Absolutely. Only absorbed light, not transmitted light, contributes internal energy to a transparent object. A clear lens can stay icecold and solid as megajoules of light energy pass through it. One can change the f number either by changing the focal length (if using a "zoom" lens) or by changing the aperture of the camera lens. As the f number increases, the exposure time required increases also, as both increasing the focal length or decreasing the aperture decreases the light intensity reaching the film. Make the mirror an efficient reflector (shiny). Make it reflect to the image even rays far from the axis, by giving it a parabolic shape. Most important, make it large in diameter to intercept a lot of solar power. And you get higher temperature if the image is smaller, as you get with shorter focal length; and if the furnace enclosure is an efficient absorber (black). For the explanation, we ignore the lens and consider two objects. Hold your two thumbs parallel and extended upward in front of you, at different distances from your nose. Alternately close your left eye and your right eye. You see both thumbs jump back and forth against the background of more distant objects. Parallax by definition is this apparent motion of a stationary object (one thumb) caused by motion of the observer (jumping from right eye to left eye). Your nearer thumb jumps by a larger angle against the background than your farther thumb does. They will jump by the same amount only if they are equally distant from your face. The method of parallax for adjusting one object so that it is the same distance away from you as another object will work even if one 'object' is an image. The artist's statements are accurate, perceptive, and eloquent. The image you see is "almost one's whole surroundings," including things behind you and things farther in front of you than the globe is, but nothing eclipsed by the opaque globe or by your head. For example, we cannot see Escher's index and middle fingers or their reflections in the globe. The point halfway between your eyes is indeed the focus in a figurative sense, but it is not an optical focus. The principal axis will always lie in a line that runs through the center of the sphere and the bridge of your nose. Outside the globe, you are at the center of your observable universe. If you wink at the ball, the center of the lookingglass world hops over to the location of the image of your open eye. The three mirrors, two of which are shown as M and N in the figure to the right, reflect any incident ray back parallel to its original direction. When you look into the corner you see image I 3 of yourself.
Q36.24
Q36.25
Q36.26
Q36.27
FIG. Q36.21
350 Q36.28
Image Formation
You have likely seen a Fresnel mirror for sound. The diagram represents first a side view of a band shell. It is a concave mirror for sound, designed to channel sound into a beam toward the audience in front of the band shell. Sections of its surface can be kept at the right orientations as they are pushed around inside a rectangular box to form an auditorium with good diffusion of sound from stage to audience, with a floor plan suggested by the second part of the diagram.
FIG. Q36.28
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 36.1 P36.1 Images Formed by Flat Mirrors
I stand 40 cm from my bathroom mirror. I scatter light, which travels to the mirror and back to me in time 0.8 m ~ 10 9 s 8 3 10 m s showing me a view of myself as I was at that lookback time. I'm no Dorian Gray!
P36.2
The virtual image is as far behind the mirror as the choir is in front of the mirror. Thus, the image is 5.30 m behind the mirror. The image of the choir is 0.800 m + 5.30 m = 6.10 m from the organist. Using similar triangles: h 6.10 m = 0.600 m 0.800 m or h = 0.600 m
View Looking Down South image of choir mirror 0.600 m Organist 0.800 m 5.30 m h'
a
6.10 fFGH 0.800m IJK = m
4.58 m .
FIG. P36.2
Chapter 36
351
P36.3
The flatness of the mirror is described by and
R=, f = 1 =0. f
1 1 1 + = =0 p q f q = p . q h =1= p h
By our general mirror equation, FIG. P36.3
or
Thus, the image is as far behind the mirror as the person is in front. The magnification is then M= so
h = h = 70.0 inches .
The required height of the mirror is defined by the triangle from the person's eyes to the top and bottom of his image, as shown. From the geometry of the triangle, we see that the mirror height must be: h
F p I = h F p I = h . GH p  q JK GH 2p JK 2
Thus, the mirror must be at least 35.0 inches high . P36.4 A graphical construction produces 5 images, with images I 1 and I 2 directly into the mirrors from the object O, and and
bO, I , I g bI , I , I g
3 4 2 1 5
forming the vertices of equilateral triangles.
FIG. P36.4 P36.5 (1) The first image in the left mirror is 5.00 ft behind the mirror, or 10.0 ft from the position of the person. (2) The first image in the right mirror is located 10.0 ft behind the right mirror, but this location is 25.0 ft from the left mirror. Thus, the second image in the left mirror is 25.0 ft behind the mirror, or 30.0 ft from the person. The first image in the left mirror forms an image in the right mirror. This first image is 20.0 ft from the right mirror, and, thus, an image 20.0 ft behind the right mirror is formed. This image in the right mirror also forms an image in the left mirror. The distance from this image in the right mirror to the left mirror is 35.0 ft. The third image in the left mirror is, thus, 35.0 ft behind the mirror, or 40.0 ft from the person.
(3)
352 *P36.6
Image Formation
(a)
The flat mirrors have R and f .
The upper mirror M 1 produces a virtual, actual sized image I 1 according to 1 1 1 1 + = = =0 p1 q 1 f q1 =  p 1 with M 1 =  q1 = +1 . p1
As shown, this image is above the upper mirror. It is the object for mirror M 2 , at object distance p 2 = p1 + h . The lower mirror produces a virtual, actualsize, rightsideup image according to 1 1 + =0 p 2 q2 FIG. P36.6
q 2 =  p 2 =  p1 + h with M 2 = 
b
g
q2 = +1 and M overall = M 1 M 2 = 1. p2
Thus the final image is at distance p1 + h behind the lower mirror. (b) (c) (d) (e) It is virtual . Upright With magnification +1 . It does not appear to be reversed left and right. In a top view of the periscope, parallel rays from the right and left sides of the object stay parallel and on the right and left.
Chapter 36
353
Section 36.2 P36.7
Images Formed by Spherical Mirrors
For a concave mirror, both R and f are positive. We also know that f= R = 10.0 cm . 2
(a)
1 1 1 1 1 3 =  =  = q f p 10.0 cm 40.0 cm 40.0 cm and
q = 13.3 cm
M= q 13.3 cm = = 0.333 . 40.0 cm p
The image is 13.3 cm in front of the mirror, real, and inverted . (b) 1 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  = q f p 10.0 cm 20.0 cm 20.0 cm and
q = 20.0 cm
M= q 20.0 cm = = 1.00 . 20.0 cm p
The image is 20.0 cm in front of the mirror, real, and inverted . (c) 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  =0 q f p 10.0 cm 10.0 cm Thus, q = infinity.
No image is formed . The rays are reflected parallel to each other.
P36.8 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  q f p 0.275 m 10.0 m Thus, the image is virtual . M= q 0.267 = = 0.026 7 10.0 m p gives
q = 0.267 m .
Thus, the image is upright +M
a f
and
diminished
c M < 1h .
354 P36.9
Image Formation
(a)
1 1 2 + = p q R 1 2 1 =  = 0.083 3 cm 1 40.0 cm 30.0 cm q
gives so
1 1 2 + = 30.0 cm q 40.0 cm
a
f
q = 12.0 cm
M= 12.0 cm q = = 0.400 . p 30.0 cm
a
f
(b)
1 1 2 + = p q R 1 2 1 =  = 0.066 6 cm 1 40.0 cm 60.0 cm q
gives so
1 1 2 + = 40.0 cm 60.0 cm q
a
f
q = 15.0 cm
M= 15.0 cm q = = 0.250 . p 60.0 cm
a
f
(c) P36.10
Since M > 0 , the images are upright .
With radius 2.50 m, the cylindrical wall is a highly efficient mirror for sound, with focal length f= R = 1.25 m . 2
In a vertical plane the sound disperses as usual, but that radiated in a horizontal plane is concentrated in a sound image at distance q from the back of the niche, where 1 1 1 + = p q f so 1 1 1 + = 2.00 m q 1.25 m
q = 3.33 m .
P36.11 (a) 1 1 2 + = p q R becomes and 1 2 1 =  q 60.0 cm 90.0 cm M= q 45.0 cm = = 0.500 . 90.0 cm p
q = 45.0 cm
1 1 2 + = p q R
(b)
becomes and
1 2 1 =  q 60.0 cm 20.0 cm M= 60.0 cm q = = 3.00 . p 20.0 cm
q = 60.0 cm
(c)
a a
f f
The image (a) is real, inverted and diminished. That of (b) is virtual, upright, and enlarged. The ray diagrams are similar to Figure 36.15(a) and 36.15(b) in the text, respectively.
FIG. P36.11
Chapter 36
355
P36.12
For a concave mirror, R and f are positive. Also, for an erect image, M is positive. Therefore, q M =  = 4 and q = 4p . p 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 = + becomes =  = ; from which, p = 30.0 cm . f p q 40.0 cm p 4p 4p
*P36.13
The ball is a convex mirror with R = 4. 25 cm and R f = = 2.125 cm. We have 2 M= q= q 3 = 4 p O I F C
3 p 4 1 1 1 + = p q f 1 1 1 + = p  3 4 p 2.125 cm
FIG. P36.13
b g
3 4 1  = 3 p 3 p 2.125 cm 3 p = 2.125 cm p = 0.708 cm in front of the sphere. The image is upright, virtual, and diminished. *P36.14 (a) M = 4 =  q p
q = 4p p = 0.2 m f = 160 mm q = 0.8 m
q  p = 0.60 m = 4p  p
1 1 1 1 1 = + = + f p q 0.2 m 0.8 m (b) M=+ q 1 = 2 p
p = 2 q
q + p = 0.20 m =  q + p =  q  2 q q = 66.7 mm
1 1 2 1 1 + = = + p q R 0.133 m 0.066 7 m
p = 133 mm R = 267 mm
356 * P36.15
Image Formation
M=
q p
q =  Mp = 0.013 30 cm = 0.39 cm 1 1 1 2 + = = p q f R 1 1 2 + = 30 cm 0.39 cm R 2 R= = 0.790 cm 2.53 m 1 The cornea is convex, with radius of curvature 0.790 cm . *P36.16 With M= q h +4.00 cm = = +0.400 =  10.0 cm h p q = 0.400 p FIG. P36.15
a
f
the image must be virtual. (a) (b) It is a convex mirror that produces a diminished upright virtual image. We must have p + q = 42.0 cm = p  q p = 42.0 cm + q p = 42.0 cm  0. 400 p p= 42.0 cm = 30.0 cm 1.40
The mirror is at the 30.0 cm mark . (c) 1 1 1 1 1 1 + = = + = =  0.050 0 cm p q f 30 cm 0.4 30 cm f
a
f
f = 20.0 cm
The ray diagram looks like Figure 36.15(c) in the text. P36.17 (a)
q = p + 5.00 m and, since the image must be real,
M= Therefore, or From q = 5 p or
b
g
q = 5p .
p + 5.00 m = 5 p
p = 1.25 m
1 1 2 + = , p q R
and
q = 6.25 m .
R= 2 pq 2 1.25 6.25 = 1. 25 + 6.25 p+q
a fa f f
FIG. P36.17
= 2.08 m concave (b)
a
From part (a), p = 1.25 m ; the mirror should be 1.25 m in front of the object.
Chapter 36
357
P36.18
Assume that the object distance is the same in both cases (i.e., her face is the same distance from the hubcap regardless of which way it is turned). Also realize that the near image ( q = 10.0 cm ) occurs when using the convex side of the hubcap. Applying the mirror equation to both cases gives: (concave side: R = R ,
q = 30.0 cm ) 1 1 2  = p 30.0 R
2 30.0 cm  p = R 30.0 cm p
or (convex side: R =  R ,
a
f
(1)
q = 10.0 cm ) 1 1 2  = p 10.0 R
2 p  10.0 cm = . R 10.0 cm p
or (a)
a
f
(2)
Equating Equations (1) and (2) gives: 30.0 cm  p = p  10.0 cm 3.00 p = 15.0 cm .
or
Thus, her face is 15.0 cm from the hubcap. (b) Using the above result ( p = 15.0 cm ) in Equation (1) gives: 2 30.0 cm  15.0 cm = R 30.0 cm 15.0 cm 2 1 = R 30.0 cm
a
fa
f
or and
R = 60.0 cm .
The radius of the hubcap is 60.0 cm . *P36.19 (a) The flat mirror produces an image according to 1 1 1 2 + = = p q f R 1 1 1 + = =0 24 cm q q = 24.0 m.
The image is 24.0 m behind the mirror, distant from your eyes by 1.55 m + 24.0 m = 25.6 m . (b) (c) The image is the same size as the object, so 1 1 2 + = p q R 1 1 2 + = 2 m 24 m q
=
q=
h 1.50 m = = 0.058 7 rad . d 25.6 m 1 = 0.960 m  1 1 m  1 24 m
a
f
b
g b
g
This image is distant from your eyes by continued on next page
1.55 m + 0.960 m = 2.51 m .
358
Image Formation
(d)
The image size is given by M =
q h = h p
h =  h
q 0.960 m = 0.060 0 m. = 1.50 m p 24 m
FG H
IJ K
So its angular size at your eye is (e)
=
h 0.06 m = = 0.023 9 rad . d 2.51 m
Your brain assumes that the car is 1.50 m high and calculate its distance as d = h 1.50 m = = 62.8 m . 0.023 9
P36.20
(a)
The image starts from a point whose height above the mirror vertex is given by 1 1 1 2 + = = p q f R 1 1 1 + = . 3.00 m q 0.500 m Therefore, q = 0.600 m .
As the ball falls, p decreases and q increases. Ball and image pass when q1 = p1 . When this is true, 1 1 1 2 + = = p1 p1 0.500 m p1 or p1 = 1.00 m.
As the ball passes the focal point, the image switches from infinitely far above the mirror to infinitely far below the mirror. As the ball approaches the mirror from above, the virtual image approaches the mirror from below, reaching it together when p 2 = q 2 = 0 . (b) The falling ball passes its real image when it has fallen 3.00 m  1.00 m = 2.00 m = 2 2.00 m 1 2 gt , or when t = = 0.639 s . 2 9.80 m s 2
a
f
The ball reaches its virtual image when it has traversed 3.00 m  0 = 3.00 m = 2 3.00 m 1 2 gt , or at t = = 0.782 s . 2 9.80 m s 2
a
f
Section 36.3 P36.21
Images Formed by Refraction
n1 n 2 n 2  n 1 + = = 0 and R p q R q= n2 1 50.0 cm = 38.2 cm p= 1.309 n1
a
f
Thus, the virtual image of the dust speck is 38.2 cm below the top surface of the ice.
Chapter 36
359
P36.22
FG n IJ . We use this to locate the final images of the two surfaces of the glass plate. First, find Hn K the image the glass forms of the bottom of the plate. F 1.33 IJ a8.00 cmf = 6.41 cm q = G H 1.66 K
q = p
2 1 B1
When R , the equation describing image formation at a single refracting surface becomes
This virtual image is 6.41 cm below the top surface of the glass of 18.41 cm below the water surface. Next, use this image as an object and locate the image the water forms of the bottom of the plate. 1.00 18.41 cm = 13.84 cm qB2 =  or 13.84 cm below the water surface. 1.33 Now find image the water forms of the top surface of the glass. 1 q3 =  or 9.02 cm below the water surface. 12.0 cm = 9.02 cm 1.33
FG IJ a H K FG IJ a H K
f
f
Therefore, the apparent thickness of the glass is t = 13.84 cm  9.02 cm = 4.82 cm . P36.23 From Equation 36.8 Solve for q to find In this case, and So Therefore, the P36.24 n1 n 2 n 2  n1 + = p q R and They agree. P36.25 n1 n 2 n 2  n 1 + = p q R (a) 1.00 1.50 1 + = 20.0 cm q 12.0 cm 1.00 1.50 1 + = 10.0 cm q 12.0 cm 1.00 1.50 1 + = 3.0 cm q 12.0 cm so n1 n 2 n 2  n 1 + = . p q R q= n 2 Rp . p n 2  n 1  n1 R
b
g
n1 = 1.50 , n 2 = 1.00 , R = 15.0 cm
p = 10.0 cm .
q=
a1.00fa15.0 cmfa10.0 cmf a10.0 cmfa1.00  1.50f  a1.50fa15.0 cmf = 8.57 cm .
1.00 1.40 1.40  1.00 + = 21.0 mm 6.00 mm 0.066 7 = 0.066 7 . The image is inverted, real and diminished. becomes 1.00 1.50 1.50  1.00 1 + = = p q 6.00 cm 12.0 cm q=
apparent depth is 8.57 cm .
or
b1.00 12.0 cmg  b1.00 20.0 cmg = b
1.50 1.00 12.0 cm  1.00 10.0 cm 1.50
1.50
45.0 cm
(b)
or
q=
g b
g=
90.0 cm
(c)
or
q=
b1.00 12.0 cmg  b1.00 3.0 cmg =
6.00 cm
360 P36.26
Image Formation
p = and q = +2 R 1.00 n 2 n 2  1.00 + = p q R 0+ n 2 n 2  1.00 = R 2R so
n 2 = 2.00
FIG. P36.26 P36.27 For a plane surface, n p n1 n 2 n 2  n 1 + = becomes q =  2 . p q R n1
Thus, the magnitudes of the rate of change in the image and object positions are related by dq n 2 dp . = dt n1 dt If the fish swims toward the wall with a speed of 2.00 cm s , the speed of the image is given by v image = dq 1.00 = 2.00 cm s = 1.50 cm s . dt 1.33
b
g
Section 36.4 P36.28
Thin Lenses
Let R1 = outer radius and R 2 = inner radius 1 1 1 1 1 = n1  = 1.50  1  = 0.050 0 cm 1 2.00 m 2.50 cm f R1 R 2 so
a fLM N
OP a Q
fLMN
OP Q
f = 20.0 cm .
1 1 1 1 1 = n1  = 0.440  12.0 cm 18.0 cm f R1 R 2
P36.29
(a)
a fLM N
OP a Q a
fLM N
a
OP fQ
f = 16.4 cm
1 1 1 = 0.440  f 18.0 cm 12.0 cm
(b)
a
fLM N
OP fQ
FIG. P36.29
f = 16.4 cm
Chapter 36
361
P36.30
For a converging lens, f is positive. We use
1 1 1 + = . p q f
(a)
1 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  = q f p 20.0 cm 40.0 cm 40.0 cm M= q 40.0 = = 1.00 40.0 p
q = 40.0 cm
The image is real, inverted , and located 40.0 cm past the lens. (b) 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  =0 q f p 20.0 cm 20.0 cm
q = infinity
No image is formed. The rays emerging from the lens are parallel to each other.
(c) 1 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  = q f p 20.0 cm 10.0 cm 20.0 cm M= 20.0 q = = 2.00 p 10.0
q = 20.0 cm
a
f
The image is upright, virtual and 20.0 cm in front of the lens. P36.31 (a) 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  q f p 25.0 cm 26.0 cm
q = 650 cm
The image is real, inverted, and enlarged . (b) 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  q f p 25.0 cm 24.0 cm
q = 600 cm
The image is virtual, upright, and enlarged . P36.32 (a) 1 1 1 + = : p q f so M= 1 1 1 + = 32.0 cm 8.00 cm f
f = 6.40 cm
q 8.00 cm = = 0.250 32.0 cm p
(b)
(c)
Since f > 0 , the lens is converging .
362 P36.33
Image Formation
We are looking at an enlarged, upright, virtual image: M= q h =2= h p so gives p=
2.84 cm q = = +1. 42 cm 2 2
a
f
1 1 1 + = p q f
1 1 1 + = 1.42 cm 2.84 cm f
a
f
f = 2.84 cm .
FIG. P36.33 P36.34 (a) 1 1 1 + = : p q f 1 1 1 + = p 30.0 cm 12.5 cm M= 30.0 q = = 3.40 , upright p 8.82
p = 8.82 cm
(b)
a
f
See the figure to the right. FIG. P36.34(b)
P36.35
1 1 1 + = : p q f We may differentiate through with respect to p:
p 1 + q 1 = constant
1p 2  1q 2 dq =0 dp
dq q2 =  2 = M 2 . dp p P36.36 The image is inverted: M= q 1.80 m h = = 75.0 = h 0.024 0 m p
q = 75.0 p .
(b) (a)
q + p = 3.00 m = 75.0 p + p q = 2.96 m
1 1 1 + = p q f so
p = 39.5 mm
1 1 1 1 1 = + = + f p q 0.039 5 m 2.96 m
f = 39.0 mm
P36.37
(a)
1 1 1 + = 32.0 cm 20.0 cm q q=
FG 1 + 1 IJ H 20.0 32.0 K f
a
f
1
= 12.3 cm
The image is 12.3 cm to the left of the lens. (b) (c) M= 12.3 cm q = = 0.615 p 20.0 cm
a
FIG. P36.37
See the ray diagram to the right.
Chapter 36
363
*P36.38
In 1 1 1 + = p q f p 1 + q 1 = constant, we differentiate with respect to time dp dq 1 p 2  1 q 2 =0 dt dt dq  q 2 dp . = 2 dt p dt
e j
e j
We must find the momentary image location q: 1 1 1 + = 20 m q 0.3 m q = 0.305 m . Now 0.305 m dq = 5 m s = 0.001 16 m s = 1.16 mm s toward the lens . 2 dt 20 m
a
a
f
f
2
*P36.39
(a)
1 1 1 + = p q f M= q h = h p
1 1 1 + = 480 cm q 7.00 cm h =
q = 7.10 cm
(b)
 hq  5.00 mm 7.10 cm = = 0.074 0 mm p 480 cm
a
fa
f
diameter of illuminated spot = 74.0 m (c) I= 0.100 W 4 P P4 = = 2 A d 74.0 10 6 m
e
af
j
2
= 2.33 10 7 W m 2
P36.40
(a) (b)
1 1 1 1 1 = n1  = 1.50  1  15.0 cm 12.0 cm f R1 R 2
a fLM N
OP a Q
fLM N
a
OP fQ
or
f = 13.3 cm
The square is imaged as a trapezoid. FIG. P36.40(b) continued on next page
364
Image Formation
(c)
To find the area, first find q R and qL , along with the heights hR and hL , using the thin lens equation. 1 1 1 + = pR qR f becomes 1 1 1 + = 20.0 cm q R 13.3 cm hR = hM R = h
R
or
q R = 40.0 cm
F  q I = a10.0 cmfa2.00f = 20.0 cm GH p JK
R
1 1 1 + = 30.0 cm qL 13.3 cm
or
qL = 24.0 cm
hL = hM L = 10.0 cm 0.800 = 8.00 cm Thus, the area of the image is: P36.41 (a) The image distance is: Thus, 1 1 1 + = p q f becomes Area = q R  qL hL + 1 q R  q L hR  hL = 224 cm 2 . 2
a
fa
f
q=dp. 1 1 1 + = . p dp f
This reduces to a quadratic equation: which yields: Since f <
p 2 + d p + fd = 0
p= d d 2  4 fd 2 = d d2  fd . 2 4
a f
d , both solutions are meaningful and the two solutions are not equal to each 4 other. Thus, there are two distinct lens positions that form an image on the screen.
(b)
The smaller solution for p gives a larger value for q, with a real, enlarged, inverted image . The larger solution for p describes a real, diminished, inverted image .
P36.42
To properly focus the image of a distant object, the lens must be at a distance equal to the focal length from the film (q1 = 65.0 mm). For the closer object: 1 1 1 + = p2 q2 f 1 1 1 + = becomes 2 000 mm q 2 65.0 mm and q 2 = 65.0 mm
a
2 fFGH 2 00000065.0 IJK . 
The lens must be moved away from the film by a distance D = q 2  q1 = 65.0 mm
a
2 fFGH 2 00000065.0 IJK  65.0 mm = 
2.18 mm .
Chapter 36
365
*P36.43
In the first arrangement the lens is used as a magnifying glass, producing an upright, virtual enlarged image: q h 120 cm = 33.3 =  M= = h 3.6 cm p q = 33.3 p = 33.3 20 cm = 667 cm For the lens, 1 1 1 1 1 1 + = = + = p q f 20 cm 667 cm f f = 20.62 cm In the second arrangement the lens us used as a projection lens to produce a real inverted enlarged image: q 120 cm  = 33.3 =  2 q 2 = 33.3 p 2 3.6 cm p2 1 1 1 34.3 1 = + = p 2 = 21.24 cm 33.3 p 2 20.62 cm p 2 33.3 p 2 20.62 cm The lens was moved 21.24 cm  20.0 cm = 1.24 cm .
a
f
Section 36.5 P36.44 (a)
Lens Aberrations The focal length of the lens is given by 1 1 1 1 1 = n 1  = 1.53  1.00  32.5 cm 42.5 cm f R1 R 2 f = 34.7 cm Note that R1 is negative because the center of curvature of the first surface is on the virtual image side. When p=
a fFGH
IJ a K
fFGH
IJ K
the thin lens equation gives q = f . Thus, the violet image of a very distant object is formed at The image is (b) q = 34.7 cm . virtual, upright and diminshed . FIG. P36.44
The same ray diagram and image characteristics apply for red light. Again, and now giving q= f 1 1 1 = 1.51  1.00  32.5 cm 42.5 cm f f = 36.1 cm .
a
fFGH
IJ K
366 P36.45
Image Formation
Ray h1 is undeviated at the plane surface and strikes the second surface at angle of incidence given by
1 = sin 1
Then, so
FG h IJ = sin FG 0.500 cm IJ = 1.43 . H 20.0 cm K H RK F 0.500 IJ 1.00 sin = 1.60 sin = a1.60fG H 20.0 cm K
1 1 2 1
2 = 2.29 .
FIG. P36.45
The angle this emerging ray makes with the horizontal is It crosses the axis at a point farther out by f1 where f1 = tan 2  1
2  1 = 0.860 .
b
h1
g
=
0.500 cm = 33.3 cm . tan 0.860
a
f
The point of exit for this ray is distant axially from the lens vertex by 20.0 cm 
a20.0 cmf  a0.500 cmf
2
2
= 0.006 25 cm
so ray h1 crosses the axis at this distance from the vertex: x1 = 33.3 cm  0.006 25 cm = 33.3 cm . Now we repeat this calculation for ray h2 :
= sin 1
FG 12.0 cm IJ = 36.9 H 20.0 cm K F 12.00 IJ 1.00 sin = 1.60 sin = a1.60fG H 20.0 K
2 1
2 = 73.7
f2 =
tan 1  2
b
h2
x 2 = 16.0 cm 20.0 cm  Now
a
fFH
g
=
12.0 cm = 16.0 cm tan 36.8
2
a20.0 cmf  a12.0 cmf IK = 12.0 cm .
2
x = 33.3 cm  12.0 cm = 21.3 cm .
Section 36.6 *P36.46
The Camera
The same light intensity is received from the subject, and the same light energy on the film is required: IA1 t1 = IA 2 t 2
2 2 d1 d2 t 1 = t 2 4 4 2 f 1 1 2 s = d2 s 4 16 128
FG IJ FG H KH
d2 =
IJ K
FG H
IJ K
f 128 f = 16 4 1. 41
Chapter 36
367
Section 36.7 P36.47 P=
The Eye 1 1 1 1 1 = + =  = 4.00 diopters = 4.00 diopters, a diverging lens f p q 0. 250 m 1 1 1 + = p q f 1 1 1 + = = 1.25 diopters . 0.800 m f
P36.48
For starlight going through Nick's glasses,
a
f
For a nearby object, P36.49
1 1 + = 1.25 m 1 , so p = 23.2 cm . p 0.180 m
a
f
Consider an object at infinity, imaged at the person's far point: 1 1 1 + = p q f 1 1 + = 4.00 m 1 q
q = 25.0 cm .
The person's far point is 25.0 cm + 2.00 cm = 27.0 cm from his eyes. For the contact lenses we want 1 1 1 + = = 3.70 diopters . 0.270 m f
a
f
Section 36.8 Section 36.9 Section 36.10 P36.50 (a)
The Simple Magnifier The Compound Microscope The Telescope From the thin lens equation: 1 1 1 + = or p = 4.17 cm . p 25.0 cm 5.00 cm
a
f
(b)
M=
q 25.0 cm 25.0 cm =1+ =1+ = 6.00 p f 5.00 cm 575 .
P36.51
Using Equation 36.24, M 
P36.52 P36.53
M = M om e
FG L IJ FG 25.0 cm IJ = FG 23.0 cm IJ FG 25.0 cm IJ = H f K H f K H 0.400 cm K H 2.50 cm K F 25.0 cm IJ f = FG M IJ a25.0 cmf = FG 12.0 IJ a25.0 cmf = =M G H 140 K HMK H f K
o e o e e o
2.14 cm
f o = 20.0 m (a)
f e = 0.025 0 m fo = 800 . fe
The angular magnification produced by this telescope is: m =  Since m < 0 , the image is inverted .
(b)
368 P36.54
Image Formation
(a)
The lensmaker's equation gives Then, gives
1 1 1 + = p q f q= 1 1 = 1 f 1 p p f
b
g
fp
=
fp . p f
M= h =
q f h = = h p p f hf . f p hf . p
(b) (c)
For p >> f , f  p  p . Then,
h = 
Suppose the telescope observes the space station at the zenith: h = 
108.6 m 4.00 m hf = = 1.07 mm . p 407 10 3 m
a
fa
f
P36.55
(b)
Call the focal length of the objective f o and that of the eyepiece  f e . The distance between the lenses is f o  f e . The objective forms a real diminished inverted image of a very distant object at q1 = f o . This image is a virtual object for the eyepiece at p 2 =  f e . For it and 1 1 1 + = p q f becomes 1 1 1 1 =0 + = , q2  fe q  fe
q2 = .
(a)
The user views the image as virtual . Letting h represent the height of the first image, h h and = o = . The angular fo fe magnification is m= f h fe = = 0 . o h f o fe
L1
0
F0
F0
0
I
h'
(c)
f Here, f o  f e = 10.0 cm and o = 3.00 . fe Thus, fe = fo 3.00 and 2 f o = 10.0 cm . 3
Fe L2
Fe O
f o = 15.0 cm f e = 5.00 cm
and
FIG. P36.55
f e = 5.00 cm
Chapter 36
369
P36.56
Let I 0 represent the intensity of the light from the nebula and 0 its angular diameter. With the h as h =  o 2 000 mm . first telescope, the image diameter h on the film is given by o =  fo
2 1 0 1 0
b g L a200 mmf OP , and the light The light power captured by the telescope aperture is P = I A = I M MN 4 PQ L a200 mmf OPa1.50 minf . energy focused on the film during the exposure is E = P t = I M MN 4 PQ
2 1 1 1 0
Likewise, the light power captured by the aperture of the second telescope is
P2 = I 0 A 2 = I 0
the same light energy per unit area, it is necessary that I 0 60.0 mm
LM a60.0 mmf OP and the light energy is E NM 4 QP
2 2
2
= I0
LM a60.0 mmf OPt . Therefore, to have NM 4 QP
2 2
a
o 900 mm
a
f
f
4 t 2
2
4
=
I 0 200 mm
a
o
f 4 a1.50 minf . b2 000 mmg 4
2 2
The required exposure time with the second telescope is t 2 =
a200 mmf a900 mmf a1.50 minf = a60.0 mmf b2 000 mmg
2 2 2 2
3.38 min .
Additional Problems P36.57 Only a diverging lens gives an upright diminished image. The image is virtual and
d = p q = p+q:
p= f= d : 1M
M=
q so q =  Mp and d = p  Mp p
M + 1 1  M 1 1 1 1 1 + = = + = =  Mp p q f p  Mp  Md
2
a
f
2
a1  Mf
q p
 Md
=
 0.500 20.0 cm
a
a1  0.500f
so
fa
2
f=
40.0 cm .
P36.58
If M < 1 , the lens is diverging and the image is virtual. M= p=
d =p q = p+q
d = p  Mp
q =  Mp
and
d : 1M
1M M + 1 1 1 1 1 1 + = = + = = p q f p  Mp  Mp  Md
b
g
a
f a
f
2
f=
a1  M f a M  1f
Md
 Md
2
.
If M > 1 , the lens is converging and the image is still virtual. Now d = q  p . f=
2
We obtain in this case
.
370 P36.59
Image Formation
(a)
IJ K F 1  1 IJ 1 = a1.66  1fG 65.0 cm H 50.0 cm R K
1 1 1 = n1  f R1 R 2
2
a fFGH
A
D R1 2.00 cm
B
C
1 1 1 = + R 2 50.0 cm 42.9 cm (b)
R2
so
R2 = 23.1 cm
FIG. P36.59
2 2
The distance along the axis from B to A is
2 R1  R1  2.00 cm
a
f
2
= 50.0 cm 
a50.0 cmf  a2.00 cmf
= 0.086 8 cm .
= 0.040 0 cm .
Similarly, the axial distance from C to D is 23.1 cm 
a23.1 cmf  a2.00 cmf
2
2
Then, AD = 0.100 cm  0.040 0 cm + 0.086 8 cm = 0.147 cm . *P36.60 We consider light entering the rod. The surface of entry is convex to the object rays, so R1 = +4.50 cm n1 n 2 n 2  n 1 + = p 1 q1 R1 1.33 1.50 1.50  1.33 + = 100 cm q1 4.50 cm q1 = 61.3 cm I1
O1
V
C
1.50 = 0.037 8 cm  0.013 3 cm = 0.024 5 cm q1
I2
O2
C
V
The first image is real, inverted and diminished. To find its magnification we can use two similar triangles in the ray diagram with their vertices meeting at the center of curvature: h1 h1 = 100 cm + 4.5 cm 61.3 cm  4.5 cm h1 = 0.543 . h1
FIG. P36.60
Now the first image is a real object for the second surface at object distance from its vertex 75.0 cm + 4.50 cm + 4.50 cm  61.3 cm = 22.7 cm 1.50 1.33 1.33  1.50 + = 22.7 cm q 2 4.50 cm 1.33 = 0.037 8 cm  0.066 0 cm = 0.028 2 cm q2 q 2 = 47.1 cm (a) (b) The final image is inside the rod, 47.1 cm from the second surface . It is virtual, inverted, and enlarged . Again by similar triangles meeting at C we have h2 h2 = 22.7 cm  4.5 cm 47.1 cm  4.5 cm h2 = 2.34 . h2 h1 h2 h2 = = 0.543 2.34 = 1.27 . h1 h2 h1
Since h2 = h1 , the overall magnification is M 1 M 2 =
a
fa f
Chapter 36
371
*P36.61
(a)
1 1 1 1 1 =  =  q1 f1 p1 5 cm 7.5 cm q 15 cm = 2 M1 =  1 =  7.5 cm p1 M = M1 M 2 M2 =  1 = 2 M 2
q1 = 15 cm
a f
q 1 = 2 2 p2
p 2 = 2 q2 1 1 1 + = 2 q 2 q 2 10 cm q 2 = 15 cm, p 2 = 30 cm
1 1 1 + = p 2 q2 f2
p1 + q1 + p 2 + q 2 = 7.5 cm + 15 cm + 30 cm + 15 cm = 67.5 cm (b) 1 1 1 1 + = = p1 q1 f1 5 cm Solve for q1 in terms of p1 : q1 = M1 = 
q1 5 , using (1). = p1 p1  5 q 3 M M2 = =  p1  5 =  2 M = M1 M 2 5 M1 p2 3 q = p 2 p1  5 (2) 2 5 1 1 1 1 + = = Substitute (2) into the lens equation and obtain p in terms of p1 : 2 p q 2 f 2 10 cm 2 10 3 p1  10 . (3) p2 = 3 p1  5 Substituting (3) in (2), obtain q 2 in terms of p1 : q = 2 3 p1  10 . (4) 2 Now, p1 + q1 + p + q 2 = a constant. 2 Using (1), (3) and (4), and the value obtained in (a): 10 3 p1  10 5 p1 + p1 + + 2 3 p1  10 = 67.5 . p1  5 3 p  5 This reduces to the quadratic equation 21p1 2  322.5 p1 + 1 212.5 = 0 , which has solutions p1 = 8.784 cm and 6.573 cm. Case 1: p1 = 8.784 cm p1  p1 = 8.784 cm  7.5 cm = 1.28 cm. From (4): q = 32.7 cm 2 q  q 2 = 32.7 cm  15 cm = 17.7 cm. 2 Case 2: p1 = 6.573 cm p1  p1 = 6.573 cm  7.5 cm = 0.927 cm . From (4): q 2 = 19. 44 cm q = q 2 = 19.44 cm  15 cm = 4.44 cm. 2 From these results it is concluded that: The lenses can be displaced in two ways. The first lens can be moved 1.28 cm farther from
5 p1 p1  5
(1)
b
g
b
g
b b
b
g g
g
b
b
g b g
g
the object and the second lens 17.7 cm toward the object. Alternatively, the first lens can be moved 0.927 cm toward the object and the second lens 4.44 cm toward the object.
372 P36.62
Image Formation
1 1 1 1 1 =  =  q1 f1 p1 10.0 cm 12.5 cm so q1 = 50.0 cm (to left of mirror). 1 1 1 1 1 =  =  and q 2 = 50.3 cm, q2 f2 p 2 16.7 cm 25.0 cm
This serves as an object for the lens (a virtual object), so
a
f a
f
meaning 50.3 cm to the right of the lens. Thus, the final image is located 25.3 cm to right of mirror . M1 =  M2 =  q1 50.0 cm = = 4.00 p1 12.5 cm 50.3 cm q2 = = 2.01 p2 25.0 cm
a a
f f
M = M 1 M 2 = 8.05 Thus, the final image is virtual, upright , 8.05 times the size of object, and 25.3 cm to right of the mirror. P36.63 We first find the focal length of the mirror. 1 1 1 1 1 9 = + = + = f p q 10.0 cm 8.00 cm 40.0 cm Hence, if p = 20.0 cm , Thus, *P36.64 and f = 4. 44 cm .
1 1 1 1 1 15.56 =  =  = . q f p 4. 44 cm 20.0 cm 88.8 cm
q = 5.71 cm , real.
A telescope with an eyepiece decreases the diameter of a beam of parallel rays. When light is sent through the same device in the opposite direction, the beam expands. Send the light first through the diverging lens. It will then be diverging from a virtual image found like this: 1 1 1 + = p q f 1 1 1 + = q 12 cm FIG. P36.64
q = 12 cm .
Use this image as a real object for the converging lens, placing it at the focal point on the object side of the lens, at p = 21 cm . Then 1 1 1 + = p q f 1 1 1 + = 21 cm q 21 cm q=. The exiting rays will be parallel. The lenses must be 21.0 cm  12.0 cm = 9.00 cm apart. By similar triangles, d 2 21 cm = = 1.75 times . d 1 12 cm
Chapter 36
373
P36.65
A hemisphere is too thick to be described as a thin lens. The light is undeviated on entry into the flat face. We next consider the light's exit from the second surface, for which R = 6.00 cm . The incident rays are parallel, so p = . Then, becomes and n1 n 2 n 2  n 1 + = p q R 0+ 1 1.00  1.56 = q 6.00 cm FIG. P36.65
q = 10.7 cm .
I=
P36.66
(a)
P 4.50 W = 2 4 r 4 1.60 10 2 m
e
a
j
2
= 1.40 kW m 2
(b)
I=
P 4.50 W = 2 4 r 4 7.20 m
f
2
= 6.91 mW m 2 1 1 1 + = 7.20 m q 0.350 m
(c)
1 1 1 + = : p q f so and
q = 0.368 m
M= q h 0.368 m = = 3. 20 cm p 7.20 m
h = 0.164 cm
(d) The lens intercepts power given by
P = IA = 6.91 10 3 W m 2
e
jLMN a0.150 mf OPQ 4
2
and puts it all onto the image where
I=
6.91 10 3 W m 2 15.0 cm P = 2 A 0.164 cm 4
e
a
j a f
f
2
4
I = 58.1 W m 2 .
374 P36.67
Image Formation
From the thin lens equation, When we require that q 2 , In this case, Therefore,
q1 =
6.00 cm 12.0 cm f1 p1 = = 4.00 cm . p1  f1 12.0 cm  6.00 cm
a
fa a
f f
the thin lens equation becomes p 2 = f 2 . p 2 = d  4.00 cm . d + 4.00 cm = f 2 = 12.0 cm and
a
f
d = 8.00 cm .
FIG. P36.67 *P36.68 The inverted real image is formed by the lens operating on light directly from the object, on light that has not reflected from the mirror. For this we have 1 1 1 + = p q f M = 1.50 =  q p
q = 1.50 p
p = 10 cm
1 1 1 2.50 + = = p 1.50 p 10 cm 1.50 p
FG 2.5 IJ = 16.7 cm H 1.5 K
Then the object is distant from the mirror by
40.0 cm  16.7 cm = 23.3 cm .
The second image seen by the person is formed by light that first reflects from the mirror and then goes through the lens. For it to be in the same position as the inverted image, the lens must be receiving light from an image formed by the mirror at the same location as the physical object. The formation of this image is described by 1 1 1 + = p q f P36.69 For the mirror, f = 1 1 1 + = 23.3 cm 23.3 cm f
f = 11.7 cm .
R = +1.50 m . In addition, because the distance to the Sun is so much larger than 2 any other distances, we can take p = . The mirror equation, 1 1 1 + = , then gives p q f
q = f = 1.50 m .
M= q h = p h h is the angular diameter of the object. p
Now, in
the magnification is nearly zero, but we can be more precise: Thus, the image diameter is h = 
hq rad = 0.533 1.50 m = 0.014 0 m = 1.40 cm . 180 p
a
fFGH
IJ a K
f
Chapter 36
375
P36.70
(a)
For the light the mirror intercepts, 2 P = I 0 A = I 0 Ra
2 350 W = 1 000 W m 2 R a
e
j
and (b) In we have so
Ra = 0.334 m or larger .
1 1 1 2 + = = p q f R p R q= 2 q h M= = h p h =  q
so where then
F h I = FG R IJ L0.533 FG rad IJ O = FG R IJ a9.30 m radf GH p JK H 2 K MN H 180 K PQ H 2 K b g e9.30 10 16e1 000 W m jR = R e9.30 10 radj
2 2 2 3 2 4I 0 R a 3
h is the angle the Sun subtends. The intensity at the image is p I= 4I R 2 P = 0 2a = h 2 4 h R2 rad
j
2
120 10 3 W m 2 so P36.71 In the original situation, In the final situation, and Our lens equation is Substituting, we have Adding the fractions, Simplified, this becomes (a) (b) (c) Thus,
2 a 2
Ra = 0.025 5 or larger . R p1 + q1 = 1.50 m . p 2 = p1 + 0.900 m q 2 = q1  0.900 m = 0.600 m  p1 . 1 1 1 1 1 + = = + . p1 q 1 f p 2 q 2 1 1 1 1 + = + . p1 1.50 m  p1 p1 + 0.900 0.600  p1
b g b p b1.50 m  p g = b p
1 1
1.50 m  p1 + p1 0.600  p1 + p1 + 0.900 = . p1 1.50 m  p1 p1 + 0.900 0.600  p1
1
gb g + 0.900gb0.600  p g .
1
FIG. P36.71
p1 =
0.540 m = 0.300 m 1.80 and
p 2 = p1 + 0.900 = 1.20 m f = 0.240 m
1 1 1 = + f 0.300 m 1.50 m  0.300 m
The second image is real, inverted, and diminished with M= q2 = 0.250 . p2
376 P36.72
Image Formation
(a)
The lens makers' equation, becomes:
1 1 1 = n1  9.00 cm 11.0 cm 5.00 cm
a fLM N
1 1 1 = n1 + f R1 R 2
a
OP giving n = fQ
a fFGH
IJ K
1.99 .
(b)
As the light passes through the lens for the first time, the thin lens equation 1 1 1 + = p 1 q1 f becomes: or q1 = 13.3 cm , and 1 1 1 + = 8.00 cm q1 5.00 cm M1 =  q1 13.3 cm = = 1.67 . 8.00 cm p1
This image becomes the object for the concave mirror with: p m = 20.0 cm  q1 = 20.0 cm  13.3 cm = 6.67 cm and The mirror equation becomes: giving and R = +4.00 cm . 2 1 1 1 + = 6.67 cm qm 4.00 cm f= qm = 10.0 cm M2 =  qm 10.0 cm = = 1.50 . 6.67 cm pm
The image formed by the mirror serves as a real object for the lens on the second pass of the light through the lens with: p 3 = 20.0 cm  q m = +10.0 cm . The thin lens equation yields: or and The final image is a real image located The overall magnification is (c) P36.73 1 1 1 + = 10.0 cm q3 5.00 cm q3 = 10.0 cm M3 =  q3 10.0 cm = = 1.00 . 10.0 cm p3
10.0 cm to the left of the lens . M total = M1 M 2 M 3 = 2.50 .
Since the total magnification is negative, this final image is inverted . 1 1 1 + = becomes p q f 1 1 1 + = so q = 25.5 mm . 3.40 mm q 3.00 mm M1 =  me = q 25.5 mm = = 7.50 . 3.40 mm p
For the objective:
The objective produces magnification For the eyepiece as a simple magnifier, and overall
25.0 cm 25.0 cm = = 10.0 f 2.50 cm
M = M1 m e = 75.0 .
Chapter 36
377
P36.74
(a)
Start with the second lens: This lens must form a virtual image located 19.0 cm to the left of it (i.e., q 2 = 19.0 cm ). The required object distance for this lens is then p2 = 19.0 cm 20.0 cm 380 cm q2 f2 = . = 39.0 q2  f2 19.0 cm  20.0 cm
a
fa
f
The image formed by the first lens serves as the object for the second lens. Therefore, the image distance for the first lens is q1 = 50.0 cm  p 2 = 50.0 cm  380 cm 1 570 cm = . 39.0 39.0 1 570 cm = 13.3 cm . 118 5.90
The distance the original object must be located to the left of the first lens is then given by 1 1 1 1 39.0 157  39.0 118 =  =  = = p1 f1 q1 10.0 cm 1 570 cm 1 570 cm 1 570 cm (b) M = M1 M 2 = 
1 2
or
p1 =
F q I F  q I = LMFG 1 570 cm IJ F 118 I OPL a19.0 cmfa39.0f O = GH p JK GH p JK MNH 39.0 K GH 1 570 cm JK PQMN 380 cm PQ
1 2
(c) P36.75 (a)
Since M < 0 , the final image is inverted . P= 1 1 1 1 1 = + = + = 44.6 diopters f p q 0.022 4 m
b a
g
(b) P36.76
P=
1 1 1 1 1 = + = + = 3.03 diopters 0.330 m f p q
f
The object is located at the focal point of the upper mirror. Thus, the upper mirror creates an image at infinity (i.e., parallel rays leave this mirror). The lower mirror focuses these parallel rays at its focal point, located at the hole in the upper mirror. Thus, the image is real, inverted, and actual size .
For the upper mirror: 1 1 1 + = : p q f 1 1 1 + = 7.50 cm q1 7.50 cm q1 = .
For the lower mirror: 1 1 1 + = q 2 7.50 cm q 2 = 7.50 cm. FIG. P36.76
Light directed into the hole in the upper mirror reflects as shown, to behave as if it were reflecting from the hole.
378 P36.77
Image Formation
(a)
For lens one, as shown in the first figure, 1 1 1 + = 40.0 cm q1 30.0 cm q1 = 120 cm M1 =  q1 120 cm = = 3.00 p1 40.0 cm
This real image I 1 = O 2 is a virtual object for the second lens. That is, it is behind the lens, as shown in the second figure. The object distance is p 2 = 110 cm  120 cm = 10.0 cm 1 1 1 + = : 10.0 cm q 2 20.0 cm q 2 = 20.0 cm M2 =  q2 20.0 cm = = +2.00 10.0 cm p2
a
f
M overall = M 1 M 2 = 6.00 (b) M overall < 0 , so final image is
inverted .
(c) If lens two is a converging lens (third figure): 1 1 1 + = 10.0 cm q 2 20.0 cm q 2 = 6.67 cm M2 =  6.67 cm = +0.667 10.0 cm FIG. P36.77
a
f
M overall = M 1 M 2 = 2.00 Again, M overall < 0 and the final image is inverted .
Chapter 36
379
*P36.78
The first lens has focal length described by n 1 1 1 1 1 1 = n1  1  = n1  1  = 1 . R f1 R11 R12 R
b
gFGH
IJ b K
gFGH
IJ K
For the second lens
2 n2  1 1 1 1 1 1 = n2  1  =+ = n2  1  . +R R f2 R 21 R 22 R
b
gFGH
IJ b K
gFGH
IJ K
b
g
Let an object be placed at any distance p1 large compared to the thickness of the doublet. The first lens forms an image according to 1 1 1 + = p1 q1 f1 1 n 1 + 1 1 =  . q1 R p1
This virtual q1 < 0 image is a real object for the second lens at distance p 2 =  q1 . For the second lens 1 1 1 + = p 2 q2 f2 2n  2 1 2n 2  2 n1 + 1 1 2n 2  n1  1 1 1 2n 2  2 1 =  = 2 + = +  =  . q2 R p2 R q1 R R p1 R p1 Then 1 1 2n 2  n1  1 1 2n  n 1  1 + = so the doublet behaves like a single lens with = 2 . p1 q 2 R f R
b
g
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P36.2 P36.4 P36.6 P36.8 4.58 m see the solution (a) p1 + h ; (b) virtual; (c) upright; (d) +1; (e) No at q = 0.267 m virtual upright and diminished with M = 0.026 7 at 3.33 m from the deepest point of the niche 30.0 cm (a) 160 mm; (b) R = 267 mm (a) convex; (b) At the 30.0 cm mark; (c) 20.0 cm (a) 15.0 cm; (b) 60.0 cm (a) see the solution; (b) at 0.639 s and at 0.782 s P36.32 P36.34 P36.36 P36.38 P36.22 P36.24 P36.26 P36.28 P36.30 4.82 cm see the solution; real, inverted, diminished 2.00 20.0 cm (a) q = 40.0 cm real, inverted, actual size M = 1.00 ; (b) q = , M = , no image is formed; (c) q = 20.0 cm upright, virtual , enlarged M = +2.00 (a) 6.40 cm; (b) 0. 250 ; (c) converging (a) 3.40 , upright; (b) see the solution (a) 39.0 mm; (b) 39.5 mm 1.16 mm s toward the lens
P36.10 P36.12 P36.14 P36.16 P36.18 P36.20
380 P36.40
Image Formation
(a) 13.3 cm; (b) see the solution; a trapezoid; (c) 224 cm 2 2.18 mm away from the film (a) at q = 34.7 cm virtual, upright and diminshed; (b) at q = 36.1 cm virtual, upright and diminshed f 1.41 23. 2 cm (a) at 4.17 cm; (b) 6.00 2.14 cm (a) see the solution; (b) h =  (c) 1.07 mm hf ; p
P36.60
(a) inside the rod, 47.1 cm from the second surface ; (b) virtual, inverted, and enlarged 25.3 cm to right of mirror , virtual, upright , enlarged 8.05 times place the lenses 9.00 cm apart and let light pass through the diverging lens first. 1.75 times (a) 1.40 kW m 2 ; (b) 6.91 mW m 2 ; (c) 0.164 cm; (d) 58.1 W m 2
P36.42 P36.44
P36.62
P36.64
P36.46 P36.48 P36.50 P36.52 P36.54
P36.66
P36.68 P36.70
11.7 cm (a) 0.334 m or larger ; R (b) a = 0.025 5 or larger R (a) 1.99 ; (b) 10.0 cm to the left of the lens ; 2.50 ; (c) inverted (a) 13.3 cm; (b) 5.90 ; (c) inverted see the solution; real, inverted, and actual size see the solution
P36.72
P36.56 P36.58
3.38 min if M < 1 , f =
P36.74  Md
2
a1  M f Md if M > 1 , f = a M  1f
,
P36.76 P36.78
2
37
Interference of Light Waves
CHAPTER OUTLINE
37.1 37.2 37.3 Conditions for Interference Young's DoubleSlit Experiment Intensity Distribution of the DoubleSlit Interference Pattern Phasor Addition of Waves Change of Phase Due to Reflection Interference in Thin Films The Michelson Interferometer
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q37.1 (a) Two waves interfere constructively if their path difference is zero, or an integral multiple of the wavelength, according to = m , with m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , .... Two waves interfere destructively if their path difference is a half wavelength, or an odd multiple of 1 , described by = m + , with m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , .... 2 2
37.4 37.5 37.6 37.7
(b)
FG H
IJ K
Q37.2
The light from the flashlights consists of many different wavelengths (that's why it's white) with random time differences between the light waves. There is no coherence between the two sources. The light from the two flashlights does not maintain a constant phase relationship over time. These three equivalent statements mean no possibility of an interference pattern.
Q37.3
Underwater, the wavelength of the light would decrease, water =
air . Since the positions of light n water and dark bands are proportional to , (according to Equations 37.2 and 37.3), the underwater fringe separations will decrease.
Every color produces its own pattern, with a spacing between the maxima that is characteristic of the wavelength. With several colors, the patterns are superimposed and it can be difficult to pick out a single maximum. Using monochromatic light can eliminate this problem. The threads that are woven together to make the cloth have small meshes between them. These bits of space act as pinholes through which the light diffracts. Since the cloth is a grid of such pinholes, an interference pattern is formed, as when you look through a diffraction grating.
Q37.4
Q37.5
Q37.6
If the oil film is brightest where it is thinnest, then n air < n oil < n water . With this condition, light reflecting from both the top and the bottom surface of the oil film will undergo phase reversal. Then these two beams will be in phase with each other where the film is very thin. This is the condition for constructive interference as the thickness of the oil film decreases toward zero.
381
382 Q37.7
Interference of Light Waves
As water evaporates from the `soap' bubble, the thickness of the bubble wall approaches zero. Since light reflecting from the front of the water surface is phaseshifted 180 and light reflecting from the back of the soap film is phaseshifted 0, the reflected light meets the conditions for a minimum. Thus the soap film appears black, as in the illustration accompanying textbook Example 37.5, "Interference in a WedgeShaped Film." If the film is more than a few wavelengths thick, the interference fringes are so close together that you cannot resolve them. If R is large, light reflecting from the lower surface of the lens can interfere with light reflecting from the upper surface of the flat. The latter undergoes phase reversal on reflection while the former does not. Where there is negligible distance between the surfaces, at the center of the pattern you will see a dark spot because of the destructive interference associated with the 180 phase shift. Colored rings surround the dark spot. If the lens is a perfect sphere the rings are perfect circles. Distorted rings reveal bumps or hollows on the fine scale of the wavelength of visible light. A camera lens will have more than one element, to correct (at least) for chromatic aberration. It will have several surfaces, each of which would reflect some fraction of the incident light. To maximize light throughput the surfaces need antireflective coatings. The coating thickness is chosen to produce destructive interference for reflected light of some wavelength. To do Young's doubleslit interference experiment with light from an ordinary source, you must first pass the light through a prism or diffraction grating to disperse different colors into different directions. With a single narrow slit you select a single color and make that light diffract to cover both of the slits for the interference experiment. Thus you may have trouble lining things up and you will generally have low light power reaching the screen. The laser light is already monochromatic and coherent across the width of the beam. Suppose the coating is intermediate in index of refraction between vacuum and the glass. When the coating is very thin, light reflected from its top and bottom surfaces will interfere constructively, so you see the surface white and brighter. As the thickness reaches one quarter of the wavelength of violet light in the coating, destructive interference for violet will make the surface look red or perhaps orange. Next to interfere destructively are blue, green, yellow, orange, and red, making the surface look red, purple, and then blue. As the coating gets still thicker, we can get constructive interference for violet and then for other colors in spectral order. Still thicker coating will give constructive and destructive interference for several visible wavelengths, so the reflected light will start to look white again.
Q37.8 Q37.9
Q37.10
Q37.11
Q37.12
Q37.13
. The 2 ray that reflects through the film undergoes phase reversal both at the bottom and at the top surface. Then this ray should also travel an extra distance of . Since this ray passes through two extra 2 thicknesses of film, the thickness should be . This is different from the condition for destructive 4 interference of light reflected from the film, but it is the same as the condition for constructive interference of reflected light. The energy of the extra reflected light is energy diverted from light otherwise transmitted.
destructive interference of the two transmitted beams is that the waves be out of phase by
Assume the film is higher in refractive index than the medium on both sides of it. The condition for
Chapter 37
383
Q37.14
The metal body of the airplane is reflecting radio waves broadcast by the television station. The reflected wave that your antenna receives has traveled an extra distance compared to the stronger signal that came straight from the transmitter tower. You receive it with a short time delay. On the television screen you see a faint image offset to the side.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 37.1 Section 37.2 Conditions for Interference Young's DoubleSlit Experiment
9 5.00 L 632.8 10 = m = 1.58 cm 4 d 2.00 10
P37.1
y bright =
e
ja f
P37.2
y bright =
L m d =
For m = 1 , P37.3
3.40 10 3 m 5.00 10 4 m yd = = 515 nm 3.30 m L
e
je
j
Note, with the conditions given, the small angle approximation does not work well. That is, sin , tan , and are significantly different. We treat the interference as a Fraunhofer pattern. (a) At the m = 2 maximum, tan = 400 m = 0.400 1 000 m
300 m
400 m 1 000 m
= 21.8
so (b)
=
300 m sin 21.8 d sin = = 55.7 m . 2 m
a
f
FIG. P37.3
The next minimum encountered is the m = 2 minimum; and at that point, which becomes or and so d sin = m + d sin = sin = 5 2
FG H
1 2
IJ K
5 5 55.7 m = = 0.464 2 d 2 300 m
FG H
IJ K
= 27.7
y = 1 000 m tan 27.7 = 524 m .
b
g
Therefore, the car must travel an additional 124 m . If we considered Fresnel interference, we would more precisely find 1 550 2 + 1 000 2  250 2 + 1 000 2 = 55.2 m and (b) 123 m. (a) = 2
FH
IK
384 P37.4
Interference of Light Waves
=
(a) (b) (c)
v 354 m s = = 0.177 m f 2 000 s 1
a0.300 mf sin = 1a0.177 mf so d sin 36.2 = 1b0.030 0 mg d sin = m e1.00 10 mj sin 36.2 = a1f
d sin = m so
6
and and so
= 36.2
d = 5.08 cm
= 590 nm
f=
c
=
3.00 10 8 m s 5.90 10 7 m
= 508 THz
P37.5
In the equation The first minimum is described by and the tenth by m = 9 : Also, but for small , Thus, d= 9.5 5 890 10 10 m 2.00 m 7.26 10
3
d sin = m +
FG H
1 . 2
IJ K
y L d
m=0
sin = tan =
1 9+ . 2 d
y L
FG H
IJ K
Source
sin tan . d= 9.5 9.5 L = sin y m = 1.54 mm . FIG. P37.5
e
ja
m
f = 1.54 10
3
P37.6
=
340 m s = 0.170 m 2 000 Hz d sin = m : gives gives gives gives
Maxima are at
m=0 m=1 m=2 m=3
Minima are at
= 0
sin = sin =
0.170 m = d 0.350 m
2 = 0.971 d
= 29.1 = 76.3
No solution.
d sin = m + gives gives gives
FG H
1 : 2 sin = sin =
IJ K
sin = 1. 46
m=0 m=1 m=2
2d
= 0.243
= 14.1 = 46.8
No solution.
3 = 0.729 2d
sin = 1.21
So we have maxima at 0 , 29.1 , and 76.3 ; minima at 14.1 and 46.8 .
Chapter 37
385
P37.7
(a)
For the bright fringe, y bright = y= m L where m = 1 d
9
y L = 1.20 m
3
e546.1 10
m 1.20 m
3
ja
0. 250 10
m
f = 2.62 10 FG H
m = 2.62 mm . Source d = 0.250 m
(b)
For the dark bands, y dark = y 2  y1
IJ K L LF 1 I F = MNGH1 + 2 JK  GH 0 + 1 IJK OPQ = dL a1f 2 d e546.1 10 mja1.20 mf =
9
L 1 ; m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ... m+ 2 d
bright bright bright dark dark dark
0.250 10 3 m
y = 2.62 mm .
y1 y2 FIG. P37.7
P37.8
Taking m = 0 and y = 0.200 mm in Equation 37.6 gives L 2dy = 2 0.400 10 3 m 0.200 10 3 m 442 10
9
e
je
L 36.2 cm
m
j = 0.362 m
Bright 0.2 mm 0.2 mm L Dark Bright Dark Bright
Geometric optics incorrectly predicts bright regions opposite the slits and darkness in between. But, as this example shows, interference can produce just the opposite. P37.9 Location of A = central maximum, Location of B = first minimum. So, Thus, P37.10 At 30.0 , y = y min  y max = d=
FIG. P37.7
L 2 20.0 m
a
f
FG IJ H K a3.00 mfa150 mf = =
40.0 m
1 1 L L 0+ 0= = 20.0 m . 2 2 d d 11.3 m .
d sin = m
4
e3.20 10
m sin 30.0 = m 500 10 9 m
j
e
j
so
m = 320
There are 320 maxima to the right, 320 to the left, and one for m = 0 straight ahead. There are 641 maxima .
386 *P37.11
Interference of Light Waves
Observe that the pilot must not only home in on the airport, but must be headed in the right direction when she arrives at the end of the runway. (a) (b)
=
8 c 3 10 m s = = 10.0 m f 30 10 6 s 1
The first side maximum is at an angle given by d sin = 1 .
af
= 14.5 a40 mf sin = 10 m y = L tan = b 2 000 mg tan 14.5 = 516 m
(c)
tan =
y L
The signal of 10m wavelength in parts (a) and (b) would show maxima at 0, 14.5, 30.0, 48.6, and 90. A signal of wavelength 11.23m would show maxima at 0, 16.3, 34.2, and 57.3. The only value in common is 0. If 1 and 2 were related by a ratio of small integers n (a just musical consonance!) in 1 = 1 , then the equations d sin = n 2 1 and d sin = n1 2 2 n2 would both be satisfied for the same nonzero angle. The pilot could come flying in with that inappropriate bearing, and run off the runway immediately after touchdown. d y = m L y= m L d
*P37.12
In d sin = m
9 dy m dL 1 633 10 m = = 3 m s = 6.33 mm s dt d dt 0.3 10 3 m
e e
j
j
P37.13
=
2
d sin =
2
d
FG y IJ H LK
1.20 10 je
4
(a)
=
e
2
5.00 10 7 m 2
m sin 0.500 = 13.2 rad 10 jFGH 5.001.20 m m IJK =
3
j a
f
(b)
=
e5.00 10
7
e1.20 10 mj
2d sin
4
m
6.28 rad
(c)
If = 0.333 rad =
= sin 1
F I = sin GH 2 d JK FG IJ = sin H 4d K
1
LM e5.00 10 mja0.333 radf OP MN 2 e1.20 10 mj PQ
7 4 7
= 1.27 10 2 deg . 4
(d)
If d sin =
= sin 1
1
LM 5 10 m OP MN 4e1.20 10 mj PQ
4
= 5.97 10 2 deg .
Chapter 37
387
P37.14
The path difference between rays 1 and 2 is:
= d sin 1  d sin 2 .
For constructive interference, this path difference must be equal to an integral number of wavelengths: d sin 1  d sin 2 = m , or d sin 1  sin 2 = m . P37.15 (a) The path difference = d sin and when L >> y
b
g
=
1.80 10 2 m 1.50 10 4 m yd = = 1.93 10 6 m = 1.93 m . 1.40 m L
e
je
j
(b) (c)
1.93 10 6 m = = 3.00 , or = 3.00 6.43 10 7 m
Point P will be a maximum since the path difference is an integer multiple of the wavelength.
Section 37.3 P37.16 (a)
Intensity Distribution of the DoubleSlit Interference Pattern I I max = cos 2
FG IJ H 2K
fa
(Equation 37.11)
Therefore,
= 2 cos 1
I I max
= 2 cos 1 0.640 = 1.29 rad .
(b)
=
486 nm 1.29 rad = = 99.8 nm 2 2
a
f
P37.17
I av = I max cos 2 For small , and
FG d sin IJ H K
sin = y L I av = 0.750 I max y= y=
L cos 1 d
e6.00 10 ja1.20 mf cos e 2.50 10 mj
7 3
I av I max
1
0.750 I max = 48.0 m I max
P37.18
I = I max cos 2 I I max
2
FG yd IJ H L K L e6.00 10 mje1.80 10 mj OP = cos M MN e656.3 10 mja0.800 mf PQ =
3 4 9
0.968
388 P37.19
Interference of Light Waves
(a)
From Equation 37.8,
=
2 d
sin =
2 d
y y2 + D2
3 3 2 yd 2 0.850 10 m 2.50 10 m = = 7.95 rad D 600 10 9 m 2.80 m
e
e
je ja
f
j
(b)
I I max I I max
=
cos 2 d sin cos
2
= cos 2
cos m b d g sin F 7.95 rad IJ = 0.453 = cos G H 2 K 2
max 2 2
b
g
=
cos 2 2
b g
P37.20
(a)
The resultant amplitude is Er = E0 sin t + E0 sin t + + E0 t + 2 ,
b
g b
2
g
where
=
2
b g E = E bsin t ge1 + cos + 2 cos  1j + E bcos t gbsin + 2 sin cos g E = E b1 + 2 cos gbsin t cos + cos t sin g = E b1 + 2 cos g sinb t + g F 1I Then the intensity is I E = E b1 + 2 cos g G J H 2K
Er = E0 sin t + sin t cos + cos t sin + sin t cos 2 + cos t sin 2
r r 0 0 0 0 2 r 2 0 2
d sin .
where the time average of
sin 2 t + is
b
g
1 . 2
2 From one slit alone we would get intensity I max E0
I = I max (b)
LM1 + 2 cosFG 2 d sin IJ OP H KQ N
FG 1 IJ so H 2K
2
.
Look at the N = 3 graph in Figure 37.14. Minimum intensity is zero, attained where 1 cos =  . One relative maximum occurs at cos = 1.00 , where I = I max . 2 The larger local maximum happens where cos = +1.00 , giving I = 9.00 I 0 . The ratio of intensities at primary versus secondary maxima is 9.00 .
Chapter 37
389
Section 37.4 P37.21 (a)
Phasor Addition of Waves We can use sin A + sin B = 2 sin to be E1 + E2
FG A + B IJ cosFG A  B IJ to find the sum of the two sine functions H 2 2K H 2 2K
E1 + E2 = 24.0 kN C sin 15 x  4.5t + 35.0 cos 35.0
f b g a = b19.7 kN C g sina15 x  4.5t + 35.0f
Thus, the total wave has amplitude 19.7 kN C and has a constant phase difference of
35.0 from the first wave.
(b) In units of kN/C, the resultant phasor is E R = E 1 + E 2 = 12.0 i + 12.0 cos 70.0 i + 12.0 sin 70.0 j = 16.1 i + 11.3 j ER =
2 2 1
y
kx  t
ER E2
e j e a16.1f + a11.3f at tan FGH 11..3 IJK = 16 1
j
19.7 kN C at 35.0
E1
70.0
x
FIG. P37.21(b) (c) E R = 12.0 cos 70.0 i + 12.0 sin 70.0 j +15.5 cos 80.0 i  15.5 sin 80.0 j +17.0 cos 160 i + 17.0 sin 160 j E R = 9.18 i + 1.83 j = 9.36 kN C at 169 The wave function of the total wave is EP = 9.36 kN C sin 15 x  4.5t + 169 .
ER E3 y E1 E2 x
kx  t
b
g a
f
FIG. P37.21(c)
P37.22
(a)
E R = E0 i + i cos 20.0+ j sin 20.0 + i cos 40.0+ j sin 40.0
e
j e
j
y ER E2 E1
E R = E0 2.71i + 0.985 j = 2.88E0 at 20.0 = 2.88E0 at 0.349 rad
E3 x
EP = 2.88E0 sin t + 0.349
b
g j e j
FIG. P37.22(a) (b) E R = E0 i + i cos 60.0+ j sin 60.0 + i cos 120+ j sin 120 E R = E0 1.00 i + 1.73 j = 2.00E0 at 60.0 = 2.00E0 at EP = 2.00E0 sin t +
e
y ER
E3 E2 E1 x
rad 3
FG H
3
IJ K
FIG. P37.22(b) continued on next page
390
Interference of Light Waves
(c)
E R = E0 i + i cos 120+ j sin 120 + i cos 240+ j sin 240 E R = E0 0 i + 0 j = 0 EP = 0
e
j e
j
y E3 E2 E1 x
FIG. P37.22(c) (d) E R = E0 i + i cos
LM FG N H
3 3 + i cos 3 + j sin 3 + j sin 2 2
IJ e K
jOPQ
y E3 E2 E1 x
3 rad E R = E0 0 i  1.00 j = E0 at 270 = E0 at 2 3 EP = E0 sin t + 2
FG H
IJ K
FIG. P37.22(d)
y ER 8.00
P37.23
E R = 6.00 i + 8.00 j =
a6.00f + a8.00f
2
2
at tan 1
FG 8.00 IJ H 6.00 K
E R = 10.0 at 53.1 = 10.0 at 0.927 rad EP = 10.0 sin 100 t + 0.927
b
g
6.00
2
x
FIG. P37.23 P37.24 If E1 = E01 sin t and E2 = E02 sin t + , then by phasor addition, the amplitude of E is E0 =
b
g
y E0
bE
01
+ E02 cos
g + bE
2
02
sin
g
2
=
2 2 E01 + 2E01 E02 cos + E02
E 02
E sin and the phase angle is found from sin = 02 . E0 P37.25 E R = 12.0 i + 18.0 cos 60.0 i + 18.0 sin 60.0 j E R = 21.0 i + 15.6 j = 26.2 at 36.6 ER = 26.2 sin t + 36.6
E 01
x
FIG. P37.24
y ER 18.0
e
j
b
g
12.0
60.0
x
FIG. P37.25 P37.26 Constructive interference occurs where m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ... , for
FG 2 x  2 ft + IJ  FG 2 x H 6K H bx  x g + 1  1 = m
1 1 2
2
 2 ft +
= 2 m 8
IJ K
2 x 1  x 2
b
x1  x 2
12
16
g + FG  IJ = 2 m H 6 8K F 1I = Gm  J m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ... H 48 K
.
Chapter 37
391
P37.27
See the figure to the right:
/2 /2 t
FIG. P37.27
=
. 2
/2
P37.28
2 2 2 ER = E1 + E2  2E1 E2 cos
where
= 180  .
E1
ER
Since
I E2
I R = I 1 + I 2 + 2 I 1 I 2 cos .
E2 = /4
FIG. P37.28 P37.29 360 where N defines the N number of coherent sources. Then, Take = ER =
y The N = 6 case
m =1
E0 sinb t + m g = 0 .
60.0
N
=
360 N
=
360 6
= 60. 0
In essence, the set of N electric field components complete a full circle and return to zero.
x
FIG. P37.29
Section 37.5 Section 37.6 P37.30
Change of Phase Due to Reflection Interference in Thin Films
Light reflecting from the first surface suffers phase reversal. Light reflecting from the second surface does not, but passes twice through the thickness t of the film. So, for constructive interference, we require
n + 2t = n 2
where Then
n =
2t =
is the wavelength in the material. n n = 2 2n
= 4nt = 4 1.33 115 nm = 612 nm .
a fa
f
392 P37.31
Interference of Light Waves
(a)
The light reflected from the top of the oil film undergoes phase reversal. Since 1.45 > 1.33 , the light reflected from the bottom undergoes no reversal. For constructive interference of reflected light, we then have 2nt = m + or
FG H
1 2
IJ K
m =
2 1.45 280 nm 2nt . = m+ 1 2 m+ 1 2
b g
a fa
b g
f
FIG. P37.31
Substituting for m gives:
m=0 , m=1, m=2,
0 = 1 620 nm (infrared) 1 = 541 nm (green) 2 = 325 nm (ultraviolet).
Both infrared and ultraviolet light are invisible to the human eye, so the dominant color in reflected light is green . (b) The dominant wavelengths in the transmitted light are those that produce destructive interference in the reflected light. The condition for destructive interference upon reflection is 2nt = m or 2nt 812 nm = . m m
m =
Substituting for m gives:
m=1, m=2, m=3 ,
1 = 812 nm (near infrared) 2 = 406 nm (violet) 3 = 271 nm (ultraviolet).
Of these, the only wavelength visible to the human eye (and hence the dominate wavelength observed in the transmitted light) is 406 nm. Thus, the dominant color in the transmitted light is violet . P37.32 Since 1 < 1.25 < 1.33 , light reflected both from the top and from the bottom surface of the oil suffers phase reversal. For constructive interference we require and for destructive interference, Then Therefore, 2t = 2t = m cons n m + 1 2 des n
b g f
.
cons 1 640 nm =1+ = = 1.25 and m = 2 . 2m 512 nm dest
t= 2 640 nm = 512 nm . 2 1.25
a
a f
Chapter 37
393
P37.33
Treating the antireflectance coating like a cameralens coating, 2t = m + Let m = 0 : t=
FG H
1 . 2 n
IJ K
4n
=
3.00 cm = 0.500 cm . 4 1.50
a f
This antireflectance coating could be easily countered by changing the wavelength of the radarto 1.50 cmnow creating maximum reflection! P37.34 2nt = m + Minimum P37.35
FG H
1 2
IJ K
so
FG 1 IJ H 2 K 2n F 1 I a500 nmf = t=G J H 2 K 2a1.30f
t= m+
96.2 nm .
Since the light undergoes a 180 phase change at each surface of the film, the condition for 2nt . The film thickness is constructive interference is 2nt = m , or = m t = 1.00 10 5 cm = 1.00 10 7 m = 100 nm . Therefore, the wavelengths intensified in the reflected light are
=
2 1.38 100 nm 276 nm where m = 1, 2 , 3 , ... = m m
a fa
f
or 1 = 276 nm , 2 = 138 nm , . . . . All reflection maxima are in the ultraviolet and beyond.
No visible wavelengths are intensified.
P37.36 (a) For maximum transmission, we want destructive interference in the light reflected from the front and back surfaces of the film. If the surrounding glass has refractive index greater than 1.378, light reflected from the front surface suffers no phase reversal and light reflected from the back does undergo phase reversal. This effect by itself would produce destructive interference, so we want the distance down and back to be one whole wavelength in the film: 2t = t=
. n
2n
=
656.3 nm = 238 nm 2 1.378
a
f
(b) (c)
The filter will expand. As t increases in 2nt = , so does increase . Destructive interference for reflected light happens also for in 2nt = 2 , or
= 1.378 238 nm = 328 nm
a
f
anear ultravioletf .
P37.37
If the path length difference = , the transmitted light will be bright. Since = 2d = , d min =
580 nm = = 290 nm . 2 2
394 P37.38
Interference of Light Waves
The condition for bright fringes is 2t +
=m 2n n
m = 1, 2 , 3 , ... .
R
From the sketch, observe that t = R 1  cos R 1  1 +
a
f FGH
2 R r = 2 2 R
I JK
FG IJ H K
2
=
r2 . 2R r 1 = m . R 2 n
2
t
The condition for a bright fringe becomes Thus, for fixed m and , Therefore, n liquid r f2 = n air ri2 and P37.39 For destructive interference in the air, 2t = m .
FG H
IJ K
r
FIG. P37.38
nr 2 = constant .
n liquid = 1.00 cm a f aa1..50 cmff 1 31
2 2
= 1.31 .
For 30 dark fringes, including the one where the plates meet, t= 29 600 nm = 8.70 10 6 m . 2 t 8.70 m = = 4.35 m . 2 2
a
f
Therefore, the radius of the wire is r=
FIG. P37.39 P37.40 For total darkness, we want destructive interference for reflected light for both 400 nm and 600 nm. With phase reversal at just one reflecting surface, the condition for destructive interference is 2n air t = m
m = 0 , 1, 2 , ... .
The least common multiple of these two wavelengths is 1 200 nm, so we get no reflected light at 2 1.00 t = 3 400 nm = 2 600 nm = 1 200 nm , so t = 600 nm at this second dark fringe.
a f a
f a
f
By similar triangles, or the distance from the contact point is
600 nm 0.050 0 mm = , x 10.0 cm x = 600 10 9 m
e
0 jFGH 5.00.100 m m IJK = 10
5
1.20 mm .
Chapter 37
395
Section 37.7 P37.41
The Michelson Interferometer
When the mirror on one arm is displaced by , the path difference changes by 2 . A shift resulting in the reversal between dark and bright fringes requires a path length change of onehalf m , where in this case, m = 250 . wavelength. Therefore, 2 = 2 =m 250 6.328 10 7 m = = 39.6 m 4 4
a fe e
j
P37.42
Distance = 2 3.82 10 4 m = 1 700 The light is blue .
j
= 4.49 10 7 m = 449 nm
P37.43
Counting light going both directions, the number of wavelengths originally in the cylinder is 2L 2L 2nL = m1 = . It changes to m 2 = as the cylinder is filled with gas. If N is the number of bright n 2L fringes passing, N = m 2  m1 = n  1 , or the index of refraction of the gas is
a f
n = 1+
N 2L
Additional Problems *P37.44 (a) (b) Where fringes of the two colors coincide we have d sin = m = m , requiring
m . = m
= 430 nm , = 510 nm
m 430 nm 43 = = , which cannot be reduced any further. Then m = 51, m = 43 . m 510 nm 51
m
ym P37.45
F m IJ = sin LM a51fe430 10 mj OP = 61.3 = sin G HdK MN 0.025 10 m PQ = L tan = a1.5 mf tan 61.3 = 2.74 m
9 1 1 3 m
The wavelength is =
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 5.00 m. f 60.0 10 6 s 1
Along the line AB the two traveling waves going in opposite directions add to give a standing wave. The two transmitters are exactly 2.00 wavelengths apart and the signal from B, when it arrives at A, will always be in phase with transmitter B. Since B is 180 out of phase with A, the two signals always interfere destructively at the position of A. The first antinode (point of constructive interference) is located at distance
5.00 m = = 1.25 m from the node at A. 4 4
396 *P37.46
Interference of Light Waves
Along the line of length d joining the source, two identical waves moving in opposite directions add to give a standing wave. An d antinode is halfway between the sources. If > , there is space for 2 2 d two more antinodes for a total of three. If > , there will be at least 2 d five antinodes, and so on. To repeat, if > 0 , the number of antinodes d > 1, the number of antinodes is 3 or more. If > 2 , the number of antinodes is 5 or more. In general, is 1 or more. If d
s
N
A
N
s
4
FIG. P37.46
The number of antinodes is 1 plus 2 times the greatest integer less than or equal to If
d .
d d < , there will be no nodes. If > , there will be space for at least two nodes, as shown in the 2 4 2 4 d 3 d 5 picture. If > , there will be at least four nodes. If > six or more nodes will fit in, and so on. 2 4 2 4 To repeat, if 2d < the number of nodes is 0. If 2d > the number of nodes is 2 or more. If 2d > 3 d 1 + > 1, the number of nodes is 4 or more. If 2d > 5 the number of nodes is 6 or more. Again, if 2 d 1 d 1 the number of nodes is at least 2. If + > 2 , the number of nodes is at least 4. If + > 3 , the 2 2 number of nodes is at least 6. In general,
FG H
IJ K
FG H
FG H
IJ K
IJ K
the number of nodes is 2 times the greatest nonzero integer less than
FG d + 1 IJ . H 2K
Next, we enumerate the zones of constructive interference. They are described by d sin = m , m = 0 , 1, 2 , ... with counted as positive both left and right of the maximum at = 0 in the center. d The number of side maxima on each side is the greatest integer satisfying sin 1, d1 m , m . So the total number of bright fringes is one plus 2 times the greatest integer less than or equal to It is equal to the number of antinodes on the line joining the sources. d .
The interference minima are to the left and right at angles described by d sin = m + m = 0 , 1, 2 , .... With sin < 1, d1 > m max +
1 d 1 d 1 , m max <  or m max + 1 < + . Let n = 1, 2 , 3 , .... 2 2 2 d 1 Then the number of side minima is the greatest integer n less than + . Counting both left and 2 d 1 right, the number of dark fringes is two times the greatest positive integer less than + . It is 2 equal to the number of nodes in the standing wave between the sources.
FG H
IJ K
FG H
1 , 2
IJ K
FG H
IJ K
Chapter 37
397
P37.47
My middle finger has width d = 2 cm . (a) Two adjacent directions of constructive interference for 600nm light are described by d sin = m
0 = 0
e2 10
2
m sin 1 = 1 6 10 7 m
j
e
j
Thus, and (b) Choose
1 = 2 10 3 degree
1  0 ~ 10 3 degree . 1 = 20
e2 10
2
m sin 20 = 1
j
af
= 7 mm
Millimeter waves are microwaves . f= P37.48 c : f= 3 10 8 m s 7 10 3 m ~ 10 11 Hz
If the center point on the screen is to be a dark spot rather than bright, passage through the plastic must delay the light by onehalf wavelength. Calling the thickness of the plastic t. t
P37.49
+
t nt 1 = = 2 n
or
t=
2 n 1
a f
where n is the index of refraction for the plastic.
No phase shift upon reflection from the upper surface (glass to air) of the film, but there will be a shift of
due to the reflection at the lower surface of the film (air to metal). The total phase 2 difference in the two reflected beams is
then
= 2nt +
. 2 = m . 2 1 =m  2 2 2 4
For constructive interference, = m or 2 1.00 t +
a f FG H
Thus, the film thickness for the m th order bright fringe is tm = m 
IJ K
FG IJ H K
and the thickness for the m  1 bright fringe is: t m1 = m  1
a
fFGH IJK  . 2 4
. 2
Therefore, the change in thickness required to go from one bright fringe to the next is t = t m  t m 1 = continued on next page
398
Interference of Light Waves
To go through 200 bright fringes, the change in thickness of the air film must be: 200
FG IJ = 100 . H 2K
Thus, the increase in the length of the rod is L = 100 = 100 5.00 10 7 m = 5.00 10 5 m . From we have: P37.50 L = Lit
e
j
=
L 5.00 10 5 m = = 20.0 10 6 C 1 . Li T 0.100 m 25.0 C
a
fa
f
Since 1 < 1.25 < 1.34 , light reflected from top and bottom surfaces of the oil undergoes phase reversal. The path difference is then 2t, which must be equal to m n = m n
for maximum reflection, with m = 1 for the given firstorder condition and n = 1.25 . So t= m 1 500 nm = = 200 nm . 2n 2 1.25
a
a f
m
f
The volume we assume to be constant: A= 1.00 m3 200 10
1.00 m3 = 200 nm A
a
f
e
9
j
= 5.00 10 6 m 2 = 5.00 km 2 .
P37.51
One radio wave reaches the receiver R directly from the distant source at an angle above the horizontal. The other wave undergoes phase reversal as it reflects from the water at P. Constructive interference first occurs for a path difference of d=
2
(1)
It is equally far from P to R as from P to R , the mirror image of the telescope. The angles in the figure are equal because they each form part of a right triangle with a shared angle at R . So the path difference is The wavelength is Substituting for d and in Equation (1), Solving for the angle , sin = FIG. P37.51
d = 2 20.0 m sin = 40.0 m sin .
a
f
a
f
=
8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 5.00 m . f 60.0 10 6 Hz
a40.0 mf sin = 5.00 m . 2
5.00 m and = 3.58 . 80.0 m
Chapter 37
399
P37.52
phase shift at the mirror. The 2 second slit is the mirror image of the source, 1.00 cm below the mirror plane. Modifying Equation 37.5,
double slit experiment if we remember the light undergoes a y dark
7 mL 1 5.00 10 m 100 m = = = 2.50 mm . d 2.00 10 2 m
For destructive interference, the path length must differ by m . We may treat this problem as a
e
e
ja
j
f
P37.53
2
a15.0 kmf + h = 30.175 km a15.0 kmf + h = 227.63
2 2 2 2
h = 1.62 km P37.54 For dark fringes, 2nt = m 84 500 nm . 2
FIG. P37.53
and at the edge of the wedge, t = When submerged in water, m= so 2 1.33 42 500 nm 500 nm
a
f
2nt = m
a fa fa
f
FIG. P37.54 I I max I I max
m + 1 = 113 dark fringes .
P37.55
From Equation 37.13, Let 2 equal the wavelength for which Then
= cos 2 I2
F yd I . GH L JK
= 0.640 .
I max
1
2 = yd I1 = 1 cos 1 L I max
yd L
cos
bI
2
I max
g
12
.
But
FG H
IJ K
12
= 600 nm cos 1 0.900 = 271 nm .
a
f
a
f
Substituting this value into the expression for 2 ,
2 =
271 nm cos
1
e0.640 j
12
= 421 nm .
Note that in this problem, cos 1
FG I IJ HI K
max
12
must be expressed in radians.
400 P37.56
Interference of Light Waves
2 where the factor n accounts for the shorter wavelength in the film. For constructive interference, we require 2 an  b  = m . 2 2 an  b  = 0 . The minimum thickness will be given by 2 nt = 2 an  b = 2  2t tan 21.2 sin 30.0 2 cos 21. 2 590 nm 2 1.38 t = 115 nm =  2 tan 21.2 sin 30.0 t = 2.57t cos 21.2 2
2 an  b 
At entrance, 1.00 sin 30.0 = 1.38 sin 2 2 = 21.2 Call t the unknown thickness. Then t t cos 21.2 = a= a cos 21.2 c tan 21.2 = c = t tan 21.2 t b sin 1 = b = 2t tan 21.2 sin 30.0 2c The net shift for the second ray, including the phase reversal on reflection of the first, is
FIG. P37.56
a
f
FG H
IJ K
P37.57
2 where a and b are as shown in the ray diagram, n is the index of is due to phase reversal at the top refraction, and the term 2 surface. For constructive interference, = m where m has integer values. This condition becomes 1 2na  b = m + (1) 2 t From the figure's geometry, a = cos 2 t sin 2 c = a sin 2 = cos 2 2t sin 2 b = 2 c sin 1 = sin 1 cos 2 Also, from Snell's law, sin 1 = n sin 2 .
The shift between the two reflected waves is = 2na  b 
FG H
IJ K
FIG. P37.57
Thus,
b=
2nt sin 2 2 . cos 2
2
With these results, the condition for constructive interference given in Equation (1) becomes: 2n
or
FG t IJ  2nt sin = 2nt e1  sin j = FG m + 1 IJ H 2K H cos K cos cos F 1I 2nt cos = G m + J . H 2K
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Chapter 37
401
P37.58
(a)
Minimum: Maximum: for 1 > 2 , so Then
2nt = m 2 2nt = m +
FG m + 1 IJ < m H 2K
m = m  1 .
FG H
1 1 2
IJ K
for m = 0 , 1, 2 , ... for m = 0 , 1, 2 , ...
2nt = m 2 = m 
FG H
1 1 2
IJ K
2m 2 = 2m 1  1 so m=
1 2 1  2
b
g
.
(b)
m=
500 = 1.92 2 (wavelengths measured to 5 nm ) 2 500  370
a
f
Minimum:
Maximum:
a f a f 1I F 2nt = G m  1 + J = 1.5 H 2K 2a1.40ft = 1.5a500 nmf
2 1.40 t = 2 370 nm
2nt = m 2
t = 264 nm
t = 268 nm
Film thickness = 266 nm . P37.59 From the sketch, observe that x = h2 +
d x
FG d IJ H 2K
2
=
4h 2 + d 2 . 2
h
x
Including the phase reversal due to reflection from the ground, the total shift between the two waves is = 2 x  d 
. 2
d/2
FIG. P37.59 (a) For constructive interference, the total shift must be an integral number of wavelengths, or = m where m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ... . Thus, 2x  d = m +
FG H
1 2
IJ K
or
=
4x  2d . 2m + 1
For the longest wavelength, m = 0 , giving = 4x  2d = 2 4h 2 + d 2  2d .
(b)
For destructive interference, Thus,
= m
1 where m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ... . 2 2x  d = . or 2x  d = m m 4h 2 + d 2  d .
FG H
IJ K
For the longest wavelength, m = 1 giving = 2 x  d =
402 P37.60
Interference of Light Waves
Bright fringes occur when and dark fringes occur when The thickness of the film at x is Therefore, x bright =
FG IJ H K FI 2t = G J m . H nK F hI t = G Jx . HK
2t =
1 m+ n 2
1 m+ 2 hn 2
FG H
IJ K
and x dark =
m . 2 hn
FIG. P37.60
L Thin film y' d
P37.61
Call t the thickness of the film. The central maximum corresponds to zero phase difference. Thus, the added distance r traveled by the light from the lower slit must introduce a phase difference equal to that introduced by the plastic film. The phase difference is
= 2
FG t IJ an  1f . H K
a a
r
Zero order m=0
Screen
The corresponding difference in path length r is
F I F t I F I r = G J = 2 G J an  1fG J = tan  1f . H 2 K H K H 2 K
a a
FIG. P37.61
Note that the wavelength of the light does not appear in this equation. In the figure, the two rays from the slits are essentially parallel. Thus the angle may be expressed as Eliminating r by substitution, P37.62 tan = r y = . d L
t n 1 L y t n  1 = gives y = . L d d
a f
a f
The shift between the waves reflecting from the top and bottom surfaces of the film at the point where the film has thickness t is
, with the factor of being due to a phase reversal 2 2 at one of the surfaces. = 2tn film +
For the dark rings (destructive interference), the total shift should 1 be = m + with m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ... . This requires that 2 m t= . 2n film
R
FG H
IJ K
nfilm r
t
FIG. P37.62
To find t in terms of r and R, Since t is much smaller than R,
R2 = r 2 + R  t
a f
2
so and
r 2 = 2 Rt + t 2 .
r 2 2 Rt = 2 R
t 2 << 2 Rt
m R . n film
FG m IJ . H 2n K
film
Thus, where m is an integer,
r
Chapter 37
403
P37.63
(a)
Constructive interference in the reflected light requires 2t = m + has m = 0 and the 55th has m = 54 , so at the edge of the lens t= 54.5 650 10 9 m 2
FG H
1 . The first bright ring 2
IJ K
e
j = 17.7 m .
Now from the geometry in Figure 37.18, the distance from the center of curvature down to the flat side of the lens is R 2  r 2 = R  t or R 2  r 2 = R 2  2 Rt + t 2 5.00 10 2 m + 1.77 10 5 m r 2 + t2 = R= 2t 2 1.77 10 5 m
e
e
j e
2
j
j
2
= 70.6 m
(b) *P37.64
1 1 1 1 1 so f = 136 m = 0.520  = n1  70.6 m f R2 R 2
a fFGH
IJ K
FG H
IJ K
Light reflecting from the upper interface of the air layer suffers no phase change, while light reflecting from the lower interface is reversed 180. Then there is indeed a dark fringe at the outer circumference of the lens, and a dark fringe wherever the air thickness t satisfies 2t = m , m = 0 , 1, 2 , .... (a) At the central dark spot m = 50 and 50 = 25 589 10 9 m = 1.47 10 5 m . t0 = 2
t0
r
R=8m
e
j
(b)
In the right triangle,
FIG. P37.64
a8 mf
(c)
2
= r 2 + 8 m  1.47 10 5 m
e
last term is negligible. r =
j = r + a8 mf  2a8 mfe1.47 10 2a8 mfe1.47 10 mj = 1.53 10 m
2 2 2 5 2
5
m + 2 10 10 m 2 . The
j
1 1 1 1 1 = n 1  = 1.50  1  8.00 m f R1 R 2 f = 16.0 m
a fFGH
IJ a K
fFGH
IJ K
404 P37.65
Interference of Light Waves
For bright rings the gap t between surfaces is given by 1 2t = m + . The first bright ring has m = 0 and the hundredth 2 has m = 99.
FG H
IJ K
So, t =
1 99.5 500 10 9 m = 24.9 m . 2
a fe
j
Call rb the ring radius. From the geometry of the figure at the right, t = r  r 2  rb2  R  R 2  rb2
FH
IK
Since rb << r , we can expand in series: t = r r 1
P37.66
I  R + RF 1  1 I = 1  1 JK GH 2 R JK 2 r 2 R L 2t OP = LM 2e24.9 10 mj OP = 1.73 cm r =M N 1 r  1 R Q MN 1 4.00 m  1 12.0 m PQ 7 4 O L E = E + E + E = Mcos + 3.00 cos + 6.00 cos P i 2 3 Q N 6 4 O 7 L + Msin + 3.00 sin + 6.00 sin P j 3 Q 2 N 6
1 2r rb2 2 rb2 2 rb2 rb2
12 6 12 b R 1 2 3
F GH
FIG. P37.65
y
E1 E2
x
ER E3
E R = 2.13 i  7.70 j ER =
a2.13f + a7.70f
2
2
at tan 1
FG 7.70 IJ = 7.99 at 4.44 rad H 2.13 K
. 2nt = m + nt =
Thus, EP = 7.99 sin t + 4.44 rad P37.67 (a)
b
g
FIG. P37.66
Bright bands are observed when Hence, the first bright band ( m = 0 ) corresponds to Since we have x 1 t1 = x2 t2 x 2 = x1
2 1 2
FG H
1 . 2
IJ K
. 4
FG t IJ = x FG IJ = a3.00 cmfFG 680 nmIJ = H 420 nm K Ht K H K
1 1
4.86 cm .
(b)
t1 = t2 =
1 420 nm = = 78.9 nm 4n 4 1.33
a f
2 680 nm = = 128 nm 4n 4 1.33
a f
(c)
tan =
t1 78.9 nm = = 2.63 10 6 rad x 1 3.00 cm
Chapter 37
405
*P37.68
Depth = onequarter of the wavelength in plastic. t=
P37.69
a f F 1I 2 h sin = G m + J H 2K F y I 1 2 hG J = H 2L K 2
780 nm = = 130 nm 4n 4 1.50
bright so 2.00 m 606 10 9 m L = = 0.505 mm h= 2 y 2 1. 2 10 3 m
a
e
fe
j
j
*P37.70
Represent the light radiated from each slit to point P as a phasor. The two have equal amplitudes E. Since intensity is proportional to amplitude squared, they 3E 2 add to amplitude 3E . Then cos = , = 30 . Next, the obtuse angle E between the two phasors is 180  30  30 = 120, and = 180  120 = 60 . The phase difference between the two phasors is caused by the path difference 60 , = = . Then = SS 2  SS 1 according to = 360 360 6
3E
E
E
FIG. P37.70
6 2 L 2 + L2 + d 2 = L2 + 6 36
L2 + d 2  L = The last term is negligible d= P37.71
FG 2L IJ H6K
12
=
2 1. 2 m 620 10 9 m = 0.498 mm . 6
a
f
Superposing the two vectors, ER = E1 + E 2 ER = E 1 + E 2 = ER =
FG E H
0
+
E0 cos 3
IJ + FG E sin IJ K H3 K
2 0
2
2 = E0 +
E2 E2 2 2 E0 cos + 0 cos 2 + 0 sin 2 3 9 9
10 2 2 2 E0 + E0 cos 9 3 10 2 I max + I max cos . 9 3
Since intensity is proportional to the square of the amplitude, I=
Using the trigonometric identity cos = 2 cos 2 I= or
10 2 4 4 I max + I max 2 cos 2  1 = I max + I max cos 2 , 9 3 2 9 3 2 4 I max 1 + 3 cos 2 9 2
FG H
IJ K
 1 , this becomes 2
I=
FG H
IJ K
.
406
Interference of Light Waves
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P37.2 P37.4 P37.6 P37.8 P37.10 P37.12 P37.14 P37.16 P37.18 P37.20 P37.22 515 nm (a) 36.2; (b) 5.08 cm ; (c) 508 THz P37.40 P37.42 P37.44 P37.46 1.20 mm 449 nm; blue (a) see the solution; (b) 2.74 m number of antinodes = number of constructive interference zones = 1 plus 2 times the greatest positive d integer number of nodes = number of destructive interference zones = 2 times the greatest d 1 positive integer < + 2
maxima at 0 , 29.1 , 76.3 ; minima at 14.1 and 46.8
36.2 cm 641 6.33 mm s see the solution (a) 1.29 rad; (b) 99.8 nm 0.968 (a) see the solution; (b) 9.00 (a) 2.88E0 at 0.349 rad ; (b) 2.00E0 at (d) E0 at 3 rad 2
FG H
IJ K
P37.48 P37.50 P37.52 P37.54 P37.56
2 n 1
a f
5.00 km 2 2.50 mm 113 115 nm (a) see the solution; (b) 266 nm see the solution see the solution (a) 14.7 m ; (b) 1.53 cm; (c) 16.0 m 7.99 sin t + 4.44 rad 130 nm 0.498 mm
rad ; (c) 0; 3
P37.24 P37.26
see the solution 1 where 48 m = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ... x1  x 2 = m  see the solution 612 nm 512 nm 96.2 nm (a) 238 nm; (b) increase ; (c) 328 nm 1.31
FG H
IJ K
P37.58 P37.60 P37.62 P37.64 P37.66 P37.68 P37.70
P37.28 P37.30 P37.32 P37.34 P37.36 P37.38
b
g
38
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
CHAPTER OUTLINE
38.1 38.2 38.3 38.4 38.5 38.6 Introduction to Diffraction Patterns Diffraction Patterns from Narrow Slits Resolution of SingleSlit and Circular Apertures The Diffraction Grating Diffraction of XRays by Crystals Polarization of Light Waves
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q38.1 Audible sound has wavelengths on the order of meters or centimeters, while visible light has a wavelength on the order of half a micrometer. In this world of breadboxsized objects, is large for sound, and sound diffracts around behind walls with doorways. But
a
is a tiny fraction for visible light passing a ordinarysize objects or apertures, so light changes its direction by only very small angles when it diffracts. Another way of phrasing the answer: We can see by a small angle around a small obstacle or around the edge of a small opening. The side fringes in Figure 38.1 and the Arago spot in the center of Figure 38.3 show this diffraction. We cannot always hear around corners. Outofdoors, away from reflecting surfaces, have someone a few meters distant face away from you and whisper. The highfrequency, shortwavelength, informationcarrying components of the sound do not diffract around his head enough for you to understand his words.
Q38.2
The wavelength of light is extremely small in comparison to the dimensions of your hand, so the diffraction of light around an obstacle the size of your hand is totally negligible. However, sound waves have wavelengths that are comparable to the dimensions of the hand or even larger. Therefore, significant diffraction of sound waves occurs around handsized obstacles. If you are using an extended light source, the gray area at the edge of the shadow is the penumbra. A bug looking up from there would see the light source partly but not entirely blocked by the book. If you use a point source of light, hold it and the book motionless, and look at very small angles out from the geometrical edge of the shadow, you may see a series of bright and dark bands produced by diffraction of light at the straight edge, as shown in the diagram. FIG. Q38.3
Q38.3
407
408 Q38.4
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
An AM radio wave has wavelength on the order of
~ 300 m . This is large compared to 1 10 6 s 1 the width of the mouth of a tunnel, so the AM radio waves can reflect from the surrounding ground as if the hole were not there. (In the same way, a metal screen forming the dish of a radio telescope can reflect radio waves as if it were solid, and a holeriddled screen in the door of a microwave oven keeps the microwaves inside.) The wave does not "see" the hole. Very little of the radio wave energy enters the tunnel, and the AM radio signal fades. An FM radio wave has wavelength a hundred times smaller, on the order of a few meters. This is smaller than the size of the tunnel opening, so the wave can readily enter the opening. (On the other hand, the long wavelength of AM radio waves lets them diffract more around obstacles. Longwavelength waves can change direction more in passing hills or large buildings, so in some experiments FM fades more than AM.) The intensity of the light coming through the slit decreases, as you would expect. The central maximum increases in width as the width of the slit decreases. In the condition sin =
3 10 8 m s
Q38.5
for a destructive interference on each side of the central maximum, increases as a decreases.
Q38.6
It is shown in the correct orientation. If the horizontal width of the opening is equal to or less than the wavelength of the sound, then the equation a sin = 1 has the solution = 90 , or has no solution. The central diffraction maximum covers the whole seaward side. If the vertical height of the opening is large compared to the wavelength, then the angle in a sin = 1 will be small, and the central diffraction maximum will form a thin horizontal sheet.
af
af
Q38.7
The speaker is mounted incorrectlyit should be rotated by 90. The speaker is mounted with its narrower dimension vertical. That means that the sound will diffract more vertically than it does horizontally. Mounting the speaker so that its thinner dimension is horizontal will give more diffraction spreading in the horizontal plane, broadcasting "important" information to the troops, instead of to the birds in the air and the worms in the ground, as the speaker was mounted in the movie. 1.22 for the resolution of a circular aperture, the pupil of your eye. D Suppose your darkadapted eye has pupil diameter D = 5 mm . An average wavelength for visible light is = 550 nm . Suppose the headlights are 2 m apart and the car is a distance L away. Then 2m = 1.22 1.1 10 4 so L ~ 10 km. The actual distance is less than this because the variablem = L temperature air between you and the car makes the light refract unpredictably. The headlights twinkle like stars. We apply the equation m = Consider incident light nearly parallel to the horizontal ruler. Suppose it scatters from bumps at distance d apart to produce a diffraction pattern on a vertical wall a distance L away. At a y point of height y, where = gives the scattering angle , the L character of the interference is determined by the shift between beams scattered by adjacent bumps, where d =  d . Bright spots appear for = m , where cos 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , .... For small , these equations combine and reduce . Measurement of the heights y m of bright spots 2L2 allows calculation of the wavelength of the light. to m =
2 ym d
Q38.8
Q38.9
y
d L
FIG. Q38.9
Chapter 38
409
Q38.10
Yes, but no diffraction effects are observed because the separation distance between adjacent ribs is so much greater than the wavelength of xrays. Diffraction does not limit the resolution of an xray image. Diffraction might sometimes limit the resolution of an ultrasonogram. Vertical. Glare, as usually encountered when driving or boating, is horizontally polarized. Reflected light is polarized in the same plane as the reflecting surface. As unpolarized light hits a shiny horizontal surface, the atoms on the surface absorb and then reemit the light energy as a reflection. We can model the surface as containing conduction electrons free to vibrate easily along the surface, but not to move easily out of surface. The light emitted from a vibrating electron is partially or completely polarized along the plane of vibration, thus horizontally. The earth has an atmosphere, while the moon does not. The nitrogen and oxygen molecules in the earth's atmosphere are of the right size to scatter shortwavelength (blue) light especially well, while there is nothing surrounding the moon to scatter light. The little particles of dust diffusely reflect light from the light beam. Note that this is not necessarily scattering. Scattering is a resonance phenomenonas when the O 2 and N 2 molecules in our atmosphere scatter blue light more than red. In general, light is visible when it enters your eye. Your eyes and brain are well prepared to make you think on a subconscious level that you can `see' where light is coming from or sometimes `see' light going past you, but really you see only light entering your eye. Light from the sky is partially polarized. Light from the blue sky that is polarized at 90 to the polarization axis of the glasses will be blocked, making the sky look darker as compared to the clouds. First think about the glass without a coin and about one particular point P on the screen. We can divide up the area of the glass into ringshaped zones centered on the line joining P and the light source, with successive zones contributing alternately inphase and outofphase with the light that takes the straightline path to P. These Fresnel zones have nearly equal areas. An outer zone contributes only slightly less to the total wave disturbance at P than does the central circular zone. Now insert the coin. If P is in line with its center, the coin will block off the light from some particular number of zones. The first unblocked zone around its circumference will send light to P with significant amplitude. Zones farther out will predominantly interfere destructively with each other, and the Arago spot is bright. Slightly off the axis there is nearly complete destructive interference, so most of the geometrical shadow is dark. A bug on the screen crawling out past the edge of the geometrical shadow would in effect see the central few zones coming out of eclipse. As the light from them interferes alternately constructively and destructively, the bug moves through bright and dark fringes on the screen. The diffraction pattern is shown in Figure 38.3 in the text. Since obsidian glass is opaque, a standard method of measuring incidence and refraction angles and using Snell's Law is ineffective. Reflect unpolarized light from the horizontal surface of the obsidian through a vertically polarized filter. Change the angle of incidence until you observe that none of the reflected light is transmitted through the filter. This means that the reflected light is completely horizontally polarized, and that the incidence and reflection angles are the polarization angle. The tangent of the polarization angle is the index of refraction of the obsidian.
Q38.11
Q38.12
Q38.13
Q38.14
Q38.15
Q38.16
410 Q38.17
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
The fine hair blocks off light that would otherwise go through a fine slit and produce a diffraction pattern on a distant screen. The width of the central maximum in the pattern is inversely proportional to the distance across the slit. When the hair is in place, it subtracts the same diffraction pattern from the projected disk of laser light. The hair produces a diffraction minimum that crosses the bright circle on the screen. The width of the minimum is inversely proportional to the diameter of the hair. The central minimum is flanked by narrower maxima and minima. Measure the width 2y y of the central minimum between the maxima bracketing it, and use Equation 38.1 in the form = L a to find the width a of the hair. The condition for constructive interference is that the three radio signals arrive at the city in phase. We know the speed of the waves (it is the speed of light c), the angular bearing of the city east of north from the broadcast site, and the distance d between adjacent towers. The wave from the westernmost tower must travel an extra distance 2d sin to reach the city, compared to the signal from the eastern tower. For each cycle of the carrier wave, the western antenna would transmit first, d sin , and the eastern antenna after an additional equal time the center antenna after a time delay c delay.
Q38.18
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 38.1 Section 38.2 P38.1 Introduction to Diffraction Patterns Diffraction Patterns from Narrow Slits
sin =
6.328 10 7 = = 2.11 10 3 4 a 3.00 10
y = tan sin = (for small ) 1.00 m
2 y = 4.22 mm
P38.2 The positions of the firstorder minima are minima is y = 2 y sin = . Thus, the spacing between these two L a
FG IJ L and the wavelength is H aK F y I F a I F 4.10 10 m IJ FG 0.550 10 m IJ = = G JG J = G H 2 K H L K H 2 K H 2.06 m K
3 3
547 nm .
P38.3
y m sin = L a
y = 3.00 10 3 nm
and a= mL y 2 690 10 9 m 0.500 m
m = 3  1 = 2
a=
e
e3.00 10
ja
3
m
j
f=
2.30 10 4 m
Chapter 38
411
P38.4
For destructive interference, sin = m and
5.00 cm = = = 0.139 a a 36.0 cm
= 7.98
d = tan L
gives
d = L tan = 6.50 m tan 7.98 = 0.912 m
a
f
d = 91.2 cm .
P38.5 If the speed of sound is 340 m/s, Diffraction minima occur at angles described by
=
v 340 m s = = 0.523 m . f 650 s 1
a1.10 mf sin a1.10 mf sin a1.10 mf sin a1.10 mf sin
1 2 3
= 1 0.523 m
a f = 2a0.523 mf = 3a0.523 mf a
a sin = m
1 = 28.4 2 = 72.0 3 nonexistent
Maxima appear straight ahead at 0 and left and right at an angle given approximately by
x
= 1.5 0.523 m
f
x 46 .
There is no solution to a sin = 2.5 , so our answer is already complete, with three sound maxima. P38.6 (a) sin = y m = L a
Therefore, for first minimum, m = 1 and L= 7.50 10 4 m 8.50 10 4 m ay = = 1.09 m . m 1 587.5 10 9 m
e
a fe
je
j
j
(b)
w = 2 y1 yields y1 = 0.850 mm w = 2 0.850 10 3 m = 1.70 mm
e
j
412 *P38.7
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
The rectangular patch on the wall is wider than it is tall. The aperture will be taller than it is wide. For horizontal spreading we have tan width = y width 0.110 m 2 = = 0.012 2 L 4.5 m a width sin width = 1 a width = 632.8 10 9 m = 5.18 10 5 m 0.012 2
For vertical spreading, similarly tan height = a height 0.006 m 2 = 0.000 667 4.5 m 1 632.8 10 9 m = = = 9.49 10 4 m 0.000 667 sin h
P38.8
Equation 38.1 states that sin =
for destructive interference. When the 2 source rays approach the slit at an angle , there is a distance added a to the path difference (of ray 1 compared to ray 3) of sin Then, 2 for destructive interference,
distance must be equal to
m , where m = 1, 2 , 3 , .... The a requirement for m = 1 is from an analysis of the extra path distance traveled by ray 1 compared to ray 3 in Figure 38.5. This extra
FIG. P38.8
a a sin + sin = so sin =  sin . 2 2 2 a
Dividing the slit into 4 parts leads to the 2nd order minimum: Dividing the slit into 6 parts gives the third order minimum: Generalizing, we obtain the condition for the mth order minimum: y 4.10 10 3 m = 1.20 m L 2  sin . a 3  sin . sin = a m  sin . sin = a sin =
P38.9
sin
4 a sin 4.00 10 m = = 2 546.1 10 9 m
e
I I max
=
LM sinb 2g OP NM 2 QP
2
j F 4.10 10 m I = 7.86 rad GH 1.20 m JK L sina7.86f OP = 1.62 10 =M N 7.86 Q
3 2 2
Chapter 38
413
38.10
(a)
Doubleslit interference maxima are at angles given by d sin = m . For m = 0 ,
0 = 0 .
For m = 1 , 2.80 m sin = 1 0.501 5 m : 1 = sin 1 0.179 = 10.3 . Similarly, for m = 2 , 3 , 4, 5 and 6,
b
g
b
g
a
f
2 = 21.0 , 3 = 32.5 , 4 = 45.8 , 5 = 63.6 , and 6 = sin 1 1.07 = nonexistent.
a f
Thus, there are 5 + 5 + 1 = 11 directions for interference maxima . (b) We check for missing orders by looking for singleslit diffraction minima, at a sin = m . For m = 1 ,
b0.700 mg sin = 1b0.501 5 mg
and
1 = 45.8 .
Thus, there is no bright fringe at this angle. There are only nine bright fringes , at
= 0 , 10.3 , 21.0 , 32.5 , and 63.6 .
(c)
I = I max
LM sinb a sin g OP MN sin PQ
2
At = 0 , At = 10.3 ,
sin
1 and
I I max
1.00 .
a sin 0.700 m sin 10.3 = = 0.785 rad = 45.0 0.501 5 m
I I max =
b
g
LM sin 45.0 OP N 0.785 Q
2
= 0.811 .
Similarly, at = 21.0 , At = 32.5 , At = 63.6 ,
a sin I = 0.405 . = 1.57 rad = 90.0 and I max a sin I = 0.090 1 . = 2.36 rad = 135 and I max a sin I = 0.032 4 . = 3.93 rad = 225 and I max
Section 38.3 P38.11
Resolution of SingleSlit and Circular Apertures
sin =
5.00 10 7 m = = 1.00 10 3 rad a 5.00 10 4
414 P38.12
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
min =
y = 1.22 L D
7
a1.22fe5.00 10 jb0.030 0g = y=
7.00 10 3 P38.13
2.61 m
y = radius of starimage L = length of eye = 500 nm D = pupil diameter = half angle
Undergoing diffraction from a circular opening, the beam spreads into a cone of halfangle
min = 1.22
632.8 10 9 m = 1.54 10 4 rad . = 1.22 D 0.005 00 m
F GH
I JK
The radius of the beam ten kilometers away is, from the definition of radian measure, rbeam = min 1.00 10 4 m = 1.544 m and its diameter is d beam = 2rbeam = 3.09 m . *P38.14 When you are at the maximum range, the elves' eyes will be resolved by Rayleigh's criterion:
e
j
d = min = 1.22 L D 0.100 m 660 10 9 m = 1.22 = 1.15 10 4 3 L 7 10 m 0.1 m = 869 m L= 1.15 10 4
*P38.15 By Rayleigh's criterion: min =
d = 1.22 , where min is the smallest angular separation of two L D objects for which they are resolved by an aperture of diameter D, d is the separation of the two objects, and L is the maximum distance of the aperture from the two objects at which they can be resolved. Two objects can be resolved if their angular separation is greater than min . Thus, min should be as small as possible. Therefore, the smaller of the two given wavelengths is easier to resolve, i.e. violet .
L= 5.20 10 3 m 2.80 10 2 m 1.193 10 4 m 2 Dd = = 1. 22 1.22
e
je
j
Thus L = 186 m for = 640 nm , and L = 271 m for = 440 nm . The viewer can resolve adjacent tubes of violet in the range 186 m to 271 m , but cannot resolve adjacent tubes of red in this range.
P38.16
min = 1.22
d = D L
1.22
F 5.80 10 GH 4.00 10
7 3
I = d FG 1 mi IJ J m K 1.80 mi H 1 609 m K
m
d = 0.512 m
The shortening of the wavelength inside the patriot's eye does not change the answer.
Chapter 38
415
P38.17
By Rayleigh's criterion, two dots separated centertocenter by 2.00 mm would overlap when Thus,
min =
L=
d = 1.22 . L D
2.00 10 3 m 4.00 10 3 m dD = = 13.1 m . 1.22 1.22 500 10 9 m
e
e
je
j
j
P38.18 *P38.19
D = 1.22
min
=
1.22 5.00 10 7 1.00 10
5
e
j m=
6.10 cm
The concave mirror of the spy satellite is probably about 2 m in diameter, and is surely not more than 5 m in diameter. That is the size of the largest piece of glass successfully cast to a precise shape, for the mirror of the Hale telescope on Mount Palomar. If the spy satellite had a larger mirror, its manufacture could not be kept secret, and it would be visible from the ground. Outer space is probably closer than your state capitol, but the satellite is surely above 200km altitude, for reasonably low air friction. We find the distance between barely resolvable objects at a distance of 200 km, seen in yellow light through a 5m aperture: y = 1.22 L D
y = 200 000 m 1.22
b
ga fFGH 6 10m m IJK = 3 cm 5
7
(Considering atmospheric seeing caused by variations in air density and temperature, the distance between barely resolvable objects is more like 200 000 m 1 s
b
ga
1 rad fFGH 3 600 s IJK FGH 180 IJK = 97 cm .) Thus the
snooping spy satellite cannot see the difference between III and II or IV on a license plate. It cannot count coins spilled on a sidewalk, much less read the date on them. P38.20 1.22
D
=
d L
=
c = 0.020 0 m f
D = 2.10 m
d = 1.22 2.10 m
L = 9 000 m
105 m
b0.020 0 mgb9 000 mg =
D = 1.22
P38.21
min = 1.22
a2.00 mf = a10.0 mf
0.244 rad = 14.0
P38.22
L = 88.6 10 9 m , D = 0.300 m , = 590 10 9 m
(a) (b) 1.22
D
= min = 2.40 10 6 rad
d = min L = 213 km
416
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
Section 38.4 P38.23 d=
The Diffraction Grating 1.00 cm 1.00 10 2 m = = 5.00 m 2 000 2 000
9 m 1 640 10 m = = 0.128 sin = d 5.00 10 6 m
e
j
= 7.35
P38.24
The principal maxima are defined by d sin = m For m = 1 ,
m = 0 , 1, 2 , ... .
= d sin
0.488 m
where is the angle between the central ( m = 0 ) and the first order ( m = 1 ) maxima. The value of can be determined from the information given about the distance between maxima and the gratingtoscreen distance. From the figure, tan = so and 0.488 m = 0.284 1.72 m
1.72 m
FIG. P38.24
= 15.8
sin = 0.273 .
The distance between grating "slits" equals the reciprocal of the number of grating lines per centimeter d= The wavelength is 1 5 310 cm 1 = 1.88 10 4 cm = 1.88 10 3 nm .
= d sin = 1.88 10 3 nm 0.273 = 514 nm .
d= 1.00 10 2 m = 2.22 10 6 m . 4 500 656 10 9 m = 0.295 2.22 10 6 m 434 10 9 m 2.22 10 6 m
e
ja
f
P38.25
The grating spacing is
In the 1storder spectrum, diffraction angles are given by sin =
: d
sin 1 =
so that for red and for violet so that
1 = 17.17
sin 2 = = 0.195
FIG. P38.25
2 = 11.26 .
= 17.1711.26 = 5.91 .
= sin 1 = sin 1
The angular separation is in firstorder, In the secondorder spectrum, Again, in the third order,
FG 2 Hd FG 3 Hd
1
1
IJ  sin K IJ  sin K
1
1
FG 2 Hd FG 3 Hd
2
2
IJ = K IJ = K
13.2 . 26.5 .
Since the red does not appear in the fourthorder spectrum, the answer is complete.
Chapter 38
417
P38.26
sin = 0.350 :
d=
sin
=
632.8 nm = 1.81 10 3 nm 0.350
Line spacing = 1.81 m P38.27 (a) d= 1 = 2.732 10 4 cm = 2.732 10 6 m = 2 732 nm 3 660 lines cm d sin : m At = 10.09 At = 13.71 , At = 14.77 , (b) d=
=
= 478.7 nm = 647.6 nm = 696.6 nm
so sin 2 = 2 2 = = 2 sin 1 . d sin 1
sin 1
and
2 = d sin 2
Therefore, if 1 = 10.09 then sin 2 = 2 sin 10.09 gives 2 = 20.51 . Similarly, for 1 = 13.71 , 2 = 28.30 P38.28 sin = m d and for 1 = 14.77 , 2 = 30.66 .
a
f
Therefore, taking the ends of the visible spectrum to be v = 400 nm and r = 750 nm , the ends the different order spectra are: End of second order: Start of third order: sin 2 r = sin 3 v = 2 r 1 500 nm = . d d 3 v 1 200 nm = . d d
Thus, it is seen that 2 r > 3 v and these orders must overlap regardless of the value of the grating spacing d. P38.29 (a) From Equation 38.12, R = Nm where In the 1st order, In the 2nd order, In the 3rd order, (b) From Equation 38.11, In the 3rd order,
f b ga R = a1fe1.20 10 linesj = 1.20 10 R = a 2fe1.20 10 linesj = 2.40 10 R = a3fe1.20 10 linesj = 3.60 10
4 4 4
N = 3 000 lines cm 4.00 cm = 1.20 10 4 lines .
4
. . .
4
4
R=
:
400 nm = = 0.011 1 nm = 11.1 pm . R 3.60 10 4
=
418 * P38.30
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
For a side maximum,
tan =
y 0.4 m = L 6.9 m
9
= 3.32
d sin = m
a1fe780 10 d=
m
sin 3.32
j = 13.5 m.
FIG. P38.30
The number of grooves per millimeter =
1 10 3 m = 74. 2 . 13.5 10 6 m
P38.31
(a)
Nm =
N1 =
af
531.7 nm = 2 800 0.19 nm
(b)
1.32 10 2 m = 4.72 m 2 800 1 = 2.38 10 6 m = 2 380 nm . 4 200 cm or
P38.32
d=
d sin = m
= sin 1
Thus,
For m = 1 ,
For m = 2 ,
For m = 3 ,
FG m IJ and y = L tan = L tanLMsin FG m IJ OP . HdK N H d KQ R L F m IJ O  tanLsin FG m IJ OU . y = L Stan Msin G T N H d K PQ MN H d K PQV W R L F 589.6 I O  tanLsin F 589 I OU = 0.554 mm .   y = a 2.00 mfStan Msin G H 2 380 JK PQP MNM GH 2 380 JK PQPV   T NM W R L F 2a589.6f I O  tanLsin F 2a589f I OU = 1.54 mm .  y = a 2.00 mfStan Msin G V JK PPQ MMN GH 2 380 JK PPQ  MN H 2 380  T W R L F 3a589.6f I O  tanLsin F 3a589f I OU = 5.04 mm .   y = a 2.00 mfStan Msin G H 2 380 JK PQP MNM GH 2 380 JK PQPV  NM  T W
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Thus, the observed order must be m = 2 .
Chapter 38
419
P38.33
d= (a)
1.00 10 3 m mm = 4.00 10 6 m = 4 000 nm 250 lines mm
d sin = m m =
d sin
The number of times a complete order is seen is the same as the number of orders in which the long wavelength limit is visible. m max = or d sin max
=
b4 000 nmg sin 90.0 = 5.71
700 nm
5 orders is the maximum .
(b)
The highest order in which the violet end of the spectrum can be seen is: m max = or d sin max
=
b4 000 nmg sin 90.0 = 10.0
400 nm
10 orders in the shortwavelength region .
*P38.34
(a)
The several narrow parallel slits make a diffraction grating. The zeroth and first order maxima are separated according to d sin = 1
af
sin =
632.8 10 9 m = d 1.2 10 3 m
= sin 1 0.000 527 = 0.000 527 rad
y = L tan = 1.40 m 0.000 527 = 0.738 mm .
(b)
b
g
a
fb
g
FIG. P38.34
Many equally spaced transparent lines appear on the film. It is itself a diffraction grating. When the same light is sent through the film, it produces interference maxima separated according to d sin = 1
af
sin =
y = L tan = 1.40 m 0.000 857 = 1.20 mm
An image of the original set of slits appears on the screen. If the screen is removed, light diverges from the real images with the same wave fronts reconstructed as the original slits produced. Reasoning from the mathematics of Fourier transforms, Gabor showed that light diverging from any object, not just a set of slits, could be used. In the picture, the slits or maxima on the left are separated by 1.20 mm. The slits or maxima on the right are separated by 0.738 mm. The length difference between any pair of lines is an integer number of wavelengths. Light can be sent through equally well toward the right or toward the left.
a
fb
g
632.8 10 9 m = = 0.000 857 d 0.738 10 3 m
Section 38.5 P38.35
Diffraction of XRays by Crystals
2d sin = m :
=
9 2d sin 2 0.353 10 m sin 7.60 = = 9.34 10 11 m = 0.093 4 nm m 1
e
j
420 P38.36
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
2d sin = m d =
1 0.129 nm m = = 0.455 nm 2 sin 2 sin 8.15
a fa
a
f
f
P38.37
2d sin = m : and
sin =
9 m 1 0.140 10 m = = 0.249 2d 2 0.281 10 9 m
e e
j j
= 14.4
sin 12.6 = 1 = 0.218 2d
P38.38
m : 2d 2 sin 2 = = 2 0.218 so 2d Three other orders appear: sin m =
a
f
2 = 25.9
3 = sin 1 3 0.218 = 40.9
4 = sin 1 5 = sin 1
a f a4 0.218f = 60.8 a5 0.218f = nonexistent
P38.39
Figure 38.27 of the text shows the situation. 2d sin or = 2d sin = m m 2 2.80 m sin 80.0 m=1: = 5.51 m 1 = 1 2 2.80 m sin 80.0 m=2: = 2.76 m 2 = 2 2 2.80 m sin 80.0 = 1.84 m 3 = m=3 : 3
a a a
f f f
Section 38.6 P38.40
Polarization of Light Waves 1 the 2
The average value of the cosinesquared function is onehalf, so the first polarizer transmits light. The second transmits cos 2 30.0 = If = 1 3 3 Ii = Ii 2 4 8 3 . 4
P38.41
I = I max cos 2
1 I = I max 3.00 1 I = I max 5.00 I I max = 1 10.0
= cos 1
I I max 1 = 54.7 3.00 1 = 63.4 5.00 1 = 71.6 10.0
(a)
= cos 1
(b)
= cos 1
(c)
= cos 1
Chapter 38
421
P38.42
(a)
1 = 20.0 , 2 = 40.0 , 3 = 60.0
I f = I i cos 2 1  0 cos 2 2  1 cos 2 3  2 If
2 2 2
g b g = a10.0 unitsf cos a 20.0f cos a 20.0f cos a 20.0f
= 6.89 units
b
g
b
(b)
1 = 0 , 2 = 30.0 , 3 = 60.0
I f = 10.0 units cos 0 cos 30.0 cos 30.0 = 5.63 units
P38.43 *P38.44 By Brewster's law, (a)
a
f
2
a f
2
a
f
2
a
f
FIG. P38.42
n = tan p = tan 48.0 = 1.11 .
a
f
At incidence, n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 and 1 = 1 . For complete polarization of the reflected light,
b90  g + b90  g = 90
1 2
1 1'
n1 n2
1 + 2 = 90 = 1 + 2
sin 1 n 2 = = tan 1 cos 1 n1
Then n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 90  1 = n 2 cos 1
b
g
3 3' 2
n1
At the bottom surface, 3 = 2 because the normals to the surfaces of entry and exit are parallel. Then n 2 sin 3 = n1 sin 4 n 2 sin 2 = n1 sin 4 90  + 90  4 = 90 3 and and
4
FIG. P38.44(a)
=3 3 4 = 1
The condition for complete polarization of the reflected light is
2 + 1 = 90
This is the same as the condition for 1 to be Brewster's angle at the top surface. (b) We consider light moving in a plane perpendicular to the line where the surfaces of the prism meet at the unknown angle . We require n1 sin 1 = n 2 sin 2 n1 n2 n3 n1 = tan 2 n2
1 1 2
1 + 2 = 90
3
So n1 sin 90  2 = n 2 sin 2 And n 2 sin 3 = n 3 sin 4 n 2 sin 3 = n 3 cos 3
b
g
3
3 + 4 = 90 n tan 3 = 3 n2
4
FIG. P38.44(b)
In the triangle made by the faces of the prism and the ray in the prism, + 90 + 2 + 90  3 = 180 . So one particular apex angle is required, and it is = 3  2 = tan 1
b
g
FG n IJ  tan FG n IJ Hn K Hn K
3 1 1 2 2
.
Here a negative result is to be interpreted as meaning the same as a positive result.
422 P38.45
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
sin c =
1 n
or Thus,
n=
1 1 = = 1.77 . sin c sin 34.4
Also, tan p = n . P38.46 sin c =
p = tan 1 n = tan 1 1.77 = 60.5 .
af
a f
1 and tan p = n n 1 or cot p = sin c . tan p
Thus, sin c = P38.47
Complete polarization occurs at Brewster's angle Thus, the Moon is 36.9 above the horizon.
tan p = 1.33
p = 53.1 .
Additional Problems P38.48 For incident unpolarized light of intensity I max : After transmitting 1st disk: After transmitting 2nd disk: After transmitting 3rd disk: I= I= I= 1 I max . 2 1 I max cos 2 . 2 1 I max cos 2 cos 2 90 . 2
a
f
FIG. P38.48
where the angle between the first and second disk is = t . Using trigonometric identities cos 2 = and we have 1 1 + cos 2 2
a
f
cos 2 90 = sin 2 = I= I= 1 I max 2 1 I max 8
a
1 f a1  cos 2 f 2 LM a1 + cos 2 f OPLM a1  cos 2 f OP N 2 QN 2 Q e1  cos 2 j = 1 I FGH 1 IJK a1  cos 4 f . 8 2
2 max
Since = t , the intensity of the emerging beam is given by I =
1 I max 1  4 t 16
b
g
.
Chapter 38
423
P38.49
Let the first sheet have its axis at angle to the original plane of polarization, and let each further sheet have its axis turned by the same angle. The first sheet passes intensity The second sheet passes and the nth sheet lets through Try different integers to find (a) (b) So n = 6
I max cos 2 . I max cos 4 I max cos 2n 0.90 I max
cos 2 5 where = cos 2 6 45 . n
FG 45 IJ = 0.885 H5K
FG 45 IJ = 0.902 . H6K
= 7.50
P38.50
Consider vocal sound moving at 340 m/s and of frequency 3 000 Hz. Its wavelength is
=
v 340 m s = = 0.113 m . f 3 000 Hz
If your mouth, for horizontal dispersion, behaves similarly to a slit 6.00 cm wide, then a sin = m predicts no diffraction minima. You are a nearly isotropic source of this sound. It spreads out from you nearly equally in all directions. On the other hand, if you use a megaphone with width 60.0 cm at its wide end, then a sin = m predicts the first diffraction minimum at
= sin 1
FG m IJ = sin FG 0.113 m IJ = 10.9 . H 0.600 m K HaK
1
This suggests that the sound is radiated mostly toward the front into a diverging beam of angular diameter only about 20. With less sound energy wasted in other directions, more is available for your intended auditors. We could check that a distant observer to the side or behind you receives less sound when a megaphone is used. P38.51 The first minimum is at This has no solution if or if a sin = 1 .
af
>1. a
a < = 632.8 nm .
P38.52
x = 1.22
5.00 10 7 m D = 1.22 250 10 3 m = 30.5 m d 5.00 10 3 m
F GH
Ie JK
j
D = 250 10 3 m
= 5.00 10 7 m
d = 5.00 10 3 m
424 P38.53
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
d=
1 400 mm
1
= 2.50 10 6 m
(a)
d sin = m 541 10 9 m = 4.07 10 7 m 1.33
a = sin 1
(b)
=
b = sin 1
F 2 541 10 m I = 25.6 GH 2.50 10 m JK F 2 4.07 10 m I = 19.0 GH 2.50 10 m JK
9 6 7 6
(c)
d sin a = 2
d sin b =
n sin b = 1 sin a P38.54 (a)
af
2 n
=
v : f
=
3.00 10 8 m s 1.40 10 9 s 1
= 0.214 m
min = 1.22
0.214 m = 7.26 rad : min = 1.22 D 3.60 10 4 m
min = 7.26 rad
(b)
FG 180 60 60 s IJ = H K
9
FG H
IJ K
1.50 arc seconds
(c) (d) P38.55
g e jb F 500 10 m I = 50.8 rad a10.5 seconds of arcf = 1.22 = 1.22G D H 12.0 10 m JK d = L = e50.8 10 radja30.0 mf = 1.52 10 m = 1.52 mm
min =
d : L d = min L = 7.26 10 6 rad 26 000 ly = 0.189 ly
min min 3 min 6 3
With a grazing angle of 36.0, the angle of incidence is 54.0
tan p = n = tan 54.0 = 1.38 .
In the liquid, n = *P38.56 (a)
n
=
750 nm = 545 nm . 1.38
Bragg's law applies to the space lattice of melanin rods. Consider the planes d = 0.25 m apart. For light at nearnormal incidence, strong reflection happens for the wavelength given by 2d sin = m . The longest wavelength reflected strongly corresponds to m = 1: 2 0.25 10 6 m sin 90 = 1
e
j
= 500 nm . This is the bluegreen color.
(b)
For light incident at grazing angle 60, 2d sin = m gives 1 = 2 0.25 10 6 m sin 60 = 433 nm . This is violet.
e
j
(c)
Your two eyes receive light reflected from the feather at different angles, so they receive light incident at different angles and containing different colors reinforced by constructive interference.
continued on next page
Chapter 38
425
(d) (e)
The longest wavelength that can be reflected with extra strength by these melanin rods is the one we computed first, 500 nm bluegreen. If the melanin rods were farther apart (say 0.32 m ) they could reflect red with constructive interference. d sin = m or d = 3 500 10 9 m m = = 2.83 m sin sin 32.0 1 1 = d 2.83 10 6 m
P38.57
(a)
e
j
Therefore, lines per unit length =
or lines per unit length = 3.53 10 5 m 1 = 3.53 10 3 cm 1 .
9 m m 500 10 m = = m 0.177 d 2.83 10 6 m
(b)
sin =
e
j a
f
m 0.177 1.00 m 5.66 .
For sin 1.00 , we must have or Therefore, the highest order observed is Total number of primary maxima observed is P38.58 For the airtowater interface, tan p = and n water 1.33 = 1.00 n air
p 2
a
f
m=5 . 2m + 1 = 11 .
p = 53.1
p 2 3
Air Water
a1.00f sin = a1.33f sin F sin 53.1 IJ = 36.9 . = sin G H 1.33 K
2 1
For the watertoglass interface, tan p = tan 3 =
n glass n water
=
1.50 so 1.33
FIG. P38.58
3 = 48.4 .
The angle between surfaces is = 3  2 = 11.5 . *P38.59 A central maximum and side maxima in seven orders of interference appear. If the seventh order is just at 90,
d sin = m
d1 = 7 654 10 9 m
e
j
d = 4.58 m .
If the seventh order is at less than 90, the eighth order might be nearly ready to appear according to d1 = 8 654 10 9 m
e
j
d = 5.23 m . FIG. P38.59
Thus 4.58 m < d < 5.23 m .
426 P38.60
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
(a)
We require Then
min = 1.22
D
=
radius of diffraction disk D = . L 2L
D 2 = 2.44L .
(b)
D = 2.44 500 10 9 m 0.150 m = 428 m 550 10 9 m = 1.22 = 1.22 = 1.34 10 4 rad . D 5.00 10 3 m
e
ja
f
P38.61
The limiting resolution between lines min
e e
j j
Assuming a picture screen with vertical dimension , the minimum viewing distance for no visible 485 . The desired ratio is then lines is found from min = L L = 1 1 = = 15.4 . 485 min 485 1.34 10 4 rad
e
j
P38.62
(a)
Applying Snell's law gives n 2 sin = n1 sin . From the sketch, we also see that:
+ + = , or =  + .
Using the given identity: which reduces to: Applying the identity again: Snell's law then becomes: or (after dividing by cos ): Solving for tan gives: (b)
b
g
b g sin = sinb + g .
sin = sin cos +  cos sin + ,
b
g
FIG. P38.62(a)
sin = sin cos + cos sin .
b g n btan cos + sin g = n tan .
2 1
n 2 sin cos + cos sin = n1 sin
tan =
n 2 sin . n1  n 2 cos
If = 90.0 , n1 = 1.00 , and n 2 = n , the above result becomes: tan = n 1.00 , or n = tan , which is Brewster's law. 1.00  0
a f
P38.63
(a)
From Equation 38.1, In this case m = 1 and Thus,
= sin 1 =
FG m IJ . HaK F 4.00 10 GH 6.00 10
2 2
8 c 3.00 10 m s = = 4.00 10 2 m . 9 f 7.50 10 Hz
= sin 1
I= J mK
m
41.8 .
continued on next page
Chapter 38
427
(b)
From Equation 38.4,
When = 15.0 , and
L sinb 2g OP where = 2 a sin . =M I NM 2 QP 2 b0.060 0 mg sin 15.0 = = 2.44 rad
I
2 max
I I max
L sina1.22 radf OP =M N 1.22 rad Q
0.040 0 m
2
= 0.593 .
(c)
sin =
so = 41.8 : a
This is the minimum angle subtended by the two sources at the slit. Let be the half angle between the sources, each a distance = 0.100 m from the center line and a distance L from the slit plane. Then, 41.8 = 0.262 m . L = cot = 0.100 m cot 2
a
f FGH
j
IJ K
FIG. P38.63(c)
P38.64 P38.65
I 1 1 = cos 2 45.0 cos 2 45.0 = I max 2 8
e
je
d sin = m and, differentiating, or
d cos d = md d 1  sin 2 m d 1 m 2 2 m d2
a
f
so
e
d
2
m 2  2
j
.
*P38.66
(a)
The angles of bright beams diffracted from the grating are given by d sin = m . The d d m d =m = angular dispersion is defined as the derivative : d cos d d d cos d
af
af
(b)
For the average wavelength 578 nm,
d sin = m
0.02 m sin = 2 578 10 9 m 8 000
e
j
= sin 1
2 578 10 9 m = 27.5 2.5 10 6 m
The separation angle between the lines is = d m 2 = = 2.11 10 9 m 6 d d cos 2.5 10 m cos 27.5 180 = 0.109 = 0.001 90 = 0.001 90 rad = 0.001 90 rad rad
FG H
IJ K
428 *P38.67
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
(a)
Constructive interference of light of wavelength on the screen is described by d sin = m 1 2 y y = m . Differentiating with where tan = so sin = . Then d y L2 + y 2 2 2 L L +y
afe
j
respect to y gives d1 L2 + y 2
a f FGH 1 IJK eL + y j b0 + 2yg = m d 2 dy adfy = m d = adfL + adfy  adfy d  dy eL + y j e L + y j eL + y j adfL d = dy m L + y e j e j
1 2
+ d y 
2
2
2 3 2
2
2
2
2
2 12
2
2 3 2
2
2 32
2
2
2 3 2
(b)
Here d sin = m gives
10 2 m 0.55 10 6 m sin = 1 550 10 9 m , = sin 1 = 26.1 8 000 1.25 10 6 m
e
j
F GH
I JK
y = L tan = 2. 40 m tan 26.1 = 1.18 m Now d dL2 = dy m L2 + y 2
e
j
32
=
f 1ea 2.4 mf + a1.18 mf j
1.25 10 6 m 2.40 m
2
a
2
2 32
= 3.77 10 7 = 3.77 nm cm .
P38.68
For a diffraction grating, the locations of the principal maxima for wavelength are given by a m y where a is the width of the grating . The grating spacing may be expressed as d = sin = N d L NLm and N is the number of slits. Thus, the screen locations of the maxima become y = . If two a nearly equal wavelengths are present, the difference in the screen locations of corresponding maxima is y = NLm a
b g.
y , or a L
For a single slit of width a, the location of the first diffraction minimum is sin = y=
FG L IJ . If the two wavelengths are to be just resolved by Rayleigh's criterion, y = y from above. H aK
or the resolving power of the grating is R
Therefore,
FG L IJ = NLmb g H aK a
= Nm .
Chapter 38
429
P38.69
(a)
The E and O rays, in phase at the surface of the plate, will have a phase difference
=
FG 2 IJ HK
after traveling distance d through the plate. Here is the difference in the optical path lengths of these rays. The optical path length between two points is the product of the actual path length d and the index of refraction. Therefore,
= dnO  dn E .
The absolute value is used since nO may be more or less than unity. Therefore, nE  nE .
=
FG 2 IJ dn HK
O
 dn E =
FG 2 IJ d n HK
O
(b)
550 10 9 m 2 d= = = 1.53 10 5 m = 15.3 m 2 nO  n E 2 1.544  1.553 I I max
e
jb g
P38.70
(a)
From Equation 38.4,
If we define Therefore, when
2
this becomes we must have
I I max sin
L sinb 2g OP =M NM 2 QP L sin OP . =M N Q
2
2
.
1 I = I max 2
=
1 2
, or sin =
. 2
(b)
Let y1 = sin and y 2 =
. 2 is shown to 2
A plot of y1 and y 2 in the range 1.00 the right.
The solution to the transcendental equation is found to be = 1.39 rad . (c)
FIG. P38.70(b)
=
2 a sin
= 2 sin =
gives If
FG IJ = 0.443 . H K a a
is small, then 0. 443 . a a
This gives the halfwidth, measured away from the maximum at = 0 . The pattern is symmetric, so the full width is given by = 0.443
0.886  0.443 = . a a a
FG H
IJ K
430 P38.71
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
1 2 1.5 1.4 1.39 1.395 1.392 1.391 5 1.391 52 1.391 6 1.391 58 1.391 57 1.391 56 1.391 559 1.391 558 1.391 557 1.391 557 4
2 sin 1.19 1.29 1.41 1.394 1.391 1.392 1.391 7 1.391 54 1.391 55 1.391 568 1.391 563 1.391 561 1.391 558 1.391 557 8 1.391 557 5 1.391 557 3 1.391 557 4
bigger than smaller than smaller bigger smaller bigger bigger smaller
We get the answer to seven digits after 17 steps. Clever guessing, like using the value of the next guess for , could reduce this to around 13 steps.
2 sin as
P38.72
b g I LM b 2g cosb 2gb1 2g  sinb 2gb1 2g OP JK M PQ b 2g N FI and require that it be zero. The possibility sinG J = 0 locates all of the minima and the central H 2K
In I = I max
LM sinb 2g OP NM 2 QP
2
find
2 sin 2 dI = I max 2 d
F GH
2
maximum, according to
= 0 , , 2 , ... ; 2
The side maxima are found from This has solutions (a) (b)
=
2 a sin
 sin = 0 , or tan = . cos 2 2 2 2 2 = 4.493 4 , = 7.725 3 , and others, giving 2 2
a sin = 1.430 3 a sin = 2.459 0
FG IJ H K
= 0 , 2 , 4 , ... ; a sin = 0 , , 2 , ... .
FG IJ H K
FG IJ H K
a sin = 4.493 4 a sin = 7.725 3
Chapter 38
431
P38.73
The first minimum in the singleslit diffraction pattern occurs at sin =
y min . a L
Thus, the slit width is given by a=
L . y min
For a minimum located at y min = 6.36 mm 0.08 mm, the width is a=
e632.8 10
9
m 1.00 m
3
ja
6.36 10
m
f=
FIG. P38.73 99.5 m 1% .
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P38.2 P38.4 P38.6 P38.8 P38.10 547 nm 91.2 cm (a) 1.09 m ; (b) 1.70 mm see the solution (a) 0 , 10.3, 21.0 , 32.5 , 45.8, 63.6 ; (b) nine bright fringes at 0 and on either side at 10.3, 21.0 , 32.5 , and 63.6 ; (c) 1.00 , 0.811 , 0.405 , 0.090 1 , 0.032 4 2.61 m 869 m 0.512 m 6.10 cm 105 m (a) 2.40 rad ; (b) 213 km 514 nm 1.81 m see the solution 74.2 grooves/mm 2 P38.56 P38.58 P38.60 P38.62 P38.46 P38.48 P38.50 P38.52 P38.54 P38.34 P38.36 P38.38 P38.40 P38.42 P38.44 (a) 0.738 mm; (b) see the solution 0.455 nm 3 3 8 (a) 6.89 units ; (b) 5.63 units (a) see the solution; (b) For light confined to a plane, yes. tan 1 see the solution see the solution see the solution 30.5 m (a) 1.50 sec; (b) 0.189 ly; (c) 10.5 sec; (d) 1.52 mm see the solution 11.5 (a) see the solution; (b) 428 m see the solution
P38.12 P38.14 P38.16 P38.18 P38.20 P38.22 P38.24 P38.26 P38.28 P38.30 P38.32
FG n IJ  tan FG n IJ Hn K Hn K
3 1 1 2 2
432 P38.64 P38.66 P38.68
Diffraction Patterns and Polarization
1 8 (a) see the solution; (b) 0.109 see the solution
P38.70
(a) see the solution; (b) = 1.39 rad; (c) see the solution (a) a sin = 1.430 3 ; (b) a sin = 2.459 0
P38.72
39
Relativity
CHAPTER OUTLINE
The Principle of Galilean Relativity 39.2 The MichelsonMorley Experiment 39.3 Einstein's Principle of Relativity 39.4 Consequences of the Special Theory of Relativity 39.5 The Lorentz Transformation Equations 39.6 The Lorentz Velocity Transformation Equations 39.7 Relativistic Linear Momentum and the Relativistic Form of Newton's Laws 39.8 Relativistic Energy 39.9 Mass and Energy 39.10 The General Theory of Relativity 39.1
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q39.1 Q39.2 Q39.3 The speed of light c and the speed v of their relative motion. An ellipsoid. The dimension in the direction of motion would be measured to be scrunched in. No. The principle of relativity implies that nothing can travel faster than the speed of light in a vacuum, which is 300 Mm/s. The electron would emit light in a conical shock wave of Cerenkov radiation. The clock in orbit runs slower. No, they are not synchronized. Although they both tick at the same rate after return, a time difference has developed between the two clocks.
Q39.4
Q39.5
Suppose a railroad train is moving past you. One way to measure its length is this: You mark the tracks at the cowcatcher forming the front of the moving engine at 9:00:00 AM, while your assistant marks the tracks at the back of the caboose at the same time. Then you find the distance between the marks on the tracks with a tape measure. You and your assistant must make the marks simultaneously in your frame of reference, for otherwise the motion of the train would make its length different from the distance between marks. (a) (b) (c) Yours does. His does. If the velocity of relative motion is constant, both observers have equally valid views.
Q39.6
Q39.7
Get a Mr. Tompkins book by George Gamow for a wonderful fictional exploration of this question. Driving home in a hurry, you push on the gas pedal not to increase your speed by very much, but rather to make the blocks get shorter. Big Doppler shifts in wave frequencies make red lights look green as you approach them and make car horns and car radios useless. Highspeed transportation is very expensive, requiring huge fuel purchases. And it is dangerous, as a speeding car can knock down a building. Having had breakfast at home, you return hungry for lunch, but you find you have missed dinner. There is a fiveday delay in transmission when you watch the Olympics in Australia on live television. It takes ninetyfive years for sunlight to reach Earth. We cannot see the Milky Way; the fireball of the Big Bang surrounds us at the distance of Rigel or Deneb. Nothing physically unusual. An observer riding on the clock does not think that you are really strange, either. 433
Q39.8
434 Q39.9 Q39.10
Relativity
By a curved line. This can be seen in the middle of Speedo's worldline in Figure 39.12, where he turns around and begins his trip home. According to p = mu , doubling the speed u will make the momentum of an object increase by the factor 2
LM c  u OP N c  4u Q
2 2 2 2
12
.
Q39.11 Q39.12
As the object approaches the speed of light, its kinetic energy grows without limit. It would take an infinite investment of work to accelerate the object to the speed of light. There is no upper limit on the momentum of an electron. As more energy E is fed into the object E without limit, its speed approaches the speed of light and its momentum approaches . c Recall that when a spring of force constant k is compressed or stretched from its relaxed position a 1 distance x, it stores elastic potential energy U = kx 2 . According to the special theory of relativity, 2 any change in the total energy of the system is equivalent to a change in the mass of the system. Therefore, the mass of a compressed or stretched spring is greater than the mass of a relaxed spring U by an amount 2 . The fractional change is typically unobservably small for a mechanical spring. c You see no change in your reflection at any speed you can attain. You cannot attain the speed of light, for that would take an infinite amount of energy. Quasar light moves at three hundred million meters per second, just like the light from a firefly at rest. A photon transports energy. The relativistic equivalence of mass and energy means that is enough to give it momentum. Any physical theory must agree with experimental measurements within some domain. Newtonian mechanics agrees with experiment for objects moving slowly compared to the speed of light. Relativistic mechanics agrees with experiment for objects at all speeds. Thus the two theories must and do agree with each other for ordinary nonrelativistic objects. Both statements given in the question are formally correct, but the first is clumsily phrased. It seems to suggest that relativistic mechanics applies only to fastmoving objects. The point of intersection moves to the right. To state the problem precisely, let us assume that each of the two cards moves toward the other parallel to the long dimension of the picture, with velocity 2v = 2 v cot , where is the of magnitude v. The point of intersection moves to the right at speed tan small angle between the cards. As approaches zero, cot approaches infinity. Thus the point of intersection can move with a speed faster than c if v is sufficiently large and sufficiently small. For example, take v = 500 m s and = 0.000 19 . If you are worried about holding the cards steady enough to be sure of the angle, cut the edge of one card along a curve so that the angle will necessarily be sufficiently small at some place along the edge. Let us assume the spinning flashlight is at the center of a grain elevator, forming a circular screen of radius R. The linear speed of the spot on the screen is given by v = R , where is the angular speed of rotation of the flashlight. With sufficiently large and R, the speed of the spot moving on the screen can exceed c. continued on next page
Q39.13
Q39.14 Q39.15 Q39.16 Q39.17
Q39.18
Chapter 39
435
Neither of these examples violates the principle of relativity. Both cases are describing a point of intersection: in the first case, the intersection of two cards and in the second case, the intersection of a light beam with a screen. A point of intersection is not made of matter so it has no mass, and hence no energy. A bug momentarily at the intersection point could yelp, take a bite out of one card, or reflect the light. None of these actions would result in communication reaching another bug so soon as the intersection point reaches him. The second bug would have to wait for sound or light to travel across the distance between the first bug and himself, to get the message. As a child, the author used an Erector set to build a superluminal speed generator using the intersectingcards method. Can you get a visible dot to run across a computer screen faster than light? Want'a see it again? Q39.19 Q39.20 In this case, both the relativistic and Galilean treatments would yield the same result: it is that the experimentally observed speed of one car with respect to the other is the sum of the speeds of the cars. The hotter object has more energy per molecule than the cooler one. The equivalence of energy and mass predicts that each molecule of the hotter object will, on average, have a larger mass than those in the cooler object. This implies that given the same net applied force, the cooler object would have a larger acceleration than the hotter object would experience. In a controlled experiment, the difference will likely be too small to notice. Special relativity describes inertial reference frames: that is, reference frames that are not accelerating. General relativity describes all reference frames. The downstairs clock runs more slowly because it is closer to the Earth and hence in a stronger gravitational field than the upstairs clock. The ants notice that they have a stronger sense of being pushed outward when they venture closer to the rim of the merrygoround. If they wish, they can call this the effect of a stronger gravitational field produced by some mass concentration toward the edge of the disk. An ant named Albert figures out that the strong gravitational field makes measuring rods contract when they are near the rim of the disk. He shows that this effect precisely accounts for the discrepancy.
Q39.21 Q39.22 Q39.23
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 39.1 P39.1 The Principle of Galilean Relativity
In the rest frame, pi = m1 v1i + m 2 v 2i = 2 000 kg 20.0 m s + 1 500 kg 0 m s = 4.00 10 4 kg m s p f = m1 + m 2 v f = 2 000 kg + 1 500 kg v f Since pi = p f , vf = 4.00 10 4 kg m s = 11.429 m s . 2 000 kg + 1 500 kg
b
g
b
b
gb
g
g b
gb
g
In the moving frame, these velocities are all reduced by +10.0 m/s. v1i = v1i  v = 20.0 m s  +10.0 m s = 10.0 m s v i = v 2i  v = 0 m s  +10.0 m s = 10.0 m s 2 v f = 11.429 m s  +10.0 m s = 1.429 m s Our initial momentum is then
b
b
b
g
g
g
pi = m1 v1i + m 2 v i = 2 000 kg 10.0 m s + 1 500 kg 10.0 m s = 5 000 kg m s 2
and our final momentum is p f = 2 000 kg + 1 500 kg v f = 3 500 kg 1.429 m s = 5 000 kg m s .
b
gb b
g b
gb
g
b
g
gb
g
436 P39.2
Relativity
(a) (b) (c)
v = vT + v B = 60.0 m s
v = vT  v B = 20.0 m s
2 2 v = vT + v B = 20 2 + 40 2 = 44.7 m s
P39.3
The first observer watches some object accelerate under applied forces. Call the instantaneous velocity of the object v 1 . The second observer has constant velocity v 21 relative to the first, and measures the object to have velocity v 2 = v 1  v 21 . The second observer measures an acceleration of dv 2 dv 1 = . dt dt This is the same as that measured by the first observer. In this nonrelativistic case, they measure the same forces as well. Thus, the second observer also confirms that F = ma . a2 =
P39.4
The laboratory observer notes Newton's second law to hold: F1 = ma 1 (where the subscript 1 implies the measurement was made in the laboratory frame of reference). The observer in the accelerating frame measures the acceleration of the mass as a 2 = a 1  a (where the subscript 2 implies the measurement was made in the accelerating frame of reference, and the primed acceleration term is the acceleration of the accelerated frame with respect to the laboratory frame of reference). If Newton's second law held for the accelerating frame, that observer would then find valid the relation F2 = ma 2 or F1 = ma 2
(since F1 = F2 and the mass is unchanged in each). But, instead, the accelerating frame observer will find that F2 = ma 2  ma which is not Newton's second law.
Section 39.2 Section 39.3 Section 39.4
The MichelsonMorley Experiment Einstein's Principle of Relativity Consequences of the Special Theory of Relativity v2 1 2 c Lp 2 where L p = 1.00 m gives
P39.5
L = Lp
v=c
Taking L =
v=c
FLI 1G J HL K F L 2I 1G H L JK
2 p p p
2
= c 1
1 = 0.866 c . 4
P39.6
t =
t p 1 v c
b g
2 12
so
For
t = 2 t p
L F t I OP v = c M1  G MN H t JK PQ L F t I OP v = c M1  G MN H 2 t JK PQ
p p p
2 12
.
2 12
= c 1
LM N
1 4
OP Q
12
= 0.866 c .
Chapter 39
437
P39.7
(a)
=
1 1 v c
b g
2
=
1  0.500
a
1
f
2
=
2 3
The time interval between pulses as measured by the Earth observer is 2 60.0 s t = t p = = 0.924 s . 3 75.0 60.0 s min = 64.9 min . Thus, the Earth observer records a pulse rate of 0.924 s
FG H
IJ K
(b)
At a relative speed v = 0.990 c , the relativistic factor increases to 7.09 and the pulse rate recorded by the Earth observer decreases to 10.6 min . That is, the life span of the astronaut (reckoned by the duration of the total number of his heartbeats) is much longer as measured by an Earth clock than by a clock aboard the space vehicle.
*P39.8
(a)
The 0.8 c and the 20 ly are measured in the Earth frame, x 20 ly 20 ly 1c t = = = = 25.0 yr . so in this frame, v 0.8 c 0.8 c 1 ly yr We see a clock on the meteoroid moving, so we do not measure proper time; that clock measures proper time. 25.0 yr t t p = = = 25.0 yr 1  0.8 2 = 25.0 yr 0.6 = 15.0 yr t = t p : 1 1  v2 c2
(b)
a f
(c)
Method one: We measure the 20 ly on a stick stationary in our frame, so it is proper length. The tourist measures it to be contracted to Lp 20 ly 20 ly = = = 12.0 ly . L= 1 1  0.8 2 1.667 Method two: The tourist sees the Earth approaching at 0.8 c 0.8 ly yr 15 yr = 12.0 ly .
b
gb
g
Not only do distances and times differ between Earth and meteoroid reference frames, but within the Earth frame apparent distances differ from actual distances. As we have interpreted it, the 20lightyear actual distance from the Earth to the meteoroid at the time of discovery must be a calculated result, different from the distance measured directly. Because of the finite maximum speed of information transfer, the astronomer sees the meteoroid as it was years previously, when it was much farther away. Call its apparent distance d. The time d required for light to reach us from the newlyvisible meteoroid is the lookback time t = . c The astronomer calculates that the meteoroid has approached to be 20 ly away as it moved with constant velocity throughout the lookback time. We can work backwards to reconstruct her calculation: 0.8 cd d = 20 ly + 0.8 ct = 20 ly + c 0.2d = 20 ly d = 100 ly Thus in terms of direct observation, the meteoroid we see covers 100 ly in only 25 years. Such an apparent superluminal velocity is actually observed for some jets of material emanating from quasars, because they happen to be pointed nearly toward the Earth. If we can watch events unfold on the meteoroid, we see them slowed by relativistic time dilation, but also greatly speeded up by the Doppler effect.
438 P39.9
Relativity
t = t p =
t p 1  v2 c2
so
t p =
F GG H
1
and If then and P39.10 For (a) v = 0.990 , = 7.09 c
t  t p
I F v I J t GH1  2 c JK t c J K F v I t . =G H 2c JK
v2
2 2 2 2 2
v = 1 000 km h = v = 9.26 10 7 c
1.00 10 6 m = 277.8 m s 3 600 s
et  t j = e4.28 10 jb3 600 sg = 1.54 10
p 13
9
s = 1.54 ns .
The muon's lifetime as measured in the Earth's rest frame is t = 4.60 km 0.990 c
and the lifetime measured in the muon's rest frame is t p = t
=
1 4.60 10 3 m 7.09 0.990 3.00 10 8 m s
LM MN
e
OP = j PQ
2.18 s .
(b) P39.11
L = Lp 1 
FG v IJ H cK
2
=
Lp
=
4.60 10 3 m = 649 m 7.09
The spaceship is measured by the Earth observer to be lengthcontracted to L = Lp 1  v2 c2 or L2 = L2 1  p
F GH
v2 c
2
I. JK actf
2 2
Also, the contracted length is related to the time required to pass overhead by:
L = vt
or
L2 = v 2 t 2 = L2  L2 p p v2 c2
2
v2 c
2
.
Equating these two expressions gives or Using the given values: this becomes giving
= ct v2 c
2
af
v2 c2
L2 + ct p
af
= L2 . p and
L p = 300 m
t = 7.50 10 7 s
e1.41 10
5
m2
jv c
2 2
= 9.00 10 4 m 2
v = 0.800 c .
Chapter 39
439
P39.12
(a)
The spaceship is measured by Earth observers to be of length L, where L = Lp 1  v2 c2 v2 c2
2 p
and and
L = vt v 2 t 2 = L2 1  p v= cL p c 2 t 2 + L2 p
v t = L p 1  Solving for v,
F v G t H
2
2
+
L2 p c
2
I =L JK
F GH
v2 . c2 .
I JK
(b) (c)
The tanks move nonrelativistically, so we have v = For the data in problem 11, v=
300 m = 4.00 m s . 75 s
c 300 m
a
f
6 2 2
e3 10 e3 10
8
ms
j e0.75 10 sj + a300 mf
2 2 2 2
=
c 300 m
a
f
225 2 + 300 2 m
= 0.800 c
in agreement with problem 11. For the data in part (b), v=
8
a f m sj a75 sf + a300 mf
c 300 m r2
=
c 300 m
a
f
e2.25 10 j
mv 2 . r
12
10 2
= 1.33 10 8 c = 4.00 m s
+ 300 2 m
in agreement with part (b). P39.13 We find Cooper's speed: GMm =
Solving,
Then the time period of one orbit,
L GM OP = LM e6.67 10 je5.98 10 j OP v=M N aR + hf Q MN e6.37 10 + 0.160 10 j PQ 2 a R + hf 2 e6.53 10 j T= = = 5. 25 10 s .
11 6 24 6 6
12
= 7.82 km s .
v
7.82 10
3
3
(a)
LF v I The time difference for 22 orbits is t  t = b  1gt = MG 1  J MNH c K F 1 v  1I a22T f = 1 F 7.82 10 m s I 22e5.25 10 sj = t  t G 1 + 2 G 3 10 m s J H 2 c JK H K
2 p p 2 2 3 2 p 2 8 3
1 2
 1 22T
OP PQa f
39.2 s .
(b)
For one orbit, t  t p = 1 1  v2 c2 = 1.01
39.2 s = 1.78 s . The press report is accurate to one digit . 22
P39.14
=
e
j
so
v = 0.140 c
440 P39.15
Relativity
(a)
Since your ship is identical to his, and you are at rest with respect to your own ship, its length is 20.0 m . His ship is in motion relative to you, so you measure its length contracted to 19.0 m . v2 c2
(b)
(c)
We have from which
L = Lp 1 
L 19.0 m v2 = = 0.950 = 1  2 and v = 0.312 c . L p 20.0 m c
*P39.16
In the Earth frame, Speedo's trip lasts for a time t = 20.0 ly x = = 21.05 yr . v 0.950 ly yr t
Speedo's age advances only by the proper time interval t p =
= 21.05 yr 1  0.95 2 = 6.574 yr during his trip.
Similarly for Goslo, t p = 20.0 ly x v2 1 2 = 1  0.75 2 = 17.64 yr . v 0.750 ly yr c
While Speedo has landed on Planet X and is waiting for his brother, he ages by 20.0 ly 20.0 ly  = 5.614 yr . 0.750 ly yr 0.950 ly yr Then Goslo ends up older by 17.64 yr  6.574 yr + 5.614 yr = 5.45 yr . P39.17 (a) t = t p = t p = 15.0 yr = 21.0 yr
b
g
(b) (c)
b g 1  a0.700f d = va t f = 0.700 c b 21.0 yr g = a0.700fb1.00 ly yr g b 21.0 yr g =
1 v c
2 2
14.7 ly
The astronauts see Earth flying out the back window at 0.700 c : d = v t p = 0.700 c 15.0 yr = 0.700 1.00 ly yr 15.0 yr = 10.5 ly
e j
b
g a
fb
gb
g
(d)
Mission control gets signals for 21.0 yr while the battery is operating, and then for 14.7 years after the battery stops powering the transmitter, 14.7 ly away: 21.0 yr + 14.7 yr = 35.7 yr
Chapter 39
441
P39.18
The orbital speed of the Earth is as described by GmS = r
F = ma :
GmS m E r2
=
mE v 2 r
v=
e6.67 10
11
N m 2 kg 2 1.99 10 30 kg 1.496 10
11
je
m
j = 2.98 10
4
m s.
The maximum frequency received by the extraterrestrials is f obs = fsource 1+v c = 57.0 10 6 Hz 1v c
e e
j 1  ee2.98 10 j 1 + ee2.98 10
1 + 2.98 10 4 m s
4
j e3.00 10 m sj e3.00 10 j e3.00 10 m sj e3.00 10
8 8
j = 57.005 66 10 m sj
ms
6
Hz .
The minimum frequency received is f obs = fsource 1v c = 57.0 10 6 Hz 1+v c 1  2.98 10 4 m s
4 8 8
j = 56.994 34 10 m sj
ms
6
Hz .
The difference, which lets them figure out the speed of our planet, is
b57.005 66  56.994 34g 10
P39.19 (a)
6
Hz = 1.13 10 4 Hz . c+v cv
Let f c be the frequency as seen by the car. Thus, and, if f is the frequency of the reflected wave, Combining gives
f c = f source f = fc
(b)
Using the above result, which gives The beat frequency is then
a c + vf . a c  vf f a c  vf = f a c + vf b f  f gc = b f + f g v 2 f
f = f source
source
source source
c+v . cv
source v .
f beat = f  fsource =
9
2 f source v 2v . = c
(c)
f beat
a2fb30.0 m sge10.0 10 =
3.00 10 m s
8
Hz
j = a2fb30.0 m sg = 2 000 Hz = b0.030 0 mg
2.00 kHz
=
c fsource f beat 2
=
3.00 10 8 m s 10.0 10 9 Hz so v =
= 3.00 cm 5 Hz 0.030 0 m f beat = = 0.075 0 m s 0.2 mi h 2 2
(d)
v=
a
fb
g
442 P39.20
Relativity
(a)
When the source moves away from an observer, the observed frequency is f obs = fsource
FG c  v IJ Hc+v K
s s
12
where v s = v source .
When v s << c , the binomial expansion gives
FG c  v IJ Hc+v K
s s
12
= 1
So,
f obs fsource
LM FG v IJ OP LM1 + FG v IJ OP N H c KQ N H c KQ FG 1  v IJ . H cK
12 s s s
1 2
1
FG H
vs 2c
IJ FG 1  v IJ FG1  v IJ . K H 2c K H c K
s s
The observed wavelength is found from c = obs fobs = fsource :
obs =
f source fsource = f obs 1  vs c f source 1  v s c
= obs  = Since 1  (b) *P39.21 vs 1, c
F 1 GH 1  v
b
s
c
1 =
I F v cI JK GH 1  v c JK
s s
g
v source . c 0.050 4c
v source = c
FG IJ = cFG 20.0 nm IJ = H K H 397 nm K
For the light as observed 1+v c 1+v c c c = fobs = fsource = obs 1v c 1  v c source 1 + v c source 650 nm = = obs 520 nm 1 v c 1+ v v = 1.562  1.562 c c v = 0.220 c = 6.59 10 7 m s 1+v c = 1.25 2 = 1.562 1v c v 0.562 = = 0. 220 c 2.562
Section 39.5 *P39.22
The Lorentz Transformation Equations
Let Suzanne be fixed in reference from S and see the two lightemission events with coordinates x 1 = 0 , t1 = 0 , x 2 = 0 , t 2 = 3 s . Let Mark be fixed in reference frame S and give the events coordinate x 1 = 0 , t1 = 0 , t 2 = 9 s . (a) Then we have v t2 = t2  2 x2 c
FG H
IJ K b 3 s  0 g
1 v2 c
2
9 s = v2 c (b)
2
1 1 v
2
c
2
=
1 3
=
8 9
v = 0.943 c
x 2 = x 2  vt 2 = 3 0  0.943 c 3 10 6 s
b
g e
F jGH 3 10c
8
ms
I= JK
2.55 10 3 m
Chapter 39
443
P39.23
=
1 1 v
2
c
2
=
1 1  0.995 2
= 10.0
We are also given: L1 = 2.00 m , and = 30.0 (both measured in a reference frame moving relative to the rod). Thus, and L1 x = L1 cos 1 = 2.00 m 0.867 = 1.73 m L1 y = L1 sin 1 L2x
a fa f = a 2.00 mfa0.500 f = 1.00 m
L2x
L 2 x is a proper length, related to L1 x by L1 x = Therefore, and
. = 10.0L1 x = 17.3 m
FIG. P39.23
L 2 y = L1 y = 1.00 m .
(Lengths perpendicular to the motion are unchanged). (a) (b) *P39.24 L2 =
bL g + eL j
2x 2 2y
2
gives gives
L 2 = 17.4 m
2 = tan 1
L2y L2x
2 = 3.30
Einstein's reasoning about lightning striking the ends of a train shows that the moving observer sees the event toward which she is moving, event B , as occurring first. The Sframe coordinates of the events we may take as (x = 0 , y = 0 , z = 0, t = 0 ) and (x = 100 m , y = 0 , z = 0, t = 0 ). Then the coordinates in S are given by the Lorentz transformation. Event A is at ( x = 0 , y = 0 , z = 0 , t = 0). The time of event B is t = t 
FG H
v c
2
x =
IJ K
1 1  0.8
2
FG 0  0.8 c a100 mfIJ = 1.667FG  80 m IJ = 4.44 10 H c K H 3 10 m s K
2 8
7
s.
The time elapsing before A occurs is 444 ns . P39.25 (a) From the Lorentz transformation, the separations between the bluelight and redlight events are described by x = x  vt v= 2.00 m 8.00 10
9
a
f
= 2.50 10 8 m s
0 = 2.00 m  v 8.00 10 9 s
e
j
8
s
=
1 1  2.50 10 m s
e
8
j e3.00 10
2
ms
j
2
= 1.81 .
(b)
Again from the Lorentz transformation, x = x  vt : x = 1.81 3.00 m  2.50 10 8 m s 1.00 10 9 s
a
f
e
je
8
j
x = 4.97 m .
(c)
F v xIJ : t = G t  H c K
2
LM t = 1.81 1.00 10 MM N
9
e2.50 10 s e3.00 10
8
j a3.00 mfOP PP m sj Q
ms
2
t = 1.33 10 8 s
444
Relativity
Section 39.6 P39.26
The Lorentz Velocity Transformation Equations
u x = Enterprise velocity v = Klingon velocity From Equation 39.16 u = x ux  v 1  ux v c
2
=
0.900 c  0.800 c = 0.357 c . 1  0.900 0.800
a a
fa
f
FIG. P39.26 P39.27 u = x 1  ux v c 2 ux  v = 0.750 c  0.750 c = 0.960 c 1  0.750 0.750
fa
f
FIG. P39.27 *P39.28 Let frame S be the Earth frame of reference. Then The components of the velocity of the first spacecraft are and As measured from the S frame of the second spacecraft, u = x ux  v
x 2
v = 0.7 c . u x = 0.6 c cos 50 = 0.386 c
uy
a f = a0.6 c f sin 50 = 0.459 c .
2
The magnitude of u is and its direction is at
a f = 1.086 c = 0.855 c 1.27 1u v c 1  a0.386 c fa 0.7 c f c u 0.459 c 1  a0.7 f 0.459 ca0.714f = = = 0.258 c u = 1.27 e1  u v c j 1  a0.386 fa 0.7f a0.855 cf + a0.285cf = 0.893c
= 0.386 c  0.7 c
y x 2 y 2 2 2
tan 1
0. 258 c = 16.8 above the x axis . 0.855 c
Section 39.7 P39.29 (a)
Relativistic Linear Momentum and the Relativistic Form of Newton's Laws p = mu ; for an electron moving at 0.010 0 c, 1 1 u c Thus, 1 1  0.010 0
2
=
p = 1.00 9.11 10 31
e
b g
2
=
b g kg jb0.010 0 ge3.00 10
= 1.000 05 1.00 .
8
ms
j
p = 2.73 10 24 kg m s . (b) Following the same steps as used in part (a), we find at 0.500 c, = 1.15 and (c) At 0.900 c, = 2.29 and p = 1.58 10 22 kg m s . p = 5.64 10 22 kg m s .
Chapter 39
445
P39.30
Using the relativistic form, we find the difference p from the classical momentum, mu: (a) The difference is 1.00% when  1 mu = 0.010 0 mu :
p=
mu 1 u c
b g
2
= mu
p = mu  mu =  1 mu .
b g
2
b g
=
1 1 = 0.990 1 u c
thus 1 
FG u IJ = a0.990f H cK
2
b g
2
, and
u = 0.141c .
(b)
The difference is 10.0% when  1 mu = 0.100 mu :
b g
=
1 1 = 0.900 1 u c
thus 1 
FG u IJ = a0.900f H cK
2
b g
2
2
and 1 1 u c
2
u = 0.436 c .
1 u 2 c
2
P39.31
p  mu mu  mu = = 1: mu mu
1=
b g p  mu 1 F 90.0 m s I = G 2 H 3.00 10 m s J mu K
8
1 1+
FG IJ HK
2
1=
1 u 2 c
FG IJ HK
2
= 4.50 10 14
P39.32
p=
mu 1 u c
b g
2
becomes
1
u2 c2
=
m 2u 2 p2
2
which gives: or c 2 = u 2
1 = u2
2 2 2
Fm c GH p
+1
I JK
Fm GH p
2
+
1 c2
I JK j
.
and
u=
c
em c
2 2
p2 + 1
P39.33
Relativistic momentum of the system of fragments must be conserved. For total momentum to be zero after as it was before, we must have, with subscript 2 referring to the heavier fragment, and subscript 1 to the lighter, p 2 = p1 or
2 m 2u 2 = 1 m1u1 =
27 2
2.50 10 28 kg 1  0.893
a
f
2
0.893 c
a
f
or
Proceeding to solve, we find
e1.67 10 kgju = e4.960 10 1  bu c g F 1.67 10 u I = 1  u GH 4.960 10 c JK c
2 2 27 2 28 2 2 2 2
28
kg c .
j
12.3
2 u2
c2
= 1 and u 2 = 0.285 c .
446
Relativity
Section 39.8 P39.34
Relativistic Energy
E = 1  2 mc 2 For an electron, (a) E = mc 2 = 0.511 MeV
2
b
g
P39.35
F 1  1 I mc = 0.582 MeV GH a1  0.810f a1  0.250f JK F I 1 1 (b) E = G  GH 1  a0.990f 1  0.810 JJK mc = 2.45 MeV I F GG 1  1JJ mc  FG 1 IJ mc W = K  K = GH 1  dv ci JK GH 1  bv cg JK I F GG 1  1 JJ mc or W = GH 1  dv ci 1  bv cg JK
2 2 f i 2 2 2 2 f i 2 2 2 f i
(a)
W =
W =
F GG H F H
1  0.750
a
1
f
2

I J e1.673 10 1  a0.500 f J K
1
2
27
kg 2.998 10 8 m s
je
j
2
5.37 10 11 J
(b)
W = G G
W =
1  0.995
a
1
f
2

I J e1.673 10 1  a0.500 f J K
1
2
27
kg 2.998 10 8 m s
je
j
2
1.33 10 9 J
P39.36
The relativistic kinetic energy of an object of mass m and speed u is K r =
F GG H
1 1  u2 c 2
 1 mc 2 .
I JJ K
For u = 0.100 c , The classical equation K c = different by 1 mu 2 gives 2
Kr = Kc =
F GH
1 1  0.010 0
 1 mc 2 = 0.005 038mc 2 . = 0.005 000mc 2
I JK
1 m 0.100 c 2
a
f
2
0.005 038  0.005 000 = 0.751% . 0.005 038
For still smaller speeds the agreement will be still better.
Chapter 39
447
P39.37
E = mc 2 = 2mc 2 or
1 u Thus, = 1  c
=2.
= 3 or 2 u= c 3 . 2
2
FG IJ H K
2
The momentum is then
F c 3 I = F mc I 3 GH 2 JK GH c JK F 938.3 MeV IJ 3 = 1.63 10 p=G H c K
p = mu = 2m K=
3
MeV . c
P39.38
(a)
Using the classical equation,
1 1 mv 2 = 78.0 kg 1.06 10 5 m s 2 2
b
ge
j
2
= 4.38 10 11 J .
(b)
Using the relativistic equation, K =
F GG H
1 1 v c
b g
2
 1 mc 2 .
I JJ K
OP  1Pb78.0 kg ge 2.998 10 m sj = 4.38 10 J PPQ 1  e1.06 10 2.998 10 j LM1  FG v IJ OP 1 + 1 FG v IJ . v When << 1 , the binomial series expansion gives c 2 H cK MN H c K PQ LM1  FG v IJ OP  1 1 FG v IJ . Thus, 2H cK MN H c K PQ 1 F vI 1 and the relativistic expression for kinetic energy becomes K G J mc = mv . That is, in H cK 2 2
1
8 2 11 5 8 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
LM K=M MMN
the limit of speeds much smaller than the speed of light, the relativistic and classical expressions yield the same results. P39.39 (a) ER = mc 2 = 1.67 10 27 kg 2.998 10 8 m s E = mc 2 = 1.50 10 10 J 1  0.950 c c (c) P39.40
e
je
j
2
= 1.50 10 10 J = 938 MeV
(b)
b
g
2 12
= 4.81 10 10 J = 3.00 10 3 MeV
K = E  mc 2 = 4.81 10 10 J  1.50 10 10 J = 3.31 10 10 J = 2.07 10 3 MeV
The relativistic density is ER c V
2
=
mc 2 m = = c 2V V
eL jeL jLMNL
p p
m
p
OP = a1.00 cmf 1  bu c g Q
2
8.00 g
3
1  0.900
a
f
2
= 18.4 g cm 3 .
448 P39.41
Relativity
We must conserve both energy and relativistic momentum of the system of fragments. With subscript 1 referring to the 0.868 c particle and subscript 2 to the 0.987 c particle, 1 1 1 = = 2.01 and 2 = = 6.22 . 2 2 1  0.868 1  0.987
a
f
a
f
Conservation of energy gives E1 + E 2 = Etotal which is or This reduces to: gives or which becomes
1 m1 c 2 + 2 m 2 c 2 = m total c 2
2.01m1 + 6. 22m 2 = 3.34 10 27 kg . m1 + 3.09m 2 = 1.66 10 27 kg . (1)
Since the final momentum of the system must equal zero, p1 = p 2
1 m1u1 = 2 m 2 u 2
1
a2.01fa0.868cfm = a6.22fa0.987cfm
m1 = 3.52m 2 .
2
FIG. P39.41 (2)
Solving (1) and (2) simultaneously, m1 = 8.84 10 *P39.42 Energy conservation: 3 108 kg 1  v2 = M. c2 1 1  02 1 400 kgc 2 +
28
kg and m 2 = 2.51 10 28 kg .
= Mc 2 1  v2 c2
900 kgc 2 1  0.85 2
Momentum conservation: 0 + 1 452 kg 1  v 2 Mv = . c c2
900 kg 0.85 c 1  0.85
2
a
f=
Mv 1  v2 c2
(a)
Dividing gives
v 1 452 = = 0.467 c 3 108
v = 0.467 c .
(b) P39.43
Now by substitution 3 108 kg 1  0.467 2 = M = 2.75 10 3 kg . p = mu
E = mc 2
E 2 = mc E p c Q.E.D.
2 2 2
e
p = b mug j F u IF u I = e mc j  b mug c = F emc j  amc f u I = emc j G 1  J G 1  J = emc j H K H c KH c K
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
2 2
P39.44
(a)
q V = K =  1 m e c 2 Thus, = 1 1 u c
a f
b g
b g
2
=1+
q V
mec 2
a f from which
je
u = 0.302 c .
(b)
K =  1 m e c 2 = q V = 1.60 10 19 C 2.50 10 4 J C = 4.00 10 15 J
b g
a f e
j
Chapter 39
449
P39.45
(a)
E = mc 2 = 20.0 GeV with mc 2 = 0.511 MeV for electrons. Thus,
=
(b)
20.0 10 9 eV 0.511 10 6 eV 1 1 u c
= 3.91 10 4 .
=
b g
2
= 3.91 10 4 from which u = 0.999 999 999 7 c
(c)
L = Lp 1 
FG u IJ H cK
2
=
Lp
=
3.00 10 3 m = 7.67 10 2 m = 7.67 cm 4 3.91 10
*P39.46
(a) (b)
P=
energy 2J = = 2.00 10 13 W t 100 10 15 s
The kinetic energy of one electron with v = 0.999 9 c is
F b  1gmc = GG H
2
1 1  0.999 9
2
 1 9.11 10 31 kg 3 10 8 m s
I JJ K
e
j
2
= 69.7 8.20 10 14 J
e
j
= 5.72 10 12 J Then we require N= P39.47 0.01 2 J = N 5.72 10 12 J 100
e
j
p before decay = p after decay = 0
2 10 4 J = 3.50 10 7 . 5.72 10 12 J
Conserving total momentum of the decaying particle system,
p v = p = m u = 207 m e u . Conservation of massenergy for the system gives E + E v = E : m c 2 + p v c = m c 2
b
g
Substituting from the momentum equation above, or
1+
FG H
u 273 = = 1.32 : c 207
IJ K
b g pc = 273m . u b 207m g + b 207m g = 273m c
207m e +
e v e e
e
1+u c = 1.74 1u c
u = 0.270 . c K =
Then,
K =  1 m c 2 =  1 207 m e c 2 :
b g
b g e
j
F GG H
1  0.270
a
1
f
2
 1 207 0.511 MeV
I JJ a K
f
K = 4.08 MeV . Also, Ev = E  E :
Ev = m c 2  m c 2 = 273  207 m e c 2
Ev = 273 
F GG H
I J a0.511 MeVf 1  a0.270 f J K
207
2
b
g
Ev = 29.6 MeV
450 *P39.48
Relativity
Let observer A hold the unprimed reference frame, with u1 = rest in the primed frame with u1 = 0 = u2  v 1  u2 v c 1  u1 v c 2 u1  v
3c 3c and u 2 =  . Let observer B be at 4 4 3c v = u1 = . 4
(a)
Then u = 2
2
=
 3c 4  3c 4 1.5 c = 1   3 c 4 + 3 c 4 1 + 9 16
b
gb
g
speed = u2 = (b)
3 c 2 24 = c = 0.960 c . 25 16 25
In the unprimed frame the objects, each of mass m, together have energy mc 2 mc 2 + mc 2 = 2 = 3.02mc 2 . 2 1  0.75 In the primed frame the energy is mc 2
2
10 1  0.96 4.57mc 2 = 1.51 times greater as measured by observer B . 3.02mc 2
+
mc 2
2
= 4.57mc 2 , greater by
Section 39.9 P39.49
Mass and Energy
Let a 0.3kg flag be run up a flagpole 7 m high. We put into it energy So we put into it extra mass mgh = 0.3 kg 9.8 m s 2 7 m 20 J . m = E c2 = 20 J
e
j
e3 10
8
ms
j
2
= 2 10 16 kg
for a fractional increase of P39.50
2 10 16 kg ~ 10 15 . 0.3 kg
E = 2.86 10 5 J . Also, the massenergy relation says that E = mc 2 . Therefore, m= 2.86 10 5 J E = c2 3.00 10 8 m s
e
j
2
= 3.18 10 12 kg .
No, a mass loss of this magnitude (out of a total of 9.00 g) could not be detected .
9 7 E P t 0.800 1.00 10 J s 3.00 yr 3.16 10 s yr = 2 = = 0.842 kg 2 c2 c 3.00 10 8 m s
P39.51
m =
e
jb
e
ge j
j
P39.52
1 030 kg m3 1.40 10 9 10 3 m 4 186 J kg C 10.0 C Vc T E mc T m = 2 = = = 2 c c2 c2 3.00 10 8 m s
a f
a f e
je
je
jb
3
ga
f
e
j
m = 6.71 10 8 kg
Chapter 39
451
P39.53
P=
2 dE d mc dm = = c2 = 3.77 10 26 W dt dt dt
e j e
Thus,
3.77 10 26 J s dm = = 4.19 10 9 kg s 2 8 dt 3.00 10 m s
j
P39.54
2m e c 2 = 1.02 MeV
E 1.02 MeV
Section 39.10 *P39.55 (a)
The General Theory of Relativity For the satellite GM ET 2 = 4 2 r 3
F = ma :
GM E m r2
=
mv 2 m 2 r = r r T
FG H
IJ K
2
F 6.67 10 r =G GH
v=
11
N m 2 5.98 10 24 kg 43 080 s kg 2 4 2
e
jb
g IJ JK
2
13
r = 2.66 10 7 m
7 2 r 2 2.66 10 m = = 3.87 10 3 m s 43 080 s T
(b) (c)
e
j
The small fractional decrease in frequency received is equal in magnitude to the fractional increase in period of the moving oscillator due to time dilation:
I F 1 J GG fractional change in f = b  1g =   1J GH 1  e3.87 10 3 10 j JK F 1 L F 3.87 10 I OI = 1  G 1  M G GH 2 MN H 3 10 JK PPQJJK = 8.34 10
3 8 2 3 2 8
11
(d)
The orbit altitude is large compared to the radius of the Earth, so we must use GM E m . Ug =  r U g =  6.67 10 11 Nm 2 5.98 10 24 kg m kg 2.66 10 m
7 2 7
e
j
+
6.67 10 11 Nm 5.98 10 24 kg m kg 6.37 10 m
6
e
j
= 4.76 10
J kg m
f U g 4.76 10 7 m 2 s 2 = +5. 29 10 10 = = 2 8 f mc 2 3 10 m s
e
j
(e)
8.34 10 11 + 5.29 10 10 = +4.46 10 10
452
Relativity
Additional Problems P39.56 (a) d earth = vt earth = v t astro v2 v 1 2 = 1.50 10 5 c c v2 1 = 2 1 + 2.25 10 10 c v = 1  1.12 10 10 c so 1 e2.00 10 yrjc = v 1  v v e 2.25 10 j v = 1
6 2 2 10
2
c2
30.0 yr
FG IJ e H K
j
so
c2
c2
e
j
v = 1 + 2.25 10 10 c
e
j
1 2
=1
1 2.25 10 10 2
e
j
(b)
K=
F GG H
1 1 v
2
c
2
 1 mc 2 =
I JJ K
(c) P39.57 (a)
6.00 10 27 J = 6.00 10 27 10 13 MeV =  1 m p c 2 vp c
F 2.00 10 yr  1I b1 000gb1 000 kg g 3 10 m s e j GH 30 yr JK F 13 IJ FG k IJ FG W s IJ FG h IJ = $2.17 10 JG H kWh K H 10 K H J K H 3 600 s K
6 8 3 20
2
= 6.00 10 27 J
b g
so
= 10 10
t = t
=
10 5 yr 10 10
= 10 5 yr ~ 10 2 s
(b) P39.58 (a)
d = ct ~ 10 8 km When K e = K p , In this case, and Substituting, but mec 2 e  1 = mp c 2 p  1 .
b
g
e
j
m e c 2 = 0.511 MeV , m p c 2 = 938 MeV
e = 1  0.750 p =1+ p=
a
f
2 1 2
= 1.511 9 .
me c 2 e  1 mp c 1
2
b
g = 1 + a0.511 MeVfb1.511 9  1g = 1.000 279
938 MeV .
LM1  eu cj OP N Q
p
2 12
Therefore, (b) When p e = p p
 u p = c 1  p 2 = 0.023 6 c .
p m pu p = e m eu e or pu p =
p up =
up c
e m eu e . mp
2 2 4
Thus,
b1.511 9ge0.511 MeV c ja0.750 cf = 6.177 2 10
938 MeV c
c
and which yields
= 6.177 2 10 4 1 
Fu I GH c JK
p
2
u p = 6.18 10 4 c = 185 km s .
Chapter 39
453
P39.59
(a)
Since Mary is in the same reference frame, S , as Ted, she measures the ball to have the same speed Ted observes, namely u = 0.800 c . x t = Lp ux = 1.80 10 12 m 0.800 3.00 10 m s v2 c2 = 7.50 10 3 s
(b)
e
8
j
(c)
L = Lp 1 
= 1.80 10 12 m 1 
e
j
a0.600cf
c2
2
= 1.44 10 12 m
Since v = 0.600 c and u = 0.800 c , the velocity Jim measures for the ball is x ux = (d) u + v x 1 + u v c x
2
=
a0.800 cf + a0.600 cf = 1 + a 0.800 fa0.600f
0.385 c .
Jim measures the ball and Mary to be initially separated by 1.44 10 12 m . Mary's motion at 0.600c and the ball's motion at 0.385c nibble into this distance from both ends. The gap closes at the rate 0.600 c + 0.385 c = 0.985 c , so the ball and catcher meet after a time t = 1.44 10 12 m 0.985 3.00 10 8 m s
e
j
= 4.88 10 3 s .
*P39.60
(a)
The charged battery stores energy so its mass excess is
E = P t = 1.20 J s 50 min 60 s min = 3 600 J
m = 3 600 J E = 2 c 3 10 8 m s
b
ga
fb
g
e
j
2
= 4.00 10 14 kg .
(b)
14 kg m 4.00 10 = = 1.60 10 12 3 m 25 10 kg
too small to measure.
P39.61
mc 2 4 938.78 MeV  3 728.4 MeV = 100% = 0.712% 4 938.78 MeV mc 2
a
a
f
f
*P39.62
2 2 The energy of the first fragment is given by E1 = p1 c 2 + m1 c 2
e
j = a1.75 MeVf + a1.00 MeVf
2 2
2
E1 = 2.02 MeV .
2 For the second, E2 = 2.00 MeV
a
f + a1.50 MeVf
2
2
E2 = 2.50 MeV .
(a)
Energy is conserved, so the unstable object had E = 4.52 MeV . Each component of momentum is conserved, so the original object moved with 2 2 1.75 MeV 2.00 MeV 2 2 + . Then for it p 2 = px + py = c c 2 3.65 MeV 2 2 2 4.52 MeV = 1.75 MeV + 2.00 MeV + mc 2 m= . c2
a
FG H f a
IJ K f
FG H a
IJ K
f e j
(b)
Now E = mc 2 gives 4.52 MeV =
1 1  v2 c2
3.65 MeV
1
v2 = 0.654 , v = 0.589 c . c2
454 P39.63
Relativity
(a)
Take the spaceship as the primed frame, moving toward the right at v = +0.600 c . Then u x = +0.800 c , and Lp ux = u + v x 1 + u v c x
b g
2
=
0.800 c + 0.600 c = 0.946 c . 1 + 0.800 0.600
a
fa
f
(b) (c)
L=
:
L = 0.200 ly
b
g 1  a0.600f
2
= 0.160 ly
The aliens observe the 0.160ly distance closing because the probe nibbles into it from one end at 0.800c and the Earth reduces it at the other end at 0.600c. Thus, time = 0.160 ly = 0.114 yr . 0.800 c + 0.600 c 1  1 4.00 10 5 kg 3.00 10 8 m s
(d)
K=
F GG H
1 1u c
2 2
 1 mc 2 :
I JJ K
K=
F GG H
1  0.946
a
f
2
I JJ e K
je
j
2
K = 7.50 10 22 J P39.64 In this case, the proper time is T0 (the time measured by the students on a clock at rest relative to them). The dilated time measured by the professor is: t = T0 where t = T + t Here T is the time she waits before sending a signal and t is the time required for the signal to reach the students. Thus, we have: T + t = T0 . (1)
To determine the travel time t, realize that the distance the students will have moved beyond the professor before the signal reaches them is: d = v T+t . The time required for the signal to travel this distance is:
Solving for t gives:
Substituting this into equation (1) yields:
a f d F vI t = = G J aT + t f . c H cK bv cgT . t= 1  b v cg bv cgT = T T+ 1  bv cg
0
or
T = T0 . 1 v c
Then T = T0
b g =T 1  ev c j
1 v c
2 2
0
b g 1 + b v c g 1  b v cg
1 v c
= T0
b g 1 + b v cg
1 v c
.
Chapter 39
455
P39.65
Look at the situation from the instructors' viewpoint since they are at rest relative to the clock, and hence measure the proper time. The Earth moves with velocity v = 0.280 c relative to the instructors while the students move with a velocity u = 0.600 c relative to Earth. Using the velocity addition equation, the velocity of the students relative to the instructors (and hence the clock) is: u= (a) 0. 280 c  0.600 c v + u = = 0.753 c (students relative to clock). 1 + vu c 2 1 + 0. 280 c 0.600 c c 2 With a proper time interval of t p = 50.0 min , the time interval measured by the students is:
a a
f a fa
f f
t = t p
with
=
1  0.753 c
a
1
f
2
c2
= 1.52 .
Thus, the students measure the exam to last T = 1.52 50.0 min = 76.0 minutes . (b) The duration of the exam as measured by observers on Earth is:
a
f
t = t p with =
1  0. 280 c
a
1
f
2
c2
so T = 1.04 50.0 min = 52.1 minutes .
a
f
P39.66
The energy which arrives in one year is E = P t = 1.79 10 17 J s 3.16 10 7 s = 5.66 10 24 J . Thus, m= 5.66 10 24 J E = c2 3.00 10 8 m s = 6.28 10 7 kg .
e
je
j
e
j
2
P39.67
The observer measures the proper length of the tunnel, 50.0 m, but measures the train contracted to length L = Lp 1  shorter than the tunnel by v2 = 100 m 1  0.950 c2
a
f
2
= 31.2 m
50.0  31.2 = 18.8 m so it is completely within the tunnel. .
P39.68
If the energy required to remove a mass m from the surface is equal to its rest energy mc 2 , then GM s m = mc 2 Rg Rg = GM s c
2
and
e6.67 10 =
11
N m 2 kg 2 1.99 10 30 kg
8
je
j
e3.00 10
ms
j
2
R g = 1.47 10 3 m = 1.47 km .
456 P39.69
Relativity
(a)
At any speed, the momentum of the particle is given by p = mu = mu 1 u c
2 2
Since F = qE =
dp : dt
So
and
b g OP d L F u I qE = MmuG 1  J dt M H PQ c K N F u I du + 1 muF 1  u I FG 2u IJ du . qE = mG 1  J H c K dt 2 GH c JK H c K dt L O qE du M 1  u c + u c P = m dt M 1  u c j PPQ MN e I du qE F = a= GH 1  u JK . dt m c
1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 32 2 2
.
(b)
For u small compared to c, the relativistic expression reduces to the classical a =
qE . As u m approaches c, the acceleration approaches zero, so that the object can never reach the speed of light.
(c)
ze
u 0
du
2 3 2
1  u2 c
j
=
qE dt m t =0 tdt m c +q E t
2 2 2 2 2
z
t
u=
qEct m c + q2E2t 2 c qE
2 2
x = udt = qEc
0
z
t
z
t 0
x=
FH
m 2 c 2 + q 2 E 2 t 2  mc
IK
P39.70
(a)
An observer at rest relative to the mirror sees the light travel a distance D = 2d  x , where x = vtS is the distance the ship moves toward the mirror in time tS . Since this observer agrees that the speed of light is c, the time for it to travel distance D is tS = D 2d  vtS = c c tS = 2d . c+v
(b)
The observer in the rocket measures a lengthcontracted initial distance to the mirror of L = d 1 v2 c2
and the mirror moving toward the ship at speed v. Thus, he measures the distance the light vt is the distance the mirror moves toward the ship before travels as D = 2 L  y where y = 2 the light reflects from it. This observer also measures the speed of light to be c, so the time for it to travel distance D is:
b
g
t=
2d D 2 v 2 vt = d 1 2  so c + v t = c 2 c c c
LM MN
OP PQ a f
ac + vfac  vf or t =
2d c
cv . c+v
Chapter 39
457
*P39.71
Take the two colliding protons as the system E1 = K + mc 2
2 2 E1 = p1 c 2 + m 2 c 4 2
E2 = mc 2 p2 = 0 .
In the final state, E f = K f + Mc :
E2 = p 2 c 2 + M 2 c 4 . f f
By energy conservation, E1 + E2 = E f , so
2 2 E1 + 2E1 E2 + E2 = E 2 f 2 p1 c 2 + m 2 c 4 + 2 K + mc 2 mc 2 + m 2 c 4
e
j
= p2c2 + M 2c4 f By conservation of momentum, Then p1 = p f . M 2 c 4 = 2Kmc 2 + 4m 2 c 4 = Mc 2 = 2mc 2 1 + By contrast, for colliding beams we have In the original state, E1 = K + mc 2 E2 = K + mc 2 . In the final state, E1 + E2 = E f : K 2mc 2 . 4Km 2 c 4 + 4m 2 c 4 2mc 2 FIG. P39.71
E f = Mc 2
K + mc 2 + K + mc 2 = Mc 2 Mc 2 = 2mc 2 1 +
FG H
K 2mc 2
IJ . K
*P39.72
Conservation of momentum mu : mu 1  u2 c 2 + m u
a f
3 1  u2 c 2
=
Mv f 1  v2 c2 f
=
2mu 3 1  u2 c 2
.
Conservation of energy mc 2 : mc 2 1  u2 c 2 + mc 2 3 1  u2 c 2 = Mc 2 1  v2 c2 f = 4mc 2 3 1  u2 c 2 .
To start solving we can divide: v f = M 1u M=
2 2
2u u = . Then 4 2 M
4c
=
4m 3 1u
2
c
2
=
b1 2g
4  u2 c 2
2m 4  u 2 c 2 3 1  u2 c 2 4m , in agreement with the classical result. 3
Note that when v << c , this reduces to M =
458 P39.73
Relativity
(a)
L2 = L2 x + L2 y and 0 0 0
L2 = L2 + L2 . x y
The motion is in the x direction: L y = L0 y = L0 sin 0
Thus,
or
FG v IJ = bL cos g 1  FG v IJ . H cK H cK L F vI O L F vI L = L cos M1  G J P + L sin = L M1  G J NM H c K QP NM H c K L F vI O . L = L M1  G J cos P MN H c K PQ
L x = L0 x 1 
2 2 0 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 12 0 2 0
2
cos 2 0
OP QP
(b)
tan =
Ly Lx
=
L0 y L0 x 1  v c
b g
2
= tan 0
P39.74
(b)
Consider a hermit who lives on an asteroid halfway between the Sun and Tau Ceti, stationary with respect to both. Just as our spaceship is passing him, he also sees the blast waves from both explosions. Judging both stars to be stationary, this observer concludes that the two stars blew up simultaneously . We in the spaceship moving past the hermit do not calculate the explosions to be simultaneous. We measure the distance we have traveled from the Sun as L = Lp 1 
(a)
FG v IJ = b6.00 lyg 1  a0.800f H cK
2
2
= 3.60 ly .
We see the Sun flying away from us at 0.800c while the light from the Sun approaches at 1.00c. Thus, the gap between the Sun and its blast wave has opened at 1.80c, and the time we calculate to have elapsed since the Sun exploded is 3.60 ly = 2.00 yr . 1.80 c We see Tau Ceti as moving toward us at 0.800c, while its light approaches at 1.00c, only 0.200c faster. We measure the gap between that star and its blast wave as 3.60 ly and growing at 0.200c. We calculate that it must have been opening for 3.60 ly = 18.0 yr 0.200 c and conclude that Tau Ceti exploded 16.0 years before the Sun .
Chapter 39
459
P39.75
Since the total momentum is zero before decay, it is necessary that after the decay p nucleus = p photon = E c = 14.0 keV . c
2 2 9
Also, for the recoiling nucleus, E 2 = p 2 c 2 + mc 2 Thus,
2 2 2 2 2
So
and
e j with mc = 8.60 10 J = 53.8 GeV . K 0 emc + K j = a14.0 keV f + emc j or FGH 1 + mc IJK = FGH 14.mckeV IJK + 1 . K F 14.0 keV IJ 1 + 1 FG 14.0 keV IJ (Binomial Theorem) = 1+G 1+ H mc K K 2 H mc mc a14.0 keVf = e14.0 10 eVj = 1.82 10 eV . K = 2mc 2e53.8 10 eV j
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 9
P39.76
Take m = 1.00 kg . The classical kinetic energy is Kc = 1 1 u mu 2 = mc 2 2 2 c
and the actual kinetic energy is
Kr
F =G GH
FG IJ = e4.50 10 HK I 1  1J mc = e9.00 10 JK 1  bu c g
2 2 2
16
J
16
jFGH u IJK c F 1 JjG GH 1  bu cg
2
2
I  1J . JK
u c 0.000
Kc J
af
Kr J
af
0.000 0.100 0.045 10 16 0.200 0.180 10 16 0.300 0.405 10 16 0.400 0.720 10 16 0.500 0.600 0.700 0.800 0.900 0.990 1.13 10 16 1.62 10 16 2.21 10 16 2.88 10 16 3.65 10 16 4.41 10 16
0.000 0.0453 10 16 0.186 10 16 0.435 10 16 0.820 10 16 1.39 10 16 2.25 10 16 3.60 10 16 6.00 10 16 11.6 10 16 54.8 10 16
FIG. P39.76
1 u K c = 0.990K r , when 2 c Similarly, and
FG IJ HK
2
LM = 0.990 M NM
when when
OP  1P , yielding u = 1  bu c g QP
1
2
0.115 c .
K c = 0.950K r K c = 0.500K r
u = 0.257 c u = 0.786 c .
460
Relativity
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P39.2 P39.4 P39.6 P39.8 P39.10 (a) 60.0 m s ; (b) 20.0 m s ; (c) 44.7 m s see the solution 0.866 c (a) 25.0 yr; (b) 15.0 yr; (c) 12.0 ly (a) 2.18 s ; (b) The moon sees the planet surface moving 649 m up toward it. (a) cL p c t
2 2
P39.44 P39.46 P39.48
(a) 0.302 c ; (b) 4.00 fJ (a) 20.0 TW; (b) 3.50 10 7 electrons (a) 0.960c; (b) 1.51 times greater as measured by B. 3.18 10 12 kg , not detectable 6.71 10 8 kg 1.02 MeV (a) v = 1  1.12 10 10 ; (b) 6.00 10 27 J ; c (c) $2.17 10 20
P39.50 P39.52 P39.54 P39.56
P39.12
+ L2 p
; (b) 4.00 m s ;
(c) see the solution P39.14 P39.16 P39.18 P39.20 P39.22 P39.24 P39.26 P39.28 P39.30 P39.32 P39.34 P39.36 P39.38 P39.40 P39.42 v = 0.140 c 5.45 yr, Goslo is older 11.3 kHz (a) see the solution; (b) 0.050 4 c (a) 0.943 c ; (b) 2.55 km B occurred 444 ns before A 0.357 c 0.893 c at 16.8 above the x axis (a) 0.141c ; (b) 0.436 c see the solution (a) 0.582 MeV ; (b) 2.45 MeV see the solution (a) 438 GJ ; (b) 438 GJ 18.4 g cm 3 (a) 0.467c; (b) 2.75 10 3 kg
P39.58 P39.60 P39.62 P39.64 P39.66 P39.68 P39.70
(a) 0.023 6 c ; (b) 6.18 10 4 c (a) 4.00 10 14 kg ; (b) 1.60 10 12 (a) 3.65 MeV ; (b) v = 0.589 c c2
see the solution 6.28 10 7 kg 1.47 km (a) 2d 2d ; (b) c+v c 2m 3 cv c+v
P39.72 P39.74 P39.76
M=
4  u2 c 2 1  u2 c2
(a) Tau Ceti exploded 16.0 yr before the Sun; (b) they exploded simultaneously see the solution, 0.115 c , 0.257 c , 0.786 c
40
Introduction to Quantum Physics
CHAPTER OUTLINE
40.1 40.2 40.3 40.4 40.5 40.6 40.7 40.8 Blackbody Radiation and Planck's Hypothesis The Photoelectric Effect The Compton Effect Photons and Electromagnetic Waves The Wave Properties of Particles The Quantum Particle The DoubleSlit Experiment Revisited The Uncertainty Principle
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q40.1 Planck made two new assumptions: (1) molecular energy is quantized and (2) molecules emit or absorb energy in discrete irreducible packets. These assumptions contradict the classical idea of energy as continuously divisible. They also imply that an atom must have a definite structureit cannot just be a soup of electrons orbiting the nucleus. The first flaw is that the RayleighJeans law predicts that the intensity of short wavelength radiation emitted by a blackbody approaches infinity as the wavelength decreases. This is known as the ultraviolet catastrophe. The second flaw is the prediction much more power output from a blackbody than is shown experimentally. The intensity of radiation from the blackbody is given by the area under the red I , T vs. curve in Figure 40.5 in the text, not by the area under the blue curve. Planck's Law dealt with both of these issues and brought the theory into agreement with the experimental data by adding an exponential term to the denominator that depends 1 on . This both keeps the predicted intensity from
Q40.2
b g
approaching infinity as the wavelength decreases and keeps the area under the curve finite. Q40.3 Our eyes are not able to detect all frequencies of energy. For example, all objects that are above 0 K in temperature emit electromagnetic radiation in the infrared region. This describes everything in a dark room. We are only able to see objects that emit or reflect electromagnetic radiation in the visible portion of the spectrum. Most stars radiate nearly as blackbodies. Vega has a higher surface temperature than Arcturus. Vega radiates most intensely at shorter wavelengths. No. The second metal may have a larger work function than the first, in which case the incident photons may not have enough energy to eject photoelectrons. Comparing Equation 40.9 with the slopeintercept form of the equation for a straight line, y = mx + b , we see that the slope in Figure 40.11 in the text is Planck's constant h and that the y intercept is  , the negative of the work function. If a different metal were used, the slope would remain the same but the work function would be different, Thus, data for different metals appear as parallel lines on the graph. 461
Q40.4 Q40.5 Q40.6
462 Q40.7
Introduction to Quantum Physics
Wave theory predicts that the photoelectric effect should occur at any frequency, provided the light intensity is high enough. However, as seen in the photoelectric experiments, the light must have a sufficiently high frequency for the effect to occur. The stopping voltage measures the kinetic energy of the most energetic photoelectrons. Each of them has gotten its energy from a single photon. According to Planck's E = hf , the photon energy depends on the frequency of the light. The intensity controls only the number of photons reaching a unit area in a unit time. Let's do some quick calculations and see: 1.62 MHz is the highest frequency in the commercial AM band. From the relationship between the energy and the frequency, E = hf , the energy available from such a wave would be 1.07 10 27 J , or 6.68 neV. That is 9 orders of magnitude too small to eject electrons from the metal. The only thing this student could gain from this experiment is a hefty fine and a long jail term from the FCC. To get on the order of a few eV from this experiment, she would have to broadcast at a minimum frequency of 250 Thz, which is in the infrared region.
Q40.8
Q40.9
Q40.10
No. If an electron breaks free from an atom absorbing a photon, we say the atom is ionized. Ionization typically requires energy of several eV. As with the photoelectric effect in a solid metal, the light must have a sufficiently high frequency for a photon energy that is large enough. The gas can absorb energy from longerwavelength light as it gains more internal energy of random motion of whole molecules. Ultraviolet light has shorter wavelength and higher photon energy than visible light. (c) UV light has the highest frequency of the three, and hence each photon delivers more energy to a skin cell. This explains why you can become sunburned on a cloudy day: clouds block visible light and infrared, but not much ultraviolet. You usually do not become sunburned through window glass, even though you can see the visible light from the Sun coming through the window, because the glass absorbs much of the ultraviolet and reemits it as infrared. The Compton effect describes the scattering of photons from electrons, while the photoelectric effect predicts the ejection of electrons due to the absorption of photons by a material. In developing a theory in accord with experimental evidence, Compton assumed that photons exhibited clear particlelike behavior, and that both energy and momentum are conserved in electronphoton interactions. Photons had previously been thought of as bits of waves. The xray photon transfers some of its energy to the electron. Thus, its frequency must decrease. A few photons would only give a few dots of exposure, apparently randomly scattered. Light has both classicalwave and classicalparticle characteristics. In single and doubleslit experiments light behaves like a wave. In the photoelectric effect light behaves like a particle. Light may be characterized as an electromagnetic wave with a particular wavelength or frequency, yet at the same time light may be characterized as a stream of photons, each carrying a discrete energy, hf. Since light displays both wave and particle characteristics, perhaps it would be fair to call light a "wavicle". It is customary to call a photon a quantum particle, different from a classical particle.
Q40.11 Q40.12
Q40.13 Q40.14
Q40.15 Q40.16 Q40.17
Chapter 40
463
Q40.18
An electron has both classicalwave and classicalparticle characteristics. In single and doubleslit diffraction and interference experiments, electrons behave like classical waves. An electron has mass and charge. It carries kinetic energy and momentum in parcels of definite size, as classical particles do. At the same time it has a particular wavelength and frequency. Since an electron displays characteristics of both classical waves and classical particles, it is neither a classical wave nor a classical particle. It is customary to call it a quantum particle, but another invented term, such as "wavicle", could serve equally well. The discovery of electron diffraction by Davisson and Germer was a fundamental advance in our understanding of the motion of material particles. Newton's laws fail to properly describe the motion of an object with small mass. It moves as a wave, not as a classical particle. Proceeding from this recognition, the development of quantum mechanics made possible describing the motion of electrons in atoms; understanding molecular structure and the behavior of matter at the atomic scale, including electronics, photonics, and engineered materials; accounting for the motion of nucleons in nuclei; and studying elementary particles. If we set p2 = qV , which is the same for both particles, then we see that the electron has the 2m h smaller momentum and therefore the longer wavelength = . p
Q40.19
Q40.20
F GH
I JK
Q40.21 Q40.22
Any object of macroscopic sizeincluding a grain of dusthas an undetectably small wavelength and does not exhibit quantum behavior. A particle is represented by a wave packet of nonzero width. The width necessarily introduces uncertainty in the position of the particle. The width of the wave packet can be reduced toward zero only by adding waves of all possible wavelengths together. Doing this, however, results in loss of all information about the momentum and, therefore, the speed of the particle. The intensity of electron waves in some small region of space determines the probability that an electron will be found in that region. The wavelength of violet light is on the order of 1 m , while the de Broglie wavelength of an 2 electron can be 4 orders of magnitude smaller. Would your height be measured more precisely with 1 an unruled meter stick or with one engraved with divisions down to mm ? 10
Q40.23
Q40.24
Q40.25
The spacing between repeating structures on the surface of the feathers or scales is on the order of 1/2 the wavelength of light. An optical microscope would not have the resolution to see such fine detail, while an electron microscope can. The electrons can have much shorter wavelength. (a) The slot is blacker than any black material or pigment. Any radiation going in through the hole will be absorbed by the walls or the contents of the box, perhaps after several reflections. Essentially none of that energy will come out through the hole again. Figure 40.1 in the text shows this effect if you imagine the beam getting weaker at each reflection.
Q40.26
continued on next page
464
Introduction to Quantum Physics
(b)
The open slots between the glowing tubes are brightest. When you look into a slot, you receive direct radiation emitted by the wall on the far side of a cavity enclosed by the fixture; and you also receive radiation that was emitted by other sections of the cavity wall and has bounced around a few or many times before escaping through the slot. In Figure 40.1 in the text, reverse all of the arrowheads and imagine the beam getting stronger at each reflection. Then the figure shows the extra efficiency of a cavity radiator. Here is the conclusion of Kirchhoff's thermodynamic argument: ... energy radiated. A poor reflectora good absorberavoids rising in temperature by being an efficient emitter. Its emissivity is equal to its absorptivity: e = a . The slot in the box in part (a) of the question is a black body with reflectivity zero and absorptivity 1, so it must also be the most efficient possible radiator, to avoid rising in temperature above its surroundings in thermal equilibrium. Its emissivity in Stefan's law is 100% = 1 , higher than perhaps 0.9 for black paper, 0.1 for lightcolored paint, or 0.04 for shiny metal. Only in this way can the material objects underneath these different surfaces maintain equal temperatures after they come to thermal equilibrium and continue to exchange energy by electromagnetic radiation. By considering one blackbody facing another, Kirchhoff proved logically that the material forming the walls of the cavity made no difference to the radiation. By thinking about inserting color filters between two cavity radiators, he proved that the spectral distribution of blackbody radiation must be a universal function of wavelength, the same for all materials and depending only on the temperature. Blackbody radiation is a fundamental connection between the matter and the energy that physicists had previously studied separately.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 40.1 P40.1 P40.2 T= (a) Blackbody Radiation and Planck's Hypothesis 2.898 10 3 m K = 5.18 10 3 K 560 10 9 m
max = max ~
2.898 10 3 m K 2.898 10 3 m K ~ ~ 10 7 m T 10 4 K 2.898 10 3 m K ~ 10 10 m 10 7 K
ultraviolet
(b) P40.3
 ray
Planck's radiation law gives intensityperwavelength. Taking E to be the photon energy and n to be the number of photons emitted each second, we multiply by area and wavelength range to have energypertime leaving the hole:
P=
b
2 hc 2 2  1 d 2
1
+2 2
n=
8 2 cd 2 2  1 P = 4 2 hc b 1 + 2 g k BT E 1 + 2 e 1
g FH e
5
b
2 hc
b
gb g
1 + 2
2
gk T
B
1
b
g FH
m
b
g
IK IK
= En = nhf
where
E = hf =
2 hc 1 + 2
=
e1 001 10 e
e 3.84  1
9
j FGH e
4
8 2 3.00 10 8 m s 5.00 10 5 m
2 6.626 10
e
je
j e1.00 10
2
9
9
m
j
je j
e
34
Js 3.00 10 m s
je
8
j e1 00110
m 1.38 10
je
23
J K 7 .50 10 3 K
1
IJ K
n=
5.90 10 16 s
j
= 1.30 10 15 s
Chapter 40
465
P40.4
(a) (b)
P = eAT 4 = 1 20.0 10 4 m 2 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 5 000 K
maxT = max
3
e je b5 000 K g = 2.898 10
e e
jb
j
g
4
= 7.09 10 4 W
m K max = 580 nm
(c)
We compute:
g jb The power per wavelength interval is P b g = AI b g =
2 hc 2 A = 2 6.626 10 34 3.00 10 8
6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = = 2.88 10 6 m 23 kBT 1.38 10 J K 5 000 K 2 hc 2 A
5
je
exp hc k B T  1
19
b
g
, and
e
je j
j e20.0 10 j = 7.50 10
2 4
J m4 s
P 580 nm =
a
f
7.50 10 19 J m 4 s
e580 10
9
m
5
exp 2.88 m 0.580 m  1
b
g
=
1.15 10 13 J m s e 4.973  1
= 7.99 10 10 W m (d)(i) The other values are computed similarly:
(d) (e) (f) (c) (g) (h) (i) 1.00 nm 5.00 nm 400 nm 580 nm 700 nm 10.0 cm
hc k B T 2882.6 576.5 7.21 4.97 4.12 2.88 10
5
e hc / kBT  1 7.96 10 1251 2.40 10 250 1347 143.5 60.4 0.00289 2.88 10 5
1.00 mm 0.00288
P ( ), W m 5 7.50 10 26 9.42 10 1226 2.40 10 23 1.00 10 227 7.32 10 13 5.44 10 10 1.15 10 13 7.99 10 10 12 4.46 10 7.38 10 10 7.50 10 4 0.260 7.50 10 14 2.60 10 9
2 hc 2 A
(j)
We approximate the area under the P versus curve, between 400 nm and 700 nm, as two trapezoids:
bg f f
P=
+
a5.44 + 7.99f 10
10
W m 580  400 10 9 m 2 W m 700  580 10 9 m 2 so the power radiated as visible light is approximately 20 kW .
a
a7.99 + 7.38f 10
4
10
a
P = 2.13 10 W
P40.5 (a)
L 3.77 10 W FG P IJ = MM T= H eA K M 1L4 e6.96 10 mj Oe5.67 10 PQ MN MN
14 26 8 2
P = eAT 4 , so
8
W m K
2
4
OP P j PPQ
14
= 5.75 10 3 K
(b)
max =
2.898 10 3 m K 2.898 10 3 m K = = 5.04 10 7 m = 504 nm T 5.75 10 3 K
466 P40.6
Introduction to Quantum Physics
E = hf = n=
hc
e6.626 10 =
34
J s 3.00 10 8 m s
9
je
589.3 10
m
j = 3.37 10
19
J photon
10.0 J s P = = 2.96 10 19 photons s E 3.37 10 19 J photon E = hf = 6.626 10 34 J s 620 10 12 s 1
P40.7
(a)
e e e
je je je
(b)
E = hf = 6.626 10 34 J s 3.10 10 9 s 1
(c)
E = hf = 6.626 10 34 J s 46.0 10 6 s 1
1 eV jFGH 1.60.0010 1 eV jFGH 1.60.0010 1 eV jFGH 1.60.0010
19
19
19
IJ = 2.57 eV JK I = 1.28 10 J JK I = 1.91 10 J JK
5
eV
7
eV
(d)
= = =
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 4.84 10 7 m = 484 nm, visible light blue 12 f 620 10 Hz c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 9.68 10 2 m = 9.68 cm, radio wave f 3.10 10 9 Hz c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 6.52 m, radio wave f 46.0 10 6 Hz
a f
P40.8
Energy of a single 500nm photon: E = hf = hc =
e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 e500 10 mj
34 9
8
ms
j = 3.98 10
3
19
J.
The energy entering the eye each second E = Pt = IAt = 4.00 10 11 W m 2
e
jLMN e8.50 10 4
m
j OPQa1.00 sf = 2.27 10
2
15
J.
The number of photons required to yield this energy n= 2.27 10 15 J E = = 5.71 10 3 photons . E 3.98 10 19 J photon E = hf = 6.626 10 34 99.7 10 6 = 6.61 10 26 J . 150 10 3 J s 6.61 10
26
P40.9
Each photon has an energy This implies that there are
e
je
j
J photon
= 2.27 10 30 photons s .
Chapter 40
467
P40.10
We take = 0.030 0 radians. Then the pendulum's total energy is
a f E = b1.00 kg ge9.80 m s jb1.00  0.999 5g = 4.41 10
E = mgh = mg L  L cos
2
3
J
The frequency of oscillation is f = The energy is quantized, Therefore,
1 = 2 2
g = 0.498 Hz . L
E = nhf . n= 4.41 10 3 J E = hf 6.626 10 34 J s 0.498 s 1
e
je
j
FIG. P40.10
= 1.34 10 31 P40.11 The radiation wavelength of = 500 nm that is observed by observers on Earth is not the true wavelength, , emitted by the star because of the Doppler effect. The true wavelength is related to the observed wavelength using: c
=
c
b g: 1 + bv cg
1 v c
=
b g = a500 nmf 1 + bv c g
1 v c
1  0.280 = 375 nm . 1 + 0.280
a a
f f
The temperature of the star is given by T= 2.898 10 3 m K
maxT = 2.898 10 3 m K :
T= 2.898 10 3 m K = 7.73 10 3 K . 9 375 10 .
max
:
P40.12
Planck's radiation law is
I , T =
b g b g
5 e hc k BT  1
e
2 hc 2
j
Using the series expansion Planck's law reduces to
ex = 1 + x + I , T =
x 2 x3 + + .... 2! 3!
5
b1 + hc k T + ...g  1
B
2 hc 2
hc k B T
5
b
2 hc 2
g
=
2 ck B T
4
which is the RayleighJeans law, for very long wavelengths.
Section 40.2 P40.13 (a)
The Photoelectric Effect
c
e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 m sj = = = a4.20 eVfe1.60 10 J eVj
hc
34 8 19
296 nm
fc = hc
c
c
=
3.00 10 8 m s 296 10 9 m
= 1.01 10 15 Hz
34 8
(b)
= + eVS :
e6.626 10 je3.00 10 j = a4.20 eVfe1.60 10
180 10 9 VS = 2.71 V
19
J eV + 1.60 10 19 VS
j e
j
Therefore,
468 P40.14
Introduction to Quantum Physics
K max = (a)
1 1 2 mv max = 9.11 10 31 4.60 10 5 2 2
e
je
j
2
= 9.64 10 20 J = 0.602 eV
= E  K max =
fc =
1 240 eV nm  0.602 nm = 1.38 eV 625 nm
(b)
1.38 eV 1.60 10 19 J = = 3.34 10 14 Hz 34 1 eV h 6.626 10 Js
hc Li:
F GH
I JK
P40.15
(a)
c =
c =
Be:
c
Hg:
c
e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 m sj = 540 nm a2.30 eVfe1.60 10 J eVj e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 m sj = 318 nm = a3.90 eVfe1.60 10 J eVj e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 m sj = 276 nm = a4.50 eVfe1.60 10 J eVj
34 8 19 34 8 19 34 8 19
< c for photo current. Thus, only lithium will exhibit the photoelectric effect.
(b) For lithium, hc = + K max
34
e6.626 10
K max P40.16 From condition (i),
J s 3.00 10 8 m s
9
je
400 10 m = 1.29 10 19 J = 0.808 eV and b g g = bV g + 1.48 V .
S2
j = a2.30 eVfe1.60 10 j + K
19
max
hf = e VS1 + 1
hf = e VS 2 + 2
b
g
b V
Then From condition (ii),
S1
2  1 = 1.48 eV .
hf c 1 = 1 = 0.600 hf c 2 = 0.600 2
2  0.600 2 = 1.48 eV 2 = 3.70 eV
P40.17 (a) eVS = eVS = hc  =  =
1 = 2.22 eV .
hc
1 240 nm eV  0.376 eV = 1.90 eV 546.1 nm
(b)
1 240 nm eV  1.90 eV VS = 0. 216 V 587.5 nm
Chapter 40
469
P40.18
The energy needed is The energy absorbed in time interval t is so t = E 1.60 10 19 J = IA 500 J s m 2 2.82 10 15 m
E = 1.00 eV = 1.60 10 19 J .
E = Pt = IAt
e
jLNM e
OP = 1.28 10 jQ
2
7
s = 148 days .
The gross failure of the classical theory of the photoelectric effect contrasts with the success of quantum mechanics. P40.19 Ultraviolet photons will be absorbed to knock electrons out of the sphere with maximum kinetic energy K max = hf  , or K max
e6.626 10 =
34
J s 3.00 10 8 m s
9
je
200 10
m
j F 1.00 eV I  4.70 eV = 1.51 eV . GH 1.60 10 J JK
19
The sphere is left with positive charge and so with positive potential relative to V = 0 at r = . As its potential approaches 1.51 V, no further electrons will be able to escape, but will fall back onto the sphere. Its charge is then given by V= P40.20 (a) k eQ r or Q= 5.00 10 2 m 1.51 N m C rV = = 8.41 10 12 C . ke 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2
e
jb
g
By having the photon source move toward the metal, the incident photons are Doppler shifted to higher frequencies, and hence, higher energy. If v = 0.280 c , Therefore, f= f 1+v c = 7.00 10 14 1v c
(b)
e
j
1.28 = 9.33 10 14 Hz . 0.720
= 6.626 10 34 J s 9.33 10 14 Hz = 6.18 10 19 J = 3.87 eV .
f = 3.05 10 15 Hz
e
je
j
(c)
At v = 0.900 c ,
and K max = hf  = 6.626 10 34 J s 3.05 10 15 Hz
e
je
1 eV jFGH 1.60.0010 J IJK  3.87 eV =
19
8.78 eV .
Section 40.3 P40.21 E= p= hc
The Compton Effect =
e6.626 10
34
J s 3.00 10 8 m s
9
je
h
700 10
m
j = 2.84 10
19
J = 1.78 eV
=
6.626 10 34 J s = 9.47 10 28 kg m s 9 700 10 m
470 P40.22
Introduction to Quantum Physics
(a)
=
h 6.626 10 34 1  cos 37.0 = 4.88 10 13 m 1  cos : = mec 9.11 10 31 3.00 10 8
a
f
e
je
j
a
f
(b)
E0 =
hc
0
:
e
300 10 3 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV =
je
6.626 10 je3.00 10 j e
34 0
8
ms
j
0 = 4.14 10 12 m = 0 + = 4.63 10 12 m
E =
and
6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = = 4.30 10 14 J = 268 keV 4.63 10 12 m
e
je
j
(c) P40.23
K e = E0  E = 300 keV  268.5 keV = 31.5 keV E = E0  E
With K e = E , K e = E0  E gives E = E0 hc and = E 2
=
= 0 + C 1  cos
a
f
hc hc =2 = 2 0 E0 2 E0
2 0 = 0 + C 1  cos
1  cos =
a
f
= 70.0
0 0.001 60 = C 0.002 43
P40.24
This is Compton scattering through 180: E0 =
e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 m sj = 11.3 keV e0.110 10 mje1.60 10 J eVj h = a1  cos f = e2.43 10 mja1  cos 180f = 4.86 10 m c
hc
34 8
=
0
9
19
12
12
m E =
e
FIG. P40.24
hc = 10.8 keV . h h By conservation of momentum for the photonelectron system, i= i + pe i 0
= 0 + = 0.115 nm so
e j
+
and
pe = h
p e = 6.626 10
e
34
F e3.00 10 J sjG GH 1.60 10
8
ms c
19
j IJ FG 1 J eV J H 0.110 10 K
FG 1 H
0
1
IJ K
9
m
+
1 0.115 10
9
IJ = mK
22.1 keV . c
By conservation of system energy, so that Check:
2 E 2 = p 2 c 2 + m e c 4 or
11.3 keV = 10.8 keV + K e K e = 478 eV .
a511 keV + 0.478 keVf = a22.1 keVf + a511 keVf
2 2
em c
e 2
2
+ Ke
j = bpcg + em c j
2 2 e
2 2
2.62 10 11 = 2.62 10 11
Chapter 40
471
P40.25
(a)
Conservation of momentum in the x direction gives: or since = , Conservation of momentum in the y direction gives: which (neglecting the trivial solution = 0 ) gives: Substituting [2] into [1] gives: h 2h = cos , or 0
p = p cos + p e cos h h = pe + cos . 0 0 = p sin  p e sin , p e = p = h . [2] [3]
FG H
IJ K
[1]
= 2 0 cos .  0 =
h 1  cos mec
Then the Compton equation is giving or hc
a
f f f
2 0 cos  0 = 2 cos  1 =
h 1  cos mec
a
hc 1 1  cos . 0 mec 2
a
Since E =
0
, this may be written as:
2 cos  1 =
FE GH m c
e
2
I a1  cos f JK
e 2
which reduces to: m e c 2 + E 2m e c + E
2
F 2 + E I cos = 1 + E GH m c JK m c
e 2
or cos =
=
0.511 MeV + 0.880 MeV = 0.732 so that = = 43.0 . 1.02 MeV + 0.880 MeV E hc hc 0.880 MeV = = = = 0.602 MeV = 602 keV . 0 2 cos 2 cos 43.0 2 cos
(b)
Using Equation (3): E = Then, p =
a
f
E c
=
0.602 MeV = 3.21 10 22 kg m s . c
(c)
From Equation (2), p e = p =
0.602 MeV = 3.21 10 22 kg m s . c
From energy conservation: K e = E  E = 0.880 MeV  0.602 MeV = 0.278 MeV = 278 keV .
472 P40.26
Introduction to Quantum Physics
The energy of the incident photon is E0 = p c = (a)
hc . 0
Conserving momentum in the x direction gives p = p e cos + p cos , or since = , E0 = p e + p cos . c
d
i
[1]
Conserving momentum in the y direction (with = 0 ) yields 0 = p sin  p e sin , or p e = p = h . [2]
Substituting Equation [2] into Equation [1] gives E0 2 hc h h = + cos . cos , or = E0 c By the Compton equation,  0 = which reduces to Thus, h 1  cos , mec
FG H
IJ K
[3]
a
f
2 hc 2 hc h = 1  cos cos  E0 E0 mec
a
f
e 2m c
e
2
+ E0 cos = m e c 2 + E0 .
j
= = cos 1
2 hc 2 hc m e c 2 + E0 cos = . E0 E0 2 m e c 2 + E0 hc hc = 2 2 hc E0 m e c + E0
F m c +E I GH 2m c + E JK
e 2 e 2 0 0
.
(b)
From Equation [3],
=
F GH
I JK
Therefore,
E =
b
ge
j e 2m c
e
2
+ E0
j
=
E 0 2 m e c 2 + E0 2 m e c 2 + E0
F GH
I JK
,
and
p =
E c
=
E0 2 m e c 2 + E0 2 c m e c 2 + E0
F GH
I JK
.
(c)
From conservation of energy, K e = E0  E = E0 
E0 2 m e c 2 + E0 2 m e c 2 + E0
F GH
I JK
j
.
or
Ke =
2 E 0 2 m e c 2 + 2 E0  2 m e c 2  E 0 E0 = 2 2 m e c + E0 2 m e c 2 + E0
F GH
I JK
e
Finally, from Equation (2), p e = p =
E0 2 m e c 2 + E 0 2 c m e c 2 + E0
F GH
I JK
.
Chapter 40
473
*P40.27
The electron's kinetic energy is K= 1 1 mv 2 = 9.11 10 31 kg 2.18 10 6 m s 2 2
e
j
2
= 2.16 10 18 J .
This is the energy lost by the photon, hf 0  hf hc hc  = 2.16 10 18 J. We also have 0
 0 =
h 6.63 10 34 Js s 1  cos = 1  cos 17.4 me c 9.11 10 31 kg 3 10 8 m
a
f
e
j
a
f
= 0 + 1.11 10 13 m
(a) Combining the equations by substitution, 1  1 2.16 10 18 J s = = 1.09 10 7 m 0 + 0.111 pm 6.63 10 34 Js 3 10 8 m
0
e
j
0 + 0.111 pm  0 = 1.09 10 7 m 2 + 0 0.111 pm 0
b
0.111 pm = 1.09 10 7 m 2 + 1.21 10 6 0 0 1.09 10 7 2 + 1.21 10 6 m 0  1.11 10 13 m 2 = 0 0
e
g
j
0 =
1. 21 10 6 m
e1.21 10
j  4e1.09 10 je1.11 10 2e1.09 10 j
6
m
2
7
13
m2
j
7
only the positive answer is physical: 0 = 1.01 10 10 m . (b) Then = 1.01 10 10 m + 1.11 10 13 m = 1.01 10 10 m. Conservation of momentum in the transverse direction: 0= h sin  m e v sin
9.11 10 31 kg 2.18 10 6 m s sin 6.63 10 34 J s sin 17.4 = 2 1.01 10 10 m 1  2.18 10 6 3 10 8
e
j
e
j
1.96 10 24 = 1.99 10 24 sin
= 81.1
474 P40.28
Introduction to Quantum Physics
(a)
Thanks to Compton we have four equations in the unknowns , v, and : hc hc = + me c 2  me c 2 0 h (energy conservation) (momentum in (momentum in [1] [2] [3] [4]
0
0=
=
h cos 2 + m e v cos
x direction) y direction)
h sin 2  m e v sin h 1  cos 2 mec
 0 =
b
g
(Compton equation). 2h cos .
Using sin 2 = 2 sin cos in Equation [3] gives m e v =
Substituting this into Equation [2] and using cos 2 = 2 cos 2  1 yields h h h 2h = 2 cos 2  1 + cos 2 = 4 cos 2  1 , 0
e
j
e
j
or
= 4 0 cos 2  0 .
h hc 1  2 cos 2  1 = 2 1  cos 2 . mec mec 2
[5]
Substituting the last result into the Compton equation gives 4 0 cos 2  2 0 =
e
j
e
j
With the substitution 0 = cos 2 = For x = m e c 2 + E0 2 m e c + E0
2
hc , this reduces to E0 E 1+x where x 0 2 . 2+x me c 1+ x = 33.0 . 2+x FIG. P40.28(a)
=
0.700 MeV = 1.37 , this gives = cos 1 0.511 MeV
(b)
From Equation [5], = 0 4 cos 2  1 = 0 4 Then, Equation [1] becomes
e
j
LM FG 1 + x IJ  1OP = FG 2 + 3x IJ . N H 2 + xK Q H 2 + x K
0 0 e 2 0 e 2
FG 2 + x IJ + m c  m c or E  E FG 2 + x IJ + 1 = . H 2 + 3x K m c m c H 2 + 3x K F 2 + x IJ , and with x = 1.37 we get = 1.614 . Thus, = 1 + x  xG H 2 + 3x K
hc = hc
0 0 e 2 e 2
Therefore,
v = 1  2 = 1  0.384 = 0.785 or v = 0.785 c . c
Chapter 40
475
P40.29
 =
h 1  cos me c
a
f f a f
h 1  cos  mec h h h h  =   cos  + cos me c me c mec mec
 =
a
Now cos  =  cos , so  = 2 P40.30
a
f
h = 0.004 86 nm . mec
FIG. P40.29
Maximum energy loss appears as maximum increase in wavelength, which occurs for scattering 2h h = angle 180. Then = 1  cos 180 where m is the mass of the target particle. The mc mc fractional energy loss is
a
fFGH IJK
2 h mc E0  E hc 0  hc  0 = = . = = 0 + 0 + 2 h mc E0 hc 0 Further, 0 = (a) 2 h mc E  E 2 E0 hc = = , so 0 . 2 E0 E0 hc E0 + 2 h mc mc + 2E0
For scattering from a free electron, mc 2 = 0.511 MeV , so 2 0.511 MeV E0  E = = 0.667 . E0 0.511 MeV + 2 0.511 MeV
a
a
f
f
(b)
For scattering from a free proton, mc 2 = 938 MeV , and 2 0.511 MeV E0  E = = 0.001 09 . E0 938 MeV + 2 0.511 MeV
a
a
f
f
Section 40.4 *P40.31
Photons and Electromagnetic Waves
With photon energy 10.0 eV = hf f= 10.0 1.6 10 19 J 6.63 10
34
e
Js
j = 2.41 10
15
Hz .
Any electromagnetic wave with frequency higher than 2.41 10 15 Hz counts as ionizing radiation. This includes far ultraviolet light, xrays, and gamma rays.
476 *P40.32
Introduction to Quantum Physics
The photon energy is E = beam is 2 10 18 vector I = Sav =
e
19 J . The power carried by the 633 10 m photons s 3.14 10 19 J photon = 0.628 W . Its intensity is the average Poynting
hc
=
6.63 10 34 J s 3 10 8 m s
9
e
j = 3.14 10
je
P = r 2 1.75 10 3 m
0.628 W 4
e
af
j
j
2
= 2.61 10 5 W m 2 .
(a)
Sav =
1
0
Erms Brms sin 90 =
0
1 Emax Bmax 2 2
. Also Emax = Bmax c . So Sav =
2 Emax . 2 0 c
Emax = 2 0 cSav
b
g
12
= 2 4 10 7 Tm A 3 10 8 m s 2.61 10 5 W m 2
ee
je
je
jj
12
= 1. 40 10 4 N C Bmax = (b) 1.40 10 4 N C 3 10 m s
8
= 4.68 10 5 T
Each photon carries momentum
P E . The beam transports momentum at the rate . It c c imparts momentum to a perfectly reflecting surface at the rate 2 0.628 W 2P = force = = 4.19 10 9 N . c 3 10 8 m s
a
f
(c)
The block of ice absorbs energy mL = Pt melting Pt 0.628 W 1.5 3 600 s m= = = 1.02 10 2 kg . L 3.33 10 5 J kg
b
g
Section 40.5 P40.33
The Wave Properties of Particles h h 6.626 10 34 J s = = = 3.97 10 13 m p mv 1.67 10 27 kg 1.00 10 6 m s
=
e
je
j
P40.34
(a)
p2 = 50.0 1.60 10 19 J 2m p = 3.81 10 24 kg m s
a fe
j
=
h = 0.174 nm p
(b)
p2 = 50.0 10 3 1.60 10 19 J 2m p = 1. 20 10 22 kg m s
e
je
j
h = 5.49 10 12 m p The relativistic answer is slightly more precise:
=
=
h = p
LMemc N
hc
2
+K
j
2
 m2c4
OP Q
12
= 5.37 10 12 m .
Chapter 40
477
P40.35
(a)
Electron: and
= =
h p h 2m e K
and =
K=
p2 m2v2 1 = mev 2 = e 2 2m e 2m e 6.626 10 34 J s
so
p = 2m e K
2 9.11 10 31 kg 3.00 1.60 10 19 J
e
ja fe
j
so f= E h
= 7.09 10 10 m = 0.709 nm .
(b) Photon:
=
c f
and
E = hf
and
=
6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = = 4.14 10 7 m = 414 nm . 19 E J 3 1.60 10
e
e
je
j
j
P40.36
(a)
The wavelength of a nonrelativistic particle of mass m is given by =
h h = where the p 2mK kinetic energy K is in joules. If the neutron kinetic energy K n is given in electron volts, its
kinetic energy in joules is K = 1.60 10 19 J eV K n and the equation for the wavelength becomes 6.626 10 34 J s 2 1.67 10 27 kg 1.60 10 19 J eV K n 2.87 10 11 Kn
e
j
=
h 2mK
=
e
je
j
=
m
where K n is expressed in electron volts. (b) If K n = 1.00 keV = 1 000 eV , then h
=
2.87 10 11 1 000
m = 9.07 10 13 m = 907 fm .
P40.37
(a)
~ 10 14 m or less.
p=
~
6.6 10 34 J s = 10 19 kg m s or more. 14 m 10
2 The energy of the electron is E = p 2 c 2 + m e c 4 ~
e10 j e3 10 j + e9 10 j e3 10 j
19 2 8 2 31 2
8 4
or so that (b)
E ~ 10 11 J ~ 10 8 eV or more, K = E  m e c 2 ~ 10 8 eV  0.5 10 6 eV ~ 10 8 eV or more.
e
j
The electric potential energy of the electronnucleus system would be 9 10 9 N m 2 C 2 10 19 C  e k e q1 q 2 ~ ~ 10 5 eV . Ue = 14 r 10 m With its K + U e >> 0 , the electron would immediately escape the nucleus .
e
je
ja f
478 P40.38
Introduction to Quantum Physics
From the condition for Bragg reflection, m = 2d sin = 2d cos But d = a sin
FG IJ H 2K
FG IJ . H 2K
where a is the lattice spacing. Thus, with m = 1,
= 2 a sin =
FG IJ cosFG IJ = a sin H 2K H 2K
6.626 10 34 J s
31
FIG. P40.38
19
=
h = p
h 2m e K
2 9.11 10
e
kg 54.0 1.60 10
je
J
j
= 1.67 10 10 m .
Therefore, the lattice spacing is a = P40.39 (a) E2 = p 2 c 2 + m 2c 4 with E = hf , so p= h
1.67 10 10 m = = 2.18 10 10 = 0.218 nm . sin sin 50.0
h2 c 2
and + h2 c 2 and
mc =
h
C
= 1 1 + 2 2 C (Eq. 1).
h2 f 2 = f 1 = . c 1
2
2 C
FG f IJ H cK
2
(b)
For a photon The third term
in Equation 1 for electrons and other massive particles shows that C they will always have a different frequency from photons of the same wavelength .
*P40.40
For the massive particle, K =  1 mc 2 and m =
h h = . For the photon (which we represent as ), p mv ch mv v c ch ch ch = = = = . Then the ratio is . E = K and = = 2 2 m f E K  1 mc  1 mc h  1 c
b g
(a)
m m
=
1  0.9 2
LMFH1 N
b g 1a0.9f
1 0.001
b g
1  0.9 2  1
IK OP = Q
2
1.60
(b)
=
L 1  a0.001f MF 1 NH
2
a
O= 1  a0.001f I  1P K Q
FG 1 IJ v H 2K c
f
2.00 10 3
(c)
As
v 1, and  1 becomes nearly equal to . Then 1= 1 . m c
v v2 0, 1 2 c c
(d)
As
F GH
I JK
1 2
11 
2 2
1 =
vc 2c 1 v2 1 = . and 2 2 2 m 2 c v 12 v c
b ge
j
Chapter 40
479
P40.41
=
h p
p=
h
=
6.626 10 34 J s = 6.63 10 23 kg m s 1.00 10 11 m
(a)
electrons:
6.63 10 23 p2 = Ke = J = 15.1 keV 2m e 2 9.11 10 31
e
e
j
2
j
The relativistic answer is more precisely correct:
2 K e = p 2 c 2 + m e c 4  m e c 2 = 14.9 keV .
(b) P40.42 (a)
photons:
E = pc = 6.63 10 23 3.00 10 8 = 124 keV h h = . If w is the width of the diffracting aperture, p mv
e
je
j
The wavelength of the student is = then we need so that d we get: v
FG h IJ H mv K F 6.626 10 J s I = h = 10.0G v 10.0 mw H b80.0 kg ga0.750 mf JK
w 10.0 = 10.0
34
1.10 10 34 m s .
(b) (c)
Using t =
t
0.150 m = 1.36 10 33 s . 34 1.10 10 ms
No . The minimum time to pass through the door is over 10 15 times the age of the Universe.
Section 40.6 *P40.43
The Quantum Particle h 1 . mu 2 = hf and = mu 2 mu 2 h u = = v phase . 2 h mu 2
E=K =
v phase = f =
This is different from the speed u at which the particle transports mass, energy, and momentum. *P40.44 As a bonus, we begin by proving that the phase speed v p = vp =
is not the speed of the particle. k
p2c2 + m2c4 2m 2 v2 c 2 + m 2 c 4 c2 c2 v2 c2 c2 = = = c 1+ 2 2 = c 1+ 2 1 2 = c 1+ 2 1 = k v mv v v c v 2m2 v2
F GH
I JK
In fact, the phase speed is larger than the speed of light. A point of constant phase in the wave function carries no mass, no energy, and no information. Now for the group speed: continued on next page
480
Introduction to Quantum Physics
vg = vg =
d d dE d = = = m2c4 + p2c2 dk d k dp dp 1 2 4 m c + p2c2 2
e
j e0 + 2 pc j =
1 2 2
p2c4 p2c2 + m2c4
v2 1  v2 c2 2m 2 v 2 =c 2 =c vg = c 2 2 2 m v + m2c2 v 1  v2 c2 + c2
e
e
j
j
v2 1  v2 c2
ev
e
2
+c v
2
2
j e1  v c j
2 2
j
=v
It is this speed at which mass, energy, and momentum are transported.
Section 40.7 P40.45 (a)
The DoubleSlit Experiment Revisited
=
h 6.626 10 34 J s = = 9.92 10 7 m mv 1.67 10 27 kg 0.400 m s
e
jb
g
(b)
For destructive interference in a multipleslit experiment, d sin = m + the first minimum. Then, so y = tan L
FG H
1 , with m = 0 for 2
IJ K
= sin 1
FG IJ = 0.028 4 H 2d K y = L tan = a10.0 mfbtan 0.028 4g = j FGH
4.96 mm .
(c) P40.46
We cannot say the neutron passed through one slit. We can only say it passed through the slits.
Consider the first bright band away from the center:
d sin = m
e6.00 10
me v = K= h
8
m sin tan 1
=
and
h so me v
LM 0.400 OPIJ = a1f = 1.20 10 N 200 QK
10
m
m2v2 1 h2 = = eV mev 2 = e 2 2m e 2 m e 2 2 1.60 10 19
h2 V = 2 em e 2 *P40.47
V =
e
e6.626 10 C je9.11 10
34 31
j kg je1.20 10
Js
2
10
m
j
2
= 105 V .
We find the speed of each electron from energy conservation in the firing process: 1 0 = K f + U f = mv 2  eV 2 v= 2 eV = m 2 1.6 10 19 C 45 V 9.11 10
31
a
kg
f = 3.98 10
6
ms
The time of flight is t = apart is I =
x 0.28 m = = 7.04 10 8 s . The current when electrons are 28 cm 6 v 3.98 10 m s
q e 1.6 10 19 C = = = 2.27 10 12 A . t t 7.04 10 8 s
Chapter 40
481
Section 40.8 P40.48 (a) (b)
The Uncertainty Principle px = mvx 2 so v h 2 J s = = 0. 250 m s . 4 mx 4 2.00 kg 1.00 m
b
ga
f
The duck might move by 0. 25 m s 5 s = 1.25 m . With original position uncertainty of 1.00 m, we can think of x growing to 1.00 m + 1.25 m = 2.25 m .
b
ga f
P40.49
For the electron,
p = m e v = 9.11 10 31 kg 500 m s 1.00 10 4 = 4.56 10 32 kg m s x = Js 6.626 10 h = = 1.16 mm . 32 4 p 4 4.56 10 kg m s
34
e
jb
ge
j
For the bullet,
p = mv = 0.020 0 kg 500 m s 1.00 10 4 = 1.00 10 3 kg m s x = h = 5.28 10 32 m . 4 p
b
e
gb
ge
j
j
P40.50
y p y h = and dp y . x px 4 Eliminate p y and solve for x. d x = 4 p x y : h
b g
x = 4 1.00 10
28
e
3
kg 100 m s 1.00 10
jb
ge
2
e2.00 10 mj e6.626 10
3
m
j
34
Js
j
The answer, x = 3.79 10 P40.51
m , is 190 times greater than the diameter of the Universe!
With x = 2 10 15 m m, the uncertainty principle requires p x
= 2.6 10 20 kg m s . 2 x The average momentum of the particle bound in a stationary nucleus is zero. The uncertainty in momentum measures the rootmeansquare momentum, so we take p rms 3 10 20 kg m s . For an electron, the nonrelativistic approximation p = m e v would predict v 3 10 10 m s , while v cannot be greater than c. Thus, a better solution would be E = me c 2
LMe N
j + bpcg OPQ
2 2
12
56 MeV = m e c 2 so v 0.999 96 c .
110 =
For a proton, v = *P40.52 (a) (b) K=
1
1  v2 c2
p gives v = 1.8 10 7 m s, less than onetenth the speed of light. m
mv p2 1 mv 2 = = 2 2m 2m
a f
2
To find the minimum kinetic energy, think of the minimum momentum uncertainty, and maximum position uncertainty of 10 15 m = x . We model the proton as moving along a . The average momentum is zero. The average squared , p = 2 x 2 momentum is equal to the squared uncertainty: straight line with px =
2 2 2 6.63 10 34 J s p p2 = 8.33 10 13 J K= = = = = 2 2 2 2m 2m x 2m 32 2 x m 32 2 10 15 m 1.67 10 27 kg 4
b g
a f
a f
e
j
2
e
j
= 5.21 MeV
482 P40.53
Introduction to Quantum Physics
(a)
At the top of the ladder, the woman holds a pellet inside a small region xi . Thus, the uncertainty principle requires her to release it with typical horizontal momentum 2H 1 , so p x = mv x = . It falls to the floor in a travel time given by H = 0 + gt 2 as t = 2 g 2 x i the total width of the impact points is x f = xi + v x t = xi + where A= 2H . g or 1 A =0 xi2
b g
FG IJ 2 m x K H
i
A 2H = x i + g x i
2m
To minimize x f , we require so
d x f
i
d i =0 d b x g
2 2H m g
xi = A .
The minimum width of the impact points is
dx i = FGH x + A IJK x
f min i i
=2 A =
xi = A 34 12
F I GH JK
2
14
.
(b)
L 2e1.054 6 10 J sj OP L 2a2.00 mf O x i =M d MN 5.00 10 kg PQ MNM 9.80 m s PQP
f min 4
14
= 5.19 10 16 m
Additional Problems P40.54 VS =
FG h IJ f  H eK e
From two points on the graph and
FG h IJ e4.1 10 Hzj  H eK e F hI 3.3 V = G J e12 10 Hzj  . H eK e
0=
14 14
Combining these two expressions we find: (a) (b) (c)
= 1.7 eV
h = 4. 2 10 15 V s e At the cutoff wavelength hc
FIG. P40.54
c
= =
FG h IJ ec H eK
c 8
c = 4.2 10 15 V s 1.6 10 19 C
e
je
e3 10 m s j a1.7 eVfe1.6 10 j J eVj =
19
730 nm
Chapter 40
483
P40.55
We want an Einstein plot of K max versus f
, nm 588 505 445 399
(a) (b)
f , 10 14 Hz K max , eV 5.10 0.67 5.94 6.74 7.52 slope = 0.98 1.35 1.63 0.402 eV 8% 10 14 Hz 10 fFGH 1.60 10
eVS = hf  h = 0.402
a
19
Js
14
I= JK
6. 4 10 34 J s 8% f (THz) FIG. P40.55
(c)
K max = 0 at f 344 10 12 Hz
= hf = 2.32 10 19 J = 1.4 eV
P40.56 From the path the electrons follow in the magnetic field, the maximum kinetic energy is seen to be: K max = From the photoelectric equation, Thus, the work function is e2B2 R 2 . 2m e hc
K max = hf  =
 .  e2B2 R2 . 2m e
=
hc
 K max =
hc
P40.57
=
6.626 10 34 J s h 1  cos = 0.234 = 3.09 10 16 m 27 8 mp c kg 3.00 10 m s 1.67 10
a
f
e
e
je
j
j
a
f
6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc 0 = = = 6.20 10 15 m E0 200 MeV 1.60 10 13 J MeV
e
a
fe
je
j
j
= 0 + = 6.51 10
(a) (b) E =
15
m
hc = 191 MeV
K p = 9.20 MeV
484 P40.58
Introduction to Quantum Physics
Isolate the terms involving in Equations 40.13 and 40.14. Square and add to eliminate . h2 Solve for v2 b = : 2 c b + c2
e
j
Substitute into Eq. 40.12: Square each side: From this we get Eq. 40.11: P40.59
OP Q F h IJ LM 1  1 OP = = FG 1  b IJ = c + b . 1+G H m cKN Q H b + c K c F h IL 2 hc L 1 h c + MN  1 OPQ + m LMN 1  1 OPQ = c + GH m JK MN 1 m F h IJ 1  cos .  = G H m cK
b= 1 1 2 cos h + 2  . 2 2 0 me 0
1 2 2 e 0 2 2 2 2 2 e 0 2 e 2 2 0 2 e 0 e
LM 1 N
2 0 2
+
LM N
1 2 cos 2  = 2me v2 2 0
OP Q
2 0
+
1 2 cos  . 0 2
OP Q
Show that if all of the energy of a photon is transmitted to an electron, momentum will not be conserved. hc hc hc =0 = + K e = m e c 2  1 if Energy: 0 h h = + m e v = m e v if = Momentum: 0 h = +1 From (1), 0mec
b g
(1) (2) (3) (4)
v = c 1
FG m c IJ H h + m cK
0 e 0 e 2 0 e 0 e
2
Substitute (3) and (4) into (2) and show the inconsistency: h
0
F h IJ m c = G1 + H m cK
0 e e
F m c IJ 1G H h+ m cK
=
0 m e c + h h h + 2 0 m e c h = 2 0 0 h + 0 me c
b b
g
g
h + 2 0 m e c . h
This is impossible, so all of the energy of a photon cannot be transmitted to an electron. P40.60 Begin with momentum expressions: Equating these expressions, Thus, p= h
or
FG v IJ = FG h IJ 1 = . H c K H mc K bv cg = FG IJ HK 1  b v cg FG v IJ = FG IJ  FG IJ FG v IJ H cK H K H K H cK b g = 1 v = c 1 + b g b g + 1
C 2 2 C 2 2 C 2 C 2 2 2 2 C 2 2 2 C C
, and p = mv = mc
FG v IJ . H cK
giving
v=
c 1 + C
b
g
2
.
Chapter 40
485
P40.61
(a)
Starting with Planck's law, the total power radiated per unit area Change variables by letting
I , T =
0
b g
2 hc 2
5 e hc k BT  1
0
zb g
I , T d =
z
2 hc 2
5 e hc k BT  1
d .
hc k B T hcd and dx =  . k B T2 Note that as varies from 0 , x varies from 0 . 4 2 k B T 4 Then I , T d =  h3 c 2 0 x=
zb g
Therefore,
zb
0
I , T d =
g
F I GH 15h c JK T
4 2 5 k B 3 2
ze
0
x3 e 1
x
j
dx =
4 2k B T 4 4 . 15 h3 c 2
F I GH JK
4
= T4 .
(b)
From part (a),
=
15 h 3 c 2
4 2 5 k B
=
2 5 1.38 10 23 J K 15 6.626 10 34 J s
e
j
4 8
e
j e3.00 10
3
ms
j
2
= 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 .
P40.62 Planck's law states I , T =
b g
2 hc 2
5 e hc k BT  1
1
= 2 hc 2 5 e hc k BT  1
1
.
To find the wavelength at which this distribution has a maximum, compute dI = 2 hc 2 5 6 e hc k BT  1 d 2 hc 2 dI = d 6 e hc k BT  1 Letting x =
R  S  T
 5 e hc k BT  1 e hc k BT e hc k BT
2 hc k T B
e
xe x hc = 5. , the condition for a maximum becomes x k B T e 1 We zero in on the solution to this transcendental equation by iterations as shown in the table below. The solution is found to be x 4.000 00 4.500 00 5.000 00 4.900 00 4.950 00 4.975 00 4.963 00 4.969 00 4.966 00 x= xe x e x  1 4.074 629 4 4.550 552 1 5.033 918 3 4.936 762 0 4.985 313 0 5.009 609 0 4.997 945 2 5.003 776 7 5.000 860 9 and
R hc 5 + S k T  T
B
U =0 V 1  W
F  hc I U = 0 V GH k T JK   W
2 B
e
j
x 4.964 50 4.965 50 4.965 00 4.965 25 4.965 13 4.965 07 4.965 10 4.965 115
xe x e x  1 4.999 403 0 5.000 374 9 4.999 889 0 5.000 132 0 5.000 015 3 4.999 957 0 4.999 986 2 5.000 000 8 hc . 4.965 115 k B
e
j
hc = 4.965 115 max k B T
maxT =
continued on next page
486
Introduction to Quantum Physics
Thus, max
e6.626 075 10 T=
34
J s 2.997 925 10 8 m s
23
4.965 115 1.380 658 10
e
je
JK
j
j=
2.897 755 10 3 m K .
This result is very close to Wien's experimental value of maxT = 2.898 10 3 m K for this constant. P40.63 (a) Planck's radiation law predicts maximum intensity at a wavelength max we find from
R S T 0 = 2 hc a 1f e b
2 5
dI d hc k B T g 2 hc 2 5 e b =0= 1 d d
hc kB T
1
g  1 2 eb hc k T g F
B
U V W
g
GH
 hc hc k B T g + 2 hc 2 5 6 e b 1 2 k B T +
6 hc k T g 1 eb
B
I JK
a f
1
or
 hce b
hc kB T
B
5
kB
which reduces to Define x = hc . k B T 5
7
2 hc k T g 1 T eb B hc kB T
=0
FG k T IJ eb H hc K
g 1
= eb
hc k BT
g.
Then we require 5 e x  5 = xe x .
Numerical solution of this transcendental equation gives x = 4.965 to four digits. So hc max = , in agreement with Wien's law. 4.965 k B T The intensity radiated over all wavelengths is I , T d = A + B =
0
zb g
0
0
z
5 e b hc k BT g  1
2 hc 2 d
.
Again, define x = Then, A + B =
hc hc hc so = and d =  2 dx . xk B T k B T x kBT
5 2 hc 2 x 5 k B T 5 hcdx
x =
z
0
h5 c 5 x 2 kBT e x  1
e
j
=
4 2 k B T 4
h3 c 2
ze
x 3 dx ex  1
j
.
The integral is tabulated as
4 2 5 k B T 4 4 . , so (in agreement with Stefan's law) A + B = 15 15 h 3 c 2
The intensity radiated over wavelengths shorter than max is
max
0
zb g
I , T d = A =
max
0
z
5 e b hc kBT g  1
2 hc 2 d
. x 3 dx . x 4.965 e  1
With x =
4 2 k B T 4 hc , this similarly becomes A = 3 2 k B T h c
z
So the fraction of power or of intensity radiated at wavelengths shorter than max is A = A+B
e 2 k T
4 B
4
h 3 c 2 4 15 
4 2 5 k B T 4 15 h 3 c 2
L jMNM
4.965 0
z
x 3 dx e x  1
e
O j PQP
= 1
15
4.965 0
4
z
x 3 dx . ex  1
continued on next page
Chapter 40
487
(b)
Here are some sample values of the integrand, along with a sketch of the curve: x 0.000 0.100 0.200 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 4.90 4.965 x3 ex  1 0.00
e
j
1
9.51 10 3 3.61 10 2 0.582 1.25 1.42 1.19 0.883 0.860 A 15 1  4 4.870 = 0. 250 1 . A+B FIG. P40.63(b)
Approximating the integral by trapezoids gives
a
f
P40.64
p = mv = 2mE = 2 1.67 10 27 kg 0.040 0 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV
e
jb
ge
j
=
h = 1.43 10 10 m = 0.143 nm mv
This is of the same order of magnitude as the spacing between atoms in a crystal so diffraction should appear. P40.65
C =
h h and = : mec p
p C h me c = = ; hp mec p=
2
E2 = c 2 p 2 + me c 2
e
j
2
:
E2  mec c2
2 e
b g
2
C 1 E2 =  mec me c c 2
P40.66 (a) mgyi = 1 mv 2 f 2
b g
=
LM E  bm cg OP = F E I bm c g N c Q GH m c JK
1
e 2 2 2 e 2
2
1
v f = 2 gyi = 2 9.80 m s 2 50.0 m = 31.3 m s
e
ja g
f
=
h 6.626 10 34 J s = = 2.82 10 37 m mv 75.0 kg 31.3 m s
b
gb
anot observablef
(b)
Et so E
2 6.626 10 34 J s 4 5.00 10
e
3
s
j
= 1.06 10 32 J
(c)
E 1.06 10 32 J = = 2.87 10 35% E 75.0 kg 9.80 m s 2 50.0 m
b
ge
ja
f
488 P40.67
Introduction to Quantum Physics
From the uncertainty principle or Therefore,
Et
2 2 .
mc 2 t =
e j
m h h = = 2 m 4 c t m 4 t ER
a f
a f ja
m 6.626 10 34 J s = m 4 8.70 10 17 s 135 MeV
e
FG 1 MeV IJ = f H 1.60 10 J K
13
2.81 10 8 .
P40.68
=
h 1  cos =  0 mec
a
f
hc hc h = = hc 0 + E = 1  cos mec 0 +
LM1 + hc a1  cos fOP E = N m c Q hc L E = MN1 + m hc a1  cos fOPQ c
hc
0 e 2 0 0 e 2 0
LM N
a
1
fOP Q
1
1
L E a1  cos fOP = E M1 + N mc Q
0 0 e 2
1
P40.69
(a) (b) (c) (d)
The light is unpolarized. It contains both horizontal and vertical field oscillations. The interference pattern appears, but with diminished overall intensity. The results are the same in each case. The interference pattern appears and disappears as the polarizer turns, with alternately increasing and decreasing contrast between the bright and dark fringes. The intensity on the screen is precisely zero at the center of a dark fringe four times in each revolution, when the filter axis has turned by 45, 135, 225, and 315 from the vertical. Looking at the overall light energy arriving at the screen, we see a lowcontrast interference pattern. After we sort out the individual photon runs into those for trial 1, those for trial 2, and those for trial 3, we have the original results replicated: The runs for trials 1 and 2 form the two blue graphs in Figure 40.24 in the text, and the runs for trial 3 build up the red graph.
(e)
Chapter 40
489
P40.70
Let u represent the final speed of the electron and let u 2 . We must eliminate and u from the c2 three conservation equations:
= 1
F GH
I JK
1 2
hc hc + mec 2 = + m e c 2 0 h h + m eu  cos = m eu cos 0 h sin = m eu sin Square Equations [2] and [3] and add: h2
[1] [2] [3] FIG. P40.70
2 0
h
2
2 + 2me u2 +
h2
2
+
2 h m e u
0
 
2 h 2 cos 2 h m eu cos 2  = 2 m e u 2 0
2 2 h m eu cos 2 h 2 cos m e u 2  = 0 1  u 2 c 2
2 0
+
h
2
2
2 + 2me u2 +
2 h m e u
0
Call the lefthand side b. Then b 
bu 2 b c 2b 2 = m e u 2 and u 2 = 2 = 2 2 . c2 me + b c 2 me c + b
2 2 h m e c me c 2 2 = = me c 2 + b . 1  u 2 c 2
Now square Equation [1] and substitute to eliminate : h2
2 0
2 + 2me c 2 +
h2
+
2
+
2 h m e c
0

2h2
0

So we have
h2
h2
2 0
2
2 + 2me c 2 +
2 h m e c
0

2 h m e c 2 h 2  0
= me c 2 +
h2
2 0
+
h2
2
2 + 2me u2 +
2 h m e u
0

2 h m e u cos 2 h 2 cos  0
Multiply through by
0 2 me c 2
0 2 +
0 2  1 
F GH
2 u 2 2 h u 2 h 0u cos 2 h 2 cos 2 h 2 h 0 2h2   2 2 = 0 + 0 +   2 mec me c me c mec 2 me c 2 mec 2 me c 2
2 h 0 2u 2 u u cos 2 h 2h2 + = + 2 2 1  cos 1 1 2 mec c me c c c me c
I JK
FG H
IJ K
The first term is zero. Then
Since this result may be written as
f F 1  au cos f c I + h F 1 I a1  cos f . = G H 1  u c JK m c GH 1  u c JK F uI F uI F uI = 1  G J = G1  J G1 + J H c K H c KH c K F 1  au cos f c I + h 1 + u c a1  cos f . = G H 1  u c JK m c 1  u c
1 0 e 1 2 0 e
FG H
IJ K
a
It shows a specific combination of what looks like a Doppler shift and a Compton shift. This problem is about the same as the first problem in Albert Messiah's graduate text on quantum mechanics.
490
Introduction to Quantum Physics
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P40.2 (a) ~ 10 7 m ultraviolet ; (b) ~ 10 10 m gamma ray (a) 70.9 kW; (b) 580 nm; (c) 7.99 10 10 W m; (d) 9.42 10 1226 W m ; (e) 1.00 10 227 W m ; (f) 5.44 10 10 W m ; (g) 7.38 10 10 W m ; (h) 0.260 W m; (i) 2.60 10 P40.6 P40.8 P40.10 P40.12 P40.14 P40.16 P40.18 P40.20 2.96 10
19 9
P40.30 P40.32 P40.34 P40.36 P40.38 P40.40 P40.42 P40.44 P40.46 P40.48 P40.50 P40.52 P40.54 P40.56 P40.58 P40.60 P40.62 P40.64
(a) 0.667 ; (b) 0.001 09 (a) 14.0 kV/m, 46.8 T ; (b) 4.19 nN; (c) 10.2 g (a) 0.174 nm; (b) 5.37 pm or 5.49 pm ignoring relativistic correction (a) see the solution; (b) 907 fm 0.218 nm (a) 1.60; (b) 2.00 10 3 ; (c) 1; (d) (a) 1.10 10 34 m s ; (b) 1.36 10 33 s ; (c) no see the solution 105 V (a) 0.250 m s ; (b) 2.25 m 3.79 10 28 m , much larger than the diameter of the observable Universe (a) see the solution; (b) 5.21 MeV (a) 1.7 eV ; (b) 4.2 10 15 V s ; (c) 730 nm hc  e2B2 R 2 2m e
P40.4
W m ; (j) 20 kW
photons s
5.71 10 3 photons 1.34 10 31 see the solution (a) 1.38 eV ; (b) 334 THz Metal one: 2.22 eV , Metal two: 3.70 eV 148 d, the classical theory is a gross failure (a) The incident photons are Doppler shifted to higher frequencies, and hence, higher energy; (b) 3.87 eV ; (c) 8.78 eV (a) 488 fm ; (b) 268 keV ; (c) 31.5 keV 22.1 keV ; K e = 478 eV pe = c (a) cos 1
P40.22 P40.24
see the solution see the solution see the solution 0.143 nm, comparable to the distance between atoms in a crystal, so diffraction can be observed (a) 2.82 10 37 m; (b) 1.06 10 32 J ; (c) 2.87 10 35% see the solution see the solution
P40.26
F m c +E I; GH 2m c + E JK E F 2m c + E I (b) E = 2 G m c +E J H K, E F 2m c + E I p = 2c G m c + E J H K;
e 2 e 2 0 0 0 e 2 e 2 0 0
0
e
2
e
2
0
0
(c) K e = pe P40.28
0
j E F 2m c + E I = 2c G m c + E J H K
2 m e c 2 + E0
e 2 2 0 e 0
e
2 E0
,
P40.66
P40.68 P40.70
(a) 33.0 ; (b) 0.785 c
41
Quantum Mechanics
CHAPTER OUTLINE
41.1 41.2 41.3 41.4 41.5 41.6 41.7 41.8 An Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics A Particle in a Box The Particle Under Boundary Conditions The Schrdinger Equation A Particle in a Well of Finite Height Tunneling Through a Potential Energy Barrier The Scanning Tunneling Microscope The Simple Harmonic Oscillator
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q41.1 A particle's wave function represents its state, containing all the information there is about its location and motion. The squared absolute value of its wave function tells where we would 2 classically think of the particle as a spending most its time. is the probability distribution function for the position of the particle. The motion of the quantum particle does not consist of moving through successive points. The particle has no definite position. It can sometimes be found on one side of a node and sometimes on the other side, but never at the node itself. There is no contradiction here, for the quantum particle is moving as a wave. It is not a classical particle. In particular, the particle does not speed up to infinite speed to cross the node.
Q41.2
Q41.3
Consider a particle bound to a restricted region of space. If its minimum energy were zero, then the particle could have zero momentum and zero uncertainty in its momentum. At the same time, the uncertainty in its position would not be infinite, but equal to the width of the region. In such a case, the uncertainty product xp x would be zero, violating the uncertainty principle. This contradiction proves that the minimum energy of the particle is not zero. The reflected amplitude decreases as U decreases. The amplitude of the reflected wave is proportional to the reflection coefficient, R, which is 1  T , where T is the transmission coefficient as given in equation 41.20. As U decreases, C decreases as predicted by equation 41.21, T increases, and R decreases. Consider the Heisenberg uncertainty principle. It implies that electrons initially moving at the same speed and accelerated by an electric field through the same distance need not all have the same measured speed after being accelerated. Perhaps the philosopher could have said "it is necessary for the very existence of science that the same conditions always produce the same results within the uncertainty of the measurements." In quantum mechanics, particles are treated as wave functions, not classical particles. In classical mechanics, the kinetic energy is never negative. That implies that E U . Treating the particle as a wave, the Schrdinger equation predicts that there is a nonzero probability that a particle can tunnel through a barriera region in which E < U .
Q41.4
Q41.5
Q41.6
491
492 Q41.7
Quantum Mechanics
Consider Figure 41.8, (a) and (b) in the text. In the square well with infinitely high walls, the particle's simplest wave function has strict nodes separated by the length L of the well. The particle's p2 h h2 = . Now in the well with walls of only , and its energy wavelength is 2L, its momentum 2m 8mL2 2L finite height, the wave function has nonzero amplitude at the walls. The wavelength is longer. The particle's momentum in its ground state is smaller, and its energy is less. Quantum mechanically, the lowest kinetic energy possible for any bound particle is greater than zero. The following is a proof: If its minimum energy were zero, then the particle could have zero momentum and zero uncertainty in its momentum. At the same time, the uncertainty in its position would not be infinite, but equal to the width of the region in which it is restricted to stay. In such a case, the uncertainty product xp x would be zero, violating the uncertainty principle. This contradiction proves that the minimum energy of the particle is not zero. Any harmonic oscillator can be modeled as a particle or collection of particles in motion; thus it cannot have zero energy. As Newton's laws are the rules which a particle of large mass follows in its motion, so the Schrdinger equation describes the motion of a quantum particle, a particle of small or large mass. In particular, the states of atomic electrons are confinedwave states with wave functions that are solutions to the Schrdinger equation.
Q41.8
Q41.9
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 41.1 P41.1 (a) An Interpretation of Quantum Mechanics
x = Ae e
af
i 5.00 10 10 x
j = A cose5 10 10 xj + Ai sine5 1010 xj = A cosa kxf + Ai sinakx f goes through
a full cycle when x changes by and when kx changes by 2 . Then k = 2 where 2 m 2 = 1.26 10 10 m . k = 5.00 10 10 m 1 = . Then = 10 5.00 10
e
j
(b) (c)
p=
h
=
6.626 10 34 J s = 5.27 10 24 kg m s 1.26 10 10 m
m e = 9.11 10 31 kg 5.27 10 24 kg m s m2v2 p2 = = K= e 2m e 2m 2 9.11 10 31 kg
e
e
j j
2
= 1.52 10 17 J =
1.52 10 17 J = 95.5 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV
P41.2
Probability
P=
a
z
a
x
af
2
P=
1
tan 1
z ex + a j FGH a IJK FGH 1a IJK tan FGH xa IJK 1 L F I O 1 1  tan a1f = M  G  J P = H 4KQ 2 N4
=
a
a
a
2
2
dx =
1
a a
1
Chapter 41
493
Section 41.2 P41.3
A Particle in a Box
E1 = 2.00 eV = 3.20 10 19 J For the groundstate, h 8m e E1 E1 =
h2 . 8m e L2
(a)
L=
= 4.34 10 10 m = 0.434 nm
(b) P41.4
E = E2  E1 = 4
F h I F h I = GH 8m L JK GH 8m L JK
2 2 e 2 e 2
6.00 eV
For an electron wave to "fit" into an infinitely deep potential well, an integral number of halfwavelengths must equal the width of the well. n = 1.00 10 9 m 2 K= so
=
2.00 10 9 h = n p = 0.377n 2 eV
(a)
Since For
h 2 2 p2 h2 n2 = = 2m e 2m e 2m e 2 10 9
e
j
e
j
2
e
j
FIG. P41.4
K 6 eV n = 4,
n=4 K = 6.03 eV
(b) P41.5 (a)
With
We can draw a diagram that parallels our treatment of standing mechanical waves. In each state, we measure the distance d from one node to another (N to N), and base our solution upon that: Since d N to N = p=
h and = p 2
h h = . 2d
Next,
p2 1 h2 = = 2 K= 2 2m e 8m e d d K= 6.02 10 38 J m 2 d2
LM e6.626 10 MM 8e9.11 10 N
K=
34 31
Js
j OP . kg j P QP
2
Evaluating, In state 1, In state 2, In state 3, In state 4, continued on next page
3.77 10 19 eV m 2 . d2
d = 1.00 10 10 m d = 5.00 10 11 m d = 3.33 10 11 m d = 2.50 10 11 m
K 1 = 37.7 eV . K 2 = 151 eV . K 3 = 339 eV . K 4 = 603 eV . FIG. P41.5
494
Quantum Mechanics
(b)
When the electron falls from state 2 to state 1, it puts out energy E = 151 eV  37.7 eV = 113 eV = hf = into emitting a photon of wavelength 6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = = = 11.0 nm . E 113 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV hc
e
a
fe
je
j
j
The wavelengths of the other spectral lines we find similarly: Transition E eV nm
a f a f
43 264 4.71
4 2 452 2.75
41 565 2.20
32 188 6.60
31 302 4.12
21 113 11.0
P41.6
= 2D
for the lowest energy state
6.626 10 34 J s p2 h2 h2 K= = = = 2m 2m2 8mD 2 8 4 1.66 10 27 kg 1.00 10 14 m
e
j
2
e
je
j
2
= 8.27 10 14 J = 0.517 MeV
p=
h
=
6.626 10 34 J s h = = 3.31 10 20 kg m s 2D 2 1.00 10 14 m
e
j
P41.7
E = L=
hc
=
F h I2 GH 8m L JK
2 e 2
2
 12 =
3h2 8m e L2
3 h = 7.93 10 10 m = 0.793 nm 8m e c hc =
P41.8
E =
F h I2 GH 8m L JK
2 e 2
2
 12 =
3h2 8m e L2
so P41.9
L=
3 h 8m e c
The confined proton can be described in the same way as a standing wave on a string. At level 1, the nodetonode distance of the standing wave is 1.00 10 14 m , so the wavelength is twice this distance: h = 2.00 10 14 m . p The proton's kinetic energy is 6.626 10 34 J s p2 1 h2 K = mv 2 = = = 2 2m 2m2 2 1.67 10 27 kg 2.00 10 14 m
e
j
2
e
je
j
2
3. 29 10 13 J = = 2.05 MeV 1.60 10 19 J eV continued on next page
FIG. P41.9
Chapter 41
495
In the first excited state, level 2, the nodetonode distance is half as long as in state 1. The momentum is two times larger and the energy is four times larger: K = 8.22 MeV . The proton has mass, has charge, moves slowly compared to light in a standing wave state, and stays inside the nucleus. When it falls from level 2 to level 1, its energy change is 2.05 MeV  8.22 MeV = 6.16 MeV . Therefore, we know that a photon (a traveling wave with no mass and no charge) is emitted at the speed of light, and that it has an energy of +6.16 MeV . Its frequency is And its wavelength is 6.16 10 6 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV E = 1. 49 10 21 Hz . f= = h 6.626 10 34 J s
e
je
j
=
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 2.02 10 13 m . f 1. 49 10 21 s 1
This is a gamma ray, according to the electromagnetic spectrum chart in Chapter 34. P41.10 The ground state energy of a particle (mass m) in a 1dimensional box of width L is E1 = (a) For a proton m = 1.67 10 27 kg in a 0.200nm wide box:
34 2
h2 . 8mL2
E1
e j e6.626 10 J sj = 8e1.67 10 kg je 2.00 10 mj
27 10
2
= 8.22 10 22 J = 5.13 10 3 eV .
(b)
For an electron m = 9.11 10 31 kg in the same size box: E1
e
j
e6.626 10 J sj = 8e9.11 10 kg je 2.00 10
34 2 31 2
10
m
j
2
= 1.51 10 18 J = 9.41 eV .
(c) P41.11 En =
The electron has a much higher energy because it is much less massive.
E1
F h In GH 8mL JK e6.626 10 J sj = 8e1.67 10 kg je 2.00 10
2 2 34 2 27
14
m
j
2
= 8.21 10 14 J E3 = 9E1 = 4.62 MeV
E1 = 0.513 MeV
E2 = 4E1 = 2.05 MeV
Yes , the energy differences are ~ 1 MeV , which is a typical energy for a ray photon.
496 *P41.12
Quantum Mechanics
(a)
The energies of the confined electron are En = jump from state 1 to state 4 is
h2 4 2  1 2 and this is the photon energy: 8m e L2
h2 n 2 . Its energy gain in the quantum 8m e L2
e
j
h 2 15 hc 15 h = hf = . Then 8m e cL2 = 15 h and L = 2 8m e c 8m e L (b)
FG H
IJ K
12
. 12 h 2 hc h2 h2 42  22 = . = 8m e L2 8m e L2 8m e L2
Let represent the wavelength of the photon emitted: Then
2 2 5 hc h 15 8m e L = = and = 1. 25 . hc 8m e L2 12 h 2 4
e
j
Section 41.3 Section 41.4 P41.13
The Particle Under Boundary Conditions The Schrdinger Equation
We have
= Ae ib kx  t g
and
2 =  k 2 . x 2 2 2m =  k 2 =  2 E  U . 2 x
Schrdinger's equation: Since k
2
a
f
a 2 f = b 2 p g =
2
2
2
h2
=
p2
2
and
E U =
p2 . 2m
Thus this equation balances. P41.14
x = A cos kx + B sin kx
2 =  k 2 A cos kx  k 2 B sin kx x 2 2 2m =  2 E  U or x 2
af
=  kA sin kx + kB cos kx x  2m
aE  U f =  2mE a A cos kx + B sin kxf
2
Therefore the Schrdinger equation is satisfied if
FG H
IJ a K
f
 k 2 A cos kx + B sin kx =  k 2m
2 2
a
f FGH
2mE
2
IJ a A cos kx + B sin kxf . K
This is true as an identity (functional equality) for all x if E = *P41.15 (a) With x = A sin kx
.
af
a f
and d2 =  Ak 2 sin kx . 2 dx
d A sin kx = Ak cos kx dx Then
2
2 2 h 2 4 2 p2 d 2 k m2v2 1 = = = mv 2 = K .  =+ A sin kx = 2 2 2 2m dx 2m 2m 2m 2 4 2m
e j e ja f
(b)
With x = A sin
af
FG 2 x IJ = A sin kx , the proof given in part (a) applies again. H K
Chapter 41
497
P41.16
(a)
x = x
0
z
L
L 2 x 4 x 2 2 1 1 sin 2 dx = x  cos dx L L L0 2 2 L L
FG H
IJ K
1 x2 x = L 2

0
1 L2 L 16 2
IJ K LM 4 x sin 4 x + cos 4 x OP L Q NL L
z FGH
IJ K
L
=
0
L 2
(b)
Probability=
2 x 4 x 2 1 1 L sin 2 sin dx = x L L L L 4 L 0. 490 L
0.510 L
z
FG H
LM N
OP Q
0.510 L 0. 490 L
Probability= 0.020 
1 sin 2.04  sin 1.96 = 5.26 10 5 4
0 . 260 L 0 . 240 L
a
f
(c)
Probability
LM x  1 sin 4 x OP N L 4 L Q
= 3.99 10 2 L 4
(d)
In the n = 2 graph in Figure 41.4 (b), it is more probable to find the particle either near x = or x = 3L than at the center, where the probability density is zero. 4 L . 2
Nevertheless, the symmetry of the distribution means that the average position is P41.17 Normalization requires
all space
z
dx = 1
2
or
2
z
0
L
A 2 sin 2
FG n x IJ dx = 1 H LK
z
0
L
A 2 sin 2
FG n x IJ dx = A FG L IJ = 1 H 2K H LK
L4
or
A=
L4 0
2 . L
P41.18
The desired probability is where Thus,
P=
z
0
dx =
2
2 L
z
sin 2
FG 2 x IJ dx H LK
=
sin 2 = P=
1  cos 2 . 2
L4 0
FG x  1 sin 4 x IJ H L 4 L K
FG 1  0  0 + 0IJ = H4 K
0.250 .
P41.19
In 0 x L , the argument
2
FG 2 IJ sin FG 2 x IJ reaches maxima at sin = 1 and sin = 1 at H LK H L K
2 x 2 x 3 = and = . 2 L 2 L
2 x of the sine function ranges from 0 to 2 . The probability density L
The most probable positions of the particle are at at x =
L 3L . and x = 4 4
498 *P41.20
Quantum Mechanics
(a)
Probability
FG IJ H K 1L L F 2 x IJ OP = = Mx  sinG H L KQ 2 LN
= 1 dx =
0
z
2
x 2 1 dx = sin 2 L0 L L
z
0
FG 2 x IJ OPdx H L KQ 1 F 2 IJ  sinG HLK L 2
1  cos
0
z LMN
(b) 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0
Probability Curve for an Infinite Potential Well
0.5 L FIG. P41.20(b)
1
1.5
(c)
The probability of finding the particle between x = 0 and x = is x = L is 1 . 3
2
2 , and between x = and 3
Thus, 1 dx =
0
z
2 3
L

2 1 sin 2 L
FG H
IJ = 2 , K 3
L
or
u
1 2 sin 2 u = . 2 3
This equation for being L
can be solved by homing in on the solution with a calculator, the result
= 0.585 , or = 0.585L to three digits.
Chapter 41
499
P41.21
(a)
The probability is
z z FGH IJK z FGH 12  12 cos 2L x IJK dx F x 1 sin 2 x IJ = FG 1  1 sin 2 IJ = FG 1  3 IJ = 0.196 P=G  H L 2 L K H 3 2 3 K H 3 4 K
L3 0
P=
dx =
2
L3 0
x 2 2 dx = sin 2 L L L
L3 0
L3 0
.
(b)
The probability density is symmetric about x =
L . 2 Thus, the probability of finding the particle between 2L x= and x = L is the same 0.196. Therefore, the 3 L 2L is probability of finding it in the range x 3 3 P = 1.00  2 0.196 = 0.609 .
a
f
FIG. P41.21(b)
(c)
Classically, the electron moves back and forth with constant speed between the walls, and the probability of finding the electron is the same for all points between the walls. Thus, the classical probability of finding the electron in any range equal to onethird of the available 1 . space is Pclassical = 3
P41.22
(a)
1 x = 2 3
af
FG IJ H K 2 axf = L sinFGH 2 x IJK ; L 2 axf = L cosFGH 3 x IJK ; L
x 2 cos ; L L
P1 x = 1 x P2 x = 2 P3 x = 3
af
af
af
af
FG IJ H K 2 axf = L sin FGH 2 x IJK L 2 axf = L cos FGH 3 x IJK L
2
=
x 2 cos 2 L L
2
2
2
2
(b)
n=3
2
n=2
n=1  L 2 0 x L 2  L 2 0 x L 2
FIG. P41.22(b)
500 P41.23
Quantum Mechanics
Problem 43 in Chapter 16 helps students to understand how to draw conclusions from an identity 2 Ax d d 2 2A x2 x = A 1 2 = 2 = (a) 2 L dx L dx L
a f FGH
I JK
Schrdinger's equation becomes
d 2 2m =  2 E U 2 dx
a
f
2 2 2 2 x2 2A 2m 2m  x A 1  x L  2 =  2 EA 1  2 + 2 L L mL2 L2  x 2
F GH
I JK
e
je e
j
j
1 mE mEx 2 x 2  2 = 2 + 2 2  4 . L L L This will be true for all x if both and 1 mE = 2 L2 mE 1  4 =0 2 2 L L E= dx = A 2
L 2
both these conditions are satisfied for a particle of energy (b) For normalization, 1=
L
L2 m
.
L
z
L
A2 1 
F GH
x2 L2
I JK
2
L 2
z FGH
1
2x 2 x 4 + 4 dx L2 L
I JK
1 = A2 x 
LM N
L3
(c)
P= P=
L 3
z
2
OP = A LL  2 L + L + L  2 L + L O = A FG 16L IJ 15 A= . MN 3 5 3 5 PQ H 15 K 16L 3L 5L Q 15 15 30 L dx = z FGH1  2Lx + xL IJK dx = 16L LMNx  23Lx + 5xL OPQ = 16L LMN L3  281L + 1 215 OPQ 16L
2x 3
2
+
x5
4
2
L
L3
2
4
3
5
L3
L 3
2
4
2
5
L 3
47 = 0.580 81
P41.24
(a)
Setting the total energy E equal to zero and rearranging the Schrdinger equation to isolate the potential energy function gives 1 a f FGH 2m IJK ddx . a xf = Axe . d e = e 4 Ax  6 AxL j dx L d e 4x  6L j a xf = U x =
2 2 2  x 2 L2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2
If Then or and (b)
 x 2 L2 4
dx 2
L4
2
U x =
af
2
2mL
F 4x GH L
2
2
6
I JK
.
See the figure to the right. FIG. P41.24(b)
Chapter 41
501
Section 41.5 P41.25 (a) (b)
A Particle in a Well of Finite Height See figure to the right. The wavelength of the transmitted wave traveling to the left is the same as the original wavelength, which equals 2L . FIG. P41.25(a)
P41.26
FIG. P41.26
Section 41.6 P41.27
Tunneling Through a Potential Energy Barrier 2m U  E
T = e 2CL where C =
a
f j e2.00 10 j = 4.58
10
2CL = (a) (b)
2 2 9.11 10 31 8.00 10 19 1.055 10
34
e
je
T = e 4.58 = 0.010 3 , a 1% chance of transmission. R = 1  T = 0.990 , a 99% chance of reflection. 2 9.11 10 31 5.00  4.50 1.60 10 19 kg m s 1.055 10
34
FIG. P41.27
P41.28
C=
e
ja
fe
j
Js
= 3.62 10 9 m 1
T = e 2CL = exp 2 3.62 10 9 m 1 950 10 12 m = exp 6.88 T = 1.03 10 3 P41.29 From problem 28, C = 3.62 10 9 m 1 10 6 = exp 2 3.62 10 9 m 1 L . Taking logarithms, New L = 1.91 nm L = 1.91 nm  0.950 nm = 0.959 nm .
e
je
j
a
f
FIG. P41.28
e
j
13.816 = 2 3.62 10 9 m 1 L .
e
j
502 *P41.30
Quantum Mechanics
The original tunneling probability is T = e 2CL where
c2maU  Efh C=
12
=
2 2 9.11 10 31 kg 20  12 1.6 10 19 J 6.626 10 34 J s hc
e
a
f
j
12
= 1.448 1 10 10 m 1 .
The photon energy is hf =
1 240 eV nm = = 2.27 eV , to make the electron's new kinetic energy 546 nm 12 + 2.27 = 14.27 eV and its decay coefficient inside the barrier C = 2 2 9.11 10 31 kg 20  14.27 1.6 10 19 J 6.626 10 34 J s
e
a
f
j
12
= 1.225 5 10 10 m 1 .
Now the factor of increase in transmission probability is 9 1 10 e 2C L = e 2 LaC C f = e 2 10 m 0. 223 10 m = e 4.45 = 85.9 . 2CL e
Section 41.7 P41.31
The Scanning Tunneling Microscope
With the wave function proportional to e CL , the transmission coefficient and the tunneling current 2 are proportional to , to e 2CL . Then,
2 10.0 nm ga 0.500 nm f I 0.500 nm e b = = e 20 .0 a0 .015 f = 1.35 . 2 b10.0 nm ga 0.515 nm f I 0.515 nm e
a a
f f
P41.32
With transmission coefficient e 2CL , the fractional change in transmission is e
2 10.0 nm L
b
g
e e
2 10 .0 nm L + 0.002 00 nm
b
gb
g
2 10.0 nm L
b
g
=1e
20.0 0.002 00
b
g = 0.0392 =
3.92% .
Section 41.8 P41.33
The Simple Harmonic Oscillator
2
= Be  bm
FG IJ x + FG  m IJ . H K H K F m IJ x + FG  m IJ = FG 2mE IJ + FG m IJ Substituting into Equation 41.13 gives G H K H K H K H K
gx
2
so
d m d 2 m = = x and 2 dx dx
2 2
FG IJ H K
2
2
2
2
x 2
which is satisfied provided that E =
. 2
Chapter 41
503
P41.34
Problem 43 in Chapter 16 helps students to understand how to draw conclusions from an identity.
= Axe  bx so
and Substituting into Equation 41.13,
2
2 2 d = Ae  bx  2bx 2 Ae  bx dx 2 2 2 d 2 = 2bxAe  bx  4bxAe  bx + 4b 2 x 3 e  bx = 6b + 4b 2 x 2 . 2 dx
6b + 4b 2 x 2 = 
FG 2mE IJ + FG m IJ H K H K FG m IJ H K
2
2
x 2 .
For this to be true as an identity, it must be true for all values of x. So we must have both 6b =  2mE
2
and 4b 2 =
.
(a)
Therefore
b=
m 2
(b) (c) P41.35
and
E=
3b 2 3 = . m 2
The wave function is that of the first excited state .
The longest wavelength corresponds to minimum photon energy, which must be equal to the spacing between energy levels of the oscillator: hc
P41.36 (a)
= =
9.11 10 31 kg k m so = 2 c = 2 3.00 10 8 m s m k 8.99 N m
e
F jGH
I JK
12
= 600 nm .
With = Be
 m 2
b
gx
2
, the normalization condition
all x
z
dx = 1
1 2
2
becomes 1 =

z
B2 e
2 m 2
b
gx
2
dx = 2B 2 e
0
z
 m
b
gx
2
dx = 2B 2
m
where Table B.6 in Appendix B was used to evaluate the integral. Thus, 1 = B
2
m and B = m
F I GH JK
14
.
(b)
For small , the probability of finding the particle in the range 
2
< x < is 2 2
 2
z
dx = 0
2
af
2
= B 2 e 0 =
F m I GH JK
12
.
504 *P41.37
Quantum Mechanics
(a)
For the center of mass to be fixed, m1 v1 + m 2 v 2 = 0 . Then m m + m1 m2 v m . Similarly, v = 2 v 2 + v 2 and v = v1 + v 2 = v1 + 1 v1 = 2 v1 and v1 = m2 m2 m1 + m 2 m1 m1 v . Then v2 = m1 + m 2
2 2 1 1 1 1 m1 m 2 v 2 1 m 2 m1 v 2 1 2 2 m1 v1 + m 2 v 2 + kx 2 = + + kx 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 m1 + m 2 2 m1 + m 2 2
b 1 m m bm + m g = v 2 bm + m g
1 2 1 2 1 2 2
b
g
g
2
+
1 2 1 2 1 2 kx = v + kx 2 2 2
(b)
d 1 1 v 2 + kx 2 = 0 because energy is constant dx 2 2 0= 1 dv 1 dx dv dv 2v + k2x = + kx = + kx . 2 dx 2 dt dx dt kx
FG H
IJ K
. This is the condition for simple harmonic motion, that the acceleration of the equivalent particle be a negative constant times the excursion from k 1 k = 2 f and f = equilibrium. By identification with a =  2 x , = . 2 P41.38 (a) With x = 0 and p x = 0, the average value of x 2 is x
Then a =  kx , a = 
bp g . Then x 2p
2 x
a f
2
2 and the average value of p x is
requires
x
E
2 2 px k 2 px k 2 + = + 2 . 2 2m 2 4p x 2m 8 p x
(b)
2 To minimize this as a function of p x , we require
1 1 dE k 2 =0= + 1 4 . 2 2m 8 dp x px
a f
Then
1 k 2 = 4 8 p x 2m E k = m
so k m
2 px =
F 2mk I GH 8 JK
2
12
=
mk 2
and Emin =
mk k 22 k + = + 2 2m 8 mk 4 m 4
a f
.
2
2
Chapter 41
505
Additional Problems P41.39 Suppose the marble has mass 20 g. Suppose the wall of the box is 12 cm high and 2 mm thick. While it is inside the wall, U = mgy = 0.02 kg 9.8 m s 2 0.12 m = 0.023 5 J and Then
2 2
ge ja f 1 1 E = K = mv = b0.02 kg gb0.8 m sg = 0.006 4 J . 2 2 2b0.02 kg gb0.017 1 Jg 2maU  Ef C= = = 2.5 10 b
1.055 10 34 J s
32
m 1
and the transmission coefficient is e 2CL = e P41.40 (a) (b)
2 2 .5 10 32 2 10 3
e
je
j = e 10 10
29
=e
2 .30 4.3 10 29
e
j = 10 4.3 10
29
= ~ 10 10
30
.
= 2L = 2.00 10 10 m
p= h = 6.626 10 34 J s = 3.31 10 24 kg m s 2.00 10 10 m
(c) P41.41 (a)
E=
p2 = 0.172 eV 2m (b) See the figure.
See the figure.
FIG. P41.41(a) (c) (d)
FIG. P41.41(b)
is continuous and 0 as x . The function can be normalized. It describes a particle bound near x = 0 .
Since is symmetric,
 0
z
dx = 2 dx = 1
0
2
z
2
or
2 A 2 e 2 x dx =
z
F 2 A I ee GH 2 JK
2 2 1 2 x=0

 e0 = 1 .
j
This gives A = . (e) Pb 1 2 gb1 2 g = 2
e aj
z
e 2 x dx =
FG 2 IJ ee H 2 K
 2 2
 1 = 1  e 1 = 0.632
j e
j
506 P41.42
Quantum Mechanics
(a)
Use Schrdinger's equation 2 2m =  2 E U 2 x
a
f
with solutions
1 = Aeik1 x + Be ik1 x 2 = Ce ik 2 x
Where and
[region I] [region II]. k1 = k2 = 2mE 2m E  U FIG. P41.42(a)
a
f.
Then, matching functions and derivatives at x = 0
b g = b g F d IJ = FG d IJ and G H dx K H dx K
1 0 2 0 1 2 0
gives gives
0
A+B=C
k1 A  B = k 2C .
B= C= 1  k 2 k1 A 1 + k 2 k1 2 A. 1 + k 2 k1
a
f
Then and
Incident wave Ae
ikx
reflects Be
 ikx
, with probability
1  k 2 k1 B2 R= 2 = A 1 + k 2 k1 E = 7.00 eV U = 5.00 eV k2 E U = = k1 E
b b
g g
2 2
=
bk bk
1 1
g +k g
 k2
2
2 2
.
(b)
With and
2.00 = 0.535 . 7.00 = 0.092 0 .
The reflection probability is The probability of transmission is
R=
a1  0.535f a1 + 0.535f
2 2
T = 1  R = 0.908 .
Chapter 41
507
P41.43
bk R= bk
2 2 2 2 k1
1 1
g = b1  k k g +k g b1 + k k g
 k2
2 2 2 2 2 1 1
2 2
k = E  U for constant U 2m 2m
2 2 k2
= E since U = 0 = E U
2 k2 2 k1
(1) FIG. P41.43 (2) =1 k U 1 1 1 = 1  = so 2 = E 2 2 k1 2
2 2
2m
Dividing (2) by (1),
and therefore,
e1  1 2 j = e R= e1 + 1 2 j e
j 2 + 1j
2 1
2 2
= 0.029 4 .
P41.44
(a)
The wave functions and probability densities are the same as those shown in the two lower curves in Figure 41.4 of the textbook.
(b)
(c)
FG x IJ dx H 1.00 nm K L x 1.00 nm sinFG 2 x IJ OP = b 2.00 nmgM  N 2 4 H 1.00 nmK Q F xI F 1 I In the above result we used z sin axdx = G J  G J sina 2 ax f . H 2 K H 4a K L 1.00 nm sinFG 2 x IJ OP Therefore, P = b1.00 nmgM x  N 2 H 1.00 nm K Q 1.00 nm R U sina0.700 f  sina0.300 f V = 0.200 . P = b1.00 nmgS0.350 nm  0.150 nm  2 T W 2 F 2 x IJ dx = 2.00LM x  1.00 sinFG 4 x IJ OP P = sin G H 1.00 K 1.00 z N 2 8 H 1.00 K Q L 1.00 sinFG 4 x IJ OP = 1.00Ra0.350  0.150f  1.00 sina1.40 f  sina0.600 f U P = 1.00 M x  S V 4 T W N 4 H 1.00 K Q
P1 =
0.350 nm 0.150 nm
z
1 dx =
2
FG 2 IJ H 1.00 nmK
0 .350 0 .150
z
sin 2
0.350 nm
0 .150 nm
2
0.350 nm
1
0.150 nm
1
0.350 0.150
0 .350 0 .150
2
2
0.350 0.150
2
= 0.351 (d) Using En = n 2 h2 , we find that E1 = 0.377 eV and E2 = 1.51 eV . 8mL2
508 P41.45
Quantum Mechanics
(a)
f=
1.80 eV E = h 6.626 10 34 J s
e
a
f
F 1.60 10 J I = j GH 1.00 eV JK
19
4.34 10 14 Hz
(b)
=
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 6.91 10 7 m = 691 nm 14 f 4.34 10 Hz so E = 6.626 10 34 J s h = = 2.64 10 29 J = 1.65 10 10 eV 4 t 4 2.00 10 6 s
(c)
Et
2
2 t
a f
e
j
*P41.46
(a)
Taking L x = L y = L , we see that the expression for E becomes E= h2 2 2 nx + ny . 2 8m e L
e
j
For a normalizable wave function describing a particle, neither n x nor n y can be zero. The ground state, corresponding to n x = n y = 1, has an energy of E1 , 1 = h2 8m e L
2
e1
2
+ 12 =
j
h2 4m e L2
.
The first excited state, corresponding to either n x = 2 , n y = 1 or n x = 1 , n y = 2 , has an energy E2 , 1 = E1 , 2 = h2 8m e L2
e2
2
+ 12 =
j
5h2 8m e L2
.
The second excited state, corresponding to n x = 2 , n y = 2 has an energy of E2 , 2 = h2 8m e L2
e2
2
+ 22 =
j
h2 m e L2
.
Finally, the third excited state, corresponding to either n x = 1 , n y = 3 or n x = 3, n x = 1 , has an energy E1 , 3 = E3 , 1 = (b) 5h2 h2 12 + 3 2 = . 2 8m e L 4m e L2
e
j
The energy difference between the second excited state and the ground state is given by E = E2 , 2  E1 , 1 = 3h2 . = 4m e L2 h2 m e L2  h2 4m e L2
E 1, 3 , E 3, 1 E 2, 2 E 1, 2 , E 2, 1 E 1, 1 Energy level diagram FIG. P41.46(b)
energy h2 m e L2
0
Chapter 41
509
P41.47
x2 =

z
x 2 dx n x 2 sin . L L (from integral tables).
2
For a onedimensional box of width L, n = Thus, x 2 =
FG H
IJ K
L n x 2 2 L2 L2 x sin 2 dx =  2 2 L0 3 2n L
z
FG H
IJ K
P41.48
(a)

z
dx = 1 becomes
L4 L 4
2
A2
z
cos 2
FG 2 x IJ dx = A FG L IJ LM x + 1 sinFG 4 x IJ OP H 2 K N L 4 H L K Q H LK
2
L4
= A2
L 4
FG L IJ LM OP = 1 H 2 K N 2 Q
or A 2 =
2 4 . and A = L L L is 8
(b)
The probability of finding the particle between 0 and
L8 0
z
dx = A
2
2
L8 0
z
cos 2
FG 2 x IJ dx = 1 + 1 = H L K 4 2
for x > 0 for x < 0 .
0.409 .
P41.49
For a particle with wave function
x =
and (a) 0
af
2 x a e a
x
af
2
= 0, x < 0
and
2 x =
af
2 2 x a e , x>0 a
FIG. P41.49
(b)
Prob x < 0 =
a
f

z
0
x
af
2
dx =

za f
0
0 dx = 0
0 0
(c)
Normalization
 0

z z z z FGH IJK
x
af
2
dx =
dx + dx = 1
0
2

z
2
0dx +
0
2 2 x a e dx = 0  e 2 x a a
=  e   1 = 1
a 0
e
j
Prob 0 < x < a = dx =
0
a
f
z
a
2
z FGH IJK
a 0
2 2 x a e dx =  e 2 x a a
= 1  e 2 = 0.865
510 P41.50
Quantum Mechanics
(a)
The requirement that E=
n h nh = L so p = = is still valid. 2L 2
bpcg + emc j
2
2 2
En =
2
FG nhc IJ + emc j H 2L K
2 2 2
2 2
K n = En  mc 2 =
FG nhc IJ + emc j H 2L K
 mc 2
(b)
Taking L = 1.00 10 12 m, m = 9.11 10 31 kg , and n = 1, we find K 1 = 4.69 10 14 J . 6.626 10 34 J s h2 = Nonrelativistic, E1 = 8mL2 8 9.11 10 31 kg 1.00 10 12 m
e
j
2
e
je
j
2
= 6.02 10 14 J .
Comparing this to K 1 , we see that this value is too large by 28.6% . P41.51 (a) U=  7 3 e2 7k e 2 e2 1 1 1 1 +  + 1 + + 1 = =  e 4 0 d 2 3 2 4 0 d 3d K = 2E1 = 7kee2 3d 2 2h2 = h2 . 36m e d 2
LM N
FG H
IJ a fOP b K Q
g
(b)
From Equation 41.12,
8m e 9d 2
e j
(c)
E = U + K and 3h2
e
dE = 0 for a minimum: dd

h2 =0 18m e d 3
d=
a7fe18k e m j
2 e
6.626 10 34 h2 = = 42m e k e e 2 42 9.11 10 31 8.99 10 9 1.60 10 19 C
a fe
e
je
j je
2
j
2
= 0.049 9 nm .
(d)
Since the lithium spacing is a, where Na 3 = V , and the density is of one atom, we get:
Nm , where m is the mass V
F Vm IJ a=G H Nm K
13
F m I =G H density JK
13
F 1.66 10 kg 7 I =G H 530 kg JK
27
13
m = 2.80 10 10 m = 0. 280 nm
(5.62 times larger than c).
Chapter 41
511
P41.52
(a)
= Bxe  bm
d  m = Be b dx
2
gx
2
2
gx
2
+ Bx 
IJ K d F m IJ xe b = 3BG H K dx
2 2
d 2 m  m = Bx  xe b dx 2
FG H
FG H
m  m 2 xe b 2
2
gx gx
2
 m 2
2
FG m IJ 2 xe b H K F m IJ x e b + BG H K
B
2 2
IJ K
2
gx
2
= Be
 m 2
b
 m 2
gx
2
FG m IJ x e b g H K F m IJ x FG  m IJ xe b  BG H K H K
gx
2
B
2  m 2
x2
2
 m 2
gx
2
3  m 2
gx
2
Substituting into the Schrdinger Equation (41.13), we have 3B
FG m IJ xe b H K
 m 2
gx
2
+B 2E
FG m IJ H K
x3 e
 m 2
b
gx
2
=
2mE
2
Bxe
 m 2
b
gx
2
+
FG m IJ H K
2
x 2 Bxe
 m 2
b
gx
2
.
This is true if 3 =  (b)
; it is true if E =
3 . 2
We never find the particle at x = 0 because = 0 there. d m = 0 = 1  x2 , which is true at x = . dx m
(c)
is maximized if
FG IJ H K
(d)
We require

z
dx = 1 :
2
1=

z
B2 x2 e
 m
b
gx
2
dx = 2B 2 x 2 e
3 4 3
z
 m
b
gx
2
dx = 2B 2
1 4
b m g
3
=
B2 1 2 2 m
32 3 2
a f
.
Then B =
2 1 2 m
1 4
FG IJ H K
=
F 4m I GH JK
3 3
14
.
(e)
At x = 2
m
, the potential energy is
total energy
3 , so there is zero classical probability of finding the particle here. 2
2
1 1 4 = 2 . This is larger than the m 2 x 2 = m 2 2 2 m
FG IJ H K
(f)
Probability = dx = Bxe Probability = 2
FH
 m 2
b
gx
2
IK
2
= B 2 x 2 e b m
gx
2
1 2
FG m IJ FG 4 IJ e b H K H m K
32
 m
g 4b
m
g=
8
FG m IJ H K
12
e 4
512 P41.53
Quantum Mechanics
(a)
z
0
L
dx = 1 :
A2 A2
FG x IJ + 16 sin FG 2 x IJ + 8 sinFG x IJ sinFG 2 x IJ OPdx = 1 HLK H L K H L K H L KQ LMFG L IJ + 16FG L IJ + 8 sinFG x IJ sinFG 2 x IJ dxOP = 1 MNH 2 K H 2 K z H L K H L K PQ LM 17L + 16 sin FG x IJ cosFG x IJ dxOP = A LM 17L + 16L sin FG x IJ OP = 1 NM 2 z H L K H L K QP MN 2 3 H L K PQ
2
A2
z LMN
L 0
sin 2
2
L 0
L 0
x=L x=0
2
2
3
A2 =
2 2 , so the normalization constant is A = . 17L 17L
(b)
a
z
a
dx = 1 :
2
a
z LMN
a
A cos 2
2
2
FG x IJ + B H 2a K
2
2
sin 2
FG x IJ + 2 A B cosFG x IJ sinFG x IJ OPdx = 1 HaK H 2a K H a K Q
2
The first two terms are A a and B a . The third term is: 2 A B cos
a
z
a
FG x IJ LM2 sinFG x IJ cosFG x IJ OPdx = 4 A B z cos FG x IJ sinFG x IJ dx H 2a K N H 2a K H 2a K Q H 2a K H 2a K 8a A B F x IJ = 0 = cos G H 2a K 3
a a a 3 a 2 2
so that a A + B
e
j = 1 , giving
2
A +B =
2
2
1 . a
*P41.54
(a)
x
0
=

z
x
FG a IJ HK
12
e  ax dx = 0 , since the integrand is an odd function of x.
(b)
x
1
F 4a I = z xG H JK
3 
12
x 2 e  ax dx = 0 , since the integrand is an odd function of x.
2
(c)
x
01
=

z
x
1 0 + 1 2
b
g
2
dx =
1 x 2
0
+
1 x 2
+ 1

z
x 0 x 1 x dx
af af
1 2
The first two terms are zero, from (a) and (b). Thus: x
01
F aI = z xG J HK F 2a I = 2G H JK
 2
14
12
F 4a I xe dx = 2F 2a I e GH JK GH JK 1F I G J , from Table B.6 4Ha K
 ax 2 2 3 14  ax 2 2 2 12 3
z
0
x 2 e  ax dx
2
=
1 2a
Chapter 41
513
P41.55
With one slit open With both slits open, At a maximum, the wave functions are in phase At a minimum, the wave functions are out of phase
P1 = 1
2
or P2 = 2 .
2
2
P = 1 + 2 .
Pmax = 1 + 2 Pmin = 1  2
c
h.
2
c
h.
2
1 P Now 1 = P2 2
2 2
= 25.0 , so
1 = 5.00 2
2 2
1 + 2 P and max = Pmin 1  2
c c
h = c5.00 h c5.00
2 2
+2 2
h = a6.00f h a4.00f
2 2
2 2
=
36.0 = 2.25 . 16.0
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P41.2 P41.4 P41.6 P41.8 P41.10 1 2 (a) 4; (b) 6.03 eV 0.517 MeV , 3.31 10 20 kg m s P41.22
FG 3h IJ H 8m c K
e
12
(a) 5.13 meV ; (b) 9.41 eV ; (c) The much smaller mass of the electron requires it to have much more energy to have the same momentum. (a)
x 2 cos ; L L x 2 P1 x = cos 2 ; L L 2 x 2 2 x = sin ; L L 2 x 2 ; P2 x = sin 2 L L 3 x 2 3 x = cos ; L L 3 x 2 P3 x = cos 2 ; L L (b) see the solution
(a) 1 x =
af
af af af af af
FG IJ H K FG IJ H K FG IJ H K FG IJ H K FG IJ H K FG IJ H K
I JK
P41.12
FG 15h IJ H 8m c K
e
12
; (b) 1.25 k 2m
2 2
P41.24 P41.26 P41.28 P41.30 P41.32 P41.34
(a)
2
2mL
2
F 4x GH L
2
2
 6 ; (b) see the solution
P41.14 P41.16
see the solution; (a)
see the solution 1.03 10 3 85.9
L ; (b) 5.26 10 5 ; (c) 3.99 10 2 ; 2 (d) see the solution 0.250 (a) 2 1 sin L 2 L (c) 0.585L 
3.92%
(a) see the solution; b = (c) first excited state m 3 ; ; (b) E = 2 2
P41.18 P41.20
FG H
IJ ; (b) see the solution; K
514 P41.36 P41.38 P41.40
Quantum Mechanics
F m I (a) B = G H JK
14
F m I ; (b) G H JK
12
P41.48
(a)
2 L
; (b) 0.409
2
see the solution (a) 2.00 10 10 m; (b) 3.31 10 24 kg m s ; (c) 0.172 eV (a) see the solution; (b) 0.092 0 , 0.908 (a) see the solution; (b) 0.200 ; (c) 0.351 ; (d) 0.377 eV , 1.51 eV (a) h2 5h2 h2 5h2 , , , ; 4m e L2 8m e L2 m e L2 4m e L2 3h2 (b) see the solution, 4m e L2
P41.50
(a)
FG nhc IJ H 2L K
+ m 2 c 4  mc 2 ;
(b) 46.9 fJ ; 28.6% P41.52 (a) 3 ; (b) x = 0 ; (c) ; m 2
3 3 14 3
P41.42 P41.44
F 4m I (d) G H JK
P41.54
; (e) 0; (f) 8
FG m IJ H K
12
e 4
P41.46
(a) 0; (b) 0; (c) 2 a
a f
1 2
42
Atomic Physics
CHAPTER OUTLINE
42.1 42.2 42.3 Atomic Spectra of Gases Early Models of the Atom Bohr's Model of the Hydrogen Atom 42.4 The Quantum Model of the Hydrogen Atom 42.5 The Wave Functions of Hydrogen 42.6 Physical Interpretation of the Quantum Numbers 42.7 The Exclusion Principle and the Periodic Table 42.8 More on Atomic Spectra: Visible and Xray 42.9 Spontaneous and Stimulated Transitions 42.10 Lasers
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q42.1 Neon signs emit light in a brightline spectrum, rather than in a continuous spectrum. There are many discrete wavelengths which correspond to transitions among the various energy levels of the neon atom. This also accounts for the particular color of the light emitted from a neon sign. You can see the separate colors if you look at a section of the sign through a diffraction grating, or at its reflection in a compact disk. A spectroscope lets you read their wavelengths. One assumption is natural from the standpoint of classical physics: The electron feels an electric force of attraction to the nucleus, causing the centripetal acceleration to hold it in orbit. The other assumptions are in sharp contrast to the behavior of ordinarysize objects: The electron's angular momentum must be one of a set of certain special allowed values. During the time when it is in one of these quantized orbits, the electron emits no electromagnetic radiation. The atom radiates a photon when the electron makes a quantum jump from one orbit to a lower one.
Q42.2
Q42.3
If an electron moved like a hockey puck, it could have any arbitrary frequency of revolution around an atomic nucleus. If it behaved like a charge in a radio antenna, it would radiate light with frequency equal to its own frequency of oscillation. Thus, the electron in hydrogen atoms would emit a continuous spectrum, electromagnetic waves of all frequencies smeared together. (a) Yesprovided that the energy of the photon is precisely enough to put the electron into one of the allowed energy states. Strangelymore precisely nonclassicallyenough, if the energy of the photon is not sufficient to put the electron into a particular excited energy level, the photon will not interact with the atom at all! Yesa photon of any energy greater than 13.6 eV will ionize the atom. Any "extra" energy will go into kinetic energy of the newly liberated electron.
Q42.4
(b) Q42.5
An atomic electron does not possess enough kinetic energy to escape from its electrical attraction to the nucleus. Positive ionization energy must be injected to pull the electron out to a very large separation from the nucleus, a condition for which we define the energy of the atom to be zero. The atom is a bound system. All this is summarized by saying that the total energy of an atom is negative. 515
516 Q42.6
Atomic Physics
From Equations 42.7, 42.8 and 42.9, we have  E =  U e = 2 E .
kee2 k e2 k e2 = + e  e = K + U e . Then K = E and r 2r 2r
Q42.7
Bohr modeled the electron as moving in a perfect circle, with zero uncertainity in its radial coordinate. Then its radial velocity is always zero with zero uncertainty. Bohr's theory violates the uncertainty principle by making the uncertainty product rp r be zero, less than the minimum allowable 2 .
Q42.8
Fundamentally, three quantum numbers describe an orbital wave function because we live in threedimensional space. They arise mathematically from boundary conditions on the wave function, expressed as a product of a function of r, a function of , and a function of . Bohr's theory pictures the electron as moving in a flat circle like a classical particle described by F = ma . Schrdinger's theory pictures the electron as a cloud of probability amplitude in the threedimensional space around the hydrogen nucleus, with its motion described by a wave equation. In the Bohr model, the groundstate angular momentum is 1 ; in the Schrdinger model the groundstate angular momentum is zero. Both models predict that the electron's energy is 13.606 eV with n = 1, 2 , 3 . limited to discrete energy levels, given by n2
Q42.9
Q42.10
The term electron cloud refers to the unpredictable location of an electron around an atomic nucleus. It is a cloud of probability amplitude. An electron in an s subshell has a spherically symmetric probability distribution. Electrons in p, d, and f subshells have directionality to their distribution. The shape of these electron clouds influences how atoms form molecules and chemical compounds. The direction of the magnetic moment due to an orbiting charge is given by the right hand rule, but assumes a positive charge. Since the electron is negatively charged, its magnetic moment is in the opposite direction to its angular momentum. Practically speaking, no. Ions have a net charge and the magnetic force q v B would deflect the beam, making it difficult to separate the atoms with different orientations of magnetic moments. The deflecting force on an atom with a magnetic moment is proportional to the gradient of the magnetic field. Thus, atoms with oppositely directed magnetic moments would be deflected in opposite directions in an inhomogeneous magnetic field. If the exclusion principle were not valid, the elements and their chemical behavior would be grossly different because every electron would end up in the lowest energy level of the atom. All matter would be nearly alike in its chemistry and composition, since the shell structures of all elements would be identical. Most materials would have a much higher density. The spectra of atoms and molecules would be very simple, and there would be very little color in the world. The SternGerlach experiment with hydrogen atoms shows that the component of an electron's spin angular momentum along an applied magnetic field can have only one of two allowed values. So does electron spin resonance on atoms with one unpaired electron.
Q42.11
Q42.12
a
f
Q42.13
Q42.14
Q42.15
Chapter 42
517
Q42.16
The three elements have similar electronic configurations. Each has filled inner shells plus one electron in an s orbital. Their single outer electrons largely determine their chemical interactions with other atoms. When a photon interacts with an atom, the atom's orbital angular momentum changes, thus the photon must carry orbital angular momentum. Since the allowed transitions of an atom are restricted to a change in angular momentum of = 1 , the photon must have spin 1. In a neutral helium atom, one electron can be modeled as moving in an electric field created by the nucleus and the other electron. According to Gauss's law, if the electron is above the ground state it moves in the electric field of a net charge of +2 e  1e = +1e We say the nuclear charge is screened by the inner electron. The electron in a He + ion moves in the field of the unscreened nuclear charge of 2 protons. Then the potential energy function for the electron is about double that of one electron in the neutral atom. At low density, the gas consists of essentially separate atoms. As the density increases, the atoms interact with each other. This has the effect of giving different atoms levels at slightly different energies, at any one instant. The collection of atoms can then emit photons in lines or bands, narrower or wider, depending on the density. An atom is a quantum system described by a wave function. The electric force of attraction to the nucleus imposes a constraint on the electrons. The physical constraint implies mathematical boundary conditions on the wave functions, with consequent quantization so that only certain wave functions are allowed to exist. The Schrdinger equation assigns a definite energy to each allowed wave function. Each wave function is spread out in space, describing an electron with no definite position. If you like analogies, think of a classical standing wave on a string fixed at both ends. Its position is spread out to fill the whole string, but its frequency is one of a certain set of quantized values. Each of the electrons must have at least one quantum number different from the quantum numbers of each of the other electrons. They can differ (in m s ) by being spinup or spindown. They can also differ (in ) in angular momentum and in the general shape of the wave function. Those electrons with = 1 can differ (in m ) in orientation of angular momentumlook at Figure Q42.21. FIG. Q42.21
Q42.17
Q42.18
Q42.19
Q42.20
Q42.21
Q42.22
The Mosely graph shows that the reciprocal square root of the wavelength of K characteristic xrays is a linear function of atomic number. Then measuring this wavelength for a new chemical element reveals its location on the graph, including its atomic number. No. Laser light is collimated. The energy generally travels in the same direction. The intensity of a laser beam stays remarkably constant, independent of the distance it has traveled. Stimulated emission coerces atoms to emit photons along a specific axis, rather than in the random directions of spontaneously emitted photons. The photons that are emitted through stimulation can be made to accumulate over time. The fraction allowed to escape constitutes the intense, collimated, and coherent laser beam. If this process relied solely on spontaneous emission, the emitted photons would not exit the laser tube or crystal in the same direction. Neither would they be coherent with one another.
Q42.23 Q42.24
518 Q42.25
Atomic Physics
(a)
The terms "I define" and "this part of the universe" seem vague, in contrast to the precision of the rest of the statement. But the statement is true in the sense of being experimentally verifiable. The way to test the orientation of the magnetic moment of an electron is to apply a magnetic field to it. When that is done for any electron, it has precisely a 50% chance of being either spinup or spindown. Its spin magnetic moment vector must make one of two 12 S and allowed angles with the applied magnetic field. They are given by cos = z = S 3 2 cos = 1 2 3 2 . You can calculate as many digits of the two angles allowed by "space
quantization" as you wish. (b) This statement may be true. There is no reason to suppose that an ant can comprehend the cosmos, and no reason to suppose that a human can comprehend all of it. Our experience with macroscopic objects does not prepare us to understand quantum particles. On the other hand, what seems strange to us now may be the common knowledge of tomorrow. Looking back at the past 150 years of physics, great strides in understanding the Universe from the quantum to the galactic scalehave been made. Think of trying to explain the photoelectric effect using Newtonian mechanics. What seems strange sometimes just has an underlying structure that has not yet been described fully. On the other hand still, it has been demonstrated that a "hiddenvariable" theory, that would model quantum uncertainty as caused by some determinate but fluctuating quantity, cannot agree with experiment.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 42.1 P42.1 (a) Atomic Spectra of Gases Lyman series 1 = R 1 =
1
F GH
1 ni2
I JK e
ni = 2 , 3 , 4, ...
(b) Paschen series: 1
1 1 = 1.097 10 7 1  2 9 ni 94.96 10
jFGH
I JK
ni = 5
=R
F1  1I GH 3 n JK
2 2 i
ni = 4, 5 , 6 , ...
The shortest wavelength for this series corresponds to ni = for ionization 1 1 1 = 1.097 10 7  9 ni2
F GH
I JK
For ni = , this gives = 820 nm This is larger than 94.96 nm, so this wave length cannot be associated with the Paschen series . Balmer series:
F1  1I GH 2 n JK F1 1 I 1 = 1.097 10 G  J H4 n K
1 =R
2 2 i 7 2 i
ni = 3 , 4, 5 , ... with ni = for ionization, min = 365 nm
Once again the shorter given wavelength cannot be associated with the Balmer series .
Chapter 42
519
P42.2
(a)
min =
hc Emax
Lyman (n f = 1 ): Balmer (n f = 2 ): Paschen (n f = 3 ): Bracket (n f = 4 ): (b) Emax = hc
min = min = min min
hc 1 240 eV nm = = 91.2 nm E1 13.6 eV hc 1 240 eV nm = = 365 nm E2 1 4 13.6 eV
2 2
(Ultraviolet) (UV) (Infrared) (IR)
b g = ... = 3 a91.2 nmf = = ... = 4 a91.2 nmf =
821 nm 1 460 nm
min
Emax = 13.6 eV Emax = Emax = Emax =
Lyman: Balmer: Paschen: Brackett:
c= E h 3.40 eV c = E h 1.51 eV c = E h 0.850 eV c= E h
1 2 3 4
Section 42.2 P42.3 (a)
Early Models of the Atom For a classical atom, the centripetal acceleration is a= 1 v2 e2 = 4 0 r 2 m e r m v2 e2 e2 + e = 4 0 r 2 8 0 r
E=
so
1 e 2 a 2 e2 dE e2 dr e2 = = = dt 8 0 r 2 dt 6 0 c 3 6 0 c 3 4 0 r 2 m e dr e4 = . 2 2 2 2 3 dt 12 0 r m e c
2 2 0
F GH
I JK
2
. FIG. P42.3
Therefore,
(b)

2.00 10 10 m
z
0
12
r
2
2 m e c 3 dr
=e
4
T 0
z
dt
2 2 12 2 0 m e c 3 r 3 4 3 e
2.00 10 10
= T = 8.46 10 10 s
0
Since atoms last a lot longer than 0.8 ns, the classical laws (fortunately!) do not hold for systems of atomic size.
520 P42.4
Atomic Physics
(a)
The point of closest approach is found when k q q E = K + U = 0 + e Au r k e 2 e 79 e or rmin = E
a fa f
9
rmin (b)
e8.99 10 N m C ja158fe1.60 10 Cj = a4.00 MeVfe1.60 10 J MeV j
2 2 19 13
2
= 5.68 10 14 m .
The maximum force exerted on the alpha particle is Fmax = k e q q Au
2 rmin
e8.99 10 =
9
N m 2 C 2 158 1.60 10 19 C
ja fe
14
j
2
e5.68 10
m
j
2
= 11.3 N away from the
nucleus.
Section 42.3 P42.5 (a)
Bohr's Model of the Hydrogen Atom v1 = where kee2 m e r1
r1 = 1 a 0 = 0.005 29 nm = 5.29 10 11 m
9 2 2 19
v1
af e8.99 10 N m C je1.60 10 Cj = e9.11 10 kg je5.29 10 mj
2 31 11
2
= 2.19 10 6 m s
(b)
K1 =
1 1 2 m e v1 = 9.11 10 31 kg 2.19 10 6 m s 2 2
e
je
j
2
= 2.18 10 18 J = 13.6 eV
(c)
8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C kee2 = U1 =  r1 5. 29 10 11 m
e
je
j
2
= 4.35 10 18 J = 27.2 eV
P42.6
E = 13.6 eV
a
Where for E > 0 we have absorption and for E < 0 we have emission. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (a) (b) (c) for ni = 2 and n f = 5 , E = 2.86 eV (absorption) for ni = 5 and n f = 3 , E = 0.967 eV (emission) for ni = 7 and n f = 4 , E = 0.572 eV (emission) for ni = 4 and n f = 7 , E = 0.572 eV (absorption) E= hc
fFG n1  n1 IJ H K
2 i 2 f
so the shortest wavelength is emitted in transition ii .
The atom gains most energy in transition i . The atom loses energy in transitions ii and iii .
Chapter 42
521
P42.7
(a)
r22 = 0.052 9 nm 2 meke e2 me v2 = = r2
b
ga f
2
= 0.212 nm
(b)
e9.11 10
31
kg 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C 0.212 10 9 m
je
je
j
2
m e v 2 = 9.95 10 25 kg m s
(c)
L 2 = m e v 2 r2 = 9.95 10 25 kg m s 0.212 10 9 m = 2.11 10 34 kg m 2 s
me v2 1 2 K 2 = me v2 = 2 2m e
e
je
j
(d)
b
g = e9.95 10 kg m sj kg j 2e9.11 10
2 25 31
2
= 5.43 10 19 J = 3.40 eV
(e) (f) P42.8 We use
8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C kee2 = U2 =  r2 0.212 10 9 m E2 = K 2 + U 2 = 3.40 eV  6.80 eV = 3.40 eV
e
je
j
2
= 1.09 10 18 J = 6.80 eV
En =
13.6 eV . n2
To ionize the atom when the electron is in the n th level, it is necessary to add an amount of energy given by (a) (b) E =  En = 13.6 eV . n2
Thus, in the ground state where n = 1, we have E = 13.6 eV . In the n = 3 level, 1 E= 13.6 eV = 1.51 eV . 9
P42.9
(b)
(a)
F 1  1 I = 1.097 10 m F 1  1 I so = 410 nm jGH 2 6 JK GH n n JK e J sje3.00 10 m sj hc e6.626 10 J = 3.03 eV E= = = 4.85 10
=R
2 f 2 i 7 1 2 2 34 8
410 10 9 m
19
(c)
f=
c
=
3.00 10 8 = 7.32 10 14 Hz 410 10 9
522 P42.10
Atomic Physics
Starting with we have and using gives
k e2 1 mev2 = e 2 2r v2 = rn =
2 vn =
kee2 mer n2 2 me ke e2 me n 2 kee2 . n
e
ke e2
2
me ke e2
j
or P42.11
vn =
Each atom gives up its kinetic energy in emitting a photon, so 6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s 1 hc 2 mv = = = 1.63 10 18 J 2 1.216 10 7 m
e
e
je
j
j
v = 4.42 10 4 m s .
P42.12 The batch of excited atoms must make these six transitions to get back to state one: 2 1 , and also 3 2 and 3 1 , and also 4 3 and 4 2 and 4 1 . Thus, the incoming light must have just enough energy to produce the 1 4 transition. It must be the third line of the Lyman series in the absorption spectrum of hydrogen. The absorbing atom changes from energy Ei =  13.6 eV 13.6 eV = 13.6 eV to E f =  = 0.850 eV , 2 1 42
so the incoming photons have wavelength 6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = = 0.850 eV  13.6 eV E f  Ei P42.13 (a)
e
je a
j F 1.00 eV I = 9.75 10 f GH 1.60 10 J JK
19
8
m = 97.5 nm .
The energy levels of a hydrogenlike ion whose charge number is Z are given by En = 13.6 eV
a
fZ n
2 2
.
Thus for Helium Z = 2 , the energy levels are En =  (b) 54.4 eV n2 n = 1, 2 , 3 , ... .
a
f
For He + , Z = 2 , so we see that the ionization energy (the energy required to take the electron from the n = 1 to the n = state) is E = E  E1 = 0 
a13.6 eVfa2f a1f
2
2
FIG. P42.13
= 54.4 eV .
Chapter 42
523
*P42.14
(a)
1
= Z 2 RH
F 1  1 I . The shortest wavelength, , corresponds to n = , and the longest GH n n JK
2 f 2 i s i
wavelength, , to ni = n f + 1 . 1
s
1
=
Z 2 RH n2 f
(1)
2 2
L 1 1 OP Z R L F n I =Z R M  MM n dn + 1i PP = n MM1  GH n + 1 JK N N Q F n I =1G Divide (1) and (2): H n + 1 JK
2 H 2 f 2 f 2 f H f f 2 s f f
OP PQ
(2)
nf nf +1
= 1
s 22.8 nm = 1 = 0.800 63.3 nm
n2 f = 42
n f = 4
From (1): Z =
s RH
e22.8 10
9
m 1.097 10 7 m 1
je
j
= 8.00 .
Hence the ion is O 7+ .
(b)
R  = Se7.020 8 10  T
8
m
1
L jMM 41  a4 +1kf N
2
2
OPU  PQV  W
1
, k = 1, 2 , 3 , ...
Setting k = 2 , 3 , 4 gives = 41.0 nm, 33.8 nm, 30.4 nm .
8 2 r 2 3.84 10 m = = 1.02 10 3 m s . T 2.36 10 6 s
P42.15
(a)
The speed of the moon in its orbit is v = So,
e
j
L = mvr = 7.36 10 22 kg 1.02 10 3 m s 3.84 10 8 m = 2.89 10 34 kg m 2 s .
e
je
je
j
(b)
We have L = n or n= L = 2.89 10 34 kg m 2 s 1.055 10 34 J s = 2.74 10 68 .
(c)
We have n = L = mvr = m so r=
2
FG GM IJ H r K
e
12
r, n + 1 R  n 2 R 2n + 1 r = = r n2R n2
m 2 GM e
n 2 = Rn 2 and
a f
2
which is approximately equal to
2 = 7.30 10 69 . n
524
Atomic Physics
Section 42.4 P42.16
The Quantum Model of the Hydrogen Atom
The reduced mass of positronium is less than hydrogen, so the photon energy will be less for positronium than for hydrogen. This means that the wavelength of the emitted photon will be longer than 656.3 nm. On the other hand, helium has about the same reduced mass but more charge than hydrogen, so its transition energy will be larger, corresponding to a wavelength shorter than 656.3 nm. All the factors in the given equation are constant for this problem except for the reduced mass and the nuclear charge. Therefore, the wavelength corresponding to the energy difference for the transition can be found simply from the ratio of mass and charge variables. For hydrogen, Its wavelength is
=
mpme mp + me
me .
The photon energy is where
E = E3  E2 .
= 656.3 nm ,
=
=
c hc = . f E
(a)
For positronium,
meme m = e 2 me + me
so the energy of each level is one half as large as in hydrogen, which we could call "protonium". The photon energy is inversely proportional to its wavelength , so for positronium,
32 = 2 656.3 nm = 1.31 m (in the infrared region).
(b) For He + ,
a
f
m e , q1 = e , and q 2 = 2 e ,
so the transition energy is 2 2 = 4 times larger than hydrogen. Then,
32 =
so if x = r , p
FG 656 IJ nm = H4K
.
2
164 nm (in the ultraviolet region).
P42.17
(a)
xp
2
2r
(b)
Choosing p
r
,K=
2 p p2 = 2m e 2m e 2m e r 2
b g
U= (c)
2 kee2 k e2  e , so E = K + U . r r 2m e r 2
To minimize E,
2 2 k e2 dE = + e2 = 0 r = = a0 3 dr mer r meke e2
(the Bohr radius).
2 4 e e 2
Then, E =
2
2m e
Fm k e I GH JK
e e 2 2
2
 kee2
Fm k e I =m k e GH JK 2
e e 2 2
= 13.6 eV .
Chapter 42
525
Section 42.5 P42.18
The Wave Functions of Hydrogen
1s r =
af
1
3 a0
er
a0
(Eq. 42.22)
P1s r =
af
4r 2 2 r e 3 a0
a0
(Eq. 42.25) FIG. P42.18
P42.19
(a)
z
dV = 4 r 2 dr = 4
0
2
z
2
Using integral tables,
z
2
2
F 1Ire GH a JK z 2 L dV =  MMe a N
0 3 0 2 0
2 2 r a 0
dr
2 r a 0
Fr GH
2
a2 + a0 r + 0 2
I OP = F  2 I F  a I = JK QP GH a JK GH 2 JK
0 2 0 2 0
1
so the wave function as given is normalized. (b) Pa0
2 3 a0 2
= 4
3 a0 2 a0 2
z
r 2 dr = 4
F 1I GH a JK
3 0
3 a0 2 a0 2
z
r 2 e 2 r
a0
dr
Again, using integral tables, Pa0 2 3 a0 2 =  1 1 r r e a0 2
2 a0
LMe MN
2 r a 0
Fr GH
2
a2 + a0 r + 0 2
I OP JK PQ
.
3 a0 2
=
a0 2
2
2 a0
LMe F 17a I  e F 5 a I OP = MN GH 4 JK GH 4 JK PQ
3 2 0 1 2 0
0.497 .
P42.20
=
so Set
3 2 a0
b g
3 2
2 a0
Pr = 4 r 2 2 = 4 r 2 dP 4 4r 3 e  r = 5 dr 24a 0
LM MN
r 2 r e 5 24a 0
a0
a0
+ r4 
FG 1 IJ e H aK
0
 r a0
OP = 0 . PQ
Solving for r, this is a maximum at r = 4a 0 . P42.21
=
d 2 dr
2
1
=
3 a0
e r 1
a0
2 2 d 2 = e  r a0 =  5 r dr r a ra 0 0
a0
7 a0
er
=
1
2 a0 0

2
2m e
F 1  2 I  e = E GH a ra JK 4 r
2 2 0 0 0
2
But so or
a0 = 
2
b4 g
mee
2
e =E 8 0 a 0 kee2 . 2 a0
E=
This is true, so the Schrdinger equation is satisfied.
526 P42.22
Atomic Physics
The hydrogen groundstate radial probability density is P r = 4 r 2 1s
af
2
=
4r 2
3 a0
exp 
FG 2r IJ . H aK
0 0 2 2
The number of observations at 2 a 0 is, by proportion
b g = 1 000 b2 a g N = 1 000 Pb a 2g b a 2g
P 2 a0
0 0
e 4 a 0 a 0 = 1 000 16 e 3 = 797 times .  a0 a0 e
a f
Section 42.6
Physical Interpretation of the Quantum Numbers
Note: Problems 17 and 25 in Chapter 29 and Problem 68 in Chapter 30 can be assigned with this section. P42.23 (a) In the 3d subshell, n = 3 and we have n m ms 3 2 +2 +1/2 3 2 +2 1/2 = 2, 3 2 +1 +1/2 3 2 +1 1/2 3 2 0 +1/2 3 2 0 1/2 3 2 1 +1/2 3 2 1 1/2 3 2 2 +1/2 3 2 2 1/2
(A total of 10 states) (b) In the 3p subshell, n = 3 and we have n m ms (A total of 6 states) P42.24 (a) (b) For the d state, For the f state, = 2, =3, L= L= 6 = 2.58 10 34 J s . = 12 = 3.65 10 34 J s .
34
=1, 3 1 +0 +1/2 3 1 +0 1/2 3 1 1 +1/2 3 1 1 1/2
3 1 +1 +1/2
3 1 +1 1/2
a + 1f
P42.25
L=
a + 1f
:
4.714 10 34 =
a + 1f FGH 6.626210 IJK a + 1f = e4.714 10 j a2 f = 1.998 10 e6.626 10 j
4 2 2 34 2
1
20 = 4 4 + 1
a f
so
=4 .
Chapter 42
527
P42.26
The 5th excited state has n = 6 , energy The atom loses this much energy: to end up with energy which is the energy in state 3: While n = 3 ,
13.6 eV = 0.378 eV . 36 hc
e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 = e1 090 10 mje1.60 10
34 9
8
19
j = 1.14 eV J eV j
ms
0.378 eV  1.14 eV = 1.52 eV
 13.6 eV 33 = 1.51 eV .
can be as large as 2, giving angular momentum For n = 1 , = 0 , m = 0 , ms = m 0 0 0 0 ms 1/2 +1/2 1 2
a + 1f
=
6
.
P42.27
(a)
n =1:
n 1 1
Yields 2 sets; 2n 2 = 2 1 (b)
af
2
= 2
n=2:
we have n 2 2 2 2
For n = 2 , m 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 ms 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 2n 2 = 2 2
yields 8 sets;
af
2
= 8 there are 2 + 1
Note that the number is twice the number of m values. Also, for each different m values. Finally, So the general expression is The series is an arithmetic progression: the sum of which is where a = 2 , d = 4 : (c) (d) (e)
n 1 0
a
f
can take on values ranging from 0 to n  1 . number =
2a 2
+1 .
f
2 + 6 + 10 + 14...
number = number = 2n 2 = 2 3 2n 2 2n 2 n 2a + n  1 d 2 n 4 + n  1 4 = 2n 2 . 2
2
a f
a f
n=3: n=4: n=5:
af af af 2a1f + 2a3f + 2a5f + 2a7 f = 32 32 + 2a9f = 32 + 18 = 50
2 1 + 2 3 + 2 5 = 2 + 6 + 10 = 18
af = 2a 4f = 2a 5 f
= 18 = 32 = 50
2
2
528 P42.28
Atomic Physics
For a 3d state, Therefore, m can have the values so Using the relation we find the possible values of
n = 3 and
L=
= 2. = 6 = 2.58 10 34 J s
a + 1f
2, 1, 0, 1, and 2
L z can have the values  2 ,  , 0 ,
cos = Lz L
and 2
.
145 , 114 , 90.0 , 65.9 , and 35.3 .
1.67 10 27 kg m = V 4 3 1.00 10 15 m
P42.29
(a)
Density of a proton:
=
b ge
13
j
3
= 3.99 10 17 kg m3 .
(b)
Size of model electron:
F 3m I r =G H 4 JK
I=
F 3e9.11 10 =G GH 4 e3.99 10 e
Iv . r
31
17
j IJ kg m j J K
kg
3
13
= 8.17 10 17 m .
(c)
Moment of inertia:
2 2 mr 2 = 9.11 10 31 kg 8.17 10 17 m 5 5
je
j
2
= 2.43 10 63 kg m 2
L z = I = Therefore, v=
2
=
6.626 10 34 J s 8.17 10 17 m r = = 1.77 10 12 m s . 63 2 2I 2 2 2. 43 10 kg m
e
e
je
j
j
(d) P42.30
This is 5.91 10 3 times larger than the speed of light.
In the N shell, n = 4 . For n = 4 , can take on values of 0, 1, 2, and 3. For each value of , m can be  to in integral steps. Thus, the maximum value for m is 3. Since L z = m , the maximum value for L z is L z = 3 .
P42.31
The 3d subshell has
= 2 , and n = 3 . Also, we have s = 1 .
Therefore, we can have n = 3 , leading to the following table: n m s ms 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 0 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 1
= 2 ; m = 2 ,  1, 0 , 1, 2 ; s = 1; and m s = 1, 0 , 1
3 2 1 1 0
3 2 1 1 1
3 2 0 1 1
3 2 0 1 0
3 2 0 1 1
3 2 1 1 1
3 2 1 1 0
3 2 1 1 1
3 2 2 1 1
3 2 2 1 0
3 2 2 1 1
Chapter 42
529
Section 42.7 P42.32 (a) (b)
The Exclusion Principle and the Periodic Table 1s 2 2 s 2 2 p 4 For the 1s electrons, For the two 2s electrons, For the four 2p electrons,
n =1, n=2, n=2;
=0, m =0, =0, m =0, = 1 ; m = 1 , 0, or 1; and
ms = + ms = + ms = +
1 2 1 2 1 2
and and or
  
1 . 2 1 . 2 1 . 2
P42.33
The 4s subshell fills first , for potassium and calcium, before the 3d subshell starts to fill for scandium through zinc. Thus, we would first suppose that Ar 3d 4 4s 2 would have lower energy than Ar 3d 5 4s 1 . But the latter has more unpaired spins, six instead of four, and Hund's rule suggests that this could give the latter configuration lower energy. In fact it must, for Ar 3d 5 4s 1 is the ground state for chromium.
P42.34
Electronic configuration: 1s 2s 2 p
2 2 6
Sodium to Argon
+3s
1
Na 11 Mg 12 Al 13 Si 14 P 15 S 16 Cl 17 Ar 18 K 19
+3s 2 +3s 2 3 p 1 +3s 2 3 p 2 +3s 2 3 p 3 +3s 2 3 p 4 +3s 2 3 p 5 +3s 2 3 p 6
1s 2 2s 2 2 p 6 3s 2 3 p 6 4s 1 *P42.35
In the table of electronic configurations in the text, or on a periodic table, we look for the element whose last electron is in a 3p state and which has three electrons outside a closed shell. Its electron configuration then ends in 3s 2 3 p 1 . The element is aluminum .
530 P42.36
Atomic Physics
(a)
For electron one and also for electron two, n = 3 and here in columns giving the other quantum numbers: electron m one ms 1 1 2 1  1 2 1 1 2 0 1 2 0  1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 0  1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 0  1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1  1 2 1 1  2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1  2 0 1 2 1 1 2 1  1 2 1 1  2 0  1 2
= 1 . The possible states are listed 1 1  2 1 1 2 1 1 2 0  1 2 1 1  2 1  1 2 0 1 2 1 1 2 1  1 2 1 0 1 2 1  1 2 0 1 2 0  1 2 0 1 2 1 1 2 1  1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 1  1 2
electron m two ms
electron m one ms
0  1 2 1
0  1 2 0
0  1 2 1 1 2
1 1 2 0 1 2
1 1 2 1  1 2
1  1 2 1 1 2
1  1 2 0
1  1 2 1 1 2
electron m two ms
1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

There are thirty allowed states, since electron one can have any of three possible values for m for both spin up and spin down, amounting to six states, and the second electron can have any of the other five states. (b) Were it not for the exclusion principle, there would be 36 possible states, six for each electron independently. P42.37 (a) (b) n+ subshell 1 1s 2 2s Filled subshells: Valence subshell: Prediction: Element is phosphorus, 3 2p, 3s 4 3p, 4s 5 3d, 4p, 5s 6 4d, 5p, 6s 7 4f, 5d, 6p, 7s
Z = 15 :
1s , 2s , 2 p , 3s (12 electrons) 3 electrons in 3p subshell Valence = +3 or 5 Valence = +3 or 5 (Prediction correct)
1s , 2s , 2 p , 3s , 3 p , 4s , 3 d , 4 p , 5 s (38 electrons) 9 electrons in 4d subshell Valence = 1 (Prediction fails) Valence is +1 1s , 2s , 2 p , 3s , 3 p , 4s , 3 d , 4 p , 5 s , 4d , 5 p , 6 s , 4 f , 5d , 6 p (86 electrons) Outer subshell is full: inert gas (Prediction correct)
Z = 47 :
Filled subshells: Outer subshell: Prediction: Element is silver,
Z = 86 :
Filled subshells:
Prediction Element is radon, inert P42.38
Listing subshells in the order of filling, we have for element 110, 1s 2 2s 2 2 p 6 3s 2 3 p 6 4s 2 3d 10 4p 6 5s 2 4d 10 5 p 6 6s 2 4 f 14 5 d 10 6 p 6 7 s 2 5 f 14 6 d 8 . In order of increasing principal quantum number, this is 1s 2 2s 2 2 p 6 3s 2 3 p 6 3d 10 4s 2 4p 6 4d 10 4 f 14 5s 2 5 p 6 5d 10 5 f 14 6s 2 6 p 6 6d 8 7 s 2 .
Chapter 42
531
*P42.39
In the ground state of sodium, the outermost electron is in an s state. This state is spherically symmetric, so it generates no magnetic field by orbital motion, and has the same energy no matter whether the electron is spinup or spindown. The energies of the states 3p and 3p above 3s are hc hc hf1 = and hf 2 = .
A
B
2
The energy difference is 2 B B = hc
FG 1 H

1
1
2
IJ K e je j j FG 1 H 588.995 10
9
so
B=
6.63 10 34 J s 3 10 8 m s hc 1 1  = 2 B 1 2 2 9.27 10 24 J T
FG H
IJ e K
m

1 589.592 10
9
IJ mK
B = 18.4 T .
Section 42.8 P42.40 (a)
More on Atomic Spectra: Visible and Xray
n = 3, n = 3,
= 0, m = 0 = 1 , m = 1 , 0 , 1 = 2 , m = 2 ,  1 , 0 , 1 , 2
Z 2 E0 n
2
For n = 3 ,
(b)
300 corresponds to E300 = 
=
2 2 13.6 32
a f=
6.05 eV .
31 1 , 310 , 311 have the same energy since n is the same. 32  2 , 32 1 , 320 , 321 , 322 have the same energy since n is the same.
All states are degenerate. P42.41 E= hc = e V :
e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 e10.0 10 mj
34 9
8
ms
j = e1.60 10 jV
19
V = 124 V
P42.42 Some electrons can give all their kinetic energy K e = eV to the creation of a single photon of xradiation, with hf = hc
= e V
=
6.626 1 10 34 J s 2.997 9 10 8 m s 1 240 nm V hc = = 19 V eV 1.602 2 10 C V
e
e
je
j
j
532 P42.43
Atomic Physics
Following Example 42.9
E =
3 42  1 4
a
f a13.6 eVf = 1.71 10
2
4
eV = 2.74 10 15 J
f = 4.14 10 18 Hz
and E= For hc = 1 240 eV nm =
= 0.072 5 nm .
1.240 keV nm
P42.44
1 = 0.018 5 nm , 3 = 0.021 5 nm ,
E = 67.11 keV
E = 59.4 keV E = 57.7 keV FIG. P42.44
2 = 0.020 9 nm ,
The ionization energy for the K shell is 69.5 keV, so the ionization energies for the other shells are:
L shell = 11.8 keV
P42.45
M shell = 10.1 keV
N shell = 2.39 keV .
The K xrays are emitted when there is a vacancy in the ( n = 1 ) K shell and an electron from the ( n = 3 ) M shell falls down to fill it. Then this electron is shielded by nine electrons originally and by one in its final state. hc
e6.626 10 J sje3.00 10 m sj = a13.6 eVfF  Z GH 9 e0.152 10 mje1.60 10 J eVj F 8 Z  8I 8.17 10 eV = a13.6 eV fG H 9 JK
34 8 9 19 3 2
=
13.6 Z  9 32
a
f
2
eV +
13.6 Z  1 12
a
f
2
eV
2
+
18Z 81  + Z 2  2Z + 1 9 9
I JK
so and
601 =
8Z 2 8 9
Z = 26
Iron .
Section 42.9 Section 42.10 P42.46
Spontaneous and Stimulated Transitions Lasers E4  E3 = 20.66  18.70 eV = 1.96 eV =
The photon energy is
a
f
hc
633 nm .
=
e6.626 10
34
J s 3.00 10 m s
1.96 1.60 10 19 J
e
je
8
j
j=
P42.47
f=
0.117 eV 1.60 10 19 C E = h 6.630 10 34 J s e
F GH
I FG 1 J IJ = JK H 1 V C K
2.82 10 13 s 1
=
c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 10.6 m , infrared f 2.82 10 13 s 1
Chapter 42
533
P42.48
(a)
e3.00 10 Jj I= e1.00 10 sjLMN e15.0 10
3 9
6
= mj O PQ
2
4.24 10 15 W m 2
(b)
e3.00 10
e
3
e0.600 10 mj Jj e30.0 10 mj
9 6
2
2
= 1.20 10 12 J = 7.50 MeV
P42.49
E = P t = 1.00 10 6 W 1.00 10 8 s = 0.010 0 J E = hf = N= hc =
je
j
e6.626 10 je3.00 10 j J = 2.86 10
34 8
694.3 10
9
19
J
0.010 0 E = = 3.49 10 16 photons E 2.86 10 19
 E3 N3 N g e = N 2 N g e  E2
*P42.50
(a)
b k 300 K g b k 300 K g
B B
=e
 E3  E 2
b
g b k 300 K g = e  hc b k 300 K g
B B
where is the wavelength of light radiated in the 3 2 transition. N3  6.63 10 34 Js je 3 10 8 m s j =e e N2 N3 = e 75 .9 = 1.07 10 33 N2 (b) Nu  E E =e b u N
e632.8 10
9
m 1.38 10 23 J K 300 K
je
ja
f
gkT
B
where the subscript u refers to an upper energy state and the subscript state. Since Eu  E = Ephoton = Thus, we require or hc
to a lower energy
Nu = e  hc k BT . N 1.02 = e  hc k BT ln 1.02 = 
a f
e632.8 10
e6.63 10
34
J s 3 10 8 m s
9
m 1.38 10
je
je
23
j J K jT
T=
2.28 10 4 = 1.15 10 6 K . ln 1.02
a f
A negativetemperature state is not achieved by cooling the system below 0 K, but by heating it above T = , for as T the populations of upper and lower states approach equality. (c) Because Eu  E > 0 , and in any real equilibrium state T > 0 ,
e  bEu  E
g k T <1
B
and
Nu < N .
Thus, a population inversion cannot happen in thermal equilibrium.
534 *P42.51
Atomic Physics
(a)
The light in the cavity is incident perpendicularly on the mirrors, although the diagram shows a large angle of incidence for clarity. We ignore the variation of the index of refraction with wavelength. To minimize reflection at a vacuum wavelength of 632.8 nm, the net phase difference between rays (1) and (2) should be 180. There is automatically a 180 shift in one of the two rays upon reflection, so the extra distance traveled by ray (2) should be one whole wavelength:
1 SiO2
2
FIG. P42.51
n 632.8 nm t= = = 217 nm 2 1.458 2n
2t =
a
f
(b)
The total phase difference should be 360, including contributions of 180 by reflection and 180 by extra distance traveled
2n 543 nm t= = = 93.1 nm 4n 4 1.458
2t =
a
f
Additional Problems *P42.52 (a) Using the same procedure that was used in the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, we apply Newton's second law to the Earth. We simply replace the Coulomb force by the gravitational force exerted by the Sun on the Earth and find G MS M E r2 = ME v2 r (1)
where v is the orbital speed of the Earth. Next, we apply the postulate that angular momentum of the Earth is quantized in multiples of :
M E vr = n
Solving for v gives v= n . MEr
bn = 1, 2, 3, ...g .
(2)
Substituting (2) into (1), we find r= continued on next page n2 2 . 2 GM S M E (3)
Chapter 42
535
(b)
Solving (3) for n gives n = GM S r ME . (4)
Taking MS = 1.99 10 30 kg , and M E = 5.98 10 24 kg , r = 1.496 10 11 m ,
G = 6.67 10 11 Nm 2 kg 2 , and
n = 2.53 10 74 . (c)
= 1.055 10 34 Js , we find
We can use (3) to determine the radii for the orbits corresponding to the quantum numbers n and n + 1 : n +1 2 n2 2 rn +1 = and . 2 2 GM S M E GM S M E Hence, the separation between these two orbits is rn = r =
2 2 GM S M E
a f
2
an + 1f
2
 n2 =
2 2 GM S M E
a2n + 1f .
Since n is very large, we can neglect the number 1 in the parentheses and express the separation as r
2 2 GM S M E
a2nf =
1.18 10 63 m .
This number is much smaller than the radius of an atomic nucleus ~ 10 15 m , so the distance between quantized orbits of the Earth is too small to observe. *P42.53 (a)
19 C 6.63 10 34 J s 5.26 T e B 1.60 10 E = = me 2 9.11 10 31 kg
e
j
e
e
j
ja
f F N s I F kg m I = 9.75 10 GH T C m JK GH N s JK
2
23
J
= 609 eV (b) (c) k BT = 1.38 10 23 J K 80 10 3 K = 1.10 10 24 J = 6.90 eV f= E 9.75 10 23 J = = 1.47 10 11 Hz h 6.63 10 34 J s 3 10 8 m s c = = 2.04 10 3 m f 1.47 10 11 Hz
e
je
j
=
*P42.54
(a)
4 2r 2 2r + + 1 e 2 r a 0 Probability = P1 s r dr = 3 r 2 e 2 r a0 dr =  2 a0 a0 a0 r r
z
af
2
z
using integration by parts, or Example 42.5 =
LM F MN GH
I JK
OP PQ
,
r
F 2r GH a
2 0
+
2r + 1 e 2 r a0
I JK
a0
continued on next page
536
Atomic Physics
(b)
1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0
Probability Curve for Hydrogen
1
2
r /a0
3
4
5
FIG. P42.66 (c) The probability of finding the electron inside or outside the sphere of radius r is 1 . 2
F 2r GH a
2
2 0
+
2r + 1 e 2 r a0
I JK
a0
=
2r 1 or z 2 + 2 z + 2 = e z where z = a0 2
One can home in on a solution to this transcendental equation for r on a calculator, the result being r = 1.34a0 to three digits. P42.55 Let r represent the distance between the electron and the positron. The two move in a circle of r radius around their center of mass with opposite velocities. The total angular momentum of the 2 electronpositron system is quantized to according to Ln = where mvr mvr + =n 2 2 kee2 r
2
n = 1, 2 , 3 , ... .
For each particle,
F = ma expands to
n to find mr
=
mv 2 . r 2
We can eliminate v =
k e e 2 2mn 2 2 = . r m 2r 2 r= 2n 2 2 = 2 a0n 2 = mk e e 2
So the separation distances are The orbital radii are
e1.06 10
10
m n2 .
j
r = a 0 n 2 , the same as for the electron in hydrogen. 2 k e2 1 1 The energy can be calculated from E = K + U = mv 2 + mv 2  e . 2 2 r 2 2 2 2 k e k e k e k e ke e2 6.80 eV . =  E= e  e = e = Since mv 2 = e , 2 r 2r 2r 2r n2 4a0n The energy difference between these two states is equal to the energy that is absorbed. Thus, 3 E = k BT or 2 E = E2  E1 =
P42.56
(a)
a13.6 eVf  a13.6 eVf = 10.2 eV =
4 1
1.63 10 18 J .
(b)
2 1.63 10 18 J 2E = = 7.88 10 4 K . T= 3 k B 3 1.38 10 23 J K
e
e
j
j
Chapter 42
537
P42.57
hf = E = 2 2
f=
F 1 GH an  1f 2h mk e F 2n  1 I GH an  1f n JK h
2 4 2 mk e e 4 2 3 2 4 e 2 2
2

1 n2
I JK
2 2 2 mk e e 4 2 h3 n3
As n approaches infinity, we have f approaching The classical frequency is where Using this equation to eliminate r from the expression for f,
f= r= f= hc
v 2 r
=
1 2
ke e2 1 m r3 2
n 2 h2 4 mk e e 2
2 2 2 mk e e 4 2 h3 n3
P42.58
(a)
The energy of the ground state is: From the wavelength of the Lyman line:
E1 = 
series limit
hc
=
1 240 eV nm = 8.16 eV . 152.0 nm
E2  E1 =
=
1 240 nm eV = 6.12 eV 202.6 nm
E2 = E1 + 6.12 eV = 2.04 eV .
The wavelength of the Lyman line gives: so Next, using the Lyman line gives: and From the Lyman line, so E3  E1 = 1 240 nm eV = 7.26 eV 170.9 nm
E3 = 0.902 eV .
E4  E1 = 1 240 nm eV = 7.65 eV 162.1 nm
E4 = 0.508 eV .
E5  E1 = 1 240 nm eV = 7.83 eV 158.3 nm
E5 = 0.325 eV .
hc = Ei  E 2 , or = 1 240 nm eV . Ei  E2
(b)
For the Balmer series, For the line, Ei = E3 and so
a =
a
1 240 nm eV = 1 090 nm . 0.902 eV  2.04 eV
f a
f
Similarly, the wavelengths of the line, line, and the short wavelength limit are found to be: 811 nm , 724 nm , and 609 nm .
continued
538
Atomic Physics
(c)
Computing 60.0% of the wavelengths of the spectral lines shown on the energylevel diagram gives:
a f 0.600a158.3 nmf =
0.600 202.6 nm = 122 nm , 0.600 170.9 nm = 103 nm , 0.600 162.1 nm = 97.3 nm , 95.0 nm , and 0.600 152.0 nm = 91.2 nm
a
a
f
f
a
f
These are seen to be the wavelengths of the , , , and lines as well as the short wavelength limit for the Lyman series in Hydrogen. (d) The observed wavelengths could be the result of Doppler shift when the source moves away from the Earth. The required speed of the source is found from 1 v c f = = = 0.600 f 1+ v c
b g b g
yielding
v = 0.471 c .
P42.59
The wave function for the 2s state is given by Eq. 42.26: 2 s r = (a) Taking we find r = a 0 = 0.529 10 10 m
af
1 4
FG 1 IJ LM2  r OPe a Q 2 H a K N
3 2 0 0
 r 2 a0
.
2s a0 =
2 14
b g
1 4
1 FG 2 H 0.529 10
10
IJ mK
3 2
2  1 e 1 2 = 1.57 10 14 m  3 2 .
(b) (c) *P42.60
2s a0
b g = e1.57 10
m 3 2
j
2
= 2.47 10 28 m 3
2 Using Equation 42.24 and the results to (b) gives P2 s a0 = 4 a0 2 s a0
b g
b g
2
= 8.69 10 8 m 1 .
From Figure 42.20, a typical ionization energy is 8 eV. For internal energy to ionize most of the atoms we require 2 8 1.60 10 19 J 3 ~ between 10 4 K and 10 5 K . k BT = 8 eV : T= 2 3 1.38 10 23 J K
e
e
j j
P42.61
(a) (b)
e3.00 10
E= N= hc
8
m s 14.0 10 12 s = 4.20 mm
je
j
= 2.86 10 19 J
3.00 J = 1.05 10 19 photons 19 2.86 10 J
(c)
V = 4.20 mm 3.00 mm n=
a
f a
f
2
= 119 mm3
1.05 10 19 = 8.82 10 16 mm 3 119
Chapter 42
539
P42.62
(a) (b)
The length of the pulse is L = ct . The energy of each photon is d2 4 E = hc so N = E E = . E hc
(c) *P42.63
V = L
n=
N = V
F 4 GH ct d
2
I FG E IJ JK H hc K
The fermions are described by the exclusion principle. Two of them, one spinup and one spindown, will be in the ground energy level, with d NN = L = 1 h h , = 2L = , and p = 2 p 2L K= p2 1 h2 mv 2 = = . 2 2m 8mL2
The third must be in the next higher level, with d NN = L h = , = L , and p = L 2 2 K= h2 8mL
2 2
p2 h2 . = 2m 2mL2 + h2 8mL
2
The total energy is then at 2 1 Fz 2 z dBz dz = t = 2 2 m0 2m 0
0 2 e
+
h2 2mL
2
=
3h2 4mL2
.
P42.64
z = dBz dz
FG IJ b g FG x IJ e = and HvK 2m H K kg je10 mje10 m s je 2 9.11 10 2m a zfv b 2m g 2a108fe1.66 10 = = x e e1.00 m je1.60 10 Cje1.05 10 J sj
z e 27 3 4 2 2 2 2 19 34
31
kg
j
dBz = 0.389 T m dz P42.65 We use
2s r =
By Equation 42.24,
a f 1 e2 a j FGH 2  ar IJK e 4 1 F r IF r I Par f = 4 r = G J G 2  J 8 H a KH a K
3 1 2 0 0 2 2 2 3 0 0 2 2 3 0 0 0
 r 2 a0
.
2
e r
a0
.
2
(a)
a f LM FG IJ  2r FG 1 IJ FG 2  r IJ  r FG 2  r IJ FG 1 IJ OP e MN H K a H a K H a K a H a K H a K PQ 1 F r IF r IL F r I 2r r F r IO  G 2  J Pe or G J G 2  J M 2G 2  J  8 H a KH a KN H M a K a a H a K QP = 0 .
dP r r 1 2r = 2 3 dr a0 8 a0
2 3 0 0 0 3 0  r a0 0 0 0 0 0
 r a0
=0
The roots of
dP = 0 at r = 0 , r = 2 a 0 and r = are minima with P r = 0 . dr
af
continued
540
Atomic Physics
Therefore we require with solutions
F 6r I F r I ..... = 4  G J + G J Ha K Ha K r = e3 5 ja .
0 0 0
2
=0
We substitute the last two roots into P r to determine the most probable value: When r = 3  5 a 0 = 0.763 9 a 0 , When r = 3 + 5 a 0 = 5.236 a 0 , Therefore, the most probable value of r is
af
e e
j j
Pr = Pr =
af
0.051 9 . a0 0.191 . a0
0
af
e3 + 5 ja
= 5.236 a 0 .
(b)
z
0
P r dr =
af af
z
1 r2 3 8 a0 0
F GH
IF2  r I JK GH a JK
0
2
e r
a0
dr
Let u =
0
r , dr = a 0 du , a0
z
P r dr =
z
1 2 1 4 1 u 4  4u + u 2 e u dr = u  4u 3 + 4u 2 e u du =  u 4 + 4u 2 + 8u + 8 e u 8 8 8 0 0
e
j
z
e
j
e
j
=1
0
This is as required for normalization. P42.66 E= hc = 1 240 eV nm = E E1 = 4.00 eV E2 = 3.10 eV E3 = 0.900 eV FIG. P42.66
so
1 = 310 nm, 2 = 400 nm, 3 = 1 378 nm ,
and the ionization energy = 4.10 eV .
The energy level diagram having the fewest levels and consistent with these energies is shown at the right. P42.67 With one vacancy in the K shell, excess energy E  Z  1
a
f a13.6 eVfFGH 21  11 IJK = 5.40 keV .
2 2 2
We suppose the outermost 4s electron is shielded by 22 electrons inside its orbit: Eionization 2 2 13.6 eV 4
2
a
f = 3.40 eV .
Note the experimental ionization energy is 6.76 eV. K = E  Eionization 5.39 keV .
Chapter 42
541
P42.68
(a)
The configuration we may model as SN oppositely charged particles.
NS has higher energy than SN
SN . The
higher energy state has antiparallel magnetic moments, so it has parallel spins of the
(b)
E=
hc
= 9.42 10 25 J = 5.89 eV 1.055 10 34 J s
7
(c)
Et
2
so E
2 10 yr 3.16 10
e
je
7
F 1.00 eV I = G J JK s yr j H 1.60 10
19
1.04 10 30 eV
P42.69
P=
2.50 a0
z
4r 2 2 r e 3 a0
a0
dr =
2r 1 z 2 e  z dz where z 2 5.00 a0
z
P= P42.70 (a)
1 2 z + 2z + 2 ez 2
e
j
=
5 .00
1 1 37 0 + 25.0 + 10.0 + 2.00 e 5 = 0.006 74 = 0.125 2 2 2
a
f
FG IJ b H K
g
One molecule's share of volume Al: V =
3
mass per molecule 27.0 g mol = density 6.02 10 23 molecules mol
F GH
I F 1.00 10 m I = 1.66 10 JK GH 2.70 g JK
6 3 29
29
m3
V = 2.55 10 10 m~ 10 1 nm .
238 g FG I F 1.00 10 m I H 6.02 10 molecules JK GH 18.9 g JK = 2.09 10
6 3 23
U: V =
3
m3
V = 2.76 10 10 m ~ 10 1 nm .
(b)
The outermost electron in any atom sees the nuclear charge screened by all the electrons below it. If we can visualize a single outermost electron, it moves in the electric field of net charge, +Ze  Z  1 e = + e , the charge of a single proton, as felt by the electron in hydrogen. So the Bohr radius sets the scale for the outside diameter of every atom. An innermost electron, on the other hand, sees the nuclear charge unscreened, and the scale size of its (Ka shell) orbit is 0 . Z
a
f
P42.71
E = 2 B B = hf so and 2 9.27 10 24 J T 0.350 T = 6.626 10 34 J s f
e
ja
f e
j
f = 9.79 10 9 Hz .
542 P42.72
Atomic Physics
a f FGH a1 IJK FGH 2  ar IJK e IF 3  r I d F Ae =G dr H a JK GH 2 4a JK
25
1 = 2 4
1 2
3 2
 r 2 a0
= A 2
0
0
FG H
r r e a0
IJ K
2 a0
d = Ae  r dr
2 a0
F 2 + r I GH a 2a JK
0 2 0
2
 r 2 a0 2 0
2
0
Substituting into Schrdinger's equation and dividing by Ae  r  Now with a 0 =
2 a0
, we will have a solution if
2 2k e2 k e2 2 2 5 2 r Er + e + +  e = 2E  . 2 3 4 m e a0 a0 r a0 8m e a0 m e a0 r 2
me e2 ke 8
2
, this reduces to

2 mee4ke
FG 2  r IJ = EFG 2  r IJ . H aK H aK
0 0
This is true, so 25 is a solution to the Schrdinger equation, provided E = P42.73 (a)
1 E1 = 3.40 eV . 4
Suppose the atoms move in the +x direction. The absorption of a photon by an atom is a completely inelastic collision, described by mvi i +
e ij = mv i
f
h
so
v f  vi = 
h . m
This happens promptly every time an atom has fallen back into the ground state, so it happens every 10 8 s = t. Then, a= v f  vi t = 6.626 10 34 J s h ~ ~ 10 6 m s 2 . 25 9 8 mt 10 kg 500 10 m 10 s
e
je
je
j
(b)
With constant average acceleration,
v 2 = vi2 + 2 ax f
so 1 4r 2 2 r = e 3 r 0 a0
0 ~ 10 3 m s
3
j + 2e10 m s jx e10 m sj ~ 1 m . x ~
2 6 2 2
e
10 6 m s 2
P42.74
z
a0
1 4 4 1  2 a r dr = 3 re b 0 g dr = 3 r a0 0 a0 2 a0
z
b g
2
=
1 a0
We compare this to
1 1 2 = = , and find that the average reciprocal value is NOT the 3 a0 2 3 a0 r reciprocal of the average value.
Chapter 42
543
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P42.2 (a) 91.2 nm, 365 nm, 821 nm, 1.46 m ; (b) 13.6 eV, 3.40 eV, 1.51 eV, 0.850 eV (a) 56.8 fm; (b) 11.3 N away from the nucleus (a) ii; (b) i; (c) ii and iii (a) 13.6 eV; (b)1.51 eV see the solution 97.5 nm (a) O 7+ ; (b) 41.0 nm, 33.8 nm, 30.4 nm (a) 1.31 m ; (b) 164 nm see the solution 4a0 797 times P42.52 P42.42 P42.44 P42.46 P42.48 P42.50 P42.38 1s 2 2s 2 2 p 6 3s 2 3 p 6 3d 10 4s 2 4p 6 4d 10 4 f 14 5s 2 5 p 6 5d 10 5 f 14 6s 2 6 p 6 6d 8 7s 2 P42.40 (a) = 0 with m = 0 ; = 1 with m = 1, 0, or 1; and = 2 with m = 2 , 1, 0, 1, 2; (b) 6.05 eV see the solution L shell 11.8 keV, M shell 10.1 keV, N shell 2.39 keV, see the solution see the solution (a) 4.24 PW m 2 ; (b) 1.20 pJ = 7.50 MeV (a) 1.07 10 33 ; (b) 1.15 10 6 K ; (c) negative temperatures do not describe systems in thermal equilibrium (a) see the solution; (b) 2.53 10 74 ; (c) 1.18 10 63 m , unobservably small 2r + 1 e 2 r a 0 ; a0 (b) see the solution; (c) 1.34 a 0 (a) Probability =
2 0
P42.4 P42.6 P42.8 P42.10 P42.12 P42.14 P42.16 P42.18 P42.20 P42.22 P42.24
J s; (a) 6 = 2.58 10 (b) 12 = 3.65 10 34 J s
6 6 ; 2 ,  , 0, 65.9, 35.3 3 (a) 1s 2 2s 2 2 p 4 ; (b) n
m ms 1 0 0 1 2 1 0 0 1  2 2 0 0 1 2 2 0 0 1  2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1  2 2 1 0 1 2 2 1 1 1 2
34
P42.54
F 2r GH a
2
+
I JK
P42.26 P42.28 P42.30 P42.32
P42.56 , 2 ; 145, 114, 90.0, P42.58
(a) 10.2 eV = 1.63 aJ ; (b) 7.88 10 4 K (a) 8.16 eV, 2.04 eV, 0.902 eV, 0.508 eV, 0.325 eV; (b) 1 090 nm, 811 nm, 724 nm, 609 nm; (c) see the solution; (d) The spectrum could be that of hydrogen, Doppler shifted by motion away from us at speed 0.471c . between 10 4 K and 10 5 K (a) ct ; (b) 0.389 T/m Energy levels at 0, 0.100 eV, 1.00 eV, and 4.10 eV E 4E ; (c) hc t d 2 hc 2
P42.60 P42.62 P42.64 P42.66
P42.34 P42.36
see the solution (a) see the solution; (b) 36 states instead of 30
544 P42.68
Atomic Physics
(a) parallel spins; (b) 5.89 eV ; (c) 1.04 10
30
P42.72 P42.74
see the solution 1 , no a0
eV
1
P42.70
(a) diameter ~ 10 nm for both; (b) A Kshell electron moves in an orbit a with size on the order of 0 Z
43
Molecules and Solids
CHAPTER OUTLINE
43.1 43.2 43.3 43.4 43.5 43.6 Molecular Bonds Energy States and Spectra of Molecules Bonding in Solids FreeElectron Theory of Metals Band Theory of Solids Electrical Conduction in Metals, Insulators, and Semiconductors Semiconductor Devices Superconductivity
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q43.1 Rotational, vibrational and electronic (as discussed in Chapter 42) are the three major forms of excitation. Rotational , where I is 2I the moment of inertia of the molecule. A typical value for a small molecule is on the order of 1 meV = 10 3 eV . Vibrational energy is on the order of hf, where f is the vibration frequency of the molecule. A typical value is on the order of 0.1 eV. Electronic energy depends on the state of an electron in the molecule and is on the order of a few eV. The rotational energy can be zero, but neither the vibrational nor the electronic energy can be zero. energy for a diatomic molecule is on the order of Q43.2 The Pauli exclusion principle limits the number of electrons in the valence band of a metal, as no two electrons can occupy the same state. If the valence band is full, additional electrons must be in the conduction band, and the material can be a good conductor. For further discussion, see Q43.3.
2
43.7 43.8
Q43.3
The conductive properties of a material depend on the electron population of the conduction band of the material. If the conduction band is empty and a full valence band lies below the conduction band by an energy gap of a few eV, then the material will be an insulator. Electrons will be unable to move easily through the material in response to an applied electric field. If the conduction band is partly full, states are accessible to electrons accelerated by an electric field, and the material is a good conductor. If the energy gap between a full valence band and an empty conduction band is comparable to the thermal energy k B T , the material is a semiconductor. Thermal excitation increases the vibrational energy of the molecules. It makes the crystal lattice less orderly. We can expect it to increase the width of both the valence band and the conduction band, to decrease the gap between them.
Q43.4
545
546 Q43.5
Molecules and Solids
First consider electric conduction in a metal. The number of conduction electrons is essentially fixed. They conduct electricity by having drift motion in an applied electric field superposed on their random thermal motion. At higher temperature, the ion cores vibrate more and scatter more efficiently the conduction electrons flying among them. The mean time between collisions is reduced. The electrons have time to develop only a lower drift speed. The electric current is reduced, so we see the resistivity increasing with temperature. Now consider an intrinsic semiconductor. At absolute zero its valence band is full and its conduction band is empty. It is an insulator, with very high resistivity. As the temperature increases, more electrons are promoted to the conduction band, leaving holes in the valence band. Then both electrons and holes move in response to an applied electric field. Thus we see the resistivity decreasing as temperature goes up. In a metal, there is no energy gap between the valence and conduction bands, or the conduction band is partly full even at absolute zero in temperature. Thus an applied electric field is able to inject a tiny bit of energy into an electron to promote it to a state in which it is moving through the metal as part of an electric current. In an insulator, there is a large energy gap between a full valence band and an empty conduction band. An applied electric field is unable to give electrons in the valence band enough energy to jump across the gap into the higher energy conduction band. In a semiconductor, the energy gap between valence and conduction bands is smaller than in an insulator. At absolute zero the valence band is full and the conduction band is empty, but at room temperature thermal energy has promoted some electrons across the gap. Then there are some mobile holes in the valence band as well as some mobile electrons in the conduction band. Ionic bonds are ones between oppositely charged ions. A simple model of an ionic bond is the electrostatic attraction of a negatively charged latex balloon to a positively charged Mylar balloon. Covalent bonds are ones in which atoms share electrons. Classically, two children playing a shortrange game of catch with a ball models a covalent bond. On a quantum scale, the two atoms are sharing a wave function, so perhaps a better model would be two children using a single hula hoop. Van der Waals bonds are weak electrostatic forces: the dipoledipole force is analogous to the attraction between the opposite poles of two bar magnets, the dipoleinduced dipole force is similar to a bar magnet attracting an iron nail or paper clip, and the dispersion force is analogous to an alternatingcurrent electromagnet attracting a paper clip. A hydrogen atom in a molecule is not ionized, but its electron can spend more time elsewhere than it does in the hydrogen atom. The hydrogen atom can be a location of net positive charge, and can weakly attract a zone of negative charge in another molecule. Ionically bonded solids are generally poor electric conductors, as they have no free electrons. While they are transparent in the visible spectrum, they absorb infrared radiation. Physically, they form stable, hard crystals with high melting temperatures. Covalently bonded solids are generally poor conductors, as they form structures in which the atoms share several electrons in the outer shell, leaving no room for conducting electrons. Depending on the structure of the solid, they are usually very hard and have high melting points. Metals are good conductors, as the atoms have many free electrons in the conduction band. Metallic bonds allow the mixing of different metals to form alloys. Metals are opaque to visible light, and can be highly reflective. A metal can bend under stress instead of fracturing like ionically and covalently bonded crystals. The physical properties vary greatly depending on the composition.
Q43.6
Q43.7
Q43.8
Q43.9
Q43.10
Chapter 43
547
Q43.11
The energy of the photon is given to the electron. The energy of a photon of visible light is sufficient to promote the electron from the lowerenergy valence band to the higherenergy conduction band. This results in the additional electron in the conduction band and an additional holethe energy state that the electron used to occupyin the valence band. Along with arsenic (As), any other element in group V, such as phosphorus (P), antimony (Sb), and bismuth (Bi), would make good donor atoms. Each has 5 valence electrons. Any element in group III would make good acceptor atoms, such as boron (B), aluminum, (Al), gallium (Ga), and indium (In). They all have only 3 valence electrons. The two assumptions in the freeelectron theory are that the conduction electrons are not bound to any particular atom, and that the nuclei of the atoms are fixed in a lattice structure. In this model, it is the "soup" of free electrons that are conducted through metals. The energy band model is more comprehensive than the freeelectron theory. The energy band model includes an account of the more tightly bound electrons as well as the conduction electrons. It can be developed into a theory of the structure of the crystal and its mechanical and thermal properties. A molecule containing two atoms of 2 H, deuterium, has twice the mass of a molecule containing two atoms of ordinary hydrogen 1 H . The atoms have the same electronic structure, so the molecules have the same interatomic spacing, and the same spring constant. Then the moment of inertia of the doubledeuteron is twice as large and the rotational energies onehalf as large as for ordinary 1 times that of H 2 . hydrogen. Each vibrational energy level for D 2 is 2 Rotation of a diatomic molecule involves less energy than vibration. Absorption of microwave photons, of frequency ~ 10 11 Hz , excites rotational motion, while absorption of infrared photons, of frequency ~ 10 13 Hz , excites vibration in typical simple molecules. Yes. A material can absorb a photon of energy greater than the energy gap, as an electron jumps into a higher energy state. If the photon does not have enough energy to raise the energy of the electron by the energy gap, then the photon will not be absorbed. From the rotational spectrum of a molecule, one can easily calculate the moment of inertia of the molecule using Equation 43.7 in the text. Note that with this method, only the spacing between adjacent energy levels needs to be measured. From the moment of inertia, the size of the molecule can be calculated, provided that the structure of the molecule is known.
Q43.12
Q43.13
Q43.14
Q43.15
Q43.16
Q43.17
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 43.1 Molecular Bonds q2 4 0 r 2
P43.1
(a)
F=
e1.60 10 j e8.99 10 j N = = e5.00 10 j
19 2 9 10 2
0.921 10 9 N toward the other ion.
(b)
1.60 10 19 8.99 10 9 q 2 = U= J 2.88 eV 4 0 r 5.00 10 10
e
je
2
j
548 P43.2
Molecules and Solids
We are told and or By substitution,
K + Cl + 0.7 eV K + + Cl  Cl + e  Cl  + 3.6 eV Cl  Cl + e   3.6 eV . K + Cl + 0.7 eV K + + Cl+e   3.6 eV K + 4.3 eV K + +e 
or the ionization energy of potassium is 4.3 eV . P43.3 (a) Minimum energy of the molecule is found from dU 2A = 12 Ar 13 + 6Br 7 = 0 yielding r0 = dr B (b) E = U r =  U r = r = 0 
0
This is also the equal to the binding energy, the amount of energy given up by the two atoms as they come together to form a molecule.
LM A MN 4 A B
2
2
LM OP . N Q B O  PP =  LMN 1  1 OPQ BA = 2A B Q 4 2
16 2
B2 4A
(c)
L 2e0.124 10 r =M MN 1.488 10 e1.488 10 E= 4e0.124 10
0
120 60
eV m12 eV m6
j OP PQ
16
= 7.42 10 11 m = 74.2 pm
60
eV m6
j
2
120
eV m12
j
= 4.46 eV
*P43.4
(a)
We add the reactions K + 4.34 eV K + + e  and to obtain I + e  I  + 3.06 eV K + I K + + I  + 4.34  3.06 eV .
a
f
The activation energy is 1.28 eV .
(b)
dU 4 = 12 dr r
LM FG IJ NM H K
13
+6
FG IJ OP H r K QP
7
At r = r0 we have
dU = 0 . Here dr r0
FG IJ H K
13
=
1 2 r0
FG IJ H K
7
= 2 1 6 r0
Then also
0
= 2 1 6 0.305 nm = 0.272 nm = .
a
f
LF 2 r I F 2 r I OP U br g = 4 MG JK  GH r JK P + E = 4 LMN 1  1 OPQ + E r 4 2 MNH Q = E  U br g = 1.28 eV + 3.37 eV = 4.65 eV =
1 6 0 12 0 1 6 0 6 0 a a 0
a
=  + Ea
continued on next page
Chapter 43
549
(c)
F r =
af
dU 4 = 12 dr r
LM FG IJ NM H K
13
6
FG IJ OP H r K QP
7
To find the maximum force we calculate
dF 4 = 156 dr 2 r
rrupture Fmax =
=
FG 42 IJ H 156 K
16
LM NM
FG IJ H K
14
+ 42
FG IJ OP = 0 when H r K QP
8 19
4 4.65 eV 42 12 0.272 nm 156
a
= 6.55 nN
f LM FG IJ NM H K
13 6
6
FG 42 IJ OP = 41.0 eV nm = 41.0 1.6 10 H 156 K QP 10
76
9
Nm m
Therefore the applied force required to rupture the molecule is +6.55 nN away from the center.
(d)
U r0 + s = 4
b
g
LF LMF I F I OP I F I GH r + s JK  GH r + s JK P + E = 4 MMGH 2r + rs JK  GH r2 + s JK MN Q N L 1 F s I 1 F s I OP = 4 M G1 + J MN 4 H r K  2 GH1 + r JK PQ + E L 1 F s s  ...I  1 F1  6 s + 21 s  ...I OP + E = 4 M G 1  12 + 78 MN 4 H r r JK 2 GH r r JK PQ
12 6 1 6 0 12 0 0 a 0 1 6 0 12 6 0 0 a 2 2 0 2 0 0 2 0
6
OP PQ + E
a
a
=12
s s2 s s2 + 78 2  2 +12  42 2 + Ea + ... r0 r0 r0 r0
=  + E a + 0 U r0 + s U r0 + where k =
FG s IJ + 36 s Hr K r
0
2
2 0
+...
b
g b g
1 2 ks 2
72 72 4.65 eV = = 3 599 eV nm 2 = 576 N m . 2 r02 0.305 nm
a
a
f
f
P43.5
At the boiling or condensation temperature,
k BT 10 3 eV = 10 3 1.6 10 19 J T 1.6 10 22 J ~ 10 K . 1.38 10 23 J K
e
j
550
Molecules and Solids
Section 43.2 P43.6
Energy States and Spectra of Molecules 132.9 126.9 m1 m 2 = 1.66 10 27 kg = 1.08 10 25 kg m1 + m 2 132.9 + 126.9
=
a
fe
j
I = r 2 = 1.08 10 25 kg 0.127 10 9 m I 1 2 I = 2 2I
e
je
j
2
= 1.74 10 45 kg m 2
(a)
E=
a f
2
=
J J +1 2I
a f
2
J = 0 gives E = 0 J = 1 gives E =
2
I
e6.626 10 = 4 e1.74 10
2
34 45
Js
j
2
kg m 2
j
= 6.41 10 24 J = 40.0 eV
hf = 6.41 10 24 J  0 to f = 9.66 10 9 Hz (b) P43.7 f=
2 E1 h = = r 2 h hI 4 2 r 2
If r is 10% too small, f is 20% too large.
For the HCl molecule in the J = 1 rotational energy level, we are given r0 = 0.127 5 nm. Erot = Taking J = 1 , we have Erot =
2
2I
2
J J +1 =
a f
1 2 I or = 2 2 2 = 2 . I I2 FIG. P43.7
I
The moment of inertia of the molecule is given by Equation 43.3. m1 m 2 I = r02 = r02 m1 + m 2
FG H L a1 ufa35 uf OPr I=M N 1 u + 35 u Q
2
IJ K
2 0
= 0.972 u 1.66 10 27 kg u 1.275 10 10 m = 2
2
a
fe
je
j
2
= 2.62 10 47 kg m 2 .
Therefore, = 2
I
1.055 10 34 J s = 5.69 10 12 rad s . 2 47 2.62 10 kg m 1 1+1 =
P43.8
hf = E = I= 4 h 2 2 hf
2I
2 2+1  = h 2 f
2
a f
2I
a f
2
2I
a 4f
j
= 1.46 10 46 kg m 2
b
g
2
=
6.626 10 34 J s 2
2
e2.30 10
11
Hz
Chapter 43
551
P43.9
I = m1 r12 + m 2 r22 Then r1 = Also, r2 = I = m1 m 2 r2 m1 m1 r1 . m2
2 m2r 2
where so Thus, +
2 m 2 m1 r 2 1 2
m1 r1 = m 2 r2 m 2 r2 + r2 = r m1 r1 + = m1 r1 =r m2
and and and
r1 + r2 = r . r2 = r1 =
2 2
m1 r . m1 + m 2 m2r m1 + m 2
bm
P43.10
(a)
g bm + m g bm + m g 22.99a35.45f = a22.99 + 35.45f e1.66 10 kgj = 2.32 10 kg I = r = e 2.32 10 kg je0.280 10 mj = 1.81 10
1
m1 m 2 r 2 m 2 + m1
1 2 2
b
+ m2
2
2
g=m m r
1 26
m1 + m 2
= r2 .
27
2
26
9
2
45
kg m 2
(b)
P43.11
a f 2 I 1a1 + 1f = 3 I  I = 2 I = 42h I 2I kg m j c 4 I e3.00 10 m sj4 e1.81 10 = = = 1.62 cm 2h J sj 2e6.626 10 F I The energy of a rotational transition is E = G J J where J is the rotational quantum number of the HIK
hc = 2 2+1 
2 2 8 2 45 2 34 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
higher energy state (see Equation 43.7). We do not know J from the data. However, E = hc
=
e6.626 10
34
J s 3.00 10 8 m s
je
j F 1 eV I . GH 1.60 10 J JK
19
For each observed wavelength,
(mm) 0.120 4 0.096 4 0.080 4 0.069 0 0.060 4
E (eV) 0.010 32 0.012 88 0.015 44 0.018 00 0.020 56 E1 =
2
The E's consistently increase by 0.002 56 eV.
2
I
= 0.002 56 eV
and I =
E1
e1.055 10 J sj F 1 eV I = = b0.002 56 eVg GH 1.60 10 J JK
34 2 19
2.72 10 47 kg m 2 . I 2.72 10 47 m = 0.130 nm. 1.62 10 27
For the HCl molecule, the internuclear radius is
r=
=
552 P43.12
Molecules and Solids
(a)
Minimum amplitude of vibration of HI is 1 2 1 kA = hf : 2 2 A= hf = k
e6.626 10
34
34
J s 6.69 10 13 s
je
320 N m J s 8.72 10 13 s
j = 1.18 10
12
11
m = 0.011 8 nm .
(b)
For HF,
A=
e6.626 10
je
970 N m
j = 7.72 10
m = 0.007 72 nm .
Since HI has the smaller k, it is more weakly bound. P43.13
=
m1 m 2 35 = 1.66 10 27 kg = 1.61 10 27 kg m1 + m 2 36 k = 1.055 10 34
Evib =
e
j
480 = 5.74 10 20 J = 0.358 eV 1.61 10 27
27 26
P43.14
(a)
The reduced mass of the O 2 is =
a16 ufa16 uf a16 uf + a16 uf = 8 u = 8e1.66 10 kg j = 1.33 10 kg . The moment of inertia is then I = r = e1.33 10 kg je1.20 10 mj = 1.91 10 kg m .
2 26 10 2 46 2
The rotational energies are
Erot Erot
Thus And for J = 0 , 1, 2 , Evib = v +
e1.055 10 = J a J + 1f = 2I 2e1.91 10 = e 2.91 10 Jj J a J + 1f .
2 23
34
46
j J a J + 1f . kg m j
Js
2 2
Erot = 0 , 3.64 10 4 eV, 1.09 10 3 eV .
(b)
FG H
FG H
1 2
IJ K
IJ e K
k
= v+
FG H
1 1.055 10 34 J s 2
IJ e K
Evib = v +
1 1 eV 3.14 10 20 J 2 1.60 10 19
jFGH
177 N j 8e1.166 10 mkgj IJ = FG v + 1 IJ a0.196 eVf 2K JK H
27
For v = 0 , 1, 2 , E vib = 0.098 2 eV, 0.295 eV, 0.491 eV .
Chapter 43
553
P43.15
In Benzene, the carbon atoms are each 0.110 nm from the axis and each hydrogen atom is 0.110 + 0.100 nm = 0.210 nm from the axis. Thus, I = mr 2 :
a
f
I = 6 1.99 10 26 kg 0.110 10 9 m
e
je
j + 6e1.67 10
2 2
27
kg 0.210 10 9 m
je
j
2
= 1.89 10 45 kg m 2 .
The allowed rotational energies are then Erot Erot
e1.055 10 J sj Ja J + 1f = e2.95 10 Jj Ja J + 1f = e18.4 10 = J a J + 1f = 2I kg m j 2e1.89 10 = b18.4 eV g J a J + 1f where J = 0 , 1, 2 , 3 , ...
2 34 24 45 2
6
eV J J + 1
ja f
The first five of these allowed energies are: Erot = 0 , 36.9 eV, 111 eV, 221 eV, and 369 eV . *P43.16 We carry extra digits through the solution because part (c) involves the subtraction of two close numbers. The longest wavelength corresponds to the smallest energy difference between the rotational energy levels. It is between J = 0 and J = 1 , namely
2
I
=
hc hc 4 2 Ic = 2 = . If is the reduced mass, then Emin h I
I = r 2 = 0.127 46 10 9 m = 4 2 1.624 605 10 20
e
e
j = e1.624 605 10 m j e 2.997 925 10
2 2
20 8
m2
j
ms
6.626 075 10 34 J s
j = e2.901 830 10
27
23
m kg
j
(1)
(a)
35 =
b1.007 825ugb34.968 853ug = 0.979 593u = 1.626 653 10
1.007 825u + 34.968 853 u
kg
From (1): 35 = 2.901 830 10 23 m kg 1.626 653 10 27 kg = 472 m
e
je
j
(b)
37 =
b1.007 825ugb36.965 903ug = 0.981 077u = 1.629 118 10
1.007 825u + 36.965 903 u
27
kg
From (1): 37 = 2.901 830 10 23 m kg 1.629 118 10 27 kg = 473 m (c) P43.17 hf = h2 4 2 I
e
je
j
37  35 = 472.742 4 m  472.027 0 m = 0.715 m
J where the rotational transition is from J  1 to J,
where f = 6.42 10 13 Hz and I = 1.46 10 46 kg m 2 from Example 43.1.
46 2 kg m 2 6.42 10 13 s 4 2 If 4 1.46 10 = = 558 J= h 6.626 10 34 J s
e
je
j
554 *P43.18
Molecules and Solids
We find an average spacing between peaks by counting 22 gaps between 7.96 10 13 Hz and 9.24 10 13 Hz : f = I=
a9.24  7.96f10
22 h =
13
Hz
= 0.058 2 10 13 Hz =
1 h2 h 4 2 I
F GH
I JK
4 2 f
6.63 10 34 J s = 2.9 10 47 kg m 2 4 2 5.82 10 11 s
*P43.19
We carry extra digits through the solution because the given wavelengths are close together. (a) EvJ = v + E00 =
FG H
2 1 hf + J J +1 2 2I
IJ K
a f
2 3 1 3 2 , E02 = hf + hf + I I 2 2
1 hf , 2
E11 =
2
E11  E00 = hf +
2
I
=
hc
e6.626 075 10 =
34
J s 2.997 925 10 8 m s
6
je
j
(1)
2.211 2 10
m
hf +
I
= 8.983 573 10 20 J 2 I
2
E11  E02 = hf  2 I
2
=
hc
=
e6.626 075 10
34
J s 2.997 925 10 8 m s
6
je
j
(2)
2.405 4 10
m
hf 
= 8.258 284 10 20 J 3 I
2
Subtract (2) from (1):
= 7.252 89 10 21 J
I = (b)
3 1.054 573 10 34 J s 7.252 89 10 21 J
e
j
2
= 4.60 10 48 kg m 2
From (1): f= 8.983 573 10 20 J 6.626 075 10 34
e1.054 573 10 J sj  J s e 4.600 060 10 kg m je6.626 075 10
34 2 48 2
34
Js
j
= 1.32 10 14 Hz (c)
I = r 2 , where is the reduced mass:
=
1 1 m H = 1.007 825u = 8.367 669 10 28 kg . 2 2 I
b
g
So r =
=
4.600 060 10 48 kg m 2 8.367 669 10 28 kg
= 0.074 1 nm .
Chapter 43
555
P43.20
The emission energies are the same as the absorption energies, but the final state must be below v = 1, J = 0 . The transition must satisfy J = 1 , so it must end with J = 1 . To be lower in energy, it
b
must be v = 0 , J = 1 . The emitted photon energy is therefore hf photon = Evib
b
g
g
e
v =1
+ Erot
J =0
j  eE
vib v = 0
+ Erot
J =1
j = eE
vib v =1
 Evib
v=0
j  eE
rot J = 1
 Erot
J =0
j
hf photon = hf vib  hfrot Thus, fphoton = f vib  frot = 6.42 10 13 Hz  1.15 10 11 Hz = 6.41 10 13 Hz . P43.21 The moment of inertia about the molecular axis is Ix =
2 2 2 4 mr 2 + mr 2 = m 2.00 10 15 m . 5 5 5
e
j
The moment of inertia about a perpendicular axis is I y = m The allowed rotational energies are Erot = E1 = E1 , x E1 , y
2 2
F I Ja J + 1f , so the energy of the first excited state is GH 2 I JK
2 2
FG R IJ H 2K
2
+m
FG R IJ H 2K
2
=
2 m 2.00 10 10 m . 2
e
j
I
. The ratio is therefore
2 2
e = e
j = I = b1 2gme2.00 10 I j I b4 5gme2.00 10
Ix
y x y
10 15
m
j mj
=
5 10 5 8
e j
2
= 6.25 10 9 .
Section 43.3 P43.22
Bonding in Solids
Consider a cubical salt crystal of edge length 0.1 mm. The number of atoms is
This number of salt crystals would have volume If it is cubic, it has edge length 40 m.
F 10 m I ~ 10 . GH 0.261 10 m JK 10 e10 mj FGH 0.261 10m m IJK ~ 10
4 3 9 17 4 3 4 3 9
5
m3 .
P43.23
1.60 10 19 ke e2 1 9 =  1.747 6 8.99 10 U= 1 r0 m 0.281 10 9
FG H
IJ b K
ge
j ee
j FG 1  1 IJ = 1.25 10 j H 8K
2
18
J = 7.84 eV
P43.24
Visualize a K + ion at the center of each shaded cube, a Cl  ion at the center of each white one. The distance ab is Distance ac is Distance ad is 2 0.314 nm = 0.444 nm . 2 0.314 nm = 0.628 nm . 22 +
a
f
a
f
e 2 j a0.314 nmf =
2
0.769 nm .
FIG. P43.24
556 P43.25
Molecules and Solids
U=
FG IJ H K x x x But, lna1 + xf = 1  +  +... 2 3 4
2 3 4
ke e2 ke e2 ke e2 ke e2 ke e2 ke e2 ke e2 ke e2  + +   + + ... 2r 2r 3r 3r 4r 4r r r 2k e 2 1 1 1 = e 1  +  +... 2 3 4 r
e e e e e e + + + r 2r 3r FIG. P43.25
so, U = 
2kee e ln 2 , or U =  k e where = 2 ln 2 . r r
2
2
Section 43.4 Section 43.5
FreeElectron Theory of Metals Band Theory of Solids
P43.26
h 2 3n e EF = 2 m 8
FG IJ H K
23
L e6.626 10 J sj =M MM 2e9.11 10 kg je1.60 10 N
34 31
2 19
OPF 3 I G J J eV j PH 8 K QP
23
2 ne 3
2 EF = 3.65 10 19 n e 3 eV with n measured in electrons m3 .
e
j
P43.27
The density of conduction electrons n is given by EF = 8 2mEF ne = 3 h2
h 2 3n e 2 m 8
FG IJ H K j
23
or
FG H
IJ K
32
31 kg 5.48 1.60 10 19 J 8 2 9.11 10 = 3 3 6.626 10 34 J s
e
ja fe
j
3 2
e
= 5.80 10 28 m 3 .
The numberdensity of silver atoms is n Ag = 10.6 10 3 kg m3 So an average atom contributes P43.28 (a) 1 mv 2 = 7.05 eV 2 v=
e
atom F jFGH 1108 u IJK GH 1.66 110u
27
I = 5.91 10 J kg K
28
m 3 .
5.80 = 0.981 electron to the conduction band . 5.91
2 7.05 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV 9.11 10
31
a
fe
kg
j=
1.57 10 6 m s
(b)
Larger than 10 4 m s by ten orders of magnitude. However, the energy of an electron at
room temperature is typically k BT = 1 eV . 40
Chapter 43
557
P43.29
For sodium, M = 23.0 g mol and = 0.971 g cm3 . 6.02 10 23 electrons mol 0.971 g cm 3 NA = ne = 23.0 g mol M
(a)
e
je
j
n e = 2.54 10 22 electrons cm3 = 2.54 10 28 electrons m3
(b)
EF
F h I FG 3n IJ =G H 2m JK H 8 K
2 e
23
e6.626 10 = 2e9.11 10
g j
34 31
Js
j LM 3e2.54 10 8 kg j M N
2
28
m 3
j OP PQ
23
= 5.05 10 19 J = 3.15 eV
P43.30
The melting point of silver is 1 234 K. Its Fermi energy at 300 K is 5.48 eV. The approximate fraction of electrons excited is 1.38 10 23 J K 1 234 K k BT = 2% . EF 5.48 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV
e a
fe
jb
P43.31
Taking EF = 5.48 eV for sodium at 800 K, f = eb
E  EF k B T k BT
g
+1
1
= 0.950
e b E  EF g
=
E  EF = ln 0.052 6 = 2.94 k BT
b
1  1 = 0.052 6 0.950
g
E  EF
e1.38 10 ja800f J = 0.203 eV or = 2.94
23
1.60 10 19 J eV
E = 5.28 eV .
P43.32
d = 1.00 mm , so The density of states is
V = 1.00 10 3 m g E = CE 1 2 =
e
j
3
= 1.00 10 9 m 3 . E1 2
af
8 2 m 3 2 h
3
or
gE =
af af
8 2 9.11 10 31 kg
e
j
3 2
e6.626 10 jb
34
Js
j
3
a4.00 eVfe1.60 10
19
J eV
j
g E = 8.50 10 46 m 3 J 1 = 1.36 10 28 m 3 eV 1 . So, the total number of electrons is
N = g E E V = 1.36 10 28 m 3 eV 1 0.025 0 eV 1.00 10 9 m3 = 3.40 10 17 electrons .
a fa f e
ge
j
558 P43.33
Molecules and Solids
Eav =
1 EN E dE ne 0
z
af
At T = 0 , Since f E = 1 for E < EEF and f E = 0 for E > EF , we can take Eav = 1 ne
EF 0
af
af
af N aEf = CE
Eav =
N E = 0 for E > EF ;.
12
=
3 8 2 m e 2
z
CE 3 2 dE =
C ne
EF 0
z
h3
E1 2
E 3 2 dE =
2C 5 2 EF . 5n e
But from Equation 43.24, P43.34
C 3 3 2 = EF , so that ne 2
FG 2 IJ FG 3 E IJ E H 5KH 2 K
3 2 F
5 2 F
=
3 EF . 5
Consider first the wave function in x. At x = 0 and x = L , = 0. Therefore, Similarly, sin k x L = 0 sin k y L = 0 sin k z L = 0
y
and and and
z
k x L = , 2 , 3 , .... k y L = , 2 , 3 , ... k z L = , 2 , 3 , ...
= A sin
2
FG n x IJ sinFG n y IJ sinFG n z IJ . H L K H L K H L K 2m + + = From aU  Ef , x y z F  n  n  n I = 2m E a f GH L L L JK
x 2 2 2 2 2 2 e 2 x 2 2 y 2 2 2 2 z 2 2 2 e
we have inside the box, where U = 0, E=
2 2 2 2 nx + ny + nz 2 2m e L
2
e
j
n x , n y , n z = 1, 2 , 3 , ... .
Outside the box we require = 0. The minimum energy state inside the box is P43.35 (a) The density of states at energy E is Hence, the required ratio is (b) n x = n y = n z = 1, with E = g E = CE 1 2 . 3 2 2 2m e L2
af g a8.50 eV f C a8.50f = g a7.00 eV f C a7.00f
12 E  EF k B T
12 12
= 1.10 .
From Eq. 43.22, the number of occupied states having energy E is NE = Hence, the required ratio is At T = 300 K , k BT = 4.14 10 21 J = 0.025 9 eV , And
a f eb CE + 1 . g N a8.50 eV f a8.50f L e a = MM N a7.00 eV f a7.00f N e a N a8.50 eV f a8.50f L = N a7.00 eV f a7.00f M e a N N a8.50 eV f = 1.55 10 N a7.00 eV f
12 12 12 12
7.00  7 .00 k BT
8 .50  7.00 kB T
f f
1.50 0 .025 9
f
2.00
OP . + 1Q P OP . + 1Q
+1
25
.
Comparing this result with that from part (a), we conclude that very few states with E > EF are occupied.
Chapter 43
559
Section 43.6 P43.36 (a)
Electrical Conduction in Metals, Insulators, and Semiconductors E g = 1.14 eV for Si
hf = 1.14 eV = 1.14 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV = 1.82 10 19 J so f 2.75 10 14 Hz (b) P43.37 c = f ; = c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 1.09 10 6 m = 1.09 m (in the infrared region) f 2.75 10 14 Hz
a
fe
j
Photons of energy greater than 2.42 eV will be absorbed. This means wavelength shorter than
=
6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = = 514 nm . E 2.42 1.60 10 19 J
e
je
j
All the hydrogen Balmer lines except for the red line at 656 nm will be absorbed. P43.38 P43.39 Eg = hc =
e6.626 10
34
J s 3.00 10 8 m s
9
je
650 10
m
j J
1.91 eV
If 1.00 10 6 m, then photons of sunlight have energy E hc
max
e6.626 10 =
34
J s 3.00 10 8 m s
6
je
1.00 10
m
j F 1 eV I = 1.24 eV . GH 1.60 10 J JK
19
Thus, the energy gap for the collector material should be E g 1.24 eV . Since Si has an energy gap E g 1.14 eV , it will absorb radiation of this energy and greater. Therefore, Si is acceptable as a material for a solar collector. P43.40 If the photon energy is 5.5 eV or higher, the diamond window will absorb. Here,
bhf g
*P43.41
max
=
hc
min
= 5.5 eV :
7
min =
6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = 5.5 eV 5.5 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV
e
a
fe
je
j
j
min = 2.26 10
m = 226 nm . ke and m e by m* . Then the radius of the first Bohr orbit,
In the Bohr model we replace k e by a0 = a =
2
me ke e2
2
in hydrogen, changes to
2 me me me a0 = = = 11.7 0.052 9 nm = 2.81 nm . 0. 220m e mke e2 m me ke e2 m
FG IJ H K
FG IJ H K
FG H
IJ b K
g
The energy levels are in hydrogen En =  En = 
ke e2 1 ke e2 m En = = 2 2a n me 2 2 m e m a0
e
j
F I GH JK
ke e2 1 and here 2 a0 n 2
For n = 1 , E1 = 0.220
13.6 eV 11.7 2
= 0.021 9 eV .
560
Molecules and Solids
Section 43.7 P43.42
Semiconductor Devices
I = I 0 e ea V f
e
k BT
1 .
j
Thus, V = V =
e ea V f
k BT
=1+
and At T = 300 K , (a) (b) If I = 9.00 I 0 , If I = 0.900 I 0 ,
e1.38 10
k BT I ln 1 + . e I0
23
FG H
IJ K
I I0
J K 300 K
19
ja
1.60 10
C
f lnF 1 + I I = a25.9 mVf lnF 1 + I I . GH I JK GH I JK
0 0
a f a f V = a 25.9 mV f lna0.100f =
V = 25.9 mV ln 10.0 = 59.5 mV . 59.5 mV .
The basic idea behind a semiconductor device is that a large current or charge can be controlled by a small control voltage. P43.43 The voltage across the diode is about 0.6 V. The voltage drop across the resistor is 0.025 A 150 = 3.75 V . Thus,  0.6 V  3.8 V = 0 and = 4.4 V .
a
fa
f
P43.44
First, we evaluate I 0 in I = I 0 e ea V f
1.60 10 19 C 0.100 V e V 200 mA I = 3.86 = 4.28 mA = = 3.86 so I 0 = ea V f k T 23 B k BT 1 1 e 1.38 10 J K 300 K e If V = 100 mV , I = I 0 e ea V f e V = 3.86 ; and the current will be k BT
a f e e
ja
e
k BT
 1 , given that I = 200 mA when V = 100 mV and T = 300 K .
a f
ja
f f
j
e
k BT
 1 = 4.28 mA e 3.86  1 = 4.19 mA . Diode and Wire Currents 20 10 0 Diode Wire
j a
fe
j
*P43.45
(a)
The currents to be plotted are I D = 10 6 A e V IW = 2.42 V  V 745
e
je
0.025 V
1 ,
j
The two graphs intersect at V = 0.200 V . The currents are then I D = 10 6 A e 0. 200 V 0.025 V  1
e
je
j
0
0.1
V(volts)
0.2
0.3
= 2.98 mA FIG. P43.45 2.42 V  0.200 V = 2.98 mA . They agree to three digits. IW = 745 I D = I W = 2.98 mA (b) V 0.200 V = = 67.1 ID 2.98 10 3 A d V dI D = dI D d V
(c)
a f LM OP = LM 10 A e N a f Q N 0.025 V
1 6
0 . 200 V 0.025 V
OP Q
1
= 8.39
Chapter 43
561
Section 43.8 P43.46 (a) (b)
Superconductivity See the figure at right. For a surface current around the outside of the cylinder as shown, B= N 0 I or NI = B
0
a0.540 Tfe2.50 10 mj = = e4 10 j T m A
2 7
10.7 kA .
FIG. P43.46 P43.47 By Faraday's law (Equation 32.1), Thus, B I B =L =A . t t t A B 0.010 0 m 0.020 0 T I = = = 203 A . L 3.10 10 8 H
a f b
gb
2
g
The direction of the induced current is such as to maintain the B field through the ring. P43.48 (a) V = IR If R = 0 , then V = 0 , even when I 0 . (b) The graph shows a direct proportionality. Slope = 155  57.8 mA I 1 = = = 43.1 1 V R 3.61  1.356 mV
a
a
f f
R = 0.023 2 (c) Expulsion of magnetic flux and therefore fewer currentcarrying paths could explain the decrease in current. FIG. P43.48
Additional Problems P43.49 (a) Since the interatomic potential is the same for both molecules, the spring constant is the same. Then f = 1 2 k
where 12 =
a12 ufa16 uf = 6.86 u and = a14 ufa16 uf = 7.47 u .
12 u + 16 u
14
14 u + 16 u
Therefore, f14 = 1 2 k
14
=
1 2
k
12
FG IJ = f H K
12 14
12
12 = 6.42 10 13 Hz 14
e
j
6.86 u = 6.15 10 13 Hz . 7.47 u
continued on next page
562
Molecules and Solids
(b)
(c)
FG IJ r = FG IJ I H K H K F 7.47 u IJ e1.46 10 kg m j = 1.59 10 kg m I =G H 6.86 u K The molecule can move to the b v = 1, J = 9g state or to the b v = 1, J = 11g state. The energy it
I 14 = 14 r 2 =
14 14 12 12 2 14 12 12 46 2 46 2
The equilibrium distance is the same for both molecules.
can absorb is either
or
LMFG 1 + 1 IJ hf 2K NH hc LF 1I = MG 1 + J hf E = H 2K N
E = hc =
14 + 9 9 + 1
14
a f 2 I OP  LMFGH 0  1 IJK hf + 10a10 + 1f 2 I OP , Q N 2 Q OP  LMFG 0 + 1 IJ hf + 10a10 + 1f OP . + 11a11 + 1f 2 I Q NH 2K 2I Q
2 2 14 14 14 2 2 14 14 14
The wavelengths it can absorb are then
=
These are: =
c f14  10
b2 I g
14
or =
c f14 + 11
b2 I g .
14
6.15 10 13 Hz  10 1.055 10 34 J s
e
3.00 10 8 m s
j
2 1.59 10 46 kg m 2
e
j j
= 4.96 m
and
=
6.15 10 13 Hz + 11 1.055 10 34 J s
e
3.00 10 8 m s
j
2 1.59 10 46 kg m 2 m 2
e
= 4.79 m .
P43.50
For the N 2 molecule, k = 2 297 N m, m = 2.32 10 26 kg , r = 1.20 10 10 m , =
=
k
= 4.45 10 14 rad s,
I = r 2 = 1.16 10 26 kg 1.20 10 10 m
e
je
j
2
= 1.67 10 46 kg m 2 .
For a rotational state sufficient to allow a transition to the first exited vibrational state,
2
2I
J J + 1 = so J J + 1 =
a f
a f
1 2
2 I
=
2 1.67 10 46 4.45 10 14 1.055 10
34
e
je
j = 1 410 .
19
Thus J = 37 .
P43.51
Emax = 4.5 eV = v + 8.25 > 7.5 v=7
FG H
IJ K
so
a4.5 eVfe1.6 10 J eVj F v + 1 I G J e1.055 10 J sje8.28 10 s j H 2 K
34 14 1
P43.52
With 4 van der Waal bonds per atom pair or 2 electrons per atom, the total energy of the solid is E = 2 1.74 10 23 J atom
e
10 jFGH 6.02 4.00 gatoms IJK =
23
5. 23 J g .
Chapter 43
563
P43.53
The total potential energy is given by Equation 43.17: U total = 
ke e2 B + m. r r
The total potential energy has its minimum value U 0 at the equilibrium spacing, r = r0 . At this point, dU = 0, dr r = r0 or dU dr =
r = r0
k e2 d B  e + m dr r r
F GH
I JK
=
r = r0
kee2 r02

mB = 0. r0m +1
Thus, Substituting this value of B into U total ,
B=
k e e 2 m 1 r0 . m
U 0 = 
kee2 k e2 k e2 1 1 1 + e r0m 1 m =  e r0 m r0 m r0
F I GH JK
FG H
IJ K
.
P43.54
Suppose it is a harmonicoscillator potential well. Then, 1 1 hf + 4.48 eV = 0.520 eV + 4.48 eV = 4.74 eV . 2 2
1 3 hf + 4. 48 eV = hf + 3.96 eV is the depth 2 2 of the well below the dissociation point. We see hf = 0.520 eV , so the depth of the well is
a
f
P43.55
(a)
For equilibrium,
dU = 0: dx
d Ax 3  Bx 1 = 3 Ax 4 + Bx 2 = 0 dx
e
j
x describes one equilibrium position, but the stable equilibrium position is at  3 Ax 0 2 = B . x0 = 3 0.150 eV nm3 3A = = 0.350 nm 3.68 eV nm B U0 = U x= x =
0
e
j
(b)
The depth of the well is given by U0 = U x= x = 
0
2 3.68 eV nm 2B 3 2 = 32 12 3 A 3 3 2 0.150 eV nm3
a e
f
A B AB 3 2 BB 1 2  = 32 32  12 12 3 3 A x0 x0 3 A
3 2
j
12
= 7.02 eV .
(c)
Fx = 
dU = 3 Ax 4  Bx 2 dx dF dx = 0.
x = xm
To find the maximum force, we determine finite x m such that Thus, Then 12 Ax 5 + 2Bx 3
2
Fmax
or
Fmax
FG 6 A IJ . HBK F B IJ  BFG B IJ =  B =  a3.68 eV nmf = 3 AG H 6 A K H 6 A K 12 A 12e0.150 eV nm j F 1.60 10 J I FG 1 nm IJ = 1.20 10 = 7.52 eV nm G H 1 eV JK H 10 m K
x = xm
= 0 so that x m =
2
12
2
3
19
9
9
N = 1.20 nN .
564 P43.56
Molecules and Solids
(a)
For equilibrium,
dU = 0: dx 3A . B
d Ax 3  Bx 1 = 3 Ax 4 + Bx 2 = 0 dx
e
j
x describes one equilibrium position, but the stable equilibrium position is at
 3 Ax 0 2 = B or x 0 =
(b)
The depth of the well is given by U 0 = U x = x =
0
A B AB 3 2 BB 1 2 B3  = 3 2 3 2  1 2 1 2 = 2 . 3 27 A 3 A x0 x0 3 A
(c)
Fx = 
dU = 3 Ax 4  Bx 2 dx
To find the maximum force, we determine finite x m such that dFx dx P43.57 (a) = 12 Ax 5 + 2Bx 3
x = xm x = x0
= 0 then Fmax = 3 A dU dr
FG B IJ H 6AK
2
B
FG B IJ = H 6AK

B2 . 12 A
At equilibrium separation, r = re ,
a r r  a r r = 2 aB e b e 0 g  1 e b e 0 g = 0 . r = re
We have neutral equilibrium as re and stable equilibrium at or (b) (c) At r = r0 , U = 0. As r , U B . The depth of the well is B . We expand the potential in a Taylor series about the equilibrium point:
e  abre  r0 g = 1 ,
re = r0 .
br  r g + 1 ddrU br  r g 2 1 U ar f 0 + 0 + a 2BafL ae b g  ae b g e e b NM 2
U r U r0 + dU dr
r = r0 0 2 0 r = r0 2 r  r0  r  r0
af b g
2
2
2 r  r0
g  1 jO
This is of the form for a simple harmonic oscillator with Then the molecule vibrates with frequency
QP br  r g Ba br  r g 1 1 kx = k br  r g 2 2
r = r0 2 0 2 2 0 0 2
2
k = 2Ba 2 . f= 1 2 k
=
a 2
2B
=
a
B . 2
(d)
The zeropoint energy is
ha 1 1 = hf = 2 2
B . 8 ha
Therefore, to dissociate the molecule in its ground state requires energy B 
B . 8
Chapter 43
565
P43.58 E EF 0 0.500 0.600 0.700 0.800 0.900 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50
T=0 e e  e  e  e  e  e  e0 e + e + e + e + e +
T = 0.1TF
F
T = 0.2TF
F
T = 0.5TF
F F e 2.00 0.993 e 0.924 e 1.00 0.881 e 0.800 0.818 e 0.600 0.731 e 0. 400 0.622 e 0. 200 0.500 e0 0.378 e 0. 200 0.269 e 0. 400 0.182 e 0 .600 0.119 e 0 .800 0.075 9 e 1.00
bE E g1 bT T g
F
f E
af
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.500 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
F e 10 .0 e e 5.00 e 4.00 e 3.00 e 2.00 e 1.00 e0 e 1.00 e 2.00 e 3 .00 e 4.00 e 5 .00
bE E g1 bT T g
f E
af
1.000 0.993 0.982 0.953 0.881 0.731 0.500 0.269 0.119 0.047 4 0.018 0 0.006 69
F e 5.00 e e 2.50 e 2.00 e 1.50 e 1.00 e 0.500 e0 e 0 .500 e 1.00 e 1.50 e 2.00 e 2.50
bE E g1 bT T g
f E
af
bE E g1 bT T g
F
f E
af
0.881 0.731 0.690 0.646 0.599 0.550 0.500 0.450 0.401 0.354 0.310 0.269
FIG. P43.58 P43.59 (a) There are 6 Cl  ions at distance r = r0 . The contribution of these ions to the electrostatic 6 k e e 2 potential energy is . r0
There are 12 Na + ions at distance r = 2 r0 . Their contribution to the electrostatic potential +12 k e e 2 energy is . Next, there are 8 Cl  ions 2 r0 at distance r = 3 r0 . These contribute a term of 8 k e e 2 3 r0 to the electrostatic potential energy. FIG. P43.59
To three terms, the electrostatic potential energy is: U = 6 +
FG H
12 2

8
IJ k e 3K r
e 0
2
= 2.13
k e2 kee2 with = 2.13 . or U =  e r0 r0
continued on next page
566
Molecules and Solids
(b)
The fourth term consists of 6 Na + at distance r = 2r0 . Thus, to four terms, U = 2.13 + 3
a
f k re
e 0
2
= 0.866
kee2 . r0
So we see that the electrostatic potential energy is not even attractive to 4 terms, and that the infinite series does not converge rapidly when groups of atoms corresponding to nearest neighbors, nextnearest neighbors, etc. are added together.
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P43.2 P43.4 4.3 eV (a) 1.28 eV; (b) = 0.272 nm, = 4.65 eV ; (c) 6.55 nN; (d) 576 N m (a) 40.0 eV , 9.66 GHz; (b) If r is 10% too small, f is 20% too large. 1.46 10 46 kg m 2 (a) 1.81 10 45 kg m 2 ; (b) 1.62 cm (a) 11.8 pm; (b) 7.72 pm; HI is more loosely bound (a) 0, 364 eV , 1.09 meV; (b) 98.2 meV, 295 meV, 491 meV (a) 472 m ; (b) 473 m ; (c) 0.715 m 2.9 10 47 kg m 2 only 64.1 THz (a) ~ 10 17 ; (b) ~ 10 5 m 3 (a) 0.444 nm, 0.628 nm, 0.769 nm see the solution (a) 1.57 Mm s; (b) larger by 10 orders of magnitude P43.30 P43.32 P43.34 P43.36 P43.38 P43.40 P43.42 P43.44 P43.46 P43.48 P43.50 P43.52 P43.54 P43.56 P43.58 2% 3.40 10 17 electrons see the solution (a) 275 THz; (b) 1.09 m 1.91 eV 226 nm (a) 59.5 mV; (b) 59.5 mV 4.19 mA (a) see the solution; (b) 10.7 kA see the solution 37 5.23 J g 4.74 eV (a) x 0 = B2 3A B3 ; (b) 2 ; (c)  B 27 A 12 A
P43.6
P43.8 P43.10 P43.12 P43.14
P43.16 P43.18 P43.20 P43.22 P43.24 P43.26 P43.28
see the solution
44
Nuclear Structure
CHAPTER OUTLINE
44.1 44.2 44.3 44.4 44.5 44.6 44.7 44.8 Some Properties of Nuclei Nuclear Binding Energy Nuclear Models Radioactivity The Decay Processes Natural Radioactivity Nuclear Reactions Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Magnetic Resonance Imagining
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q44.1 Because of electrostatic repulsion between the positivelycharged nucleus and the +2e alpha particle. To drive the particle into the nucleus would require extremely high kinetic energy. There are 86 protons and 136 neutrons in the nucleus 222 Rn. 86 For the atom to be neutral, there must be 86 electrons orbiting the nucleusthe same as the number of protons. All of these isotopes have the same number of protons in the nucleus. Neutral atoms have the same number of electrons. Isotopes only differ in the number of neutrons in the nucleus. Nuclei with more nucleons than bismuth209 are unstable because the electrical repulsion forces among all of the protons is stronger than the nuclear attractive force between nucleons.
Q44.2
Q44.3
Q44.4
Q44.5
The nuclear force favors the formation of neutronproton pairs, so a stable nucleus cannot be too far away from having equal numbers of protons and neutrons. This effect sets the upper boundary of the zone of stability on the neutronproton diagram. All of the protons repel one another electrically, so a stable nucleus cannot have too many protons. This effect sets the lower boundary of the zone of stability. Nucleus Y will be more unstable. The nucleus with the higher binding energy requires more energy to be disassembled into its constituent parts. Extra neutrons are required to overcome the increasing electrostatic repulsion of the protons. The neutrons participate in the net attractive effect of the nuclear force, but feel no Coulomb repulsion. In the liquiddrop model the nucleus is modeled as a drop of liquid. The nucleus is treated as a whole to determine its binding energy and behavior. The shell model differs completely from the liquiddrop model, as it utilizes quantum states of the individual nucleons to describe the structure and behavior of the nucleus. Like the electrons that orbit the nucleus, each nucleon has a spin state to which the Pauli exclusion principle applies. Unlike the electrons, for protons and neutrons the spin and orbital motions are strongly coupled. The liquid drop model gives a simpler account of a nuclear fission reaction, including the energy released and the probable fission product nuclei. The shell model predicts magnetic moments by necessarily describing the spin and orbital angular momentum states of the nucleons. Again, the shell model wins when it comes to predicting the spectrum of an excited nucleus, as the quantum model allows only quantized energy states, and thus only specific transitions. 567
Q44.6 Q44.7 Q44.8
Q44.9
568 Q44.10 Q44.11
Nuclear Structure
4
He ,
16
O,
40
Ca , and
208
Pb.
If one half the number of radioactive nuclei decay in one year, then one half the remaining number will decay in the second year. Three quarters of the original nuclei will be gone, and one quarter will remain. The statement is false. Both patterns show monotonic decrease over time, but with very different shapes. For radioactive decay, maximum activity occurs at time zero. Cohorts of people now living will be dying most rapidly perhaps forty years from now. Everyone now living will be dead within less than two centuries, while the mathematical model of radioactive decay tails off exponentially forever. A radioactive nucleus never gets old. It has constant probability of decay however long it has existed. Since the samples are of the same radioactive isotope, their halflives are the same. When prepared, sample A has twice the activity (number of radioactive decays per second) of sample B. After 5 halflives, the activity of sample A is decreased by a factor of 2 5 , and after 5 halflives the activity of sample B is decreased by a factor of 2 5 . So after 5 halflives, the ratio of activities is still 2:1. After one halflife, one half the radioactive atoms have decayed. After the second halflife, one half 1 1 3 of the remaining atoms have decayed. Therefore + = of the original radioactive atoms have 2 4 4 decayed after two halflives. The motion of a molecule through space does not affect anything inside the nucleus of an atom of the molecule. The halflife of a nucleus is based on nuclear stability which, as discussed in Questions 44.4 and Q44.5, is predominantly determined by Coulomb repulsion and nuclear forces, not molecular motion. Longlived progenitors at the top of each of the three natural radioactive series are the sources of our radium. As an example, thorium232 with a halflife of 14 Gyr produces radium228 and radium224 at stages in its series of decays, shown in Figure 44.17. A free neutron decays into a proton plus an electron and an antineutrino. This implies that a proton is more stable than a neutron, and in particular the proton has lower mass. Therefore a proton cannot decay into a neutron plus a positron and a neutrino. This reaction satisfies every conservation law except for energy conservation. A neutrino has spin 1 while a photon has spin 1. A neutrino interacts by the weak interaction while 2 a photon is a quantum of the electromagnetic interaction. Let us consider the carbon14 decay used in carbon dating. 14 C 14 N + e  + . The carbon14 atom 6 7 has 6 protons in the nucleus. The nitrogen14 atom has 7 protons in the nucleus, but the additional + charge from the extra proton is canceled by the charge of the ejected electron. Since charge is conserved in this (and every) reaction, the antineutrino must have zero charge. Similarly, when nitrogen12 decays into carbon12, the nucleus of the carbon atom has one fewer protons, but the change in charge of the nucleus is balanced by the positive charge of the ejected positron. Again according to charge conservation, the neutrino must have no charge.
Q44.12
Q44.13
Q44.14
Q44.15
Q44.16
Q44.17
Q44.18
Q44.19
Chapter 44
569
Q44.20
An electron has spin quantum number
1 . When a nucleus undergoes beta decay, an electron and 2 antineutrino are ejected. With all nucleons paired, in their ground states the carbon14, nitrogen14, nitrogen12, and carbon12 nuclei have zero net angular momentum. Angular momentum is conserved in any process in an isolated system and in particular in the betadecays of carbon14 and 1 nitrogen12. Conclusion: the neutrino must have spin quantum number , so that its zcomponent 2 of angular momentum can be just
or  . A proton and a neutron have spin quantum number 1. 2 2 For conservation of angular momentum in the betadecay of a free neutron, an antineutrino must 1 have spin quantum number . 2 Q44.21 The alpha particle and the daughter nucleus carry equal amounts of momentum in opposite p2 directions. Since kinetic energy can be written as , the smallmass alpha particle has much more 2m of the decay energy than the recoiling nucleus. Bullet and rifle carry equal amounts of momentum p. With a much smaller mass m, the bullet has p2 much more kinetic energy K = . The daughter nucleus and alpha particle have equal momenta 2m and the massive daughter nucleus, like the rifle, has a very small share of the energy released. Yes. The daughter nucleus can be left in its ground state or sometimes in one of a set of excited states. If the energy carried by the alpha particle is mysteriously low, the daughter nucleus can quickly emit the missing energy in a gamma ray. In a heavy nucleus each nucleon is strongly bound to its momentary neighbors. Even if the nucleus could step down in energy by shedding an individual proton or neutron, one individual nucleon is never free to escape. Instead, the nucleus can decay when two protons and two neutrons, strongly bound to one another but not to their neighbors, happen momentarily to have a lot of kinetic energy, to lie at the surface of the nucleus, to be headed outward, and to tunnel successfully through the potential energy barrier they encounter. mv 2 , or qBr = mv , a charged particle fired into a magnetic field is deflected r into a path with radius proportional to its momentum. If they have equal kinetic energies K, the much greater mass m of the alpha particle gives it more momentum mv = 2mK than an electron. Thus the electron undergoes greater deflection. This conclusion remains true if one or both particles are moving relativistically. From
Q44.22
Q44.23
Q44.24
Q44.25
F = ma , or qvB =
Q44.26 Q44.27
The alpha particle stops in the wood, while many beta particles can make it through to deposit some or all of their energy in the film emulsion. The reaction energy is the amount of energy released as a result of a nuclear reaction. Equation 44.28 in the text implies that the reaction energy is (initial mass final mass) c 2 . The Qvalue is taken as positive for an exothermic reaction.
570 Q44.28
Nuclear Structure
Carbon14 is produced when carbon12 is bombarded by cosmic rays. Both carbon12 and carbon14 combine with oxygen to form the atmospheric CO 2 that plants absorb in respiration. When the plant dies, the carbon14 is no longer replenished and decays at a known rate. Since carbon14 is a betaemitter, one only needs to compare the activity of a living plant to the activity of the sample to determine its age, since the activity of a radioactive sample exponentially decreases in time. The samples would have started with more carbon14 than we first thought. We would increase our estimates of their ages. There are two factors that determine the uncertainty on dating an old sample. The first is the fact that the activity level decreases exponentially in time. After a long enough period of time, the activity will approach background radiation levels, making precise dating difficult. Secondly, the ratio of carbon12 to carbon14 in the atomsphere can vary over long periods of time, and this effect contributes additional uncertainty.
4 An particle is a helium nucleus: 2 He
Q44.29 Q44.30
Q44.31
A particle is an electron or a positron: either e  or e + . A ray is a highenergy photon emitted when a nucleus makes a downward transition between two states. Q44.32 I z may have 6 values for I = I = 3. Q44.33 Q44.34 1 3 5 5 5 3 1 , namely , , ,  ,  , and  . Seven I z values are possible for 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
The frequency increases linearly with the magnetic field strength. The decay of a radioactive nucleus at one particular moment instead of at another instant cannot be predicted and has no cause. Natural events are not just like a perfect clockworks. In history, the idea of a determinate mechanical Universe arose temporarily from an unwarranted wild extrapolation of Isaac Newton's account of planetary motion. Before Newton's time [really you can blame Pierre Simon de Laplace] and again now, no one thought of natural events as just like a perfect row of falling dominos. We can and do use the word "cause" more loosely to describe antecedent enabling events. One gear turning another is intelligible. So is the process of a hot dog getting toasted over a campfire, even though random molecular motion is at the essence of that process. In summary, we say that the future is not determinate. All natural events have causes in the ordinary sense of the word, but not necessarily in the contrived sense of a cause operating infallibly and predictably in a way that can be calculated. We have better reason now than ever before to think of the Universe as intelligible. First describing natural events, and second determining their causes form the basis of science, including physics but also scientific medicine and scientific breadbaking. The evidence alone of the past hundred years of discoveries in physics, finding causes of natural events from the photoelectric effect to xrays and jets emitted by black holes, suggests that human intelligence is a good tool for figuring out how things go. Even without organized science, humans have always been searching for the causes of natural events, with explanations ranging from "the will of the gods" to Schrdinger's equation. We depend on the principle that things are intelligible as we make significant strides towards understanding the Universe. To hope that our search is not futile is the best part of human nature.
Chapter 44
571
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 44.1 P44.1 Some Properties of Nuclei
An iron nucleus (in hemoglobin) has a few more neutrons than protons, but in a typical water molecule there are eight neutrons and ten protons. So protons and neutrons are nearly equally numerous in your body, each contributing mass (say) 35 kg: 35 kg and The electron number is precisely equal to the proton number,
F 1 nucleon I GH 1.67 10 kg JK
27
~ 10 28 protons
~ 10 28 neutrons . ~ 10 28 electrons .
P44.2
1 mv 2 = qV 2 2mV = qr 2 B 2 :
and
mv 2 = qvB r r= 2 m V qB
2
=
r = 5.59 10 11 (a)
e
e1.60 10 Cja0.200 Tf m kg j m
19
2 1 000 V
b
g
2
m
For 12 C , m = 12 u and r = 5.59 10 11 m
e e
kg
j 12e1.66 10 j 13e1.66 10
2 m 2 V qB 2
27
kg
j j
r = 0.078 9 m = 7.89 cm . For 13 C : r = 5.59 10 11 m kg
27
kg
r = 0.082 1 m = 8.21 cm . r1 = r1 = r2 2 m 1 V qB
2
(b)
With
and r2 =
the ratio gives
m1 m2
r1 7.89 cm = = 0.961 r2 8.21 cm and so they do agree. m1 12 u = = 0.961 13 u m2
572 P44.3
Nuclear Structure
(a)
F = ke
Q 1Q 2 r2
= 8.99 10 N m
e
9
2
a2fa6fe1.60 10 Cj C j e1.00 10 mj
19 2 14 2
2
= 27.6 N
(b)
a=
27.6 N F = = 4.17 10 27 m s 2 m 6.64 10 27 kg
away from the nucleus.
2
(c)
QQ U = k e 1 2 = 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 r
e
a2fa6f 1.60 10 C j e1.e00 10 mj j
19 14
= 2.76 10 13 J = 1.73 MeV
P44.4
E = 7.70 MeV 4k e Ze 2 mv 2
19 9 2 k e Ze 2 2 8.99 10 79 1.60 10 = = E 7.70 1.60 10 13
(a)
d min =
e
e
ja fe
j
j
2
= 29.5 10 15 m = 29.5 fm
(b)
The de Broglie wavelength of the is
=
h = m v
h 2m E
=
6.626 10 34 2 6.64 10
e
27
j7.70e1.60 10 j
13
= 5.18 10 15 m = 5.18 fm .
(c)
Since is much less than the distance of closest approach , the may be considered a particle.
P44.5
(a)
The initial kinetic energy of the alpha particle must equal the electrostatic potential energy at the distance of closest approach. Ki = U f = rmin k e qQ rmin
8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 2 79 1.60 10 19 C k qQ = e = Ki 0.500 MeV 1.60 10 13 J MeV
e
a
fe
ja fa fe
j
j
2
= 4.55 10 13 m
(b)
Since K i =
k qQ 1 m vi2 = e , 2 rmin 2 8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 2 79 1.60 10 19 C
vi =
2 k e qQ = m rmin
e
a4.00 ufe1.66 10
27
ja fa fe kg uje3.00 10
13
m
j
j
2
= 6.04 10 6 m s .
Chapter 44
573
P44.6
It must start with kinetic energy equal to K i = U f =
4 the 2 He and 13 197 79 Au 13
k e qQ . Here r f stands for the sum of the radii of rf
nuclei, computed as
r f = r0 A1 + r0 A 2 = 1.20 10 15 m 41 3 + 197 1 3 = 8.89 10 15 m . Thus, K i = U f P44.7 (a) (b) P44.8
e
je
j
e8.99 10 =
9
N m 2 C 2 2 79 1.60 10 19 C 8.89 10 15 m
ja fa fe
13
j
2
= 4.09 10 12 J = 25.6 MeV .
r = r0 A 1 3 = 1.20 10 15 m 4
e e
ja f
= 1.90 10 15 m
13
r = r0 A 1 3 = 1.20 10 15 m 238
ja f
= 7.44 10 15 m
From r = r0 A 1 3 , the radius of uranium is rU = r0 238 Thus, if r = from which 1 1 rU then r0 A 1 3 = r0 238 2 2 A = 30 .
a f
13
.
a f
13
P44.9
The number of nucleons in a star of two solar masses is A= Therefore 2 1.99 10 30 kg 1.67 10
27
e
j
kg nucleon
= 2.38 10 57 nucleons .
r = r0 A 1 3 = 1.20 10 15 m 2.38 10 57
e
je
j
13
= 16.0 km .
P44.10
V=
4 4 4 r = 0.021 5 m 3 3
b
g
3
= 4.16 10 5 m3
We take the nuclear density from Example 44.2 m = V = 2.3 10 17 kg m3 4.16 10 5 m3 = 9.57 10 12 kg and F =G m1 m 2 r2 = 6.67 10 11 N m 2 kg 2
e
je
j
e
9.57 10 kg j e a1.00 mf j
12 2
2
F = 6.11 10 15 N toward the other ball.
P44.11 The stable nuclei that correspond to magic numbers are: Z magic:
2 He 8O 20 Ca 28 Ni 50 Sn 82 Pb
An artificially produced nucleus with Z = 126 might be more stable than other nuclei with lower values for Z, since this number of protons is magic. N magic:
3 1T , 89 39 Y , 210 84 Po 4 2 He, 90 40 Zr , 15 7 N, 136 54 Xe , 16 8O, 138 56 Ba , 37 17 Cl , 139 57 La, 39 19 K , 140 58 Ce , 40 20 Ca , 141 59 Pr , 51 23 V , 52 24 Cr , 88 38 Sr , 209 83 Bi , 142 208 60 Nd , 82 Pb,
574 *P44.12
Nuclear Structure
(a)
4 For even Z, even N, even A, the list begins 2 He, 12 C , and ends 6
194 196 202 208 78 Pt , 78 Pt , 80 Hg , 82 Pb,
containing 48 isotopes. (b) (c) The whole even Z, odd N, odd A list is 9 Be , 129 Xe , 195 Pt , with 3 entries. 4 54 78 The odd Z, even N, odd A list has 46 entries, represented as 1 H , 7 Li , ..., 1 3
209 83 Bi . 203 205 81Tl , 81Tl ,
(d)
The odd Z, odd N, even A list has 1 entry, 14 N . Do not be misled into thinking that nature 7 favors nuclei with even numbers of neutrons. The form of the question here forces a count with essentially equal numbers of oddZ and evenZ nuclei. If we counted all of the stable nuclei we would find many eveneven isotopes but also lots of evenZ oddN nuclei and oddZ evenN nuclei; we would find roughly equal numbers of these two kinds of oddA nuclei. A nucleus with one odd neutron is no more likely to be unstable than a nucleus with one odd proton. With the arbitrary 25% abundance standard, we can note that most elements have a single predominant isotope. Ni, Cu, Zn, Ga, Ge, Pd, Ag, Os, Ir, and Pt form a compact patch on the periodic table and have two common isotopes, as do some others. Tungsten is the only element with three isotopes over 25% abundance.
*P44.13
(a)
Z1 = 8Z 2
N1 = 5 N 2
N 1 + Z1 = 6 N 1 + Z 2 and N 1 = Z1 + 4 Thus: N 1 + Z1 = 6 N1 =
b
g
FG 1 N H5
1
+
1 Z1 8
IJ K
5 Z1 4 5 Z1 + 4 = Z1 4 Z1 = 16 N 1 = Z1 + 4 = 20 , A1 = Z1 + N 1 = 36 N2 = Hence: (b)
6 2 He 36 16 S
1 1 N 1 = 4, Z 2 = Z1 = 2 , A 2 = Z 2 + N 2 = 6 5 8
and 6 He. 2
is unstable. Two neutrons must be removed to make it stable
e Hej .
4 2
Chapter 44
575
Section 44.2 P44.14
Nuclear Binding Energy
Using atomic masses as given in Table A.3, (a) For 2 H: 1 2.014 102 + 1 1.008 665 + 1 1.007 825
b
g b g
g
2 Eb 931.5 MeV = 0.001 194 u = 1.11 MeV nucleon . u A
b
gFGH
IJ K
(b)
4 For 2 He:
2 1.008 665 + 2 1.007 825  4.002 603 4 Eb 2 = 0.007 59 uc = 7.07 MeV nucleon . A 30 1.008 665 + 26 1.007 825  55.934 942 = 0.528 u Eb 0.528 = = 0.009 44 uc 2 = 8.79 MeV nucleon . 56 A 146 1.008 665 + 92 1.007 825  238.050 783 = 1.934 2 u Eb 1.934 2 = = 0.008 13 uc 2 = 7.57 MeV nucleon . A 238 BE M 931.5 = A A M in u 0.517 5 0.528 46 0.555 35
b
g b
(c)
For
56 26 Fe :
b
g b
g
(d)
For
238 92 U :
b
g b
g
P44.15 Nuclei Mn Fe 59 Co
56 55
M = Zm H + Nm n  M Z 25 26 27 N 30 30 32 M in u 54.938 050 55.934 942 58.933 200
a
f
BE in MeV A 8.765 8.790 8.768
56 Fe has a greater P44.16 Use Equation 44.2. The
23 11 Na , 23 12 Mg ,
BE than its neighbors. This tells us finer detail than is shown in Figure 44.5. A
and for
Eb = 8.11 MeV nucleon A Eb = 7.90 MeV nucleon . A
23 11 Na
The binding energy per nucleon is greater for in Na .) P44.17 (a) (b) (c) The neutrontoproton ratio
139 23
by 0.210 MeV . (There is less proton repulsion
AZ is greatest for Z
139 55 Cs
and is equal to 1.53.
La has the largest binding energy per nucleon of 8.378 MeV.
Cs with a mass of 138.913 u. We locate the nuclei carefully on Figure 44.4, the neutronproton plot of stable nuclei. Cesium appears to be farther from the center of the zone of stability. Its instability means extra energy and extra mass.
139
576 P44.18
Nuclear Structure
(a)
The radius of the
40
Ca nucleus is:
R = r0 A 1 3 = 1.20 10 15 m 40
2
e
ja f
13
= 4.10 10 15 m .
The energy required to overcome electrostatic repulsion is
19 2 2 9 C 3 k Q 2 3 8.99 10 N m C 20 1.60 10 = U= e 5R 5 4.10 10 15 m
e
e
j e g
j
j
= 1.35 10 11 J = 84.1 MeV .
(b)
The binding energy of
Eb = 20 1.007 825 u + 20 1.008 665 u  39.962 591 u 931.5 MeV u = 342 MeV . (c) The nuclear force is so strong that the binding energy greatly exceeds the minimum energy needed to overcome electrostatic repulsion.
b
g b
40 20 Ca
is
b
g
P44.19
The binding energy of a nucleus is For 15 O : 8 For 15 N: 7
Eb Eb
f a f e Xj b931.494 MeV ug . = 8b1.007 825 ug + 7b1.008 665 ug  15.003 065 u b931.494 MeV ug = 111.96 MeV . = 7b1.007 825 ug + 8b1.008 665 ug  15.000 109 u b931.494 MeV ug = 115.49 MeV .
Eb MeV = ZM H + Nmn  M
A Z 15 7N
a
Therefore, the binding energy of P44.20
is larger by 3.54 MeV .
42 20 Ca .
Removal of a neutron from 43 Ca would result in the residual nucleus, 20 separation energy is Sn , the overall process can be described by mass Sn
If the required
j + massanf = b 41.958 618 + 1.008 665  42.958 767 g u = b0.008 516 ugb931.5 MeV ug = e
43 20 Ca
j+S
n
= mass
e
42 20 Ca
7.93 MeV .
Section 44.3 P44.21
Nuclear Models
Eb = Ebf  Ebi For so For so A = 200, Eb = 7.4 MeV A
Ebi = 200 7.4 MeV = 1 480 MeV .
A 100 , Eb = 8.4 MeV A
a
f
Ebf = 2 100 8.4 MeV = 1 680 MeV .
a fa
f
Eb = Ebf  Ebi : Eb = 1 680 MeV  1 480 MeV = 200 MeV FIG. P44.21
Chapter 44
577
P44.22
(a)
The first term overstates the importance of volume and the second term subtracts this overstatement. For spherical volume R R3 R . For cubical volume . = 2 2 3 6 4 R 6R The maximum binding energy or lowest state of energy is achieved by building "nearly" spherical nuclei. =
(b)
b4 3g R
3
P44.23
(a)
"Volume" term: "Surface" term: "Coulomb" term: "Asymmetry" term: Eb = 491 MeV
E1 = C1 A = 15.7 MeV 56 = 879 MeV .
E2 = C 2 A E3 E4
3 23
a fa f = 260 MeV . ZaZ  1f a26fa25f = 121 MeV . = C = a0.71 MeV f A a56f a A  2Zf = a23.6 MeVf a56  52f = 6.74 MeV . =C 56 A
=  17.8 MeV 56
23 13 13 2 2 4
a
fa f
(b)
E1 E E E = 179%; 2 = 53.0%, 3 = 24.6% ; 4 = 1.37% Eb Eb Eb Eb
Section 44.4 P44.24
Radioactivity
R = R0 e  t = 6. 40 mCi e dN =  N dt so
a
f
 ln 2 8.04 d 40. 2 d
b
ga
f = a6.40 mCifee  ln 2 j5 = a6.40 mCifF G
1I H 2 JK =
5
0.200 mCi
P44.25
=
T1 2
1 dN  = 1.00 10 15 6.00 10 11 = 6.00 10 4 s 1 N dt ln 2 = = 1.16 10 3 s = 19.3 min
FG H
IJ e K
je
j
a
f
P44.26
F ln 2 I F 1.00 g I e6.02 10 j GH 5.27 yr JK GH 59.93 g mol JK F 1 yr IJ = 4.18 10 R = e1.32 10 decays yr jG H 3.16 10 s K
R = N =
23 21 7
13
Bq
P44.27
(a)
From
R = R0 e  t , R 1 1 10.0 ln = ln 0 = = 5.58 10 2 h 1 = 1.55 10 5 s 1 4.00 h 8.00 t R ln 2 T1 2 = = 12.4 h
FG IJ FG H K H
IJ FG IJ K H K I JK
(b) (c)
N0 =
R0
=
10.0 10 3 Ci 3.70 10 10 s = 2.39 10 13 atoms 1 Ci 1.55 10 5 s
F GH
R = R0 e  t = 10.0 mCi exp 5.58 10 2 30.0 = 1.88 mCi
a
f e
j
578 P44.28
Nuclear Structure
R = R0 e  t R = 0.100 = e  t R0 2.30 =
where so
=
ln 2 = 0.026 6 h 1 26.0 h
ln 0.100 =  t
t = 86.4 h
a
f
FG 0.026 6 IJ t H h K
=
P44.29
The number of nuclei which decay during the interval will be N 1  N 2 = N 0 e  t1  e  t 2 . First we find l : ln 2 0.693 = = 0.010 7 h 1 = 2.97 10 6 s 1 T1 2 64.8 h R0 =
e
j
and Substituting these values,
N0 =
b40.0 Cige3.70 10
2.97 10
6
4
s 1 Ci
1
N 1  N 2 = 4.98 10 11 e
e
jLMN
s
j = 4.98 10
11
nuclei .
 0.010 7 h 1 10.0 h
e
ja
f  e e0.010 7 h ja12.0 hf O .
1
PQ
Hence, the number of nuclei decaying during the interval is N1  N 2 = 9.47 10 9 nuclei . P44.30 The number of nuclei which decay during the interval will be N 1  N 2 = N 0 e  t1  e  t 2 . First we find : so and Substituting in these values *P44.31
e
j
=
ln 2 T1 2
ln 2  t T1 2
e  t = e N0 =
e
j = 2 t T
.
12
R0
=
R0 T1 2 ln 2 R0 T1 2 ln 2
N1  N 2 =
ee
 t1
 e  t2 =
j
R0 T1 2 ln 2
e2
 t1 T1 2
2
 t 2 T1 2
j.
We have all this information: N x 0 = 2.50 N y 0
af
af
a f N a0 fe
x
N x 3d = 4.20 N y 3d
 x 3d
a f af
 y 3d
= 4.20 N y 0 e
= 4.20
2.5 3 d y e 4.2 2.5 + 3 d y 3d x = ln 4.2 0.693 2.5 0.693 = ln + 3d = 0.781 3d T1 2 x 4.2 1.60 d e 3 d x =
N x 0  y 3d e 2.50
af
FG IJ H K FG IJ H K
T1 2 x = 2.66 d
Chapter 44
579
*P44.32
(a)
dN 2 = rate of change of N 2 dt = rate of production of N 2 rate of decay of N 2 = rate of decay of N 1 rate of decay of N 2 = 1 N1  2 N 2
(b)
From the trial solution N2 t =
af
N10 1  2 t  e  1t e 1  2
e
j j
(1)
dN 2 N = 10 1  2 e  2 t + 1 e  1t 1  2 dt
e
dN 2 N + 2 N 2 = 10 1  2 e  2 t + 1 e  1t + 2 e  2 t  2 e  1t 1  2 dt N = 10 1 1  2 e  1t 1  2 = 1 N1
e b
j
g
So (c)
dN 2 = 1 N 1  2 N 2 as required. dt
Decay of 1 200 1 000 800 600 400 200 0 0 10 20 time (min) 30 40
218
The functions to be plotted are
Po and
214
Pb
e af L N at f = 1 130.8 M e e N
N 1 t = 1 000 e
2
 0. 223 6 min 1 t  0 . 223 6 min 1 t
j
j
e
 0 .025 9 min 1 t
e
jO
PQ
Po Pb
From the graph: t m 10.9 min
FIG. P44.32(c) (d) From (1), ln 1 2 dN 2 = 0 if 2 e  2 t = 1 e  1t . e b 1  2 gt = 1 . Thus, t = t m = 1  2 2 dt
b
g
.
With 1 = 0.223 6 min 1 , 2 = 0.025 9 min 1 , this formula gives t m = 10.9 min , in agreement with the result of part (c).
Section 44.5 P44.33
The Decay Processes
b gb g Q = b 238.050 783  234.043 596  4.002 603 g ub931.5 MeV ug =
Q = M U 238  M Th 234  M He 4 931.5 MeV u
4.27 MeV
580 P44.34
Nuclear Structure
(a)
A gamma ray has zero charge and it contains no protons or neutrons. So for a gamma ray Z = 0 and A = 0. Keeping the total values of Z and A for the system conserved then requires Z = 28 and A = 65 for X. With this atomic number it must be nickel, and the nucleus must be in an exited state, so it is 65 Ni* . 28
4 = 2 He has Z = 2 so for X
(b)
and we require and
A=4 Z = 84  2 = 82 A = 215  4 = 211, X= 211 Pb. 82
for Pb (c)
A positron e + = 0 e has charge the same as a nucleus with Z = 1 . A neutrino 0 has no charge. 1 0 Neither contains any protons or neutrons. So X must have by conservation Z = 26 + 1 = 27 . It is Co. And A = 55 + 0 = 55 . It is 55 Co. 27 Similar reasoning about balancing the sums of Z and A across the reaction reveals:
0 1 e
(d) (e)
(or p). Note that this process is a nuclear reaction, rather than radioactive decay. We can solve it from the same principles, which are fundamentally conservation of charge and conservation of baryon number.
1 1H
P44.35
NC =
C
eN = 1.05 10 carbon atomsj of which 1 in 7.70 10 is a C atom ln bN g = 1.37 10 , = 5 7302yr = 1.21 10 yr = 3.83 10 s
21 11 14 0 C14 9 C14 4 1 12
F 0.021 0 g I e6.02 10 GH 12.0 g mol JK
23
molecules mol
j
1
R = N = N 0 e  t At t = 0 , At time t, Taking logarithms, R0 = N 0 = 3.83 10 12 s 1 1.37 10 9 837 = 951 decays week . 0.88 R 1 R =  t ln so t= ln R0 R0 R= t=
e
je
L 400 O jMM 7b186weeksg PP = 3.17 10 N Q
3
decays week .
951 1 ln = 9.96 10 3 yr . 4 1 3 1.21 10 yr 3.17 10
FG H
IJ K
FG IJ H K
*P44.36
N = N0 e  t e  t = R R0
FG R IJ = ln 2 t H RK T lnb0.25 0.13g If R = 0.13 Bq , t = 5 730 yr = 5 406 yr . 0.693 lnb0.25 0.11g = 6 787 yr . If R = 0.11 Bq , t = 5 730 yr
e t = R0 R
dN = R =  N 0 e  t = R0 e  t dt
t = ln
0
12
t = T1 2
ln R0 R ln 2
b
g
0.693 The range is most clearly written as between 5 400 yr and 6 800 yr , without understatement.
Chapter 44
581
P44.37
3 1H
nucleus 3 He nucleus + e  + 2
3 1H
becomes
nucleus + e  3 He nucleus + 2e  + . 2
Ignoring the slight difference in ionization energies, we have
3 1H
atom 3 He atom + 2 Q
c2 Q = 3.016 049 u  3.016 029 u 931.5 MeV u = 0.018 6 MeV = 18.6 keV
3.016 049 u = 3.016 029 u + 0 +
b
gb
g
P44.38
(a)
For e + decay, Q = M X  M Y  2m e c 2 = 39.962 591 u  39.963 999 u  2 0.000 549 u 931.5 MeV u Q = 2.33 MeV Since Q < 0 , the decay cannot occur spontaneously.
b
g
b
gb
g
(b)
For alpha decay, Q = M X  M  M Y c 2 = 91.905 287 u  4.002 603 u  93.905 088 u 931.5 MeV u Q = 2.24 MeV Since Q < 0 , the decay cannot occur spontaneously.
b
g
b
g
(c)
For alpha decay, Q = M X  M  M Y c 2 = 143.910 083 u  4.002 603 u  139.905 434 u 931.5 MeV u Q = 1.91 MeV Since Q > 0 , the decay can occur spontaneously.
b
g
b
g
P44.39
(a) (b)
e + p n +
For nuclei,
15
O + e  15 N + .
15 8O
Add seven electrons to both sides to obtain (c) From Table A.3, m
atom 15 N atom + . 7
e Oj = me Nj + cQ
15 15
2
m = 15.003 065 u  15.000 109 u = 0.002 956 u Q = 931.5 MeV u 0.002 956 u = 2.75 MeV
b
gb
g
582
Nuclear Structure
Section 44.6 P44.40 (a)
Natural Radioactivity Let N be the number of
238
U nuclei and N be
206
Pb nuclei. N . N
Then N = N 0 e  t and N 0 = N + N so N = N + N e  t or e t = 1 + Taking logarithms,
a
f
t = ln 1 +
12
FG H
N N
IJ K
where =
ln 2 . T1 2
Thus, If N = 1.164 for the N
t=
238
F T I lnFG 1 + N IJ . GH ln 2 JK H N K
U 206 Pb chain with T1 2 = 4.47 10 9 yr , the age is:
t=
F 4.47 10 yr I lnFG 1 + 1 IJ = GH ln 2 JK H 1.164 K
9 235
4.00 10 9 yr .
(b)
From above, e t = 1 +
N N e  t N . Solving for = gives . N N 1  e t N U 207 Pb chain, N = 0.019 9 . N
With t = 4.00 10 9 yr and T1 2 = 7.04 10 8 yr for the
9
t=
F ln 2 I t = aln 2fe4.00 10 yrj = 3.938 and GH T JK 7.04 10 yr
12 8 232
With t = 4.00 10 9 yr and T1 2 = 1.41 10 10 yr for the
9
Th 208 Pb chain, N = 4.60 . N
t=
P44.41
aln 2fe4.00 10 yrj = 0.196 6 and
1.41 10 10 yr
FIG. P44.41
Chapter 44
583
P44.42
(a)
(b)
(c)
F 4.00 10 Ci I F 3.70 10 Bq I F 1.00 10 L I = 148 Bq m GH 1 L JK GH 1 Ci JK GH 1 m JK F T I = e148 Bq m jFG 3.82 d IJ FG 86 400 s IJ = 7.05 10 atoms m R N = = RG H ln2 K H 1 d K H ln 2 JK F 1 mol IJ FG 222 g IJ = 2.60 10 g m mass = e7.05 10 atoms m jG H 6.02 10 atoms K H 1 mol K
4.00 pCi L =
12 10 3 3 3 12 3 7 3 7 3 23 14
3
Since air has a density of 1.20 kg m3 , the fraction consisting of radon is fraction = *P44.43 (a) 2.60 10 14 g m 3 1 200 g m
3
= 2.17 10 17 .
Let x, y denote the halflives of the nuclei X, Y. R X R0 e  X t  a 0.685 h fa ln 2 fb1 x 1 y g = =e = 1.04 , which gives RY R0 e  Y t 1 1  = 0.082 603 69 h 1 . x y From the data: x  y = 77.2 h . Substitute (2) into (1): 1 1  = 0.082 603 69 h 1 . x x  77.2 h x 2  77.2 x  934.6 = 0 which has solutions: x = 87.84 h or 10.64 h . Thus: x = T1 2 , X = 87.84 h = 3.66 days is the only physical root. From (2): y = T1 2 , Y = 87.84 h  77.2 h = 10.6 h . (1) (2)
This reduces to the quadratic equation
(b) (c) P44.44
From Table A.3, X is From Figure 44.18,
224
224
Ra and Y is
212
212
Pb .
Ra decays to
Pb by three successive alphadecays.
 ln 2 t T1 2
Number remaining: Fraction remaining: (a) (b) (c) With T1 2 = 3.82 d and t = 7.00 d , When t = 1.00 yr = 365.25 d ,
N = N0 e
a f
.
N  a ln 2 ft T1 2 = e t = e . N0 N = e  aln 2 fa7.00 f N0
a3.82 f = a3.82 f =
0. 281 . 1.65 10 29 .
N = e  aln 2 fa365. 25 f N0
Radon is continuously created as one daughter in the series of decays starting from the longlived isotope
238
U.
584
Nuclear Structure
Section 44.7 P44.45
Nuclear Reactions
Q = M 27 Al + M  M 30 P  mn c 2 Q = 26.981 539 + 4.002 603  29.978 314  1.008 665 u 931.5 MeV u = 2.64 MeV
b
g
P44.46
(a)
For X, and
A = 24 + 1  4 = 21 Z = 12 + 0  2 = 10 , so X is
21 10 Ne
.
(b)
A = 235 + 1  90  2 = 144 and Z = 92 + 0  38  0 = 54 , so X is
144 54 Xe
.
(c)
A=22=0 and Z = 2  1 = +1, so X must be a positron.
As it is ejected, so is a neutrino: P44.47 (a) (b)
* 197 1 198 198 79 Au + 0 n 79 Au 80 Hg
X = 0 e+ 1
0 1 e +
and X = 0 . 0
+
Consider adding 79 electrons:
197 79 Au 1 atom+ 0 n 198 Hg atom + + Q 80
Q = M 197 Au + mn  M 198 Hg c 2
Q = 196.966 552 + 1.008 665  197.966 752 u 931.5 MeV u = 7.89 MeV P44.48 Neglect recoil of product nucleus, (i.e., do not require momentum conservation for the system of colliding particles). The energy balance gives K emerging = K incident + Q . To find Q:
b
g
b g b g Q = b1.007 825 + 26.981 539g  b 26.986 705 + 1.008 665 g ub931.5 MeV ug = 5.59 MeV
Q = M H + M Al  M Si + mn c 2 Thus, P44.49
9 4 Be + 1.665
K emerging = 6.61 MeV  5.59 MeV = 1.02 MeV .
1 MeV 8 Be+ 0 n , so M 8 Be = M 9 Be  4
4 4
M 8 Be = 9.012 182 u 
4
a1.665 MeVf  1.008 665 u =
931.5 MeV u
4 4
Q  mn c2 8.005 3 u Q c2
9 1 10 4 Be+ 0 n 4 Be + 6.812
MeV , so M 10 Be = M 9 Be + mn 
M 10 Be = 9.012 182 u + 1.008 665 u 
4
6.812 MeV = 10.013 5 u 931.5 MeV u
Chapter 44
585
P44.50
(a)
10 5B
4 + 2 He 13 C + 1 H 6 1 13 6C
The product nucleus is (b)
13 6C 4 + 1 H 10 B + 2 He 1 5
.
The product nucleus is P44.51
236 92 U
10 5B
.
90 143 37 Rb + 55 Cs
1 + 30 n,
so Q = M 236 U  M 90 Rb  M 143 Cs  3mn c 2
92 37 55
From Table A.3, Q = 236.045 562  89.914 809  142.927 330  3 1.008 665 u 931.5 MeV u = 165 MeV .
b
g b
g
Section 44.8 P44.52
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Magnetic Resonance Imagining
FIG. P44.52 P44.53 (a) fn = 2 B h = 2 1.913 5 5.05 10 27 J T 1.00 T 6.626 10 34 J s
b
ge
ja
f=
29.2 MHz
(b) (c)
fp =
2 2.792 8 5.05 10 27 J T 1.00 T 6.626 10
34
b
b
ge
ja
Js
f=
j=
42.6 MHz
In the Earth's magnetic field, fp = 2 2.792 8 5.05 10 27 50.0 10 6 6.626 10
34
ge
je
2.13 kHz .
586
Nuclear Structure
Additional Problems *P44.54 (a) With mn and vn as the mass and speed of the neutrons, Eq. 9.23 of the text becomes, after making appropriate notational changes, for the two collisions v1 =
FG 2m IJ v Hm +m K bm + m g v = bm + m g v m bv  v g = m v  m v
v2 =
n n 2 n n 2 2 n 1 n 2 1 1 1
FG 2m IJ v , Hm +m K
n n 1 n
1
= 2 m n vn
2 2
mn =
m 1 v1  m 2 v 2 v 2  v1
7 6
(b) P44.55 (a)
mn =
a1 ufe3.30 10
m s  14 u 4.70 10 6 m s
7
j a fe
4.70 10 m s  3.30 10 m s
j=
1.16 u
Q = M 9 Be + M 4 He  M 12 C  mn c 2
Q = 9.012 182 u + 4.002 603 u  12.000 000 u  1.008 665 u 931.5 MeV u = 5.70 MeV (b) Q = 2 M 2 H  M 3 He  mn
b
g
Q = 2 2.014 102  3.016 029  1.008 665 u 931.5 MeV u = 3.27 MeV exothermic P44.56 (a)
b
g
b
g
a
f
At threshold, the particles have no kinetic energy relative to each other. That is, they move like two particles that have suffered a perfectly inelastic collision. Therefore, in order to calculate the reaction threshold energy, we can use the results of a perfectly inelastic collision. Initially, the projectile M a moves with velocity v a while the target M X is at rest. We have from momentum conservation for the projectiletarget system: Ma va = M a + M X vc . 1 2 The initial energy is: Ei = M a v a . 2 The final kinetic energy is:
b
g
Ef =
1 1 2 Ma + M X vc = Ma + M X 2 2
b
g
b
From this, we see that E f is always less than Ei and the change in energy, E f  Ei , is given by E f  Ei =
gLMN MM+ vM OPQ = LMN M M M OPQE . +
2 a a a a X a X i X X i
This loss of kinetic energy in the isolated system corresponds to an increase in massenergy during the reaction. Thus, the absolute value of this kinetic energy change is equal to Q (remember that Q is negative in an endothermic reaction). The initial kinetic energy Ei is the threshold energy Eth . Therefore, or continued on next page Q = Eth
LM M NM + M
a a
X
 1 Ei = 
OP Q
LM M OPE . NM + M Q
a
LM M OPE NM + M Q L M + M OP = = Q M N M Q
X a X th X a X
Q 1 +
LM N
Ma MX
OP Q
.
Chapter 44
587
(b)
First, calculate the Qvalue for the reaction:
Q = 14.003 074 + 4.002 603  16.999 132  1.007 825 u 931.5 MeV u = 1.19 MeV . Then, P44.57
1 1H
Eth = Q
LM M + M N M
X X
a
b OP = a1.19 MeVfLM1 + 4.002 603 OP = Q N 14.003 074 Q
Q = M N14 + M He 4  M O17  M H1 c 2
g
1.53 MeV .
b g b g b931.5 MeV ug Q = b1.007 825 u + 7.016 004 ug  b7.016 929 u + 1.008 665 ug b931.5 MeV ug Q = e 1.765 10 ujb931.5 MeV ug = 1.644 MeV F m I Q = F 1 + 1.007 825 I a1.644 MeVf = 1.88 MeV = G1 + Thus, KE JK GH 7.016 004 JK H m
Q = M H + M Li  M Be + M n
3 incident projectile target nucleus min
1 + 7 Li 7 Be + 0 n 3 4
.
P44.58
(a)
N0 =
1.00 kg mass = = 2.52 10 24 mass per atom 239.05 u 1.66 10 27 kg u
a
fe
j
(b)
=
ln 2 ln 2 = = 9.106 10 13 s 1 4 T1 2 2.412 10 yr 3.156 10 7 s yr
e
je
j
R0 = N 0 = 9.106 10 13 s 1 2.52 10 24 = 2.29 10 12 Bq
(c) R = R0 e  t , so t = t= 1 9.106 10 13
e
je
j
FG R IJ = 1 lnFG R IJ HR K H R K F 2.29 10 Bq I = 3.38 10 sFG 1 yr IJ = lnG H 3.156 10 s K s H 0.100 Bq JK
1 ln
0 0 12 1 13 7
1.07 10 6 yr
P44.59
(a)
57 57 0 0 27 Co 26 Fe + +1 e + 0
The Qvalue for this positron emission is Q = M 57 Co  M 57 Fe  2m e c 2 .
Q = 56.936 296  56.935 399  2 0.000 549 u 931.5 MeV u = 0.187 MeV
Since Q < 0 , this reaction cannot spontaneously occur . (b)
14 6C
b
g b
g
14 7N
+
0 0 1 e + 0
The Qvalue for this e  decay is Q = M 14 C  M 14 N c 2 . Q = 14.003 242  14.003 074 u 931.5 MeV u = 0.156 MeV = 156 keV Since Q > 0 , the decay can spontaneously occur . (c) The energy released in the reaction of (b) is shared by the electron and neutrino. Thus, K e can range from zero to 156 keV .
b
g
588 P44.60
Nuclear Structure
(a)
r = r0 A 1 3 = 1.20 10 15 A 1 3 m. When A = 12 , ke Z  1 e2
r = 2.75 10 15 m .
(b)
r2 When Z = 6
F=
a
f
e8.99 10 =
and
9
N m 2 C 2 Z  1 1.60 10 19 C r2 r = 2.75 10 15 m,
ja
fe
j
2
F = 152 N .
(c)
8.99 10 9 Z  1 1.6 10 19 k e q1 q 2 k e Z  1 e 2 = = U= r r r When Z = 6 and Z = 92, r = 2.75 10 15 m,
a
f
e
ja
fe
j
2
U = 4.19 10 13 J = 2.62 MeV . F = 379 N
(d)
A = 238; and
r = 7.44 10 15 m
U = 2.82 10 12 J = 17.6 MeV .
P44.61
(a)
Because the reaction p n + e + + would violate the law of conservation of energy m p = 1.007 276 u Note that mn + m e+ > m p . mn = 1.008 665 u
me + = 5.49 10 4 u .
(b) (c)
The required energy can come from the electrostatic repulsion of protons in the nucleus. Add seven electrons to both sides of the reaction for nuclei to obtain the reaction for neutral atoms Q = c2 m
13 13 e+ e 13 7N 13 13 7 N 6C
+ e+ +
atom
13 6C
atom + e + + e  +
e N j  me C j  m  m  m Q = b931.5 MeV ug 13.005 739  13.003 355  2e5.49 10 j  0 u Q = b931.5 MeV uge1.286 10 uj = 1.20 MeV
4 3
P44.62
(a)
A leastsquare fit to the graph yields:
=  slope =  0.250 h 1 = 0.250 h 1
and
e
j
(b)
b g = intercept = 8.30 . F 1 h IJ = 4.17 10 = 0.250 h G H 60.0 min K
ln cpm
1 t= 0
3
min 1
T1 2 =
ln 2
4.17 10 3 min 1 = 166 min = 2.77 h
=
ln 2 FIG. P44.62
continued on next page
Chapter 44
589
(c)
From (a), Thus,
intercept = ln cpm
8.30 0
(d)
N0 =
R0
bcpmg = e counts min = 4.02 10 counts min . 4.02 10 counts min 1 bcpmg = = = 9.65 10 atoms Eff e4.17 10 min ja0.100f
3
0 3 6 3 1
b g
0
= 8.30 .
P44.63
(a) (b) (c)
The reaction is 145 Pm 61
141 59 Pr +
Q = M Pm  M  M Pr 931.5 = 144.912 744  4.002 603  140.907 648 931.5 = 2.32 MeV The alpha and daughter have equal and opposite momenta E =
2 p 2 m
b
g
b
g
p = p d
Ed =
2 pd 2m d
2 p 2 m 1 2 m E E md 141 = = 2 = = = = 97. 2% or 2 Etot E + Ed m d + m 141 + 4 1 2 m + 1 2 m d p 2m + p 2m d
e
j e
j b
g b
g
2.26 MeV. This is carried away by the alpha. P44.64 (a) If E is the energy difference between the excited and ground states of the nucleus of mass M, and hf is the energy of the emitted photon, conservation of energy for the nucleusphoton system gives E = hf + Er . Where Er is the recoil energy of the nucleus, which can be expressed as Er = Mv Mv 2 = . 2 2M hf . c 2 hf (1)
2
a f
(2)
Since system momentum must also be conserved, we have Mv = Hence, Er can be expresses as When we can make the approximation that so Er = (3) .
b g
2 Mc 2
hf << Mc 2 hf E Er
a E f
2
2 Mc 2
.
(b)
Er = and
a E f
2
2 Mc 2
where
E = 0.014 4 MeV
Mc 2 = 57 u 931.5 MeV u = 5.31 10 4 MeV . Er
a fb
g
Therefore,
e1.44 10 MeVj = = 2e5.31 10 MeV j
2 2 4
1.94 10 3 eV .
590 P44.65
Nuclear Structure
(a)
One liter of milk contains this many N = 2.00 g
40
10 011 gFGH 6.02 39.1 gnuclei mol IJK FGH 0.100 7 IJK = 3.60 10 mol ln 2 ln 2 FG 1 yr IJ = 1.72 10 s = = T 1.28 10 yr H 3.156 10 s K R = N = e1.72 10 s je3.60 10 j = 61.8 Bq
K nuclei:
b
23
18
nuclei
12
9
7
17
1
17
1
18
(b)
For the iodine, R = R0 e  t t=
with
=
2 000 R 1 8.04 d ln 0 = ln = 40.3 d R ln 2 61.8
FG IJ H K
FG H
IJ K
ln 2 8.04 d
P44.66
(a)
For cobalt56,
=
ln 2 ln 2 365.25 d = = 3.28 yr 1 . T1 2 77.1 d 1 yr
F GH
I JK
The elapsed time from July 1054 to July 2003 is 949 yr. R = R0 e  t implies (b) For carbon14, R  e 3. 28 yr 1 jb 949 yr g = e t = e = e 3 116 = e  aln 10 f1 353 = ~ 10 1 353 . R0
=
ln 2 = 1.21 10 4 yr 1 5 730 yr
R  e1.21 10 4 yr 1 jb 949 yr g = e t = e = e 0.115 = 0.892 R0 P44.67 We have and
N 235 = N 0 , 235 e  235 t N 238 = N 0 , 238 e  238 t
N 235 e aln 2 ft Th, 235 +aln 2 ft Th , 238 j . = 0.007 25 = e N 238
Taking logarithms,
or
F 2 GH 0.704ln10 F 1 4.93 = G  H 0.704 10
4.93 =  t=
9
yr
+
ln 2 t 4.47 10 9 yr 1 4.47 10 9
9
yr
+
I JK I aln 2ft J yr K
e1.20 10
4.93
9
yr
1
j ln 2
= 5.94 10 9 yr .
Chapter 44
591
P44.68
(a)
Add two electrons to both sides of the reaction to have it in energy terms:
4 41 H atom 2 He atom + Q 1
Q = mc 2 = 4M 1 H  M 4 He c 2
1 2
Q = 4 1.007 825 u  4.002 603 u 931.5 MeV u 1.99 10 30 kg 1.67 10 27 kg atom
b
g
b
gFGH 1.60 10 J IJK = 1 MeV
13
4.28 10 12 J
(b) (c)
N=
= 1.19 10 57 atoms = 1.19 10 57 protons
The energy that could be created by this many protons in this reaction is:
e1.19 10
P=
P44.69 E t
57
protons
28 10 jFGH 4.4 protons J IJK = 1.27 10
12
45
J
so
t =
E
P
=
1.27 10 45 J = 3.38 10 18 s = 107 billion years . 3.77 10 26 W
E =  B so the energies are E1 = + B and E2 =  B
= 2.792 8 n and n = 5.05 10 27 J T
E = 2 B = 2 2.792 8 5.05 10 27 J T 12.5 T = 3.53 10 25 J = 2.20 10 6 eV .
P44.70 (a)
b
ge
ja
f
=
1 yr ln 2 ln 2 = = 4.17 10 9 s 1 T1 2 5.27 yr 3.156 10 7 s
FG H
IJ K
t = 30.0 months = 2.50 yr R = R0 e  t = N 0 e  t so N 0
t
b
10 gFGH 3.1561 yr s IJK = 7.89 10
7
7
s
b g F R I L a10.0 Cife3.70 10 = G Je = M H K MN 4.17 10 s
9
10 1
Bq Ci
j OPee PQ
4.17 10 9 s 1 7.89 10 7 s
je
j
N 0 = 1.23 10 20 nuclei Mass = 1.23 10 20 atoms (b)
e
mol jFGH 6.02 59.93 gatoms mol IJK = 1.23 10 10
23
2
g = 12.3 mg
We suppose that each decaying nucleus promptly puts out both a beta particle and two gamma rays, for Q = 0.310 + 1.17 + 1.33 MeV = 2.81 MeV
a
P = QR = 2.81 MeV 1.6 10 13 J MeV 3.70 10 11 s 1 = 0.166 W
a
fe
f
je
j
592 P44.71
Nuclear Structure
For an electric charge density =
b g
Ze
4 3 R3
.
Using Gauss's Law inside the sphere, E 4 r 2 =
b4 3g r
0
3
b4 3g R
Ze
3
:
E= E=
1 Zer 4 0 R 3 1 Ze 4 0 r 2
ar R f ar R f LM N OP Q
We now find the electrostatic energy: 1 U = 0 2 = P44.72 (a)
R 0
U=
R
1 0 E 2 4 r 2 dr 2 r =0
2
z
z FGH 41 IJK
0 2 2
2
Z 2 e2r 2 R
6
1 4 r dr + 0 2
2
z FGH 41 IJK
0
Z2 e2 r
4
4 r 2 dr =
1 Z 2 e 2 R5 + 6 8 0 5 R R
3 Z e 20 0 R For the electron capture,
93 0 93 43 Tc + 1 e 42 Mo +
.
The disintegration energy is Q = M 93 Tc  M 93 Mo c 2 . Q = 92.910 2  92.906 8 u 931.5 MeV u = 3.17 MeV > 2.44 MeV Electron capture is allowed For positron emission, to all specified excited states in
93 93 0 43 Tc 42 Mo + +1 e + 93 42 Mo.
b
g
.
The disintegration energy is Q = M 93 Tc  M 93 Mo  2m e c 2 .
Q = 92.910 2  92.906 8  2 0.000 549 u 931.5 MeV u = 2.14 MeV
Positron emission can reach the 1.35, 1.48, and 2.03 MeV states but there is insufficient energy to reach the 2.44 MeV state. (b) The daughter nucleus in both forms of decay is
93 42 Mo
b
g b
g
.
FIG. P44.72
Chapter 44
593
P44.73
K=
1 mv 2 , 2 v= 2K = m 2 0.040 0 eV 1.60 10 19 J eV 1.67 10
27
so
b
ge
kg
j = 2.77 10
3
m s.
The time for the trip is t =
1.00 10 4 m x = = 3.61 s . v 2.77 10 3 m s N  a ln 2 ft T1 2  a ln 2 fb 3 .61 s 624 s g =1e =1e = 0.004 00 = 0.400% . N0
87
The number of neutrons finishing the trip is given by N = N 0 e  t . The fraction decaying is 1  P44.74 (a) If we assume all the then yields where and N = N0 e t= 1
Sr came from
87
Rb,
 t
ln
FG N IJ = T lnFG N IJ H N K ln 2 H N K
12 0 0 10
N = N Rb87 N 0 = N Sr87 + N Rb87 t=
e4.75 10
ln 2
yr
j lnF 1.82 10 + 1.07 10 I = GH 1.82 10 JK
10 9 10
3.91 10 9 yr .
87
(b) P44.75
It could be no older . The rock could be younger if some
Sr were originally present.
R = R0 exp  t lets us write which is the equation of a straight line with ln R = 8.44  0.262 t .
b g
ln R = ln R0  t slope = .
The logarithmic plot shown in Figure P44.75 is fitted by If t is measured in minutes, then decay constant is 0.262 per minute. The halflife is T1 2 = ln 2
=
ln 2 = 2.64 min . 0.262 min
The reported halflife of 137 Ba is 2.55 min. The difference reflects experimental uncertainties. FIG. P44.75
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P44.2 P44.4 P44.6 (a) 7.89 cm and 8.21 cm ; (b) see the solution (a) 29.5 fm; (b) 5.18 fm; (c) see the solution 25.6 MeV P44.8 P44.10 P44.12 a nucleus such as
30
Si with A = 30
6.11 PN toward the other ball (a) 48; (b) 3; (c) 46; (d) 1
594 P44.14
Nuclear Structure
(a) 1.11 MeV nucleon; (b) 7.07 MeV nucleon ; (c) 8.79 MeV nucleon ; (d) 7.57 MeV nucleon 0.210 MeV greater for less proton repulsion
23
P44.44
(a) 0.281 ; (b) 1.65 10 29 ; (c) see the solution (a)
21 10 Ne;
P44.46 Na because it has P44.48 P44.50 P44.52 P44.54 P44.56 P44.58 P44.60 P44.62
(b) 144 Xe; (c) 0 e + and 0 54 1 0
P44.16 P44.18
1.02 MeV (a)
13 6C ;
(b)
(a) 84.1 MeV ; (b) 342 MeV ; (c) The nuclear force of attraction dominates over electrical repulsion 7.93 MeV (a) see the solution; R R and ; see the solution (b) 3 6 0.200 mCi 41.8 TBq 86.4 h R0 T1 2 ln 2
10 5B
see the solution (a) see the solution; (b) 1.16 u (a) see the solution; (b) 1.53 MeV (a) 2.52 10 24 ; (b) 2.29 TBq ; (c) 1.07 Myr (a) 2.75 fm; (b) 152 N ; (c) 2.62 MeV ; (d) 7.44 fm , 379 N , 17.6 MeV (a) see the solution; (b) 4.17 10 3 min 1 ; 2.77 h ; (c) 4.02 10 3 counts min ; (d) 9.65 10 6 atoms
P44.20 P44.22
P44.24 P44.26 P44.28 P44.30 P44.32
e2
 t1 T1 2
2
 t 2 T1 2
j
P44.64 P44.66 P44.68
(a) see the solution; (b) 1.94 meV (a) ~ 10 1 353 ; (b) 0.892 (a) 4.28 pJ; (b) 1.19 10 57 atoms ; (c) 107 Gyr (a) 12.3 mg ; (b) 0.166 W (a) electron capture to all; positron emission to the 1.35 MeV , 1.48 MeV , and 2.03 MeV states ; (b) 93 Mo; see the solution 42 (a) 3.91 Gyr ; (b) No older; it could be younger if some 87 Sr were originally present, contrary to our assumption.
(a) see the solution; (b) see the solution; (c) see the solution; 10.9 min ; ln 1 2 ; yes (d) t m = 1  2
b
g
P44.34
(a) (e)
* 65 28 Ni ; 1 1H
(b)
211 82 Pb ;
(c)
55 27 Co;
(d)
0 1 e;
P44.70 P44.72
P44.36 P44.38
between 5 400 yr and 6 800 yr (a) cannot occur ; (b) cannot occur ; (c) can occur (a) 4.00 Gyr ; (b) 0.019 9 and 4.60 (a) 148 Bq m3 ; (b) 7.05 10 7 atoms m 3 ; (c) 2.17 10 17
P44.74
P44.40 P44.42
45
Applications of Nuclear Physics
CHAPTER OUTLINE
45.1 45.2 45.3 45.4 45.5 45.6 45.7 Interactions Involving Neutrons Nuclear Fission Nuclear Reactors Nuclear Fusion Radiation Damage Radiation Detectors Uses of Radiation
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q45.1 A moderator is used to slow down neutrons released in the fission of one nucleus, so that they are likely to be absorbed by another nucleus to make it fission. The hydrogen nuclei in water molecules have mass similar to that of a neutron, so that they can efficiently rob a fastmoving neutron of kinetic energy as they scatter it. Once the neutron is slowed down, a hydrogen nucleus can absorb it in the reaction n + 1H 2 H . 1 1 The excitation energy comes from the binding energy of the extra nucleon.
Q45.2
Q45.3
Q45.4
The advantage of a fission reaction is that it can generate much more electrical energy per gram of fuel compared to fossil fuels. Also, fission reactors do not emit greenhouse gasses as combustion byproducts like fossil fuelsthe only necessary environmental discharge is heat. The cost involved in producing fissile material is comparable to the cost of pumping, transporting and refining fossil fuel. The disadvantage is that some of the products of a fission reaction are radioactiveand some of those have long halflives. The other problem is that there will be a point at which enough fuel is spent that the fuel rods do not supply power economically and need to be replaced. The fuel rods are still radioactive after removal. Both the waste and the "spent" fuel rods present serious health and environmental hazards that can last for tens of thousands of years. Accidents and sabotage involving nuclear reactors can be very serious, as can accidents and sabotage involving fossil fuels. The products of fusion reactors are generally not themselves unstable, while fission reactions result in a chain of reactions which almost all have some unstable products. For the deuterium nuclei to fuse, they must be close enough to each other for the nuclear forces to overcome the Coulomb repulsion of the protonsthis is why the ion density is a factor. The more time that the nuclei in a sample spend in close proximity, the more nuclei will fusehence the confinement time is a factor.
Q45.5 Q45.6
595
596 Q45.7
Applications of Nuclear Physics
In a fusion reaction, the main idea is to get the nuclear forces, which act over very short distances, to overcome the Coulomb repulsion of the protons. Tritium has one more neutron in the nucleus, and thus increases the nuclear force, decreasing the necessary kinetic energy to obtain DT fusion as compared to DD fusion. The biggest obstacle is power loss due to radiation. Remember that a high temperature must be maintained to keep the fuel in a reactive plasma state. If this kinetic energy is lost due to bremsstrahlung radiation, then the probability of nuclear fusion will decrease significantly. Additionally, each of the confinement techniques requires power input, thus raising the bar for sustaining a reaction in which the power output is greater than the power input. Fusion of light nuclei to a heavier nucleus releases energy. Fission of a heavy nucleus to lighter nuclei releases energy. Both processes are steps towards greater stability on the curve of binding energy, Figure 44.5. The energy release per nucleon is typically greater for fusion, and this process is harder to control. Advantages of fusion: high energy yield, no emission of greenhouse gases, fuel very easy to obtain, reactor can not go supercritical like a fission reactor, low amounts of radioactive waste. Disadvantages: requires high energy input to sustain reaction, lithium and helium are scarce, neutrons released by reaction cause structural damage to reactor housing. The fusion fuel must be heated to a very high temperature. It must be contained at a sufficiently high density for a sufficiently long time to achieve a reasonable energy output. The first method uses magnetic fields to contain the plasma, reducing its contact with the walls of the container. This way, there is a reduction in heat loss to the environment, so that the reaction may be sustained over seconds. The second method involves striking the fuel with high intensity, focused lasers from multiple directions, effectively imploding the fuel. This increases the internal pressure and temperature of the fuel to the point of ignition. No. What is critical in radiation safety is the type of radiation encountered. The curie is a measure of the rate of decay, not the products of the decay or of their energies. Xray radiation can cause genetic damage in the developing fetus. If the damaged cells survive the radiation and reproduce, then the genetic errors will be replicated, potentially causing severe birth defects or death of the child. For each additional dynode, a larger applied voltage is needed, and hence a larger output from a power supply"infinite" amplification would not be practical. Nor would it be desirable: the goal is to connect the tube output to a simple counter, so a massive pulse amplitude is not needed. If you made the detector sensitive to weaker and weaker signals, you would make it more and more sensitive to background noise.
Q45.8
Q45.9
Q45.10
Q45.11 Q45.12
Q45.13 Q45.14
Q45.15
Chapter 45
597
Q45.16
Sometimes the references are oblique indeed. Some must serve for more than one form of energy or mode of transfer. Here is one list: kinetic: ocean currents rotational kinetic: Earth turning gravitational: water lifted up elastic: Elastic energy is necessary for sound, listed below. internal: by contrast to a chilly night; or in forging a chain chemical: flames sound: thunder electrical transmission: lightning electromagnetic radiation: heavens blazing; lightning atomic electronic: In the blazing heavens, stars have different colors because of different predominant energy losses by atoms at their surfaces. nuclear: The blaze of the heavens is produced by nuclear reactions in the cores of stars. Remarkably, the word "energy" in this translation is an anachronism. Goethe wrote the song a few years before Thomas Young coined the term.
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 45.1 Section 45.2 *P45.1 Interactions Involving Neutrons Nuclear Fission
The energy is 3.30 10 10 J
P45.2
FG 1 eV IJ FG 1 U  235 nucleus IJ FG 235 g IJ FG M IJ = H 1.60 10 J K H 208 MeV K H 6.02 10 nucleus K H 10 K m = bm + M g  b M + M + 3m g m = b1.008 665 u + 235.043 923 ug  d97.912 7 u + 134.916 5 u + 3b1.008 665 ugi
19 23 6 n U Zr Te n
0.387 g of U  235 .
m = 0.197 39 u = 3.28 10 28 kg P45.3
so
Q = mc 2 = 2.95 10 11 J = 184 MeV
1 235 0 n + 92 U 1 235 0 n + 92 U
Three different fission reactions are possible:
1 235 0 n + 92 U
90 144 38 Sr + 54 Xe + 90 142 38 Sr + 54 Xe +
1 20 n 1 40 n
144 54 Xe 142 54 Xe
90 143 38 Sr + 54 Xe + 239 92 U
1 30 n
143 54 Xe
P45.4 P45.5 P45.6
1 238 0 n + 92 U
 239 93 Np + e
+ +
 239 239 93 Np 94 Pu + e 233 233 91 Pa 92 U
+
 1 232 233 233 0 n + 90Th 90Th 91 Pa + e
+ e +
(a)
Q = m c 2 = mn + M U235  M Ba141  M Kr92  3mn c 2
a f m = b1.008 665 + 235.043 923 g  b140.914 4 + 91.926 2 + 3 1.008 665 g u = 0.185 993 u Q = b0.185 993 ugb931.5 MeV ug = 173 MeV
f= m 0.185993 u = = 7.88 10 4 = 0.078 8% 236.05 u mi
(b)
598 *P45.7
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(a)
The initial mass is 1.007 825 u + 11.009 306 u = 12.017 131 u . The final mass is 3 4.002 603 u = 12.007 809 u . The rest mass annihilated is m = 0.009 322 u. The energy 931.5 MeV = 8.68 MeV . created is Q = mc 2 = 0.009 322 u 1u
b
g
FG H
IJ K
(b) P45.8
The proton and the boron nucleus have positive charges. The colliding particles must have enough kinetic energy to approach very closely in spite of their electric repulsion.
If the electrical power output of 1 000 MW is 40.0% of the power derived from fission reactions, the power output of the fission process is 1 000 MW = 2.50 10 9 J s 8.64 10 4 s d = 2.16 10 14 J d . 0.400
e
je
j
The number of fissions per day is 2.16 10 14 J d This also is the number of
235
e
1 jFGH 200 fissioneV IJK FGH 1.601eV J IJK = 6.74 10 10 10
6 19 235
24
d 1 .
e6.74 10
24
nuclei d
F I mol jGH 6.02 235 gnuclei mol JK = 2.63 10 10
23
U nuclei used, so the mass of
3
U used per day is
g d = 2.63 kg d .
In contrast, a coalburning steam plant producing the same electrical power uses more than 6 10 6 kg d of coal. P45.9 The available energy to do work is 0.200 times the energy content of the fuel.
000 mol b1.00 kg fuelge0.034 0 U fueljFGH 1 1 kgg IJK FGH 1235 g IJK e6.02 10 e2.90 10 Jja0.200f = 5.80 10 J = e1.00 10 Njr
235 12 11 5 23
F a208fe1.60 10 JjI moljG GH fission JJK = 2.90 10
13
12
J
r = 5.80 10 6 m = 5.80 Mm
Section 45.3 P45.10 (a)
Nuclear Reactors For a sphere: V= 4 3 r 3
3
and
r=
FG 3V IJ H 4 K
13
so
4 r 2 A = = 4.84V 1 3 . V 4 3 r3
b g
e
(b)
For a cube:
V=
and
= V1 3
so
13
A 6 2 = 3 = 6V 1 3 . V 2a 2 + 8a 2 A = = 6.30V 1 3 . V 2a3
(c) (d)
For a parallelepiped: V = 2 a 3
and
a=
FG V IJ H 2K
so
j
Therefore, the sphere has the least leakage and the parallelepiped has the greatest leakage for a given volume.
Chapter 45
599
P45.11
mass of
235
U available 0.007 10 9 metric tons
a
fe
number of nuclei
F 7 10 g I 6.02 10 GH 235 g mol JK e
12
F 10 I jGH 1 metricgton JK = 7 10
6
12
g
23
nuclei mol = 1.8 10 34 nuclei
j
The energy available from fission (at 208 MeV/event) is E 1.8 10 34 events 208 MeV event 1.60 10 13 J MeV = 6.0 10 23 J . This would last for a time interval of t = E
e
jb
ge
j
P
1 yr 6.0 10 23 J = 8.6 10 10 s 3 000 yr . 7.0 10 12 J s 3.16 10 7 s
e
jFGH
IJ K
P45.12
In one minute there are
60.0 s = 5.00 10 4 fissions . 1.20 ms
So the rate increases by a factor of 1.000 25 P45.13
b
g
50 000
= 2.68 10 5 .
P = 10.0 MW = 1.00 10 7 J s
If each decay delivers 1.00 MeV = 1.60 10 13 J , then the number of decays/s = 6.25 10 19 Bq .
Section 45.4 P45.14 (a)
Nuclear Fusion The Q value for the DT reaction is 17.59 MeV. Specific energy content in fuel for DT reaction:
13 14 27
a17.59 MeVfe1.60 10 J MeVj = 3.39 10 J kg a5 ufe1.66 10 kg uj e3.00 10 J sjb3 600 s hrg = 31.9 g h burning of D and T r = e3.39 10 J kg je10 kg g j
9 DT 14 3
.
(b)
Specific energy content in fuel for DD reaction: Q = two Q values
13
1 3.27 + 4.03 = 3.65 MeV average of 2
a
f
a3.65 MeVfe1.60 10 J MeV j = 8.80 10 J kg a4 ufe1.66 10 kg uj e3.00 10 J sjb3 600 s hrg = 122 g h burning of D r = e8.80 10 J kg je10 kg g j
13 27 9 DD 13 3
.
600 P45.15
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(a)
At closest approach, the electrostatic potential energy equals the total energy E. Uf = k e Z1 e Z 2 e rmin
9
b gb g = E :
e8.99 10 E=
(b)
N m 2 C 2 1.6 10 19 C Z1 Z 2 1.00 10 14 m
je
j
2
=
e2.30 10 JjZ Z
14 1
2
.
For both the DD and the DT reactions, Z1 = Z 2 = 1 . Thus, the minimum energy required in both cases is E = 2.30 10 14 J
e
1 MeV jFGH 1.60 10 J IJK =
13
144 keV .
Section 45.4 in the text gives more accurate values for the critical ignition temperatures, of about 52 keV for DD fusion and 6 keV for DT fusion. The nuclei can fuse by tunneling. A triton moves more slowly than a deuteron at a given temperature. Then DT collisions last longer than DD collisions and have much greater tunneling probabilities. P45.16 (a) r f = rD + rT = 1.20 10 15 m 2
e
j a f + a3 f
13
13
= 3.24 10 15 m
(b)
8.99 10 9 N m 2 C 2 1.60 10 19 C k e2 Uf = e = rf 3.24 10 15 m Conserving momentum,
e
je
j
2
= 7.10 10 14 J = 444 keV
(c)
(d)
K i + Ui = K f + U f :
FG 1  m IJ K = U : H m +m K
D D T i f
FG m IJ v = 2 v Hm +m K 5 F m IJ v 1 1 K + 0 = bm + m gv + U = bm + m gG 2 2 Hm +m K F m IJ FG 1 m v IJ + U = FG m IJ K + U K +0=G H m + m KH 2 K Hm +m K F m + m IJ = 5 a444 keVf = 740 keV K =U G H m K 3
m D vi = m D + m T v f , or v f =
b
g
D
D
T
i
i
2
i
D
T
2 f
f
D
T
D
D
T
2 i
+U f
i
D
D
T
2 D i
f
D
D
T
i
f
i
f
D
T
T
(e) P45.17 (a)
Possibly by tunneling. Average KE per particle is 3 k BT = m 3 1 k B T = mv 2 . 2 2 3 1.38 10 23 J K 4.00 10 8 K 2 1.67 10
Therefore, v rms =
e
e
je
27
kg
j
j=
2.23 10 6 m s .
(b)
t=
x 0.1 m = ~ 10 7 s ~ 6 v 10 m s
Chapter 45
601
P45.18
(a)
V = 317 10 6 mi 3 m water mH 2
3
m Deuterium
e jFGH 1 609 m IJK = 1.32 10 m 1 mi = V = e10 kg m je1.32 10 m j = 1.32 10 kg F M I m = FG 2.016 IJ 1.32 10 kg = 1.48 10 kg =G j H 18.015 K e H M JK = b0.030 0%gm = e0.030 0 10 je1.48 10 kg j = 4.43 10
3 18 3 3 18 3 21 H2 H 2O H 2O 21 20 H2 2 20
16
kg
The number of deuterium nuclei in this mass is N= 4.43 10 16 kg m Deuterium = = 1.33 10 43 . 27 m Deuteron 2.014 u 1.66 10 kg u
a
fe
j
4 Since two deuterium nuclei are used per fusion, 2 H + 2 H 2 He + Q , the number of events 1 1 N is = 6.63 10 42 . 2
The energy released per event is Q = M 2 H + M 2 H  M 4 He c 2 = 2 2.014 102  4.002 603 u 931.5 MeV u = 23.8 MeV . The total energy available is then E= (b)
42
b
g
b
g
FG N IJ Q = e6.63 10 ja23.8 MeVfFG 1.60 10 J IJ = H 2K H 1 MeV K
13
2.53 10 31 J .
The time this energy could possibly meet world requirements is t = E
P
=
100 7.00 10
e
2.53 10 31 J
12
e J sj
= 3.61 10 16 s
jFGH 3.161yr s IJK = 10
7
1.14 10 9 yr ~ 1 billion years .
P45.19
(a)
Including both ions and electrons, the number of particles in the plasma is N = 2nV where n is the ion density and V is the volume of the container. Application of Equation 21.6 gives the total energy as E= 3 Nk BT = 3nVk B T = 3 2.0 10 13 cm 3 2
e
L cm jMMe50 m jFGH 101 m N
3 6 3
3
I OPe1.38 10 JK PQ
23
J K 4.0 10 8 K
je
j
E = 1.7 10 7 J (b) From Table 20.2, the heat of vaporization of water is L v = 2.26 10 6 J kg . The mass of water that could be boiled away is m= 1.7 10 7 J E = = 7.3 kg . L v 2.26 10 6 J kg
602 P45.20
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(a)
Lawson's criterion for the DT reaction is n 10 14 s cm 3 . For a confinement time of
= 1.00 s, this requires a minimum ion density of n = 10 14 cm 3 .
(b) At the ignition temperature of T = 4.5 10 7 K and the ion density found above, the plasma pressure is P = 2nk B T = 2 10 14 cm 3 (c)
LM MNe
cm O jFGH 101 m IJK PPe1.38 10 Q
6 3 3
23
J K 4.5 10 7 K = 1.24 10 5 J m 3 .
je
j
The required magnetic energy density is then uB = B2 10 P = 10 1.24 10 5 J m3 = 1.24 10 6 J m 3 , 2 0
e
j
B 2 4 10 7 N A 2 1.24 10 6 J m 3 = 1.77 T . P45.21 Let the number of 6 Li atoms, each having mass 6.015 u, be N 6 while the number of 7 Li atoms, each with mass 7.016 u, is N 7 . Then, Also, or This yields
e
je
j
F 0.925 I N . GH 0.075 0 JK total mass = N a6.015 uf + N a7.016 uf e1.66 10 kg uj = 2.00 kg , L F 0.925 I a7.016 ufOPe1.66 10 kg uj = 2.00 kg . N Ma6.015 uf + G H 0.075 0 JK NM QP
N 6 = 7.50% of N total = 0.075 0 N 6 + N 7 , or N 7 =
6 7
b
g
6
27
6
27
N 6 = 1.30 10 25 as the number of 6 Li atoms and
N7 =
F 0.925 I e1.30 10 j = GH 0.075 0 JK
25 23
1.61 10 26
as the number of 7 Li atoms.
P45.22
The number of nuclei in 1.00 metric ton of trash is N = 1 000 kg 1 000 g kg
b
10 g 6.02 56.0 gnuclei mol = 1.08 10 mol
28
nuclei .
At an average charge of 26.0 e/nucleus, Therefore
q = 1.08 10 28 26.0 1.60 10 19 = 4.47 10 10 C . t= q 4. 47 10 10 = = 4.47 10 4 s = 12.4 h . I 1.00 10 6
e
ja fe
j
Chapter 45
603
Section 45.5 P45.23 N0 =
Radiation Damage mass present 5.00 kg = = 3.35 10 25 nuclei 27 mass of nucleus 89.907 7 u 1.66 10 kg u
b
ge
j
=
ln 2 ln 2 = = 2.38 10 2 yr 1 = 4.52 10 8 min 1 T1 2 29.1 yr
R0 = N 0 = 4.52 10 8 min 1 3.35 10 25 = 1.52 10 18 counts min 10.0 counts min R = e  t = = 6.60 10 18 R0 1.52 10 18 counts min and giving P45.24
e
je
j
t =  ln 6.60 10 18 = 39.6
t= 39.6
e
j
=
39.6 = 1.66 10 3 yr . 2.38 10 2 yr 1
Source: 100 mrad of 2MeV rays/h at a 1.00m distance. (a) For rays, dose in rem = dose in rad. Thus a person would have to stand 10.0 hours to receive 1.00 rem from a 100mrad/h source. (b) If the radiation is emitted isotropically, the dosage rate falls off as 1 . r2
Thus a dosage 10.0 mrad/h would be received at a distance r = 10.0 m = 3.16 m . P45.25 (a) The number of xrays taken per year is n = 8 x  ray d 5 d wk 50 wk yr = 2.0 10 3 x  ray yr . The average dose per photograph is (b) 5.0 rem yr 2.0 10 3 x  ray yr = 2.5 10 3 rem x  ray .
b
gb
gb
g
The technician receives lowlevel background radiation at a rate of 0.13 rem yr . The dose of 5.0 rem yr received as a result of the job is 5.0 rem yr = 38 times background levels . 0.13 rem yr
P45.26
(a)
I = I 0 e  x , so With = 1.59 cm 1 , the thickness when I = I0 = 1.00 10 4 , I I0 is 2
x= x= x=
I 1 ln 0 I
FG IJ H K
af e j
1 ln 2 = 0.436 cm . 1.59 cm 1 1 ln 1.00 10 4 = 5.79 cm . 1 1.59 cm
(b)
When
604 P45.27
Applications of Nuclear Physics
1 rad = 10 2 J kg t = mcT
Q = mcT
P
=
m 4 186 J kg C 50.0 C
2
b a10fe10
ga
J kg s m
ja f
f=
P t = mcT
2.09 10 6 s 24 days!
Note that power is the product of dose rate and mass. P45.28 10 2 J kg Q absorbed energy = = 1 000 rad = 10.0 J kg m unit mass 1 rad
b
g
The rise in body temperature is calculated from Q = mcT where c = 4 186 J kg for water and the human body T = P45.29 Q 1 = 10.0 J kg = 2.39 10 3 C (Negligible). mc 4 186 J kg C
b
g
P45.30
a0.140 MeVf LMF 1.00 10 g I F 6.02 10 nuclei I OP = 4.26 10 MeV 2 NMGH 98.9 g mol JK GH 1 mol JK QP J MeV j = 0.682 J E = e 4.26 10 MeV je1.60 10 0.682 J F 1 rad I Thus, the dose received is Dose = 60.0 kg G 10 J kg J H K = 1.14 rad . F 6.02 10 nuclei mol I = 6.70 10 The nuclei initially absorbed are N = e1.00 10 g jG H 89.9 g mol JK a f N = N  N = N e1  e j = N e1  e The number of decays in time t is j.
E=
8 23 12 12 13 2 0 9 23 0 0  t 0  ln 2 t T1 2
If half of the 0.140MeV gamma rays are absorbed by the patient, the total energy absorbed is
12
.
At the end of 1 year, and The energy deposited is Thus, the dose received is
t T1 2
=
1.00 yr = 0.034 4 29.1 yr
e je j E = e1.58 10 ja1.10 MeV fe1.60 10 J MeV j = 0.027 7 J . F 0.027 7 J I = 3.96 10 J kg = 0.039 6 rad. Dose = G H 70.0 kg JK
N = N 0  N = 6.70 10 12 1  e 0.023 8 = 1.58 10 11 .
11 13 4
Section 45.6
Radiation Detectors
2 1 2 5.00 10 12 F 1.00 10 3 V 1 2 C V E = = = 3.12 10 7 E 0.500 MeV 0.500 MeV 1.60 10 13 J MeV
P45.31
(a)
b g a f b ge a
a f e
fe
je
j j
2
(b)
N=
5.00 10 12 F 1.00 10 3 V Q C V = = = 3.12 10 10 electrons e e 1.60 10 19 C
je
j
Chapter 45
605
P45.32
(a)
EI = 10.0 eV is the energy required to liberate an electron from a dynode. Let ni be the number of electrons incident upon a dynode, each having gained energy e V as it was accelerated to this dynode. The number of electrons that will be freed from this dynode is V : N i = ni e EI
a f
At the first dynode, ni = 1 (b) For the second dynode, ni = N 1 = 10 1 , At the third dynode, ni = N 2 = 10 2
and
N1 =
a1fea100 V f =
10.0 eV
10 1 electrons .
so and
N2 = N3 =
(10 1 ) e 100 V = 10 2 . 10.0 eV (10 2 ) e 100 V = 10 3 . 10.0 eV
a
f
a
f
Observing the developing pattern, we see that the number of electrons incident on the seventh and last dynode is n 7 = N 6 = 10 6 . (c) The number of electrons incident on the last dynode is n 7 = 10 6 . The total energy these electrons deliver to that dynode is given by
E = ni e V = 10 6 e 700 V  600 V = 10 8 eV .
P45.33 (a) The average time between slams is 60 min 38 = 1.6 min . Sometimes, the actual interval is nearly zero. Perhaps about equally as often, it is 2 1.6 min. Perhaps about half as often, it is 4 1.6 min . Somewhere around 5 1.6 min = 8.0 min , the chances of randomness producing so long a wait get slim, so such a long wait might likely be due to mischief. (b) The midpoints of the time intervals are separated by 5.00 minutes. We use R = R0 e  t . Subtracting the background counts,
a f
a
f
or (c)
a f a f e ja F 262 IJ = ln a0.882f =  3.47 min T ln G H 297 K
337  5 15 = 372  5 15 e
 ln 2 T1
2
5 .00 min
f
1 2
which yields T1 2 = 27.6 min .
As in the random events in part (a), we imagine a 5 count counting uncertainty. The smallest likely value for the halflife is then given by ln
FG 262  5 IJ =  3.47 min T H 297 + 5 K
1 2
, or T1
e j
2
min
= 21.1 min .
The largest credible value is found from ln
1 2
Thus,
FG 262 + 5 IJ =  3.47 min T , yielding eT j = 38.8 min . H 297  5 K F 38.8 + 21.1 IJ FG 38.8  21.1 IJ min = a30 9f min = 30 min 30% . T =G H 2 K H 2 K
1 2 max 1 2
606
Applications of Nuclear Physics
Section 45.7 P45.34
Uses of Radiation
59
The initial specific activity of
b R mg
0
=
20.0 Ci 100 Ci 3.70 10 4 Bq = 3.70 10 6 Bq kg . = 0.200 kg kg 1 Ci
 t 6
After 1 000 h, The activity of the oil, Therefore, So that wear rate is
F I GH JK R F RI e =G J e H m K = e3.70 10 Bq kg je m F 800 Bq literIJ (6.50 liters) = 86.7 Bq . R =G H 60.0 K
0 oil
Fe in the steel,
 6. 40 10 4 h 1 1 000 h
jb
g = 1.95 10 6
Bq kg .
m in oil =
b g
86.7 Bq Roil = = 4.45 10 5 kg . Rm 1.95 10 6 Bq kg
4. 45 10 5 kg = 4.45 10 8 kg h . 1 000 h ln 2 ln 2 = = 0.009 82 s 1 . T1 2 70.6 s
P45.35
The halflife of The
14
14
O is 70.6 s, so the decay constant is =
O nuclei remaining after five min is N = N 0 e  t = 10 10 e
e j
3
 0.009 82 s 1 300 s
e
ja
f = 5.26 10 8 .
F 1.00 cm I = e5.26 10 jF 1.00 cm I = 2 .63 10 GH total vol. of blood JK GH 2000 cm JK R = N = e0.009 82 s je 2 .63 10 j = 2 .58 10 Bq ~ 10 and their activity is
N = N
3 8 3 5 1 5 3
The number of these in one cubic centimeter of blood is
3
Bq .
P45.36
(a)
The number of photons is
10 4 MeV = 9.62 10 3 . Since only 50% of the photons are 1.04 MeV detected, the number of 65 Cu nuclei decaying is twice this value, or 1.92 10 4 . In two half3 lives, threefourths of the original nuclei decay, so N 0 = 1.92 10 4 and N 0 = 2.56 10 4 . This 4 is 1% of the 65 Cu , so the number of 65 Cu is 2.56 10 6 ~ 10 6 .
(b)
Natural copper is 69.17% 63 Cu and 30.83% 65 Cu . Thus, if the sample contains N Cu copper atoms, the number of atoms of each isotope is N 63 = 0.691 7 NCu and N 65 = 0.308 3 N Cu . Therefore,
j The total mass of copper present is then m = b62 .93 ugN + a64.93 ufN m = b62 .93ge5.75 10 j + a64.93fe 2 .56 10 j u e1.66 10 g uj
Cu 63 Cu 6 6 24
N 63 0.691 7 0.6917 0.6917 = 2 .56 10 6 = 5.75 10 6 . N 65 = or N 63 = 0.3083 0.3083 N 65 0.308 3
65 :
FG H
IJ K
FG H
IJ e K
= 8.77 10 16 g ~ 10 15 g
Chapter 45
607
P45.37
(a)
Starting with N = 0 radioactive atoms at t = 0 , the rate of increase is (production decay) dN = RN so dN = R  N dt . dt The variables are separable.
b
g
N 0
z
dN = dt : R  N 0
so Therefore,
ln
FG R  N IJ =  t H R K
R N = e t
z
t
and
FG R  N IJ = t H R K FG R  N IJ = e . H R K
 1 ln
 t
1
N=
R
e1  e j .
 t
(b)
The maximum number of radioactive nuclei would be
R
.
Additional Problems P45.38 (a) Suppose each 235 U fission releases 208 MeV of energy. Then, the number of nuclei that must have undergone fission is total release 5 10 13 J N= = = 1.5 10 24 nuclei . 13 energy per nuclei 208 MeV 1.60 10 J MeV
a
fe
j
(b)
mass =
F 1.5 10 nuclei I b235 g molg GH 6.02 10 nuclei mol JK
24 23
0.6 kg
P45.39
(a)
At 6 10 8 K , the average kinetic energy of a carbon atom is 3 k B T = 1.5 8.62 10 5 eV K 6 10 8 K = 8 10 4 eV 2 Note that 6 10 8 K is about 6 2 = 36 times larger than 1.5 10 7 K , the core temperature of the Sun. This factor corresponds to the higher potentialenergy barrier to carbon fusion compared to hydrogen fusion. It could be misleading to compare it to the temperature ~ 10 8 K required for fusion in a lowdensity plasma in a fusion reactor.
a fe
je
j
(b)
The energy released is E = 2m C 12  m Ne 20  m He 4 c 2 E = 24.000 000  19.992 440  4.002 603 931.5 MeV = 4.62 MeV In the second reaction, E = 2m C 12  m Mg 24
b
e j e e j e
j e j
ga
f
j a931.5f MeV u E = b 24.000 000  23.985 042 ga931.5 f MeV =
13.9 MeV
continued on next page
608
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(c)
The energy released is the energy of reaction of the number of carbon nuclei in a 2.00kg sample, which corresponds to
F 10 I MeV fusion event 1 kWh e jGH 6.02 12.0 gatoms mol JK FGH 42.62nuclei fusion event IJK FGH 2.25 10 MeV IJK mol e1.00 10 ja4.62f kWh = 1.03 10 kWh E = 2e 2.25 10 j
E = 2.00 10 3 g
26 23 19 7 19
P45.40
To conserve momentum, the two fragments must move in opposite directions with speeds v1 and v 2 such that m1 v1 = m 2 v 2 or v2 =
FG m IJ v . Hm K
1 2 1
The kinetic energies after the breakup are then
2 K 1 = 1 m1 v1 2
and
m1 2 K 2 = 1 m2 v2 = 1 m2 2 2 m2
FG IJ H K
2 2 v1 =
FG m IJ K . Hm K
1 2 1
The fraction of the total kinetic energy carried off by m1 is and the fraction carried off by m 2 is *P45.41 (a)
K1 K1 m2 = = K 1 + K 2 K 1 + m1 m 2 K 1 m1 + m 2
b
g
1
m2 m1 = . m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
Q = 236.045 562u c 2  86.920 711u c 2  148.934 370 u c 2 = 0.190 481u c 2 = 177 MeV Immediately after fission, this Qvalue is the total kinetic energy of the fission products.
(b)
K Br =
FG m IJ Q , from Problem 45.40. Hm +m K F 149 u IJ a177.4 MeVf = 112 MeV =G H 87 u + 149 u K
La Br La
K La = Q  K Br = 177.4 MeV  112.0 MeV = 65.4 MeV 2K Br = m Br 2K La = m La 2 112 10 6 eV 1.6 10 19 J eV
27
(c)
v Br =
v La =
1.58 10 m s a87 ufe1.66 10 kg uj J eV j 2e65.4 10 eV je1.6 10 a149 ufe1.66 10 kg uj = 9.20 10 m s
6 19 6 27
e
je
j=
7
Chapter 45
609
P45.42
For a typical
235
U , Q = 208 MeV ; and the initial mass is 235 u. Thus, the fractional energy loss is Q 208 MeV = = 9.50 10  4 = 0.095 0% . 235 u 931.5 MeV u mc 2
a a
fb
g
For the DT fusion reaction, The initial mass is The fractional loss in this reaction is
Q = 17.6 MeV .
m = 2.014 u + 3.016 u = 5.03 u .
Q 17.6 MeV = = 3.75 10  3 = 0.375% 2 5.03 u 931.5 MeV u mc
a
f a
fb
f
g
0.375% = 3.95 or the fractional loss in D  T is about 4 times that in 0.0950% P45.43 The decay constant is =
235
U fission .
ln 2 ln 2 = = 1.78 10 9 s 1 . 7 T1 2 12.3 yr 3.16 10 s yr
b
ge
j
The tritium in the plasma decays at a rate of R = N = 1.78 10  9 s 1 R = 1.78 10 13
e
L O cm j MMFGH 2.00 10 IJK FGH 101 m IJK e50.0 m jPP N cm Q F 1 Ci I = 482 Ci Bq = e1.78 10 Bq jG H 3.70 10 Bq JK
14 6 3 3 3 3 13 10
.
The fission inventory is P45.44
4 10 10 Ci ~ 10 8 times greater than this amount. 482 Ci
Momentum conservation: 0 = m Li v Li + m v , or, m Li v Li = m v . Thus, K Li K Li K Li 1 1 m Li v Li 2 = m Li v Li = 2 2 m Li
2
g = bm v g = F m I v GH 2m JK 2m F b4.002 6 ug I F I F I =G GH 2 b7.016 0 ug JJK H 9.25 10 m sK = a1.14 ufH 9.25 10 m sK = 1.14 e1.66 10 kg jF 9.25 10 m sI = 1.62 10 J = 1.01 MeV H K b
2
2
2
Li
Li
2
6
2
6
2
 27
6
2
13
.
P45.45
The complete fissioning of 1.00 gram of U 235 releases Q=
b1.00 g g e6.02 10 235 grams mol
23
atoms mol 200 MeV fission 1.60 10 13 J MeV = 8.20 10 10 J .
jb
ge
j
If all this energy could be utilized to convert m kilograms of 20.0C water to 400C steam (see Chapter 20 of text for values), then Q = mc w T + mL v + mc s T Q = m 4186 J kg C 80.0 C + 2.26 10 6 J kg + 2010 J kg C 300 C . Therefore m= 8.20 10 J = 2.56 10 4 kg . 3.20 10 6 J kg
10
b
ga
f
b
ga
f
610 P45.46
Applications of Nuclear Physics
When mass m of 235 U undergoes complete fission, releasing 200 MeV per fission event, the total energy released is: Q=
F m I N a200 MeVf where N GH 235 g mol JK
A
A
is Avogadro's number.
If all this energy could be utilized to convert a mass m w of liquid water at Tc into steam at Th , then, Q = m w c w 100 C  Tc + L v + c s Th  100 C
b
g
b
g
= mN A 200 MeV
c
where c w is the specific heat of liquid water, L v is the latent heat of vaporization, and c s is the specific heat of steam. Solving for the mass of water converted gives mw = c w 100 C  Tc + L v + c s Th  100 C Q
b
g
b
g b235 g molg c b100 C  T g + L
w
a
f
v
+ c s Th  100 C
b
g
.
P45.47
(a)
The number of molecules in 1.00 liter of water (mass = 1 000 g) is N=
F 1.00 10 g I 6.02 10 GH 18.0 g mol JK e
3
23
molecules mol = 3.34 10 25 molecules .
j
The number of deuterium nuclei contained in these molecules is N = 3.34 10 25 molecules
e
1 j FGH 3300deuteron IJK = 1.01 10 molecules
22
deuterons .
Since 2 deuterons are consumed per fusion event, the number of events possible is N = 5.07 10 21 reactions, and the energy released is 2 Efusion = 5.07 10 21 reactions 3.27 MeV reaction = 1.66 10 22 MeV
Efusion
(b)
e = e1.66 10
jb
g
22
MeV 1.60 10 13 J MeV = 2.65 10 9 J .
je
j
In comparison to burning 1.00 liter of gasoline, the energy from the fusion of deuterium is Efusion 2.65 10 9 J = == 78.0 times larger . Egasoline 3.40 10 7 J
P45.48
(a) (b)
V = 4 r 2 r = 4 14.0 10 3 m
e
j a0.05 mf = 1.23 10
2
8
m 3 ~ 10 8 m3
The force on the next layer is determined by atmospheric pressure.
W = PV = 1.013 10 5 N / m 2 1.23 10 8 m3 = 1.25 10 13 J ~ 10 13 J
(c) 1.25 10 13 J = 1 yield , so yield = 1.25 10 14 J ~ 10 14 J 10
e
je
j
b
g
(d)
1.25 10 14 J = 2.97 10 4 ton TNT ~ 10 4 ton TNT 4.2 10 9 J ton TNT or ~ 10 kilotons
P45.49
(a)
The thermal power transferred to the water is Pw = 0.970 waste heat
Pw = 0.970 3 065  1 000 MW = 2 .00 10 9 J s
rw is the mass of water heated per hour: rw = The volume used per hour is 2 .00 10 9 J s 3600 s h Pw = = 4.91 10 8 kg h . c T 4186 J kg C 3.50 C = 4.91 10 5 m3 h .
6
b
g
a
f
Chapter 45
611
e a f b
jb ga
g f
4.91 10 8 kg h 1.00 10 3 kg m3
(b) P45.50
The
235
U fuel is consumed at a rate r f =
210 23
F 3 065 10 GH 7.80 10
j
10
I F 1 kg I FG 3 600 s IJ = J JG J g K H 1 000 g K H 1 h K
Js
0.141 kg h .
The number of nuclei in 0.155 kg of N0 =
F 155 g I e6.02 10 GH 209.98 g mol JK
210
Po is nuclei mol = 4.44 10 23 nuclei .
The halflife of
Po is 138.38 days, so the decay constant is given by
=
ln 2 ln 2 = = 5.80 10 8 s 1 . T1 2 138.38 d 8.64 10 4 s d
a
fe
j
The initial activity is R0 = N 0 = 5.80 10 8 s 1 4.44 10 23 nuclei = 2.58 10 16 Bq . The energy released in each
84 82
e
je
j
210 206 4 84 Po 82 Pb + 2 He
reaction is
Q = M 210 Po  M 206 Pb  M 4 He c 2 :
2
Q = 209.982 857  205.974 449  4.002 603 u 931.5 MeV u = 5.41 MeV . Thus, assuming a conversion efficiency of 1.00%, the initial power output of the battery is
b
g
P = 0.010 0 R0Q = 0.010 0 2.58 10 16 decays s 5.41 MeV decay 1.60 10 13 J MeV = 223 W .
P45.51 (a) (b) V=
3
b
g
b
=
m
, so
ge F mI =G J H K
jb
ge
j
1 3
F 70.0 kg I =G H 18.7 10 kg m JK
3 3
13
= 0.155 m
Add 92 electrons to both sides of the given nuclear reaction. Then it becomes 238 4 206 92 U atom 8 2 He atom + 82 Pb atom + Q net . Q net = M 238 U  8 M 4 He  M 206 Pb c 2 = 238.050 783  8 4.002 603  205.974 449 u 931.5 MeV u
92 2 82
b
g
b
g
Q net = 51.7 MeV (c) If there is a single step of decay, the number of decays per time is the decay rate R and the energy released in each decay is Q. Then the energy released per time is P = QR . If there is a series of decays in steady state, the equation is still true, with Q representing the net decay energy. continued on next page
612
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(d)
The decay rate for all steps in the radioactive series in steady state is set by the parent uranium: N=
F 7.00 10 g I 6.02 10 GH 238 g mol JK e
4
23
nuclei mol = 1.77 10 26 nuclei
j
=
ln 2 ln 2 1 = = 1.55 10 10 9 T1 2 4.47 10 yr yr
R = N = 1.55 10  10 so (e)
Ie JK F P = QR = a51.7 MeV fG 2 .75 10 H
F GH
1 1.77 10 26 nuclei = 2 .75 10 16 decays yr , yr
j
16
1 1.60 10 13 J MeV = 2.27 10 5 J yr . yr
Ie JK
j
dose in rem = dose in rad RBE
5.00 rem yr = dose in rad yr 1.10 , giving dose in rad yr = 4.55 rad yr The allowed wholebody dose is then 70.0 kg 4.55 rad yr
b
g
b
g
b
gb
J gFGH 10 1 radkg IJK =
2
3.18 J yr .
P45.52
ET E thermal = ET =
a
f
FG 1 IJ H 2K
3 k BT = 0.039 eV 2
n
E where n number of collisions, and 0.039 =
FG 1 IJ e2.0 10 j . H 2K
n 6
Therefore, n = 25.6 = 26 collisions . P45.53 Conservation of linear momentum and energy can be applied to find the kinetic energy of the neutron. We first suppose the particles are moving nonrelativistically. The momentum of the alpha particle and that of the neutron must add to zero, so their velocities must be in opposite directions with magnitudes related by m n v n + m v = 0 or
b1.008 7 ugv = b4.002 6 ugv
n
.
At the same time, their kinetic energies must add to 17.6 MeV E= 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 mn vn + m v = 1.008 7 u vn + 4.002 6 v = 17.6 MeV . 2 2 2 2
2 2 E = 0.504 35 u vn + 0.127 10 u vn = 17.6 MeV
b
g
b
g
Substitute v = 0.252 0 vn :
b
g b
g
F I u GH 931.4941 MeV c JK
2
vn =
0.018 9 c 2 = 0.173 c = 5.19 10 7 m s. 0.631 45
Since this speed is not too much greater than 0.1c, we can get a reasonable estimate of the kinetic energy of the neutron from the classical equation, K= 1 1 mv 2 = 1.008 7 u 0.173 c 2 2
b
ga
f FGH 931.494 uMeV c IJK = 14.1 MeV .
2 2
continued on next page
Chapter 45
613
For a more accurate calculation of the kinetic energy, we should use relativistic expressions. Conservation of momentum gives
n m n v n + m v = 0
yielding Then and P45.54 From Table A.3, the halflife of
1.008 7
2 v
vn 1
2 vn
c
2 vn
2
= 4.002 6
v
2 1  v c 2
c
2
=
b
32
2 15.746 c  14.746 vn
2
.
n
 1 mn c 2 +  1 m c 2 = 17.6 MeV
g
b
g
vn = 0.171 c , implying that n  1 mn c 2 = 14.0 MeV . P is 14.26 d. Thus, the decay constant is
b
g
=
ln 2 ln 2 = = 0.048 6 d 1 = 5.63 10 7 s 1 . T1 2 14. 26 d R0
N0 =
=
5.22 10 6 decay s 5.63 10 7 s 1
= 9.28 10 12 nuclei
At t = 10.0 days , the number remaining is N = N 0 e  t = 9.28 10 12 nuclei e
e
j
 0 .048 6 d 1 10 . 0 d
e
jb
g = 5.71 10 12 nuclei
so the number of decays has been N 0  N = 3.57 10 12 and the energy released is E = 3.57 10 12 700 keV 1.60 10 16 J keV = 0.400 J . If this energy is absorbed by 100 g of tissue, the absorbed dose is Dose =
e
ja
fe
j
F 0.400 J I F 1 rad I = GH 0.100 kg JK GH 10 J kg JK
2
400 rad . 6.02 10 23 nuclei mol 1 000 g . 239.05 g mol
P45.55
(a)
The number of Pu nuclei in 1.00 kg =
b
g
The total energy = 25.2 10 23 nuclei 200 MeV = 5.04 10 26 MeV
e
ja
f
E = 5.04 10 26 MeV 4.44 10 20 kWh MeV = 2.24 10 7 kWh
or (b) 22 million kWh.
e
je
j
E = m c 2 = 3.016 049 u + 2.014 102 u  4.002 603 u  1.008 665 u 931.5 MeV u E = 17.6 MeV for each D  T fusion
b
gb
g
(c)
En = Total number of D nuclei 17.6 4.44 10 20 En = 6.02 10 23
a e
fa fe
j
jFGH 1.000 IJK a17.6fe4.44 10 j = 2 014
20
2.34 10 8 kWh
continued on next page
614
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(d)
En = the number of C atoms in 1.00 kg 4.20 eV En =
F 6.02 10 I e4.20 10 GH 12 JK
26
6
MeV 4.44 10 20 = 9.36 kWh
je
j
(e)
Coal is cheap at this moment in human history. We hope that safety and waste disposal problems can be solved so that nuclear energy can be affordable before scarcity drives up the price of fossil fuels.
P45.56
Add two electrons to both sides of the given reaction.
4 Then 4 1 H atom 2 He atom + Q 1
where or
a f b Q = a 26.7 MeV fe1.60 10
rate =
Q = m c 2 = 4 1.007 825  4.002603 u 931.5 MeV u = 26.7 MeV
13
g
b
g
J MeV = 4.28 10 12 J .
j
The proton fusion rate is then power output 3.77 10 26 J s = = 3.53 10 38 protons s . energy per proton 4. 28 10 12 J 4 protons
e
jb
g
P45.57
(a)
QI = M A + M B  M C  M E c 2 , and
QII = M C + M D  M F  M G c 2
Q net = QI + QII = M A + M B  M C  M E + M C + M D  M F  M G c 2 Q net = Q I + QII = M A + M B + M D  M E  M F  M G c 2 Thus, reactions may be added. Any product like C used in a subsequent reaction does not contribute to the energy balance. (b) Adding all five reactions gives
1 1H
+ 1 H+ 0 e+ 1 H+ 1 H+ 1 1 1 1
0 4 1 e 2 He +
0 4 1 e 2 He +
2 + Q net
or
4 1H + 2 1
2 + Q net .
4 4 1 H atom 2 He atom + Q net . 1
Adding two electrons to each side Thus,
1 2
Q net = 4M 1 H  M 4 He c 2 = 4 1.007 825  4.002 603 u 931.5 MeV u = 26.7 MeV .
b
g
b
g
Chapter 45
615
P45.58
(a)
L 4 F 1.50 10 The mass of the pellet is m = V = e0.200 g cm jM G 2 MN 3 H
3
2
cm
I JK
3
OP PQ = 3.53 10
7
g.
The pellet consists of equal numbers of 2 H and 3 H atoms, so the average molar mass is 2.50 and the total number of atoms is N=
F 3.53 10 g I 6.02 10 GH 2 .50 g mol JK e
7
23
atoms mol = 8.51 10 16 atoms .
j
When the pellet is vaporized, the plasma will consist of 2Nparticles (N nuclei and N electrons). The total energy delivered to the plasma is 1.00% of 200 kJ or 2.00 kJ. The temperature of the plasma is found from E = 2 N 3 k B T as 2
a fe
j
j
T= (b)
2 .00 10 3 J E = 5.68 10 8 K . = 3 Nk B 3 8.51 10 16 1.38 10  23 J K
e
je
Each fusion event uses 2 nuclei, so E=
FG N IJ Q = FG 8.51 10 H 2K H 2
16
I a17.59 MeVfe1.60 10 JK
N events will occur. The energy released will be 2
13
J MeV = 1.20 10 5 J = 120 kJ .
j
P45.59
(a)
The solarcore temperature of 15 MK gives particles enough kinetic energy to overcome the k e 2e 4 . The Coulombrepulsion barrier to 1 H + 3 He 2 He + e + + , estimated as e 1 2 r k e 7e 7 , larger by times, so Coulomb barrier to Bethe's fifth and eight reactions is like e 2 r 7 6 7 the required temperature can be estimated as 15 10 K 5 10 K . 2
a fa f
a fa f
e
j
(b)
For 12 C + 1 H
13
N + Q,
Q1 = 12.000 000 + 1.007 825  13.005 739 931.5 MeV = 1.94 MeV For the second step, add seven electrons to both sides to have: 13 N atom 13 C atom + e + + e  + Q Q 2 = 13.005 739  13.003 355  2 0.000 549 931.5 MeV = 1.20 MeV Q3 = Q7 = 2 0.000 549 931.5 MeV = 1.02 MeV Q 4 = 13.003 355 + 1.007 825  14.003 074 931.5 MeV = 7.55 MeV Q5 Q6 Q8
b
ga
f
b
ga
f
b
ga
f
a f = 14.003 074 + 1.007 825  15.003 065 a931.5 MeV f = 7.30 MeV = 15.003 065  15.000 109  2b0.000 549 g a931.5 MeV f = 1.73 MeV = 15.000 109 + 1.007 825  12  4.002 603 a931.5 MeV f = 4.97 MeV
The sum is 26.7 MeV , the same as for the protonproton cycle. (c) Not all of the energy released appears as internal energy in the star. When a neutrino is created, it will likely fly directly out of the star without interacting with any other particle.
616 P45.60
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(a)
I 2 I0 e 2x = = e b 2  1 gx I1 I 0 e  1 x I 50 = e  a5. 40  41.0 fa0.100 f = e 3.56 = 35.2 I 100 I 50 = e  a5. 40  41.0 fa1.00 f = e 35.6 = 2.89 10 15 I 100 Thus, a 1.00cm aluminum plate has essentially removed the longwavelength xrays from the beam.
(b)
(c)
*P45.61
(a)
The number of fissions ocurring in the zeroth, first, second, ... nth generation is N0 , N0 K , N0 K 2 , ... , N0 K n . The total number of fissions that have ocurred up to and including the nth generation is N = N0 + N0K + N0K 2 +...+ N0K n = N0 1 + K + K 2 +...+ K n . Note that the factoring of the difference of two squares, a generalized to a difference of two quantities to any power, a3  1 = a2 + a + 1 a  1
2
e
j  1 = a a + 1fa a  1f , can be
e
a n +1  1 = a n + a n  1 + ... + a 2 + a + 1 a  1 . Thus and (b) K n + K n 1 + ... + K 2 + K + 1 = N = N0 K n +1  1 . K 1 K n +1  1 K 1
e
ja f
ja f
The number of U235 nuclei is N = 5.50 kg
FG 1 atomIJ FG 1 u H 235 u K H 1.66 10
27
I = 1.41 10 J kg K
25
nuclei .
We solve the equation from part (a) for n, the number of generations: N K  1 = K n +1  1 N0
a a
f
f af F N aK  1f N + 1 IJ = lnFG NaK  1f + 1IJ  ln K n ln K = lnG K H K H N K lne1.41 10 a0.1f 10 + 1j lnc N aK  1f N + 1h 1=  1 = 99.2 n=
N K  1 + 1 = Kn K N0
0 0 0 25 20
ln K
ln 1.1
Therefore time must be alotted for 100 generations:
tb = 100 10 10 9 s = 1.00 10 6 s .
continued on next page
e
j
Chapter 45
617
(c)
v=
B
=
150 10 9 N m 2 18.7 10
3
kg m
3
= 2.83 10 3 m s
(d)
V=
4 3 m r = 3
13
F 3m IJ r =G H 4 K
t d = (e)
F 3b5.5 kg g I =G GH 4 e18.7 10 kg m j JJK
3 3
13
= 4.13 10 2 m
r 4.13 10 2 m = = 1.46 10 5 s v 2.83 10 3 m s
14.6 s is greater than 1 s , so the entire bomb can fission. The destructive energy released is 1.41 10 25 nuclei
F 200 10 eV I F 1.6 10 J I = 4.51 10 GH fissioning nucleus JK GH 1 eV JK
6 19
14
J = 4.51 10 14 J
FG 1 ton TNT IJ H 4.2 10 J K
9
= 1.07 10 5 ton TNT = 107 kilotons of TNT What if? If the bomb did not have an "initiator" to inject 10 20 neutrons at the moment when the critical mass is assembled, the number of generations would be n= ln 1. 41 10 25 0.1 1 + 1 ln 1.1
e
a f
j  1 = 582 requiring 583e10 10 sj = 5.83 s .
9
This time is not very short compared with 14.6 s , so this bomb would likely release much less energy.
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P45.2 P45.4 P45.6 P45.8 P45.10 184 MeV see the solution (a) 173 MeV ; (b) 0.078 8% 2.63 kg d (a) 4.84V 1 3 ; (b) 6V 1 3 ; (c) 6.30V 1 3 ; (d) the sphere has minimum loss and the parallelepiped maximum 2.68 10
5
P45.18 P45.20
(a) 2.53 10 31 J ; (b) 1.14 10 9 yr (a) 10 14 cm 3 ; (b) 1.24 10 5 J m3 ; (c) 1.77 T 12.4 h (a) 10.0 h; (b) 3.16 m (a) 0.436 cm; (b) 5.79 cm 2.39 10 3 C 3.96 10 4 J kg (a) 10; (b) 10 6 ; (c) 10 8 eV 4.45 10 8 kg h
P45.22 P45.24 P45.26 P45.28 P45.30 P45.32 P45.34
P45.12 P45.14 P45.16
(a) 31.9 g h ; (b) 122 g h 2 (a) 3.24 fm ; (b) 444 keV ; (c) vi ; 5 (d) 740 keV ; (e) possibly by tunneling
618 P45.36 P45.38 P45.40 P45.42
Applications of Nuclear Physics
(a) ~ 10 6 ; (b) ~ 10 15 g (a) 1.5 10 24 ; (b) 0.6 kg see the solution The fractional loss in D  T is about 4 times that in
235
P45.48
(a) ~ 10 8 m 3 ; (b) ~ 10 13 J ; (c) ~ 10 14 J ; (d) ~ 10 kilotons 223 W 26 collisions 400 rad 3.53 10 38 protons s (a) 5.68 10 8 K ; (b) 120 kJ (a) see the solution; (b) 35.2 ; (c) 2.89 10 15
P45.50 P45.52 P45.54 P45.56
U fission
P45.44 P45.46
1.01 MeV c b235 g molgLMM+ c b100C  TCg g+ L OPP N bT 100 Q
w c v s h
mN A 200 MeV
a
f
P45.58 P45.60
46
Particle Physics and Cosmology
CHAPTER OUTLINE
46.1 46.2 46.3 46.4 46.5 46.6 46.7 The Fundamental Forces in Nature Positrons and Other Antiparticles Mesons and the Beginning of Particle Physics Classification of Particles Conservation Laws Strange Particles and Strangeness Making Elementary Particles and Measuring Their Properties Finding Patterns in the Particles Quarks Multicolored Quarks The Standard Model The Cosmic Connection Problems and Perspectives
ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
Q46.1 Strong ForceMediated by gluons. Electromagnetic ForceMediated by photons. Weak ForceMediated by W + , W  , and Z 0 bosons. Gravitational ForceMediated by gravitons. Q46.2 The production of a single gamma ray could not satisfy the law of conservation of momentum, which must hold true in thisand everyinteraction. In the quark model, all hadrons are composed of smaller units called quarks. Quarks have a fractional electric charge and a 1 baryon number of . There are 6 types of quarks: up, down, 3 strange, charmed, top, and bottom. Further, all baryons contain 3 quarks, and all mesons contain one quark and one antiquark. Leptons are thought to be fundamental particles.
46.8 46.9 46.10 46.11 46.12 46.13
Q46.3
Q46.4
Hadrons are massive particles with structure and size. There are two classes of hadron: mesons and baryons. Hadrons are composed of quarks. Hadrons interact via the strong force. Leptons are light particles with no structure or size. It is believed that leptons are fundamental particles. Leptons interact via the weak force. Baryons are heavy hadrons with spin 1 3 or , are composed of three quarks, and have long 2 2 lifetimes. Mesons are light hadrons with spin 0 or 1, are composed of a quark and an antiquark, and have short lifetimes. Resonances are hadrons. They decay into strongly interacting particles such as protons, neutrons, and pions, all of which are hadrons. The baryon number of a proton or neutron is one. Since baryon number is conserved, the baryon number of the kaon must be zero. Decays by the weak interaction typically take 10 10 s or longer to occur. This is slow in particle physics.
Q46.5
Q46.6 Q46.7
Q46.8
619
620 Q46.9
Particle Physics and Cosmology
The decays of the muon, tau, charged pion, kaons, neutron, lambda, charged sigmas, xis, and omega occur by the weak interaction. All have lifetimes longer than 10 13 s. Several produce neutrinos; none produce photons. Several violate strangeness conservation. The decays of the neutral pion, eta, and neutral sigma occur by the electromagnetic interaction. These are three of the shortest lifetimes in Table 46.2. All produce photons, which are the quanta of the electromagnetic force. All conserve strangeness. Yes, protons interact via the weak interaction; but the strong interaction predominates. You can think of a conservation law as a superficial regularity which we happen to notice, as a person who does not know the rules of chess might observe that one player's two bishops are always on squares of opposite colors. Alternatively, you can think of a conservation law as identifying some stuff of which the universe is made. In classical physics one can think of both matter and energy as fundamental constituents of the world. We buy and sell both of them. In classical physics you can also think of linear momentum, angular momentum, and electric charge as basic stuffs of which the universe is made. In relativity we learn that matter and energy are not conserved separately, but are both aspects of the conserved quantity relativistic total energy. Discovered more recently, four conservation laws appear equally general and thus equally fundamental: Conservation of baryon number, conservation of electronlepton number, conservation of taulepton number, and conservation of muonlepton number. Processes involving the strong force and the electromagnetic force follow conservation of strangeness, charm, bottomness, and topness, while the weak interaction can alter the total S, C, B and T quantum numbers of an isolated system. No. Antibaryons have baryon number 1, mesons have baryon number 0, and baryons have baryon number +1. The reaction cannot occur because it would not conserve baryon number, unless so much energy is available that a baryonantibaryon pair is produced. The Standard Model consists of quantum chromodynamics (to describe the strong interaction) and the electroweak theory (to describe the electromagnetic and weak interactions). The Standard Model is our most comprehensive description of nature. It fails to unify the two theories it includes, and fails to include the gravitational force. It pictures matter as made of six quarks and six leptons, interacting by exchanging gluons, photons, and W and Z bosons. All baryons and antibaryons consist of three quarks. All mesons and antimesons consist of two 1 quarks. Since quarks have spin quantum number and can be spinup or spindown, it follows that 2 the threequark baryons must have a halfinteger spin, while the twoquark mesons must have spin 0 or 1. Each flavor of quark can have colors, designated as red, green and blue. Antiquarks are colored antired, antigreen, and antiblue. A baryon consists of three quarks, each having a different color. By analogy to additive color mixing we call it colorless. A meson consists of a quark of one color and antiquark with the corresponding anticolor, making it colorless as a whole. In 1961 GellMann predicted the omegaminus particle, with quark composition sss. Its discovery in 1964 confirmed the quark theory.
Q46.10
Q46.11 Q46.12
Q46.13
Q46.14
Q46.15
Q46.16
Q46.17
Chapter 46
621
Q46.18
1 , B = 1, L e = L = L = 0, and strangeness 2. 2 All of these are described by its quark composition dss (Table 46.5). The properties of the quarks 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 from Table 46.3 let us add up charge:  e  e  e =  e; spin +  + = , supposing one of the 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 quarks is spindown relative to the other two; baryon number + + = 1 ; lepton numbers, charm, 3 3 3 bottomness, and topness zero; and strangeness 0  1  1 = 2 . The  particle has, from Table 46.2, charge e, spin The electroweak theory of Glashow, Salam, and Weinberg predicted the W + , W  , and Z particles. Their discovery in 1983 confirmed the electroweak theory. Hubble determined experimentally that all galaxies outside the Local Group are moving away from us, with speed directly proportional to the distance of the galaxy from us. Before that time, the Universe was too hot for the electrons to remain in any sort of stable orbit around protons. The thermal motion of both protons and electrons was too rapid for them to be in close enough proximity for the Coulomb force to dominate. The Universe is vast and could on its own terms get along very well without us. But as the cosmos is immense, life appears to be immensely scarce, and therefore precious. We must do our work, growing corn to feed the hungry while preserving our planet for future generations. One person has singular abilities and opportunities for effort, faithfulness, generosity, honor, curiosity, understanding, and wonder. His or her place is to use those abilities and opportunities, unique in all the Universe.
Q46.19
Q46.20
Q46.21
Q46.22
SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS
Section 46.1 Section 46.2 P46.1 The Fundamental Forces in Nature Positrons and Other Antiparticles
Assuming that the proton and antiproton are left nearly at rest after they are produced, the energy E of the photon must be E = 2E0 = 2 938.3 MeV = 1 876.6 MeV = 3.00 10 10 J . Thus, E = hf = 3.00 10 10 J f= 3.00 10 10 J = 4.53 10 23 Hz 6.626 10 34 J s c 3.00 10 8 m s = = 6.62 10 16 m . f 4.53 10 23 Hz
a
f
=
622 P46.2
Particle Physics and Cosmology
The minimum energy is released, and hence the minimum frequency photons are produced, when the proton and antiproton are at rest when they annihilate. That is, E = E0 and K = 0 . To conserve momentum, each photon must carry away onehalf the energy. Thus, Emin = fmin = c fmin 2 E0 = E0 = 938.3 MeV = hf min . 2
Thus,
a938.3 MeVfe1.60 10 J MeVj = e6.626 10 J sj
13 34
2.27 10 23 Hz
=
P46.3
=
3.00 10 8 m s 2.27 10 23 Hz
= 1.32 10 15 m .
In p + + p  , we start with energy we end with energy 2.09 GeV 938.3 MeV + 938.3 MeV + 95.0 MeV + K 2
where K 2 is the kinetic energy of the second proton. Conservation of energy for the creation process gives K 2 = 118 MeV .
Section 46.3 P46.4
Mesons and the Beginning of Particle Physics
The reaction is muonlepton number before reaction: electronlepton number before reaction:
+ + e +
a1f + a0f = 1 a0f + a1f = 1 .
Therefore, after the reaction, the muonlepton number must be 1. Thus, one of the neutrinos must be the antineutrino associated with muons, and one of the neutrinos must be the neutrino associated with electrons:
Then P46.5
and
e .
+ + e + e .
The creation of a virtual Z 0 boson is an energy fluctuation E = 93 10 9 eV . It can last no longer than t = c t = 2 E and move no farther than
a f
6.626 10 34 J s 3.00 10 8 m s hc = 4 E 4 93 10 9 eV
e
e
je
j
j F 1 eV I = 1.06 10 GH 1.60 10 J JK
19
18
m = ~ 10 18 m .
Chapter 46
623
P46.6
A proton has rest energy 938.3 MeV. The time interval during which a virtual proton could exist is at most t in Et = c t = 2 . The distance it could move is at most
1.055 10 34 J s 3 10 8 m s c = ~ 10 16 m . 2 E 2 938.3 1.6 10 13 J
e
a
fe
je
j
j
According to Yukawa's line of reasoning, this distance is the range of a force that could be associated with the exchange of virtual protons between highenergy particles. P46.7 By Table 46.2, Therefore,
M 0 = 135 MeV c 2 .
E = 67.5 MeV for each photon p= E c E h = 67.5 MeV c = 1.63 10 22 Hz .
and P46.8
f=
The time interval for a particle traveling with the speed of light to travel a distance of 3 10 15 m is t = d 3 10 15 m = = ~ 10 23 s . v 3 10 8 m s E = m n  m p  m e c 2 From Table A3, (b) E = 1.008 665  1.007 825 931.5 = 0.782 MeV .
P46.9
(a)
e
j
b
ga
f
Assuming the neutron at rest, momentum conservation for the decay process implies p p = p e . Relativistic energy for the system is conserved
Since p p = p e , Solving the algebra, If p e c = m e v e c = 1.19 MeV , then Solving,
em c j a938.3f
p
2 2
2 + pp c 2 +
2
+ ( p c) 2
em c j + p c = m c . + a0.511f + ( p c ) = 939.6 MeV .
e 2 2 2 2 e n 2 2 2
pc = 1.19 MeV .
v e 1.19 MeV v x = = = 2.33 where x = e . 2 0.511 MeV c c 1 x v x 2 = 1  x 2 5. 43 and x = e = 0.919 c
e
j
v e = 0.919 c . Then m p v p = e m e v e :
13 J MeV e m e v e c 1.19 MeV 1.60 10 = vp = 27 8 mp c 1.67 10 3.00 10 m s
a
e
fe
je
j
j
v p = 3.80 10 5 m s = 380 km s . (c) The electron is relativistic, the proton is not.
624
Particle Physics and Cosmology
Section 46.4 P46.10
Classification of Particles
In ? + p + n + + , charge conservation requires the unknown particle to be neutral. Baryon number conservation requires baryon number = 0. The muonlepton number of ? must be 1. So the unknown particle must be .
P46.11
+ 0 + K + 0 p + +
0 KS + + 
(or 0 + 0 )
n p + e+ + e
Section 46.5 P46.12 (a)
Conservation Laws p + p + + e and Le L charge baryon number : baryon number : charge 0+0 0+1 0 + 0 1 + 0 1 + 1 +1 + 1 1+11+0 1+11+1+1 0+1 0+0 0 +1 = 0 +1 1 + 1 = 1 + 1 in both reactions.
(b) (c) (d) (e) P46.13 (a)
 +p p++
p+p p++
p+pp+p+n
+p n+0
Baryon number and charge are conserved, with values of and
(b) P46.14 P46.15
Strangeness is not conserved in the second reaction.
Baryon number conservation allows the first and forbids the second . (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
  +
K+ + +
L : L : Le : Le : L : L :
011 0 1 + 1 1 + 0 0  1 1+0 0+1 1+0 0+1 1 0+0+1 011+0
e + p + n + e+ e + n p + + e + n p+ +   e + e +
(f)
and
Le :
Chapter 46
625
P46.16
Momentum conservation for the decay requires the pions to have equal speeds. The total energy of each is so 497.7 MeV 2
Solving,
e j gives a248.8 MeVf = bpcg + a139.6 MeVf . mc FG v IJ pc = 206 MeV = mvc = H cK 1  bv cg pc 206 MeV 1 FG v IJ = 1.48 = = H cK 139.6 MeV mc 1  bv cg
E 2 = p 2 c 2 + mc 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
and
FG IJ H K FG v IJ = 2.18LM1  FG v IJ OP = 2.18  2.18FG v IJ H cK H cK NM H c K QP F vI 3.18G J = 2.18 H cK
v v = 1.48 1  c c
2 2 2 2
2
so and P46.17 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) p+ + + 0 p+ + p+ p+ + p+ + 0 p+ + p+ p+ + +
v = c
2.18 = 0.828 3.18
v = 0.828 c . Baryon number : This reaction can occur . Baryon number is violated: This reaction can occur . This reaction can occur . Violates baryon number : Violates muon  lepton number : 0 0+1 0 1 + 0 1+11+0 10+0
+ + +
n0 p+ + e + e
+ + + n
626 P46.18
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a)
p e+ + Baryon number: B 0 , so baryon number conservation is violated. +1 0 + 0
(b)
From conservation of momentum for the decay: Then, for the positron, becomes From conservation of energy for the system: or so Equating this to the result from above gives or Thus, Also, and E =
2 2 E0 , p  E 0 , e 2
p e = p .
2 Ee = p e c 2 Ee
b g +E = d p ci + E
2 2
2 0, e 2 0, e 2 = E2 + E0 , e .
E0, p = Ee + E Ee = E0, p  E
2 2 Ee = E0 , p  2E0 , p E + E2 . 2 2 E2 + E0 , e = E0 , p  2E0 , p E + E2 2
2 E0 , p
=
a938.3 MeVf  a0.511 MeVf 2a938.3 MeV f
= 469 MeV .
Ee = E0 , p  E = 938.3 MeV  469 MeV = 469 MeV . p = E c = 469 MeV c 469 MeV . c Ee = 469 MeV . E e = E0 , e = E0 , e 1 v c E0 , e Ee =
p e = p =
(c)
The total energy of the positron is But,
b g
2
so which yields: P46.19 The relevant conservation laws are: L e = 0 L = 0 and (a) (b) L = 0 .
1
FG v IJ H cK
2
=
0.511 MeV = 1.09 10 3 469 MeV
v = 0.999 999 4c .
+ 0 + e+ + ?
?+ p  + p + +
Le : 0 0  1 + Le L : L + 0 +1 + 0 + 0
implies L e = 1 implies L = 1
and we have a e and we have a
continued on next page
Chapter 46
627
(c) (d)
0 +  + ?
L : 0 0 + 1 + L L : 0 1 + L L : 1 0 + L
implies L = 1 implies L = 1 implies L = 1
and we have a and we have a and we have a
+ + + ?+ ?
Conclusion for (d): We have and
L = 1 for one particle, and L = 1 for the other particle.
.
Section 46.6 P46.20
Strange Particles and Strangeness
The 0 + +  decay must occur via the strong interaction.
0 The K S + +  decay must occur via the weak interaction.
P46.21
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
0 p + 
Strangeness: 1 0 + 0 Strangeness: 0 + 0 1 + 1 Strangeness: 0 + 0 +1  1 Strangeness: 0 + 0 0  1 Strangeness: 2 1 + 0 Strangeness: 2 0 + 0 Le : L : Le : Strangeness: charge: Baryon number: Strangeness:
(strangeness is not conserved ) (0 = 0 and strangeness is conserved ) (0 = 0 and strangeness is conserved ) (0 1 : strangeness is not conserved ) (2 1 so strangeness is not conserved ) (2 0 so strangeness is not conserved )
 + p 0 + K 0
p + p 0 + 0
 + p  + +
 0 +  0 p + 
P46.22
(a)
 e +
and
0 1 + 0, 10 0 0+1+1 1 0 + 0 , 0 +1 + 0 +1 0 + 0 2 0 + 0
(b) (c)
n p + e + e 0 p + 0 and
(d) (e)
p e+ + 0 0 n + 0
628 P46.23
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a) (b)
 + p 2 violates conservation of baryon number as 0 + 1 0 , not allowed .
K  + n 0 +  Baryon number, Charge, Strangeness, Lepton number, 0+11+0 1 + 0 0  1 1 + 0 1 + 0 00
The interaction may occur via the strong interaction since all are conserved. (c) K  + 0 Strangeness, Baryon number, Lepton number, Charge, 1 0 + 0 00 00 1 1 + 0
Strangeness is violated by one unit, but everything else is conserved. Thus, the reaction can occur via the weak interaction , but not the strong or electromagnetic interaction. (d)   + 0 Baryon number, Lepton number, Charge, Strangeness, 11+0 00 1 1 + 0 3 2 + 0
May occur by weak interaction , but not by strong or electromagnetic. (e)
2
Baryon number, Lepton number, Charge, Strangeness, 00 00 00 00
No conservation laws are violated, but photons are the mediators of the electromagnetic interaction. Also, the lifetime of the is consistent with the electromagnetic interaction .
Chapter 46
629
P46.24
(a)
 0 +  +
Baryon number: Le : L : +1 +1 + 0 + 0 00+0+0 00+0+0 Charge: L : Strangeness: 1 0  1 + 0 0 0+1+1 2 1 + 0 + 0 B , charge, L e , and L
Conserved quantities are: (b)
0 K S 2 0
Baryon number: Le : L :
00 00 00
Charge: L : Strangeness:
00 00 +1 0 B , charge, L e , L , and L
Conserved quantities are: (c) K  + p 0 + n Baryon number: Le : L : 0+11+1 0+00+0 0+00+0 Charge: L : Strangeness:
1 + 1 0 + 0 0+00+0 1 + 0 1 + 0 S , charge, L e , L , and L
Conserved quantities are: (d) 0 + 0 + Baryon number: Le : L : +1 1 + 0 00+0 00+0 Charge: L : Strangeness:
00 00+0 1 1 + 0 B , S , charge, L e , L , and L
Conserved quantities are: (e) e+ + e + +  Baryon number: Le : L : 0+00+0 1 + 1 0 + 0 0+00+0 Charge: L : Strangeness:
+1  1 +1  1 0 + 0 +1  1 0+00+0 B , S , charge, L e , L , and L
Conserved quantities are: (f) p + n 0 +  Baryon number: Le : L : 1 + 1 1 + 1 0+00+0 0+00+0 Charge: L : Strangeness:
1 + 0 0  1 0+00+0 0 + 0 +1  1 B , S , charge, L e , L , and L
Conserved quantities are:
630 P46.25
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a)
K+ + p ? + p The strong interaction conserves everything. Baryon number, Charge, Lepton numbers, Strangeness, 0+1B+1 +1 + 1 Q + 1 0+0L+0 +1 + 0 S + 0 so so so so B=0 Q = +1 L e = L = L = 0 S=1
The conclusion is that the particle must be positively charged, a nonbaryon, with strangeness of +1. Of particles in Table 46.2, it can only be the K + . Thus, this is an elastic scattering process. The weak interaction conserves all but strangeness, and S = 1. (b)  ? +  Baryon number, Charge, Lepton numbers, Strangeness, +1 B + 0 1 Q  1 0L+0 3 S + 0 so so so so B=1 Q=0 L e = L = L = 0 S = 1: S = 2
The particle must be a neutral baryon with strangeness of 2. Thus, it is the 0 . (c)
K+ ? + + +
Baryon number, Charge, Lepton numbers, 0B+0+0 +1 Q + 1 + 0 Le , 0 Le + 0 + 0 L , 0 L  1 + 1 L , 0 L + 0 + 0 Strangeness, 1S+0+0 so so so so so so B=0 Q=0 Le = 0 L = 0 L = 0 S = 1 (for weak interaction): S = 0 The particle must be a neutral meson with strangeness = 0 0 .
Chapter 46
631
Section 46.7 *P46.26 (a)
Making Elementary Particles and Measuring Their Properties p + = eBr +
e1.602 177 10 =
5.344 288 10
19
22 19
p + = eBr + = (b)
e1.602 177 10
5.344 288 10 22
fa f = 686 MeV c bkg m sg bMeV cg C ja1.15 Tfa0.580 mf 200 MeV = c bkg m sg bMeV cg
C 1.15 T 1.99 m
ja
Let be the angle made by the neutron's path with the path of the + at the moment of decay. By conservation of momentum: pn cos + 199.961 581 MeV c cos 64.5 = 686.075 081 MeV c pn cos = 599.989 401 MeV c pn sin = 199.961 581 MeV c sin 64.5 = 180.482 380 MeV c From (1) and (2): pn =
2 2 2
b
g
(1) (2)
2
b
g b599.989 401 MeV cg + b180.482 380 MeV cg
b199.961 581 MeVg + a139.6 MeVf
2 2 2 2
= 627 MeV c
(c)
E + = En =
e p c j + em c j
2
+
+
=
= 244 MeV
b p c g + em c j
2 n n
2 2
=
b626.547 022 MeVg + a939.6 MeVf
2
= 1 130 MeV
E + = E + + En = 243.870 445 MeV + 1 129.340 219 MeV = 1 370 MeV (d)
2 m + c 2 = E +  p + c
d i
2
=
b1 373.210 664 MeVg  b686.075 081 MeVg F GH
v2 c2
2
= 1 190 MeV
m + = 1 190 MeV c 2 E + = m + c 2 , where = 1 
Solving for v, v = 0.500 c . P46.27 Timedilated lifetime: T = T0 = 0.900 10 10 s 1v
2
I JK
1 2
=
1 373.210 664 MeV = 1.154 4 1 189.541 303 MeV
c
2
=
0.900 10 10 s 1  ( 0.960)
2
= 3.214 10 10 s
distance = 0.960 3.00 10 8 m s 3.214 10 10 s = 9.26 cm .
e
je
j
632 *P46.28
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a)
Let Emin be the minimum total energy of the bombarding particle that is needed to induce the reaction. At this energy the product particles all move with the same velocity. The product particles are then equivalent to a single particle having mass equal to the total mass of the product particles, moving with the same velocity as each product particle. By conservation of energy: Emin + m 2 c 2 =
em c j + b p c g
3 2 2 3 2 2 = Emin  m1 c 2
2
. p 3 = p1
(1)
By conservation of momentum: p3 c
b g = bp cg
2 1
e
j.
2
(2)
2 2 2 + Emin  m1 c 2
Substitute (2) in (1): Square both sides:
Emin + m 2 c 2 =
em c j
3 3 2 2
e
j
2
.
2 Emin + 2Emin m 2 c 2 + m 2 c 2
Emin
em =
e
2 3
2 2  m1  m 2 c 2
j
j = em c j
2 2 3
2 + Emin  m1 c 2
e
j
2
2m 2
2
K min = Emin  m1 c
em =
2 2  m1  m 2  2m1 m 2 c 2
j
2m 2
=
2 m 3  m1 + m 2
b
g
2
c2
2m 2
Refer to Table 46.2 for the particle masses. (b) K min = 4 938.3
a
f
2
MeV 2 c 2  2 938.3 2 938.3 MeV c 2
2
e
a
j
f
2
MeV 2 c 2
= 5.63 GeV
(c)
K min
b497.7 + 1 115.6g =
2 938.3 + 135
MeV 2 c 2  139.6 + 938.3 2 938.3 MeV c 2 MeV 2 c 2  2 938.3 2 938.3 MeV c 2
a
f
a
f
2
MeV 2 c 2
= 768 MeV
(d)
K min =
a
f
2
a
f
a
f
2
MeV 2 c 2
= 280 MeV
(e)
K min
LMe91.2 10 j  a938.3 + 938.3f =N 2a938.3f MeV c
3 2
2
MeV 2 c 2
2
OP Q=
4.43 TeV
Chapter 46
633
Section 46.8 Section 46.9 Section 46.10 Section 46.11 P46.29 (a)
Finding Patterns in the Particles Quarks Multicolored Quarks The Standard Model The number of protons
N p = 1 000 g and there are Nn
F 6.02 10 molecules I FG 10 protons IJ = 3.34 10 JK H molecule K GH 18.0 g F 6.02 10 molecules I FG 8 neutrons IJ = 2.68 10 = 1 000 g G JK H molecule K 18.0 g H
23 23
26
protons neutrons .
26
So there are for electric neutrality The up quarks have number and there are (b)
3.34 10 26 electrons .
e j 2 e 2.68 10 j + 3.34 10
26
2 3.34 10 26 + 2.68 10 26 = 9.36 10 26 up quarks
26
= 8.70 10 26 down quarks .
Model yourself as 65 kg of water. Then you contain:
e j ~ 10 65 e9.36 10 j ~ 10 65 e8.70 10 j ~ 10
65 3.34 10 26
26 26
28 29 29
electrons up quarks down quarks .
Only these fundamental particles form your body. You have no strangeness, charm, topness or bottomness. P46.30 (a) strangeness baryon number charge (b) strangeness baryon number charge P46.31 proton 0 1 e neutron 0 1 0 u 0 1/3 2e/3 u 0 1/3 2e/3 u 0 1/3 2e/3 d 0 1/3 e/3 d 0 1/3 e/3 d 0 1/3 e/3 total 0 1 e total 0 1 0
Quark composition of proton = uud and of neutron = udd. Thus, if we neglect binding energies, we may write mp = 2 m u + md and we find m n = m u + 2 md . mu = 1 1 2 m p  m n = 2 938 MeV c 2  939.6 meV c 2 = 312 MeV c 2 3 3 Solving simultaneously,
(1) (2)
e
j
e
j
and from either (1) or (2), md = 314 MeV c 2 .
634 P46.32
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a) strangeness baryon number charge (b) strangeness baryon number charge
K0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
d 0 1/3 e/3 u 0 1/3 2e/3
s
1 1/3 e/3 d 0 1/3 e/3
total 1 0 0 s 1 1/3 e/3 total 1 1 0
P46.33
(a)
 + p K 0 + 0
In terms of constituent quarks: up quarks: down quarks: strange quarks: ud + uud ds + uds 1 + 2 0 + 1, 1 + 1 1 + 1, 0 + 0 1 + 1 , du + uud us + uus 1 + 2 1 + 2, 1 + 1 0 + 0 , 0 + 0 1 + 1 , or or or 33 00 00 or or or 11 22 00
(b)
+ + p K+ + +
up quarks: down quarks: strange quarks:
(c)
K  + p K + + K 0 +  up quarks: down quarks: strange quarks:
us + uud us + ds + sss 1 + 2 1 + 0 + 0 , 0 +1 0 +1+0, 1 + 0 1  1 + 3 , or or or 11 11 11
(d)
p + p K0 + p + + + ?
uud + uud ds + uud + ud + ?
The quark combination of ? must be such as to balance the last equation for up, down, and strange quarks. up quarks: down quarks: strange quarks: 2+ 2 = 0+ 2+1+? 1+1 =1+11+? 0 + 0 = 1 + 0 + 0 + ? (has 1 u quark) (has 1 d quark) (has 1 s quark)
quark composition = uds = 0 or 0 P46.34 In the first reaction,  + p K 0 + 0 , the quarks in the particles are: ud + uud ds + uds . There is a net of 1 up quark both before and after the reaction, a net of 2 down quarks both before and after, and a net of zero strange quarks both before and after. Thus, the reaction conserves the net number of each type of quark. In the second reaction,  + p K 0 + n , the quarks in the particles are: ud + uud ds + uds . In this case, there is a net of 1 up and 2 down quarks before the reaction but a net of 1 up, 3 down, and 1 antistrange quark after the reaction. Thus, the reaction does not conserve the net number of each type of quark.
Chapter 46
635
P46.35
0 + p + + + X
dds + uud uds + 0 + ?
The left side has a net 3d, 2u and 1s. The righthand side has 1d, 1u, and 1s leaving 2d and 1u missing. The unknown particle is a neutron, udd. Baryon and strangeness numbers are conserved. P46.36 Compare the given quark states to the entries in Tables 46.4 and 46.5: (a) (b) (c) (d) P46.37 (a)
suu = + ud =  sd = K 0 ssd = 
uud : charge = 
(b)
udd :
FG 2 eIJ + FG  2 eIJ + FG 1 eIJ =  e . This is the antiproton . H 3 K H 3 K H3 K F 2 I F1 I F1 I charge = G  eJ + G eJ + G eJ = 0 . This is the antineutron . H 3 K H3 K H3 K
Section 46.12 P46.38
The Cosmic Connection fobserver = fsource 1 + va c . 1  va c
Section 39.4 says
The velocity of approach, v a , is the negative of the velocity of mutual recession: v a =  v . Then, 1+ v c 1 v c 1+v c = 1.381 1v c 2.38 v = 0.381 c c
=
1.18 2 = 1+
=
c
1v c 1+v c
and
=
1+v c 1v c
1+ v c . 1 v c
P46.39
(a)
510 nm = 434 nm
v v = 1.381  1.381 c c or
v = 0.160 c (b) v = HR :
v = 0.160 c = 4.80 10 7 m s 4.80 10 7 m s v = = 2.82 10 9 ly H 17 10 3 m s ly
R=
636 P46.40
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a)
n = n
1+
1+ v c = Z + 1 n 1 v c
a
f
1+v c = Z+1 1v c
a
f
2
v = Z+1 c
2
v=
f  FGH v IJK aZ + 1f c F Z + 2Z I cG H Z + 2Z + 2 JK a
2 2
2
FG v IJ eZ H cK
2
+ 2 Z + 2 = Z2 + 2 Z
j
(b)
R=
v c Z 2 + 2Z = H H Z 2 + 2Z + 2
F GH
I JK e1.7 10 H=
2
P46.41
v = HR
ms
j
1+ v c = 590 1.000 113 3 = 590.07 nm 1 v c
ly
(a)
v 2.00 10 6 ly = 3.4 10 4 m s
e e e
j j j
=
b
g
(b)
v 2.00 10 8 ly = 3.4 10 6 m s
= 590
1 + 0.011 33 = 597 nm 1  0.011 33 1 + 0.113 3 = 661 nm 1  0.113 3
(c) P46.42 (a)
v 2.00 10 9 ly = 3.4 10 7 m s Wien's law: Thus,
= 590
maxT = 2.898 10 3 m K . max =
2.898 10 3 m K 2.898 10 3 m K = = 1.06 10 3 m = 1.06 mm T 2.73 K .
(b) *P46.43
This is a microwave .
We suppose that the fireball of the Big Bang is a black body.
I = eT 4 = (1) 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 2.73 K
e
ja
f
4
= 3.15 10 6 W m 2
As a bonus, we can find the current power of direct radiation from the Big Bang in the section of the universe observable to us. If it is fifteen billion years old, the fireball is a perfect sphere of radius fifteen billion light years, centered at the point halfway between your eyes:
P = IA = I ( 4 r 2 ) = 3.15 10 6 W m 2 4 15 10 9 ly P = 7.98 10 47 W .
e
ja fe
F m I j GH 3 110 yr s JK e3.156 10 ly
2 8 2
7
s yr
j
2
Chapter 46
637
P46.44
The density of the Universe is
= 1.20 c = 1.20
F 3H I . GH 8 G JK
2 2 3 2 3
Consider a remote galaxy at distance r. The mass interior to the sphere below it is M=
FG 4 r IJ = 1.20FG 3H IJ FG 4 r IJ = 0.600 H r H 3 K H 8 G K H 3 K G
3
both now and in the future when it has slowed to rest from its current speed v = H r . The energy of this galaxysphere system is constant as the galaxy moves to apogee distance R: 1 GmM GmM =0 mv 2  2 r R 0.100 = 0.600 r R so 1 Gm 0.600 H 2 r 3 Gm 0.600 H 2 r 3 =0 mH 2 r 2  2 r G R G R = 6.00r .
F GH
I JK
F GH
I JK
so
The Universe will expand by a factor of 6.00 from its current dimensions. P46.45 (a)
k B T 2m p c 2
so T 2m p c 2 kB = 2 938.3 MeV
23
e1.38 10
a
a
f F 1.60 10 J I G J J K j H 1 MeV K
13
~ 10 13 K
(b)
k B T 2m e c 2 so T 2 0.511 MeV 2m e c 2 = kB 1.38 10 23 J K
e
f F 1.60 10 J I j GH 1 MeV JK
13
~ 10 10 K
*P46.46
(a)
The Hubble constant is defined in v = HR . The distance R between any two farseparated objects opens at constant speed according to R = v t . Then the time t since the Big Bang is found from v = H vt 1= Ht t= 1 . H
(b)
3 10 8 m s 1 1 = = 1.76 10 10 yr = 17.6 billion years H 17 10 3 m s ly 1 ly yr
F GH
I JK
638 *P46.47
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a)
Consider a sphere around us of radius R large compared to the size of galaxy clusters. If the matter M inside the sphere has the critical density, then a galaxy of mass m at the surface of the sphere is moving just at escape speed v according to K +Ug = 0 1 GMm = 0. mv 2  2 R
The energy of the galaxysphere system is conserved, so this equation is true throughout the dR . Then history of the Universe after the Big Bang, where v = dt
F dR I GH d t JK
R3 / 2 32
2
=
R
2 GM R
T 0
dR = R 1 / 2 2 GM dt 2 3/2 = 2 GM T R 3 T= 2 R3 2 2 = 3 2 GM 3 R 2GM R .
z
R
0
R dR = 2 GM
z
T
0
dt
= 2 GM t
0
From above, so Now Hubble's law says So 2
2GM =v R T= 2R . 3 v 2 R 2 = . 3 HR 3 H 1.18 10 10 yr = 11.8 billion years
v = HR . T=
8
(b) *P46.48
T=
3 17 10 3
e
F 3 10 m s I = G J m s ly j H 1 ly yr K b
In our frame of reference, Hubble's law is exemplified by v 1 = HR 1 and v 2 = HR 2 . From these we may form the equations  v 1 =  HR 1 and v 2  v 1 = H R 2  R 1 . These equations express Hubble's
b
g
law as seen by the observer in the first galaxy cluster, as she looks at us to find  v 1 = H  R 1 and as she looks at cluster two to find v 2  v 1 = H R 2  R 1 .
g
b g
Section 46.13
Problems and Perspectives G = c3
P46.49
(a)
L=
e1.055 10
 34
J s 6.67 10 11 N m 2 kg 2
8
je
e3.00 10
ms
j
3
j=
1.61 10 35 m
(b)
This time is given as T =
L 1.61 10  35 m = = 5.38 10 44 s , c 3.00 10 8 m s
which is approximately equal to the ultrahot epoch. (c) Yes.
Chapter 46
639
Additional Problems P46.50 We find the number N of neutrinos: 10 46 J = N 6 MeV = N 6 1.60 10 13 J N = 1.0 10 58 neutrinos The intensity at our location is N N 1.0 10 58 = = A 4 r 2 4 1.7 10 5 ly
a
f e
j
1 ly
8
e
F G j GH e3.00 10
2 14
m s 3.16 10 7
je
I J sj J K
2
= 3.1 10 14 m 2 .
The number passing through a body presenting 5 000 cm 2 = 0.50 m 2 is then or *P46.51
FG 3.1 10 H
14
1 m2
IJ e0.50 m j = 1.5 10 K
2
~ 10 14 .
A photon travels the distance from the Large Magellanic Cloud to us in 170 000 years. The hypothetical massive neutrino travels the same distance in 170 000 years plus 10 seconds: c 170 000 yr = v 170 000 yr + 10 s 170 000 yr v = = c 170 000 yr + 10 s 1 + 10 s
b
g b
g
1
{
e1.7 10 yrje3.156 10
5
7
s yr
j}
=
1 1 + 1.86 10 12
For the neutrino we want to evaluate mc 2 in E = mc 2 : v2 1 mc = = E 1  2 = 10 MeV 1  c 1 + 1.86 10 12
2
E
e
j
2
= 10 MeV
e1 + 1.86 10 j  1 e1 + 1.86 10 j
12 2 12 2
mc 10 MeV
2
2 1.86 10 12 1
e
j = 10 MeVe1.93 10 j = 19 eV .
6
Then the upper limit on the mass is m= m= 19 eV c2 19 eV c
2
F u GH 931.5 10
6
eV c
2
I = 2.1 10 JK
8
u.
P46.52
(a) (b) (c)
 + p + + 0   +e
p+ ++ +
is forbidden by charge conservation . is forbidden by energy conservation . is forbidden by baryon number conservation .
640 P46.53
Particle Physics and Cosmology
The total energy in neutrinos emitted per second by the Sun is:
a0.4fLMN4 e1.5 10
11 2
j OPQW = 1.1 10
23
W.
Over 10 9 years, the Sun emits 3.6 10 39 J in neutrinos. This represents an annihilated mass m c 2 = 3.6 10 39 J m = 4.0 10 22 kg . About 1 part in 50 000 000 of the Sun's mass, over 10 9 years, has been lost to neutrinos. P46.54 p+p p++ + X We suppose the protons each have 70.4 MeV of kinetic energy. From conservation of momentum for the collision, particle X has zero momentum and thus zero kinetic energy. Conservation of system energy then requires M p c 2 + M c 2 + M X c 2 = M p c 2 + K p + M p c 2 + K p
e
j e
j
M X c 2 = M p c 2 + 2K p  M c 2 = 938.3 MeV + 2 70.4 MeV  139.6 MeV = 939.5 MeV
X must be a neutral baryon of rest energy 939.5 MeV. Thus X is a neutron . *P46.55 (a) If 2N particles are annihilated, the energy released is 2 Nmc 2 . The resulting photon E 2 Nmc 2 = 2 Nmc . Since the momentum of the system is conserved, the momentum is p = = c c rocket will have momentum 2Nmc directed opposite the photon momentum. p = 2 Nmc (b) Consider a particle that is annihilated and gives up its rest energy mc 2 to another particle which also has initial rest energy mc 2 (but no momentum initially).
a
f
e j Thus e 2mc j = p c + emc j .
E 2 = p 2 c 2 + mc 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Where p is the momentum the second particle acquires as a result of the annihilation of the first particle. Thus 4 mc 2
e j
2
= p 2 c 2 + mc 2
e j ,p
2
2
= 3 mc 2
e j . So p =
2
3 mc .
N N protons and antiprotons). Thus the total 2 2 momentum acquired by the ejected particles is 3Nmc , and this momentum is imparted to the rocket. This process is repeated N times (annihilate
p = 3 Nmc
(c) Method (a) produces greater speed since 2 Nmc > 3 Nmc .
Chapter 46
641
P46.56
(a)
Et , and
t =
r 1.4 10 15 m = = 4.7 10 24 s c 3 10 8 m s = 1.055 10 34 J s 1 MeV = 2.3 10 11 J = 1.4 10 2 MeV 4.7 10 24 s 1.60 10 13 J
E m= (b) P46.57
t
e
jFGH
IJ K
E 1.4 10 2 MeV c 2 ~ 10 2 MeV c 2 c2
From Table 46.2, m c 2 = 139.6 MeV a pi  meson . 0 p +  m c 2 = 139.6 MeV
m c 2 = 1115.6 MeV
m p c 2 = 938.3 MeV
The difference between starting rest energy and final rest energy is the kinetic energy of the products. K p + K = 37.7 MeV and p p = p = p
Applying conservation of relativistic energy to the decay process, we have
LM a938.3f N
2
+ p 2 c 2  938.3 +
OP LM a139.6f Q N
2
+ p 2 c 2  139.6 = 37.7 MeV .
OP Q
Solving the algebra yields p c = p p c = 100.4 MeV . Then, Kp = K = P46.58
em c j + a100.4f a139.6f + a100.4f
p 2 2 2
2
 m p c 2 = 5.35 MeV  139.6 = 32.3 MeV . E + m e c 2 = E c 3m e v 1  v2 c2 E E + m e c
2
2
By relativistic energy conservation in the reaction,
3m e c 2 1  v2 c2 . v . c 
.
(1)
By relativistic momentum conservation for the system,
=
(2)
Dividing (2) by (1),
X=
=
Subtracting (2) from (1), Solving, 1 = 3  3X 1 X
2
me c 2 = 4 so E = 4m e c 2 = 2.04 MeV . 5
3m e c 2 1 X2
3m e c 2 X 1 X2
.
and X =
642 P46.59
Particle Physics and Cosmology
Momentum of proton is
qBr = 1.60 10 19 C 0.250 kg C s 1.33 m
e
jb
ga
f
p p = 5.32 10 20 kg m s
Therefore, The total energy of the proton is
c p p = 1.60 10 11 kg m 2 s 2 = 1.60 10 11 J = 99.8 MeV .
p p = 99.8 MeV c .
2 Ep = E0 + cp
b g
2
=
a983.3f + a99.8f
2
2
= 944 MeV .
For pion, the momentum qBr is the same (as it must be from conservation of momentum in a 2particle decay). p = 99.8 MeV c E0 = 139.6 MeV
2 E = E0 + cp
b g
2
=
a139.6f + a99.8f
2
2
= 172 MeV
Thus,
Etotal after = Etotal before = Rest energy . (This is a 0 particle!)
Rest Energy of unknown particle = 944 MeV + 172 MeV = 1 116 MeV
Mass = 1 116 MeV c 2 .
P46.60 0 0 + From Table 46.2, m = 1 192.5 MeV c 2 E0, = Eo , + K + E and m = 1115.6 MeV c 2 . 1 192.5 MeV = 1 115.6 MeV + Conservation of energy in the decay requires
e
j
or
F GH
p 2 + E . 2m
I JK
System momentum conservation gives p = p , so the last result may be written as
2
or Recognizing that we now have Solving this quadratic equation, P46.61 p+p p+ n++
F p I 1 192.5 MeV = G 1 115.6 MeV + J +E 2m K H F p c I 1 192.5 MeV = G 1 115.6 MeV + J +E . 2m c K H
2 2
2
m c 2 = 1 115.6 MeV
and
p c = E 2 1 115.6 MeV
1 192.5 MeV = 1 115.6 MeV + E = 74.4 MeV .
b
E 2
g +E .
The total momentum is zero before the reaction. Thus, all three particles present after the reaction may be at rest and still conserve system momentum. This will be the case when the incident protons have minimum kinetic energy. Under these conditions, conservation of energy for the reaction gives 2 m p c 2 + K p = m p c 2 + mn c 2 + m c 2 so the kinetic energy of each of the incident protons is Kp = mn c 2 + m c 2  m p c 2 2 =
e
j
a939.6 + 139.6  938.3f MeV =
2
70.4 MeV
.
Chapter 46
643
P46.62
  + :
From the conservation laws for the decay,
m c 2 = 139.6 MeV = E + E
and p = p , E = p c : or Since and then Subtracting [3] from [1],
2 E = p c 2 E 2
[1]
2 2
d i + a105.7 MeVf = bp cg + a105.7 MeVf  E = a105.7 MeV f .
2 2 2
[2] [1]
E + E = 139.6 MeV
dE
+ E E  E = 105.7 MeV
id
i a
f
2
[2] [3] E = 29.8 MeV .
E  E
a105.7 MeVf =
139.6 MeV
2
= 80.0 . and
2E = 59.6 MeV
P46.63
The expression e  E k BT dE gives the fraction of the photons that have energy between E and E + dE . The fraction that have energy between E and infinity is
E 0
z z
e  E k BT dE = e  E k BT dE
E 0
z z
e  E k BT  dE k B T e  E k BT  dE k B T
b b
g g
=
e  E k BT e
E  E k BT 0
= e  E k BT .
We require T when this fraction has a value of 0.0100 (i.e., 1.00%) and Thus,
E = 1.00 eV = 1.60 10 19 J .
0.010 0 = e
 1.60 10 19 J
e
j e1.38 10
=
23
JK T
j
or ln 0.010 0 = 
b
g
e1.38 10
1.60 10 19 J
23
JKT
j
1.16 10 4 K giving T = 2.52 10 3 K . T
P46.64
(a)
This diagram represents the annihilation of an electron and an antielectron. From charge and leptonnumber conservation at either vertex, the exchanged particle must be an electron, e  .
(b)
This is the tough one. A neutrino collides with a neutron, changing it into a proton with release of a muon. This is a weak interaction. The exchanged particle has charge +e and is a W + . (a) FIG. P46.64 (b)
644 P46.65
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a)
The mediator of this weak interaction is a
Z 0 boson .
(b) The Feynman diagram shows a down quark and its antiparticle annihilating each other. They can produce a particle carrying energy, momentum, and angular momentum, but zero charge, zero baryon number, and, it may be, no color charge. In this case the product particle is a photon .
FIG. P46.65
For conservation of both energy and momentum in the collision we would expect two photons; but momentum need not be strictly conserved, according to the uncertainty principle, if the photon travels a sufficiently short distance before producing another matterantimatter pair of particles, as shown in Figure P46.65. Depending on the color charges of the d and d quarks, the ephemeral particle could also be a gluon , as suggested in the discussion of Figure 46.14(b). *P46.66 (a) At threshold, we consider a photon and a proton colliding headon to produce a proton and a pion at rest, according to p + p + 0 . Energy conservation gives mp c 2 1u c
2 2
+ E = m p c 2 + m c 2 . m pu 1u
2
Momentum conservation gives
c
2

E c
= 0.
Combining the equations, we have mp c 2 1u
2
c
2
+
938.3 MeV 1 + u c
b1  u cgb1 + u cg
b
u = m p c 2 + m c 2 c 1u c
2 2
mp c 2
g = 938.3 MeV + 135.0 MeV
so and (b)
u = 0.134 c E = 127 MeV .
maxT = 2.898 mm K max =
2.898 mm K = 1.06 mm 2.73 K hc = 1 240 eV 10 9 m 1.06 10 3 m = 1.17 10 3 eV
(c)
E = hf =
continued on next page
Chapter 46
645
(d)
In the primed reference frame, the proton is moving to the right at
u = 0.134 and the c photon is moving to the left with hf = 1.27 10 8 eV . In the unprimed frame, hf = 1.17 10 3 eV . Using the Doppler effect equation from Section 39.4, we have for the speed of the primed frame 1.27 10 8 = 1+ c 1.17 10 3 1  c
v = 1  1.71 10 22 c Then the speed of the proton is given by 0.134 + 1  1.71 10 22 u u c + c = = = 1  1.30 10 22 . 2 22 c 1 + u c 1 + 0.134 1  1.71 10
e
j
And the energy of the proton is mp c 2 1u
2
c
2
=
938.3 MeV 1  1  1.30 10
e
22 2
j
= 6.19 10 10 938.3 10 6 eV = 5.81 10 19 eV .
ANSWERS TO EVEN PROBLEMS
P46.2 P46.4 P46.6 P46.8 P46.10 P46.12 2.27 10 23 Hz ; 1.32 fm P46.22 (a) electron lepton number and muon lepton number; (b) electron lepton number; (c) strangeness and charge; (d) baryon number; (e) strangeness see the solution 686 MeV 200 MeV and ; c c (b) 627 MeV c ; (c) 244 MeV , 1 130 MeV , 1 370 MeV ; (a) (d) 1 190 MeV c 2 , 0.500 c P46.28 P46.30 P46.32 P46.34 P46.36 P46.38 (a) see the solution; (b) 5.63 GeV ; (c) 768 MeV ; (d) 280 MeV ; (e) 4.43 TeV see the solution see the solution see the solution (a) + ; (b)  ; (c) K 0 ; (d)  see the solution
and e
~ 10 16 m ~ 10 23 s P46.24 P46.26
(a) electron lepton number and muon lepton number; (b) charge; (c) baryon number; (d) baryon number; (e) charge the second violates conservation of baryon number 0.828 c (a) see the solution; 469 MeV for both; (b) 469 MeV ; c (c) 0.999 999 4c see the solution
P46.14 P46.16 P46.18
P46.20
646 P46.40 P46.42 P46.44 P46.46 P46.48 P46.50 P46.52 P46.54
Particle Physics and Cosmology
(a) v = c
F Z + 2Z I ; (b) c F Z + 2Z I GH Z + 2Z + 2 JK H GH Z + 2Z + 2 JK
2 2 2 2
P46.56 P46.58 P46.60 P46.62 P46.64
(a) ~ 10 2 MeV c 2 ; (b) a pi  meson 2.04 MeV 74.4 MeV 29.8 MeV (a) electronposition annihilation; e  ; (b) a neutrino collides with a neutron, producing a proton and a muon; W + (a) 127 MeV ; (b) 1.06 mm; (c) 1.17 meV ; (d) 5.81 10 19 eV
(a) 1.06 mm; (b) microwave 6.00 (a) see the solution; (b) 17.6 Gyr see the solution ~ 10 14 (a) charge; (b) energy; (c) baryon number neutron
P46.66